India thether but also by the Peguans themselues whereof many dwell in India some of them being Christians which tell it and confesse it for a truth as also the neerenesse of place and neighbourhood maketh it sufficiently knowne The people of Aracan Pegu and Sian are in forme manner and visage much like those of China onely one difference they haue which is that they are somewhat whiter then the Bengalon and somewhat browner then the men of China The pictures songs after their manner whereby they are wondred at which maketh them proude and hee that dwelleth in India and can not speake the Malayans speach wil hardly with vs learne the French tongue their forme and figures are heere set downe together with those of the Ilands of Iaua whereof hereafter we will speake more The 19. Chapter Of the Iland of Sumatra in times past called Taprobana SVMATRA INSVLA RIght ouer against Malacca Southeast about 20. miles from the firme land by Malacca wher the straight is at the narrowest lieth the â—amous Ilande of Taprobana now called Sumatra by some Historiographers named Chersoneâ—o Aurea others affirme it to be Ophir from whence Salomon had his Golde as the Scripture rehearseth and say that in times past it was firme land and ioyned vnto the Countrie of Malacca The Iland beginneth from the first pointe which lyeth right against the Gulfe of Bengala vnder fiue degrees on the North side and stretcheth also before Malacca South Southeast vntill it passeth by the Iland called Iaua Maior where it endeth vnder 6. degrées on the South side and is in length 170 miles and in breadth 60. miles The Portingals dwell not therein in any place but deale and trafique in some places thereof yet very few for that the inhabitants themselues doe bring many of their commodities vnto Malacca Malachae incolae sermone et moribus quam reliqui Indi cultioribus et magis comes In woonders van Mallacka welcke alle andere Indianen in taele courtosije en amoreushcÿt te boven gaen Insulanus e Iava gens durae cervicis Een cÿlander wt â—ava welcks volck is hart neckich en opstinaet The Iland is very rich of mynes of Gold Siluer Brasse whereof they make greate Ordinance precious stones and other mettall of all kinde of Spices sweete woode rootes and other medicinable Herbes and Drugges it hath a hill of Brimstone that burneth continually and they saye there is a fountaine which runneth pure simple Balsame it hath likewise great store of Silke At the last besieging and troubles of Malacca the Kinge of Acheijn sent a péece of Ordinance such as for greatnes length and workmanship the like is hardly to bee found in all Christendome which hee gaue in marriage with his daughter to the King of Ior a town lying by Malacca vpon the coast of Sian but this péece with his daughter were taken vpon the way by the Portingals and brought into Malacca which péece was after laden in the Ship that sayleth euery yeare from Malacca to Portingale and sent vnto the King for a present being so heauie that they were forced to lay it in the Balast of the ship The same péece lyeth at this present in the I le of Tarcera because the said shippe stayed there being in our companie as I returned out of India also the Towne of Ior vpon the same occasion was by the Portingals besieged and at the last wonne and by them rased to the ground and for euer made wast wherin they found about 150. Brasse péeces smal great some of them beeing no greater then a Musket and some greater and so of all sorts verie cunningly wrought with Flowers and personages which I haue purposely set down to let you know that they haue other kindes of Mettals and know howe to handle them But returning to our matter There are some places in this Iland where the Portingales doe traffique which are those that vse to traffique to Malacca as a Towne called Pedir which lyeth 20. miles from Achejin vppon the coast right ouer against Malacca from whence commeth much Pepper and Golde from an other place called Campar which lyeth almost vnder the Equinoctiall line vppon the corner on the South side on the same side on the West coast of the Iland lyeth a place called Manancabo where they make Poinyards which in India are called Cryses which are very well accounted and estéemed of and is thought the best weapon in all the Orient whereof those of Iaua Malacca do make gret prouision for theÌ„selus The 20. Chapter Of the Iland of Iaua Maior with their wares Marchandises and trades waights myntes and prices thereof with other particularities IAVA MAIOR SOuth Southeast right ouer against the last point or corner of the I le of Sumatra on the south side of the Equinoctiall line lyeth the Iland called Iaua Maior or great Iaua where there is a straight or narrow passage betweene Sumatra and Iaua called the straight of Sunda of a place so called lying not far from thence within the I le of Iaua this Iland beginneth vnder â— degrées on the south side and runneth east and by south 150 miles long but touching the breadth it is not found because as yet it is not discouered nor by the Inhabitants themselues well knowne Some thinke it to be firme land and parcell of the countrie called Terra incognita which being so shoulde reach from that place to the Cape de Bona speraÌ„ce but as yet it is not certainly known therefore it is accouÌ„ted for an Iland the inhabitants say that within the land there is a Riuer wherin if any wood doth fal it turneth into stone Through this straight or narrowe passage Thomas Candish an Inglish captaine passed with his Ship as he came out of the south parts from Noua Spaigne This Iland aboundeth with Rice and all manner of victuals as oxen kyne hogges shéepe and hennes c. also Onyons Garlicke Indian nuttes and with al kind of Spices as cloues Nutmegges and mace which they carry vnto Malacca The principall hauen in the Iland is Sunda Calapa whereof the straight beareth the name in this place of SuÌ„da there is much Pepper and it is better then that of India or Malabar wherof there is so great quantitie that they could lade yearlie from thence 4 or 5 thousand kintales Portingale waight it hath likewise much frankinsence Beniom of Bonien called Folie Camphora as also Diamantes to which place meÌ„ might very well traffique without any impeachment for that the Portingales come not thether because great numbers of Iaua come themselues vnto Malacca to sell their wares And although it be besyde the matter yet doe I not esteeme it vnnecessary in briefe to shewe in what sort they vse to buy sell and deall with ware money and waight seing we are now in hand with the said Iland of Iaua You must vnderstand that in Sunda there is no other kind of money then certaine copper mynt called
vsed by them but are rather kept short so that not one soldier dareth goe out of the towne without licence and therefore men may quyetlie trauell throughout the Iland both day and night without any trouble Likewise they will not suffer any stranger to trauel to sée the Country and this order was not brought vp by the Spaniards but by the Portingals themselues before their troubles for they would neuer permit it and which is more all strangers that came thether were vsually appointed a certain street wherin they should sel their wares and might not goe out of that stréet Now it is not so straightlie looked vnto but they may goe in all places of the towne within the Iland but not about it to view the coast which notwithstanding was graunted vnto vs by the Gouernor himself who lent vs his horses to ryde about and gaue vs leaue to sée all the fortes which at this time is not permitted to the naturall borne Ilanders neyther are they so much credited We road twice about the Iland which he granted vs leaue to doe by meanes of certaine particular friendship we had with him neyther could the Portingales hinder vs therein because wee were in the Kinges seruice as Factors for the Kinges Pepper and for that they held and accounted vs as naturall borne Portingalles for the Gouernor would willinglie haue had mee to haue drawne a plot of the whole Iland that hee might haue sent it to the King wherein I excused my self yet I made him the town with the Hauen coming in and Fortes of Angra which he sent vnto the King the like whereof you may in this Booke behold for the which the Gouernor was greatlie affected vnto mee and shewed mee much friendshippe Wee had in our Lodging a French Marchant and a Scot that willinglie would haue gone with vs to sée the Iland but could not be suffered for the Portingalles thinke that they would take the proportion thereof and so seeke to defeate them of their right But returning to our matter the Ilandes are verie good and holesome ayre and the diseases that are most common in those Countries though not verie plentiful but only here there one are one sicknes called O Ax that is a kind of bad ayre y t taketh them maketh them altogether lame or half lame of their limmes or of some one limme and an other sicknes that is called O Sange that is a certaine blood that hastelie cometh vppon a man as a swelling in the eyes or other places of the face or of the bodie is as red as blood for as they say it is nothing els but méere blood these are two diseases like the plague and are commonest sicknesses in those Countries which grow by reason of the great windines of the Ilandes that are subiect to all stormes and foule weathers and are vnreasonable moyst which is one of the principall causes of these diseases for the windes are there so strong and dangerous that they consume both the Iron and the Steele of their houses and bring them into powder for I haue seene Iron grates in the Kings Custome house as thicke as a mans arme and the windowes of hard free stone which were so consumed by the wind that the Iron in some places was become as thynne as a straw and the stone in like sort and therefore in those Countries they vse to make their Rooffes and painthouses of stones which they digge in the water out of sandes vppon the Sea coast of those Illandes whereon the wind hath not so great a power to consume it and yet that Custome house had not bene made aboue 6 or 7 yeares before at the most In this Iland besides the two townes there are diuers great villages as S. Sebastians S. Barboran Altares Gualua Villa noua with manie other parishes and hamlets so that for the most part it is built and inhabited sauing onely the places that are wild and full of woods which can hardlie bee trauelled much lesse inhabited Their most traffique is as I said before the wood that groweth in those countries I meane for such as deale in marchandise and the workemen that make it but the rest waight for the fleets that come and goe to and from the Spanish and Portingall Indies from Brasilia Cabo Verde and Guinea all which countries doe commonly come vnto Tercera to refresh themselues as lying very fitly for that purpose so that all the inhabitants doe thereby richlie maintaine themselues and sell at their wares as well handie works as victuals vnto those shippes and all the Ilandes round about doe as then come vnto Tercera with their wares to sell it there For the which cause the English men and other strangers keepe continually about those Ilandes béeing assured that all shippes for want of refreshing must of force put into those Ilandes although at this time manie shippes doe auoid those Ilandes to the great discommoditie of the Ilands and the shippes From Tercera Southeast about 27. or 28. miles lyeth the Iland of S. Michael which is about 20 myles long and is likewise full of Townes and Villages inhabited by Portingalles for ayre and all other thinges like vnto Tercera The chief Towne is called Punta del Gada where there is great traffique of English Scots and French men onlie as in Tercera because of the woad which is more abundant in that Ilande then in all the rest of them for that euerie yeare there is made aboue two hundreth thousand Quintalles of Woad It hath likewise great abundance of Corne so that they helpe to victuall all the Ilandes that are round about them It hath neither Hauens nor Riuers but onlie the broad sea and haue lesse safegard and defence then those which are of Tercera but there they ly not vnder the commandement of any Fort so that many set sayle with all the windes and put to sea which in the road of Tercera they may not doe and therefore the strangers shippes had rather sayle to S. Michaels for there they can not be constrayned to doe anie thing but what they will themselues to doe There is also a company of Spaniards in a Castle that standeth by the Towne of Punta del Gada which is made by the Spaniards for the defence and maintenance of the same towne From the Iland of S. Michaels Southwardes twelue myles lyeth the Island Santa Maria which is about ten or twelue myles compasse and hath no traffique but onlie of pot earth which the other Ilands fetch from thence It hath no Woad but is full of all victualles like Tercera and inhabited by the Portingales There are no Spaniardes in it because it is a stonie Countrie like Tercera and hard to bord whereby the inhabitantes themselues are sufficient and able enough to defend it While I remained in Tercera the Earle of Comberland came thether to take in fresh water and some other victuals but the inhabitants would not suffer him to haue it but
according to their manner and after many other wordes hee willed them to bring some Iron saying they should haue teeth for it which hauing done he brought forth his teeth This riuer as I saide is verie broad and full of Crocodiles and sea horses it hath many creekes and as they sailed from Crementun it lyeth Southeast where in the night they lauered 2. or 3. houres and came twice on ground and â—â— sayling forwardes they passed by an Island called Caraceâ—â—bo lying in the mouth of the riuer as there are many being verie low and flat land and ful of trees From that Island there came a Caâ—utien aboord their ship and in it eighteene persons and with them they had a smal drum of a hollow stocke whereon they played and being by the ship foure or fiue of them stept in whereof one of them vppon his face breast and armes was al white he bore a greene branch of a tree with a little bel and some whiting in his hand which hee strowed about the ship ringing the bel when they or any of our men spake hee made shewe as it were to consecrate and blesse the ship which done sirting downe and stammering in his words like a man possessed with some sprite or one that had a shaking feuer There was a great pot of Palme wine brought forth whereof they dranke one vnto the other which continued for the space of halfe an houre which done they went into their scâ—te rowed to land making signes to our men to come on shore and to barter with them for their wares which they did carrying them some Iron and other marchandise and went into the gouernors house being in a village where among other things they saw a little cottage about three foote high couered with straw and opeÌ„ on the side vnder the which stood a little gibet wheron hung a little horne with certaine stuffe therein which they would not lette them see by no meanes and vnder the gibet stood a staffe with a dead childes scul fixed vpon it hauing in the one eye a bone much like the bone that is founde in the head of a â—addocke whereof with vs they make horses bridles and collars for degs at the foote of the staff lay al sorts of bones both of fishes and beasts and among the rest the â—awes of a Prisâ—â— which in our countrey is called a sword fish without teeth which the master tooke away brought it vnto me our men asking what y t might signifie they said there lay a dead carcas and being in another village as they passed forwarde they sawe at the least twentie men sitting at the doore of one of their houses whereof some seemed to bee of the principal commanders and within that house there was a noyse of singing both by great and smal that it made them muse whereupon they asked what it meant they saide there was one dead The women being in trauel are not any thing ashamed but euery one both yong and old men and women run vnto her the doore standing wide open but one thing is to be wondered at that the children are al circumcised and yet they haue neither law order nor knowledge of God The countrey is fruitful and ful of al strange fruites and abounding in al kinds of beasts and birds of diners formes both great and smal There are some trees where vpon one branch there hang at the least 100. birdes nests altogether most pleasant to behold They hang by certaine strawes made fast vnto the boughes because snakes should not creepe in and suck their egges many of those nests were brought vnto me This shall suffice for the discription of the coast of Guinea after the which followeth the mightie kingdome of Congo The ancient writers helde opinion that this lande was not inhabited calling it Torriâ—â—am Zonam that is a place in the earth that through the heate of the sunne is burnt vp but they were altogether deceiued for as Odoardus Lopez a Portingale witnesseth hauing with many other Portingales long time inhabited therein There is good dwelling and the aire coÌ„trarie to al mens iudgements very temperate and that in winter there is no extreame cold but onely such weather as it is in haruest time at Rome They vse no linings nor shirte bandes nor change of clothes neither care they for the fire it is likewise no colder on the tops of the hilles then in the vallies but generally it is warmer with them in the winter then in the summer onely because of the continual raines specially about the middle of the day two houres before and as much after dinner which heat is very euill for our meÌ„ to endure The people of the countrie are black but part of the women fear what â—â—llow their haire for the most part is blacke and curled and some haue red haire they are of a mean stature therin not much vnlike the Portingales the balles of theyr eyes being of diuers colours blacke and sea colour their lips not so thicke as those of Nâ—bâ—a other Moores their faces of al proportions fat leane and indifferent betweene both like the Portingales and not like other Moores of Guinea that are foule and deformed The length of the day and night is in a maâ—er al one for that it differeth not one quarter of an houre to anie mans iudgement throughout the whole yeare their winter beginneth in our lent about the middle of March and their summer in the middle of September â— in winter it raigneth there continually for the space of fiue moneths that is Aprill May Iune Iuly August in which time there are but few faire daies and there the raine falleth in such great drops that it is wonderful which water is al dronke vp into the earth with the drienesse of the land in summer time wherein it raineth scarce once in sixe moneths with the raine likewise the riuer is filled with thick muddie water so that it floweth ouer the banks and moystneth the ground The windes that in summer doo continually blow in those countries are as Hippocrates and after him Iulius the first emperor of Rome naming them with a greek name Eâ—esâ—oâ— Northwest by the Portingales called Venâ—o Maestro or general wiâ—d as being ordinarie at that time of the yeare in all those countries which are likewise causes of the raines by driuing vp of mâ—stes and vapors vppon the tops of the hils which being there and resoluing into water doo fil the earth with raine and those continual raines are likewise causes of the growing and increasing of the great riuers that are in Egypt and Ethiopia as Niger and Nylus and al the riuers there abouts some running into the Mediterranean others into y e great Ocean seas by reason of their slime fattines and because in our sumer which is their winter for the most part it raineth throughout the countryes of Congo and Ethiopia it is not to be wondered at if the riuers be greater
with the wales but returning again vnto the coast the hauen of â—xillo lyeth vnder seauen degrees â— and from thence you saile to the hauen of Goanape which lyeth full fiue miles from the towne of â—xâ—lo vnder eight degrees and â— and somewhat further southward lyeth the hauen 〈◊〉 or holie where the shippes put in by it there is a great riuer and a very good water all this coast is without hilles and as I saide before sandy and chalkie vallies This hauen of Porto Santa lyeth vnder nine degrees and further southward about foure miles distant lieth another hauen called Ferrol a very good and sure hauen but hath neyther fresh water nor wood to burne and about foure miles and a halfe further there lyeth a hauen called Casina where there is a Riuer of fresh water and much woodde to burne where the shippes doe ordinarilye refresh themselues it lyeth vnder tenne degrees From Casma the coast runneth south to the cliffes called Los Farollones di Guaura A little further lieth Guarmey wherein runneth a riuer and from thence you sayle the same course to the Barranca or Downes which is fifteene miles towardes the south and foure miles and one halfe further lieth the hauen of Guaura where the shippes may take in as much salt as they will for there is so much that all Spaine and Italie might be furnished with salt from thence and yet they woulde haue sufficient for the country three miles further lie the Cliffes or Farrollones From this poynt which â—utteth out of the land with the same northeast and southweast course you saile sixe miles further to the furthest cliffe that lyeth into the sea These Cliffes lie vnder eight degrées and one halfe from thence the coast turneth againe southeast till you come to the Island of Lyma in the middle way and somewhat more towards Lyma lieth a rocke which is called Salmarina and is vnder seuen or seuen degrées and a halfe This land maketh a barre of defence before Callao which is the hauen of the Towne of Kings or of Lyma and by this defence from the Island the hauen is very safe for the shippes to harbour in Callao lieth vnder twelue degrees and a halfe The way by land from Truxillo to Lima. THe towne of Truxillo lyeth distant from Lima sixtie spanish miles which is 48. duch miles or 240. Italian miles all the which way is sandie vnlesse it be when you passe certaine vallies Now when you set out of Truxillo you come first to the valie of Guâ—nape which is full fiue Spanish miles from thence that is 21. Italian miles which in times past was wel known because of the good drinke called Cica that was made ther no lesse then in Italy Mente Frascon and in Spaine S. Martin are esteemed for the good wines that are there to be solde and this vallie is inhabited and watered as the rest are it hath a verie good hauen where the shippes take in all theyr prouision from thence you come to a little valley where no riuer runneth through but it hath a small water where those of Peru and other trauailers vse to drinke and going further you come to the vallie of Santa which in time past was verie populous and had in it many braue souldiours and captaines for commanders which held stoutly against the Kings of Peru so that they were forced to ouercome them more by pollicie then force they were likewise much esteemed of by their kings that caused many houses pallaces to be built therin as being one of the greatest and biggest vallies in those countries and through it there runneth a verie strong and great riuer which is verie full and high when it is winter in the hilles wherein also were manie Spaniards drownde Nowe they haue a drift to set ouer their passengers therein in time past there dwelt many thousand people nowe there are not aboue 400. left They go apparrelled both men and women with certain maÌ„tles and shirts with bands or rolles about their heades all kindes of fruites both of that countrey and such as are brought out of Spaine do grow therein in great aboundance There likewise they take much fish the shippes that saile along the coast do there take in fresh water and other prouisions two daies iourney from thence lieth another vallie called Guambacâ—o for fruitfulnes other things like vnto the rest about a daies iourney and a halfe further lyeth the valley of Guarmey wherin are many beasts cowes hogs and horses from thence you go to Parmongo no lesse pleasant then the former in it are yet seene certaine faire castles built after theyr manner wherein vpon the walles are painted the Images of certaine beastes and birdes and it is to be wondered at howe they make the water runne out of the riuer so farre into the land whereby it moystneth all the countrey a mile and a halfe from the vallie lieth the riuer Guaman which in our speech signifieth the riuer of the fields and is by them called Barranca which vallie is like all the rest and when it raineth much in the hilles this riuer is verie dangerous A dayes iourney from thence lyeth the vallie of Guaura from the which you go to Lima the vallie wherin it lyeth is the greatest and broadest of all that are betweene it and Tumbez and as it is greatest so was it verie populous wherof at this time there are few left for when the towne began to be inhabited the inhabitants of the towne tooke the countrey and land from those that dwelt in the vallie who after that were likewise destroyed and cleane rooted out This towne next vnto Cusco is the greatest in all the countrey of Peru and the principall for that at this present the Viceroyes of Peru the Archbishop the Councell and the Chancerie wherein all processes are sued and the lawes of the whole countrie administred are resident therein whereby there is great traffike and concourse vnto Lyma because many people come thither out of the townes lying about it In this towne are faire houses some built with Towers and costly galleries the Market place is great and the streetes broade and entring into the market place from whence also you may goe into euerie place of the towne and to the fieldes and into most of the houses there runneth certain channels that conuay water a great commoditie and pleasure vnto the townesmen wherewith they may water all their gardens and orchards which are there verie faire and pleasant vpon the riuer likewise are many water milles made after the manner of our countrey wherewith they grinde theyr corne to conclude therein dwelleth manie rich inhabitants some worth 150000. duckets and from this towne oftentimes there saileth shippes that are worth in value at the least 800000. duckets and some a Million on the east side a little aboue the town lyeth a high hill whereon there standeth a Cruâ—â—fix on another side of the towne the townsmen haue certaine places
of her burthen These beastes are verie profitable and necessary no lesse then Cammels in Egypt Affrica and are fedde with a little Maiz and other meate specially those that they vse to ride vpon to labor and to carry burthens They goe likewise as Cammels doo foure or fiue dayes together without drinking and but little meate some of them called Pachos haue verie fine wool with long fleeces wiâ—h verie good holsome and sauorie flesh like our gammons of Bacon The hauen of Chile or S. Iacomo lieth vnder 32. degrees and 2 â— parts sayling further along the coast in the same course you come to the riuer of Calma distant from Chile eighteene miles it is here also to be considered that all the coast from Tumbez to this place is verie good to sayle by and a calme sea without tempestes or foule weather whereby the shippes may lye at anker where they think good Nine miles from Calma you see the poynt of the riuer called Manque or Mâ—ule in our card Maole and ten miles and a half further there is another riuer called Iâ—ata in our Carde Rio Tatuâ—a and so sailing south and southwest eighteene miles there is another called Biobio lying almost vnder eight and thirtie degrees in the same course kéeping along the shore full eleuen miles distant there is a great Island about foure miles distant from the firme land caled Lucengo and somwhat further beyond this Island is a great broad créeke called Valdiuia in our carde La Baldibia wherein there runneth a great riuer caled Ayntlendo in our Carde Rio Aymlendos this Créeke lieth vnder 39. degrées and â…” Following the same course further by the shore to south southwest you come to the Cape S. Maria lying vnder 42. degrées and 1 â— towards the south and from as the Pilots report the coast reacheth southâ—â—st to the straits of Magellana and betweene them lie many hauens and places needlesse to rehearse as being noted in the carde inwarde in the land there is the Countrey of Patagonen wherein there are Giantes of nine and of tenne foot high that paint their faces with diuerse colours made of hearbs pressing out the sap And heerewith making an end for the rest I referre the Reader to the Carde The end of the second booke THE THIRDE BOOKE The Nauigation of the Portingales into the East Indies containing their trauels by Sea into East India and from the East Indies into Portingall also from the Portingall Indies to Malacca China Iapon the Ilands of Iaua and Sunda both to and fro and from China to the Spanish Indies and from thence backe againe to China as also of al the coast of Brasilia and the Hauens thereof With a description of the Firme land and the Ilands of the Spanish Indies lying before it called Antillas together with the Nauigation of Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues to Angola in the coast of Ethiopia with all the courses Hauens Ilands Depthes Shallowes Sands Drougths Riffes and Cliffes with their situations also the times of the yeares when the winds blow with the true tokens and knowledge of the tides and the weather water and streames in all the Orientall coasts and Hauens as they are obserued and set downe by the Kings Pilots in their continuall and dayly Viages Translated out of Dutch by W. P. IEHOVA I Wolfe excu W Rogers sculp LONDON Printed by John VVolfe 1598. The third Booke The Nauigation of the Portingales into the East Indies containing their trauels by Sea into East India and from the East Indies into Portingall also from the Portingall Indies to Malacca China Iapon the Ilands of Iaua and Sunda both to and fro and from China to the Spanish Indies and from thence backe againe to China as also of all the coast of Brasilia and the Hauens thereof With a description of the Firme land and the Ilands of the Spanish Indies lying before it called Antillas together with the Nauigation of Cabo de Lope Gonsalues to Angola in the coast of Ethiopia With all the courses Hauens Ilands depthes shallowes Sands drougthes Riffes and Cliffes with their situations Also the times of the yeares when the winds blow with the true tokens and knowledge of the tydes and the weather water and stormes in all the Orientall coastes and Hauens as they are obserued and set downe by the Kings Pilotes in their continuall and dayly Viages THE I. CHAPTER Of the courses and Viages of the Portingales into the East Indies FIrst you must vnderstand that all Christendome lyeth on the North side of the Equinoctiall line and Lisbone vnder thirtie nine degrées and a halfe and lyeth with the Iland of Madera Northeast southwest the Viage being 172 Spanish miles and Madera lyeth vnder 32 degrées and is distant from the Iland la Palma which the shippes sayling to India may easily perceiue 63. miles The Iland la Palma lyeth vnder 28. degrées ¼ from thence you must sayle Southward as long as time will permit for commonly when you come vnder fiue or sixe degrées you find south eastwardes and then you must saile southwest as much as you can vntill you passe the cape of S. Agustine which lieth vnder 8 degrees ½ on the south side that is vpon the coast of Brasilia from the Ilande la Palma to this Cape of Saint Augustine are 900. miles the course lying Northeast and southwest when you are past the point you must sayle Southwest because the winde is there commonly south and southeast and from the Ilands of Tristan da Cunlia lying vnder 34. degrées on the south side of the Equinoctial you must hold southwest and when you thinke you haue passed these Ilands you must sayle till you come vnder 36. degrées and kéepe Eastward vntill you haue passed the Cape de Bona Speranza and then you must holde Northeast towardes the land and hauing knowne the land according to the place you then haue knowne you shall set your course to Mosambique or outward about the Iland of Saint Laurence from the Cape of Saint Austine to the Cape de Bona Speranza are 1060. miles which Cape de Bona Speranza lyeth full vnder 34 degrées and a halfe on the south side of the Equinoctiall and is East southeast and West Northwest with the Cape Das Agulhas which is 32. miles and Cape das Agulhas is full vnder 35. degrées lying with the Cape do Infante East and West and somewhat East and by North and West and by South the course is 26. miles Cabo do Infante is vnder 34. degrées and 2 â— and lyeth with the Cape Talhado East Northeast and West Southwest 19. miles Cabo Talhado is vnder 34 degrées lyeth with Bahija Fermosa East and West 1â— miles Bahija Fermosa is vnder the same hight of Cabo Talhado and lyeth with the Ilands Chanos East northeast and West Southwest 37. miles and with the first point called Punta Primiera Northeast and Southwest and somewhat Northeast and by East and southwest by West the course is 50.
winde comming most out of the northwest and north which letteth you from sayling northwest and being to Seaward you shal rather haue a northeast wind and although you haue many meanes to kéepe you from going close vnder the coast of Guinea I set this downe here because I haue noted it my selfe for that all the ships in what course soeuer they be which presently winde themselues to kéepe aloofe from the coast of Guinea being in the course of Sargosso they haue no full winde but onelie northeast windes and sometimes calmes which sailing to lee ward you find not where you haue the winde east and east southeast All the shippes that come from the Antilhas or Spanish Ilandes the scarsest windes that they finde are out of the East whereby you may vnderstand that when you hold farre off from Guinea it is no cause of hauing a longer Voyage but you shall the sooner finde a better and fuller winde and so when you come vnder twentie degrees and that the compasse keepeth steedie to twentie fiue degrees then you are not to lee ward there you beginne to sée the hearbe Sargosso whereby that hearbe is called Sargosso and make no reckning of being too loofeward or too léeward for there is no certaintie thereof so when you saile north and northeast and that the néedle of the compasse lieth not north westward thē be wel assured that the Iland Flores is right before you continuing so till you come to the Iland of Fayael which is one of the Flemmish Ilands called as Ilhas dos Alcores The compasse that within S. Helena was full halfe a strike Northeastward will be full if you marke it well and when you come vnder thirtie sire or thirtie nine degrees and ⅓ then you shall see the Iland Flores with some Torteaur in the water and being fortie miles from the Iland Flores towardes the coast then you shall sée the birdes Garagiaus and Duckers and the compasse will in a manner be euen and if there be any difference it will bee somewhat northeastward for from the Iland Flores to the Iland Fayael the compasse is full as six as I said before The 8. Chapter The course and Nauigation from India to the Cape de Bona Speranza set downe by another Portingall Pilot. WHEN you depart from Cochiin to sayle for Portingall you must doe your best to get vnder tenne degrees and a halfe till you be 50. miles West south west from it whereby you will bee scarse vnder 10. degrées vnder the which hight lyeth the Ilands Mamales for the streame will alwaies drawe you to the middle of the Channel betwéene these Ilands and the Ilands of Maldiua vnder 9. degrées a halfe you must passe full forward without séeing any of those Ilands and go shoare vnder 9. degrées a quarter although in the Cards they place many false Ilands And if you chaunce to set sayle from Cochin the 20. of Ianuarie little more or lesse then run so that you may passe the Ilands on the southwest and southwest and by south vntill you bee vnder the Equinoctial line because you go late to sayle and it may be that the wind and weather wil not serue you so well to holde to Sea ward from the Iland of Brandaon then you may hold your course betwéene the Ilands called Dos Irmaos lying vnder 4. degrées on the south and from thence you must take your course to the Ilands of Pedro Mascharenhas and so following your way if it chaunce being vnder 4. degrées southward you haue much thunder lightning and rayne because commonly it is found there in the moneth of Februarie as I my selfe haue tryed vntill 14. degrées then doe your best to get vnder 14. or 15. degrées for commonly vnder 15 or 16. degrées you shall find southeast winds and then put no further into the Sea but passe betweene the Iland Brandaon and the Iland of Lopo Soares which is a good course and as soone as you are past the Iland then take your course by the Iland of Ioan de Lisboa betwéene the which Iland and the Iland of Pedro Mascherenhas you haue a good way so that you come to passe 14. or 15 miles from the Iland of Saint Laurence from thence set your course West southwest till you come vnder 29. degrées and then run West and West and by South to 34. degrées or as farre as you will by this course running in this sort comming within 50. or 6◠miles of the land called Terra do Natal you shall see many Birdes and the more it stormeth is foule weather the more Birds you shall see and if you see many then be assured you are farre from the land and when you loose the sight of them then looke well to your selfe for the closer you are by the land you loose the sight of them altogether vnlesse it bee the blacke Rauens with white billes the neerer you are to the land the more you shall see of them although they are likewise seene at the least 20. miles from the shore but feare not when you begin to come to the Iland of S. Laurence but hold the course abouesaid and when you beginne to discouer the mouth of the Chanel betweene Saint Laurence and Mosambique then you presently find the runing of the streame towards the Cape de Bona Speranza and feare not in that country to hold your course southwest for commonly after you haue the wind south and as much as you haue runne west Northwest so much you haue furthered your way but take heede you keepe still from the coast and so you will make a better Viage for the streame will driue you to the Cape although the wind helpeth you not and this is to bee vnderstoode that when you come late from Cochin you shall alwaies thereabout finde great West windes also you must know that in March and Aprill all the way from the furthest point of Saint Laurence to the Cape commonly there bloweth North and Northeast winds and if for a day or two it bloweth out of the Southeast or South it is a great wonder therefore make no account of it for at those times they blowe verie seldome in all the way aforesaide to the Cape and the néerer you come to the Cape you find the more northerly windes but when the North wind commeth mist and fléet then be sure of West windes for it is the nature of them in those countries and you must vnderstand that if you arriue in those countries in a Schrickel yeare for they are much more dangerous then other years because the coniunction of the heauenly Planets and bodies as then are different as also the inferiour bodies that are subiect to the superiour whereby they are gouerned then you shall finde from 30. degrées vpwards that as soone as you haue a northerly winde with a small or miseling rayne that there followeth great and foule weather then looke well to your selfe and take great héede least it fall
13. fadom at the end this channel by y e North Ilande of the Ilandes of Nicobar lyeth an Iland where you may passe throgh w t y t greatest shippe that is the South end of this Ilande lyeth vnder 6. degrées and ¼ and the channell aforesaid vnder 7. degrées if you go through the middle of the channell lying vnder 6. degrées you shal at the entry to the Ilands see 4. Ilands whereof thrée lie halfe a mile from the Iland two of them are great and high the other small the fourth lyeth distant from the Ilande about thrée miles and is a great round Iland flatte on the top and Northward you shall see another Iland lying vnder 8. deg the entry of this Iland hath a thicke high backe flat at the end and being in the middle of the channel you shall sée another Iland lying hard by that vnder 8. deg a flat land distant from the other about two miles from the Ilandes of Nicobar to the Northerly Ilands are about 7. miles and there you néed not feare any thing at the end of this channell the Ilande of Nicobar hath a round houell at the foote whereof lyeth an Iland I counsel you not to passe by the south side of the Ilande Nicobar thereby to kéepe your selfe out of the daunger of those of Acheiin in the Ilande of Sumatra which are continually thereaboutes and are deadly enemies to the Portingalles but rather doo your best to passe the way I spake of before although you should saile vnder 8. and ¼ or 8. degrees and ◠for you may passe without danger for they are all channelles or thorow fares being past the Ilandes of Nicobar as I said before you shall take your course towards the Iland Pulo Cuto you runne betweene Pulo Cuto and Nicobar East and West and somewhat East and by South and West and by North the course is nyne miles and lyeth vnder 6. degrees and 2 ◠to know Pulo Cuto comming out of the Sea towardes it vpon the East side thereof you shall see a high round land on the shore very low they are thrée Ilands together hauing on the South side on the furthest point of them 3. or 4. cliffes or rocks that lie vncouered on the North side an other mouth or opening running between the great Ilande the Ilande of the sea in this Ilande on the Southeast side there is a very good place to take in fresh water lying by a long point of lande you may likewise take your course frō the Ilands of Nicobar to the Ilande Pulo Pera which is a small round Iland without trees lying vnder 5. deg and ⅔ the course being about 100. miles you run East Southeast and West Northwest from Pulo Pera to the Iland Pulo Pinaon are 15. miles and are one from the other East and west somewhat East and by South West and by North. This Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth 5. miles from the firme lande full vnder fiue degrées and ¼ the marke thereof is that it is high in the middle hauing on the North point a round houell and an Island lying in the middle way from the same Islande and comming along by the lande it hath a great creeke with a sandie strand at the end wherof lyeth an Iland where there is a place of fresh water on the South point it is lowe land making an other Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth with Pulo Sambilaon North south there you must looke well to your selfe for frō this Ilande Pulo Pinaon there runneth a banke reaching to a point or booke of high land which runneth into the sea at the least 2 miles vpon it you shal find 5. fadome déepe somewhat more but towards the land lesse when the point aforesaid lyeth frō you east east by north then you shal see Sambilaon the course from Pulo Pinaon to Pulo Sambilaon is 22. miles and lyeth almost vnder 4. deg East West from Pulo Sambilaō 4. or 5. miles to seaward lyeth the Iland called A Ilha das Iarres which is a smal round Iland ful of trees and on the Southwest side it hath fresh water but verie little but in Pulo Sambilaon you haue very good fresh water in all the 4. Ilands thereof the greatest wherof nearest the land lyeth in the middle in the which on the North side there stādeth a houel on both sides whereof are sandie strandes wherein are fresh water likewise the other 3. Ilandes that are in the middle haue euery one vpon the east Northeast side sandie strands in the middle whereof where there is an opening you shall finde very good fresh water at the foote of a great trée by all these Ilands as well on the sea as the lande side as also through the channel running betweene them you may freely passe without feare for it is deepe enough you may anker in sight of the land at 20. 25. fadome deep If you desire to passe through the great channell of Pulo Sambilaon then you must run south south and by East to y e Islands called As Ilhas d'Aru which lie vpon the coast of y e Iland Sumatra they are 3 smal flat Ilands full of bushes and woodes and when you are within a mile of these Ilands you shall sayle southeast southeast by east east southeast till you be at 10. fadome déep towards Pulo Parcelor which is a high hill lying vppon y e coast of Malacca shewing far off to be an Iland it standeth in a flat land whereby the land is not seene vntill you be full vpon it frō Pulo Parcelor to y e point called Cabo Rachado that is the clouen point lying ful vnder 2. degr ½ you saile to Malacca East southeast West Northwest along y e coast forwarde it is altogether a countrie full of points and houels but high and being in the middle way betweene Cabo Rachado and Malacca you shall presently discouer the Ilands that lie about halfe a mile from Malacca close by the land The 17. Chapter To saile from Pulo Sambilaō or through the great channel to Malacca SAiling from Pulo Sambilaon to the Ilandes As Ilhas de Aru lying on the coast of the Island Sumatra you shal hold your course south for the space of 13. miles whereby you shal come vpon y e banke so that it is all one to saile from Pulo Sambilaon running southward as from the Iland das Iarras that is the Iland of pots southeast southeast by south for you come out al at one place whē the Ilands de Aru lie west west and by North from you then cast out your leade and you shal finde sandy ground frō thence you shal hold your course southeast stil casting out your lead finding 10. fadome kéeping the same course til you be at 13. fadom muddie ground you shal runne southeast southeast and by east but finding 16. 17. fadome sandie ground then winde towards
the side of Malacca to 12. 13. fadome setting your course againe southeast southeast and by east if you finde your selfe to be at 10. fadome then turne againe to the southeast alwaies séeking to be at 10.12 13. fadom for it is the best ground and depth of y e channel when you see a round hil right before you which sheweth like an Ilande y t is Pulo Parselar to the which the droughts or sands aforesaid do stretch notwithstaÌ„ding you shal not let to passe on your way not coÌ„ming nearer to Pulo Parselar then 2. miles Northeastwarde for then you are past the drougthes aforesaid from thence forward put towards the lande about a mile distant holding your course southeast towardes y e point of Cabo Rachado before you come within 3. miles thereof you find a Riffe lying foure miles from the coast which is but 4. fadome deep at high water to seawarde froÌ„ thence there is a channel of 10. fadom deep running from the Island of de Aru to Pulo Parselar you shal vse all the meanes you can to haue the greatest Ilande de Aru Southwest and southwest by west from you holding your course southeast alwaies at 18. at the least 17 fadome if you wil put from Pulo Parselar to the Ilandes de Aru you shal let Parseâ—ar lie Northeast northeast by east from you running northwest Northwest and by West alwaies at 16.17 18. to 15 fadome deep this way is not otherwise to be done for I haue past so my selfe and founde it a very good way The 18. Chapter The course from Malacca to Goa with the stretchings and situations of the Coastes DEparting from Malacca to Goa or India your best course is to saile a mile or a mile and a halfe along by the coast of Malacca alwaies hauing in sight the strikes and neather partes of the Trées that stand vpon the land till you be at Pulo Parcelar and from thence you haue from 16. to 27. and 28. fadome déepe but you must remember not to passe aboue 14. fadome neyther on the one side nor the other and sailing from Malacca about two miles and ½ or 3. miles from thence you finde 2. or 3. droughts of stonie cliffes reaching about halfe a mile into the sea lying right ouer the cesterne or the Kinges Bath by the Portingales called Tanque del Rey you shall likewise looke that you goe not neere the chéeke of Cabo Rachado which Cape lieth vnder two degrees and ½ vppon the same Coast of Malacca Northwest and by North ten miles distant as well vpon the Southeast as the Northwest side and goe not neare the land by a mile at the least as I said before there you haue a good mile and a halfe to the principall part of the channell that runneth to Parcelar and passing by Pulo Pacelor and desiring to crosse ouer from the droughts you shall kéepe off from Pulo Parcelor about 2 miles because that from it there reacheth a banke that iutteth about halfe a mile into the sea being as I said about two miles froÌ„ the land to passe ouer the droughtes being with a flood then Pulo Parcelor shall lie Eastward from you and at an ebbe East Northeast therefore it is néedefull for you to haue great care of the tides that you be not deceiued comming in this sort into those parts you shall runne west Northwest kéeping either on the one side or the other as the tides fal and if you crosse ouer the sea Pulo Parcelor it is best for you to kéepe east and east and by south from it and being in the middle way to the Ilands of Daru lying close vpon the coast of Samatra vnder 3. degrees west Northwest and 30. miles from Malacca then if you see Pulo Pacelor let it be betwéen east southeast and east by south from you and yet you haue a good course and comming towards Pulo Parcelor you must haue it to lie northeast and southwest being two miles from it but when you leaue it to make towards the Ilands of d' Aru then it is best to haue it east and east and by south and being in the sight of the Iland of d' Aru making towards the great Iland you may run within a mile or two thereof safely and without danger for it is all deepe ground The depthes you shall finde by the droughts aforesaid passing through the Channell are from 10. to 11. fadome but not aboue and the greatest depthes you shall finde running through the channel are 12.13.14.15.16 and 17. fadome and although at 3. or 4. castinges you come to 10.9 8. fadome of small fine and blacke sand or muddy ground yet your course is good for you shall presently againe come to 12.13 and 14. fadome and hauing this depth and ground and holding the course aforesaid although at some castings you finde small fine white sand yet your course is good but if you finde great sand or shels then you are out of the channell and when you finde the ground full of black shels and great sand I counsell you to seeke againe for fine small and blacke sand or muddie ground for the ground of great sand and shels is out of the channell therefore you must not cease to cast out your lead to assure your selfe it is likewise good to know the depth with two leads vpon each side of the ship one with good and carefull ouersight alwaies hauing your ankers ready with a cable of 12. or 15. fadome long if need be therewith to help your selfe because herein there is mention many times made of Pulo Pacelor I thought it good likewise to set downe vnder what height it lieth although it is sufficiently set downe us the Sea Cardes it is a land that maketh a point like to a Cape lying on the Coast of Malacca Northwest and by North about fiftéene miles distant ful vnder thrée degrées also you must remember that taking your course from Pulo Parcelor to the Iland of d' Aru being in the middle way you must let Pulo Pacelor lie in East and East and by South from you and beeing somewhat nearer the Islands then Pulo Parcelor is from you almost East Southeast that is as you goe neere the Islandes for that running in this sort you haue a good course and are sure and safe from the droughtes and if by night you passe ouer the droughts then you shall marke the land in the day time as I said before hauing a good winde alwaies looking to your tides that they deceiue you not driuing you vpon the one or the other side for there the streame runneth verie strong as well in the flood and as in the ebbe alwaies ruling your selfe according to the tides and holding your course in such manner that you may cast out your lead and as the aforesaide great Island of d'Aru lieth Southwest from you béeing about two miles from it then
be deeper you must cast anker for if you neglect it you should presentlie fall on ground because the streames and waters doe runne verie strong to sea ward from Tanadare to Belliguao are about 6. myles this place of Belliguao is a verie great créek and from the south syde thereof there appeareth certaine great houels of redde earth that lie within the Créeke and can not bee seene till you be full before the Creeke and on the North syde it hath two small Ilandes close to the land from the which Ilandes there commeth a small sand but it lyeth on the south syde towardes the land From Belleguao to Gualla are fyue myles and the way betweene them is altogether on the sea syde ful of Palme trees and betweene them lykewise lieth an Ilande hard by the land all of stonie cliffes and when you make towardes Gualla you shall perceaue a high land full of woods and a playne desert and from the North syde of the bay it hath a great wood of Palme trees and if you haue occasion to anker in the bay you may well enter at fiftéene and fourtéene fadome deepe but such as desire to keepe on their course neede not put in there From Tanadare to this Hauen of Gualla which are twelue myles you runne from the one to the other Northwest and Southeast and somewhat Northwest by West and Southeast and by east and all the way along this Coast to Gualla is not to be sayled but onlie where you may see ground with your Lead From Gualla to the point called Belitote is fyue or sixe miles which point hath a thicke wood of Palme trees and right ouer against it about half a mile there is a great Cliffe and betwéen them both lyeth many stonie cliffes along the shore by the point of Gualla are two sandes whereon the water breaketh the one is before you come at the point which runneth into the sea about ¼ of a myle and the other is right ouer against the bay on the North syde running a small myle into the sea and of this you must take great care you may well passe by it in the night at twentie fadome deepe so that you need not feare vppon this same the sea breaketh verie long speciallie when it is high water From thence you shall take your course vnto Columbo as the Coast reacheth and from the Iland of Verberijn forward the ground is full of Bankes and shallowes and béeing hard by Columbo about three or foure myles towardes Negumbo you may anker at eight or nyne fadome but by Columbo you cannot doe it but if you haue great occasion then you may anker at eightéen fadome towardes the land There you finde stonie ground and the same you finde at the poynt where you haue twentie fyue fadome deepe inwardes to the sea and that in most places therefore you must bee carefull in throwing out your Anker first prouing with a lead the grounde of this Countrie is in some places small and in other places great sand which is the surest and in some places it hath redde sand and lykewise places of white and blacke sand which are tokens of the ground along the Coast vppon all the which ground you may anker The right markes and tokens of Columbo which is the place where the Portingalles holde their fort are these y t is when you are within the Hauen then the Pico of Adam so called which is a high hill higher then any other in al the countrie about it shal be in the East and setting your course to the Hauen of this fortresse then you shall loose the sight of all the hilles and Houels and begin to sayle by thinne flat land which is a marke and a verie good token of the Hauen the winds that you there shall finde for the most part of that time or Monson are North Northeast Northeast and sometime East Northeast and also East the Viracoins which are the winds that blow out of the Sea are many times North and Northwest I write this that men should not wonder to find them so in that place likewise you finde there West Northwest and West Southwest windes according to the coniunctions of the times when men are in that coast the winds that are called Viracoins which commonly blow out of the west throughout all India at such time as men vse to sayle vpon the Sea which is in Summer from noone to twelue of the clocke at night and come out of the Sea towards the land and therefore by the Portingales they are called Viracoins that is wind out of the Sea and from midnight to noone the winds blow out of the East which come ouer the land into the Sea as it is at large declared in my Indian Viage and is onely heere set downe because it should not séeme strange to any man to reade of these winds and their manner of blowing in these countries when you will put to Sea by night with the Terreinhos or land winds if they be not Northeast then you shall not set sayle before midnight if they be not full to Sea ward then put not to farre off from the shore because it would not bee good for you to put to farre into the Sea for that you could not well get the land againe because the Viracoins or sea winds that come out of the North and Northwest doe often stay late blow but slowly From Negumbo you shall crosse ouer to Cape de Comorijn to the East side of the Cape towards the land called das Areas Gordas that is of the fat or thicke Dounes which is 12. miles from Cabo de Comorijn on the side of Choramandel for it is good to put on there because of y e streame which runneth verie stiffe outward with a hard wind by these Areas Gordas as also some part of the way to the Cape you finde ground and many times sée the land because it is long at 40. fadome and lesse and if you come inward from the Cape being by night and find ground then you may fréely passe ouer this ground from 12. to 18. fadome déepe for as you come right against the Cape then the ground is ful of white Sand and you shal not find aboue 20. fadome to Seaward from Areas Gordas to the Cape for from Areas Gordas inwards the ground is ful of banks and small blacke Sand and you must runne a mile a mile and a halfe and two miles from the shore vpon the ground and depthes afore saide And when you passe by Cabo de Comorijn to Coulaon you shall holde your course along the coast about a mile from the shore that you may Anker and not going néerer to the sand then 12. fadome but it is good to run from 15. to 18. fadome alwayes taking héede of the stones of Trauancor which lie betwéene the Cape and Coulaon and being in the night time the surest marke to know if you be before Coulaon is to
find the ground full of bankes for from Coulaon to Batecola that is by Onor not farre from Goa the ground is bankie and you may Anker at 8. fadome without feare from Batecola to Goa the ground in some places deeper whereby you may gouerne your selfe Touching your Ankerage from Cochijn to Cananor you néede not feare onely to take héede of the Iland called Ilha Cagado lying Southward from Cananor seuen miles and thrée miles Northward from the fortresse of Mangalor there lyeth a row of Ilands Cliffes and Rockes along the coast vntill you come to the fortresse of Barcelor from thence to Batecola you haue certaine Cliffes but they are close to the land and the two Ilands of Batecola you may passe betwéene the first of them and the Firme land without feare for it is 15. or 16. Fadome déepe a little further lyeth the Iland of Honor close to the Firme land then followeth the Ilandes of Angediua which reach as the coast doth and if it bee late in the yeare you shal not put farre into the Créeke of Ancola for as then there is no Terreinhos or land winds to driue you out againe therfore it is then better to runne something far from the coast for you haue many times the Viracoins or Sea winds somwhat farre off and being néere the shore they would not much helpe you This must be from the twentie of March forward If you chance to be by Angediua and had néede of a Road or harber you must enter into Angediua on the North side as far from that land as from the Firme land and rather somewhat néerer the Iland then the Firme land where you haue a good Road or harber for there many times diuers shippes doe winter being constrained therevnto within it is sixe fadome déepe a little further from Angediua lie foure or fiue Ilands from the ryuer Sanguisijn close by the Firme land and from thence about halfe a mile further forward lyeth the Iland of Goa Velha that is old Goa and then there are no other Ilands heerein to bee noted You must vnderstand that oftentimes it happeneth that along the coast you shall find the wind Northwest and North Northwest without chāging which bloweth very strong with the which wind I aduise you not to set sayle although it blow out of the North but if it be cleare day then you may hoyse Anker and put to Sea wards and if the wind commeth not about to Northeast being foure miles from the land and before noone about nine or ten of the clocke you shall Anker till it be noone till the Viracoins or Sea winds come therewith to sayle againe towards the land for in this sort you shall get aduantage to loofeward although it bee with paine and labour as likewise the time will shewe you what you shall doe I must further aduertise you that when you are by the coast of Seylon it being about the fifteene of Februarie or past then you néede not sayle further then to the Ilands Verberijn and from thence to the Cape de Comorijn for as then you néede neither to feare water nor streames to driue you outward yet you must not bee negligent therin for some yeares the stormes come later sometimes sooner as the winds blow whereof you must be carefull and being the fiftéene of Februarie or past you must remember not to runne inwards but kéepe out for as then the streames runne inwards which might deceiue you and the later it is in Februarie the stronger they draw inward comming to Cochijn betwéene the 15. and 20. of March you may wel get from thence to Goa although the Viage is some thing doubtfull but being past the twentie of March I would not counsell you to do it for that of late many years together there hath béene vpon the coast of India in Aprill and May diuers blustering stormes of crosse winds blowing towards the coast with darke and cloudie skies which would bring you in great danger therefore against that time it is best to chuse a good Hauen neuerthelesse God can send faire weather winds when it pleaseth him To put into the Hauen of the fortresse of Barcelor in the coast of Malabar aforesaide you must vnderstande that when you see a round Houell vppon the end of the hil of Batecola towards y e Northeast and Northeast and by East then you are right against the fortresse of Barcelor may put in at 7. fadome so you haue the fortresse East and halfe a stricke to East and by North from you and you shall sée all the Cliffes lying along the coast to the Ilands as Ilhas de Saint Maria which are altogether stonie Cliffes but they stand close to the land The 19. Chapter A description of all the Hauens places coastes and Sands vpon the East and South side of the Ilands Seylon with their heights courses stretchings situations with the course from thence to the fortresse of Columbo holden by the Portingales FIrst I will beginne with Trinquanamale which lyeth vnder nine degrées vppon the East side of the Iland Seylon eight myles from thence Southwarde lyeth a smal ryuer and before you come at it putting from Trinquanamale ther are some Ilands that with Birds fileings looke white and in the mouth of the riuer aforesaid lie two smal Ilands full of trées from Trinquanamale to this ryuer the course is North and South and North and by East and South and by West and running along the coast towards this ryuer then you shall leaue the Ilands aforesaid on the land side sayling without thē for that betwéene them and the land are many stones and Cliffes this ryuer and Trinquanamale lie distant from each other eight or nine miles at the furthest From the saide ryuer with the Ilands in the entrie thereof to the ryuer of Mataqualou are 12. myles and lieth vnder the hight of seuen degrées and 1 ◠The course from the one to the other is Northwest and Southeast being past this ryuer comming betwéene the Ilands the mouth therof you may go as néere the shore as you will for it is without danger within a great shotte of the land it is 20. fadome déepe From Mataqualou about fiue or sixe miles the course is North and South till you come to the point or hooke and from this point fiue or sixe miles further you runne along the coast North and South and North and by East and South and by West further forward towards the first Sand about fiue or sixe miles Northward there standeth a woode of Palme trées and comming right ouer against it the coast runneth North Northeast and South southwest and somewhat North and by East and South and by West from those fiue miles to the first sand the course is North East and southwest and Northeast and by East and Southwest and by West and before you come within foure or fiue miles of these Sandes you shall sée some Houels and hillockes of red
Earth along the Sea side inward to the land there appeareth certaine high hilles whereof one of them lying most Northward hath a Houell striking out of the toppe thereof which séemeth to bee a blocke house being of redde Earth You may passe betwéene the first Sand and the land at seuen or eight Fadome déepe alwaies kéeping as farre from the land as from the Sand for they are a good myle distant and running about by the Sea you shall find Sandie ground round about it this Sand lyeth vnder 6. degrees and from this first Sand about 6. or 7. miles southward there is yet an other Sand and the course from this one to the other is east Northeast and West southwest along the coast this second Sand lyeth scarce vnder 6. degrées betwéene the which and the Firme land are 12 and 13. Fadome déepe all good ground and from the last Sand to a Créeke called Aâ—alla the coast runneth East and West and East and by North and West and by South 4. or 5. miles further forward froÌ„ this Créeke there lieth an other Créeke called Hulpulam from whence to Tanadare are about 7 miles Tanadare is a point of the land whereon there standeth a woode of Palme trees and when you are right ouer against it you shall see a white Pagode that is a Temple of the Indian Idoles and on the North side of this Pagode stand certaine Houels of white and red Earth and passing before it you shal not goe to close to the shore for there abouts are certaine Sands and beeing past this point then goe presently at 20. Fadome deepe for it is al good and cleare ground and if it should be calme there you may Anker From Tana dare to Belliguon are about sixe myles Belliguon is a verie great Creeke on the South side wherof are certaine Houels of red Earth that stand within the Creeke for that you cannot see them before you haue fully discouered the Creeke and on the North side it hath two Ilands lying close by the land on the South side of those Ilands along ther lyeth a Riffe or Sand. From Belliguon to Gualle are fiue myles all this way from the one to the other the land is altogether close and full of trees along the Sea side about halfe a mile from Belliguon to Gualle there lyeth a stonie Iland close by the land and an other on the South side of Gualle and making towards it you shall sée a high flat land full of trées and an euen wildernesse and on the North side of the bay there standeth a great wood of Palme trées vppon the Sea coast and within the Hauen you shall see a white house which is a small Chappell of the Virgin Marie passing from Belliguon to Gualle and comming right against this point on the South side towards the Bay you must put to Seaward thereby to shunne a Sand wheron you shall sée the Sea breake and to Anker you shal runne North North Northwest in such manner that you may alwaies sée certaine Cliffes that lie on the North side and inwards from the Bay you shall sée the Palme trées which will be vpon the south side towards Belliguon which lay hidden by the point there you shall finde 14. and 15. fadome water and running till you come to 13. fadome finding sandie ground you may Anker for to Seaward it is altogether stones From Tanadare to this Hauen of Gualle which are twelue miles the course is Northwest and Southeast and Northwest and by West and southeast and by East this Hauen of Gualle lieth vnder 5. degrées and 1 â— from thence passing along the coast you sayle about the Portingalles Fort called Columbo this course I haue already sufficiently declared in the Nauigation from Malacca to India therefore it is néedlesse here to be rehearsed The 20. Chapter The righr course from Malacca to Macau in China with the stretchings of the coasts DEparting from Malacca to the Straights of Sincapura and so to China you must set your course to the Ilands called Ilha Grande lying thrée miles from the Hauen of Malacca passing for more securitie without about the Ilands from those Ilands to the ryuer called Muar are thrée miles which hath for a marke a Houel full of trées on the south east side without any other high land thereabouts From the riuer of Muar to the riuer called Rio Fermoso you run along the coast Northwest and southeast and Northwest and by West and southeast and by East the course is nine miles this riuer of Fermoso is great and faire hauing in the entrie 6. and 7. Fadome déepe and also within you enter into it by the foote of a high hill on the South southeast side and it lyeth on the South side of Malacca it hath certaine bankes sticking out into the Sea from the point lying North east which is a flat plaine countrie which you must shunne From this Rio Fermoso to the Iland Pulo Picon the coast runneth the same course southeast and by East and the Iland Pulo Picon lieth halfe a mile from the coast hauing thrée Ilands by it two on the Sea side and one vpon the land side but you must not passe betwéene it and the land for there are many Sands it is distant seuen miles southeastward towards the Sea from Pulo Picon there lyeth a great and a verie high Iland with many Ilands about it called Pulo Carimon along by the West side of the same Iland towards the straight of Sabon which is the way to Sunda and the Iland of Iaua the nauigation and course whereof I will in an other place set downe therefore for this time it shall not be touched and will procéede to our matter aforesaide From this Iland of Pulo Picon to a pointe of land that stretcheth out called Taniamburo you runne East ward by the coast being about thrée miles this point maketh a hooke and from thence forward the coast turneth inward like an arme running froÌ„ thence right southward about a mile froÌ„ this point lyeth a riuer and a little mile further forward there is an other ryuer with a great mouth where there lyeth an Iland called old Sincapura being deepe and faire ground this ryuer issueth out againe in the Hauen of Iantana where Antonio Mello by chance did once enter with a ship of eight hundreth Bhares great each Bhar waighing thrée Quintals and a halfe Portingall waight came out againe at the ryuer of Iantana from this ryuer the land runneth downe towards the South as I saide before which maketh a hooke where the mouth or entrie of the first straight y t you must passe through beginneth The land on the North side of this entrie is higher then the South which is low and flat hauing a Houell of trées striking out about all the rest there is the end or furthest point of that land for that going Eastward on then you finde Ilands and stonie Cliffes which first reach
southward and thē againe come Eastward out making the forme of an arme from the said point of Taniamburo to the mouth or entrie of this straight the course is 5. miles East West at 7. and 8. fadome déepe Hee that will passe through Sincapura to China passing by Pulo Picon in the beginning of y e month of Iuly he must go néere to the side of the great Iland Carymon because y e winds of the Monson of Iaua which are at y e time doe alwaies blow from the south side of Sumatra likewise when you keepe by the side of Carimon and being past it you presently haue the mouth or entrie of the straight open vnto you with y e marks aforesaid in this way you find manie depths passing along by Taniamburo thē the land of y e entrie to the straightes sheweth as if the one ran through the other which is a common and certaine marke but hold you to loofeward the better to enter at your plesure This first straight at y e entry hath two riffs on each side one which come from the point or hooke of the land the land on the south side from the entry thereof is altogether Ilands reaching a whole line eastward which make the straight to enter therin you must kéepe neerer the south side then the other at your first entrie you shall finde 12.10 9. fadom deepe and being so far in that the land on the South side which are Ilands make but one point then on the other side before you you shall see a hooke or point whereon there standeth a small red Houell which when you see then you shall turne from the right hand towards that smal Houell because it is the first Iland which you then haue past from that Iland forward there beginneth an other Iland between these two Ilands lieth a Riffe or Sand which with a low water is part vncouered reacheth into the middle of y e chanell where you must run with the Lead continually in your hand which will shew you where you are comming to the point aforesaid of the small Houell then put to the land on the right side which is Ilands as I saide before for it hath only betweene the Iland aforesaid the said Riffe and then you shall run Eastward about halfe a mile with the saide depth of 8. and 9. Fadome from thence forward y e row of Ilands whereby you sayle reach South Eastward and presently somewhat further on the right hand of the same Iland you shall see a round Iland running a little out from the other which will bee vpon your right hand by the which you shall passe along with good watch there you shal finde 8. and 10. fadome deepe muddie ground The land on the left hand which is the North side is Creeks and open ground and hath a great Creeke which turneth towards the South on the which side lyeth an other round Iland that is on the same side from you you shall kéepe from this North side which is nothing but Creekes for they are all full of Riffes and shallowes running as I said before along by the Ilands on the right hand comming by the aforesaid round Iland on the right hand at the end of the row of Ilands whereby you passe you shal sée a smal flat Iland with afew trées hauing a white sandystrand which lieth east and west with the mouth of y e straight of Sincapura which you shal make towards when you beginne to come néere it then the straight beginneth to open discouer it selfe you may sayle neere it and wind about like a bow so to auoid the riffes shallowes of the North side as also not to fal towards y e south side of the mouth of the straight with the ride that runneth ther for you haue many depths and foule ground you must alwaies hold on y e North side where there is a sandie strand of the length of the shotte of a great péece at the end thereof making the forme of a sandy Bay where you find fresh water as farre as that strand runneth it is all along faire ground to Anker in if need be and cōming to this strand you haue the streame that driueth you along by the land towards the mouth of y e straight which you haue not passing further frō then◠for then they driue you towards the déepe and foule ground lying on the South side thereof as aforesaid once againe I aduise you not to passe frō the end of the strand to the north side for it is altogether Riffes and shallowes as aforesaide The mouth or entrie of this straight entreth betwéene two high hils being as broad as a man may cast a stone and reacheth Eastward is in length about the shot of a great péece y e chanel of this straight hath in length 4. fadome and ½ déepe in the entrie at the foote of the hil on the North side there lyeth a stone Cliffe which sheweth like a Piller this is cōmonly called of all nations that passe by it the Varella of China on the South side a good way from the mouth therof it maketh a créeke in the midle wherof lyeth a Cliffe vnder water from the which there runneth a banke towards the middle of the chanel somwhat further on the same side the length of a small shot it hath an opening which runneth through on the other side into the Sea making an Iland this opening is shallow all ouer seruing only for smal Foists to passe through in the middle of this Créeke where this opening is lieth a Cliffe or stonie place two fadome vnder water which stonie place commeth so far without the Créeke as the point of the land reacheth and somewhat more towards the midle of the chanell being past this Creek the land hath a hooke of a houell faling downward where the straight endeth in passing about this there is a rounde Houel by the which you haue déepe and faire ground when you haue past about it y e land from thence reacheth southeast on the North side of this straight from the beginning to the end there are thrée Créeks whereof the two first are small the third great it is situate right ouer against the hooke or point of y e red Houel where the straight endeth this thirde Creeke hath a stonie banke which at a lowe water after a spring tide is vncouered reacheth frō the one point to the other you must be carefull not to fall vpon it all that which lieth on the North side and without y e Créeke all ouer the chanell from the one point to the other is faire ground without danger In y e issuing of the straight beeing without it you haue two Riffes whereof the one lieth right ouer against the issuing of the straight about the shot of a great péece towards y e East cōming from the land on the north side
and when you begin to come neere them theÌ„ you shall keep towards Pedra BraÌ„ca and looke that you kéep half a mile from it taking heede you come not neere the syde of the Ilandes for two causes the one because the windes at that tyme when you sayle to China doe alwaies blow off from the syde of Binton which is the Monson that commeth out of the South southwest and if the winde should scant and fall into the Southeast as often tymes in those countries it happeneth being on the syde of the Ilandes you could not passe by the Riffes whereby you should bee compelled to passe through the channell that runneth betweene Pedra Branca and the Ilandes or els you should spend so much tyme in staying there and that the Monson that is the tyme of your voyage to China would bee spent the other is that if you chance to bee there with a slow wind and tyde or with few sailes spred then the streames would driue you vpoÌ„ the Riffes before you could auoyde them as it happened to the shippe of Don Diego de Meneses whose Pilot was Goâ—â—alo Vieâ—a who by the water was driueÌ„ vpoÌ„ 10. fadome where he ankered and then after he came to 7. fadom where he spent 3 dayes by ankering to get out againe for the which 2 causes I aduise you to keepe on the side of Pedra Branca or the white cliffes aforesaid FroÌ„ Pedra Branca to the IlaÌ„d Pulo Tâ—nge y t run north south north by east south and by west the course is 13. miles this IlaÌ„d is high and rouÌ„d hauing in the middle a high sharp hil ful of trées it lieth by the coast of the firm land betwéene it y e firm land there is good sayling but it is not Oorbaer this IlaÌ„d lieth with Pulo TimoÌ„ northeast southwest and are distant about 7. miles to sayle to Pulo Tinge you shall take your course from Pedra Branca a great myle Eastward and from thence North and north and by East alwaies with the lead in your hand till you be past the Riffes being at 14 fadome being as you gesse in that country you shal presently kéepe off from it into the sea being before it you néed not feare any thing but y t you sée before your eyes in this course to Pulo Tinge in the sight of the Iland there lieth 4 or 5 Ilands which shal lie on the land side froÌ„ you and when you are hard by Pulo Tinge then you shal presently sée Pulo Timon the IlaÌ„d of Pulo Timon is great high and on the side whereunto you sayl are two eares of land which are ful of great high trées to make small mastes ankers because in those countries they vse such kind of wooddeÌ„ ankers and it is commonly couered with mistes clouds and hath all ouer a cleane muddy ground therein are 2 places wher you find good fresh water one being on the side of the land in the middle of a long strand a little inward to the land where you find a good réed but wheÌ„ you come early thereunto as in the Moneth of Iune and the beginning of Iuly it is dangerous to anker there because of the west wind which at that time bloweth with great force in those countries therefore I thinke it better to run to the other place where you likewise find fresh water on the East side towards the sea ruÌ„ning right vpon the face of the Iland along by the East side and being past a certain houel that maketh a hooke you shal find a sandy Bay where you must enter into the land and when the point or hooke lieth southeast you may anker where you may lie for the Momson and there you shal haue 20 fadome déepe there is likewise great fishing for excellent good fish and in the same bay there lieth the place where you take in fresh water which runneth into the sea also on that syde you haue much better wood néerer to fetch there you ly safe from west winds on that side of the land you haue certain IlaÌ„ds along the coast from the north point of this IlaÌ„d Pulo TimoÌ„ about the shot of a great péece there lieth an other Iland and by the South point an other likewise about 3 miles south eastward ther lieth 3 other Ilands wherof y e one is great rouÌ„d y e other 2 being somwhat smaller are called Pulo Laor the Iland of Pulo TimoÌ„ lieth vnder 2 degr â…” on y e north side of the Equinoctial 12 miles northwest ward stroÌ„ it lieth the riuer Pan in the firme land ouer against the which about 2 miles to seaward there lieth a small Iland hauing an euen round trée in the middle half a mile froÌ„ it it is 6 fadom déep grouÌ„d FroÌ„ Pulo TimoÌ„ to Pulo Condor the course is North northeast Westsouthwest 115 miles Pulo CoÌ„dor lieth vnder 8 degr â…” it is a great IlaÌ„d with high hils hauing close by it 5 or 6 Ilands and on the northeast side it hath a smal Iland or stony cliffe which sheweth farre off like a ship vnder sayle it is ouer al good grouÌ„d at 10 or 12 fadome déepe and on the Northwest side it hath a place of fresh water it lieth north and south with the riuer of Camboia which is called the hauen of Malaios 12. miles distant but you are not sure to haue fresh water ther for wheÌ„ it is late in the yere you haue there the winds at north and northwest w t some thunder whereby you may not stay with one sayle only for that being without sayles it would strike you to ground and cast your ship away when it is early in the yeare theÌ„ you haue East winds From Pulo Timon to Pulo Condor y u shal alwaies find ground at 35 38 fadome and to hold your right course to Pulo Condor you shall sayl north northeast not accounting any winding of the compas for if y u should do so you should run on the south side to seaward and run by without séeing it which is an euill course for that y e winds alwaies in this course doe blow froÌ„ the side of the land and if it chance that before you sée the IlaÌ„d Pulo Condor you find y e water thicke troubled foule then cast out your lead you shal find 18 or 19 fadome water with a soft muddy ground so runne half a strike in that course til you come to 17 fadome and being there then rune northeast and being at 1 1 6 fadome before you sée the Iland theÌ„ hold your course East East and by north alwaies at 16 fadome déepe whereby you shall land on the south side of the Iland wher you must take héed of 2 Ilands lying 7 miles on the West side of Pulo Condor full of bushes a mile or thereabouts distant from each other and if it be possible you shall
of Enseada dos Ladroins or créek of Rouers 7. miles southeastward This Iland Sanchoan is great high and full of hils among the which there is a crooked hill with high houels on the top thereof like the ioints of a mans fingers when his hand is closed which is a sure and good marke This Iland hath many trées great creeks hayes where in times past men vsed to traffique betwéen this Iland and the Firme land lieth 4. or 5. other high Ilands without bushes or trées which lie vnder one course with the Firme land and the Iland Sanchoan in such sorte that Sanchoan maketh the furthest hook or end outward and from thence reacheth towards the land northwest and southeast so that a farre off it séemeth to bee all one land these are the first Ilands of Canton which lie vnder 21. degrees and 1 ◠from thence to Lamon you saile outward about the Ilands east northeast and from Sanchoan to the land there runneth 3. channels or passages which make those Ilands through the which you may passe with ships the best channel is that which runneth along by the Iland of Sanchoan which is the furthest outward to the sea of 6. and 7. fadome déepe it hath in the entry therof vpon the same Iland a small Iland full of bushes and on the northwest side lieth two great high Ilands which make the mouth or entry and at the entry along by the strand there lieth some small Ilands and hillocks before the Ilands aforesaid towards y e land lieth an other Iland making another mouth or entry betweene this and the two Ilands aforesaid from this Iland to the land is the third mouth or entry through these two entries great ships doe passe with the tides it is altogether soft muddie ground to know the Iland of Sanchoan besides the markes aforesaid or to know if those Ilands lie before or behind you must remember that Sanchoan maketh a point lying outward and that from thence you runne towards the land northwest and southeast from thence further east north east and west south west and marke the course with your compasse and you shall presently know whether you be forward or backeward and if you be so far to seaward that you sée the one coast reacheth east north east and the other northwest then you are right ouer against it by this meanes I found it out for I was the first that marked it and such as know it learned it of me The course from Pulo Caton towards China is thus you shall not saile aboue 2. or 3. mile at the furthest to seaward for the causes afore rehearsed and being past then runne north northwest or northwest vntill you finde an opening betwéene the Iland and the Firme land and as it beginneth to open then runne halfe a strike north north east towards the point of the Iland Aynon and passing betwéene the Iland Pulo Caton and the Firme land you shall keepe the same course because the streame in that monson runneth towards the créeke of Cauchinchina and with this course you shall sée Aynon being 7. or 8. miles to seaward from thence and it may bee that if you come thether at a spring tide or with a slacke winde that you will be driuen further inward when you perceiue the land then marke your compasse and if the coast reacheth east northeast then kéep that course vntill you thinke you to bee past it and if the coast stretch northeast and north east and by east as the Iland lieth then run so till you may wel discerne the land being 5. or 6. miles from thence that from thence you desire to sayle to Sanchoan then runne with the same course for halfe a strike north northeast whereby you shall sée Pulo Tio if you be 4. or 5. miles frō thence to seaward then runne northeast northeast by north and if you be but two miles from thence thē run your course for halfe a strike betwéene northeast northeast by north with this course you shal come to the Iland of Sanchoan shall sée the Iland called Do Mandoriin which is a small round and high land lieth 5. or 6. miles from the Ilands if you desire to put into the Hauen of Macau then runne north east east and by north running to seaward 5. or 6. miles from Sanchoan when you are within 15. or 20. miles of the Ilandes then you shall finde muddie ground at 25. fadome déepe when you sée the Ilandes looke well to your selfe as I saide before you must goe neere them and run along by them about a mile distant from Sanchoan to Macau are 18. miles there are fiue channels or passages the first betwéene the Iland Sanchoan the Island Vasco de Faria about 5. miles broad This Iland of Vasco de Faria lieth nearer the land thē Sanchoan hath a high pointed hil on the sea side a high round houell being betwéene it and the hill very low land so that a farre off it sheweth like two Ilands when you are hard by it and that you begin to discouer the flat land it sheweth like a channell and not farre from it towardes the 〈◊〉 it hath two or thrée small Ilands This Iland lieth north and south with Sanchoan a mile from it lieth a small long Iland without bushes which all along the Iland hath a crooked rigge or backe descending at the end this Iland is called Pulo Baby by this Iland along by the land of Sanchoan lieth a Rocke somewhat aboue the water I here place all these markes and tokens of this channell because it should the better be knowne to such as haue occasion to passe through it which they may boldly do being past the Ilands of the Iland Vasco de Faria the first that you then come to sée is in the fourth mouth or entrie which openeth not because an Ilād lieth right before it 4. or 5. miles forward lie other Ilandes along by the Iland which you shall leaue on the West southwest side all vpon a row and a farre off séeme to runne one through the other but when you are right ouer against them then they lie as I saide before they are fiue or sixe in all both great and little from these Ilands about two miles East northeast there lieth two Ilands close together stretching North and South by these you haue others vpon the same row towards the land all in the same strike or course in the entrey hard by those two Ilands there lieth a great high and round Iland betwéene the aforesaid row of Ilandes the Ilands aforesaid there is a good hold or opening through the which you haue the nearest way to Macau for the better knowledge wherof about three or foure miles further east north east there are thrée Ilands distant from each other which from the land all in a row doe reach into the Sea whereby they lie further outward then
the other which you passe along by so that they ly right ouer against you and when you come to the mouth or entry of Macau and begin to put into it it is altogether opeÌ„ without any Ilande to bee sayled or compassed about sayling right towards the firme lande which is 8. miles Northwarde from thence where the mouth or entry is whereby you goe to Caton by the Portingalles called Aâ— Orelhas de Lebre that is the hares eares In this entery it is 8.9 and 10. fadome déepe and if you come thether at the ebbe of a spring tide the streame runneth so strong stiffe that no wind will serue to get vp therfore it is best to anker there with all your sayles vp vntill you sée it flow running along by the row of Ilands that lie on the east side so inward shunning a rocke lying close by those Ilands aboue the water putting to seaward for that you cannot passe betweene it and the Ilands with any ship also you shall finde anoâ—â—er Cliffe vpon the west side being in the middle way séeing right before you a small and low Iland lying in the same rowe of Ilandes in the East as you goe then you are by the mouth or entrey of the second chaÌ„nell that runneth to Macau This entery reacheth East and West and may be about a mile broad you must make to that smal Iland and leauing it vpon the North side you must hold your course betwéene it and the other Ilands and so put in alwaies kéeping nearest to the small Iland where the depth will begin to lessen and much more wheÌ„ you are past it for there you haue a banke of 28 spannes of water of soft muddie ground the land lying vpon the south side of the channell is foure or fiue Ilands close one by the other which reach east and west and they haue on the north side a great and high Iland which runneth to the hauen where the Portingales inhabite and hath a créeke or bay that strecheth Northward at the mouth of this Hauen lieth a great and high Iland close by the land on the north side betwéene which and the Iland it is drie and shallow ground and before you come to this Iland there lyeth vppon the side of the north Iland a Cliffe vnder the water to seaward towards the middle of the chaÌ„nell therefore you shall hold off from this north land and put nearer to the south and when you being to discouer the Portingales towne with the Hauen where the shippes lie at anker theÌ„ you shal put to the east hooke of the entrey of this Hauen kéeping close to it till you be in where you shall find foure fadome and ½ or 5. fadome déepe shunning the west side for there it is all ouer bankes and sands and along by the point you finde muddy ground this point or hooke is a high land and from thence inward about the shot of a great peece further lieth another point of saÌ„d and from the low land runneth a banke of 18 spannes of water reaching crosse ouer to the other side as far as the first houses and before you come to it in the middle of the Riuer there lieth a Riffe therefore you must hold vpon the east side and runne along by it till you anker it is good muddie ground at foure fadome and ½ deepe The 21. Chapter The course from the Kingdome of Sion to China with the situation of the places DEparting out of the hauen or riuer of the towne of Sion or Sian you shall holde your course Westward and comming to it you shall finde a Riffe lying on the north side of the coast Hauen called Bancolea two miles from the land and betwéene it and the land there is a channell of foure fadome déepe notwithstanding you must passe without it as farre aboue it as you can this hauen of Bancosea lieth with the Hauen of Sion northeast and southwest and somewhat northeast and by east and southwest and by west and being against the coast you shall kéepe along by it for it is all good ground and when you haue past the Riffe aforesaid The Coast vpon the shore is low land hauing inward a small houell stretching North and south 4. miles from Bancosea Southward This low land maketh a point reaching outward lying vnder 14. degrées and ½ from thence forward you shall sée a great thicke land which séemeth to runne inward to the sea but before you come at it there is a riuer called Chaon at the mouth whereof stand certaine trées like palme trees and comming to the aforesaid land you shall see another great thicke land which sheweth to lie east and west inwards to the land hauing manie sharpe rockes there the land maketh a point or end which is commonly called the point of Cuy thetherto the lande reacheth Southeast this point of Cuy lieth vnder 12. degrees and â…” and betweene it and the aforesaid thicke land that lieth behind you you shall finde 11. and 12. fadome deepe with good ground when you are past or about this point of Cuy then you shall hold your course south southeast for the space of 25. miles and then you must sayle south east and southeast and by south whereby you shall see an Iland which a far off showeth like 3. Ilands being long flat ful of trees lieth ful vnder 10. degrees which will be on the east side all this way you must take care not to fall to leeward and being by this Iland aforesaid you shall run southeast and rather hold aloofe to the south then to fall to the west because of the sharpe winde which you commonly finde in that part and in this course you shall see another Iland greater then the first and reacheth East and West beeing on the toppe thicke and flatte land The West pointe a great thicke hooke pointed towards the sea side Eastwarde it descendeth towardes a black lande which séemeth to be a close and thick bushie place lying full vnder 9. degrees ½ This Iland lyeth with the Iland of Pulo Wy southeast northwest and so you must runne 25. miles Pulo Wy are two Ilandes whereof the greatest reacheth North and South hauing a high houell on the South side and on the North side two low houels with a valley in the middle thus the West side sheweth but on the south side it séemeth altogether high and rounde with a small valley in the middle making 2. rocks shewing like two men the other and the smaller Iland lyeth on the southeast side somewhat distant from the other making a channell betwéene both where you may passe through for it is fayre grounde this smal Iland on the Southeast side hath a smal Iland of stonie cliffes from the which there runneth a stonie Riffe which you must auoide for all the other places are good and faire being twelue fadome déep close by the Iland and in the greatest Iland on the south West side
there is fresh water with a sandie bay and when you make towardes this Iland comming to it you shall finde thereaboutes 14. fadome deepe with hard ground and if you find muddie grounde then you are hard by the land from Pulo Wy to the firme lande of Camboia are 7. miles this coast of Camboia is low land full of trées and along by it it is banky and muddy grounde it lyeth Northwest and southeast to a point which lyeth with Pulo Wy East Northeast and West Southwest stretching likewise the same course of the aforesaide point to the hauen of Camboia which is twelue miles distant this hauen is called Dos Malyos that is of the Malaquiters or those of Malacca lying right ouer against Pulo Condor which lyeth with this hauen or Riuer Northwest and Southeast and northwest by North and southeast and by South from Pulo Wy Northwestwarde there lyeth a great Riuer being thrée fadome déepe within the hauen on the side sandie grounde and in the middle muddie ground the Chinars that saile froÌ„ Sion to China passe by y e north side of Pulo Wy and when they are right ouer against it then they run Eastward to knowe the hooke aforesaid running the same course to Pulo Condor which they see vppon the North side when you are right against this point or hooke then you shall find ten fadome deepe muddie grounde and somewhat further 13. fadome sandie ground but you must not run nearer then this 13. fadom towards the land but rather kéep at 14. fadome for it is surer take heed of 2. Ilands that lie 6. miles from Pulo Condor which will bee on the South side and right before you you shal haue the North point of the Ilande Pulo Condor lying vnder 8. degrées and â…” and you runne with Pulo Wy East West and somewhat east and by south and west and by North and if you sée Pulo Wy on the south side and so it should be on your North side then you shall runne within a mile or halfe a mile thereof alwaies taking héede of the aforesaid Riffe of the Ilandes â—â—king your course Eastwarde to Pulo Condor with good regard of the Ilandes the Ilande to the which you shall come on the south point passing by the South side of Pulo Wy within 3. miles thereof you shall finde 16. fadome deep and keeping your course to Pulo Condor at the depth aforesaide you shall passe within halfe a mile to the south side of the Ilandes being 6. miles from Pulo Condor but rather take the depth for more securitie of scarce seuentéen fadome whereby you shal come on the South side of Pulo Condor within 3. or 4. miles thereof at the furthest and when you are in sight of the Ilands then you must put to Pulo Condor as you will leauing the Ilands on the North side if you passe on the south side of Pulo Condor to go to the firme land to the cost of Champa theÌ„ runne North Northeast and Northeast and by north which will bring you to the sea coast and to shunne the sands whereon Mathias de Brito fell which lie 4. miles from the land if you runne along the shore at 13 fadome then you come vppon those sandes but when you are past them all the rest of the course from Champa forwardes is farye and good ground and being in this Countrey you shall take your course as I haue shewed you in the description and nauigation from Malacca to China the sands aforesaid lie vpon the coast of Champa runne with Pulo Condor North and South and North and by East and south and by West and almost halfe a strike more The 22. Chapter Of the course from the Island Pulo Condor to the hauen of Sian FRom Pulo Condor to Pulo Wy there are about full 20. miles lying from each other East and West and somewhat East and by North and West and by south and to go to Pulo Wy hold your course right west not reckening any abatement for the yéelding of the Compasse and being founde what more theÌ„ halfe way you shal finde a banke of muddie ground of 8. or 9. fadome deepe and being northward in the sterne of the shippe you shal see the trees vpon the coast of Camboia which is a verie low lande this banke aforesaid being past it will not bee long before you shall see Pulo Wy right ouer against you and as soone as you sée it you shal make towards it on the north side you must vnderstand y t this land of Camboia maketh a point froÌ„ whence the banke aforesaid runneth of from this point to y e hauen of Sian you run along the coast north northwest by y t which lyeth many Ilands stretching along by it till you bee vnder 12 and 12. degrees and ½ In this countrie ly the most and greatest Ilandes one by the other and there make a hooke for the land hath a créeke called A Ensâ—â—da de Lian which runneth a good way inwardes and lyeth vnder 12 degrees and ½ the north point of the land of the mouth of this creeke lyeth vnder 12 degrees ¾ and the land of this point aforesaide which lyeth inwardes reacheth east northeast and hath many trees w t a sandy strand froÌ„ this point to sea ward there lyeth 2. high round Ilands without any trees you cannot passe beetweene the first Iland and the land for the channell or passage lyeth betweene the first and the second or the better to bee vnderstood betweene them both there is a small channell but very deep of 60. fadom water and there runneth a strong streame vnder the hight of the point aforesaid of this creeke little more or lesse about half a mile from the land on the inner side there lyeth a very long cliffe stretching as the land doth which at low water may bee seene you run from this point to the hauen of Sian along by the land north and south the Islandes aforesaide are within 10. miles of the hauen as you passe along they are not ouer great neyther haue they any trees nor fresh water and all along you find good ground till you be within halfe a mile and nearer you shall not goe neither runne in betweene them and the land but let them lie on the east side comming to Pulo Wâ— vntill the tenth of February there you find much east wind whereby the west coast lyeth like an emptie wall therefore you shal keepe on the east side of the aforesaid Ilands that ly along by the coast being sure not to put in betweene them keeping this course north northwest along the shore as I saide before and comming to the furthest pointe of the said Iland which is full vnder 12. deg without seeing any more Ilandes then bee assured that you are within the creeke of Lyon and being there you shall presentlie set your course Northwest Northwest and by North to get out of the creeke least the streame should driue you
you shal still sayl with your lead in hand and when you find 15. or 16. fadom thē you are at the end of the riffe and it may be that as thē you can not sée Pedra Branca and comming to 18. fadome then put no further to the sea and running in that sort till you sée Pedra Branca running as then to the poynt of the land that you shall sée on the land of Iantana which is the land on the North side which you shall passe along by till you come to see redde Houels lying at the Hauen of Ior and before you come to the hauen of Ior you shall hold off from it not putting into the hauen for there lyeth a Banke but you must passe the redde Houels and runne towardes the land which is a sandie strand and as you passe along to the mouth or entrie of the straight of Singapura you must be carefull that as soone as you are within Pedra Branca you runne to the land of Iantana without turning to the other side for there it is verie bad ground and the wind would hinder you to get ouer and if you desire to run on the inside of the Iland Pulo Tymon you may wel doe it The 25. Chapter The course from Malacca to Sunda lying in the Iland of Iaua Maior with the situation of the countrie SAyling from the great Iland lying 3. myles southeast from Malacca to the Riuer called Rio Fermosa your course lieth Northwest Southeast and Northwest and by west and southeast and by east which is 13. miles all this way if you will you may anker and it is not aboue 30. fadome déepe good muddy ground This Rio Fermoso lyeth on the Coast of Malacca within the entry on the Southeast side hath high land and on the Northwest side low land it is in the Hauen sixe or seuen fadome deepe when you enter into it you shall put to the Southeast syde keeping from the Northwest for ther you shall find shallowes From this Rio Fermoso to the Iland Pulo Picon which lyeth in the same Coast a myle from the land aforesayd you runne Northwest and Southeast and Northwest and by north and Southwest and by south betwéene this Iland and the firme land it is shalow groūd and the course is 6 miles from Pulo Picon to Pulo Carymon which is a great and high land with trees with some Ilands round about it you runne North and south and north and by west and South and by east and are distant 5. miles from the Iland Carymon there is about 3. miles to the coast of Samatra you must make towardes this Iland and from thence run along by it on the west syde for it is good way On the south point of this Iland Carymon lyeth certain Ilandes from these Ilandes two myles forward lieth an other smal long Iland called Pulo Alonalon there the channell is at the narrowest From this Iland beginneth the straight called Estrecho de Sabon that is y e straight or narrow passage of Sabon and being as farre as that Iland you shall hold about half a mile from it from Alonalon to the great Iland of Sabon are about 2 miles in the middle of this channel there lieth other smal Ilands that shall all lie on the East side from you hauing good regard not to fall vpon them whē you run through this channel you must be aduertised that in the middle thereof there lieth a hidden Cliffe vnder the water whereon a ship did once strike with her Ruther Comming by the Iland Alanolon on the Southwest thereof that is on the syde of Sumatra you shal see two small Ilands with an other somewhat lesse full of trées bee all rampard with certaine cliffes lying by them and whē those Ilandes are southwest south west by west frō you thē you shal hold your course South where you shall find nyne fadome water alwaies keeping off from the Coast of Sabon which is the east syde for it is shallow but run in the middle of the channel for it is good ground half a mile off from the Iland Sabon lieth a small Iland called Pulo Pandha this Iland in the middle hath a stonie cliffe and when you are so farre that Pulo Pandha lyeth Eastsoutheast from you thē hold your course southward and you shal find 9. fadome deepe running half a myle distant from the Iland of Sabon the Iland and cliffe aforesaid being past you shall find hard ground holding your course South vntill the Iland Pulo Pendha lieth northnorth east from you where you shall presently find muddy ground and from thence forward you may anker if you will and when the aforesayd Cliffe lyeth from you as aforesayd then on the West syde you shall see two Ilandes or Cliffes whereof the first hath some trees and the other which lyeth nearest to the mouth of Campar in the Iland of Sumatra hath no trées they close one to the other from thence to Sumatra are many stone Cliffes when you come to passe by these Ilandes that shall lie from you on the side of Sumatra you shall runne through the middle of the channell betwéene the Ilandes and the coast of Sabon southward as I saide before holding your course along the coast of Sabon about halfe a mile from it where you shall alwayes finde eyght fadome muddy ground vntill you come to a small Iland lying hard by the coast of Sabon hauing many Cliffes round about it and as you passe by it you shall keepe outwarde from it leauing it on the side of Sabon there likewise you haue muddie ground and the shot of a great péece further off the depthes will presently begin to lessen to seuen and sixe fadome and ½ from thence you shall runne to a point of the Island Sabon lying right ouer against one of the mouthes of Campar those mouthes or holes ly on the coast of Sumatra right in the face of this point about two bowes shot from the land there lyeth two Cliffes which at full sea cannot be séene they are called Batotinge betwéene them and the land are sixe or seuen fadome deepe and betwéene them both nyne fadome you may passe with a shippe betweene them and to seawarde from them towards Sumatra you finde hard by 12. and 13. fadome déepe to make towards these cliffes and also to passe by them you shall take your course as soone as you sée the aforesaide Islands that by the Island of Sabon being past as you do passing along by Sabon with your lead in your hand at seuen sixe ½ ◠fadom deep and thether the depths will lessen being all muddie ground which you shall haue vntill you come right against the highest houell of those that stande vppon the point of Sabon and with a point of the lande of Sumatra being one of the sides of the mouthes of Campar called As Bocas de Campar from whence the one land lyeth with the other East and West in this country are
the aforesaid cliffs of Batotinge being here the depthes will presently beginne to increase to seauen and eight fadome which depthes you shall holde vntill the Cliffes lie behinde you and from thence putting to sea towards the side of Samatra leauing Sabon side being carefull to kéepe from it for you haue nothing els in that place that can hurt you but onely the cliffes which the streames runne vnto you shall likewise take heed on both sides as wel of Sabon as Sumatra for they are all ouer from thence along the coast full of bankes and shallowes These two Cliffes aforesaid being past which you shall almost leaue behinde you you shall presently runne to the land of Sumatra with the lead in your hand not passing lesse then fiue fadome nere vnto the land nor aboue seauen fadome to seaward with your lead neuer out of hand for in this countrie you must rule your selfe more by the lead and depthes then by the compasse When you are at the end of this Iland of Sabon then you haue another Island called Pulo Dure which reacheth to another Island called Pulo Boyon then another Iland called Pulo Buron which lie so close to Sumatra that they séeme to be all one land at the end of this Iland Dure lie 3. Ilands one great and two small This Iland Dure lieth with the point of Sabon where the two small Cliffes lie north northwest and south southeast they are in distance about sixe or seuen miles with 6.7 and 8. fadome water muddie ground when you are right ouer against the Iland called Pulo Buron which lieth close to the coast of Sumatra then run southeast and southeast by south and following that course vntil you come to tenne fadome then runne Southeast vntill you come by a point of the land of Sumatra called Tanianbaro from this point to the Iland of Pulo Buron are three miles which is without the channell and when this point of Tanianbaro lieth westward frō you then run south and south and by east to the 3. Ilands called Calantigas whereof the first hath an Iland lying by it on the south side the middle Iland hath nothing at all and the third Iland that lieth most southward hath an Iland lying by it on the North side These Ilands as you passe by them shall lie eastward from you from this point Tanianbaro somewhat further lieth an other point called Tanianbaro which is very euen with the sea betwéene these 2. points lieth the Riuer of Andargyn and the aforesaid point of Tanianbaro lieth with the Ilands East and West betweene both the points are 9. miles When you sée this point then from thence forward you shall no more sée the land of Sumatra because there are many créekes from this point you make to the Ilands Calantigas Northwest and Southeast and is in length about seauen miles These Ilands lie vnder 1. degree vpon the south side of the Equinoctiall on the east side of these Ilands you haue many stonie cliffes both aboue vnder the water therefore you must put off from them to seaward for that betweene them the Iland of Linga it is very foule and dangerous if you will goe from the Islandes Calantigas to the Island Varella then hold your course Southeast and Southeast and by East whereby you shall come to it They are in distance 9. miles and in this way you shall finde seuen or eight fadome déepe and close by the land sixtéene and seuentéene fadome on the North side but on the South side it is lesse This Island hath fresh water it lieth right ouer against a point of the land of Samatra called Tanianbon from the which point to the Island are two miles and you runne North Northwest and South Southeast and you must passe betwéene this Island and the point leauing the Island to seaward On the backe bord side in the face of this point lieth thrée Islandes whereof the greatest is called Iambe but along by the land of Samatra you haue neyther Islandes nor Cliffes To runne from the Island Pulo Varella to the Straightes of Palimbon then run Southeast at seuen fadome muddy ground and with this course you shall sée the hill called Monte de Manopyn which standeth right in the face of the Island Banca When you sée this hill then you can hardlie sée the coast of Samatra because of the créekes and you shall kéepe the same course to the said hill runnning a mile and a halfe from it towards the coast of Samatra leauing the hill on the northeast side not comming any nearer to it for it hath a great Riffe lying a mile from it and when you are right against the hill Manopyn thē you are right against the mouths or créekes called as Vocas de Palimbon lying vppon the Coast of Samatra a mile from the aforesaid point of Palimbon forward there lieth a smal or thin point of land and on the south side of the same point there are many cliffes rockes about a mile into the sea al lying vnder the water which make the riffes aforesaid wherefore I aduise you to kéep at the least a mile and a halfe or two miles from it be not deceiued by the great depthes that are along by those riffes for that from many depthes you will at the last fall on ground as it happened to a ship which sailing on that side close to the Island Banca at fiftéene fadome strak with his ruther vpon the stones You must likewise bee carefull not to kéepe too neere the land called as Bocas de Palimbon or the mouthes of Palimbon for they are altogether shallowes and sandes let your Lead be still in hand and goe no nearer then fiue fadome and ½ to the land vntill you be past them nor aboue eight fadome to seaward and if you come to eight fadome then rather kéepe at lesse depth as I said before You runne from this hill Manopyn which standeth in the Iland Banca to the mouthes or creekes of Palimbon that lie on the other side of Samatra north northeast south southwest and is in course fiue miles From thence beginneth the straight called Palimbon which reacheth southeastward and sometimes eastward and in other places southward till you be past through it being past the hill of Manopyn about two miles beyond it you shall hold your course to the first mouth or creeke of Palimbon with the Lead in hand keeping a mile from it at 5. fadome and ½ and goe no nearer to it for they are altogether shallowes and sandes wherefore I counsell you not to goe nearer then 5. fadome and ½ and towards Banca not nearer then 8. fadome holding your course in this manner till you be about a mile beyond the last mouth of Palimbon being there you shall make with the land of Samatra till you be within halfe a mile thereof where th◠land about a long mile right out before you maketh a point and being
by this point you shall sée another point which is distant from the first point 4. miles and the course from the one to the other is east southeast west northwest and beeing at this second point about a mile beyond it on the same coast lieth a small riuer and betwéene this point and the riuer you runne halfe a mile of the shore or coast of Samatra alwaies with your lead in hand From this riuer aforesaid you shall put from the coast from this Riuer to another point lying 5 miles forward it is altogether bankes and shallowes with muddie ground therefore you shall still saile with your lead in hand goe no nearer then 5. fadome to the coast of Samatra for if you doe you run on ground and at this depth you shall run to the aforesaid point that lieth before you right against it on the other side of the Iland Banca hath a point or hooke of high land where the channell is at the smalest and comming by this point aforesaid you shall presently finde more depthes When you come to this point aforesaid then runne south southeast holding that course till you come to the Iland of Lasapara which lieth right before you being distant from the saide point 9. miles This Iland is small and low land being round about full of sands and shallowes and when you sée it then runne South and South and by east within two miles of the land on the south side of Samatra and sixe and seauen fadome for it is your right way and course to passe before that Iland and if you finde ten or twelue fadome then turne againe to the coast of Samatra séeking for fiue fadome that you may runne at sixe and seauen fadome and beeing there keepe that course leauing the Iland of Lasapara on the east side and when you begin to enter therein then run southward and being right against the Iland then your depthes will begin to lessen to 5. fadome but bee not abashed for it is the right depthes you find in that place and when the Iland is Eastward from you then you are right ouer against it from the Iland Lasapara twelue miles forward there is an Iland lying close by the Land of Samatra that maketh a smal créeke or bay and for a marke it hath this token that the trees thereof are higher then those of the coast and séeme little woodes you runne from this Iland to Lasapara North North east and south southwest from the which Iland there runneth a Riffe reaching two miles and a halfe into the sea therefore if you desire to saile thether being in the night time you shall run southward with your lead in hand at 8. and 9. fadome and though you come to 11. fadome yet your course is good but you shall not runne vnder 7. fadome and as you thinke you are past by the Iland then you shall take your course againe towardes the land and there you shall finde 8. and 9. fadome comming to this Iland in the daie time you shall put so far from it into the sea that you may onely sée the toppes and vpper parts of the trees and when it lieth Northwest from you then you are past the Riffe then againe runne in with the land at 8. and 9 fadome déepe as aforesaid for the right way and course is alwaies along the Coast beyond this Ilād forward there lieth a gréene creeke vpon the coast which you shall shun for there it is altogether shallowes and the corner therof towards the south hath a thick point of land that sticketh further out then al the rest that are there abouts within this hooke toward the créeke lieth a Riuer from whence there commeth a banke reaching 2. miles into the sea and is foure fadome deepe all hard sand in that countrie where I haue passed therfore I aduise you not to leaue the depthes of 8. 9. fadome which is the right course and you passe from this Iland to the aforesaid Riffe south southwest and North Northeast being distant ten miles from this point of the creeke to two Ilandes lying on the same coast of Samatra forward you run in the same course of north northeast and south southwest and is in course ten miles in all this way you shall finde 9.10 and 11. fadome These Ilandes are distant from the land 3. or 4. miles and comming to these Ilandes then the land and coast of Samatra maketh a thicke crooked ridge or backe and if it be cleare weather you shall sée right before you two high landes wherof one lieth southwestward from you which is the land of Samatra and the other southward which is the land of Sanda part of the Iland Iaua Maior From the two Ilands aforesaid you shall alwaies hold your course along by this crooked thicke ridge of the coast of Samatra being at the point thereof then the land beginneth againe to be low and then you begin clearely to sée the two foresaid lands Betweene those two high landes there runneth a channell or straight inward to the sea betwéene the land of Samatra and Iaua Maior which is called the straight of Sunda beeing past the great thick ridge of the coast of Samatra and comming againe by the low land then runne no longer by the coast but if you haue a good forewind then presently crosse ouer holding your course south southeast to the land of Sunda to the southeast side of a point or hooke of that land by the which lieth the way to Sunda therefore I aduertise you hauing a good forewind to crosse ouer for that if the winde should begin eyther to be calme in the middle way the tide being with you the streame would driue you to the channell which is no good course for the least depth of the channell is 40. fadome and more the streames and tydes therein runne very stiffe both out and in and if they should driue you in as the streame commeth forth being with a Northeast or east winde you should finde the waues of the sea hollow and full that no cable would be strong enough to hold against them by force would driue you out againe which would be no small labour and paine to you I say this because I my selfe haue found it so comming into it by mine owne vnaduisednes in crossing ouer to the high land lying on the side of Sunda and held our course right vpon the midle thereof but the streame draue you ouerthwart before we perceiued it therfore I aduise you that you runne southeast to it for the more you runne eastward the lesse depth you shall haue to anker in if the winde should calme and it is good ground and being by the land aforesaid close by it you shall presently sée a great flat Iland full of trées with many hilles hauing to seaward from it or toward the northeast another flat Iland and from thence to the hauen of Sunda it is
about 4. miles you shall hold your course to the Hauen along by the Iland that lieth on the coast keeping to seaward or halfe a mile from it for it is all faire and good ground at 6 and 7. fadome deepe and so you shall runne along to the end therof and being there about a mile southeastward you shall sée a small Iland full of trees which you shall leaue on the southeast side running inward from it right to a high pointed hill that standeth within the land and when you begin to come néere it then you shall see the houses of the towne which lieth along by the strand and there you may anker at 4. and 3. fadome as you thinke good for it is all muddie ground and if you desire to runne into the Hauen through a Channell which passeth betweene the great Iland and the high land of Sunda you may well doe it alwaies running along by the land vntill you be by the Hauen for you shall leaue the Iland aforesaid and six Ilands more that are somewhat further to seaward but you finde but two fadome and ½ stonie ground wherefore the way passing about is the best as I said before The 26. Chapter The course from the Hauen of Bantam to the Hauen Calapa called Sunda Calapa both lying on the north side of the Iland Iaua Maior SAyling from the Hauen of Bantam to Sunda Calapa you should holde your course betweene the little Iland and the Iland lying right ouer against the crooked point because the streames runne towardes the Channell or straights sayling about the shot of a great peece from all the Ilands or along by them for it is all good way at fiue and sixe fadome deepe muddie ground because that froÌ„ the hooke of the bow or crooked point there runneth a great banke or sand and being about this hooke you shall run 6. or 7. fadome deepe till you be a good mile from it for from this crooked point to another that lieth on the same land it is altogether bankie shallow sandie ground and to seaward from this point lyeth a long Iland called Pulo Tunda and three or foure miles Eastward from thence there lieth a whole row of Ilands both great and small which are al vnder the same course at the end of those Ilands which are foure one great and thrée smal they are ioyned together with Riffes and along by those Riffes you shall finde twentie foure twenty fiue fadome deepe and you shall leaue al those Ilandes standing on a row to seaward from you from the point aforesaid called the crooked hooke All the coast vnto Calapa runneth East and somewhat East and by south you runne along by it at 7. and 8. fadome for if you put further to seaward then the streames run too stiffe towards the straight or the channell that runneth outwardes betweene Iaua and Samatra which is against you and is of manie depthes â—oure miles froÌ„ the crooked hooke or point forward then the coast hath another point of land where right ouer against it about a mile to seaward from it there lieth a round Iland but you must not passe betweene it and the land for it is very shallow stonie ground only small fusts may passe through it but you shall runne about halfe a mile to seaward from it for it is all along nothing but stones a little mile beyond this Iland there is another Iland and then yet a little further close by there lyeth another little Iland from these two Ilandes a mile southeastward close by the land there lyeth two other Ilands betwéene the two first Ilands and these two Ilands there is a channell of 6. or 7. fadome deepe which passing through you shall runne nerest to the Ilands that lie most to seaward if you will not passe through then run about to seaward from them at 12.13 and 15. fadome déepe from this long Iland northward endeth the Ilands that lie to seaward hauing the Riffs as I said before and make a mouth or opening of a channel of a great mile long you shall here run nearest to the Ilandes that lye closest to the land for that running by to the Ilands that lie to seaward you shall presently sée the Riffes which with a low water are most part vncouered being past this long Iland the other that lieth the shot of a great péece from it as also the two that lie further forward the land of the coast that hath the point then somewhat beyond this point 4. other Ilands betwéene the which and the land you may by no meanes passe a small mile further eastward there lieth other 4. Ilands two and two together at the end whereof to seaward there is a white saÌ„d that alwaies lieth vncouered all these Islandes you shall leaue on your right hand on the land side and being on the south side somewhat past this white sand you shall sée two high hils within the land which lie east west one from the other at the foote of the east hill lieth the hauen of Calapa where you shall anker if you wil enter into the hauen being past the foresaid sands an Iland that lyeth from thence toward the land then there wil foure Ilandes lie southeastward from you which teach towards the land another close by he land then you shal take heed of a sand lying north east close by the hauen which you may alwaies see and when it is high water it is washed away by the flood you shal runne towardes these Islandes which lie to seaward from the hauen béeing day time to shunne the droughtes aforesaid The 27. Chapter The course from the Iland Pulo Timon to the Hauen of Sunda in the Iland of Iaua Maior FRom the Iland of Pulo Timon you run to the Iland of Binton to a point of land that from the same Iland runneth almost Eastward into the sea south Southeast and North Northwest and hard by this point lieth certaine Riffes of small rockes and cliffes and on the north side of this point it hath an opening or mouth wherein there lieth a great Iland with two hilles and a vallie in the middle and along by this point lesse then halfe a mile from the land there are eight fadome deepe of flatte and cleare sandy ground and hath no foulenes but the stone Cliffes Rockes that lie close by the land from this point aforesaid of the Iland of Binton to the Southeast point of the Iland Pulo Panion which hath an Iland lying to seaward from it you runne Southeast and Northwest Southeast and by east and Northwest and by West betweene this Iland Pulo Panion and the Iland of Binton lieth an opening which in the middle way hath two flat small Ilands full of trées and if you cannot passe Pulo Panion on the east side then you may passe inward betwéene it and the land it hath fiue and sixe fadome déepe good
ground and you need feare nothing but that you sée before you This Iland of Pulo Panion lieth close to the land of Binton and if you fortune to be so neare the land that you may not passe by it on the sea side then you must runne to the northwest point where there lieth a rouÌ„d Iland which you shall leaue on the side of the Iland not running betwéene it and the Iland but round about it close to the land for it is faire running so inward along by the Ilands as I said before on the southeast point of this Iland Panion there lieth many Ilands and Cliffes and two miles Southeastward from it lieth a round Iland full of trées you shall passe betwéene these two Ilands towards the Iland of Linga which is a faire cleare way and sea and if you chance to be by this aforesaid mouth or opening then you shall runne on your course outward about the Iland for it is good way from this round Iland or two miles southward lieth a stonie Riffe about the length of the shot of a great péece and hath but one Rocke that is vncouered yet you may sée the water breake vpon them which you must shun From this Iland to the end of the Ilandes of the land of Linga lying close on the East side of the same Iland you shall holde your course South and South and by East and runne Southward outward alwaies along the Ilandes which shall lie Westward from you and when you haue sayled twelue miles you shall sée right before you on the Southwest side a small round Iland lying to Seaward somewhat distant from the rest which is almost of forme like the Iland das Iarras lying by Malacca and foure miles before you come at it you shall sée two other smal round Ilands lying along by the land and seperated from the rest but not far and when you are as farre as the first round Iland béeing cleare weather then you shall sée the high land of the Island of Linga lying West Southwestward from you aboue or beyond the Ilandes whereby you passe which are all low houels and vallies and in this sort you shall runne along by the Ilands comming about thrée miles beyond the round Island you shall sée a small Island somewhat distant from the land which at the first sheweth like two Cliffes and there the land hath a point from thence running inwards making a créeke called a Enseada de Linga and when you are as farre as this small Island then West Northwestward you shall sée the high land of Linga which sheweth like two high rockes or hils seperated from each other and reach North and South that in the North hauing two toppes like a Hares eares and Westward you shall sée another Land which maketh a high crooked ridge somewhat stéepe downeward In all this way to the aforesaid round Iland you shall finde seauentéene and eightéene fadome déep hard and faire ground to the point or end of these Islands and by it you shall haue twentie eight fadome and comming by this point where you discouer the land lying West Southwest from you to goe to Pulo Pon which is an Island distant from Linga 8. miles on the North side hauing two small Ilandes and when you are on the Northeast side it séemeth to be round with a sharpe hill in the middle and from the Southeast side it sheweth two Hilles with a Vallie in the middle as in effect it is then you must runne South Southwest and being thrée or foure miles forward you shal sée the Iland of Pulo Pon lie before you in it you haue fresh water and round about it is fayre ground when you see it you shall make towards it on the West side and halfe a mile from it you shall finde 15. fadome deep and being by it runne South and south and by East with the which course you shall sée the hill of Manopijn lying vppon the point of the Islande Banca where the straight of Palimbon beginneth and the seuen Ilands called Pulo Tayo shall lie southeastwarde from you which are distant from Pulo Pon 7 miles and if in this way you find your depthes to be aboue ten fadom then you are on the East side and hauing ten fadome then you are 6. or seuen miles from Banca and finding 8. fadome you shall not be long before you sée the land of Sumatra and as soone as you sée Manopijn then runne within two miles thereof before you enter into the straight or channell in the same manner holding your course to the mouthes or créekes of Palimbon towards the coast of Sumatra shunning a great créek lying Northwest froÌ„ y e mouthes of PalimboÌ„ vpon y e same coast of Sumatra which hath a verie great hauen and entrie whereby many shippes haue béene deceyued that entred therein it hath no shallowes and presently as you passe along the coast you shall sée the lande thereof stretching south southwest from thence forwarde you holde your course to Sunda as in the voyage from Malacca to Sunda and Iaua is alreadie set down therfore it is not necessarie to rehearse it againe The 28. Chapter The course along the coast of Sumatra fâ—oÌ„ the outside beginning at the fâ—rthest point lying vnder fiue degrees on the North side of the Equinoctiall to the straight of Sunda and so to the Islande Iaua Maior with the situation of the coasts BEing by the furthest point or ende of the Island of Sumatra on the out side then you must runne south along the coast it is a very high and pleasant country to behold with many great créekes and Bayes along by the coast From this first further point called Achein 12. miles forward to another point that reacheth into the sea the coast runneth South and from thence to the sands called Os Baixos de Tristan de Tayde that is the sandes of Trystan de Tayde you must runne along the coast Southeast and southeast and by south the course is fiftie miles by these Ilandes of Tristan de Tayde there are many sandes and shallows that lie round about them on the west Northwest and North sides with many Ilandes and Cliffes on the same sides these Ilandes aforesaid are somewhat like the Ilandes of Pulo Sambilon lying on the coast of Malacca to seawarde from these Ilands of Tristan de Tayde there lyeth 2. Ilandes called Ilhas d'Ouro that is the gold Ilandes whereof the nearest lyeth at the least 10 or 12. myles distant the other 12. or 13. miles further into the sea they lie vnder two degrées and ½ on the North side of the Equinoctiall line from thence you runne to the straight of Sunda hauing many Ilandes all along as you passe as first thrée Ilands lying vnder a degrée and a halfe on the southside of the Equinoctiall East and West from these Ilands lyeth a point vppon the coast of Sumatra called Cabo das Correntes that is the point of the streame because
there the streame runneth very strong towardes the Southwest wherefore there is no other remedy then onely to runne close by the shore if you desire to goe to the straight of Sunda you must be verie careful for there are so many Ilandes along by the coast that they are not to be numbred from the Iland of Tristan de Tayde to the Ilandes of Manancabo are about 100. miles and your course is Northwest and southeast somewhat Northwest and by North and southeast and by south you must run between the Ilandes As Ilhas d'Ouro and the lande by which course you shall come to the poynt O Cabo das Correntes which is verie high running into the sea further then all the rest of the land but you must not go too neere to the point for there are certaine sandes and cliffes sticking out from it this point lyeth vnder one degrée and â…” on the South side of the Equinoctiall I set down no other marke to know the countrie of Sumatra because the streames draue to seaward without all these Ilands so I could not take a better course then to put to the Iland called Ilha d'Ouro de Manancabo that is the golde Iland of Manancabo and I fel on it vpon the sea side running for the space of 4. or 5. daies along by it it is a verie high and faire Iland to behold so that you may easily iudge well perceyue that it hath Gold it is altogether of a smooth stéepe grounde along by the sea side it is about 10. or 12. miles in length you run by it North south and somewhat north and bâ— West and south and by East it hath on the sea side 5. or 6. Ilandes about a myle and a halfe distant from the land vnder thrée degrees which is the height that I found but they are distant from the firme lande of Sumatra 8. or 9. myles the Riuer of Manancabo lying on the land of Sumatra right ouer against this countrie I think it to be a verie great riuer for from thence there runneth a great streame and much wood and other trash driueth from it at the least 10. or 12. miles into the sea The best marke we found vpon this coast of Sumatra was that we neuer left the sight of land but ran along by it for by that course you come to the Iland Ilha de Ouro scarce to 3. and 3. degrées and ½ I write this because you shall not trust to the running of the streame that draweth Southwestward as I said before from the Iland Ilha de Ouro you run to the straight of Sâ—nda southeast and Southeast and by south and being past Ilha de Ouro there lyeth two Ilandes which reach North and south one from the other in the same course with the Island of Gold about 5. or 6. miles nowe to runne to the mouth or entry of the straight of Sunda you must not leaue the coast of the firme land hauing good respect to the Ilandes and cliffes whereof there are very many lying by it that you can hardly know where to find y e mouth of the straight but onely by the knowledge of the Islande which is very high lying right ouer against a point of the Iland of Sumatra on the north side this firme land of Sumatra endeth there where with the Iland of Iaua Maior it maketh the straight it hath on the Northwest side of this straight two or thrée Ilands lying about a mile from the land and vpon the Ilandes that lie néerest to the lande there was once a shippe taken with French men the great shotte being kept by the kinges of the Islande of Banda and Calâ—pa and aâ— mile southwarde from the lande lyeth the Iland that hath a high sharpe pointed hill as I saide before and on the North side of this high sharp hil or Iland are 4. Ilands whereof one is verie high reaching Northeast and southwest they lie somewhat further from it that is by the aforesaid Ilands close by the point on the Northeast side betweene al these Ilands the land there is a great créeke of manâ— hidden cliffes lying vnder the water whereof some are vncouered and thinke not to enter into this créeke vnlesse it be with a Fuste or a very small ship for it is better to runne towardes the Iland lying on the south side thereof along by the point which you neede not feare for it hath nothing that can hurt you and then you shall presently sée lying before you on the Northeast side a poynt of lande which sheweth to haue 2. or 3. Ilands at the end thereof along by this point lyeth the mouth or entrie of the straight of Sunda where you must passe through this point reacheth North and south hauing in the North a high houell the south side being the ende of the same land close by the mouth of the straight for a better marke Northeastward from you you sée a long Iland and on the southeast part a high land which land lyeth aboue Bantam a hauen in the Ilande of Iaua where the Portingalles lade Pepper which groweth is gathered in that Ilande and behind the aforesaide high lande lyeth the towne of Bantam and before you come to the said land that lyeth aboue Bantam you shall in the East Northeast perceiue two or thrée Ilands and if you desire to go to Bantam you may passe betweene these Ilands but I once againe aduise you of the Iland lying in the mouth or channell or straight of Sunda aforesaide which is for a marke of the said straight being very high and deepe withall and hath this token that when you are past or about the first point or hooke you may then anker at 20. and 25. fadome deepe as you haue occasion vnlesse it be close to the land where there lyeth many white stones and rockes and further to seawarde it is altogether muddie grounde at 20. and 25. fadome but it is best for you to anker as neere the lande as you may for your best securitie for there are many stiffe blastes that come out of the land this high Island or poynted hill lyeth vnder fiue degrees and ½ for there I haue often taken the height of the sunne as I lay at anker and the mouth or entry of the straight of Sunda lyeth vnder y e same height to sea warde you haue these Ilandes as you passe to the mouth or entry of the straight the first Ilandes lying West to seaward from the aforesaid pointed high hill or Iland and West Southwest or seuen miles from thence there is a rowe of Ilandes with certaine Cliffes lying about them and Southward other sixe or seuen miles there lyeth other high and great Ilands and also Southwestward from thence there are other Ilandes betweene all these Ilandes there are many channelles which are so narrow that men can hardly get out of them the best channell to runne through I founde by the aforesaide high pointed
hill or Islande on the South-East side reaching Northeast and southwest in all these channels you neede feare nothing but that which lyeth before your eies The 29. Chapter To saile from Calapa in the Islande Iaua Maior to China with the courses and situations of the coasts particularly set downe SAyling out of the hauen of Calapa you shall runne to an Iland lying by the poynt of Carauon that lyeth néerest to the land wherby you shal presently see two points of sandie downes which reach towardes the Ilands that reach to seaward when they are on your right hande then you must put in betwéene the Ilandes through the channell where the winde giueth you best way for it is all fayre and good ground being past these Ilandes you shall runne along by the coast to the point of Carauon which lyeth Eastward about two and a halfe or thrée myles in length from thence to take your course crosse ouer to the Islande of Lusepara and from this point of Carauon lying on the coast of Iaua you runne North and South to the Iland of Lusepara or Lasapara and somewhat North and by West and South and by East the course being fiftie miles the course is holden in this manner because the East and East Southeast winds as then beginne to blowe in those countries that is as soone as the month of May commeth on and likewise as then the waters and streams beginne to runne with the Monson of the year which is the coniunction and time of the certaine winds towards the straight of Sunda the channell of Lampon which beginneth from the mouth reacheth to a thicke point and créeke with a Riffe lying on the coast of Sumatra about 18. or 19. miles from Lusepara in the Countrey aforesaide by the point Carauon which lyeth thrée myles froÌ„ the hauen of Calapa you shall take your course North Northeast for 8. or 9. miles whereby you shall sée a round Island which will lie on the side of the land of Sunda or Iaua and being past this Island Westwarde from thence you shall sée a rowe of Islandes that do all reach North and south passing by the countrey of the mouth or straight of Sunda by this aforesaid round Ilande you shall find ground at 20. fadom at the which depth you shall take your course North North and by West whereby you shall alwaies be within the sight of the aboue named Ilands to the ende of them with the aforesaid depth of 20. fadome when you beginne to lose the sight of these Ilandes being past them you shall presently come to 14. and 13. fadome and being at 13. fadome you shall runne the same course of North and North and by east vntill as you thinke you are within 15. or 16 miles neere the Iland of Lusepara and being there then run North and there the depthes will begin to lessen to 11. fadome which is a good course for that running at more depth you should go outward at Lusepara thus sayling North and at 1â— fadome as I saide before you are in your right course till you come to 9. fadom and being there then looke about you for you shall not runne long but you shall sée the Island of Lâ—separa which will open like two small houelles lying East and west one from the other y t in the east being greater theÌ„ the other in all this wâ—y in y e Month of May I found East east southeast windes as I said before and according to the times of the waters windes and streames you shall gouerne your selfe in such manner that in your course you alwaies run Northward for it is your right course best way from the point Carauon to the Island Lusepara and if you go later to saile hauing a ful wind without any abatement or cutting off you shall holde your course right North for it is very daungerous to saile without the Iland Lusepara therefore you shall take your course in such manner that the Ilande may ly Eastward from you because Lusepara lyeth twelue myles Eastwarde from the other Ilande which is called Lusepara falsa that is false or wrong Lusepara because many shippes haue been deceyued by it thinking it had béene the right Lusepara when they came from the Iland of Iaua and therefore they haue giuen it the name of Lusepara falsa you must take heede of it for that northward from it it hath a great creek lying in the Island of Banca and such as put into it can hardly gette out againe the right way for there the windes are very scant whereby you might indure great paine and daunger to get into the strayght as it hath happened to some shippes that were deceyued by Lusepara falsa therefore I aduise all men when they sayle to Lusepara that they put not in aboue eleuen fadome letting the Islande of Lusepara lie on the East side so assure them of their way And when you sée Lusepara being within 3. miles thereof you shall take heede you goe not right North and south towardes it for that on the North side as also on the south for more then two miles and a halfe it is altogether bankes and sands that are very dangerous therefore you shall hold on the Southwest side in such manner that you shall keep two miles from it towardes the lande of Sumatra I haue past within lesse then a mile from it whereby I discouered the whole strande and a white strande which banke lyeth on the North side and in this course I founde fiue fadome and ½ muddie ground but as soone as the Island was southeast froÌ„ vs we had but four fadome and ½ and 4. fadom and strake twice on grounde without rother but verie softly wee founde all ouer sandie ground but as soone as wee put to the land of Sumatra wee had presently deepe ground therefore I wish you to keepe two miles from the Ilande towardes Sumatra and when you beginne to come neere it you shall hardly find fiue fadome muddy grounde and when it lyeth Eastward from you then you are right ouer against it and then you shall presently see a point of the lande of Sumatra wherevnto you shall runne and there you shall find more depthes and running towardes the coast you may goe within halfe a myle neere the saide point of lande where you shall finde ten fadome deepe of harde flatte ground vntill you be a good way from the point you runne from the coast of Sumatra from the straight of Sunda to this point North Northeast and South South-West from this first pointe thrée miles further there is another poynt vpon the said coast of Sumatra and you shall make thether kéeping halfe a myle from the coast alwayes with the lead in your hande where you shall find the same depthes of 9. or 10. fadome harde ground as you begin to go néer to the aforesaid 2. point theÌ„ you shal find muddy ground
right ouer against it in y e Ilande of Banca there lyeth an other hooke or point of land where the channell is at the narrowest it is from the one land to the other about three miles from the first point to the second the course is North and South from the seconde poynt sixe miles forwarde there is another point vppon the coast of Sumatra which you must runne with the other poynt North Northwest and South southeast and betwéene them both it is altogether bankie and very shallow muddie ground which reacheth also about by the middle way of the channell being aboue foure miles in length along by the coast of Sumatra to a Riuer which you shall sée and being as farre as the aforesaid point be not negligent in casting forth your leade and there you shall come to fiue fadome muddie ground but runne no lower for then you shoulde presently bee at foure fadome you must rule your selfe according to your depthes alwaies holding your course on the coast of Sumatra not passing aboue seuen fadome and when you see the aforesaide Riuer and beginne to bee neere it then your depthes will presently begin to increase running close by it vntill you bee right against it being within halfe a mile of the point foure miles from this third point lyeth yet an other point which lyeth with the third point East Southeast and West Northwest holding your course along by the coast within halfe a mile of the lande at seuen and eight fadome déepe it is altogether to the fourth point muddie ground from this fourth point to y e first mouth or creek of Palimbon called A Premeira Boca de Palimbon is about two myles and you runne East and West and East and by South and West and by North and being about a mile beyonde this fourth point aforesaide you shall keepe off from the coast to seaward to shun the mouth of Palimbon aforesaid running two miles from it because of many sands and shallows that are thereabout alwayes with the lead in hand not running aboue sixe fadome néere the land to be the more assured for from 5. fadome you come presently to foure and then on ground and runne not too néere towardes the side of the Islande Banca for there you find stones and rockes whereupon the Iunco that is the shippe of Antam de Payua did runne which was at fiftéene fadome and strake with his rother vpon stones cliffes therefore I aduise you not to runne aboue 8. fadome nor vnder sixe or fiue fadome and ½ from the second mouth or creeke called A Secunda Boca de Palumbon close by the third mouth for when the hill of Manopiâ—n that is the point of the Iland Banca lyeth full Eastward from you then you shal crosse ouer kéeping your course two miles from it to auoide a Riffe that lyeth southeast from it being in this parte whereby the hill of Manopiâ—n lyeth southeastward from you then you shal run North and Northeast by east by y e which course you shal see 7 Ilands lying altogether by the country people called Pulo Taye which lie about 15. miles from Manopiâ—n these Ilands shall lie on the southeast side from you being right against these Ilands you shal see a little Iland lying in the Northeast which hath 2. houelles in forme like two men it lyeth about seuen miles froÌ„ the aforesaid Ilandes is called Pulo Pon. From these Ilands aforesaid then your course lyeth along by this Iland and if it be cleare wether beyond this Iland you shall perceiue the IlaÌ„d of Lingâ— which is very great hauing two high rockes lying north south from each other on the south rocke vpon the North poynt thereof it hath a high sharpe point with two houels stiking out like hares eares in this course you shall find 9. or 10. fadome water all muddy ground About 5. or 6. myles Northeastward from these aforesaid Ilands there lyeth an other Iland hard by the Iland of Banca you shall see 2. or 3. Ilands and wheÌ„ you see them then passe not by them for they are the Ilandes of Pulo Tayo which you séeke being by these IlaÌ„ds of Pulo Tayo as I said before you shall doe your best to runne closer to them then to the Iland Pulo Pon holding your course north and north by east whereby you shall see the Ilande of Binton and Pulo Panyon which is hard by on the East point making a smal channel betweene them both From this Iland Pulo Panyon about two miles southeastward lyeth a round Iland full of trees you may passe betwéene both the Ilandes or outward about the round Ilande for it is all faire and good ground shunning a riffe lying in the South about two miles from the rouÌ„d Iland wherevpon you shal sée the sea breake it is about the length of the shot of a great péece being beyond this Iland then runne North whereby you shal see Pedra Branca that is the white stone or cliffe which in the course from Malacca to China we haue oftentimes spoken of from thence forward you shal hold your course as I haue set it downe in the description of the course from Malacca to China therefore here again néedlesse to rehearse From the Iland Pulo Tayo aforesaid to the aforesaid Iland Pulo Panyon it may be about 37 miles litle more or lesse The 30. Chapter The course together with the descriptioÌ„ of the Iland of Canton with all the coasts hauens and pointes of the kingdom of China to Liampo Nanquin with the situation and stretchings of the same IN the description of the nauigation from Malacca to China we haue shewed the entrie of the Channelles of the first Ilandes called Canton lying vnder 21. degr â— which is the Iland called Ilha de Sanchoan and the other lying to landward from thence as also the IlaÌ„d of Valco de Faria you must vnderstand that from this Iland Sanchoan which as I said is the first furthest to the sea ward to a point lying 12. miles from the Iland Lamon you runne without all those Ilands eastnortheast westsouthwest these Ilandes reach about 38. or 39. miles along by the Iland of Sanchoan and from this Iland to Lampacon are 11. miles and in the hauen of Macau eighteene myles and from Macau to the end of the Ilands are twentie one miles these Ilands lying from Sanchoan to Macau from the seaward vpon the row are many and close one to the other which farre off séeme to be all one land from theÌ„ce forward they begin to lessen and to separate one from the other whereby they may easily be perceiued to be Ilands all this way to the end of them to seaward from them you need not feare any thing but that you see before your eyes onlie that you haue 10. or 12. Ilandes or stony cliffes lying 10. miles from Macau forward to seaward from an Iland betwéen the which Iland and cliffe
you may well passe running along by the Iland for it is a faire and great Channel or if you will you may passe to seaward without the cliffes if you desire not to runne between them you shall holde the course as I heere set downe Thorough the Channell that is betweene these Ilandes called As Ilhas de Sanchoan or of Canton and fourteene miles North-northwestward from the Iland Sanchoan there lyeth a poynt of land which reacheth from thence to the hauen of Comaye also from thence the land runneth East for the space of fyue miles where it maketh an end reaching from thence foure myles inwarde towardes the North from whence againe it putteth outward to the East to Macau in this land that stretcheth North there is a small Creeke from whence you runne Eastward to Comaye it is much sayled by the Lanteas and Bancoins which are the barks and Lighters of China that carie the Marchandise and goods aborde the Iuncos or shippes that come thether from Sian to take in lading this land maketh an Iland called Taaquinton three miles beyond the aforesaid small Creeke lyeth one of the mouthes or entries of the Riuer of Canton which is called Camon it is a verie good entrie for that through it the great Bancoins or Chinish Lighters doe passe to the Towne of Canton Beyond this mouth or entrie of Camon lyeth the Hauen of Pinhal to the seaward and close by the entrie thereof lyeth a sand which you must shunne and 2. miles beyond this hauen of Pinhal there is the other mouth or entrie where you put into Canton with small Lanteas and Bancoins which by the Portingales is called As Orelhas de Lebre that is the Hares eares because that inward to the land it hath two high and sharpe pointes of land like a Hares eares a little within this entrie lyeth a riffe which may easily be seene from thence to the Hauen of Macau are about three myles you runne along by the land thorough a small shallow Channel which is but a fadome and a half deepe at high water the West poynt of Taaquinton aforesayd lyeth North and South with the middle of the Channel from the entrie of Sanchoan and the Iland of Vasco de Faria This Ilande of Vasco de Faria reacheth Eastward like Taaquinton and they lie north and South from each other This entrie or Channel which both these Ilandes make is faire and good muddie ground therein to anker and you anker close by the Iland of Faria in the midde way where it is good fresh water from the East point or hooke of this Ilande aforesayd to the poynt of Taaquinton there is a Banke of three fadome deepe muddie ground the deepest part thereof is by the Iland of Faria aforesaid and being past that you haue more depthes if you desire to sayle from the Iland of Sanchoan to Macau you haue two wayes whereof the safest is outward through the mouth or Channel betweene the Iland of Vasco de Faria running to seaward along by the Ilandes like those that come outward from the sea the other way is East through the Channell of Taaquinton and Vasco de Faria and béeing at the end thereof about foure miles Northeastward you shall see the hauen of Lampacon which is two great and high Ilandes with manie trees lying East and West The mouth or entrie of this hauen which is betweene the Ilandes aforesayd hath within foure or fyue fadome déepe of verie soft muddie ground therefore it is hard ankering there and besides there runneth a great streame at the entrie on the west side it hath a great Iland or stony cliffe right in the middle of the mouth such as desire to enter on the west syde of this Hauen must runne between this great Cliffe and 3. Ilands there you find a bank of 8. spannes of water muddy ground on the South part of these 2. Ilands there is an other great high Iland which reacheth northeast southwest betwéen this Iland and Lampacon you may passe through on the east side of the mouth or entry of the hauē of Lampacon lieth a great and high Iland reaching north and south the south point of this Iland lieth East and west with the East poynt of the North Iland of Lampacon and the chānell that runneth betwéene these 2. Ilands which reach Northward it is déepe and faire hauing about the length of the shot of a great péece in breadth right on the East point of the south Iland of Lampacon lieth a round stony cliffe and somewhat eastward lieth a great and high Iland reaching on the north side east and west and on the west side northwest southeast the channel which this stony cliffe maketh is faire and déepe from this stonie cliffe South-eastward ther is an issue or going forth reaching inward to sea al sandy ground with 3 fadome déepe through the which al the ships do passe that come from Lampacon and desire to be outward what way soeuer they go for on the west side it is shalow as I said before Frō Lampacon 7. miles eastward lieth Macau and there is a row of Ilands in the same course of Macau al these Ilandes ly on your south side and from thence to the firme land are 5. or 6. miles this gulf or space betwéene the Ilands the firm land as also from Lampacon to Macau is altogether an open sea hath no more but 2. or 3. Ilandes yet it is all ouer bankie ground for the déepest part therof is but 2. fadome which reacheth about a mile néere the firme land and the Channell which runneth from the sea to the mouth or entry of the riuer of Canton called the hares eares runneth along by the Ilands of the hauen of Macau but returning backe again to the Iland of Vasco de Faria comming right ouer against the end thereof there you haue an other high round Iland and betwéen these 2. Ilands you runne through to sea ward and beyond this Iland there is a row of other Ilands which reach to the mouth or Channel where you passe through when you come out of the sea to Macau and lie Eastnortheast all this Channell or passage that runneth betwéen them out of the sea is faire and good way and there is nothing to be feared but that you sée before your eyes you must run along by these Ilandes leauing them on the south side on the north side hauing the Ilands of Lampacon and when you are right against them northeastward you shall sée an Iland that hath a point of land of very white sand to the which point you shal goe for frō thence to the Iland of Lampacon there is a sandie banke the déepest part thereof being along by this point by the which you shal run along within the length of a shot of a great peece and when you are past this point run Northeast and then on the Northwest side there wil be a great high Iland which lyeth
east west with the south Iland of Lampacon and betwéen it Lampacon there is no other hinderance but onely the great stony cliffe aforesaid you shall run by the southeast point of this Iland leauing it on the Northwest side passing through the channell that runneth betwéene it and another Iland that lieth westward and being through it theÌ„ you are in the channel which comming from the sea runneth to the mouth or entrie called the Hares eares northward and from the channell westward lieth the way to Macau I set not down this course for that I haue shewed it in an other place in the Nauigation from Malacca to China if you passe betwéen these Ilands you must alwaies run with the lead in your hand to find the depthes From Macau â— miles northeastward lieth a very great and high Iland with a very high sharp point which lieth in the greatest mouth or entry of the riuer of CantoÌ„ through the which y e great Iuncoâ— that is the Spanish shippes for marchandise doe passe where our ships I meane the Portingals may likewise passe through and on the West point of this Iland halfe a mile southward lieth certaine stone Cliffes betwéen the which and the Iland it is al déep faire ground as also along by the Iland on the south side beyond these stony cliffes to seaward there lieth certaine smal Ilands and beyond these Ilands somewhat further to seaward there lieth other great Ilands but you must not passe betwéene the aforesaid stony cliffes and the small Ilands but betwéen the smal the great Ilands you may fréelie passe without feare From Macau 4. miles southeastward lieth a great and high Iland being deuided in â— parts by a small running water out of the sea a farre off sheweth like a ship hauing neither trees nor bushes and halfe a mile from thence towardes the land there is an other long Iland with trees in the middle of the channel between these 2. Ilands in the entrie thereof on the side of Macau lyeth a rock or cliffe which the water washeth ouer which you must shunne for all the rest is fair and good way From this great Iland that deuideth it self in 2. parts 6. miles Eastsouth east lyeth an other long high Iland with a very black shining wood of trees called ToÌ„quion and froÌ„ thence half a mile to seaward lieth a row of 10. or 12. Ilands or cliffes you must run betwéene them and the land where it is faire ground or if you will you may passe outward to sea from all the Ilands from this Ilande aforesaid to the land about a myle or thereabouts distant from it lyeth an other low long Iland with trees in the middle of the channell betwéene these 2. Ilands there lieth an Iland or cliffe and an other by the Iland that lieth by the land betwéen this cliffe in the middle of the channell the Iland that lieth to seaward it is déepe faire and on the Eastnortheast point of the Iland to seaward on the land side there is a small créeke or bay where there is a good harbar for the Monson of the south winds and there is likewise good fresh water rouÌ„d about this Iland Tonquion it is all faire ground but turning again to the great Iland with the sharpe pointed top lying in the mouth of the Riuer of Canton from the west point of the same Iland â— or 8 miles eastsoutheast lieth a great high long Iland which reacheth northwest Southeast is altogether without trées or bushes from the Southeast point of the same Iland half a mile to seaward lyeth an other round high Iland and the channel that runneth between them is faire and good on the northeast side of this great Iland from the middle thereof to the land there lieth 2. or 3. long cloueÌ„ Ilands or rockes close by of a reddish earth without any trees betwéene the Northwest end of the aforesaid Iland the land runneth a smal channel through the which the small Bancoins which are the Chinish barkes or lighters doe passe From Canton to the aforesaid Ilande the water maketh a gulfe or créeke through this Countrie you passe when you come from Iapon From this round Iland from the mouth that is betwéene both 7. myles Eastnortheast the land hath a point with a high and eueÌ„ land vpon it ful of black shinning bushes hauing on the Westsouthwest side a still stéepe land and on the Eastnortheast side it is all Valleyes From this land there runneth a poynt into the sea and right against this point about the length of a harquebuse shot there lyeth a great long Iland reaching as the coast doth The channell betwéene this point and the Iland aforesaid is scarse 3. fadome déep within the poynt towardes the land on the Westsouthwest syde there are many and good roads to anker for the Monson of China at 7. 8. fadome déepe muddie ground I haue layne there at anker comming from the Iland of Iapon came through the aforesaid smal channel here al the Ilands called As Ilhas de Canton or the Ilands of Canton do end this way from the 2. aforesaid Ilands to this poynt or hooke of land maketh a golfe by meanes of the great Creeke al this crosse way is faire and good and when it is any hard wether then there goeth a verie hollow water speciallie close by the Channel of the two Ilandes From this poynt of the land aforesaid and the poynt of the Iland 6. miles along by the coast lieth a creeke with certaine Ilands and cliffes in the mouth thereof on the eastnortheast side which are good defence against stormes foule wether there you haue victuails other necessaries and being â— miles to seaward there lieth a stony rocke or cliffe y t a farre off sheweth like a shippe vnder sayle lying vnder 22. degr ½ this coast along by the sea is sandie strand inward béeing a high land it reacheth eastnortheastward to a point of land lying fifteene myles from the poynt Lamon you may anker al ouer and is in distance to this point of land 18 miles you must vnderstand that from the countrie lying at the end of the Ilands of Canton to the Iland Lamon 18. miles to seawarde there lyeth certaine sandes and riffes of red saÌ„d which at low water are vncouered in the which place all the fishermen of that country do meete all the aforesaid sandes and riffes are close without any channell or passage from the aforesaid point of land lying fifteene miles from the Iland Lamon to the Enseada dos Camoriins that is the creeke of Garnaet by the Chinaes called Caiâ—to lying full vnder 25 degrees and ½ you run along the coast northeast and southwest and northeast and by north and southwest and by south without all the points and hookes it is in course 86. miles and turning againe to the point from thence to Lamon are 15. miles and 10 miles from the
aforesaid point lyeth a riuer called Rio do Sal that is the riuer of Salt from whence the salt is carried to Canton it is a great hauen and entrie being past this riuer of Salt foure miles forward there is an other riuer lying by an other point or hooke which riuer by the Chinaes is called Chaochen and by the Portingales Porâ—o de Pecas that is the hauen of Peces for there are made the good peeces of Chinish silkes and other costlie wares This riuer is verie great and hath manye places and villages to land ware that are inhabited lying along by the water it lyeth with the southwest point of this Iland Lamon east southwest and west northwest the land of Lamon lyeth vnder 23 degrees and ¼ it is great and verie high couered with bushes trees it reacheth as the coast doth about a mile from the firme land as you come from Macau sayling along on the west southwest side it sheweth like 2 IlaÌ„ds although it is but one it hath on the southwest or the land side some stony cliffes close by it which at low water are vncouered and at high water the sea breaketh vpon theÌ„ but all the rest of the channell betweene the Iland and the firme land is faire and deepe inough yet you may not passe through for it is full of bushes and other stuffe that driueth although I haue past through it by coÌ„pulsion but with great paine therefore I counsell no man to passe through it vnlesse it be with a Soma that is a Chinish Caruell wherewith they sayle along the coast for the traffick on this aforesaid southwest point of the Iland to seaward there lyeth certaine small flat Ilandes and other rockes betweene the which and the Iland you may not passe and on the northeast point on the land side a verie great creeke where there is a verie good harbor and low road for all windes where likewise our shippes may enter if occasion serueth it is three fadom and ½ deep ground muddy and to enter in you goe nere on the southwest side for I haue beene in it From this southwest point of the Iland aforesaid a mile and a halfe inward to sea there is a riffe that sheweth aboue the water being of some black stones that reach all on a rowe Eastward about three myles and on the syde thereof three flat long Cliffes also in a row whereof that outward is the greatest you may by no meanes passe ouer nor betwéene this riffe and cliffes but betweene the riffe and the Iland there is a verie good channel for I haue past through it it is 20 fadome deepe smal thinne flat sandy ground and you haue nothing there to care for then onlie to keepe by the Iland and the aforesaid Riffe it is good for those that come from Iapon to passe through it for if you passe outward by the sea to auoyde the Riffe it happeneth oft tymes that there you finde the winde sharpe and therefore can hardlie reache the Coast whereby if it chance you must indure great payne before you can get it From this Iland Lamon 6. or 7. myles Eastnortheast lyeth the Hauen of Chabaquon which is an arme of the sea that runneth northeast very déepé to laÌ„dward at the entrie thereof on the southeast side there lyeth a thicke and great poynt of land which from thence ryseth very high and on the Northwest syde it is a low land of sandie strandes From the aforesaid point of land in the same course about the length of the shot of a great peece lyeth a Ryffe of sand wherevpon the water breaketh if you desire to enter into this hauen you must put to the Southeast syde running along by the poynt of the entrie where it is two fadome and ½ deepe half a mile aboue the aforesayd poynt of land on the Southeast part of the land there lyeth a small Créeke or bay of muddie ground which is a good harber in foule wether and for more security you may run so close to the land that you may runne into the mud so leap on shore on the northwest side which is by an Iland where there lieth a town or village where you finde much prouision of victuails other thinges This course is done with Iuncos Somas which are Chinish ships boates this hauen lieth vnder 23. deg ½ behind this créek on the sea side lieth another créek by y t which forward about the leÌ„gth of the shot of a great péece lieth 4 or 5 IlaÌ„ds betwéen the which the laÌ„d you may passe this créeke of the Iland is a barber for the Monson of Malacca that is for the windes that blow when you saile from Malacca to China within it is very good and faire ground the land lying betwéene these two aforesaid créekes is a high and greene cuntrey without bushes or trées the aforesaid islands are round and high stretching along all in a rowe FroÌ„ this Hauen of Chambaqueo to Chinchon the coast runneth Northeast and Northeast and by East and is in distance 22. miles it is all high land and close by the land it is sixtéene fadome déepe and there runneth many hard and great streames From Chabaqueo six or seuen miles forward lyeth Enseada Pretta that is the Blacke créeke by the country people called Lauho aboue the which there lyeth a high land with very black shining bushes and in the mouth of the entry it hath two Islands within it is very good and faire ground béeing a harbour or defence against certaine windes wherein Ruij Lobo with his ship another Iunco or Chinish ship did winter Two miles to seaward from it lye two Islands of white stonie cliffes close togither betwéene the which the Firme land it is all faire good ground From this Enseada Pretta or Blaâ—ke creeke seuen myles forward there lyeth two high and small Islands some what longer than round without either bushes or trees close by each other reaching Northwest southeast betwéen both hauing thrée or foure stone cliffes These Ilands and cliffes lie distant from the Firme land about halfe a mile right ouer against them lyeth a small Créeke from a verie lowe hooke or point of land along by the sea and on the Island that lyeth nearest to the lande on the Southwest side lyeth a Sand baye which is a good Hauen or Rode of seuen or eight fadome déepe where the Cliffes lying to Sea-ward on you make a defence you may goe close to the lande of the Sand bay for I haue laine in it because I put into it with a storme as I came from Iapon the Iaponers haue many times wintered therein with their shippes The entry thereof lyeth on the Northeast side close along by the point of the Iland that lyeth towardes the land and when you enter in you shall holde towards the Island not to misse the Hauen and you may alwayes goe out and in as
Northeast and Northeast and by East From the point of Lialoo two miles forward lyeth a flat Island about halfe a mile distant from the land and another halfe mile further forward lyeth two Islands by each other somewhat closer to the land and hard by them is a Riuer at the mouth thereof hauing a sandie strand with low land into this Riuer runneth the Somas or Chinish Shippes that goe to the Towne of Enon which lyeth within the same where you haue much Marchandises of China on the coast seuen or eight miles further There lyeth the point of Chencheu which is a high and bare land of white and reddish colour reaching somewhat inward to sea on the Northeast side it hath a small Bay and aboue it a verie high steepe land in this Créeke lyeth a great Island betwéene the which and the point of land you may put in from this Island a harquebush shot in length northeastward lyeth a stonie place of ground halfe a fadome déepe vnder the Water and Northwestward from the said Island betwéene it and the land lyeth another stone and on the land side by this Island you haue a good harber to anker in I haue laine in this Hauen somewhat neerer to the Island then to the land with two Iuncos which are great Chinish Shippes each of them being of fiue hundred or sixe hundred Bhares Indian waight which is aboue a hundred and eightie tunnes and ranne in along by the point Beyond this point of land at y e vpper part lyeth a great Towne and North Northeast from this Island there lyeth two long clouen Islands of redde colour but they haue no faire ground nor anie harber two miles before you come to this point of Chencheu inward to land towards Chencheu there is a hill like to Monte Fermoso or the faire hill this Hill lyeth distant from Chencheu thirtéene miles in this countrey sixe or seuen miles from the land you haue certaine boyes lying with coloured feathers and flagges which serue for the countrey fishermen where they cast their Nets and the Somâ—s of that Countrey which are the Chinish Caruels haue â—un ouer it with one saile onely without any other furniture From the point of Chencheu seuen miles further on the Southwest end of the Island by the Portingales called Ilha dos cauallos that is the Island of Horses and by the Chinares called Tachoo hauing the name of a great Towne so called not farre from thence about two miles along the riuer within the land this Island lieth in the coast coÌ„passed about with an arme of the Sea like the Island of Goa in India which arme of the Sea issueth out againe about fiue miles further in the same coast which issue or mouth is called Puysu The first mouth from the Southwest may be about halfe a mile broad and from the point of the Island inward about halfe a mile there is good anker ground against the windes of the Monson of China at ten and eleuen fadome faire ground you must shunne the Southwest land which is low and sandy strands and is all ouer blackish and shallow ground for I haue run inward round about this Island it hath many shallowes and there is a channell the déepest part whereof is but two fadome if you desire to put in there it were good to haue one of the Country-men for a Pilote I entered the mouth thereof from the Northeast which is the narrowest and shallowest place and hath a hidden stony cliffe lying vnder the water close by the side of the Island about the shot of a great peece inward towards the point From this stony cliffe to the point many Shippes may anker and both these Hauens are without droughts or shallowes and the coast betwéene them both from the one mouth vnto the other hath some redde downes and bare land but is all along faire ground A mile from this mouth Northeastward to Seaward lyeth a small Island and from the moneth of Aprill to September there are many beastes pastured in this Island as horses and such like wherevpon the Portingales called it the Island of Horses as aforesaid from the mouth of Puysu of the saied Island of Horses eight miles forward by the coast there is a great thicke point of land with manie bushes vpon it Close by this point lyeth a great round Island whereof the chanell betwéene them is small yet very cleare where if néede bee you may passe through from the point aforesaied to the Southwest it is a high land with bushes and from thence to the Sea it hath a great gréene field or plaine and along by this gréene field it is very good ankering against the winds of the monson of China another ground vpon the aforesayed point of land there is a great Towne called Pinhay From this point of Pinhay fiue miles along the coast lyeth the Hauen of Foquyen which hath a great Rode and is all thicke land with bushes and inward on the Southwest part it hath a great round Island with blacke shining bushes and beyond this Iland inward lieth the mouth of the riuer on the which lieth a verie great towne compassed with mightie walles and towers and hath a Bridge running out from the land whereunto the shippes that stay there are commonly tyed the entrie is faire and cleare From this Hauen of Foqueyen fiue miles lyeth a Créeke by the Portingales called Enseada dos camoroyns that is the Créeke of Gannaet and by the Chinars called Cayto in this way lyeth certaine small and high Islandes without any trées or bushes about three great miles from the land inward to the Sea and betwéene it and them it is all ouer full of Riffes and stonie Cliffes and in some places it sémeth to haue Channels or throughfares for I went through it with a Pilot of the countrey you must shunne this Island and from the end of this Island two miles forward there is a point of great thicke land wholly without any bushes or trées and at the end of each mile West Northwestward there lyeth two Islands and on the Southwest side of this point there is a good harbour for the windes of the monson of China hauing faire sandie ground but it hath the winde verie scant to runne about without the Ilandes for the which cause wée ranne betweene them but it is not good for our shippes On the other side Northeastward from this point aforesaid close by the lande lyeth a small high Island stretching Northwest and Southeast the Channell betweene this Island and the Firme land being the shot of a great péece in breadth at thrée fadome deepe most part stonie ground in such manner that as soone as you let fall anker the ropes and Cables are presently cut in péeces by the sharpe stones This channell can not bée séene farre off and this Island hath on the land side a small créeke or Bay and if you come thither by hard fortune as I did you shall put in there
close by the Island and so néere it that you shall touch the strand with the kéele of your shippe to anker in the depthes of the hard ground for if you anker in the Sea your Cables will presently be cut in péeces as mine were This point lyeth hidden vnder a point from thence Northeast and Northeast and by East the land hath another point lying about a mile and a halfe distant from the other aforesaide making betwéene them both a certaine Gitte From this Island and point about halfe a mile East Northeast lieth a Riffe whereon you see the water breake reaching Northwest and Southeast and about halfe a myle long from this Riffe to the Northeast point of the aforesaid Créeke it is about a mile all the rest of the Créeke is faire and cléere This is the Créeke called Enseada dos Camarouis the Rode thereof is vnder the harbour of the Northeast point aforesaid for it is good for the time of the windes of the Monson of China for such shippes as come from Liampon Iapon to put in there you must goe néere the land before you come at the point and runne along by it till you haue gotten about the point and are ankered within it there it is verie good muddie ground by this Northeast point so that the Riffe will be Southwestward from you therefore you shall put neare the point of the lande not to fall vpon the Riffe from this Créeke forward to the point of Sumbor lying vnder 28 degrées and ¼ you runne along the coast Northeast and Northeast and by North without the aforesaid Island and the point of the saide Créeke and from the créeke twelue and thirtéene miles the land hath a point and from thence it runneth inwards North Northwest and somewhat further Northeast and Northeast and by North out againe Two myles from thence lyeth thrée Ilands by each other two great and high and one small béeing all faire ground round about but wholly without any Rode or succour to defend the shippes in foule weather These Islands are called Canton Sion all this coast of Enseada dos camarouis to these Islands and Hooke aforesaide is altogither lowe land with houels and valleyes with euen bushes and along by it it is both faire and calme Sea and pleasant ground In this Countrey in the middle way from Enseada dos Camarouis to the Ilands of Canton Sion about thrée myles to Sea-warde there lyeth two Islandes by each other and the Island lying nearest the land hath a great high hill in the middle which runneth stéepe downe to the endes of the Island they haue neither Trées nor Bushes within them being faire and cleare round about them From the Islandes of Canton Sion forward the Lande and Coast reacheth inwards ten miles from thence that is to say two miles from the land lyeth 2. high and great Islands nigh adioyning each to other without Trees or bushes reaching as the coast doth whereof the first lying on the Southwest side is very long and that on the North side is in manner of a triangle and the Channell separating them is little more in breadth than a man can cast a stone but déepe and faire for I haue passed through it and harde by the Northeast point of the first long Island which commeth out by the other there is a sandie Bay close by the which there is a verie good Rode for this Sandie baye hath defence for all windes and because it is like a Hauen it is by the Chinars called Pudeon that is a Sacke From this Sandie Bay about the shot of a great Peece Northwest lyeth a well of verie great depth therefore you must be carefull in entring the Créeke where you haue verie good ground at fiue and sixe fadome déepe In this Créeke or sandie Bay there is very good fresh water as also right ouer against it on the other side of the Island there is a great place of fresh water The channell betwéene these Islandes and the Firme land is all faire and deepe as also to Seaward from thence on the Northwest part of the land of this Hauen aforesaid there is another Hauen called Fuychon which is a riuer but with a small entry béeing in breadth about halfe the length of the shotte of a great peece with cleare and déep ground from the mouth inwardes there is good water running a great way into the land and all faire If you desire to goe in there and to anker you must gouerne your course by the Lead and the depthes This Baye hath many townes and villages lying along by the riuer From the aforesaid first Island fiue or sixe myles Southward to Seaward lieth two small Islandes halfe a myle distant each from other they are both without trées or any bushes the Island on the Land side is flat and that to Sea-ward is very high and hath a Créeke but verie small and onely with a Northwest wind it is harbourlesse the entrie is verie straight being round within with good and pleasant ground This Island in forme is like a Horse shooe for from the inner side of the Creeke towards the outside to Seaward it may be the length of a bow shot in the breadth of the Island both these Islands are small From this Hauen of Pudeon fiue miles along the coast there lyeth two Ilands whereof the first is long reaching like the coast the other reacheth from off the land towards the Sea for betwéen it and the land you can not passe The point of this Island reacheth beyond the Northeast point of the aforesaid long Iland that lyeth to Sea-ward betwéene them both is a small Channell but faire and déepe all along and round about this Iland as well inward as outward From this Island to the land it is good muddie ground at foure fadome and is a good Hauen for the Monson of China but wholly open for a Southwest wind with the which wind I there lost two Iuncos which are Chinish shippes This Hauen is called Guotimony Before you come within two myles of this Hauen vpon the coast there lyeth two Créekes close togither which runne about a myle into the land and are aboue the shot of a great Péece in breadth but are not fit for our ships The ground therabout is faire and inward it hath a village From this Hauen of Guotimony seuen or eight myles Eastward lieth a verie great and high Island on the South side hauing thrée or foure smal Ilands close to it it lieth about seuen or eight miles from the land and a good way from the other Ilands on the Northwest side it hath two Créekes hard by each other whereof that in the Northeast is the safest with good and faire ground reaching about halfe a mile inwards within it hauing good fresh water with a Sandie Bay where they draw vp their ships to mend and dresse them when néed requireth it is all faire round about onely you must not run betwéene
the small Islands the Island This Island is called Lanquyn From this Island Lanquyn fiue miles North and North and by East there are many Ilandes lying togither both great and small with some Trées but thinne and lowe reaching along the coast about ten myles forward the first lie close by each other to Seaward vpon a row The channels betwéene these ilands are thrée fadome deepe some lesse muddie ground if you haue occasion to séeke for succour in that place with the windes of the monson of China you may anker in the mouthes of those Channels where you may lie safe but in those Monsons or coniunctions of times there is no foule weather in the course of the generall windes you shall not passe from this first rowe of Islands lying to Seaward to the land for it is all bankie ground full of Sandie places for the déepest place is but two fadome On the Northeast side inward from these Islands there are two other Islands lying along by the Lande which reach Northeast and Southwest whereof the Southwest Island is greater and higher then that to Landward The Channell betweene them is déepe and faire muddie ground The ground of the issue on the Northeast side of this Channell is all Corall and Kesell stone hauing many Ilands and stonie cliffes Here the streams runne strongest with the Monsons of the winde A mile or more Eastward from these two Islands there is a good and faire sea and ground it is verie dangerous to passe with great ships betwéene these Ilands for you can not passe On the Lande right against these Ilands there is a Hauen called Hunchon and the Islandes are called Lyon From this first Island of Lyon to the point of Sumbor are about thirtéene miles and you runne as aforesaid Northeast and Southwest These islands reach within three miles of the point of Sumbor but in the middle way they are lesse and more distant from each other and before you come néere the point of Sumbor by sixe miles there is an Island of Reddish earth with two hilles like two men and in the middle there is a valley which reacheth Northwest and Southeast On the Southeast side it hath a good Hauen for the windes of the Monson of China This Iland is a good marke for them that come from Iapon The point of Sumbor reacheth a great way into the sea it is a thicke land with a high rising backe it hath on the end of the Southwest point close by a long and high Island and from the Northeast point of this Island lyeth an Island or Cliffe making betwéene this Island and the aforesaid point a verie narrow channell where the countrey shippes do passe through inwardes from the Southwest side and from the Island the land maketh a great Créeke which in compasse is about foure great miles two miles from the point Southwestward there lieth two or thrée small Islands As you come outward to these Islands there is déepe and faire ground but from thence to the point and all ouer the Créeke it is all shallowe so that at lowe water it is drie and you may sée the muddie ground vpon the plaine of the aforesaid point on the southwest side there is a great towne where they haue many great Barkes that are made with Orloopes and nayled wherof some are 200. Bhares great On the Northeast side of this point there is a Créeke running inward to the Land at this point of Sumbor the Land maketh an end or Hooke that lieth vnder 28. degrées and ¼ From this point foure miles to Seaward East Northeast there lieth two great Ilands without any trées or bushes whereof the first reacheth East West and from the East point of this Island the other beginneth which reacheth North and South the Channell betwéen them both may be a shot of a great péece broad déepe and faire This Island which reacheth East and West on the East end hath a point sticking out towardes the North in the which point there is a small Créeke of fiue or sixe fadome déepe faire ground where you may harbour in all weathers except it be with a Northwest wind The North Island on the West point hath two Islands lying on a rowe whereof the one is great the other small and some what long betwéene the which and the Island you may passe with small shippes and round about these Islands it is faire ground In this Island you haue verie good fresh water and they are called Timbasam From these Islands a mile and a halfe or two miles Northward there lieth two other small Islandes which reach East southeast West Northwest wherof the one is greater and longer than the other they lie close togither the channell betwéene them is faire déepe with harbor against North Northeast Southwest windes for I haue laine there at anker with a great storme From this point of Sumbor to Liampo you passe without the Islands North Northeast and South Southwest and the coast all high ground and from this point of Sumbor fiue or sixe miles along by the coast within the land there is a high stony Rocke which sheweth like a Monkies coule in the Island Seylon called O Capello de Frade beyond this Friers coule or stonie rocke other sixe myles forward lyeth the Hauen of Chaposy which is a Riuer of fresh water and inward it hath a great Towne lying vpon it where likewise there is a fléet of the country shippes continually kept for the security and safegard of the coast The knowledge and right tokens of this Hauen are that when you are hard by Chaposy the Sea hath some reddish leaues or Flagges driuing on the water and some péeces of réedes like Cassia Fistola or Spanish Réedes which come out of this Riuer Two miles East Southeast from this hauen to Seaward there lyeth two small and high Islands close by each other wholly without trées or bushes round about them it is twentie fadome déepe muddy ground and from the mouth of the Riuer halfe a mile from the land Southward lyeth a long Island reaching like the coast betweene this and the land it is faire muddy ground of thrée fadome déepe whereof the entry on the South side is the déepest and along by the land it is shallow From Chaposy eightéene myles forward lyeth the Island of Liampo where the Portingales vsed to Trafficke These Islands were called Sinogicam the Firme land Liampo which along by the sea side is a high land The Portingales ships doe not passe along by it but betwéene the Islands At the first you haue but few and small Islands but being past them then vpon the rowe of Islands lying furthest out into the sea you haue a very great Island with high Trées and Creekes along by the Sea coast and it is there all ouer faire and good ground and on the West side it hath a Créeke in the middle whereof there is a great and high Island betwéene
a mile from the land it is but a fadome and a halfe déepe being hard stones The people of y e country passe ouer it with nailed barkes with pitched or loopes two péeces sailes of réeds or mats an yron dreg with sharpe téeth This coast reacheth Northeast to foure and thirtie degrées where there lieth a great riuer that commeth from Nanquyn within the mouth or entry hath an Island that is inhabited by many people both horse and footemen This Island maketh the Riuer to haue two mouths or entries from thence forward the land reacheth North Northeast and by East and comming to that part which lieth Southeast there the land hath an end or point and by that meanes it maketh a great Créeke From this point forward the coast runneth North again after turning again Northwestward Into the which coast those of Iapon doe ordinarily come to Trafficke with the Countrey people called Cooray and there you haue Hauens and harbors hauing a kind of small open péeces of wouen worke which the Iapons fetch from thence whereof I am certainely informed as also touching the nauigation vnto that land by Pilots that haue sailed and searched cleane through it as followeth From this point of the Creeke of Nanquyn twenty miles Southeastward there lyeth certaine Islands at the end whereof on the East side there lyeth a very great and high Island much inhabited as well by horse as footemen These Islands by the Portingales are called As Ilhas de core but the great Island Core is called Chausien on the Northwest side it hath a small Créeke wherein there lyeth an Island which is the Hauen but it is not very déepe There the lord of the country hath his pallace and is continually resident Fiue and twenty miles Southeast from this Island lieth the Island of Goto one of the Islands of Iapon which lyeth from the point of the Créeke of Nanquyn East and by North to Seaward sixtie miles or somewhat more This instruction I had from a Nobleman of Portingale called Pero da cunha that hath séene and trauelled through all the Countrey hauing by him all aduise seruing for the purpose as being of great experience hauing arriued and stayed in the Countrey aforesaid by tempest and stormy weather against their wils minding to sayle to Iapon and from thence againe to the aforesaide Island of Goto the Islands lying from this Island towards the land betwéene them and close about them all ouer are many riffes and stones The instruction of the Créeke of Nanquyn I had from an expert Pilote borne in the lande of Algaine in Spaigne that lost his Shippe vpon the Sands that sticke out from the Riuer of Nanquyn hauing runne round about all this Créeke with a Barke and hée saide that being within when the Sunne rose it came from ouer the land and that from the riuer of Nanquyn there ranne some sands and droughts reaching southward to two and thirty degrées and to the middle way of the Goulfe of Iapon Here endeth the description of the furthest parts that the Portingales haue sailed along by the Coasts lands and Islands of the Kingdome of China being that part thereof which at this day is knowne and discouered The 31. Chapter The description of a voiage made by a Portingale Pilote from Liampo to Iapon in a Chinchea Soma that is a Chinchon ship with the description of the coast of Bungo Miaco Cacay the Island Toca all countries of Iapon ON Wednesday the thirty of Iune being the third day of the new moone in the morning we set sayle out of the northeast chanell of the Island Siongicam with a southeast wind and being without the Island we had the wind South Southeast and ran east and somewhat East and by North about euening we had a South Southwest wind running East East and by South and East southeast with very great billowes out of the south whereby we could hardly kéepe on our course sayling with our sayles but halfe vp and in the morning we ran halfe a strike east and by south and east southeast because the wind came some what ful to the South west with shoures of raine and great billowes that rose very high by which means the waters and streames in these countries run Northward we made our account to haue sailed in the course of East and East and by North 26 miles in one meale tide which was til thursday at noone being the first of Iuly We had alwaies great and mighty waues because it was a Spring tyde all the night hauing great lightnings out of the East and in all the points of the Compasse from North to South On thursday the first of Iuly from noone to night we had a southwest wind running East and East and by South and somwhat East Southeast with great showres of raine without any high wind and being two houres within night the skie closed round about and became close with a great raine wherwith the wind beganne to be calme turning Northward which the officers of the Soma perceiuing being men of China they began to be in great feare for the Chinais doe hold for certaine that in the Moone of the moneth of Iuly vntill it bee 12. dayes old all along the coast of China there will follow great stormes and as I thinke it is till S. Iames day till when they alwaies looke for stormes and foule weather for that I my selfe vpon the same day haue passed two great stormes And touching our North wind y e began still to encrease they perceiuing it put presently Westward againe towardes the Islands and had sayled from noone to that time about ten miles in such manner that as wee gessed we were 36. miles from the land of China and so wée held our course in that manner West and West and by North after that hauing a close skie with little wind whereby we made very litle way On Friday the North wind beganne to blowe higher wee running so till noone and in that Westerly course wée sayled about sixe miles From Friday at noone we sailed with this North wind all that euening and by night til Saterday in the morning then the wind came Northeast then East and so West till noone whereby wee made our account to haue sailed eightéene miles letting the shippe goe West and West and by North and in all that time wée had neither Sunne nor Starre to take the height On Saterday two or thrée houres after noone the wind fell South the weather beginning to cleare vp and so wée ranne one glasse and perceiuing the weather to settle we turned againe towards Iapon being as then in mine opinion about 12. myles from the coast of China and so we held our course that euening and all the next night East and East and by South with a small wind and calme Sea The next day being Sonday at noone we tooke the height of the Sunne at 30. degrées 1 ◠part lesse wée set out
vnder 29. degrées and ◠accounting for one mealetide thirtéene miles so that I gessed as then to be 25. myles from China On Sonday after noone we held our course in the same sort East and East and by South for all that euening and the night following till the next day at noone with a still winde and water and had no Sunne to take the height but I made my account of eightéen miles for a meale tide at halfe a strike to the East and East and by North the wind being scant South From Monday at noon we still had a calme South wind which continued so that euening and all night and about Tuesday morning the wind was somwhat fuller till noone whē I tooke the height of the Sunne and found vs to be vnder 29. degrees and ¾ running East and East and by South for the space of 22. miles From Tuesday at noone being vnder the height aforesaid I willed them to saile east hauing the same wind but somewhat calmer all that night to Wednesday at noone and then we began to sée driuing in the sea some Sea-scumme or Cuttle bones hauing sayled fiftéene myles making my account to be yet 30. miles from the Island Tanaxuma hauing neither Sunne nor Starres to take the heights From Wednesday at noone the wind began to blow somwhat full South Southwest and because it was signified vnto me that the streames in that countrey ranne towardes the Island of Lequeo and perceiuing likewise in some places a certaine yellowe skumme driuing vpon the water which appeared vnto vs like ripe Limons I willed them presently to holde East Northeast and about euening wée sawe many signes of land as péeces of réedes risen and such like things At night I badde them runne East and East and by North but the first watch béeing done when the Chinish Pilot should watch his course hée had gone a great way out of the course hauing runne Eastward till the morning when againe I willed them to sayle East and by North the winde béeing as it was till Thursday at ten of the clocke and then although it was darke and close weather wee beganne to sée a land that séemed verie cloudie and couered with dampie mistes lying Southeast from vs and were about thrée myles from it Along by the same lande there lay two Islandes wée holding our course in the same sort vntill by the first land Eastward wee sawe another great high and long lande and at the end of the aforesaid high land Eastward wée sawe two other Islandes whereof the one was verie great stretching Northeast and Southwest and the other close by it stretching North and South being the smallest with many pointes On the North side of this small Island about a mile from thence there are fiue small Islands or stonie Cliffes vpon a rowe from the first Island that we sawe which is the last Island of those that are called As Sete Irmaas that is the seuen sisters lying on the Northeast side to the aforesaid small Island with many pointes it may be about sixe myles Eastward as we were right against the aforesaid first Island of Stonie Cliffes it might bée about fiue houres after noone hauing run as we thought since wee had sight of land about twentie and foure miles The Thursday aforesaid in the morning wée tooke the height of the North Starre being vnder thirtie degrees and ⅙ Comming within two myles of the Island that wée saw first of the Islands of stonie Cliffes wee ranne Northeast and Northeast and by East and when wee were right against it whereby it laie Southward from vs béeing about thrée myles from it on the North side thereof wée sawe another great high and long Iland with many trees which as wée learned is called Icoo it reacheth East and West and wée were about three miles from it but by reason of the darke weather and mistes wee could not discerne it and comming somewhat néerer to it wée sawe another Island lying close by the West point of the aforesaid Iland beeing lesse than the other and because wée were by the aforesaid West point betweene both wee were fully determined to runne through the channell that shewed betweene the said two Islandes but because there was no man in the shippe that had any knowledge thereof fearing Riffes and shallowes wee durst not aduenture but wound vp to the East point to passe by the winde about the high Island running as much as wée might with a Southerly winde hauing great waues that put vs to the lande and so wee sayled East Southeast hauing yet about two myles to passe by the Island but night came on beeing verie darke so that wee could discerne no land although wee were close by it and to keepe from it wee ranne the same course till about one of the clocke after midnight then the moone shined yet wée could not see the Island but made Northward towardes it with fewe Sailes to the Island of Tanaxuma which according to my account should lie right before vs wherewith wée passed ouer the rest of the night till the morning when we sawe the Island Tanaxuma that laye right before vs beeing about two myles from it it beeing verie cloudie and wée made Northward towardes it to passe by the West side thereof but wée could not doe it by reason that the winde was Southwest and wee were by the South point thereof running along by the East side about halfe a mile from it This Island reacheth North and South beeing long and lowe ground hauing white sandie strandes with a verie gréene countrey of valleyes it hath many Pine trees but they stand scattering from each other and verie open it is about seuen or eight myles long hauing in the middle way on the East side close by the land an Island or stonie Cliffe which farre off sheweth like a Foist vnder Saile This Island lyeth vnder thirtie degrees and ½ right in the middle it is all saire and cleare ground From this Island of Tanaxuma Northwarde wée sawe a verie great and high lande reaching East and West about eight miles making as it seemed on the same coast Northeast and Northeast and by North from Tanaxuma an opening which is the mouth of the creeke called Xabuxij This Créeke hath for a marke that the lande on the East side thereof runneth all stéeping to the hooke or point of the Creeke beeing a flatte ground and on the West side the land is as high as the first that wee sawe lying North and South with Tanaxuma This coast aforesaid may lie distāt ouerthwart from the Island of Tanaxuma about seuen or eight myles From the North point of this Island wee made towardes the Créeke and béeing in the middle of our way the wind fell West Southwest whereby wee were enforced to lye by it the weather béeing calme so that the water that with the flood ranne Eastward draue vs off that wée could hardly get the Hauen but the ebbe that
on the North side with the land of Iapon a straight or narrow passage which runneth to the Hauen of Saquay and the land of Miaco and from the side of the Island along by it there are many small Islands The course you must hold through this straight to the Hauen of Saquay or Sacay is altogether along the coast and the land of Iapon which hath many and good Hauens At the end of this straight both these lands haue each of them a point of land sticking out being from the one to the other about a mile by the point of the land of Toca it is banky ground and all the people of this land on the North side are not in any sort to bée trusted Likewise you may passe from the South side of this Island Toca to the land of Myaco where all along it is good sayling and there are very good Hauens The first hauen whereof lyeth on the first point of land on the West side of the Island which close by it hath certaine Islands and Cliffes this Hauen is called Focora it hath a good harbour for all windes but not for Rouers for there they haue many Foistes wherewith they roue and steale At the East end of this Island Toca lying with the land of Iapon right ouer against it there is another straight or passage like that on the West side where you runne to the Hauen and Town of Sacay In the middle way from the aforesaied East side of Toca lyeth a Hauen called Aâ—â— which is inhaâ—â—ted by a very fierce and stout people There is alwaies a great army of Foistes prepared for the warres wherewith they robbe and spoyle all the Coast along The Shippes and Foistes that desire to passe through it asking leaue they may passe without let or hinderance On the East side aforesaid the land of Iapon reacheth much southward making a hooke or end called Cumano and the coast that reacheth thether is called Bandol It hath some Hauens that were inhabited by very rich and mightie people but they are neither secure nor free The Hauen of Sacay lyeth from the booke or end of the Island of Toca Northeast about nine or tenne myles This Hauen of Sacay with a West wind is harborlesse which make many great tides and hath a shallow sandie ground For the which cause the Ships that come laden thether are presentlie vnladen and the people leape on land leauing the Shippe fast bound and sometimes draw it on land From the point O Cabo de Camico fiue myles to a point of land you runne along the coast North Northwest and in the way you haue foure or fiue Islands and cliffes along the coast and right ouer against the aforesaid point there lyeth two other Islands close by the land hauing betwéene them both a smal channel and close by both on the North and south-side sides there are many Islands and Cliffes both great and small These two Islands with the Islands and Cliffes lye East and West with the Hooke and the end of Toca vnder thrée and thirty degrées and 1 â— All this coast is high land with the Islands lying along by it and hath sixtie and seuentie fadome déepe close by the land From thence forward beginneth the straight or passage to be narrow betwéene this Island of Toca and the land of Bungo and if in this countrey you haue néede to anker then put to the land of Toca where you shall finde muddye ground When you are about the aforesaid point of two Islands then the land beginneth Westward to turne in all high land hauing within close on the South-side a small Island you must take héed of this Créeke that the streames drawe you not in being past this Créeke you shall in the middle way of the channell in the straight sée right before you a smal round Island which shall lye on the East side from you and along by the coast fiue miles you shall sée another Island lying hard by the land which to sea ward from it hath many stony cliffes and Rockes By this Island Northeastward about a myle and a halfe there lyeth two other Islands Beyond these two Islands another myle and a halfe lyeth another long Island with a flat plaine or field on the top thereof reaching Northwest and southeast the Southeast and thereof being the highest Within this Island towards the West lyeth the Creeke of Vsquy where the king of Bungo holdeth Court If you desire to put in there you shall runne towards the first Island kéeping from the aforesaid Island and the Islands and Cliffes lying by it holding your course through betweene it and the other two Islands that lye further forward being passed in by this Island and the Islands and stony Cliffes you shall see Westward within the Créeke a great round and a high Island full of Trées wherevnto you shall runne alwaies kéeping néerer the two Islands then the Island of stony Cliffes for by the Iland of Stony Cliffes you haue seuentie fadome déepe and within the two Islands Westward you finde but 25 fadome muddy ground holding your course in that manner to the aforesaid Islands that lye in the Créeke kéeping on the North side for there it is faire and cléere and being right against this Island you shall find twenty fadome déepe where you shall anker that from them you may sée the hauens which are two the one lying a smal mile from this Island towards the Southwest by a point of land whereon there standeth sixe or seuen trées seperated one from y e other with some bushes you must put to this point which within it hath a small Bay or Créeke at the end whereof standeth a riffe of stone reaching from thence into the Sea in the which lyeth the aforesaid small Créeke which hath a very good harbour at thrée fadome déepe good and fair ground where you shall anker but it is not for great shippes The other Hauen is Northwestward on the other side of the Créeke hauing in it some Islands and stones it is a great Bay which runneth inward to the land making a bow with very good harbor This hauen is for great ships From this Créeke of Vsquy somewhat further Northward lyeth another great Creeke which runneth inwards West Northwest The Land and the point betwéene these two Créekes may bee from the one Sea to the other about the length of the shot of a great Péece in breadth and halfe a myle from the end of the point Westward on the South side lyeth a small Island close by the Land betwéene the which and the land runneth a channell of twelue fadome deepe with faire ground of great sand where I haue ankered Right ouer against this Island on the Northwest Land about the length of the shotte of a great Péece lyeth a small Creeke with a village called Sanganaxeque where Don Francesco Mascharenhas lay with his shippe for the monson This hauen with a northwest wind is harbourlesse From this Créeke
Islands and great Rockes reaching from the land to seaward Within these Islands and stones lyeth the Hauen of Tanora and to put into it you shall take your course towards the end of those Islands and stones that reach to seaward from the land When you are right against the end thereof then Northeastward from you to Sea-ward there will lye another Island or stony Cliffe You shall runne within this Island and betwéene it and the Land there is a great Créeke where you may anker at fiue and twenty fadome déepe if néed be but there is not the right Hauen but when you are about the Islands and stones that lye outward to Sea then you shall presentlie runne along betwéene a point of Lande Northward on the right hand and the Islands into the Hauen that you shall sée lye open without feare and being about this point of land you shall presently sée a Creeke stretching Northward inwards and then you shall put to that point of land which will bée on your right hand where you may fréely enter for it is foure fadome déepe all muddy ground and anker by the East land shunning the West From this Créeke of Tanora forward you runne Northward along the coast which is the land of Fiungo and Bungo all faire and cleare ground hauing nothing thereon to feare then that you see before your eyes and eightéene myles further you shall find a very great Island that will bee on the East side from you which is the land of Toca and reacheth East and West and East and by North and West and by South about fortie myles long comming out by Sacay and Miaco The Southside of this Island is faire and cleare along the which you runne to Sacay betweene this Island and the coast of Bungo on the West side thereof there is a straight or passage of foure fiue or more myles broad and such as will goe to Bungo must alwaies kéepe along by the coast of Tanora and Fiunga shunning the coast of Toca But returning to the coast of fiue and twenty degrées ½ beyond the Island of Lequeo Pequeno as aforesaid If you desire to saile to the Island Firando you shall runne from thence in the aforesaid course of Northeast and Northeast and by east to eight and twenty degrées and ¼ and being there kéepe Northeast by the which course you shall see two small long bare and broken Islands lying North and South with each other on the South side hauing two Islands or cliffes halfe a mile distant froÌ„ each other These two Islands aforesaid lye vnder one and thirtie degrées and ¼ Thrée or foure miles Northeastward from these Islandes lyeth an Island or stony Cliffe clouen in the middle hauing vpon it foure or fiue sharpe points or toppes when you are right against the aforesaid Island then you are yet tenne myles from the coast of Iapon Westward and running the same coast Northeastward you shall goe right vpon a very great high Island called Coiaquijn which lyeth East and West with the hauen of Angone being three or foure myles distant from the coast of thrée or foure myles long on the East side towards the Land it hath manie Islands and stony Cliffes If you chance to fall within the Island finding your selfe by the coast of Iapon whereby you cannot passe without the Island then take your course inward betwéene the Land and the Island without all the Islands and Stones about the length of the shotte of a great Peece from it but goe not neare the coast for that from the North Land there is a Point that reacheth to the other side Being past the length of the Island along by the Islands and stony Cliffes as I said before you shall presentlie put along by the Island outward to Sea-ward whereby Northward you shall sée the Point of Lande aforesaid which hath some Cliffes and Riffes within the which Northward lyeth the Hauen of Amacusa This point of land lieth right ouer against another point of lande that sticketh out from the Island lying North and South with each other and when you haue past beyond this point of lande then you shall hold along the coast about a mile from it You runne along by this coast from the one point of lande to the other North Northwest and South Southeast and if you passe without the Island of Coiaquin you shall take the same way béeing past and about it to come vnto the coast and so runne along by it as aforesaid From the aforesaid point of Amacusa that hath the Cliffes and Riffes thrée or foure miles forward there is another great and high point of lande in the same coast and beeing past it you shall sée a great opening or entrie of a Channell which is called O estrechio d'Arima that is the Straight of Arima within this straight lyeth two good Hauens the first called Xiquij which is one of the best Hauens of Iapon This Hauen lyeth about halfe a mile from the entrie inwarde on the South side and the right hand Westward at the end of a great Créeke which hath a harbour for all windes with foure or fiue fadome déepe muddie ground but in this Hauen three or foure Portingales were slaine I thinke it happened by their filthie pride and presumptuousnesse for in all places they will be Lordes and masters to the contempt and embasing of the inhabitants which in all places will not be endured namely in Iapon being a stubborne and obstinate people But to to the matter On the North side of this créeke on the land lying on the other side there lieth a high round Island and hitherto it is all ouer faire and cléere sea and ground To put into Arima you shall goe towards the North Lande for on the South side as soone as you are past the Creeke of Xiquij you haue two stones and thereabouts it is all ouer full of riffes and other filth This straight aforesaid as you first enter into it reacheth Eastward and then turneth Northwarde and along by the point where it turneth northward there runneth strong streames and so stiffe that if you be not carefull it will turne the shippe about and put it backe againe if you haue not a stiffe forewind to breake the force of the streames Being about this point aforesaid on the same land there lieth a very good Hauen called Cochinochy or Cochinâ—quyn and then the Hauen of Arima whereof the Straight receiueth the name and lyeth halfe a mile Northward from Cochinochy beeing a Creeke which is open for an East wind and without any defence for foule weather Somewhat further lyeth the Hauen of Simonbaia that hath thrée Islandes which make a harbour against the North wind but at low water the shippes lie drie In this Straight there are no other Hauens that are safe and good for All windes but onely Xiquy and Cochinochy as I said before From this Straight to the Island of Firando along the coast there are many
by the Island of Firando which is on your West side and is a verie great and long Island and sheweth on that side whereunto you saile with a great high Houell in the middle way vpon a point sticking out of the same Island when you are close by the same Island you shall runne along by it where you shall find an opening stretching inwards like a riuer you shall passe about a mile beyond it where you shall haue a small Créeke or Bay called Cochyn wherein you shall enter vntill you finde twelue fadome deepe and there anker and although there you lie open to the South winde yet the water goeth whole beeing there you shall send either by water or by lande to the towne where the Hauen is for certaine Foists or Barkes that may bring you into the Hauen which Hauen lyeth somewhat further for the entrie thereof is something dangerous because of the great streames that haue their Current therein If you desire to saile into this Hauen when it is almost high water haue care for the wind is strong at your entring and when the water beginneth to ebbe then it helpeth to bring you in then you shall runne in such maner along by the Island as I said before and being past the créeke of Cochyn to the first point of lande that you shall come vnto that sticketh out from the same Island from the which point Northward there iutteth two stonie Cliffes you shall goe neare the stonie Cliffes the better to get into the Hauen and you shall presently sée before you on the side of Firando a great and high Island full of trées when you sée it take your course right vpon the West point of the same Island vntill the saide Island lyeth wholly vncouered to Leeward from you whereby presently you shall sée inwarde the point or end of the towne and when you beginne to see the houses then put somewhat neerer to it right ouer against the aforesaid Island on the South side and the left hande and there the Island hath a small loâ— poinâ— of lande comming from a high hâ—uâ—â— and stretcheth into the Sea from the which point there runneth a Sand or Banke therefore you shall put towardes the side of the houses or end of the towne to kâ—pe out of the streame and when you are out being in calme water if the winde be not good then anker and from thence be rowed in either with Foists Barks or your own boat West West Southwest into the Hauen All this description and course of Nauigation is in breefe to conclude that when you come to the coast of Iapon you shall leaue all the Islandes that lie along vpon the coast on the East side and vpon the right hand and runne without them and the Islandes lying to Seaward from thence whereof the first beginneth from the end of the Island of the row called Saquyn and the long Island Caroxyma that lyeth further forwarde which reach North and North and by West from the ende of the rowe and the two small Islandes with two other small Islandes or Cliffes lying further forward and are seuen in all leauing them all on the left hand or the West side with the which course you shall goe directly vpon the Island of Firando as is before mentioned The 33. Chapter A voiage made by a Portingale Pilot with a Soma that is a Chinish shippe from Macau or out of China to the Island of Iapon and the countrey of Bungo with the scituations of the places along the course THe ninetéenth of Iune béeing Saterday we departed from the Island called A Ilha das Outeas lying on the West side of the issue or chanel of Macau running outward to sea putting out at the place where the ships of Malacca doe vsually enter but because we could not get aboue the Island called A Ilha grande dos Ladronis that is the great Island of théeues lying four miles East Southeast to Seaward from the Islande and the Hauen of Macau therefore wée ranne to Leeward thereof About the length of the shot of a base from it there are two Islands lying somewhat distant from each other with a very small channell running betweene them thorough the which they passed with Bankoâ— or Chinish Barkes From thence about halfe a mile Northward lieth another long Island full of trees and bushes and when you put in there on the West Southwest side in the middle of the channell there lieth a stone which is couered with the Sea Sixe miles East Southeastward from these Islandes lyeth the Island of Tonquian which is a high and long Island full of trees and bushes and close by it on the sea side it hath nine or ten Islandes or Cliffes and because wee could not take the height to passe betweene the Islandes and the Cliffes which is a faire good channell wée passed to Leeward between it and another Island about a small mile Northward from thence which is a great Iland and there lie two Ilands or cliffes the greater hard by it and the other further off which we left on the left hande running along by the Island of Tonquian where it is all fair ground Which Island on the point that lyeth East Northeast on the land side hath a sandie Bay which is a very good Rode for the Monson of the South windes When wee were out beyond that Island then wee helde our course East Southeast vntill wee were as farre to Seaward as the furthest Island and being in sight thereof wee tooke our course East and east and by North for threescore miles till wee were vnder the height of the Island Lamon which course we helde thereby to shunne Rouers and Theeues who at that time and in those countries were continually risident making warre against the Portingales of Macau and yet wee had the firme Land still in sight I meane the toppes of the Trees and Bushes that stoode vpon the lowe flatte Lande and comming to the coast of Lamon although wee sawe it not wee presently ranne Northeast by the which course wee had the sight of the high lande of Chabaquon lying on the coast of China and beeing there wee found much badde water and hard streames and at the last wee espied the Varella or stonie Rocke that standeth aboue the Hauen of China seeing nothing else but high hilles and from thence forwarde wee sawe no more of the coast of China and running in that course of Northeast which from Lamon wee alwaies held wée perceiued the Island of Lequeo Pequeno or Small Lequeo which was at the fourth mealetide after our departure from Macau for wée espied it on Wednesday in the morning and ankered eight miles from it towards the coast of China beeing on the Southwest point thereof This Island Lequeo Pequeno stretcheth Northeast and Southwest and Northeast and by North and Southwest and by South it is a very high Island and about fifteene or sixteene miles long the furthest point
land The seuenth of Iuly being sunday we had a calme and somtimes but not much Southeast and South Southeast winds holding our course East Northeast northeast and Northeast and by North at 24 and 26 fadome water and as soone as we had past the Island of Lamon we presently had small thinne white sand vpon the ground with some shels being in the morning about seuen miles from the land of Chincheo and saw the Island that is like the Island called Ilha dos Lymoins that is the Island of Lemmons lying by Mallaca and somewhat further wee saw a thinne Lande with a sharpe point standing vpon it which is said to bée a Varella do Chinchon that is the marke or Rocke of Chinchon being vpon the eight day which was munday the next night following wee had a calme wherewith the wind came North being somewhat cold with some shoures of rayne but with a South-east winde we had no raine yet in the night time we had two claps of thunder out of the South-east with lightning out of the Southeast and North parts The ninth being Tuesday wee had the height of the sunne at 23 degrées and ½ in the night hauing had the winde East Southeast with a good gale and all night wée lay driuing without sailes with an East and East Southeast windes and a good gale casting out our Lead and found twenty and foure twenty fadome déep once hauing eightéene fadome where wee found small white Sand with some shels In the morning very earely we had a north wind wherwith we wound eastward hauing nothing but the Foukesaile and the Misen vp vntill euening and at the depths aforesaid wée tooke in our sailes minding to driue the next day we saw land which wee had séene the day before and it lay Northward from vs and halfe a point North and by West The eleuenth being Thursday wée tooke not the height of the Sun because wée lay driuing without sayles with an East and East Southeast windes the waues comming Southeast our Shippe winding Northeast this was by night but by day wée had a Northeast and north Northeast wind in such maner that somtime we kept on the one side and sometimes on the other as wind and weather serued at twenty and foure and twenty fadome deepe small white sand and sometimes eightéene fadome the night before we had much lightening out of the West and South parts being the thirtéene day of the new moone and the day before wée had the heigth of the Sunne at 23 degrées and ½ The land we saw we could hardly discerne but we supposed it to bée the land we had séene the other day The twelfth day being Friday wee tooke not the height of the Sunne because wée lay driuing without sayles with an East South-east wind in the night time and in the day wée had it North-east at twentie and foure and twentie fadome déepe and sometimes eightéene fadome with small thinne white sand the ground at foure and twenty fadome being somewhat greater sand with some she is when it began to be day we were as we thought about fiue or sixe myles from the land and the night before wée had much lightening round about vs and in the morning some shoures of raine without wind the skye being thicke and close whereby it seemed the weather would chaunge About euening we had a Southeast wind presentlie changing South South-east wherevpon we let fall our sailes holding our course North-east and North east and by East and also East Northeast but most part Northeast so that the depths began to bée greater and were fiue and thirty fadome with small white sand the Moone as then being at the full and the waues alwayes running out of the South-east and with that winde wée sayled for the space of fiue daies together The thirteenth being Saterday wée tooke the height of the Sunne at foure and twenty degrées that night running East Northeast till morning then sailing East and East and by north and found wâ— had sayled twenty myles being eight myles from the coast of China and in the morning we saw land vpon the other side the ground on that side was white thinne and some blacke sand and about sunne setting we cast out out Lead and found fiue and thirtie fadome déepe with very fine black sand The fouretéenth being sunday we took the heigth of the sun being scarse fiue and twenty degrées hauing a southwest wind with very good weather holding our course Northeast and Northeast and by North all that night at seuen and thirty fadome déepe with very thinne sand some black muddy ground and at the last watch in the morning wee found muddy ground at the same depth of â—7 fadome mixed with blacke sand and when day began to appeare we saw Lande being part of the coast of â—hina being about four fiue or six miles from it and we discouered the Lagarto with the two sisters that is the cockodril Islands so called and so we cast out our Lead and found two and forty fadome déepe muddy ground and somewhat sandy and y e same day also we saw the Island Fermosa lying by Lequeo Pequeno or little Lequeo and then the winde séemed as though it would haue blowne fuller The fiftéenth day being Munday wée tooke the height of the sunne at 25 degrées and 1 â— and in the night we had the winde North with very good weather running about to the northwest and we ran East northeast Northeast Northeast to east wheÌ„ it began to be day we saw land being the end of the Island Fermosa or y e fair Island which is a long and low land broken or rent in the middle which séemeth to be a breach but it is nothing els but as I said before and presently after eastward we saw another higher land which is Iands called Ilhas dos Reâ—s Magos that is the Island of the thrée Kings we passed along by about 7. or 8. miles from them and that night we had 34 fadome déepe and desiring to know what depth wee found being in sight of the land aforesaid wee found aboue 40 fadome the aforesaid land lying east Southeast from vs being muddy ground that day we had a sharpe wind of the Monson but it helde no longer then til euening and then it was calm againe and so held till morning and then we had it Northwest so running about from the West till it came Southwest and continued till night and then it was calme being Tuesday The sixtéenth being in sight of the Islands aforesaid the same day wee had the heigth of the Sunne at 26 degrées lesse ½ degree and the end of the great Island lay east and east and by south from vs and the little Island east southeast This little Island is higher on the south southwest side then on the Southwest side and the point or hooke of y e southwest part hath a breach or rent to the which the néerer you approch
the greater it séemeth This Island is very high in the middle and descendeth downeward towards the end The Northeast point is lower then the southeast so that it maketh as it were a tongue sticking out which is very lowe From thence East Northeastward are certaine Islands shewing like cliffes The depth in that place is fiue and twenty fadome muddy ground Wednesday being the seuentéenth we had a North Northeast wind and then it came North-east and began to blowe so stiffe that we were forced to strike all our sailes letting the shippe driue all that day Southeastward and by night wee willed the man at the helme to steere northwest and about morning the winde began to blowe so stiffe with so great waues that we were forced to go with half our foukesaile with all our cords wel bound made fast and the storm or Tuffon was so great that wee were forced to bind all that wee had on boord els it was presently stricken in péeces This Tempest began first North Northeast and so ranne about till it was North Northwest At the departure whereof it was so boysterous that the waues séemed to touch the clowdes This was vpon Thursday being the two and twentith day of the new Moone the next night following the wind came west but because as then the Sea ranne verie high we let not our sailes fall but in the morning we had the wind southwest and then we let fall our sailes minding to follow on our course with great ioy throughout our ship thinking certainely wee had the windes of the Monson but towards night it was calme againe and then wee had a North wind holding our course eastward but not long after it was altogither calme notwithstanding the waues ranne out of the South so that about two of the clocke we had the wind southeast wherewith we hoised sailes running northeast and Northeast and by North and when it began to be day we saw the Island called Dos Reys Magos that is the thrée kings lying South about tenne or twelue miles from vs and there I found the heigth of the sunne to be 26 degrées and ⅔ being the one and twenty day of the Moone The day before wee sawe the Island Fermosa which is a very high Land and séemeth to reach vnto the cloudes there wee had fiue and fortie and fiftie fadome water muddy ground On friday at sunne rising we cast out our lead and found one and twentie fadome with blacke sande The first token that we had of the aforesaid Tempest was a small Raine-bowe close by the Horizon on the Sea side being a faire russet colour with two other greater Rainebowes whereof the point or end shewed almost like the cloud called Olhos de Bois that is Cats eyes which are small clouds which at the first shewe seeme no greater then a mans fist about the Cape De bona Speranza which by the sailors that saile in the East Indian Seas are much marked for they are tokens of suddaine falling Tempestes and cruell stormes as in the voyage from India to Portingale is alreadie partly declared wherefore it is good to bée aduertised thereof the better to looke vnto it and to watch for them to y e which end I thought it not from the matter to speake of them in this place But returning vnto our matter I aduertise you that when you are come into those countries as long as the winde commeth out of the North and so Southwest you are to make no account thereof for it will presently bée North Northeast and East but when it is calme then you shall haue a Southeast winde and then South and Southwest which are the monson and windes of that time but if it beginne againe to be calme it may so fall out that it will bée East Southeast but it will presently be southeast againe with faire weather which wée also found in this Monson of Iuly Anno 1585. Monday the two and twentie day wée tooke the height of the Sunne at 27. degrées and 1 ◠hauing a Southeast Southsoutheast winde with good weather and helde our course Northeast and as I gessed wée had runne after wée had faire weather and wind about two and twentie miles béeing from the lande of China from the Cape called Sumbor about 12. myles being yet about an hundred miles from the Island of Meaxuma and that day wée cast out the Lead and found 55. and 57. fadome water and sawe many blacke and white Sea foules that helde thereabout the blacke birdes by the Portingales being called Alcatrases The thrée and twentie beeing Tuesday wée had verie good weather in such manner that at that mealetide wée sailed about fiftéene miles béeing about twelue miles from the firme land of China In the morning we cast out the Lead and found one and fiftie fadome with white and blacke sand Wednesday being the four and twentie day wee had the height of the Sunne at 29. degrées with an East Southeast and Southeast winde and good weather holding our course Northeast and Northeast and by North and sometimes but not much Northeast and by East I made my account to haue holden Northeast and by North and so to haue sailed 16. miles being yet from the Island of Meaxuma about 70. miles lying Northeast from vs and there we cast out our Lead and found 49. fadome déepe sandie muddy ground Thursday the 25. of Iuly wee tooke not the height of the Sunne because wee lay driuing without sayles with an East wind winding Southward and so helde till the 26. day and draue Westward finding two fadome lesse in our depth The 26. we wound Northward without sailes yet not long after wee let our foresaile fall but wholly against my mind but onely at the importunate desire of the Chinish Pilat saying that the same day wee should haue the winde larger which was not so but cleane contrarie so that all the way wee made in that sort was more troublesome vnto bs wherefore it is better for such as finde themselues in those countries of 29. degrées to stay for Southeast windes and then to runne North Northeast Northeast and Northeast and by North because the waters and streames runne verie strong towards Liampo and when you are vnder 30. and 31. degrées hauing a South Southeast winde then you shall haue great labour and much paine to get the Island Meaxuma for so it happened vnto vs because the wind was so strong that we could beare but our foresaile and halfe the maine top-saile as also because the Sea ranne very high and hollow and put our shippe out of course and that the streames ranne Southeast This is about 25. or 30. miles from the Island Meaxuma But as soone as the winde came full whereby wee ranne East East and by North and East Northeast at 40. and 34. fadome water the ground being verie smal sand holding as much Eastward as possibly we might and sometimes east and by South wherby we
began to haue more depth yet very slowly that it would haue wearied vs if the ship had gone hardly forward but because the water ranne very hollow whereby the shippe was not verie well stéered wherein we onely put our trust at the last wee had 50. and 60. fadome deepe muddie ground and then â—0 and 75. fadome with small thin sand and a little after that wée had 80. fadome deep but I beléeue that chanced because the Lead hung somewhat backewarde At that casting the ground was somewhat greater sande and because as wee made account wée were neere vnto the Island Meaxuma I presently tooke in the maine toy and myssen in contrary to the opinion of some Pilots euery quarter or â—atch in the night cast the Lead continually ouâ— and presently in the morning we hoysed the maine top-saile vp againe sailing so for a little time we saw land which was part of the Island Meaxuma although other Pilots that were in the shippe saide it was the Island of Guoto but therein they were as perfect as in all the rest of their iudgements This Island of Meaxuma in the first discouerie had a high slope lande lying lowest to the Southwest and when you are right against it at the end therof you finde a Cliffe which sheweth like a Fortresse it was told vs that not farre from that Cliffe there lieth a Cliffe vnder the water whereupon the water breaketh This Island of Meaxuma sheweth like three or foure Islands whereof the first on the Southwest side sheweth as I said before hauing on the top or vttermost part thereof two round Houels like womens breasts or like a saddle the other two Islandes or likenes thereof in the middle way are like great Cliffes with many rockes and crags sticking out like Organ pipes and the other Island or likenes of an Island lying Northeast sheweth like a verie long but not ouer high cliffe we ranne along by the Island holding our course Northeast about two miles beyond it and when we left Meaxuma because the winde ranne Southeast then we ranne Northeast Northeast and by East and East Northeast and in the morning they said that we had the length of the land of Amacula and being to Leeward we espied a great thicke land lying close by the Island Cabexuma This Island Cabexâ—ma is long flat land verie smooth on the North side hauing a Cliffe this was the last of Iuly and the same day wée entred into the Hauen of Langasâ—que which is the Hauen place where at this day the Portingales haue their most trafficke The 37. Chapter The right markes of the Island Meaxuma as well by the depthes as by the opening of the land with an aduertisement how you shall put into the Hauen and in the Rode of Langasaque or Nangasache in the land of Iâ—pan FIrst when you are at seuentie fiue fadome water you must go right vpon the middle of the Island and seeing Land at that depth it will be a high plaine steepe land but not verie great on the vppermost part thereof hauing two pâ—ps and when you goe néere it you shall presently sée another long land béeing flat and euen on the toppe betwéene them both hauing two great cliffes with many small lying togither which you saile close by about two miles from them this Island on the Southwest side hath a Cliffe and a little further to Seaward from it there lyeth another stonie Cliffe vnder the water whereon the Sea breaketh and at the Northeast end it hath another Island or Cliffe You must vnderstand that comming to Iapon and finding more depthes then aforesaid and séeing land then it is not the Island of Meaxuma but rather the Island called Sancta clara if you find lesse depth then seuentie fadome then it is Meaxuma but then it will bée on the Starrebord side The Island of Meaxuma lyeth vnder 31. degrées and 2 â— Hée that desireth to goe to Langasaque passing from this Island about two miles Eastward from it he must runne Northeast and Northeast and by East hauing a full wind but if you saile by the winde you must rather saile East Northeast with this course you shall get the Island of Cabexuma and you shall likewise sée the hilles of Amacusa as also some small cliffes lying right ouer against Cabexuma which you shall presently sée and if you desire to be put into Langasaque then you must holde along by the cliffes aforesaid to Seaward from them and béeing past those cliffes you shall presently see the end of the Island dos Cauallos or of Horses which on the Northwest ende hath certaine Pine trées you must put towardes that point and when you are right against it you shall not presently fall vpon it because of the billowes that come from ouer the Island Caffury which commonly you find most certainly in that place and when you find those billowes you shall put forwarde as much as you thinke conuenient thereby to put into the middle of the Hauen and when you are in the middle then you may fréely put on for there you haue no cause of feare and when you begin to put in then you shall presently sée the water breake vpon the stonie place which lieth as farre as to the middle way of the Island dos Cauallos so that in the entrie of Langasaque there is nothing els to doe then onely to runne in through the middle thereof till you be in the Rode where you must anker hauing foure fadome and ½ and fiue fadome water which is when a trée that is right against the great and principallest Church is euen with the toppe of the Church and you ouer against it then you are at the right place and it is a very good place to anker in but when you are hard by the point of land that commeth right from the Church you must take care to kéepe on the left hand thereby to shunne a Riffe of sand that commeth from the same point and so anker as aforesaid And if you chance by night to passe by the Cliffes aforesaid and desire to anker by them at fortie fadome as some ancient Pilots aduise you in danger of an East wind then my opinion is that you were better runne betwéene them and the Island Cabexuma and certaine Islands that lie in the ranke of the Islands dos Cauallos which is a verie broad and good channell of twentie fadome déepe and there you may wind and lauere from one bough to the other as he will so that you may anker there at twelue or fiftéene fadome which you will vpon a flat and euen ground hard by the Island Caffury wherby you are safe from the northeast to the Southeast and South béeing in more safetie and better assured in the morning to set faile betwéene the Ilands dos Cauallos and Caffury till you be in which is a verie good channell of ten fadome déepe you néed but passe right thorough the middle and to be the
better assured you may send a boat in before you which shall lie there where y e riuer is narrowest thereby to serue you for a Baye or Sea-marke The 38. Chapter The right course to saile from the Island Meaxuma to the Hauen of Cochinochy and to Facunda with the scituation of the Places WHen you sée the Island Meaxuma go within a mile and a halfe or two miles néere it or somewhat closer if you will for there you néed feare nothing but what you sée before you and desiring to saile from thence to Cochinochy then you shall hold your course East and East and by North stil kéeping Eastward whereby you shall come to the Créeke of Arima and if it bée by night and that you desire to knowe when you are by the land then cast your Lead continually out and béeing at fortie fadome then you are about two miles and a halfe or thrée miles from the lande and béeing in the mouth of the Créeke you shall finde hard and great Sand and when you are at fortie fadome you may anker if the weather be faire if you thinke it bée falling water and so stay till it bée daye for there the streame runneth verie strong into the Sea your Lead will direct you what you shall doe If it bée day you shall presently sée the Lande of Cabexuma to Seawarde from you lyeth a Cliffe which sheweth like a Saile This Cliffe you can not sée but when you are close by the point to Léewarde from this point Northward lyeth certaine stonie cliffes but it is not best for you that you sée them when you goe to Cochinochy because they lie to Lée-warde as I saide before And wen you sée lande which is at fortie fadome water then you shall presently discouer the Créeke of Arima as also the point of Cabexuma on the one side and the lande of Amacusa and Xiquy on the other side which is very high This lande lyeth on the South side and Cabexuma on the North side when you sée the point of Cabexuma goe within a mile of it because of a stonie cliffe which lyeth in the mouth of the Creeke holding your course close by Cabexuma about a mile and a halfe from it or along by the land of Amacusa If the winde within this Créeke bée sharpe then stay vntill the floode commeth which shall bring you where you desire to be and being there you haue Cochinochy right before you where you shall haue Barks and Scutes great store to bring you in Hée that desireth to goe to Facunda must hold his course East Northeast and Northeast and by east and when you are close by the land you shall find the depths aforesaid and beeing to Léewarde from Cabexuma you shall there finde harde ground and if it be right ouer against the mouth of the creeke you shall haue sandie ground as aforesaid and when you see the point of Cabexuma then make towards the lande and by the lande about a mile distant you shall sée certaine stonie cliffes by the which you shall holde your course to Seaward from them by these first stonie cliffes lyeth a round Island with a trée in it and somewhat beyond this Island with one Trée there is another Island stretching Northwest and Southeast called Ilha dos Cauallos that is the Island of Horses you must make towards the Island to a point of land that lyeth out on the North side of the same Island This Island on the Northwest side hath for a marke certaine Pine trées when you are close by the aforesaid Northerly point then from thence hold East Northeast till you put in where you shall find a Creeke and right ouer against this Island North Northeast lieth a sharpe pointed Houell reaching to Seawarde which you must shun for half a mile from thence forward lieth two stones which you shall presently see when you enter into the creeke going within an Island or cliffe which will be East Northeast from you you must put towards it about the length of the shot of a great péece and so runne along by it till you be in and within on the right hand vpon the lande you shall sée certaine downes and on the left hand a groue hauing on the sea side as you passe along many stones like Kefell stones Right ouer against this Island on the left hand lie the two stones aforesaid which you can not see then with an ebbe of a spring tide and running in after this manner you shall see a crosse standing vpon a point of land and right ouer against this crosse is the Rode and from this crosse Eastward there is a verie good Hauen where you must make your ship fast and sure from the South side that is the Hauen of Facunda The 39. Chapter An instruction of the course out of the Hauen of Langasaque or Nangasache to the cape de Sumber in the coast of China where the Portingales are resident SAiling out of the hauen of Langâ—saque to China hauing a North wind if you haue cause to anker below by the thrée Islands or cliffes béeing right ouer against the Island dos Cauallos on the side of Facunda then anker there along for it is déepe enough all ouer as I with my lead haue prooued there you shall stay the first night that in the morning very early you may haue the winde from off the lande wherewith you shall set saile loosing as much as you can vntill you be gotten about the Island dos Cauallos for because we did it not being in the ship of Tristan Vaas da Veiga we were in danger not to haue béene able to get about the Island Béeing past the Island dos Cauallos you must hold your course West West and by South and West Southwest and if the wind be bigge then put not towards the Island Guoto for that there at that time you haue certaine South windes which I knowe for certaine because I haue béen there at other times in the ship of Manoel Trauassos in great trouble because it is crosse wind right vpoÌ„ the coast and there you haue no ground as also by night not to fall by the Pannellas which are called Pottes and by some Cliffes wherefore your best course is to runne to Loofeward from the Island Meaxuma Along by the Southwest side of the Island of Meaxuma lieth a cliffe from thence forwarde you shall holde your course West Southwest although you haue the wind scant yet you may hold that course for that being halfe way from the gulfe to the coast you shall without doubt finde the wind large enough In this way kéeping well to Loofewarde about 35. or 40. miles from the Cape de Sumbor you shall find a Banke of 35.37 and 38. fadome déepe which by such as knewe it not might bee taken for the ground of the land of China Being past this Banke you find more depthes but when after that the depthes begin to lessen then looke to your selfe for
then most certainly you are by the land When you sée the land of Sumbor then in the night time you musâ— runne South Southwest and by day make towardes the land thereby at times to kéepe somewhat to Seaward from the land thereby to shun the cliffes called As duas Irmaas or the two Sisters which lie far inward to sea as also the Island called do Baboxyn which lieth crosse ouer against you being distant from the firme land to Seaward about foure or fiue miles stretching Northwest and Southeast you runne along all the coast of Sumbor Northeast and Southwest and somwhat Northeast and by North and Southwest and by South When you are past the aforesaid Island of Baboxyn then runne the course aforesaide for the space of thrée or foure miles and from thence West Southwest whereby you shall come to the Island of Chinchon where you shall finde sand vpon the ground which in all the coast aforesaid you can not find with 18. or 20. fadome water From the Island of Chinchon to the Island of Lamon you shal hold your course Southwest or as you thinke good and when you are right against the Islandes or Cliffes called Os Ilhas de Ruy Lobo you shall find vpon the ground great sand with shelles and from thence to Lamon which is twelue miles you finde the like by the Island of Lamon you find shelles and blacke sand with oyster shels among it if you chance to be in that countrey by night runne not vnder 22. fadome water for that along by the riffes it hath 21. and 22. fadome with shels and blacke sand vpon the ground and runne still Southwest without leauing that course and if it chance before day or by day to be close aire running Southwest and that you haue small thin white sand then you are by Lamon and then hold your course west Southwest and so you shall goe right vpon the middle of the Island called Ilha Branco and from thence runne West vnto the Channell whereby you goe vp to Macau The 40. Chapter Another voiage made from the Hauen of Langasaque to Macau which is from Iapon to China with certaine descriptions and accidents which happened by the Island Guâ—to with the description of the Hauens thereof accomplished in the yeere of our Lord 1584. by a Portingale Pilot. DEparting out of the Hauen of Langasaque the 25. of Februarie Anno 1584. and passing along by the Island of Facunda wee had a West Northwest wind so that wée ankered the 26. day it began to blowe so stiffe that wee were constrained to put for harbour into Tomache The 27. wée hoised anker with an East Northeast and an East winde and cleare weather and comming to the Island dos Cauallos we had a South wind againe wherewith we made back againe to Facunda from whence we set out The eight and twentie being Friday wée set saile againe from Facunda it beeing thrée dayes before the newe Moone with a cold East Northeast wind And beeing within thrée miles of the Island dos Cauallos we had a Southeast wind running on the Southwest bough all that day and the winde began to bee somewhat coole and then we gessed it to be thrée or foure miles beyond the Island of Guoto but in the morning watch wee first espied the point of Guoto being a houell lying on the Northwest part thereof there we had a sharpe wind and it began to rise high out of the South Southeast as much as the ship with all his Sayles might heare wee let the maine saile vp the better to make way and not long after the winde came about to the Southwest and West Southwest with two thunder claps and much lightning wherwith wee hoped it would haue beene still weather but it was not so whereat wee woondered On Saterday by day light wee were right ouer against the point of Guoto almost vpon the end of the Island that lyeth Northwest being about two myles from the lande hauing with the West Northwest winde a crosse storme with the waues of the sea out of the southwest which were verie hollowe and mightie high which tossed the shippe monsâ—rouâ—ly although the winde was ouer much but onely the force and power of the waues troubled vs most which fell behind at our sterne for there wee found a very strong streame and because the wind was slack we doubted we should not get aboue the point of the Island neither from the one side nor from the other for wee had the crosse vpon the Island At the end of this Island we saw another Island of low land being about two miles long and was about a mile and a halfe distant from Guoto some of our ship affirmed that there was a verie good Hauen running in on the one side and comming out againe at the other wherefore we determined to put in there for our better securitie as we did and we ranne in West Northwest At the entry there of it hath a verie great houell with two cliffes lying on the Southeast side of the point The Island that lieth without is on the left hand till you be about a mile from it betweene which and the lande it is all faire you may boldly goe as néere the Island of Guoto as you will and néed feare nothing but what you see before you The entry of the Hauen reacheth Northwest and Southeast hauing within it a great Bay which is all ouer verie déepe from twentie to thirtie fadome water and nothing therein to be feared From this Island to the land you haue all ouer the depthes of thirtie and fortie fadome and yet I haue tried it from the halfe way to Guoto and found eightéene to thirtie fadome with sand and shels on the ground in some places hauing good ground inward in some places you haue Sand and in some places muddie ground froÌ„ thence wée were brought out againe by Scutes about halfe a mile forward so that after that the North wind serued well to saue vs and to driue vs forward from the point lying on the South side which hath certaine stonie Cliffes wée ranne along the land Northeastward and it fell out well for vs for therby we had twentie or thirtie Scutes of the Island that for 20. taes Chiâ—â— money holpe vs well and pulled out our beat we likewise gaue them 50. taes and about 20. depesas to haue our shippe ankered and stayed but they asked vs 30â— whereupon we sent one of our Portingales on land whome they helde for a pâ—wâ—e although by certaine practise we got him out of their hands againe and when after that wee séemed to complaine they cried vs mercie and sent him backe againe although wee vnderstoode verie well that they were our friends by force as perceiuing they had no meanes to hurt vs because wee coulde helpe our selues without them but we marked so much in them that if they coulde haue hindered vs they would not haue failed to doe it or else wée must
haue stopped their mouthes with money There wée vnderstood that the Island of Guoto hath sixe or seuen Hauens that are very good running from the one side to the other but the Hauen aforesaid had no issue but so much pleasure it did vs that there we had the new Moone which was the first of March and the third day wee set sayle againe it being Shroue Tuesday with a North Northeast winde and a verie cléere morning and béeing out wée helde our course Southwest following on our course wherewith wée sawe the Island Meaxuma and the Pannellas or Pots lying South Southeast from vs wée tell right vpon the middle thereof Those Panellas are two small stones and Meaxuma is an Island and when you are Northeast and Southwest right ouer against it it sheweth like two or three Islands wherof that on the Northeast side is long and the greatest and sheweth as if it had a Cliffe This Island is the longest but not verie high and that in the middle is small hauing thrée sharp points like Organ pipes with a Cliffe likewise lying Northeastward The other Island on the Southwest side is round and plain stéepe lande shewing higher then all the other and séemeth to haue Cliffes round about it On the other side lie the Panellas aâ—oresaide and although I said before they are but two stones yet they are three two standing togither and the other somewhat further from them and lie with the Island Meaxuma Northwest and Southeast From thence forward wee held our course to China and Macau in such manner as I shewed in another place and hereafter once againe I will declare The 41. Chapter Another voiage made out of the Hauen of Langasaque from the Island of Iapon to Macau in China in the Santacrus the Gunner being Diricke Geriâ—son of Enckehusâ—n in Ann. 1586. THE 20. of March we departed out of the Hauen of Langasaque it being the first day of the newe Moone vpon a Thursday with a northeast and North Northeast winde and by nine of the clocke in the morning wée were as farre as the Island dos Cauallos running West Southwest and being two myles beyond the Island Dos Cauallos wee had a calme and then the wind came Northwest in such sort that wee ranne Southwest and Southwest and by west and sometimes halfe a strike with a slacke winde The next day in the morning we saw the Islands of Corequyn and Guoto and about eight of the clock in the forenoone we saw the Island Meaxumâ— so that we sawe those three Islands all at once and about twilight we were east Southeast and West Southwest with the Island of Meaxuma and so helde our course Southwest hauing a hard Northeast wind with raine the aire being very darke and close yet the Rackes came out of the Southwest Vpon Sunday we cast out the Leade and found somewhat more then forty fadome water muddye ground and was about forty myles from Meaxuma This depth is a banke lying in the middle way betwéene the Island Meaxuma and Cabo de Suâ—â—bor in the firme land of China Vpon munday the foure and twentith day wée tooke not the height of the sunne because we saw it not hauing so small a winde that the ship might stéere vpright and because we made little way wee cast out the lead and found forty fadome muddy ground this was at noone and at night about sunne setting we cast it out againe and founâ— fiue and fifty fadome whereby we perceiued that wee began to passe ouer a banke at that time we had all one wind being Northeast and North North-east with a good blast and yet the clouds came South-west and South South-west so strong that they put vs in feare doubting the wind would be there but we had certaine men in our shippe that had seene and found it so in that place and yet no alteration whereby they put vs in some comfort in such sort that wee followed on our course with that wind Vpon Tuesday at noone wée tooke the height of the Sunne not full nine and twenty degrées hauing not long before as I gessed marked one point in the Card and estéemed that wee had sayled a hundred myles from the Hauen of â—angasaque but by the Sunne it was not so The sixe and twenty being Wednesday wee tooke not the heigth of the sunne because it was a close day but wee had a good Northeast wind and made good way so that wee seemed to make thirtie myles â—n one mealetide but I made account but of fiue and twenty myles because wee thought the ship sailed not ouer fast that day we sawe many Cuttle bones driuing vpon the water held our course Southwest till morning and because the winde beganne to bee stiffe I thought it good to make towards the land to know it therefore as day appeared wee ran West till it was euening without knowing Land by reason of the mistineâ—â—e of the aire but by the depths our gessing wee thought wee were about 5 or 6 miles from the land our depth was 37 fadome and being towards night with cloudy weather we ran southwest and southwest and by south all that night and when day came being thursday wee gessed to bee ouer against the Lagaâ—to or Crocodille a cliffe so called about fiue or sixe miles to Seaward from it but wee found it to be somewhat more Thursday being the seuen and twenty as soone as day appeared we ranâ—e West towards the Land and about foure of the clocke in the afternoone we saw the land being the Islands Dos Camaroâ—s that is the Islands of Granata those Islanâ—s are not too high as soone as we saw them wee helde our course South Southwest and hauing sailed a little way we saw another round Island called Ilha do Bâ—boxâ—â— which lay right before vs as soone as wee saw it we presently ran South to shun it because we were not aboue a quarter of a mile from it there wee found so strong a streame and course of water which ranne with vs that in short time we were two or three myles from the aforesaid Island in such manner that all that night wee ranne South and South and by West and South Southwest and when the moone rose we held our course southwest The eight and twenty being Friday about morning we began to runne West Southwest west and west and by South and at noon or thereabouts we cast out the Lead and found nine and twenty fadome muddy ground and running so with that course for a little time we saw land but it was so close and misty that we could not know it but about two or three of y e clock in the afternoone it began to cleare vp and then we knew it to be the Island of Chinchon being North from vs and there wee cast out the Lead and found nineteene fadome water sandy ground and not long after we sawe the whole coast and firme Land of China and so we ran all
Lequeo Pequeno also y e time and the weather will shew you what you should doe when you are past Lequeo Pequeno or before if it so fall out you must seeke to know the land for it is necessary for you to see it because of the Island Lamon as also not to kéepe too farre to Seaward You runne along by the coast from Sumbor to Chinchon Northeast and Southwest and somewhat northeast and by North and Southwest and by South but not much And when you are right ouer against Chinchon and that by marking the land or by the heigth of the sunne you know it being foure miles from the land you must hold your course southwest so to go without the Island of Lamon and if you desire to passe within the Islands you may well do it for it is faire ynough and you néede feare nothing But if you feare to mâ—e Lamon then it is better to runne as aforesaid for then you shall be farre inough from the Riffe of Lamon which is very dangerous There you must haue great foresight for when you are past Lamon then you must holde your course to the Island of Lanton The Islandes you sée before you come to Lamon are called Os Ilhas de Ruy Lobo that is the Islands of Ruy Lobo from the which that which lyeth Northeast is the smallest the other being somewhat greater Vpon the greatest are séene certaine Bushes from thence to Lamon are seuen or eight miles on the Sea side it is twentie fadome déepe with shels on y e ground from thence you shal run southwest and holde a little southwest and by South and if it be in the day time you shall presently see the Islands lying at the end of the Riffe of Lamon from whence the said Riffe hath his issue reaching a myle and a halfe or two miles with this course you shal make good way but if it be night you must looke well to your selfe And running the aforesaid course of Southwest you must keepe to Sea-ward from the stones of Lamon and doe 〈◊〉 best to passe by in the day time and 〈◊〉 you are past the Island of 〈…〉 â—sently make towards the 〈…〉 passe along by it From 〈…〉 15 miles from thence the coâ— of 〈…〉 land reacheth Northeast and Southwest and from thence East Northeast and West South-west to the Island 〈◊〉 Branco which lyeth distant from the coâ—st about fiue miles vnder 22 degrees and â— right ouer against the creeke of Fuâ—â—da de Bona Ventura that is the creeke of good fortune you may passe close by the Island Branco both on the sea side as you thinke best and being past that Island 〈◊〉 the Islands of Canton lye on a rawe From this Island Branco to the Island De Sanchoan are fifty miles When you are past Ilha Branco then you must runne west Southwest from Branco to Macau are foure and twentie miles that is twelue miles before you enter into the chanell that runneth betwéen the Ilands and twelue miles from thence to Macau you shall séeke to enter by the first channel you find by the which lyeth certaine high round Islands which will be on the Northeast side of you and on the Southside it hath two Islands whereof one is very high and plaine stéepe ground on the sea side therof hauing a stony cliffe and being ouer against those high bare Islands on the Northside thereof you shall see a channell which I neuer passed but leauing the aforesaid Islandes on your starboord and so running Southwest you shall presently sée the mouth of the chanell which you must passe through although it sheweth narrow notwithstanding it is very good for I haue run into it by night you must as I saied before leaue the great Island to seaward from you and runne in with the flood west west and by north and west Northwest and so you shall go right to Macau also the wind and weather will shew you what you shall doe And when you come from Iapon right ouer against the cape De Sumbor being fiftéen miles to seaward from it then cast out your lead and you shall find fortie and fiue fortie fadome water muddy ground with many streames of foule water and when you sée the land then you must run along by it to the last Island of Chinchon which lie eight miles into the sea whereby you shal find boies of nets and fuycken with whings and Flags which the fishermen of that Countrey haue set vp for markes From thence to Chincheon are twelue miles Right ouer against those boyes with whings and flags vpon them lieth a town called Guara from that Towne forward you must hold towards the land and to know the Somes which are Chinish carnels and Barkes vsed in those countries they beare but one saile Now to make toward the Lande as you would you must runne West you must likewise knowe that the Varella of Chinchon that is the banke or marke of Chinchon is a high Lande lying along by the entry of Chinchon on the Southeast side hauing a high land reaching southwest stéeping downeward reaching ouer towards an Island lying thrée or foure miles inward to Sea along by the point of the Varella lyeth an Island about a mile distant from it from the which runneth a riffe of sand at lowe water being two fadome déepe reaching about the length of the shotte of a great Péece towards y e other Islands abouesaid lying right ouer against the entry which in length reacheth East and West in the middle hauing a sharpe Hill and Southwestward the aforesaid land of Laylo runneth very lowe being there then you are close by it and you haue nothing els to do but passe about the point and anker at four fadome muddy ground on the Northeast side lie certain Islands close by the Point of Laylo and two miles to Seaward from it you haue twenty fadome water y e water of that country being very blew from thence to Lamon 3. or 4. miles from the land you passe not aboue the depth of 18. or 20 fadome and being past Chinchon towards Lamon You shal find thin smal sand vpon the ground with some shels being right ouer against Chinchon or towards the northeast pou shal find muddy ground with the same depth of 18 and 20 fadome and right ouer against Lamon you haue some blacke sand vpon the ground The 43. Chapter How you shall runne in out and through the channell betweene the Islands and cliffes of Macau with all the markes signes and tokens thereof so to saile into the Hauen of Macau IF you desire to saile out of Macau you must vnderstand y t as soone as you hoise anker in the road where the ships lie which is right ouer against the Bulwarke of Gaspar Borgies you shal presently sée in the Northeast a white vlacke standing vpon the hil and presently after towards the East you haue two houels which with the Hill of the white vlacke
make thrée The second houell which lyeth in the middle is bare wholly discouered appearing through the rocks cliffes y t lie vpon the top of y e field called Dos Paâ—anas which is in the middle of the chanel being by the last houses of the town and when you are right against y e aforesaid houses then you shal presently discouer the 3. houel so that when you are right against y e sandy point lying close by y e Varella called Dos Mandorins then the said houel is almost wholly vncouered where you shall find four fadome and a halfe déepe with a full sea of a Spring tide and as soone as you are past the sandy Point then you beginne to find more depths that is fiue and fiue fadome and a halfe and running in that sort you shall go right vpon a broken land lying on the other side ouer against the Island called Ilha do Bugio that is the Island of sea Cats When you are at the depths aforesaid then southward from you you shall sée an opening called Enseada de Gonsato vaaz which within it hath a hil on the east side which sheweth like an Island or Cliffe and on the West side it hath two Points sticking out and when those two Points are right ouer against each other theÌ„ you are in the middle of the channell and you must be carefull to sée y t they lye one right against the other for by that marke you shall runne in the déepest and best place which is at 27 Spannes of water with a spring tide as I haue found it in the time of the Monson when you saile to Iapon hauing an East winde for with a North wind you haue lesse water there Now to know when you are as farre as the banke you must vnderstande that Northward towards the Island Do Bugio there lyeth a stony cliffe which sheweth like a houell which lieth most Northward of all the rest along by the strand it hath a clouen Rocke with two Points when you haue the aforesaid stony Cliffe like a houell right ouer against the middle of the aforesaid clouen rocke then you are vpon the aforesaid banke and when the aforesaid marke standeth vneuen on the one or other side then you shall presently find more depths which shall bee thus that as you run Southeast right vpon the thickest and greatest land on the other side vntill you be at foure and fiue fadome water which is the point called Varella and desiring to passe through the east channell then you must runne Southeast and East Southeast vntill you haue discouered the Island Do Lastro wholly by the end of the Island Do Bugio then it is not good for you to runne more southward to shun the stone lying right ouer against the Varella and when you haue discouered the Island Do Lastro as I said before then you must runne along by the aforesaid stone about two cables length from it there you shall haue the depth of 28. and nine and twenty spannes of water with a spring tide and to know when you are néerest the stone it is wheÌ„ you haue wholly discouered the first cliffe of two that lye on the Northside of the Island Do Lastro and then you are about a stones cast from the aforesaid-stone at the depth aforesaid and when you haue wholly discouered the second Cliffe then you are beyond the stone you may likewise know it by another marke which is a white vlacke standing vpon the Hill which you see ouer the Towne and hath a stone which sheweth like a mans head When you bring the aforesaid white vlacke in the middle of the top of the house of Don Ioan d Almeyda then you are right ouer against the aforesaid stone and wheÌ„ you are past it it is good to make towards the land on the Southside in such sort that you leaue the two third parts thereof on the side of the town and one third part on the Southside and running in that sort you shall haue more depths then in the middle way vntill you be vpon the banke which hath no more then sixe and twenty Spannes Water with high Water of a spring tide And desiring to knowe when you begin to be right against it it is when you haue the crosse part or dore of y e great church right against the toppe of a house that standeth on the strand which commeth vpon the same way of the same dore right to the strand so that y e dore is wholly discouered there you haue seuen twenty or eight and twenty Spannes water which shall bee when you sée or discouer the clocke house or top of S. Paules church with a hill that standeth behind the same church and as soone as the said clockhouse is couered then you shall presently finde more depths as two and thirtie spannes water which is foure fadome which is right ouer against the place where you fetch fresh Water and going somewhat further forward you shall finde foure fadome and a halfe fiue fadome at a spring tide this was the Road where the shippe called S. Crus of the burthen of fourteene or sixtéene tunnes did anker and when the said ship did wind with an ebbe then the Island Do Lastro lay vncouered although it was a good way from the Land You haue a very good token or marke to know when the land on the Southside is neerest to you then you must make to the Island Do Lastro and Northward from it there is two cliffes and when those two cliffes are one against the other then you are in the déepest of the channell vntill you bee ouer the banke The 44. Chapter Of the course and streames of the water in the way from Malacca in the time of the Monson when they ordinarily trauell thether FRom the Island Pulo Catao lying on the coast of Champa part of the Land of Camboia to the Varella which is a place lying in the way from Pulo catao towards Malacca in y e same coast of Champa or Camboia y e streames run very strong towards the south from the Island Pulo Catao fiue miles forward y e streams run very strong towards the Island Champello and the créeke called A Enseada de Cauchinchina And in the monson of China when you saile from Mallacca in the months of October Nouember and December theÌ„ the streames in that part run Northwest And from the Month of Ianuary forward they run southwest that is towards the sands therfore such as trauel that way must obserue certain times and that with good aduise and as they begin to goe néere the country where the sands lie that are right against the coast of Champa betwéene them and the entery of the coast the streames run as swiftly into the south as a stone slyeth out of a mans hand But I aduise you not to goe so néere the Island Aynao that you may sée it vnlesse it be with a Northwind for with an East wind you would be
in great danger The 45. Chapter Of the tides and increasing of the waters of Malacca IN the entry of the Hauen of Patane lying on the East side of the country and coast of Mallacca to the Island of Bintao which lyeth by the straight of Singa Pura vnder the Equinoctiall line the streames doe alwaies runne Southward in the months of Nouember and December From the Island Pulo Condor lying right against the hauen and land of Camboia to the Island Pulo Timao lying on the East side of the coast of Malacca at such time as you come froÌ„ China holding your course halfe a strike from the south the streams run towards the Island Borneo and being halfe a strike Southwestward then the streames run towards the coast of Pan which lyeth on the coast of the East side of Mallacca From Pulo Condor to the Island Pulo Sesir lying right against the coast of Camboia the streames run Eastward and by Pulo Sesir in the way towards China the streames runne to the coast of Champa and from the Falce Varella which is distant from the right Varella fiftéen miles lying on the coast of Camboia y e streames runne Eastward about fiue or sixe myles from the coast which is at the end of Iuly and in the month of August In the Monson of the South windes when you saile from Mallacca to China the streames from the Gulfe of Pulo Catao and the Island Aynao runne to the créeke of Enseada da Cauchinchina vntill the last of December and from Ianuary forward then the streams in that Gulfe and countrey runne towards the Sands that lie ouer against the coast of Champa in Camboia from the other side and the later it is in the yeare from the Month of Ianuary forward the stronger they run towards the sands In the Monson of China when you saile from China to Mallacca then the streams run very strong from the Island Pulo Catao to y e Island Puto Cambir both lying on the coast of Camboia or Champa It happeneth oftentimes that from the eight and twenty of Iuly to the fourth of August from the Varella to Pulo Catao you haue calme sea and then you haue the Terreinhos which are Windes blowing from the land out of the West and northwest and the Viracoins which are winds that come from the Sea out of the East Southeast and east Northeast being in the North they presently change into the south whervpon it becommeth calme till the Terreinhos or land winds doe come again and thus they hold about two miles from the coast and not further for they are winds that do only blow vpon y e coast as in other places it is already sufficiently declared in speaking of the Terreinhos and Viracoins When you saile by the Island of Lequeo Pequeno or small Lequeo towards the land of Bungo in the Island of Iapon the streames in that country do run eastward to the Island of Tanaxuma From 30 degrées Northward a little further theÌ„ to the middle way to Iapon the streames from that country to the coast of China run northward towards the créeke A Enseada de Nanguyn in the monson of the south and southwest winds In this monson of South and Southwest winds the streams from the Island Pulo Tayo lying by the Island Aynao in the coast of China run Southwestward to the Islands of Sanchoan and Cantao The 46. Chapter Of the tides both for ebbe and flood by the daies and houres of the Moone in the haueÌ„ of Macau in China with the height of the same Hauen found by experience of an expert Pilot. THe 19. of September I marked the course of the Tides of China within the hauen of Macau it being Full Moone and I found it to be full sea about halfe an houre and somewhat more after eight of the clocke in the morning which I tryed at the Full moone to sée if it would agrée with the New Moone The 3. of Februarie An. 1585. I tooke the height of the Sunne which as then was about 13. degrées from the line and I found that the Hauen of Macau lieth full vndec 22. degrées 1 â— and as then I likewise tried the tides of the same hauen and found it to be full Sea a little after 12. of the clock the moone being thrée daies old in such sort that by the same account with a new Moone it is full sea in that hauen at ten a clocke and 2 â— in the morning which I also tried by the new Moone The 16. of Februarie Anno 1585. I marked the Tides within the Hauen of Macau it being then full moone and found the first day of the full moone that it was high water at eleuen of the clocke and a halfe before noone The 2. of Iune Ann. 1585. I marked the tides in the Hauen of Macau found it to be full Sea iust at 12. of the clocke at noâ—ne the moone being foure dayes old so that after the same account it is full sea at nine of the clocke in the morning béeing new moone but these Tides of China fall not out iustly vnlesse it be foure daies before and fiue daies after the changing of the Moone for then there is as much water as vpon the third day which I affirme to be most true because I haue often and many times tryed it to be so The cause is for that before it it is all Islands and Channels so that when the waters beginne to fall they ebbe not aboue thrée houres but with an East wind they ebbe with a greater course The 47. Chapter Of the signes and tokens of the tides waters and windes vpon the coast of China and in the way to Iapon IN the time of the monson of the South and Southwest windes it is most certaine in the whole coast of China and the way to Iapon that when the winds of the monson blow and from thence run into the East that they turne not againe out of the East into the south but from thence into the North and hauing continued there for a certaine time they turne againe into the east and from thence into the South if it be a Northeast wind then it turneth often times into the Southwest and not into the East but not often but the surest is as aforesaid It changeth also often times from North to South and not into the East which is very common and when the Sunne setteth and hath some red carnation cloudes about it and that many beames issueth from the Sunne in such manner that it séemeth to blaze then it is a signe of great stormes and tempests Likewise in the rising and going downe of the Moone if it sheweth in the like maner it is a signe of stormes and tempests When the Sunne riseth so faire and cléere that you may in a manner sée into it and perfectly discerne the compasse thereof then it signifieth good weather The like doth it signifie in the setting of
way to know the land which you shall alwaâ—â— find at Macau if you find them noâ— in â—â—dia For other necessaries concerning to shippe you shall finde of all things sufficient in China The gaines and profits of all sortes of wares of China are verie great except rawe silke whereby they haue verie little gaine for there they rather desire it readie spunne and although there should bee much solde there yet that were no reason or cause why they should carrie much thither because it should not hinder the voiage and trafficke of them of Iapon into the East Indies for there are many other kindes of wares great store to carrie thither wherein there is much more profit then in silke Of the common wares and merchandises that the Spaniards in the Islands of Lucones or Phillippinas doe buy and yet they buy them much dâ—â—er there then they should buy them in China in newe Spaine they gaine but sixe for one and in Peru ten for one whereof they are sure for that the Portingales that haue gone from hence thither in the ship that came hither haue gained so much by the wares they carried with them that the time that they stayed for their returne séemed to them a thousand yéeres and as they repoâ—t the Viceroy of Noua Spaigna and all the other gouernours and gentlemen of the countrie haue a great desire to vse the trade and doe much looke after it Many are of opinion that to saile that way to Peru it would be a longer voiage for that when you are at Acapulco you must take another way and hold another course of 700. miles long from Acapulco to the Hauen of Callande Lyma which is the Metropolitane Cittie of Peru lying vnder ten degrées on the South side of the Equinoctiall and you should make your voiage in the same yeere and further it is a countrey of great charges and expences whereby you should loose and spend all that you should gaine more in that countrey then in new Spaine because the countrey of newe Spaine is more aboundant in all kinde of necessaries victuals then Peru and therefore your charges is lesse The 52. Chapter The true and perfect description of a voiage performed and done by Franciscus de Gualle a Spanish Captaine and Pilot for the Viceroy of new Spaine from the Hauen of Acapulco in new Spaine to the Islands of Iuâ—ones or Phillippinas in the Hauen of Manilla and from thence to the Hauen of Macau in China and from Macau backe againe to Acapulco accomplished in the yeere of our Lorde 1584. THe tenth of March in the yéere of our Lord 1582. wée set saile out of the Hauen of Acapulco lying in the country of new Spaine directing our course to the Islands of Lucones or Philippinas West Southwest running in that manner for the space of 25. miles till wee came vnder 16. degrees that so wée might shun the calmes by sailing close by the shore From thence forward we held our course West for the space of 30. miles and being there we ranne West West and by South for the space of 1800. miles to the Island called Ilha d'Engano which is the furthest Island lying in the South partes of the Islands called de los Ladrones that is the Islands of Rouers or Islas de las Vellas vnder 13. degrées and ½ in latitude Septentrional and 164. degrées in longitude Oriental vpon the fixed Meridional line which lieth right with the Island of Tercera From thence wée held our course westward for the space of 280. miles till we came to the point called El capo de Espirito Santo that is the point of the Holy Ghost lying in the Island Tandaya the first IslaÌ„d of those that are called Philippinas Lucones or Manillas which is a cuntry with few hils with some mines of brimstone in the middle thereof From the point aforesaid we sailed West for the space of eighteene miles to the point or entrie of the channell which runneth in betwéene that Island and the Island of Lucon This point or entrie lieth scarse vnder 12. degrées All the coast that stretcheth from the entry of the chanell to the point El capo del Spirito Santo is not very faire Eight miles from the said point lyeth a Hauen of indifferent greatnes called Bahya de Louos that is the Baye of Wolues hauing a small Island in the mouth thereof and within the Channell about halfe a mile from the end of the said Island lyeth an Island or Cliffe when you passe by the point in the middle of the channell then you haue 25. fadome déepe with browne Sand there we found so great a streame running westward that it made the water cast a skum as if it had béene a sand whereby it put vs in feare but casting out our Lead we found 25. fadome déepe From the aforesaid entrie of the channell North and North and by East about ten miles lyeth the Island of Catanduanes about a mile distant from the land of Lucon on the furthest point Eastward and from the same entrie of the channell towards the West and Southwest lyeth the Island Capuli about sixe miles from thence stretching West Southwest and East Northeast beeing fiue miles long and foure miles broad and as wée past by it it lay Northward from vs vnder 12. degrées and ¼ and somewhat high lande Foure miles from the aforesaid Island of Capuli Northwestward lyeth the thrée Islands of the Hauen of Bollon in the Island of Lucones stretching North and South about foure miles distant from the firme land about halfe a mile whereof the furthest Southward lyeth vnder 13. degrées In this channell it is twentie fadome deepe with white Sand and a great streame running Southeast wee passed through the middle of the channell From this Channell wée held our course Southwest and Southwest and by West for the space of twentie miles vntill wee came to the West end of the Island of Tycao which reacheth East and West 13. miles This point or hooke lieth vnder 12. degrees and 3 â— In the middle betweene this Island and the Island Capuli there lyeth three Islands called the Faranias and we ranne in the same course on the North side of all the Islands at the depth of 22. fadome with white sand From the aforesaid West point of the Island Tycao to the point of Baryaâ— it is East and West to saile about the length of a mile or a mile and a halfe we put into that channell helding our course south and south and by west about three miles vntill we were out of the channell at sixteene fadome deepe with halfe white and reâ—â—sh sande in the Channell and at the month thereof whereof the middle lyeth vnder 12. degrees and â— and there the sâ—reames runne Northward The Island of Bayas stretcheth northwest and Southeast and is lowe land whereof the Northwest point is about three miâ—es from the coast of Lucon but you can not passe between
not knowe it but when you see this Island then you may knowe where you are From this Island to S. Vincents are twelue miles which is a pleasant way and in that countrey there are three small Islands called As Ilhas de Boa Sicanga From these Islandes to the Hauen called A Berra de Birtioga are sixe miles which is a verie good a deepe Hauen Between the Islandes aforesaid this Hauen lieth another rouÌ„d Island called Monte de Trigo that is the hill or heape of wheate which is a verie good marke for such as desire to put into the Hauen of Bertioga From this Hauen to the Hauen called A Berra d'Esteuao da Costa that is the hauen of Steuen da Costa are fiue miles this is a good Hauen for great shippes it hath a very good Bay for shippes to lie in and if you will not put into it outwarde close by the land you haue an Island called A Ilha da Moela that is the Island of Chéese where you may anker From this Hauen Southwestward lieth an Island called A Ilha Queimada that is the burnt Island which is a flat Island all stonie but along by it it is faire ground like South southeastward From the Hauen lyeth a Cliffe which of many men is not knowne it lyeth aboue the water and is in the middle way betwéen the Island Dos Alcatrases and Ilha Queimada From thence to the Island called Canaueas that is the Island of Réedes are thrée miles you run North Northeast and South Southwest along by the coast Canaueia is an Island that hath a verie good Hauen and fresh water and lieth vnder 23. degrées and ½ on the south side it hath two Rockie Islands whereof the one is somewhat long and round and right ouer against it lyeth the riuer called Rio de Canauea where you may put in with small ships From Canauea to the Island called A Ilha de Santa Caterina are 48. miles and you run along the coast North South This is a long Island full of trées it lieth by the coast which reacheth North and South On the North side at the entry of the Hauen it hath two Islands and on the South side another Island called A Galle that is the Island of the Gally on the North side thereof you can not enter but onely with small Barkes and ships but on the South side it hath a very good entrie for great ships it hath much fresh water and great store of fish and wilde Deere This Island lyeth vnder 28. degrees and ½ From thence to the Hauen called O Porto de Don Rodrygo are fiue myles and fiue miles further forward lyeth the Hauen called dos Patos that is the Hauen of Géese by some called La Laguna that is the Lake This Hauen serueth for Barkes and small ships that traffique in those countries From thence to the riuer of Rio de Plata there is not one hauen where you may put in the coast reaching North Northeast and South Southweast Sayling from the aforesaid Island of S. Caterina to Rio de Plata you must holde your course southward to the height of 34. degrees â…” Then you must put to the land when you sée it which at the first sheweth like an Island called los Castillos then you shall run along the coast which will lie Southwestward Southwest and by West and west southwest from you and make not your account to sée the Cape de Sancta Maria for the land there is so flat that there you can not discerne any signe or token of a point but there you shall sée certaine riffes but you néed not feare any thing more then that you sée before your eies and if you chance not to sée any land running towardes it then cast out your Lead and there you shall find 10.14 and 18. fadome déepe therfore feare not for it is all one kind of ground and you are in a good way Being there as aforesaid then run as long as you can well discerne the land then you shall sée an Island called A Ilha dos Lobos that is the Island of Wolues for there you sée many wolues it is a flat Island all full of stones on the south side it hath an Island and on the east a Riffe but you néede not feare any other then that you sée before your eies This Island is distant from the Firme land about two miles and ½ towards the northwest from this Island of Wolues there lieth a small flat Island with a low wood close by the land which hath a good hauen to anker in if you haue any tempest out of the Southwest If you passe along by this Island on the East Southeast side then goe néere the point or hooke of the firme lande which is a lowe stony point and betwéene this point and the Island lyeth a sand which you shall presently sée by the water that breaketh vpon it and if you enter on the Northeast side you néede not feare any thing and to anker kéepe close by the Island for there you haue fresh water and great store of fish vpon the ground Béeing there you must bée carefull for there beginneth the first high Lande and from it about eight or ten myles further lyeth a sand that is verie dangerous and is about foure miles from the Firme Lande being two myles in length you must runne betwéene it and the Firme lande and when you sayle from the high land aforesaide for the space of a mile and a halfe or two myles you must kéepe harde by the shoare because of the sande aforesaide and from thence with your Leade in your hande with good watch and foresight and if it bee not seasonable weather to saile by night then your best way were to anker and to stay till it bee day the better to make your voiage And when you thinke you are past this sand then you shal sée a hill called O monte de Santo Seredâ—o which is a rounde high hill the like whereof is not in those countries to bee founde betwéene the which hill and the sandes aforesaid lyeth an Island called A Ilha das Flores that is the Island of Flowers which you may passe about without danger And when you come into the salt or fresh water which floweth fiue and twentie miles beneath the riuer called Rio de Buenos Aires that is the Riuer of good aire where the water is verie fresh then hold your course West and then you shal be eight or ten miles beneath the Riuer of good aire which is the best course you can holde but I aduise you still to haue your Lead in hand and when you are at thrée or foure fadome water then saile no further if it bée by night but in the day time you may sée whither you saile which must be in sight of land and so neere that you may easily discerne the trées holding two miles from the land for you can not passe by the Riuer of
good aire without séeing the houses that stand vpon the same The most part of the land of the Riuer of good aire is a thicke land like a downe about thrée miles along by the sea side as soone as you sée this lande then you must make right towards the houses yet somwhat more towards the south side where there is a place where the shippes anker but if you desire to runne on the North side then you shall take your course from the Island las Flores or from Santa Horodio about a mile and a halfe from the land at three and ½ or foure fadome to the Islands of Saint Gabriel which are thrée smal Islands but they haue no good Rode and if you chance to anker there goe not a shore but verie warily because the inhabitants haue warres with the Spaniards and Portingales all along the riuer but the best course is on the South side from the fresh water inwards The 63. Chapter How to saile from the Island La Gomera one of the Islands of Canaria to the Antillas or sore Islandes of the Spanish Indies and from thence to the coast of the Firme land to Cartagena and Nombre de Dios as also the course from thence to the Hauana and the channell thereof and so to the Flemiâ—h Islands and from thence to Spaiâ—ne with the scituation of the places SAyling from the Island La Gomera to the Island called La Desseada that is the Desired Island being one of the Islandes of the Spanish Indies then you must holde your course South for the space of a mealetide so to get out of the calme from thence you must runne West Southwest till you be vnder 20. or 22. degrées and beeing there you must runne West and West and by South till you come vnder fifteene degrées and 1 â— which is the height of the Island La Desseada If when you are there you haue a West winde then run Southwest as farre as you thinke good thereby to get againe vnder fifteene degrées and ½ running on the wether side West Northwest to bring all to one point whereby you shall find helpe from North and South East and West because you are close by the lande holding your course West and west and by north because the compasse windeth a strike into the Northwest with the which course you shall see the Island la Desseada This Island lieth East and West and sheweth like a Gallie with her tilt vp on the east side it is a low land in forme like a bore-sprit of a shippe or galley from the West side it is high land shewing like the sterne of a gally and on the South side it sheweth like halfe an Island the hinder part thereof being like a horse shoe The Island called Maâ—galante is a low and flat land and reacheth East West being full of trées on the East side beeing highest and on the South side hauing certaine white downes on the West side about halfe a mile from the Island it hath a blacke shining cliffe This Island lyeth full vnder fifteene degrees The Island la Dominica is a great Island and reacheth Northwest and southeast when you sée it first beeing on the outside therof it sheweth like 2. Islands by reason of a great opening it hath in the middle but when you are close by it then you perceiue it to be all one Island it is full of hils on the Southeast side a lowe land hauing a small or thin point of land with a houell vpon it on the North-west side it is thicke high Land hauing a Hill that seemeth to bee seperated and to stand alone by it selfe although it is not alone Vpon this hil there is a rock which sheweth like a clock house without the aforesaid thicke high Land there is a Rocke or cliffe which runneth off froÌ„ y e thick point This Island lyeth vnder 15. degrées ½ The Islands called Los Santos are four Islands which are not very high lying in Triangle Betweene these Islands and the Island La Dominica there runneth a good channell to passe through Sayling from the Island La Dominica to the Point of Coquibocoa lying from the Firme Lande you shall holde your course West and West and by South vntill you bee by the point and if you sée it not then runne southwestward towards it or Southward vntill you sée it This Point of Coquibocoa is a low Land running into Seaward and within the lande it hath a rowe of Hilles which are called the Oile Hils which stretch along by Veuansuela where they end which vpon the coast of the Firme land From this Point you runne along the coast to the Point called Cabo de Vela and betwéene these two Points there are two hauens wherof one is called Bahya Honda that is the deepe Bay This lieth on the East side and on both sides where the Sea beateth it hath downes The other Hauen lying on the West side within it hath a high Land or Hill which reacheth North and South In both these Hauens you may enter with Ships of two hundred tunnes All this coast to Cabo de la Vela is cleare and safe The point Cabo de la Vela is a high land like a suger loafe and about half a mile from it there is a cliffe which sheweth like a ship vnder saile and therefore this Point is called Cabo de la Vela that is the point of the saile This Cliffe lieth Northeast and Southwest with y e Point aforesaid it is said you may well passe betwéene it and the lande and if you depart from the saied Point to saile to the Cliffe and Point called Cabo de la aguia that is the Point of the Néedle then you shall runne West South-west by the which course you shall see it They are foure Cliffes together which shewe in forme like a Horse shooe and the Lande that is right against it is a high Land Beeing inward to the Lande some what higher which is called Las Sierras Neuadas that is the Snowe Hils when these hils are Southward from you then you are right against the foure cliffes And comming to the beginning of the foure Cliffes hauing past the Riuer De Palomina lying by the last Cliffe then you shall see the Cabo de La aguia This Cape is a still Lande descending downeward to the Sea side but not very high on the toppe hauing a Dale which sheweth like a saddle It hath likewise on the out side close by it thrée blacke shining Cliffes which the water dooth almost flowe ouer they lye with the Cape aforesaid North and South The saied Cape is bare sheweth blackish and shining All this coast reacheth almost East and West From Cabo de Sancta Marta forward you must runne along by the coast alwaies looking to your course because of the Billowes and streames that come from the Lande which oftentimes fal vpon you When you discouer the land of Charthagena you shall sée two Cliffes
which lye by the Hauen of Charthagena you must runne along by the first Cliffe betwéene it and the Lande alwaies with your Lead in hand and you must not goe néerer then ten fadome to the Land there you shall find white sandy ground and being at fiftéene or sixtéene fadome muddye ground then kéepe aloofe to the Southeast and South and so runne in for you shall sée the hole open before you Sayling from Carthagena to Nombre de Dios that is the name of God with the winds called Brisas which are windes blowing from the East and North parts generally called Brisas then you must hold your course West and somewhat West and by South till you be vnder 9. degrées and ½ vnder the which heigth lyeth the point called Cantina which are seuen Islands whereof fiue stretch east and west the other two Northeast and Southwest Being somewhat past these Islandes you shall sée a low point of Land reaching into the Sea called A Punta de Lambras which lyeth on the West side and Westward from it it hath a Hill which is somewhat higher then the Point which you may well discerne when you make to Sea-warde from it and that the Point lyeth South-west-warde from you the said Hill hauing on the Southeast side certaine lowe Lande and somewhat more Westward the Lande beginneth to bee higher which endeth at the Riuer of Francisco At the mouth of this Riuer to Sea-ward from it lyeth a stony cliffe and from this Riuer to Nombre de Dios it is all ouer a flat and red shining Lande to the houell called Niquea which is about a myle from Nombre de Dios you shall likewise sée the edifices or buildings of Capira and if a man should ask you when those buildings lye Northeast from you where you are then you may answere him that you are vpon the coast of the lande North-east and Southwest beneath Nombre de Dios. Sayling from Nombre de Dios to Carthagena you shall holde your course East Northeast to the point from thence you must runne East whereby you shall discouer the Islands of Saint Barnard which are low and yet Hill Islandes with very faire ground along by them and if you should be in a Frigate then you may passe betweene them and the land Fiue or sixe miles further you shall see the Islands called Braua which are foure small Islands whereof the furthest outward is the greatest they are all lowe and bare Lande hauing by them faire and cleare ground and with a Frigate you may passe inward but with a shippe you must not goe neerer then sixe fadome From thence east Southeastward you shall sée the Gally of Carthagena with the markes aforesaied in the East and East Northeast bough you shall see the Land Cariscos which is a high and hill land From thence you must runne along by the coast vntill you begin to sée the Hauen then you must put in alwaies shunning the sands of Carys running along by the east point being there if night falleth vpon you then you may anker betweene Carys and Baru in the surest place you can finde to defend you from the windes called Brisas by the high Lande of Carys and if you put out of the Hauen of Nombre de Dios you shall lauere till you sée the buildings that are beyond it and sayling into the Hauen you shall doe as wind serueth Sayling from Carthagena to the Island of Hauana you shall hold your course North-west till you come to thirtéene degrées and 1 â— and when you are vnder thirteene degrées then you shall let your selfe driue South South-east and South as the manner is vntill you bee past the heigth or bee out thereof or in the depth and when you are vpon the ground of the Serrana then you shall sleepe towardes it as much as you can and if it bee possible you shall hold Northward for so you shall the sooner be there From the point of Cabo de Camaron to Cabo de Roncador with the Sea strand that stretcheth from the one to the other as also from Serrana and Serranilla being Islands and Cliffes so called on the west side of all these sands is great sande with Fish sâ—ales vpon the ground and the least depth you find there is fiftéene fadome waâ—r being all faire and in this depth you shall runne till you bee ouer it and being ouer you shall presently begin to multiply or rise till you bee at fiftie fadome deep and somewhat more Serrana lieth vnder foureteen degrees and ½ and Serranilla vnder sixteene degrees If you sée Serranilla on the West side on that side it is a lowe sandye Island stretching Northwest and Southeast Sayling from Serranilla or Cabo de Roncador to y e point of S. Anton lying in the Island Cuba yuâ— shall holde your course Northwest and Northwest and by north wherewith you shall discouer the Cape aforesaied or the Cape de coryentes that is the Point of the streames which is a clouen Point towards the sea side being lowe Land on it hauing some Palme Trees From thence to Cabo de S. Aâ—n the Land beginneth to bée lower the coast stretcheth Northwest and south-east The cape de S. Anton is a low sandy Point vpon it hauing two or three houels and lieth vnder 22. degrees If in this course you chaunce to see the Island called Cayman Grande that is the great Cayman You must vnderstand that it lieth vnder nineteene degrees and is low land ful of Trees stretching east and west on the south-side hauing some white sandy strands Sailing from the Point of S. Anton with the windes called Vendaval which are West and South windes generally called Vendauaâ—es as the East and North windes are called Bâ—sas to the Hauana then you must runne Northeast to shunne the droughtes that runne out from this Point which reach to the beginning of the hils called Los Organos that is the Organs and when you are past the sands you shall hold your course along by the coast for there you neede feare nothing more then that you see before you The Organs are certaine high Trées which make manye openings and rents whereof those on the South-side are called the point of Guanico these Organs or hils reach to the Riuer called Rio de Porâ— that is the riuer of hogs from thence begin the Hils called the Cabinas which are high and doubled on the highest of theÌ„ hauing a playne or flat Lande there you haue a Hauen called El Puerto de Cabanas Eastward from this point to the field of Mariam it is low flat land ful of Trees where there is another Hauen From thence to Hauana it is all lowe land without any risings except one Houell lying right ouer against the Hauana which is a clouen hill vpon it hauing a sharpe point called Atalaya that is a guard and beeing North and South with the Hauen within the Lande you shal see two Hils which shew like two
S. German which are very high but not so high as those of Loquillo From this point of Cabo Roxo you must hold your course west and west and by North whereby you shal discouer the Island called De la mona that is the Island of the ape and you must run along by the southside thereof The Island La Mona is a low land and reacheth East and West on the sea side being a plaine land descending downward on the north-side it hath a Cliffe or small Island called Monica or the little ape Betwéene it and the Island you may passe On the West side of Mona there is a Roade of faire and good ground hauing likewise such another Roade by the Point that lyeth Southwest From the Island De la Mona to the Island De la Sahona if that it be by day you shall hold your course Southwest and by night West and West and by South and you must vnderstand that the Point called Cabo de Enganno that is the deceitfull Point is altogether like the Point of Sahona hauing a clouen houell on the vpper part of the Island being betweene the lowest Lande thereof that lieth on the Sea side Betwéene Cabo del Enganno and Sahona lyeth a small Island called the little S. Catalyna the reason why you must there runne West and South is because the Streames runne towards the Créeke The markes of the Island Sahona are these It is a lowe Island full of Trees so that as you come towardes it you first sée the Trées before you perceaue the land thereof it stretcheth East Northeast and West Southwest on the South side it hath certaine Riffes which run halfe a mile into the Sea if you fall vpon this lande comming out of the Sea and that ouer the Islandes you sée certaine hilles then they are the hils of Niquea which you shall likewise sée betwéen great Sancta Catalina and La Sahona this Island Sahona on the West side hath a Rode of eight or ten fadome deep to saile from Sahona to Santo Domingos it beeing thrée miles to seaward from Sahona you shall hold your course Northwest and Northwest and by West From thence to Santo Domingos it is altogither low land on the sea side descending downward and is the land which in that place reacheth furthest East and West The markes of Santo Domingos are these that when you are Northwest and Southeast with the old mines then you are North and South with the riuer of Santo Domingos and ouer the riuer you shall see two houels which shewe like the teates of a womans breastes when those houels are North and North and by west from you then you are to loofeward from the riuer so that by those teates you shall knowe whether you be past or to Loofeward from it On the East point of the entrie of the Riuer standeth a Tower which serueth for a guarde or beakon for the shippes that come out of the sea From this point aforesaide runneth a hidden cliffe which you must shunne and so you must runne in but go not to neere the Al Matadero that is the Slaughter house for there it is shallow and being within the aforesaid hidden cliffe you haue foure fadome déepe and so you shall holde your course to the Sandie strand lying on the East side shunning the Cliffes of the fortresse and going from the Fortresse inward then you must let fall your ankers right against the Admiraltie in the middle of the riuer where the best place and Rode is From Santo Domingo being 4. miles to Seaward you shall holde your course Southwest and Southwest and by west vntill you be North and South with the Island of Niqueo and to goe from thence to the hauen of Oquoa leaue not the coast but run close by it with all your sailes till you be past the riuer for if you get off frō it without touching the Palma which is a certaine banke so called where the ships vse to anker then you must not anker being in the riuer you must looke wel before you that when you anker to make your ship fast with an anker both out to Landward and to Seaward and then you are safe Sayling from this Hauen and Bay of Oquoa you shall runne outwarde to the South vntill you be about the point and thrée miles into the sea and then you shall hold your course Southwest and Southwest and by South wherby you shall discouer an Island called De la Beata that is the blessed Island which is a lowe Island stretching East and west Two miles Westwarde from Beata lieth an Island or cliffe called Altobello which by night sheweth like a ship when you are past Beata and Altobello then you must runne West and West and by North to the point called Cabo de Tubaron that is the point of the hedge In this créeke are thrée or foure Islands or rocks which are called Los Frayles that is the Friers Before you come to Cabo de Tubaron there is a Créeke wherein lieth an Island called Iabaque with more cliffes and Riffes lying about it being foule ground Behind this Island you see certaine hilles called Las Sierras de dona Maria otherwise Las Sierras de Sabana when you are right against Iabaque then you must run West Northwest The Cabo de Tubaron is a blacke shining Houell on the sea side being clouen vpon it hauing certaine white places like water beakes Within this point or Cape lieth a riuer of fresh water where you haue stones for Ballast as you haue in the Riuer of Mynijcka From thence to the point of Cabo de Crus you must hold your course Northwest vntill you are past the Island of Nabassa running on the North side thereof and if the streames chaunce to driue you on the south side then you must obserue certain times if you be in a great ship holding a good way into the Northwest from it to shun the sands that sticke out from the point de Morante and reach betweene this point and Nabassa there in some places you haue aboue foure fadome déepe and at the end thereof you may run from 15. to 20. fadome déepe Nabassa is a round and lowe Island on the Sea side being all flat and plain land running on the North side of this Island you shall hold your course Northwest and Northwest and by West and if you desire to passe along by the Cape De Crus it is a point sticking out which as you come toward it out of the sea sheweth as if on the top it were full of Trées but it is inward to Lande On the East side of this Point lyeth the hauen of Cabo de Crus Now to sayle to the Island De Pinos you must runne West Northwest wherby you shall discouer the Island This Island De Pinos is a low land ful of Trées so that as you come out of the Sea you sée the Trées before you sée the land it stretcheth East and West and
The 67. Chapter The course right marke of the nauigatioÌ„ from the point called Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues to the riuer of Coâ—go in Angola southwards in the coasts of Guinea and Ethiopia with the situation of the countries SAyling from the point called Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues which lyeth full vnder 1. deg on the south side of the Equinoctial line in the Coast of Guinea or Ethiopia the coast froÌ„ thence forward stretcheth northwest southeast being a flat long land you haue the depthes of 10. and 9. fadome déepe water towards the land being all ground like sand of sand lopers all through the country except it be by the point Cabo de Catarina where you haue great sand some stones if you will make any hast being vpon this coast and voyage then euery night you must anker till you haue the Terreintios which are the winds blowing from off the land holding your course in that manner till you haue the Viracoins which are y e winds out of the sea therwith again to make towards the land vntil it be calme or that y e are at 10. fadom déep theÌ„ you must anker til the comming of the land winds which come dayly at their times as aforesaid if the streames run w t the wind theÌ„ you may wind from the one bough to the other holding to léeward as aforesaid the coniunction or time wheÌ„ the streames run with the winds is with a new Moone about 2. dayes before or after and 3. dayes before it is ful if you desire to run from one bough to the other y t must rule your selfe in such maÌ„ner that you be euery morning by the coast to get before the winds that as then blow off the land the marks of the long land are these it hath certain great thicke houels called As Sierras de santo Espirito that is the hils of the holy Ghost and somwhat further you haue 2 other houels which are very easy to be knowne in this country you haue muddy ground further forward you shal sée a high hill within the créek called Palmella for that it is like to Palmela the which lyeth betweene Lisbon and Setuval you shal likewise sée somewhat further in the créeke a land which stretcheth North south as you passe along by it close by the strand it hath a thicke flat houel which is called Cascars because it is like Cascais by Lisbon you must vnderstand that before you hoyse vp anker in that countrie you must let fal your sayles to see if the shippe may get out and if it cannot get out then lie still till you haue the Viracoins that blow out of the sea for in those countries the streames runne very stronglie out of the riuer of Congo into the sea wherby the shippe can hardlie get out when you are so far as the place called a Palmeirinâ—a that is the woods of Palme trees then let your best anker fall for the groundes in this crosse way is stiffe muddy ground whereby the ankers oftentimes will hardly holde fast but ship out againe And when you are in the riuer of Congo being at the depth of 30. or 40 fadome then you shall loofe the ground then you shall turne your howreglasse and when it is runne out then cast out your lead and you shall find 10 or 12 fadome water on the other side of the riuer of Congo and you shal sayle about the length of a stone cast from the land and the best course is close by the land for otherwise you could not get into the riuer by meanes of the great force of the streames wherby many men are much troubled as being the greatest stroÌ„gest streams that are found in any place and run aboue 12. miles into the sea Sayling from Congo to Angola in maner aforesaid and being 35. miles on your way you shal sée a high hill by the which ther lieth an IlaÌ„d called A Ilha de Loanda but if you be not very close by y e laÌ„d you shal not sée the Iland for it is very low flat if you chance to be by the land at 6. 7. deg then you shal be at the mouth of the riuer of Congo and 10. myles to seaward from it you shal sée many tokens signes thereof as great streames thicke réeds herbs with many cutle bones and wheÌ„ you are by the land at 7. 8. degr ½ then you shall sée a flat land with trées al ouer it and in this country in euery place at 18. 20. fadome you shal haue good ground from 2. to two miles and a halfe from the land on the sea side you haue white downes which shew like sandy strandes the ground by it is sandy with some stones that is from 7. to 8. deg and you must vnderstand that the land from 5 deg southwarde is altogether high all the ground being muddy and a mile from it it is 30. and 35 fadom deepe good ground being a cleare and faire coast with cause of feare of more then is séen before your dayes that is from 7 to 9 deg and the land from 8. degrees southward is verie high if you come out of the sea to the land vnder 7. degr and ½ then you shal sée 7. hils or Houels which stretch Northwest and southeast called As sete serras that is the 7. hils if you come to the land vnder 8. degr ¼ then you shall see a hie land lying eastwarde from you this point in shew hath the forme of cape S. Vincent in the coast of Spaine comming to the land not full vnder 9 degrées then north or northeast you shal sée the aforesaid point hauing vnder it some whit downs that strike somewhat out into the sea but you need not feare them for it is faire and cleare and therefore you may fréely go neere the land theÌ„ better to know it being vnder the hight aforesaid of scarce 9 deg then eastwarde to land you shal see a round hil called monte Pasqual when the point aforesaid is northeast from you then the other land shall stretch southwest which is the furthest land lying without the Iland of Loanda the land that lyeth southwarde from you is a greate thicke land at the foot thereof hauing some red and white downes with certaine small trees vppon it which show like figge trees of Algaruen in Spaine now to runne within y e land of Loâ—ndâ— you must hold your course right vpon the land that lyeth southward so you may go close coâ—t about half a mile froÌ„ it being there southwestward from the Iland you shal discouer the Iland which is very flat and of white sand whereby you can hardlie see it but when you are close by it that is the hauen of Angola This Iland of Loanda is like an Iland called A Ilha das Caruns lying by the cape called Cabo de santa Maria in the land of Algaruen vpon the coast
had made with the laÌ„d about one houre or more wee perceiued land right before vs and were within two miles thereof which by reason of the darke and misty weather we could no sooner perceiue which put vs in great feare for our iudgement was cleane contrarie but the weather beginning to cleare vp we knew the land for it was a part or bank of the point called Cabo Falso which is about fiftéene miles on this side the cape de Bona Speranza towards Mossambique the cape de Bona Speranza lieth vnder 34. degrées southward there wee had a calme and faire weather which continuing about halfe a day in the meane time with our lines we got great store of fishes vppon the same land at ten or twelue fadoms water it is an excellent fish much like to Haddocks the Portingales call them Pescados The twenty of the same month wee met againe with Saint Francisco and spake with her and so kept company together till the 24. of Iune when wee lost her againe The same day wee stroke all our sayles because wee had a contrarie wind and lay two dayes still driuing vp and downe not to loose anie way meane time wee were against the high land of Tarradonaâ—al which beginneth in 32. degrees and endeth in 30. and is distant from Capo de Bona Speranza 150. miles in this place they coÌ„monly vse to takâ— counsell of all the officers of the ship whether it is best for theÌ„ to sayle through within the land of S. Laurenso or without it for that within the land they sayle to Mossambique and from thence to Goa and sayling without it they cannot come at Goa by reason they fal down by meanes of the streame and so must sayle vnto Cochin which lieth 100. miles lower then Goa and as the ships leaue the cape then it is not good to make towards Mossambique because they cannot come in time to Goa by reason of the great calmes that are within the land but they that passe the Cape in the month of Iuly may well goe to Mossambique because they haue time inough there to refresh themselues and to take in fresh water and other victuals and so to lie at anker ten or twelue dayes together but such as passe the cape in the month of August doe come too late and must sayle about towardes Cochin thereby to loose no time yet it is dangerous much more combersome for that commonly they are sicke of swolen legges sore bellies and other diseases The 30. of Iuly wee were against the point of the cape called Das Corentes which are 130. miles distant from Terra Donatal and lieth vnder 24. degrées Southwarde there they begin to passe betwéene the Ilands The Ile Madagascar otherwise called Saint Laurence The Iland of S. Laurenso is by Marcus Paulus named the great Iland of Magastar by Andrea Theuet it is called Madagascar and is the greatest of all the East Ilandes for it is greater in compasse then eyther of the Kingdomes of Castile or Portingale and lieth on the other side of Africa as we passe the cape de Bona Speranza it containeth in length as Theuet describeth 72 degrees and in bredth eleauen degrees and is in coÌ„passe as some hold opinion 3000 Italian miles and as some write 4000. which should bee sixe or eight hundred Dutch miles This Iland is iudged to be very temperate and therefore well peopled but beleeue in Mahomet Marcus Paulus sayeth that the Iland is gouerned by foure ancient men it is full of wilde beasts and strange foules whereof he writeth many fables not worthie the rehearsall This Iland hath Elephants all kind of beasts which haue but one horn wherof one is called an Indian asse with whole feet vncloueÌ„ an other is called Orix with clouen feet it hath many snakes efftes great store of woodes of redde Sandale which are there little esteemed for the great abundance there the Sea yeeldeth much Amber it aboundeth also in Rice Barley Oranges Lemons Citrons Millons which are so great that a man can hardly gripe them both red white yellow and better then ours and much ginger which they eate greene Hony Sugar in such abundance that they know not whether to send it Saffron many medicinable hearbs and Indian nuts It likewise yeeldeth Siluer and hath manie Riuers beautifull Fountaines and diuers Hauens whether many Sarasins Mores doe bring their Marchandise as clothes of gold Siluer Linnen made of cotton wooll and such like From S. Laurenso to Mossambique which lieth from the firme land of Das Corentes 120. miles and is an Iland of 220. miles long stretching north south and in breadth 70. miles beginning from the first point vntill you come at the cape in 26. degrees and endeth in the North in 11. degrées The people of the Iland are blacke like those of Mossambique and goe naked but the haire of their heades is not so much curled as theirs of Mossambique and not full so blacke The Portingales haue no speciall traffique there because there is not much to be had for as yet it is not very well known The 1. of August we passed the flats called os Baixos de Iudea that is the Flats of the Iewes which are distant from the cape das Corentes 30. miles and lie betwéen the Iland of S. Laurence the firme land that is from the Iland fiftie miles and from the firme land seauenty miles which Flats begin vnder 22. degrées and a halfe and continue to twentie one degrées there is great care to bee taken lest men fall vpon them for they are very dangerous and many ships haue bin lost there and of late in Anno 1585. a ship comming from Portingale called S. Iago beeing Admirall of the Fleet and was the same that the first voiage went with vs from Lisbone for vice Admirall as in another place we shall declare The fourth of August we discried the land of Mossambique which is distant from the Flattes of the Iewes nintie miles vnder fifteene degrées southwards The next day we entred into the road of Mossambique and as we entered we espied the foresaid ship called S. Iago which entered with vs and it was not aboue one houre after we had descried it beeing the first time wee had séene it since it left vs at the Iland of Madera where we seperated our selues There wee found likewise two more of our ships Saint Laureâ—zo and Saint Francisco which the day before were come thether with a small ship that was to sayle to Malacca which commonly setteth out of Portingale a month before any of the ships do set sayle for India only because they haue a longer voiage to make yet doe they ordinarily sayle to Mossambique to take in sweete water fresh victuals as their voiage falleth out or their victuals scanteth If they goe not thether theÌ„ they saile about on the back side of y e Iland of saint Laurenso not setting their course for
Mossambique Being at Mossambique wee were foure of our Fléete in company together only wanting the Saint Phillip which had holden her course so nere the coast of Guinea the better to shun the Flats of Bracillia that are called Abrollios whereon the yere before she had once fallen that she was so much becalmed that she could not passe the Equinoctiall line in long time after vs neyther yet the cape de Bona Speranza without great storms foule weather as it ordinarilie happeneth to such as come late thether whereby shee was compelled to compasse about came vnto Cochin about two months after we were al ariued at Goa hauing passed and endured much misery and foule weather with sicknes and diseases as swellings of the legs and the scorbuicke and paine in their bellies c. The 4. Chapter The description of Mossambique which lieth vnder 15. degrees on the South side of the Equinoctiall line vppon the coast of Melinde otherwise called Abex or Abexim MOssambique is a Towne in the Iland of Prasio with a safe although a small hauen on the right side towardes the cape they haue the golden mines called Sofala on the left side the rich towne of Quiloa and by reason of the foggie mistes incident to the same the place is both barren vnholsome yet the people are rich by reason of the situation In time past it was inhabited by people that beleeued in Mahoomet being ouercom kept in subiection by the tirant of Quiloa his lieftenant which the Arabians called Zequen that gouerned them Mossambique is a little Iland distant about halfe a mile from the firme land in a corner of the said firme land for that y e firme land on the north side stretcheth further into y e sea theÌ„ it doth before it there lie two smal Ilands named S. George S. Iacob which are euen w t the corner of the firme land and betwéene those two Ilands not inhabited the firme land the ships doe sayle to Mossambique leauing the Ilands southward on the left hand and the firm land â—n the north and so without a Pilot compasse about a mile into the sea to Mossambique for it is déepe enough and men may easily shun the sands that lie vpon the firme land because they are openly séene The ships harbour so neare to the Iland and the â—ortresse of Mossambique that they may throw a stone out of their ship vppon the land and sometimes farther and lie betwéene the Iland and the firme land which are distant halfe a mile from each other so that the ships lie there as safely as in a riuer or hauen The Iland of Mossambique is about halfe a mile in compasse flat land and bordered about with a white sand Therein growe many Indian palmes or nut trées some Orange Apple Lemmon Citron and Indian Figge trées but other kindes of fruit which are common in India are there verie scarce Corne and other graine with Rice and such necessarie marchandizes are brought thether out of India but for beasts and foule as Oâ—en shéep Goats Swine Hennes c. there are great aboundance and very good and cheape In the same Iland are found shéepe of fiue quarters in quantitie for that their tayles are so broad and thicke that there is as much flesh vpon them as vpon a quarter of their body and they are so fatte that men can hardlie brooke them There are certaine Hennes that are so blacke both of feathers flesh and bones that being sodden they séeme as black as inke yet of very swéet taste and are accounted better then the other whereof some are likewise found in India but not so many as in Mossambique Porke is there a very costly dish and excellent faire and swéete flesh and as by experience it is found it farre surpasseth all other flesh so that the sicke are forbidden to eate any kinde of flesh but onely Porke because of the excellency thereof MOssambique signifieth two places one which is a whole kingdome lying in Africa behinde the cape of Bona Speranza betweene Monomotapa Quiloa the other certaine Ilands herafter drawne and described lying on the south side of the Equinoctiall line vnder 14. degrees and a halfe whereof the greatest is called Mossambique the other two Saint Iacob and Saint George These Ilands lie almost in the mouth of a riuer which in Africa is called Moghincats About Mossambique is a verie great a safe hauen fit to receiue and harbour all ships that come and goe both to from Portingal the Indies and although both the Kingdome and the Iland are not very great yet are they very rich and abundant in all kinde of thinges as appeareth in the description of the same Mossambique the chiefe greatest of them is inhabited by two maner of people Christians and Mahometanes the Christians are Portingales or of the Portingales race there is also a castle wherin the Portingales keepe garrison from whence also all other castles and fortes thereabouts are supplied with their necessaries speciallie Sofala where the rich mine of Gold lieth there the Portingale ships doe vse to harbour in winter time when of wind or by meanes of foule weather they cannot accoÌ„plish their voiage The Indian ships doe likewise in that place take in new victuals and fresh water This Iland beeing first discouered by the Portingales was the only meanes that they found the Indies for that froÌ„ thence they vsed to take Pilots which taught them the way touching the manner and customes of these people read the Authors description at large they are good shooters in musket and caliuer and expert Fishermen Sayling along further by the coast towardes the Indies you passe by Quiloa which in times past was called Rapta not great but verie faire by reason of the great trees that grow there which are alwaies fresh and greene as also for the diuersities of victuals it is also an Ilande lying about the mouth of the great Riuer Coauo which hath her head or spring out of the same lake from whence Nilus doth issue This Iland is inhabited by Mahometans and they are all most white apparelled in silk and clothes of cotton wooll their women weare bracelets of gold and precious stones about their neckes and armes they haue great quantitie of siluer workes are not so browne as the men well membered their houses are commonly made of stone chalke and wood with pleasant gardens of all kind of fruit and sweet flowers from this Iland the kingdome taketh his name This point asketh a larger discourse which you shal finde in the leafe following They haue no swéet water in this Iland to drinke but they fetch it from the firme land out of a place called by the Portingales Cabaser and they vse in their houses great pots which come out of India to kéepe their water in The Portingales haue therein a verie faire and strong castle which now about 10. or 12. yeares past was fullie
finished and standeth right against the first of the vnhabited little Ilands where the ships must come in and is one of the best and strongest built of all the Castles throughout the whole Indies yet haue they but small store of ordinance or munition as also not any souldiers more then the Captaine and his men that dwel therin But when occasion serueth the married Portingales that dwell in the Iland which are about 40. or 50. at the most are all bound to kéepe the Castle for that the Iland hath no other defence then onely that Castle the rest lieth open and is a flat sand Round about within the Castle are certaine whollie accustomed therunto as if they were Horses Moyles or Asses I haue spoken with men that came from thence and haue séen them and affirme it for a truth But returning to our matter of the gouernmement and vsage of the Portingales and their Captaine I say that the Captaine maketh the commoditie of his place within thrée yeares space that hee remaineth there which amounteth to the value of 300. thousand Duckets that is nine tunnes of golde as while we remained there the Captaine named Nuno Velio Perena himselfe shewed vs and it is most in gold that commeth from Sofala Monomotapa as I said before from Mossambique they carrie into India Gold Ambergris Eben wood and Iuorie and many slaues both men and women which are carried thether because they are the strongest Moores in all the East couÌ„tries to doe their filthiest and hardest labor wherein they onely vse them They sayle from thence into India but once euery year in the month of August till half September because that throughout the whole countries of India they must sayle with Monssoyns that is with the tides of the year which they name by the windes which blow certaine monthes in the yeare whereby they make their account to goe and come from the one place to the other the time that men may commonly sayle betwéene Mossambique and India is 30. dayes little more or lesse and then they stay in India till the month of Aprill when the winde or Monssoyn commeth againe to serue them for Mossambique so that euery yeare once there goeth and commeth one shippe for the Captaine that carrieth and bringeth his marchandise and no man may traffique from thence into India but only those that dwel and are married in Mossambique for that such as are vnmarried may not stay there by speciall priuiledge from the King of Portingall graunted vnto those that inhabite there to the end the Island should be peopled and therby kept and maintained Behind Mossambique lyeth the countrey of Prester Iohn which is called by them the countrey of Abexines wherevpon the coast of Mossambique vnto the red sea is commonly called the coast of Abex and diuers men of Prester Iohns land do send men of that country some being slaues and others tree into India which serue for Saylors in the Portingalles shippes that traffique in those countries froÌ„ place to place whose pictures counterfets as also their religioÌ„ maner of liuing and customes doeth hereafter follow in the pictures of India This coast of Abex is also by the Portingalles called the coast of Melinde because that vpon the same coast lyeth a towne and a Kingdome of that name which was the first towne and Kingdome that in the Portingals first discouerie of those countries did receiue them peaceably without treason or deceit and so to this day doth yet continue Wee stayed at Mossambique for the space of 15. dayes to prouide fresh water and victuails for the supplying of our wants in the which time diuers of our men fel sicke and died by reason of the vnaccustomed ayre of the place which of it selfe is an vnholsome land and an euill aire by meanes of the great and vnmeasurable heat The 20. of August wee set saile with all our companie that is our foure shippes of one fléete that came from Portingall and a shippe of the Captaines of Mossambique whose thrée yeares were then finished his name was Don Pedro de Castro in whose place the aforesaide Nuno Velio Pereira was then come The said Captain Don Pedro returned w t his wife family again into India for that the Kinges commandement and ordinance is that after the expiration of their thrée yeares office they must yet stay thrée years more in India at the commandement of the Vice Roy of India in the kings seruice at their owne charges before they must returne into Portingall vnlesse they bring a speciall patent from the King that after they haue continued thrée yeares in their office they may returne into Portingal againe which is very seldome séene vnlesse it be by speciall fauour and likewise no man may trauell out of India vnlesse hee haue the Vice Royes Pasport and without it they are not suffred to passe for it is very narrowly looked into The 24. of August in the morning wée descryed two Islandes which are called Insula de Comora and Insula de Don Ian de Castro The Islande Comora lyeth distant from Mossambique 60. miles Northwardes vnder 11. degrées on the South side is a very high land so high that in a whole dayes saile with a good winde wee could not lose the sight therof the same day the shippes seperated themselues againe according to the ancient manner for the occasions aforesaid The third of September we once againe passed the Equinoctiall line which runneth betwéene Melinde and Braua townes lying vppon the coast of Abex and the line is froÌ„ Mossambique Northwards 230. miles and from the line to the Cape de Quardafum are 190. miles and lyeth vnder 12. degrées on the North side of the Equinoctiall vpon this coast betwéene Mossambique and the Cape de Guardafum lyeth these townes Quiloa in time past called Rapta Mombassa which is a towne situate in a little Island of the same name which sheweth a farre off to be high sandie downes and hath a hauen with two fortes to defende it Melinde Pate Braua and Magadoxo each being a kingdome of it selfe holding the lawe of Mahomet the people are somewhat of a sallower colour then those of Mossambique with shining hayre gouerning their Citties after the manner of the Arabians and other Mahometanes This corner or Cape of Guardafum is the ende of the coast of Abex or Melinde and by this cape East Northeast 20. miles within the Sea lyeth the rich Island called Socotora where they find Aloes which taketh the name of the Islande being called Aloe Socotorina and is the verie best being close and fast and from thence is it carried and conueyed into al places By this corner and Island beginneth the mouth or enterance of the â—streito de Mecka for that within the same vpon the coast of Arabia lyeth the citie of Mecka where the body of Mahomet hangeth in the ayre in an iron chest vnder a sky made of Adamant stone which is greatly sought vnto
them withall which they call Catâ—auentos Cayrus hath very high houses with broad peint-houses to yeelde shadowe therby to auoide the heate of the Sunne in the middle of these houses are greate Pipes of ten cubites longe at the least which stand Northward to conuaye and spread the colde ayre into their houses specially to coole the lowest romes In winter time it is as colde with them as it is in Portingale the water that they drinke is brought from the firme land which they kéepe in great pots as the Tinaios in Spaine and in Cesternes whereof they haue verie great ones within the fortresse which water for a yeare or a yeare and a halfe against they shall neede like those of Mossambique They fetch water by the Iland of Barein in the Sea from vnder the salt water with instruments foure or fiue fadome déepe which is verie good and excellent sweete water as good as any fountaine water There is in Ormus a sickenesse or common Plague of Wormes which growe in their legges it is thought that they procéede of the water that they drink These wormes are like vnto Lute strings and about two or thrée fadomes longe which they must plucke out and winde them aboute a Straw or a Pin euerie day some part therof as longe as they féele them creepe and when they hold still letting it rest in that sort till the next daye they binde it fast and annoynt the hole and the swelling from whence it commeth foorth with fresh Butter and so in ten or twelue dayes they winde them out without any let in the meane time they must sit still with their legges for if it should breake they should not without great paine get it out of their legge as I haue séen some men doe Of these wormes Alsaharanius in his practise in the 11. Chapter writeth thus In some places there grow certaine Wormes betweene the skinne and the flesh which sicknesse is named the Oxen paine because the Oxen are manye times grieued therewith which stretch themselues in great length creepe vnder the skin so long till that they pearce it the healing thereof consisteth in purging the body of corrup fleame c. Reade further In my master the Archbishops house we had one of his seruants borne in Ormus newly come from thence which drewe thrée or The 8. Chapter Of the towne fortresse and Island of Diu in times past called Alambater THe Towne and Ilande of Diu lyeth distant from the ryuer Indo 70. miles vnder 21. degrées close to the firme land in times past it belonged to y e King of Cambaia in whose land and coast it lyeth where the Portingals by negligence of the Kinge haue built a fortresse in processe of time haue brought the Towne and the whole Iland vnder their subiection and haue made it very strong in a manner inuincible which fortresse hath béene twice besieged by souldiers of Cambaia and their assistants first in Anno 1539. and secondly in Anno 1546. and hath alwaies béene valiantly defended by the Portingals as their Chronicles rehearse This Towne hath a very great Hauen and great traffique although it hath verye little or nothing at all of it selfe more then the situation of the place for that it lyeth betwéen Sinde and Cambaia which Countries are abundant in all kind of things wherby Diu is alwaies ful of strange nations as Turks Persians Arabians Armenians and other countrie people and it is the best the most profitable reuenue the King hath throughout all India for that the Banianen Gusaratten Rumos and Persians which traffique in Cambaia from thence to Mecca or the red Sea doe commonly discharge their wares and take in their lading in Diu by reason of the situation thereof for that it lyeth in the entrance of Cambaia and from Diu it is shipped and sent to Cambaia and so brought backe againe to Diu. The Towne of Diu is inhabited by Portingals together with the natural borne Countrimen like Ormus and al the townes places holden by the Portingals in India yet they kéepe their fortresse strong vnto themselues This Iland aboundeth and is very fruitfull of all kind of victuals as Oxen Kine Hogges Shéepe Hennes Butter Milke Onions Garlicke Pease Beanes and such like whereof there is great plentie and that very good and such as better cannot be made in all these Low-countries but that the Fuell is not so well drest they haue likewise Chéeses but they are very drie and sault much Fish which they sault and it is almost like vnto salt Ling or Codde and of other sortes they make hanged flesh which is very good and will continue for a whole Viage of all these victuals and necessarie prouisions they haue so great quantity that they supply the want of all the places round about them especially Goa and Cochin for they haue neither Butter Onyons Garlicke Pease Oyle nor graine as Beanes Wheat or any séede they must all bee brought from other places thether as in the orderly description of the coast as it lyeth I will shew you what wares goods marchandises victuals fruites and other things each lande Prouince or Countrie yéeldeth and affordeth From Diu sayling along by the coast about fiftéene or sixtéene miles beginneth the mouth of the water that runneth to Cambaia which is at the entrie and all along the said water about 18. miles broade and 40. miles long and runneth in North-east and by North and at the farther ende of the water is the Towne of Cambaia whereof the whole Countrie beareth the name and lyeth vnder twentie thrée degrées there the King or Solden holdeth his Court. The 9. Chapter Of the kingdome and land of Cambaia THe land of Cambaia is the fruitfullest Countrie in all India and from thence prouision of necessaries is made for all places round about it whereby there is a greate traffique in the Towne as well of the inhabitants as other Indians and neighbors as also of Portingals Persians Arabians Armenians c. The King obserueth the law of Mahomet but most parte of the people that are dwellers and naturall borne Countrimen called Gusarates and Baneanem obserue Pythagoras law are the subtilest and pollitiquest Marchauntes of all India whose counterfets and shapes are placed in this booke by those of India with a description of their liuing ceremonies customes as in time and place shall be shewed This lande of Cambaia aboundeth in all kinde of victuals as Corne Rice and such like grain also of Butter and Oyle wherewith they furnish all the Countries round about them There is made great store of Cotton Linnen of diuers sorts which are called Cannequins Boffetas Iorims Chauâ—ares and Cotonias which are like Canuas thereof do make sayles and such like things and many other sortes that are very good and cheape They make some therof so fine that you can not perceyue the thréedes so that for finenesse it surpasseth any Holland cloth they make
likewise many Carpets called Alcatiffas but they are neyther so fine nor so good as those that are brought to Ormus out of Persia and an other sort of course Carpets that are called Banquays which are much like the striped Couerlits that are made in Scotland seruing to lay vpon chestes cubbords They make also faire couerlits which they call Godoriins Colchas which are very fair and pleasant to the eye stitched with silke and also of Cotton of all colours and stitchinges pauilions of diuers sorts and colours Persintos that are stringes or bands wherewith the Indians bind and make fast their bedsheddes thereon to lay their beds all kind of bedsteds stooles for Indian women and other such like stuffes costly wrought and couered with stuffes of all colours also fine playing tables and Chessebordes of Iuory and shields of Torteux shelles wrought and inlaide very workemanlike many fayre signets ringes and other curious worke of Iuorie and sea horse téeth as also of Amber whereof there is great quantitie They haue likewise a kind of mountain Christall wherof they make many signets buttons beades and diuers other deuises They haue diuers sorts of precious stones as Espinellē Rubies Granadis Iasnites Amatistes Chrysolites Olhos de gato which are Cattes eyes or Agats much Iasper stone which is called bloud and milke stone and other kindes of stones also many kindes of Drognes as Amfion or Opium Camfora Bangue and Sandale wood whereof when time serueth I will particularly discourse in setting down the spices and fruites of India Alluijn Cane Sugar and other merchandises which I cannot remember and it would be ouer long and tedious to rehearse them all Annell or Indigo groweth onely in Cambaia and is there prepared and made ready and from thence carried throughout the whole world whereof hereafter I will say more but this shall suffice for the description of Cambaia and now I will procéede At the ende of the countrey of Cambaia beginneth India the lands of Decam and Cuncam the coast that is the inwarde part thereof on the Indian side stretcheth from Cambaia to the coast of India where the said inward part hath the beginning which coast stretcheth Westwardes Southwest and by South to the Islande lying on the coast or entry of the said place called Insula das Vaquas being vnder 20. degrées vpon the which corner and countrey on the firme land standeth the towne and fortresse of Daman which is inhabited by the Portingalles and vnder their subiection distant from the Towne of Diu East and by South fortie miles The 10. Chapter Of the coast of India and the hauens and places lying vpon the same THe coast of India hath the beginning at the entry or turning of the lande of Cambaia from the Islande called Das Vaguas as it is saide before which is the right coast that in all the East Countries is called India but they haue other particular names as Mosambique Melinde Ormus Cambaia Choramandel Bengala Pegu Malacca c. as when time serueth shall be shewed whereof a part hath already béene described Now you must vnderstande that this coast of India beginneth at Daman or the Island Das Vaguas and stretcheth South and by East to the Cape of Comoriin where it endeth and is in all 180. miles vppon the which coast lie the towns and hauens hereafter following which the Portingals haue vnder their subiections and strong fortes therein first Daman from thence fiftéene miles vpwardes vnder 19. degrées and a halfe the towne of Basaiin from Basaiin ten miles vpwardes vnder 19. degrées the Towne and fort of Chaul from Chaul to Dabul are tenne miles and lyeth vnder 18. degrées from Dabul to the town and Island of Goa are 30. miles which lyeth vnder 15. degrées and a halfe all these Townes and fortes aforesaide are inhabited by the Portingalles except Dabul which they had and long since lost it againe The coast from Goa to Daman or the turning into Cambaia is called by those of Goa the Northerne coast and from Goa to the Cape de Comoriin it is called the southern coast but commonly the coast of Malabar Concerning the towne of Goa and the situation thereof as also the description of Decam Cuncam as touching their kings and progenies we will in another place particularly declare with many other memorable thinges as well of the Portingalles as of the naturall countrimen Wherefore for this time we will passe them ouer and speak of the other principal towns and hauens following along the coast You must vnderstand that all the townes aforesaid Daman Basaiin and Chaul haue good hauens where great traffique is done throughout all India all these townes and countries are very fruitfull of Ryce Pease and other graines Butter and oyle of Indian Nuttes but oyle of Oliues is not to be found in all the East Indies onely what is brought out of Portingall and other such like prouisions is there very plentifull they make also some Cotton linnen but very little The towne of Chaul hath great traffique to Ormus Cambaia to the redde sea to Sinde Masquate Bengala c. hath many rich Marchants and shippes there is a place by Chaul which is the old towne of the naturall borne countrymen where diuers kindes of silkes are wouen of all sortes and colours as Grogeran Sattin Taffata Sarscenet and such like stuffes in so great aboundance that India and all other places bordering the same are serued therewith whereby the inhabitantes of Chaul haue a great commoditie by bringing the raw silke out of China spinning and weauing it there and againe being wouen to carrie and distribute it throughout all India There are likewise made many and excellent faire deskes bedsteds stooles for women couered with stuffes of all colours and such like marchandises whereby they haue great traffique There is likewise great store of Ginger as also all the coast along but little estéemed there This land called the North part hath a very holesome and temperate ayre and is thought to be y e soundest healthsomest part of all India for the towne of Diu and the coast of Malabar is very vnholesome These Indians as also those of Cambaia which are called Benianen and Gusarrates and those of the lande that lyeth inwardes from Decam which dwell vpon the hill called Ballagatte which are named Decaniins and Canaras are altogether of yellowe colour and some of them somewhat whiter others somewhat browner but those that dwel on the sea coast are different and much blacker their statures visages and limmes are altogether like men of Europa and those of the coast of Malabar which stretcheth and beginneth 12. miles from Goa Southward and reacheth to the cape de Comoriin whose naturall borne people are called Malabaren which are those that dwell vpon the sea coast are as blacke as pitch with verie blacke and smoth haire yet of bodies lims and visages in all thinges proportioned like men of Europa These are the best soldiers
hath likewise a market euery day where all kind of thinges are to be bought as in Cananor but in greater quantities The land of Cochin is an Island and it is in many places compassed about and through the Isle with small Riuers Right ouer against Cochin Northwarde lyeth an other Island called Vaypiin which is likewise compassed about with water like the fortresse of Cranganor all these landes and Countries are low and flat land like the Countrie of Holland but haue no ditches nor downes but onely the flat shore vpon the Sea side and within the shore the Strand of the ryuer nor without any high ground or shelters and so it still continueth The Countrie is verye great and pleasant to behold full of woodes and trees it hath also woods of Cinamon trées which are called Canella de Maâ—es that is wilde CinamoÌ„ which is not so good as the Cinamon of Seyloâ— for when the Cinamon of Seyloâ— is worth 1â—0 Pardaâ—eÌ„ or Dollers that Cinamon is worth but 5 or 3â— Pardaâ—wen and is likewise forbidden â—o bee carried into Portingale notwithstanding There is euery yeare great quantitie thereof shipped but it is entred in the Custome bookes for Cinamon of Seylon whereby they pay the King his full Custome for the best Cochin hath also much Pepper and can euery yeare lade two ships full other shippes lade along the coast at the fortresse aforesaid vse to come vnto Cochin after they haue discharged all their Portingal wares and Marchandises at Goa and thether also come the Factors and Marchants and lade their wares as in my Voyage homewards I will declare Without Cochin among the Malabares there dwelleth also diuers Moores that belieue in Mahomet and many Iewes that are very rich and there liue fréely without being hindred or impeached for their religion as also the Mahometans with their churches which they cal Mesquiten the Bramanes likewise which are the Spiritualitie of the Malabares Indians haue their Idols and houses of Diuels which they call Pagodes These thrée nations doe seuerally holde maintaine their lawes and ceremonies by them selues and liue friendly and quietly together kéeping good pollicie and iustice each nation béeing of the Kinges counsell with his Naires which are his gentilmen and nobilitie so that when any occasion of importaunce is offered then al those thrée nations assemble themselues together wherein the King putteth his trust of the which King and his Naires Malabare and Baâ—amenes c. with their maners customes aparrell Idols pagodes and ceremonies in an other place I will shewe you more at large together with their pictures couÌ„terfetes and for this time I cease to speake thereof wil procéede in the description of the coasts which I haue already beguÌ„ From Cochin to Coulon are 12. myles and lyeth vnder 9 degrées it is also a fortresse of the Portingals where likewise euery yere they lade a ship with pepper from Couâ—on to the cape de Comori are 20. myles this corner lieth full vnder 7. degrées a half which is the end of the coast of Malabar of India The 12. Chapter The description of the kings the diuision of the land and coast of Malabar and their originall TO vnderstand the gouernment and diuisions of the laÌ„d of Malabar you must know that in tymes past but long sithence the whole land of Mâ—labar was ruled by one King being then but one kingdome where now are manie and as the Malabares saye the last king that ruled the whole couÌ„try alone was named Sarama Perimal in whose time the Arabian Mahometanes much frequented the couÌ„trie of Malabar because of the great trafique of Spices which as then were sent from thence to the red sea and so conueyed into all places of the world Those Arabians by their subtilties delt in such manner with the King that they perswaded him and many of his couÌ„try to beleue in the lawe of Mahomet as they did almost throughout whole India and other orientall couÌ„tries and Ilands which is one of the principalest occasions why they can hardly be brought to beleue in Christ but rather seeke by all meanes to ouerthrowe the Christians and to fight against the Portingales in those countries as in the Portingal Chronicles and Histories of the first discouery and conquest of the Indies is at large described But returning to our matter this King Sarama was so déepely rooted in his new sect of Mahometes law that he determined in him selfe to leaue his kingdome and goe on pilgrimage to Mecca to see Mahomets graue and there to ende his lyfe in so holy an exercise thinking thereby to be saued which in the end he brought to effect And because he had neither childreÌ„ nor heyres to possesse his kingdome he deuided the same among his chiefest best seruaÌ„ts frieÌ„ds giuing to one Cochin to an other Cananor to the third Chale to the fourth Coulon c. and so he delt with all the other places of his dominions making euery one of those places a kingdome The town of Calicut he gaue to one of his best beloued seruaÌ„ts together with the title of Samoriin which is as much to say as Emperour and chief of al the rest and commanded that they should all acknowledge him as their Soueraigne and they his vassalles and at his commandement whereby euen vntill this time the King of Calicut holdeth the name of Samoriin with the commandement and authoritie ouer the other kings throughout the whole countrie of Malabar by such means as you haue heard before which done the king weÌ„t on pilgrimage to Mecca wher he ended his dayes and the Samoriin with the other kings continued each man in his newe kingdome whose successors vntill this day doe continue and gouerne the said kingdomes onely the Samoriin is somewhat imbased and the king of Cochin exalted since the Portingals ariued in the Indies as it is said before These Malabares are excellent good soldiours and goe naked both men and women onely their priuy members couered and are the principallest enemies that the Portingals haue and which doe them most hurt and although commonlie they haue peace with the Samoriin and hold so many forts vpon the land as you haue heard before yet the Malabares haue their hauens as Chale Calicut Cunhale Panane and others from whence with boates they mak roads into the sea and doe great mischief making many a poore merchant The Samoriin likewise when the toy taketh him in the head breaketh the peace that by the counsell of the Mahometanes who in all things are enemies to the Christians séeke to do them mischief and because of the Malabares inuasions the Portingall fléet is forced euery yeare to put forth of Goa in the summer-time to kéepe the coast and to preserue the merchants that trauaill those couÌ„tries from y e Malabars for that the most traffique in India is in Foists like galleyes wherein they traffique from the one place to the other which is
their daylie liuing occupations as it shal be shewed at large and yet there are continuall pyracies committed on the sea what order soeuer they take wherby poore marchaÌ„ts are taken prisoners robbed of all they haue The land throughout is very fruitfull gréene and pleasant to beholde but hath a very noysome and pestiferous ayre for such as are not borne in the countrie and yet pepper doth onely growe on this coast although some groweth by Mallacca in certaÌ„e parts of the land but not so much for from hence is it laden and conueyed throughout the whole world The 13. Chapter Of the Ilands called Maldyua otherwise Maldyua RIght ouer against the cape of Comoriin 60. miles into the sea westward the Ilands called Maldyua doe begin and from this cape on the North syde they lie vnder 7. degrées so reach south south east till they come vnder 3. degrées on the south side which is 140. myles Some say there are 11000. Ilands but it is not certainely knowne yet it is most true they are so many that they can not be numbred The Inhabitants are like the Malabares some of these Ilands are inhabited and some not inhabited for they are very lowe ground like the countrie of Cochin Cranganor c. and some of them are so lowe that they are commonlie couered with the sea the Malabares say that those Ilandes in time past did ioyne fast vnto the firme land of Malabar were part of the same land and that the Sea in processe of tyme hath eaten them away so separated them from the firme land There is no merchandize to be had in them but only coquen which are Indian nuttes and cayro which are the shelles of the same nuts that is the Indian hemp wherof they mak ropes cables and other such like commodities those are there to be found in so great aboundance that with them they serue the whole country of India and al the oriental coast of the wood of the same trées they make themselues boats after their manner with all things to them belonging of the leaues they make sayles sowed together with strings made of the nutshelles without any iron nayles and so being laden with the nuttes and other parts of the said trées they come and trafficke with those of the firme land their victuals in the ship being the fruite of the same trée so that to conclude the boate with all her furnitures their marchandises and their victuals is all of this palme trée and that maintaineth all the inhabitants of the Ilands of Maldyua and therewith they trafficke throughout India there are some of these nuttes in the said Iland that are more estéemed then all the nuttes in India for that they are good against all poyson which are verie faire and great and blackish I saw some that were preseÌ„ted vnto the vice roy of India as great as a vessell of 2. tuÌ„nes Indian measure and cost aboue 300. Pardawen which were to send vnto the King of Spaine Of this trée and her fruites together with the vsage thereof I will discourse more at large in the declaring of the Indian trées fruites meane time I will returne to the description of the coasts with their situations From the cape of Comoriin the coast beginneth North east to turne inwards again till you come to the Cape of Negapatan which lyes vnder 11. degrées and is 60. myles distant from the cape of Comoriin From the cape of Comoriin South east by South about 40 miles into the sea lieth the furthest corner of the great Iland of Seylon and so reacheth North and by east vntill you come right ouer against the cape of Negapatan being distant from the firme land the same cape 10. miles and betwéene the firme land and that Iland there lyeth some drie groundes or lytle Ilands whereby it is manie times dangerous for the Shippes that sayle vnto Bengala and the coast of Choâ—amandel which commonly passe through that way The Iland of Seylon is in length 60. miles and in breadth 40. miles from the first and vttermost corner North by east about 18. miles vnder 7. degrées and an halfe lyeth a fort belonging to the Portingals called Columbo which by méere force great charges is holden and maintained for that they haue no other place or péece of ground no not one foot but that in all the Iland it is but a small fort yet very strong and well guarded The soldiers that are therein are commonly such as are banished for some offence by them coÌ„mitted or such as haue deserued death and some dishonest women for some euill fact are put in there to beare them company They fetch al their necessaries out of India and are often times assailed by their enemies the Inhabitants of the Iland and often times besieged but alwaies valiantly defend themselues The 14. Chapter Of the Iland of Seylon THe Iland of Seylon is said to be one of the best Ilands that in our time hath béene discouered and the fruitfullest vnder the heauens well built with houses and inhabited with people called Cingalas and are almost of shape and manners like to those of Malabar with long wyde eares but not so blacke of colour they goe naked onely their members couered they were wont to haue but one King but hauing murdered their king they deuided their countrie into manie kingdomes and not long since a simple barber murthered their chief king with great tyrannie brought the kingdome vnder his subiection driuing the other kings out of the countrie whereof one that was a Christian fled into India and dwelleth at Goa where he is kept maintained at the kings charge This barber as it is said hath made himselfe king and the whole Iland vnder his subiection his name was Raju he liueth verie warily and is verie subtill a good soldier but trusting no man the Chingalans are not his good friends yet they liue in obedieÌ„ce vnder him more through force and feare then for loue or good wil for that he causeth them with great tyrannie to be executed so that no man dareth stirre against him he is likewise a deadly enemie to the Portingall and about a yeare before I came from India he had besieged the fort of Columbo with a great nuÌ„ber of Elephants and men but by meanes of y e Portingals that came thither out of India he was constrayned to breake vp his siege before the fortresse The Iland is full of hils and there is one hill so high that it is reported to be the highest hill in all India and is called Picode Adam The Indians hold for certane that Paradice was in that place and that Adam was created therein saying that yet vntill this daye there are some of his footsteps fouÌ„d vpon that hill which are within the stones as if they were ingrauen and neuer goe out The Iland is full of all sorts of Indian fruites and of al kind of wild beasts as
the Portingals and other countreymen can better brooke it then other places in India From these coastes they vse great traffique vnto Bengala Pegu Sian Malacca and also to India there is excellent faire linnen of Cotton made in Negapatan Saint Thomas and Musulepatan of all colours and wouen with diuers sorts of loome workes and figures verie fine and cunningly wrought which is much worne in India and better estéemed then silke for that it is higher prised then silke because of the finenes cuÌ„ning workmaÌ„ship they are called Rechatas Cheylas wherof the Christians Portingals in India do commoÌ„ly make bréeches They likewise make clothes thereof for women to put about them from their nauelles downeward bound about their bodies which they weare within the house very finely made the best sort are named clothes of Sarasso some being mingled with thréedes of golde and siluer and such like stuffe of a thousand sortes very beautifull to behold wherewith they cloath themselues in very comely manner In this coast growe the great and thicke réeds which are vsed in India to make the Pallankins wherein they carry the women as in the Indian figures you shall sée which are so thicke that a man can hardly gripe them with both his handes very faire to looke vpon and very high being of diuers colours as blacke redde c. Whereof in an other place I will say more The 16. Chapter Of the Kingdome of Bengalen and the riuer Ganges AT the ende of the Kingdome of Orixa and the â—ast of â—horamandel beginneth the Riuer Ganges in the kingdom of Bengalen This is one of the most famous Riuers in all the world and it is not knowne from whence it springeth Some are of opinion that it commeth out of the earthly paradise because of an old speech of the Bengalers which is that in time past a certaine King of Bengalen was desirous to know froÌ„ whence the riuer Ganges hath her beginning to the which ende hee caused certaine people to bee brought vp and nourished with nothing but rawe fish and such like foode thereby to make them the apter to accomplish his desire which people hauing made boats fitte for the purpose he sent vp the riuer who were certain monthes vpon the water so long til they came where they felt a most pleasant and swéete sauour and founde a very cleare and most temperate skie with still and pleasant water that it séemed vnto them to bee an earthly paradise and being desirous to rowe further vpwardes they could not so that they were compelled séeing no remedie to returne againe the same way that they came and being returned certified the King what they had séene They that will not credit this are hard of beliefe for my parte I leaue it to the readers iudgement This Riuer hath Crocodiles in it like the riuer of Nilus in Aegipt the mouth or entry thereof lyeth vnder 22. degrées and the coast runneth East and by South to the Kingdome of Aracan which is about 80. miles it is an vneuen coast full of Islandes sholes hookes and créekes for the lande of Bengalen lyeth inwards of the gulf which is called Bengala for that froÌ„ Aracan the coast beginneth againe to runne South and East outwardes towardes Malacca and to the vttermost hooke which is called Singapura But returning to Bengala and the Riuer Ganges you must vnderstand that this riuer is holden and accounted of all the Indians to be a holy and a blessed water and they do certainely belieue that such as wash and bath themselues therein bee they neuer so great sinners all their sinnes are cleane forgiuen them and that from thenceforth they are so cleane and pure from sinne as if they were newe borne againe and also that hee which washeth not himself therein cannot be saued for the which cause there is a most great and incredible resorte vnto the same from all the partes of India the East countries in great troupes where they vse diuers strange ceremonies and superstitions most horrible to heare for they doe most stedfastly beléeue that they shall thereby merit eternall life From thâ— Riuer Eastward 50. miles lyeth the towne of Chatigan which is the chief towne of Bengala The naturall borne people of Bengala are in a manner like those of Seylon but somewhat whiter then y e Chingalas they are a most subtill and wicked people and are estéemed the worst slaues of all India for that they are all théeues and the women whores although this fault is common throughout all India no place excepted They haue a custome that they neuer dresse or séeth meat twice in one pot but haue euery time a new pot Whensoeuer they are found in adulterie they haue their noses cut off and from that time forwarde they must leaue ech others company which is most narrowly looked vnto by their law The countrey is most plentiful of necessary victuails specially Rice for that there is more of it in that countrey then in al the cast countries for they do yearly lade diuers shippes therewith which come thether from all places and there is neuer any want thereof and all other things in like sort and so good cheape that it were incredible to declare for that an Oâ—e or a Cowe is there to be bought for one Lariâ—n which is as much as halfe a Gilderne Shéepe Hens and other things after the like rate a Candit of Ryce which is as much little more or lesse as fourteene bushelles of Flemmish measure is sold there for halfe a Gilderne and for halfe a Doller Sugar and other ware accordingly whereby you may wel conceiue what plentie they haue The Portingalles deale traffique thether and some places are inhabited by them as the hauens which they call Porto grande and Porto pequeno that is the great hauen and the little hauen but there they haue no Fortes nor any gouernement nor policie as in India they haue but liue in a manner like wild men and vntamed horses for that euery man doth there what hee will and euery man is Lord and maister neyther estéeme they any thing of iustice whether there be any or none and in this manner doe certayne Portingalles dwell among them some here some there scattered abroade and are for the most part such as dare not stay in India for some wickednesse by them committed notwithstanding there is great trafficke vsed in those partes by diuers ships and marchants which all y e year diuers times both go come to and from all the Orientall parts Besides their Ryce much Cotton linnen is made there which is very fine and much estéemed in India and not only spread abroad and carryed into India and al the East parts but also into Portingal and other places this linnen is of diuers sorts and is called Sarampuras Cassas Comsas Beatillias Satopassas and a thousande such like names They haue likewise other linnen excellently wrought of a hearbe which
Caixa of the bignes of a HollaÌ„des doite but not half so thicke in the middle whereof is a hole to hang it on a string for that commonlie they put two hundreth or a thowsand vpon one string wherewith they knowe how to make their accounts which is as followeth 200 Caixas is a Sata and â— Satas are 1000 Caixas which is as much as a Crusado Portingale money or 3 Keysars guilders Netherlandish money Pepper of Sunda is solde by the sacke and each sacke wayeth 45 Catten waight of China euerie Catte is as much as 20 Portingale ounces and euerie sacke is worth as it is solde there 5000 Caixas and when it is at the highest 6 or 7 thowsand Caixas Mace Cloues nutmegges white and blaâ—k Beniamin Camphora are solde by the Bhar each Bhar of Sunda weigheth 330 Catten of China Mace that is good is commonlie worthe 100 or 120 thowsand Caixas and good Cloues after the rate but bad or foule Cloues of Baston are worth 70 or 80 thowsand Caixas the Bhar Nutmegges are commonly worth 20 or 25 thowsand Caixas the Bhar white and black Benioin is worthe 150 and 180 thowsand Caixas 200 thousand the Bhar The wares that are there by them desired in barter for their spices are as hereafter followeth diuers and different sorts and colours of cotton lynnen which come out of Cambaia Choramandel and Bengala as Sarasles de Gâ—baâ—es and painted Tapen from S. Thomas of fyue elles the péece they are clothes so called out of Bengala white Cotton lynnen viz Sarampuras Cassas Sateposas blacke Satopasen and some browne vnbleached lynnen out of Cambaia black Cannequiins red Turiaes which are all clothes of cotton lynnen red Beyramen great and litle which is verie like vnto Cambricke and I am perswaded if Clothe of Holland were there to be soulde it would be more estéemed then Cotton lynnen out of India These Iauens are of a verie fretfull and obstinate Nature of colour much like the Malayers brown and not much vnlike the men of Brasilla strong and well set big limmed flatte faces broad thicke chéekes great eyebrowes smal eyes little beard not past 3 or 4 hayres vpon the vpper lippe the chinne the hayre on their heades very thyn and short yet as blacke as pitche whose picture is to be séen by the picture of the Mâ—layen of Malacca because they dwell trafficke much together Returning againe vnto the coast East by south about 25 miles beyond Iaua Maior beginneth the IlaÌ„d of Iaua Minor or litle Iaua and somewhat further the Iland Tâ—or wher sanders groweth in great abundance and a thousand other Ilands bordering all about which I can not particularly set down yet are they all inhabited and full of people and are like the Iauer From Malacca they trauell to the Ilandes of Molucca Banda Amboyna where the Portingales haue both sorts captaines and trafficke with them their way is from Malacca south east and by south aboue 100 miles betwéene many Ilands and thâ—â—ugh many shallowes so that they must anker euerie night to auoyd danger of sandes which continueth almost all the waye to Molâ—cca and hauing in that sort passed those hundreth miles they set their course eastward and east and by north 250 miles to the Iland called Banda which lyeth vnder 5 degrées on the south side In this Iland the Portingales doe trafficke for in it are the best Nutmegges Flowers There likewise they doe preserue nutmegges and make oyle thereof which is brought to Malacca and from thence into all other places the trafficke there consisteth most in bartering as it doth in SuÌ„da Iaua but they are not to be trusted you must kéep good watch and goe not on land but stay abord the shippe whether the Ilanders bring their marchandises and deale with men as I said before for it happeneth diuers times that they deceaue the Portingales which trust them ouer much for that one of my acquaintance and my friend being there for captaine in a shippe the shippe being cast away vpon that coast was with all his men taken put in prison where for the space of two yeares he indured a most miserable life and in the end was ransomed All these voyages to Banda Moluca those Ilands and also any other way whatsoeuer in India may no man make without licence and speciall fauour of the King of Portingall and their offices are giuen them in recompence of their seruice in the Indies as also all other offices as in an other place shall be declared About 20 miles beyond Banda North west lieth the Iland called Amboyna where the Portingales haue a small for t this Iland hath not much spice but the shippes that sayle from Malacca to Maluco doe stay there and take in fresh water From this Iland Northwarde 70 miles lyeth the Iland Tydor vnder one degrée â—th and iâ— the first Iland of the Molucaâ— â—xe miles northward lyeth Malaco not farre thence Tarnate and the Ilands of Cloues The 21. Chapter Of the Iland of Malucâ— THe Ilandes of Maluco are fiue viz. Maluco Tarnate Tydor Geloulo and an other where the Portingales haue 2 forts that is in Tarnate and Tydor which long since were discouered and wonne where they trafficke from Malacca out of India The Spaniards haue sought diuers meanes to haue traffique there and came from thence out of Noua Spaigne into the Iland called Tarnate where in a storme they lost their shippe and so could not get from thence againe whereby they were by the Portingales most of them slayne and the rest taken and sent prisoners into Portingale whereupon the King of Spaine and Portingale had a long quarrell and contention touching the diuision of their Conquests and discouery of the seas which by the Popes meanes at the last was ended in such sort that at this present onely the Portingale trafickes to those Ilands These Ilands haue no other spice then cloues but in so great abundance that as it appeareth by them the whole world is filled therewith In this Iland are found â—ie hilles they are very dry burnt land they haue nothing els but victuals of flesh and fish but for Rice Corne Onyons Garlicke and such like and all other necessaries some are brought from Portingale and some from other places thereabout which they take and barter for cloues The bread which they haue there of their owne baking is of wood or rootes like the men of Brasillia and their cloathes are of wouen strawe or herbes faire to the eye in these Ilands onlie is found the bird which the Portingales call passaros de Sol that is Fowle of the Sunne the Italians call it Manu codiatas the Latinists Paradiseas by vs called Paradice birdes for y e beauty of their feathers which passe al other birds these birds are neuer séene aliue but being dead they are found vpon the Iland they flie as it is said alwaies into the Sunne and kéepe themselues
continually in the ayre without lighting on the earth for they haue neither féet nor wings but onely head and body and the most part tayle as appeareth by the birdes that are brought from thence into India and some from thence hether but not many for they are costlie I brought two of them with me for Doctor Paludanus which were male and female which I gaue vnto him for his chamber These Ilands lie among diuers other Ilands and because there is no speciall notice of them by reason of the small conuersation with them I let them passe and turne again vnto the coast of Malacca which I left at the Cape of Singapura and so will shewe the Coast along The 22. Chapter From the Cape Singapura to the towne of Sian and the coast of Cambaia and Cauchinchina and the Iles of Borneo Lusons Manillios or Philippinas FRom the Cape of Singapura to the hooke named Sinosura eastward are 18 miles 6 or 7 miles from thence lyeth a cliffe in y e sea called Pedra bianque or white Rock where the shippes that come and goe to and from China doe oftentymes passe in great danger and some are left vpon it whereby the Pylots when they come thether are in great feare for that other way then this they haue not From this hook Sinosura East by South 40. miles beginneth the first corner of the Island Borneo vnder one degrée in y e North and stretcheth 120. myles North east till you be vnder 7. degrées the breadth as yet is not knowne nor discouered This Isle is full of trées from whence Camfora is taken and is the best in all the East countries From Sinosura the coast reacheth North 30. miles to the towne of Pan which lyeth vnder thrée degrées and a halfe ten miles further by the same câ—urse the coast runneth againe North Northwest for 50. miles where the towne of Patane lyeth vnder 7. degrees and a halfe These two towns Pan and Patane are kingdomes but contributarie to Sian From these places comes the wood called Pala Dagula and the costly swéet woode called Calamba which being good is waid against Siluer and Gold they also haue Camphora but not so good as that of the Island Borneo There is founde some gold and the stone called Bezars stone which is very costly and proued to be good against poyson There are likewise some Diamants and also Nutmegs and flowers and the wood Sapon whereof also much is brought from Sian it is like Brasill to die withall From Patane 120. myles North the coast runneth backe againe vnto Sian which lyeth vnder 14. degrées and a halfe from Sian from the turning in South west 15. myles The coast runneth again south east 70. miles to the towne of Cambaia this towne lyeth vnder 10. degrées From thence the coast runneth againe Northeast 60. miles and 60. miles Northwest froÌ„ whence it runneth West North west to the furthest parte inwarde of the créeke of Cuchinchina This coast of Cambaia is also called the coast of ChaÌ„paa this land hath much of y e swéet wood Calamba Through this kingdome runneth the riuer Mecom into the sea which the Indians name Captaine of all the Riuers for it hath so much water in the Summer that it couereth and watereth all the countrey as the riuer Nilus doth the countrey of Aegypt The people of Cambaia beléeue that all creatures both men and beastes of what sort soeuer they be do here receyue reward for their worke whether it be good or bad Vpwards in the land behind Cambaia and Sian are many seuerall nations as Laos which are a great and a mightie people others named Auas and Bramas which dwel by the hilles others that dwell vpon the hils called Gueos which liue like wild men and eat mans flesh and marke all their bodies with hote iron which they estéeme a fréedome These countreymen are such as are knowne besides diuers others that are vnknowne From the coast of Cambaia or Champaa East or to seaward about 100. myles little more or lesse lie y e Islands called the Lussons or Lussones which were first discouered by the Spaniardes out of newe Spaigne in an 1564. and were called also las Manillas or Philippinas because the principallest Hauen and Towne is called Manillia and of others Lusson whereof also they are named the Lâ—ssons and the Spaniardes gaue them the name of the King of Spaine calling them y e Philippinas This towne of Lusson or Manillia lyeth vnder 14 degrées by this towne and Iland of Lusson lie a great number of Ilands which are all called the Manillians Lussons or Philippinas and are all at the commandement of the Spaniardes whose Gouernour or Captaine lyeth in the towne of Manillia or Lusson who was sent thether out of Noua Spaigne in the behalfe of the king of Spaine and also a Bishop as head ouer all the rest All these Ilands haue in time past béene vnder the crown of China and vpon some occasion left it whereby there was no policie nor gouernment among the Inhabitants of the same for that he that was the richest and of most power amongst them was maister and liued together like beastes whereby the Spaniardes had 〈◊〉 small labor to subdue them whereof manie they baptised and made them Christians which euerie day increased it is a very fruitful land and hath much corne and al sorts of wilde beastes as harts hyndâ— such like also cattle as buffels oxen kyne hogges goates c. they haue manie muske cattes all kinde of fruites as in China abundance of hony and fish it is said also that there is all kindes of spices but as yet there is no certaintie thereof but onely that the Spaniardes giue it forth so but you must thinke they doe it because they wil extol and set forth their things aboue all others as their maÌ„ner is Those of China trafficke with these IlaÌ„ds and bring thether all sortes of commodities out of their country as al silkes cottons porselynes powder for shot sulphur brimstone yron stéele quicke siluer and other metals coper meal nuttes chasnuttes bisquit dates al sorts of lynnen cloth deskes and such like and of all curious things that may be found there cometh froÌ„ China thether euery year at least 20 shippes and from thence is their marchandise by the Spaniardes shipped and sent into newe Spaine to Mexico which countrie of Spaine The land by meanes of y e good ayre and temperatenes therof is fo fruitfull that al things are there to be had in great abundance as Corne Rice and other such like graine or séedes and is both sowen and mowed continually al the yeare long Within the land ther are some Elephants Lyons Tygers and such cruell beastes There are also many beasts of Moseliaet that is to say Muske Cattes which are of the bignesse and likenesse of a little Dogge which they kill and burie for certaine daies and being rotten and well brused with blowes whereby the
they know full well howe to bring to passe for that there is not any thing from whence they will not sucke or draw out some profit or aduantage or else they haue the slight and cunning how to get it as well from the King and from other Noblemen and estates as also from the common people it séemeth in a manner that they bewitch men with their subtill practises and deuises and are so wel practised and experimented in trade of marchandises that they surpasse all worldly men To conclude there is not any commoditie to be had or reaped thoroughout all India but they haue their part therein so that the other orders and Religious persons as also the common people doe much murmur thereat and séeme to dislike of their couetous humors A little beyond Iapon vnder 34. and 35. degrées not farre from the coast of China lyeth an other great Iland called Insula de Core whereof as yet there is no certaine knowledge neither of the greatnesse of the countrie people nor wares that are there to be found From Makau East Northeast distant aboue 90. miles lye certaine Ilandes called Lequeo Pequeno or little Lequeo and lye about 20. miles distant from the firme land of China and 90. miles farther in the same course lye other Ilands called Lequeo Maior or great Lequeo All these Ilandes are trauelled vnto and inhabited by those of China whereof we will now cease to speake till an other time hauing particularly made a briefe discourse in an other place of all their manners customes wares and marchandises according to the truest instructions I could find and so will returne againe to the description of Goa together with the places bordering about the same The 27. Chapter A short relation of the land lying behind Goa in the iurisdiction whereof lyeth the said towne of Goa and of the Originall of their Kings and Gouernours with their names by true information giuen by the inhabitants themselues together with their Histories BEfore I begin to write of the towne and Ilande of Goa with the coastes superstitions and other customes of the countrie lying behinde and rounde about Goa as well where the Portingales inhabit as where the natiue countrie men are resident I thought it conuenient to begin with the same somwhat further off then at the present time the better to vnderstand the originall of the people together with the principall causes of the diuisions of the same countries and nations as also their Kings names and surnames Then you must vnderstand that about 300. yeares past there was a mightie King of the countrie of Deli which lyeth within the land behind Goa on the Northside and bordereth vpon the land of Coracone belonging to the King of Persia wherein are made the rich Couerlets and hangings by the Portingales called Alcatyffas which land of Deli is verie colde and hath Snow and Ice in it like the Netherlands This king of Deli brought vnder his subiection all the countries bordering about him among the which were Decam Cuncam Ballagate and the lande of Goa At the same time the countrie of Cambaia which is distant from Goa about 100. miles Northward was ouerrunne and taken fâ—rcibly by the Moores Mahometans and brought the naturall countrimen called Reysbutos being heathens with great tyranie vnder their subiection The land of Ballagate and Decam was before inhabited by heathens that were verie mightie and of great power whose successors are now called Venesares and others that yet dwell within the countrie called Colles which Colles Venesares and Reysbutos of Cambaia doe yet liue by robbing and stealing and those of Cambaia pay tribute to the saide Reysbutos because they should not robbe and spoyle them but suffer them to liue in peace The Colles and Venesares also receiue tribute of the men of Decam and Ballagate for that the Kings could neuer as yet ouercome them although they make no shew thereof but still dissemble with them for that of what soeuer they robbe and steale they haue their parts After this King of Deli had brought all these kingdomes and countries vnder his subiection then came the Tartarians which the Indians call Mogoren and ouercame most part of the countrie of Deli. At the same time there dwelt in the kingdome of Bengalen a Noble Gentleman whose brother the King of Bengallen had wrongfully put to death whereby this Gentleman sought and deuised all the meanes hee could to bee reuenged and did not onely bring it to passe by bereauing the King of his life but also tooke the whole kingdome from him and brought it vnder his subiection and being in this sorte become absolute Lord and King of Bengalla was not therewith content but desiring to augment his kingdome and thereby to win great fame did inuade the countrie of Deli bordering vpon him with a great armie of men and by force draue the Tartarians or Mogoros out of the countrie and so conquered both that lande and all the countries bordering thereabouts as Decam Ballagate and Cuncam as farre as to the kingdome of Cambaia and for a time was the greatest Prince in all those quarters For the Indians affirme that hee had in Compasse vnder his subiection aboue 800. miles of land This King raigning for a time ouer al these lands and countries in the end desiring to liue quietly and to returne vnto his kingdom of Bengala thinking it too troublesome for him to rule so great a countrie did inuest one of his cosins with the countries of Decam Ballagate and Cuncam with the land of Goa and the countries bordering about the same which done he returned into his land of Bengala leauing his saide cosin King and commander of the aforesaid countries This man was alwaies a great friende and wel-willer to strange nations as Arabians Turkes Ruynes and Corasones parted his countries among Gouernours and Captaines to on whereof beeing called Idalham whome the Portingales call Hidalcam he gaue the Gouernment of Angedina which lyeth 12. miles from Goa Southwards stretching towards the North till you come to a place called Siffardan which are 60. miles wherein is contained the towne and Iland of Goa to an other Captaine called Nisa Maluco hee gaue the coast of Siffardan stretching Northwards to Negotana which are 20. miles and lyeth inwards to the land of Cambaia so that those two Captaines had their gouernments in the countrie of Cuncam which lyeth on the Sea coast and seperateth it selfe from the land of Decam by great and high hils called Guate These hils are verie high and haue many corners and hookes of land and doe stretch towardes Cambaia to the Cape de Comorin and from thence backe againe to the coast of Choramandel The hill of Guate is so high that men may easily sée it within Goa and all the coast along though commonly it is couered with clouds and it is the more to bee wondred at for this respect because all other hils are vneuen high and low
and this is faire and flat land on the top with great goodly fields is by the Indians called Ballagate that is to say aboue the hill for Balla is aboue and Gate is a hill whereby the Portingals doe commonly cal the whole countrie Ballagate although the principall part and the land it selfe is called Decam and also Canara wherof the inhabitants are called Decanijns and Canaras as the Kings also in times past vsed to beare titles and call themselues Kings of Decam But returning to the diuision of the rest of the countries he deuided likewise the land of Ballagate or Decam into Prouinces giuing one part to Imademaluco by the Portingales called Madremaluco and an other part to Cotalmoluco and an other to Melique Verido All the said Captaines were strangers as Turkes Ruines and Corasones except Nisamalucode who was Sonne to a Gentleman of the Kings house and because the King had laine with the mother of Nisamaluco therefore hee boasted himselfe to be of the linage of the king of Decam all the other Captaines were slaues and seruants which the King had brought and placed in those roomes as putting great trust in them thinking that they would acknowledge it and bee thankfull vnto him for the same But it fell out otherwise as wee see it commonly doth and that good is requited with euill for these Captaines in time getting credite authoritie and power were in great estimation and as it were absolute Kings and Gouernours of their Prouinces for that the king neuer troubled himselfe therwith but layde all the charge vppon them whereby they beganne to bee puffed vp with pride and determined to vsurpe the Prouinces vnder him for them and their successors And because it grieued them to be in subiection to an other and at his commaundement they all met together and among them agréed to take their Lord and King prisoner and so euery one of them to be sole commanders of the coūtries they had in charge which they easily brought to effect for that they had all the meanes they would wish or desire as did honour them with the name of Xa which is to say a King whereby they had the names of Adelxa Nisamoxa and Contumixa and all the Kings continued so with the name of Xa which in Persia is a King and Ismael is a proper name whereby Xa Ismael and Xa Thamas are as much to say as King Ismael and King Thamas and of the Turkes and Rumes are called Suffy or Soffy which signifieth a great Captaine The Kings of Decam also haue a custome when they will honor a man or recompence their seruice done and rayse him to dignitie and honour They giue him the title of Nayque which signifieth a Captaine as Salua Nayque and Acem Nayque And whē they will giue a man an honourable title or salutation they call him Rau as Chitarau which is to say strong King and such like titles which among them is a great honour Also Adelham or Hidelcam is called Sabayo which signifieth Seigneur or Lord for the Iland of Goa had a Captaine or Gouernour that was Lord of the towne when the Portingales wanne it first called Sabayo as the Portingales Chronicles of their Indian conquests doe make mention whose house or Palace to this day in the Cittie of Goa is the inquisition house and a place which standeth betwéene the great Church and the same house is as yet called the Pallace of Sabayo The 28. Chapter Of the towne and Ilande of Goa chiefe Cittie of India THe Citie of Goa is the Metropolitan or chiefe Cittie of all the Orientall Indies where the Portingales haue their traffique where also the Viceroye the Arch bishop the Kings Councel and Chauncerie haue their residence and from thence are all places in the Orientall Indies gouerned and ruled There is likewise the staple for all Indian commodities whether all sorts of Marchants doe resort comming thether both to buy and sell as out of Arabia Armenia Persia Cambaia Bengala Pegu Sian Malacca Iaua Molucca China c. The Cittie and Iland of Goa lyeth vnder 15. degrees on the North side and is distant from the Equinoctiall by the way that the Portingales shippes do come thether from Mossambique 400. miles It is an Iland wholly compassed about with a riuer and is aboue thrée miles great it lyeth within the coast of the firme lande so that the Iland with the Sea coast of the firme land doe both reach as farre each as other into the Sea It is only seperated from the firme land by an arme of the Sea or of the ryuer that runneth in by the North side of the towne and so round about the Iland to the South side where it entereth againe into the Sea and is in forme almost like a halfe Moone The ryuer runneth euen vnto the Towne and is indifferent broade there are betwéene the firme land and the Iland certaine small Ilandes that are all inhabited by the naturall borne countrimen and on the other side of the town the ryuer is there so small that in Summer time by wading to the knées in water a man may passe it ouer on foote On the which side the Iland hath a wall with certaine Bulwarkes which y e Portingales of late yeares haue caused to be made to defend them from the firme land in time of warre as it often happeneth for it hath diuers times béene besieged by Dialcan or Hidalcam at the mouth and the entrie of the ryuer On the North side lyeth the land of Bardes which is high land vnder which land the Portingales doe Anker safely out of all danger and there they haue a place to lade and vnlade their wares This land of Bardes is also vnder the Portingall subiection and is full of Villages inhabited with people that are of the firme land lying aboue it called Canarijns who for the most part are Christians but obserue their owne manner of apparell which is to goe all naked their priuie members onely couered This land is full of Indian Palme trées whereon the Indian Nuts called Cocos doe grow as also all the other Ilands lying in the ryuer This land of Bardes is seperated from the firme land by a small riuer which is so little that it cannot almost be discerned from the firme land On the South side of the Iland of Goa wher the riuer runneth againe into the Sea there commeth euen out with the coast a land called Salsette which is also vnder the subiection of the Portingales and is inhabited and planted both with people and fruite like the land of Bardes and is likewise parted with a little ryuer from the firme land Betwéene this land of Salsette the Iland of Goa lie also some small Ilands all full of Indian Palme trées and by the mouth or issue of the ryuer lyeth an Iland which is called Goa Velha that is old Goa from whence there commeth no speciall thing neither is it much inhabited Those lands of Bardes
and Salsette are by the Kings of Portingale let out to farme and the rents therof are imployed to the payment of the Archbishop Cloysters Priests Viceroy other the Kings Officers yearely stipends which is graunted them by speciall Priueledges and Patents from the King The Iland is verie hillie and in some places so desert and rough that on some sides men can hardly trauell ouer land but with great labour to the towne of Goa the Iland euen to the Sea side is full of Villages and inhabited by the Canarijus which are the naturall borne people of the land and doe altogether liue by working vpon the land and by their Palme trees The villages and dwellings of these Canarijus are most rounde about the Iland and on the water sides or by small Lakes whereof there are some fewe within the Iland and the cause why they dwell thus is for that the Palme trées will not grow in any other place but vpon low ground by the waters specially in sandie ground so that there are no Palme trées to be found on the high land within the countrie vnlesse it bee vpon sandie groundes on the Sea coast or ryuers sides On the East side of the towne of Goa vpwardes into the ryuer about thrée miles from the towne of Bardes lyeth a place wher the Portingals ships doe Anker the ryuer hath some créekes and a ship of 200. Tunnes or there abouts may easily discharge before the Towne but the Portingales great ships must discharge them selues at Bardes which being done they may i◠they will fréely goe and lie before the town The towne is well builte with faire houses and stréetes after the Portingall manner but because of the heate they are somewhat lower They commonly haue their Gardens and Orchards at the backe side of their houses full of all kinde of Indian fruites as also the whole Iland through they haue many pleasant Gardens and farmes with houses to play in and trées of Indian fruites whether they goe to sport themselues and wherein the Indian women take great delight The towne hath in it all sortes of Cloysters and Churches as Lisbone hath onely it wanteth Nunnes for the men cannot get the women to trauell so farre where they should be shut vp and forsake Venus with whome so that they may enioy and fulfill their lustes they had rather loose their liues whereof they make small account The Iland is both winter and Summer all alike gréene and hath alwaies some kinde of fruite in season which is a great pleasure the towne lyeth vppon some hils and dales like Lisbone it hath in times past béene verie small and walled with a drie Ditch round about it wherein there is no water but when it rayneth the walles are yet standing but no Gates remaining and the towne is now built round about with houses so that it is at the least twice as big without the walles as it is within and lyeth open without walles or closures sauing onely that the Iland hath a wal on the East side which beginneth ouer against the land of Salsette and so runneth along vntill you come at Bardes and is onely to defend them from the firme land where the Portingales haue no commaundement The whole Iland hath no other defence but onely vpon the corner of the land of Bardes at the mouth of the ryuer where there standeth an olde ruinous Castle wherein lyeth two or thrée Iron péeces and one man that in the night time kéepeth the watch the Iland on the Sea side is verie high full of stonie Cliffes but the land of Bardes hath on the Sea side a verie faire white Sand about halfe a mile long and somewhat more the defence of the Ilande consisteth herein that on the East side there are thrée or foure passages or Gates that stand vpon the water side on the vttermost part of the Iland right against the firme land Salsette and Bardes euerie gate or passage hath a Captaine and a clarke which kéepe watch that no man may passe into the other side but by their licence And the Indians Decanijus and other Moores and heathens that are resident in Goa and therein haue their habitation when they goe into the firme land to fetch their necessarie prouisions comming to those places which are called Passos they must euerye man haue a marke which is Printed on their naked armes and so they passe ouer to the other side and at their returne againe they must shew the same marke whereby they may fréely enter for the which they pay two Basarukes which is as much as a Hollanders Doit and this is the profit that the Captain and Clarke of the said Passos doe make In the night they haue a Boy that kéepeth watch and hath a small Bell which hangeth ouer the gate which Boylyeth downe and tieth the string of the Bell at his foote and so ringeth it often times to shew that hee watcheth which is all the watch they hold thoroughout the whole Iland There are fiue of these Passos one vpon the South side of the Iland where men passe to the firme lande and to the land of Salsette and is called Benesterijn commonly named Passo de Saint Iago because the Parish of Saint Iacobs standeth ther The Tebe de Passo is on the East side of the Iland where men doe onely passe into The firme land called O Passo Secco which is the drie passage for in that place the ryuer is at the narrowest and shallowest The third Passo on the South side of the Iland ioyneth almost to the Towne called O Passo de Daugijn or of Madre de Deus and so farre goeth the wall beginning at Passo de Benesterijn or S. Iago and from thence the whole Iland is without any wall or closure from this Passo right ouer against it they passe ouer to an Iland which is hard by the firme land where is also a Passo called O Passo de Norwa the fift or last Passo lyeth in the middle way of the Riuer downwards towards Bardes which is the strongest of them all and best looked vnto but no otherwise made then all the rest is called O Passo de Pangijn frō thence they passe to Bardes and also all the boates and ships that passe in and out of the riuer must stay there be searched and this is all their watch and strentgh in the Iland Touching the Portingales iustice and ordinances as well in worldly as spirituall causes they are al one as they are in Portingale They dwell in the towne among all sorts of nations as Indians Heathens Moores Iewes Armenians Gusarates Benianes Bramenes and of all Indian nations and people which doe all dwell and traficke therein euerie man holding his owne religion without constrayning any man to doe against his conscience onely touching their ceremonies of burning the dead and the liuing of marrying other superstitious deuelish inuentions they are forbidden by the Archbishop to vse them openly or in the
Emerauldes which the Indians call Pache and the Arabians Samarrut there are none throughout al India yet it is reported y t some haue bin found there but verie few not ofteÌ„ but they are much brought thether from 〈◊〉 in Aegypt and are likewise called Orientall they are much esteemed in India because there are but few of them There are many also brought out of y e Spanish Indies and carryed into the lande of Pegu where they are much worne and estéemed of wherby many Venetians that haue trauelled thether with Emeraldes and bartered them for Rubies are become very rich because among them men had rather haue Emeraldes then Rubies All the said stones are likewise vsed in medicines and Apoticarie drugges Turqueses are found in great numbers in the Countrey of Persia and brought into India from beyond Ormus by hundreth pounds at once earth and altogether which in India are little estéemed for that the Indians and Portingals do not weare many of them and make small account of them The Iaspar is much found in the land of Cambaia but not much regarded they make dishes and cups thereof it is of colour gréene like the Emeralde Chrisolites and Amatistes are many in the Island of Seylon Cambaia and Ballagatte and the stone called Alakecca which is also called Bloodstone because it quickly stancheth blood and other stones called Milke stones which are good for women that giue milke or sucke These and such like stones are in great numbers found in Cambaia and Ballagatte and are brought to Goa to bee solde whereof they make Beades Seales Ringes and a thousand such like curiosities they are much estéemed for that a seale of such a stone is worth two or three Pardaws the peece there is also in Cambaia much Alambre or wherof they make many rings beades and such like things which are much vsed there are likewise stones by the Portingalles called Olhos de Gato that is to say Cattes eyes because they are like them which is the Agat and are of colour and fashion like Cattes eyes they come out of Cambaia but the best out of Seylon and Pegu they are little brought into Portinâ—l for there they are not estéemed and likewise because they are worth more in India then in Portingall for the Indians estéeme much of them specially the Chinos and thether they are caryed better estéemed and sold there then any other stones the Indians say that this stone hath a certaine propertie and vertue to preserue and kéepe a man in the riches which he hath and that they shall not lessen but stil increase the Loadstone which the Portingalles call Pedâ—a de Ceuar is found in great quantity and in many places of India the Indians say that if a man vse dayly to eate a little of that stone it preserueth him and maketh him looke yong and that he shall neuer looke olde wherefore the Kinges and great Lordes of India vse it in pottes and vesselles therein to eate and séeth their meate thereby as they beleeue to preserue their youthes The 87. Chapter Of the Bezar stones and other stones good against poyson THe Bezar stone commeth out of Persia froÌ„ the land or Prouince called Carasâ—one and also out of other places in India they grow within the maw of a shéepe or Goat about a little straw that lyeth in the middle of the maw for by experience the straw is often found within them the stone is very slicke smooth without of a darke gréene colour These Goats or shéepe are by the Persians called Pazan wherevpon they call the stone Pazar and the Portingalles by corruption of spéech call it Bazar or Besar and the Indians Pedro do Bazar which is as much to say as market stone for Bezar in the Indian speech signifieth a market or place where all victuailes are kept and solde and for the same cause they call the smallest money Bazarucos as if they woulde say market money This Bezars stone is very costly and is much vsed in India against all poyson and other diseases and is more esteemed then Vnicornes horne in Europe for it is much tryed and sold very deare The greater and heauier they are the better and of more vertue they are the common sorte are of thrée foure or fiue octaues weight some more some lesse they are much brought into Portingal and greatly estéemed the place where they are most found is as I said before in Persia and also in the Island called Insula das Vacas or the Island of Cowes It lyeth before the mouth of the riuer entering into Cambaia hard by the coast where the Portingall nauie often putteth in to refresh themselues and being there kill diuers of the sheepe or Goates wherein they finde many of these Bezars stones likewise in the lande of Pan by Malacca there are many found in the same countrey of Pan they find a certaine stone within the gall of a Hogge which they esteeme more against poyson and other diseases then y e Bezars stone the Portingalles call it Pedra do Porco that is Hogges stone it is much vsed in Malacca it is of cleare redde colour and bitter in taste and sauoureth like French sope when they will vse it and giue it any man to drinke they throw it into a cuppe of water and so let it stande a little which done they take it out againe and the water will be bitter and cleanse all the venime that a man hath in his body as by experience hath oftentimes béen found The Bezars stone is as hard as any stone but not very heauie It is thought that these stones doe growe in the mawes of shéepe and galles of Hogges by vertue of the grasse or hearbes whereon they pasture and féed as we haue declared of the Rhinoceros because they doe onely bréede in those places aboue named and in no place els where these kinds of beastes are In the towne of Vltabado in the Countrey behind Goa in Ballagatte there is a stone found by the Arabians called Hagerarmini and by the Portingals Pedra Armenia and because there are many of them found in Armenia they are commonly called so it is blew somewhat light gréene the Moores vse it much in purgations and for other diseases besides these stones aforesaid there are also many sortes of stones as well precious stones as against poyson and other diseases and of many properties vertues but because they are but little knowne or trafiqued withall I haue onely made mention of those that are dayly bought and sold and commonly knowne The 88. Chapter A briefe instruction how to know and find out the right Diamantes Rubies Emeralds Pearls other precious stones and how to value them by waight at their right prices and values first of the Diamant FIrst you must vnderstand that the Diamant is the king of al precious stones because it is solde by weight and hath a very certain thickenes whereby it is ordinarily wroght for when it is
then other wise Which custome is a great profit to the King by meanes of the traffique therein vsed because there the Portingall ships doe make themselues ready with their full lading to sayle from thence to Portingall The same yeare in the month of September there arriued in Goa a Portingal ship called y e Dom Iesus de Caraâ—a that broght newes of foure ships more that were on the way with a new Viceroy called Don Duarte de Meneses which caused great ioye throughout the Cittie and al the Bels being rung as the manner is when the first ship of euerie fleete arriueth in Goa out of Portingall In that ship came certaine Canoniers being Netherlanders that brought me letters out of Holland which was no small comfort vnto me Not long after in the same month there arriued an other ship called Boa Vragen wherein were many Gentlemen and Knights of the Crosse that came to serue the King in India among which was one of my Lord Archbishops brethren called Roque da Fonseca the other Lords were Don Iorgie Tubal de Meneses chiefe standerd bearer to the King of Portingal new chosen Captaine of Soffala and Mosambique in regard of certain seruice that he had in times past done for the king in India Iohn Gomes da Silua newe Captaine of Ormus Don Francesco Mascharenhas brother of Don Iulianes Mascharenhas that was slaine in Sanguiseâ— as I said before hee was to haue had the Captaines place of Ormus but by meanes of his death it was giuen vnto his brother Don Francesco for the tearme of three yeares after he that is in it had serued his full time In Nouember after the other thrée ships arriued in Cochijn and had sayled on the out side of Saint Laurence Iland not putting into Mosambique The ship names were Santa Maria Arreliquias and the Admiral As Chagas or the fiue wounds In her came the Viceroy Don Duarte de Meneses that had béene Captaine of Tanger in Africa or Barbarie and in this ship there were 9â—0 Souldiers and Gentlemen that came to safeconduct the Viceroy besides the saylers that were aboue a 100. and had beene aboue seuen Monthes vpon the way without taking land before they arriued at Cochin wher they receiued the Viceroy with great solemnitie and being landed he sent presently vnto the olde Viceroye to certifie him of his arriuall and that hee should commit the gouernment of the countrie vnto the Archbishoppe to gouerne it in his absence specially because the Archbishop hee were verie good friends and old acquaintance hauing béene prisoners together in Barbarie when Don Sebastian King of Portingall was slaine which the old Viceroy presently did and went by Sea vnto Cochijn that he might returne into Portingall with the same ships as the Viceroyes vse to do for that after their time of Gouernment is out they may not stay any longer in India The 10. of Nouember Anno 1584. the ship called Carania went from Goa to Cochijn there to take in Pepper and other wares and then doe all the Factors goe into Cochijn to lade their wares and when the ships are laden and readie to depart they returne againe to Goa wher they stil remaine In that shippe the olde Viceroye with many Gentlemen sayled to Cochijn The fift of Februarie Anno 1585. the Viceroy Don Duarte de Meneses arriued in Goa where with great triumph and feasting hee was receiued In the month of Aprill the same yeare my fellow and seruant to the Archbishop called Barnard Burcherts borne in Hamborough trauelled from Goa vnto Ormus and from thence to Bassora and from thence by lande through Babilon Ierusalem Damasco and Aleppo from whence he sent me two leters by an Armenian wherein hee certified me of all his Vsage which he performed with small charges and lesse danger in good fellowship and verie merrie in the companie of the Caffyles From Aleppo he went to Tripoli in Suria and there hee found certaine ships for England wherein he sayled to London and froÌ„ thence to Hamborough which by letters from him written out of Hamborough I vnderstoode In the month of August there came letters froÌ„ Venice by land that brought newes of the death and murther of the Prince of Orange a man of honourable memorie as also of the death of Mons the Duke of Alenson or Amon with the mariage of the Duke of Sauoy to the King of Spaines daughter The 20. of October there arriued in Goa the ship called the S. Francis that came out of Portingal with it came also some Dutch Canoniers that brought mee letters out of my countrie with newes of my father Hugh Ioosten of Harlems death The first of Nouember after arriued at Cochiin the Saint Alberto that came from Portingal And the first of December that yeare there arriued in Cananor vpon the coast of Malabar the ship called the Saint Laurence and from thence came to Goa most of her men being sicke aboue 90. of them dead hauing indured great miserie and not once put into land At that time ther wanted two of the fléete that came from Lisborne in companie with her they were the S. Saluator and the Admirall S. Iago whereof they could heare no newes At the same time there came certaine Italians by land into Goa and brought newes of the death of Pope Gregorie the 13. and of the election of the new Pope called Sixtus At that time also the ships that came from Portingall sayled to Cochijn to take in their lading which done in the month of Ianuarie Anno 1586 they sayled for Portingall In the month of May Anno 1586. letters were brought into Goa from the Captaine of Soffala and Mosambique vnto the Viceroy and the Archbishop to certifie them of the casting away of the Admiral Saint Iago that set out of Portingall the yeare before being Anno 1585. whereof I spake before she was cast away in this manner The ship being come with a good speedy winde and wether from the Cape de Bona Speranza neere to Mosambique they had passed as they thought all dangers so that they needed not to feare any thing yet it is good for the Master others to be careful and keepe good watch and not to stand too much vpon their owne cunning conceites as these did which was the principal cause of their casting away and so they sayled betweene the Iland Saint Laurence and the Firme land that runneth by the coast to Mosambique which lyeth on the left hand the Iland of S. Laurence on the right hand betweene the which Iland and the fast land there are certain shallowes called the India fiftie Spanish miles distant from the Iland of S. Laurence and seuentie miles from the Firme land right against the countrie of Soffala vnder 22. degrees on the South side of the Equinoctiall and from thence to Mosambique is 90. miles Those shallowes are most of cleare Corrale verie sharpe both of blacke white and gréene colour which
all the boates being still abord which commonly doe hang at her at the least a mile or halfe a mile within the sea because it is calme This ship called the Arrelikia beginning in this manner to sayle among other romaâ— that stood vpon the hatches there were certaine hennes cages from whence certaine hennes flew out whereupon euery man claimed them for his owne and vpon a Sunday as in such cases it is commonly seene they ranne all on a heape vpon the one side wherby the ship being light of Balast and laden with many chestes aboue the hatches as I said before it swaied so much on the one side that by little and little it suncke cleane vnder the water so that not aboue a handfull of the maste could be seene aboue the water The people leaped into the â—oats that as yet were hanging about the ship which was good Fortune for them otherwise there had not one escaped aliue but by that meanes they were all saued the slaues onely excepted that were bound with iron chaines and could not stirre and so they were drowned God knoweth what riches was lost in her for nothing was saued but some few chestes that stood aboue the hatches which the Duckers got vp and yet the goods in them was in a manner spoyled and the rest vtterly lost by this it may be considered what manner the Portingales vse in lading of their ships and that it is to bee thought that as many ships as are cast away whereof there hath bin heard no newes or tydinges are onely lost by meanes of euill order and gouernment This being so vnluckily fallen out the Marchants vsed all the speed and meanes they could by witnesses to make protestation against the Officers and the Factors of the pepper that they might be punished for taking out the Ballast but they kept themselues out of the way and by prolonging of time it was forgotteâ—â—nd nothing done therein so that the Marchants that had receiued all the losse were glad to put it vp In the same moneth came newes out of Malacca that it was in great danger that many died there for hunger as also that the ship that went from Portingall thether was forced to stay there because they had no victuals to dispatch it away and likewise that the straight of Sumaria was kept by the enemy so that there could no shippes passe that way to China or Iapan This was done by the Kinges of Sumaria that is to say the kinges of Achem and â—or lying by Mâ—lacca vpon the Firme land which rebelled against the Portingales in Malacca vppon a certaine iniurie done vnto them by the Captaine there These newes put Goa in a great alteration for that their principall traffique is to China Malacca and Iapan and the Ilâ—ndes bordering on the same which by meâ—nes of those warres was wholly hindeâ— whereupon great numbers of â—ustes gallies and ships were prepared in Goa to relieue Malacca and all the townes men tasked euery one at a certaine summe of mony besides the money that was brought from other places and men taken vp to serue in the ships for by means of their late ouerthrowes and losse of ships India was at that time very weake of men In the month of May Anno 1587. there came a ship or galley of Mosambique vnto Goa bringing newes that the ship S. Phillip had bin there and taken in the lading of pepper that was in the ship called S. Laurenâ— that had ariued there in her Voyage towards Portingall and was all open aboue the hatches and without mastes most of her goods being throwne into the sea whereby miraculouslie they saued their liues and by fortune put into Mosambique In this ship called S. Philâ—ip were the young Princes the kings children of Iapan as is before declared From Mosambique came the same Galley that brought the newes to Goa the same Galley likewise brought newes of the Army that was sent out of Goa in December 1586. being the yeare before vnto the coast of Melinde or Abex to reuenge the iniurie which they had receiued in the Fléete whereof Ruy Gâ—nsalues da Camara was Captaine as I saide before as also to punish the townes that at the same time had vnited themselues with the Turke and broken league with the Portingales Of this armie was Generall a gentleman called Martin 〈◊〉 de Mello wherewith comming vpon the coast of Abex or Melinde which lyeth betweene Mosambique and the red sea they went on land because the Turks whome they sought for were gone home through the read sea they determined to punish and plague the townes that had fauored the Turkes and broken their aliance with them and to the same end entred into the countrie as farre as the townes of Pate and Bâ— that little thought of them and easily ouerrâ—n them because most part of the people fled to saue themselues left the townes whereby the Portingales did what pleased them burning the townes and razing them to the ground with others that lay about them and among those that fled to saue theÌ„selues they tooke the King of Pate whose head in great furie they caused to bee striken off and brought it vnto Goa where for certaine daies it stood vpon a maste in the middle of the towne for an eâ—ample to all others as also in signe of victorie wherewith the Portingales began to be somewhat incouraged and so they went from thence to Ormus and from Ormus they were to goe help the King of Persia as the Viceroy had commanded them but being at Ormus many of their men fell sick and died among the which their Generall Martin Alfonso da Metto was one whereupon they returned againe vnto Goa without doing any other thing The same armie sayling to the coast of Abex and falling on the Island of Zamzibar which lieth vnder sixe degrees on the south side about 70. miles froÌ„ Pate towards Mosambique about 18. miles from the Firme land there they found the Saint Saluador that came from Cochiin sayling towards Portingall being all open hauing throwne all her goods ouerboard sauing only some pepper which they could not come at and were in great danger holding themselues by force of pumping aboue the water vppon the point to leaue being all wearie and readie to sink which they certainly had done if by great good fortune they had not met with the armie which they little thought to finde in those parts The Armie tooke the shippe with them to Ormus where the rest of the pepper and goods remaining in her were vnladen and the ship broken in péeces and of the bordes they made a lesser shippe wherein the men that were in the great ship with the rest of the goods that were saued in her sailed to Portingall after a long and wearisome voiage ariued there in safetie The 17. of September 1587. a Galliot of Mosambique arriued at Goa bringing newes of the ariual of foure ships in Mosambiquâ— that came
with great deuotion promise of other wonderfull things when they came to land at the last God comforted vs and sent vs better weather for that the 19 of Aâ—â—ill the wether began to cleéere vp and therewith we were in better comfort The 20. of Aprill we tooke the hight of the Sunne and found it to be â—6 degrées and againe we saw greene water and some birds which they call Alcatraces and many Sea-wolues which they hold for certain signes of the cape de Bona SperaÌ„za as we thought were hard by the land but yet saw none the same day we had the wind somewhat fuller and were in great hope to passe the Cape so that the men began to be in better comfort by reason of the signes we haue seene All that day we saw greene water till the 22 of Apr. vpon which day twice and in the night following we cast out the Lead and found no ground which is a good signe that wee had passed the Cape called das Agulhas or the cape of needles which lieth vnder 35 degrees and is about 20 miles from the Cape de bona Speranza which lieth vnder 34 degrées a half And because that about this cape Das Agulhas there is ground found at the least 30 or 40 miles from the land we knew wee were past it as also by the colour of the water and the birds which are alwaies found in those countries and the better to assure vs thereof the great high sea left vs that had so long tormented vs and then we found a smoother water much differing from the former so that as theÌ„ we seemed to be come out of hell into Paradice with so great ioy that we thought we were within the sight of some hauen and withall had a good winde though somewhat cold The 23 of Aprill we passed the Cape de Bona Speranza with a great and generall gladnes it being as then 3 months and three dayes after we set sayle from Cochiin not once seeing any land or sand at all but onelie these assured tokens of the said Cape which happened very seldome for that the pilots doe alwaies vse what meanes they can to see the cape and to know the land thereby to know certainlie that they are past it for then their degrees must lessen and there they may as soone make towards Mosambique as to the Iland of S. Helena for although they can well perceiue it by y e water yet is it necessary for them to see the land the better to set their course vnto S. Helena wherein they must alwaies kéepe on the left hand otherwise it were impossible for them to come at it if they leaue that course for if they once passe it they can not come to it again because there bloweth continually but one kind of wind which is South east and thus hauing passed the Cape we got before the wind The 24 of Aprill the Pilot willed vs to giue the Bona viagen vnto the Cape de Bona Speranza according to the custome with great ioy and gladnes of all that were in the shippe for that as theÌ„ they assure themselues that they sayl to Portingal and not to turne againe into India for so long as they are not past the Cape they are alwaies in doubt and as then we were about 50. miles beyond the Cape The signes and tokens whereby they know themselues certainly to haue passed the Cape are great heapes and péeces of thicke réedes that alwaies thereabouts driue vppon the water at least 15 or â—â— miles from the land as also certaine birds by the Portingals called Feyâ—oins somewhat greater then sea mâ—wâ—s being white full of blacke spots ouer al their bodies very easie to be known from al other birds These are certain signes whereby the Pilotes doe certainly perswade themselues that they are past the Cape and hauing passed it they set their course for S. Helena Northwest Northwest by west The 27 of Apr. we were right in the wind and so continued till the next day and theÌ„ we had a calm being vnder 3â— degrees on Portingal side The â—9 of Apr. wâ— gâ—t before the wind which is the generall wind y t alwaies bloweth in those countries al the whole yere vntill y â— come to the Equinoctial line and is a Southeast wind so y t they may wel let their sayles stand lay them down to slâ—ep for in y e greatest wind y t bloweth there they need not strike their maine yard aboue half the mast The 12 of May in the morning betimes we discouered the IlaÌ„d of S. Helena whereat there was so great ioy in the ship as if we had bene in heauen as then we were about 2 miles from y e land the Iland lying from vs West south west whereunto we sayled so close that with a caliuer shot we might reach vnto the shore being hard by it we sayled about a corner of the land that from vs lay Northwest which hauing compassed wee sayled close by the land West North west the land on that side beeing so high and still that it séemed to be a wall that reached vnto the skyes And in that sort we sayled about a mile and a half and compassed about y e other corner that lay westward from vs which corner béeing compassed we presentlie perceiued the shippes that lay in the road which were those ships that set sayle before vs out of India lying about a small half mile from the foresaid corner close vnder the land so that the land as then lieth South east from them and by reason of the high land the shippes lie there as safe as if they were in a hauen for they may well heare the wind whistle on the top of their maine yards but lower it can not come and they lie so close vnder the land that they may almost cast a stone vpon the shore There is good ground there at 25 and 30 fadomes deep but if they chance to put further out or to passe beyond it they must goe forward for they can get no more vnto y e land and for this cause we kept so close to the shore that the height of the laÌ„d took the wind froÌ„ vs the ship wold not steer without wind so that it draue vpon the land wherby our horesprit touched y e shore therwith we thought that shippe goods had all beene cast away but by reason of the great depth being 1â— fadomes water and with the help of the Boats and men off the other ships that came vnto vs we put off from the land without any hurt and by those Boates wee were brought to a place wher the other ships lay at Anker which is right against a valley that lyeth betwéene two high hilles wherein there standeth a little Church called Saint Helena There we found fiue shippes which were the ship that came from Malacca and the S. Mary that had béene there about 15. daies
which came both together to the Cape de Bona Speranza the S. Anthonie and the S. Christopher being Admiral that had arriued there â—0 daies before and the Conception which came thether but the day before vs so that ther wanted none of the Fléet but the S. Thomas and by the signes and tokens that we and the other ships had séene at Sea we presumed it to be lost as after we vnderstoode for it was neuer seene after for the other shippes had seene Mastes Deales Fattes Chestes many dead men that had bound themselues vpon boards with a thousand other such like signs Our Admiral likewise had béene in great danger of casting away for although it was a new ship this the first Viage it had made yet it was so eaten with Wormes that it had at the least 20 handfuls déepe of water within it and at the Cape was forced to throw halfe the goods ouer bord into the Sea and were constrained continually to Pumpe with two Pumpes both night and day and neuer holde still and being before the Iland of S. Helena had ther also sunke to the ground if the other ships had noâ— holpen her The rest of the shippes coulde likewise tell what dangers and miseries they had indured About thrée Monthes before our arriuall at S. Helena there had béene a ship which the yere before set out of Ormus with the goods men that remained in the S. Saluador that had béene saued by the Portingal armie vpon the coast of Abex and brought vnto Ormus as in an other place I haue declared That ship had wintered in Mosambique and had passed verie soone by the Cape so sayled without any companie vnto Portingall hauing left some of her sicke men in the Iland as the maner is which the next ships that came thether must take into them These gaue vs intelligence that about foure monthes before our arriuall there had béene an English ship at the Iland of Saint Helena which had sayled through the Straights of Magelâ—anaes and through the south seas from thence to the Ilands of Phillippinas and had passed through the Straights of Sunda that lyeth beyond Malacca betwéene the Ilands of Sumatra and Iaua in the which way she had taken a shippe of China such as they call Iunckos laden with Siluer and Golde and all kind of Silkes and that shee sent a letter with a small present to the Bishop of Malacca telling him that shee sent him that of friendship meaning to come her selfe and visite him Out of that ship of China they tooke a Portingall Pilot so passed the Cape de Bona Speranza and came to the Iland of Saint Helena where they tooke in fresh water and other necessaries and beate downe the Alter and the Crosse that stoode in the Church and left behind them a Ketle and a Sword which the Portingales at our arriual found there yet could they not conceiue or thinke what that might meane Some thought it was left there for a signe to some other ships of his companie but euerie man may thinke what he will thereof In the ship of Malacca came for Factor of the Pepper one Gerrit van Afhuysen borne in Antwarpe and dwelling in Lisbone who had sayled in the same ship from Lisbone about two yeares before for that they staied in Malacca at the least fourtéene Monthes by reason of the warres and troubles that were in that countrie vntill Malacca was relieued as I saide before whereby they had passed great miserie and béene at great charges And because it is a very vnwholesome countrie together with y e constraint of lying there so long of 200. men that at the first sayled from Lisbone in the ship there were but 18. or 20. left aliue and all the rest dyed so that they were enforced to take in other vnskilfull men in Malacca to bring the shippe home This Gerrard van Afhuysen being of mine acquaintance and my good friend before my departure out of Portingall for India maruelled and ioyed much to find me there little thinking that we should méete in so strange a place and there we discoursed of our trauels past And of him among diuers other things I learned many true instructions as well of Malacca as of the countries and Ilands lying about it both for their manner of dealing in trade of Marchandise as in other memorable things By the pictures following you may sée the true description of the Iland of Saint Helena and of the thrée sides therof as we passed by it and as we sayled about it to the road as also of the Iland of Ascention The description of which two Ilands you may here perceiue and learne as I my selfe could marke the same The 94. Chapter A briefe description of the Iland Saint Helena SANCTA HELENA THe Iland of Saint Helena is so named because the Portingales discouered it vppon Saint Helens day which is the twentie one of May. It is in compasse sixe miles little more or lesse and lyeth vnder sixtéene degrées and a quarter on the South side of the Equinoctall 550. Spanish miles from the Cape de Bona Speranza and from the coast called Angola or Ethiopia 350. miles from Brasilia 510. miles These are the two néerest lands adioyning to it It is a verie high and hillie countrie so that it commonly reacheth vnto the cloudes the countrie of it selfe is verie ashie and drie also all the trees that are therein whereof there are great store grow of themselues in the woodes are little worth but only to burne for it hath no special substance but sheweth as if it were halfe consumed so that it should seeme that some mines of Brimstone hath in times past béene in that Iland as commonly all the Ilands are all much subiect to the same for that in some places thereof they find Sulphur and Brimstone When the Portingales first discouered it there was not any beasts nor fruite at all within the Iland but onely great store of fresh water which is excellent good and falleth downe from the mountaines and so runneth in great abundance into the Valley where the Church standeth and from thence by small chanels into the Sea where the Portingales fill their vessels full of fresh water and wash their clothes so that it is a great benefit for them and a pleasant sight to behold how cleare in how many streames the water runneth downe into the valley which may bee thought a myracle considering the drinesse of the country together with the stonie Rockes and hilles therein The Portingales haue by little and little brought many beastes into it and in the valleyes planted al sorts of fruites which haue growne there in so great abundance that it is almost incredible For it is so full of Goates Buckes wild Hogges Hennes Partridges and Doues by thousands so that any man that will may hunt and take them ther is alwaies plentie and sufficient although there came as many shippes more
wounded both himself and diuers of his men whereby they were forced to depart without hauing any thing there From Tercera North northwest about seuen or eight myles lyeth the little Iland called Gratiosa is but 5. or 6. mile in compasse a very pleasaunt and fyne Island full of all fruites and all other victualles so that it not onley feedeth it self but also Tercera and the other Islandes about it and hath no other kinde of merchandise it is well built and inhabited by Portingales and hath no soldiers in it because it is not able to heare the charge The Earle of Comberland while I lay in Tercera came vnto that Iland where himself in person with seuen or eight in his company went on land asking certaine beastes Hennes and other Victuals with wyne and fresh water which they willinglie gaue him and therewith hee departed from thence without doing them anie hurt for the which the inhabitantes thanked him and commended him for his curtesie and keeping of his promise From Tercera West North West eight or nyne miles lyeth the Iland of S. George It is about twelue myles long but not aboue 2. or 3. myles at the furthest in breadth it is wooddie and full of hilles it hath no speciall traffique but onelie some Woad and yet verie little of it The inhabitants liue most by Cattell and tilling of the land and bring much victuals to sell in Tercera it hath likewise many Cedar trees and other kindes of wood that from thence are brought vnto Tercera and sold vnto the Ioyners which for that occasion dwell onlie in Tercera From S. George West Southwest â— miles lyeth the Iland called Fayael which is 17. or 18. miles in compasse it is one of the best Ilands next vnto Tercera and S. Michaels it aboundeth in all sorts of victuailes both flesh and fish so that from this Iland the most part of victuailes and necessaries commeth by whole Caruels vnto Tercera it hath likewise much Woad so that many English shippes doe traffique thether The principall road and place is the towne called Vitta dotta there the ships likewise doe lie in the open sea vnder the land as they do before al y e other IlaÌ„ds by this town there lieth a fortresse but of smal importance because the inhabitants of themselues do offer to defend the Iland against all enemies the soldiers were discharged from thence which which before that time lay in the fort complayning that they were not able to maintaine nor lodge them The same time that the Earle of Cumberland was in the Iland of Gratiosa he came likewise to Fayael where at the first time that he came they beganne to resist him but by reason of some controuersie among them they let him land where he rased the Castle to the ground and sunke all their Ordinance in the Sea taking with him certaine Caruels and ships that lay in the road with prouision of all things that he wanted and therewith departed againe to Sea Whereupon the King caused the principall actors therein to bee punished and sent a companie of Souldiers thether againe which went out of Tercera with all kind of warlike munition and great shotte making the fortresse vp againe the better to defend the Iland trusting no more in the Portingales In that Iland are the most part of the Netherlanders ofspring yet they vse the Portingales language by reason they haue béene so long conuersant among them and those that vsed the Dutch tongue are all dead they are greatly affected to the Netherlanders and strangers From Fayael Southeast thrée miles and from Saint George Southwest foure miles and from Tercera Southwest and by West twelue miles lyeth the Iland called Pico which is more then fiftéene miles in length It is so named of a high mountain that standeth therein called Pico which is so high â—t some thinke it is higher then the Pico of 〈◊〉 When it is cleare weather it may as perfectly beseene in Tercera as if it were not halfe a mile from thence and yet it lyeth aboue twentie fiue miles from it for it is at the furthest end of the Iland towards Fayael The toppe of it is seene cleare and bright but the nether part is couered with cloudes and with the Horizon whereby the Iland is much spoken of It is verie fruitfull of all kinds of victuals like Fayael and hath great store of woode as Cedars all other kinds and also the costly wood Teâ—xo There they build many Caruels and small ships from thence by reason of the abundance of woode they serue the other Ilands with woode It is also inhabited as the rest are their chiefe traffique being Cattle and husbandrie It hath much wine and the best in all those Ilands and it hath the sauorest and pleasantest Oranges that are throughout all Portingal so that they are brought into Tercera for a present as being ther verie much esteemed and in my iudgement they are the best that euer I tasted in any place And because the towne of Angra in the Iland of Tercera is the chiefe towne and ruler ouer al the Flemish Ilands I thought good to set it downe in this place in the full proportion with all the stréetes Forts and Road or open Hauen together with the hilles called Bresil where the sentinell is holden for all shippes that come into those Ilands al liuely described as in my simple skill I could comprehend and deuise it The 98. Chapter Of the Ilands of Coruo and Flores FRom Tercera westwarde to the Iland named Flores are seuentie miles it is aboute seauen miles compasse it is also inhabited by Portingales and hath no speciall marchandise but onely some wood it is full of Cattle and other necessarie prouisions and lyeth open to all the world and to whosoeuer will come thether as well Englishmen as others for that the inhabitants haue not the power to resist them A myle from thence Northward lyeth a little Iland of two or three miles in compasse called De Coruo The inhabitants are of the same people that dwel in Flores Betwéene those two Ilands and round about them the Englishmen doe commonly stay to watch the ships that come out of the West for those are the first Ilands that the shippes looke out for and descrie when they sayle vnto Tercera wherby the inhabitants doe but little prosper because they are at the pleasure and commaundement of all that will come vnto them and take their goods from them as oftentimes it happeneth Yet for all their pouertie not to loose both landes and goods they must content themselues and Sayle with euerie winde The I le of Tercera lyeth vnder thirtie nine degrees in the same height that Lisbone lyeth and is distant from Lisbone lying right East and West two hundred and fiftie Spanish miles This shall suffice for the description of the Flemmish Ilands called the Azores which by dayly traueling vnto them are sufficiently knowne for that at this time many
met with an English shippe that after they had fought long together tooke them both About 7. or 8. Monthes before there had béene an English shippe in Tercera that vnder the name of a Frenchman came to traffique in the Iland there to lade woode being discouered was both shippe and goods confiscated to the Kings vse and all the men kept prisoners yet went they vp and downe the streetes to get their liuings by labouring like slaues being in déede as safe in that Iland as if they had beene in prison But in the end vpon a Sunday all the Saylers went downe behind the hils called Bresil wher they found a Fisher boate whereinto they got rowed into the Sea to the Earle of Cumberlands ship which to their great fortune chanced at that time to come by the Iland and Ankered with his shippes about halfe a mile from the Road of Angra hard by two small Ilandes which lye about a Bases shot from the Iland and are full of Goates Buckes and shéepe belonging to the inhabitants of the Iland of Tercera Those Saylers knew it well and thereupon they rowed vnto them with their Boates and lying at Anker that day they fetched as many Goates and shéepe as they had neede of which those of the towne and of the Iland well saw and beheld yet durst not once goe forth so there remained no more on land but the Master the Marchant of the said English ship This Master had a brother in lawe dwelling in England who hauing newes of his brothers imprisonment in Tercera got licence of the Quéene of England to set forth a ship therewith to sée if hee could recouer his losses of the Spaniards by taking some of them and so to redéeme his brother that laye prisoner in Tercera and he it was that tooke the two Spanish ships before the towne The Master of the ship aforesaid standing on the shore by me and looking vpon them for he was my great acquaintance the ships being taken that were worth 300. thousand Ducats he sent all the men on land sauing only two of the principal Gentlemen which he kept a borde therby to ransome his brother and sent the Pilot of one of the Indian ships that were taken with a letter to the Gouernour of Tercera wherein hee wrote that he should deliuer him his brother and hée would send the two Gentlemen on land if not he would sayle with them into England as indeed he did because the Gouernor would not doe it saying that the Gentlemen might make that suite to the King of Spaine himselfe This Spanish Pilot we bid to supper with vs and the Englishmen likewise wher hee shewed vs all the manner of their fight much â—â—mmending the order and manner of the Englishmens fighting as also for their curteous vsing of him but in the end the English Pilote likewise stole away in a French ship without paying any ransome as yet In the month of Ianuarie 159â— there arriued one shippe alone in Tercera that came from the Spanish Indies brought newes that there was a Fleete of a hundreth shippes which put out from y e Firm land of the Spanish Indies and by a storme were driuen vpon the coast called Florida where they were all cast away she hauing only escaped wherin there were great riches many men lost as it may well be thought so that they made their account that of 22â— ships that for certaine were knowne to haue put out of Noua Spaâ—gâ—a Santo Domingo Hauana Capoverde Brasilia Guinea c. In the yeare 1589. to sayle for Spaine and Portingall there were not aboue fourteene or fiftéene of them arriued there in safetie all the rest being either drowned burst or taken In the same Moneth of Ianuarie there arriued in Tercera 15 or 16 shippes that came from Siuilia which were most Flie-boates of the lowe countries and some Britons that were arrested in Spain these came full of soldiers and well appointed with munition to lade the siluer that lay in Tercera and to fetch Aluares de Flores by the kings commandement into Spain And because that tyme of the yeare there is alwaies stormes about those Ilandes therefore they durst not enter into the road of Tercera for that as then it blew so great a storme that some of their shippes that had ankered were forced to cut downe their mastes and were in danger to be lost and among the rest a shippe of Bâ—lcay ranne against the land and was striken in péeces but al the men saued theÌ„selues The other shippes were forced to keepe the sea and separate themselues one from the other where wind and weather would driue them vntill the 15 of March for that in all that time they could not haue one day of faire weather to anker in whereby they indured much miserie cursing both the siluer and the Iland This storme being past they chanced to meet with a small English ship of about 40 tunnes in bignes which by reason of the great wind could not beare all her sayles so they set vpon her and tooke her and with the English flagge in their Admiralles stern they came as proudly into the hauen as if they had conquered all the Realme of England but as the Admirall that bare the English flagge vpon her sterne was entering into the road there came by chance two English shippes by the Iland that payd her so well for her paynes that they were forced to cry Misericordia and without all doubt had taken her if she had bene but a myle further in the sea but because she got vnder the Fortresse which also began to shoot at the Englishmen they were forced to leaue her and to put further into the sea hauing slayne 5. or 6. of the Spaniardes The English men that were taken in the small shippe were put vnder hatches and coupled in boltes and after they had beene prisoners three or foure dayes there was a Spanish Ensigne-bearer in the shippe that had a brother slayne in the fleet that came for England who as then mynding to reuenge his death and withal to shew his manhood to the English captiues that were in the English shippe which they had taken as is aforesayd tooke a poinyard in his hand and went downe vnder the hatches where finding the poore Englishmen sitting in boltes with the same poinyard hee stabbed sixe of them to the heart which two others of them perceyuing clasped each other about the middle because they would not bee murthered by him threw themselues into the sea and there were drowned This act was of all the Spaniardes much disliked and verie ill taken so that they caryed the Spaniard prisoner vnto Lisbon where béeing ariued the King of Spaine willed he should bee sent into England that the Queene of England might vse him as shee thought good which sentence his friends by intreaty got to be reuersed notwithstanding he commanded he should without all fauor be beheaded but vpon a good
out of Portingall to Tercera being halfe the Seas ouer met with foure of the Queenes ships their General being S. Iohn Hawkins that stayed them but let them goe again without doing them any harme The Netherlanders reported that each of the Queenes ships had 80 peeces of Ordinance and that Captaine Drake lay with 40 shippes in the English Channell watching for the Army of the Carunho and likewise that there lay at the Cape S. Vincent tenne other English shippes that if any shippes escaped from the Ilandes they might take them Those tidings put the Ilanders in great feare least if they fayled of the Spanish Fleet and got nothing by them that theÌ„ they would fall vpon the Ilands because they would not returne emptie home whereupon they held straight watch sending aduise vnto the king what newes they heard The first of September there came to the Iland of S. Michael a Portingall shippe out of the Hauen of Pernanbuco in Brasilia which brought newes that the Admirall of the Portingall fleet that came from India hauing missed the IaÌ„ld of S. Helena was of necessitie constrayned to put in Parnanbuco although the King had expressie vnder a great penaltie forbidden him so to doe because of the wormes that there doe spoile the ships The same ship wherin Bernaldin Rybero was Admirall the yeare before 1589 sayled out of Lisbone into the Indies with 5. ships in her company whereof but 4. got into India the 5 was neuer heard of so y t it was thought to be cast away The other foure returned safe againe into Portingale though the Admirall was much spoiled because he met with two English ships that fought long with him and slew many of his men but yet he escaped from them The 5. of the same moneth there arriued in Tercera a caruell of the Island of Corâ—o and brought with her 50. men that had been spoiled by the english men who had set them on shore in the Iland of Corâ—o being taken out of a shippe that came from the Spanish Indies they brought tydinges that the english men had taken foure more of the Indian ships and a caruell with the king of Spaines letters of aduise for the ships comming out of y e Portingal Indies that with those which they had taken they were at the least fourty English shippes together so that not one Barke escaped them but fel into their hands and that therefore the Portingall ships comming out of India durst not put into the Ilands but tooke their course vnder 40. and 42. degrees and from thence sayled to Lisbon shunning likewise y e cape S. Vincent otherwise they could not haue had a prosperous iourney of it for that as then the sea was ful of English ships Whereupon the king aduised the fleet lying in Hauana in the Spanish Indies ready to come for Spain that they should stay there all that yeare till the next yeare because of the great danger they might fal into by the EnglishmeÌ„ which was no small charge and hinderance to the Fléet for that the ships that lie there doe consume themselues in a manner eat vp one an other by reason of the great number of people together with the scarsetie of al things so that many ships chose rather one by one to aduenture theÌ„selues alone to get home then to stay there all which fell into the English mens hands whereof diuers of the men were brought into Tercera for that a whole day we could sée nothing els but spoyled men set on shore some out of one ship some out of an other that pittie it was to see al of them cursing the EnglishmeÌ„ and their owne fortunes with those that had bin the causes to prouoke the Englishmen to fight and complayning of the small remedie and order taken therein by the king of Spaines Officers The 19 of the same month there came to Tercera a Caruel of Lisbon with one of the kings officers to cause the goods that were saued out of the ship which came from Malacca for the which we stayed there to be laden and sent to Lisbon And at the same tyme there put out of the Carunha one Don Alonso de Bassan with 4 great shippes of warre to come vnto the IlaÌ„ds ther to watch for the fleet of the Spanish Portingall Indies and the goods of the Malacca ship being laden they were to conuoy them all together into the riuer of Lisbon but being certaine daies at sea alwaies hauing a contrary wind they could not get vnto the Ilands only two of them that were scattered from the fleet arriued at Tercera not finding the fleet they presently returned backe to seek them in the meane time the King changed his mind and caused the fleet to stay in India as I said before therfore he sent word vnto Don AloÌ„so de Bassan that he shuld return again to y e Carunho which he presently did without doing any thing nor once approching neere the IlaÌ„ds sauing only the 2 foresaid ships for he wel knew y t the EnglishmeÌ„ lay by the Iland of Coâ—uo but he would not visit them and so he returned to the haueÌ„ of Carunha wherby our goods that came from Malacca were yet to ship and trussed vp again and forced to stay a more fortunat time w t patieÌ„ce pâ—rforce The 23 of Octob. there arriued in Tercera a Caruel with aduise out of Portingâ—le y t of 5 ships which in the yere 159â— wer ladeÌ„ in Lisbon for y e Indes 4 of them wer turned again to portin after they had bin 4 moÌ„ths abrod that the Admiral wherin the Viceroy called Mathias d' Alburkerke sayled had only gotteÌ„ to India as afterward news therof was brought ouer lande hauing beene at y e least 11. monthes at sea and neuer saw land came in great miserie to Malacca In this shippe there dyed by the way 280. men according to a note by himselfe made and sent to the Cardinal at Lisbone w t the names surnames of euery man together w t a description of his voyage the miserie they had indured which was only done because he wold not lose y e gouernment of India for that cause he had sworne eyther to lose his life or to arriue in India as in déede he did afterwardes but to the great daunger losse and hinderance of his companie that were forced to buy it with their liues and onely for want of prouision as it may well be thought for hee knew full wel that if he had returned backe againe into Portingal as the other shippes did he should haue béene cassiered from his Indian regiment because the people beganne alreadie to murmure at him for his proude and loftie mind And among other things that shewed his pride the more behind aboue the gallery of his ship he caused Fortune to be painted his owne picture with a staffe standing by her as it were threatening Fortune with this posie Queroque
and do ouerflow more then they are in the furder and very drie countries for in Egypt not accounting Alexandria with the places bordering on the same where it neuer raineth it is holden for a verie strange wonderful thing how the riuer Niâ— should grâ—w so high ful of thicke muddie water and alwaies at one time of the yeare not fayling therein thereby refreshing the earth and giuing foode both to man and beast whereby the ancient inhabitants of those countries did vse to offer sacrifices vnto that Riuer calling it as Ptolomeus in his fourth booke rehearseth a good Spirit and yet at this day many Christians esteeme it for a miracle for that without the increase thereof they would die for hunger their liues â—as Iohn Chrisostome sayth consisteth of the increasing of the waters so then the Northwest winds that in our summer time which is their winter blow in our countries are the meanes in those countries to gather cloudes and moystures vpon the high hilles from whence their raine proceedeth which raine is the cause that their countrey is not so colde as ours ingendering in those hot countries a certaine kinde of warme water Those raines then are likewise the cause of the growing ouerflowing of the riuer Niâ—us and other riuers in those countries wherof the inhabitants haue deuised and written to many fables But in their summer which is our winter there bloweth contrary windes as south and southeast which without al doubt are cold as blowing from the contrarie part of the Pole Antarctike and coole those countries as our winds do here in these countries like as with theÌ„ they cause a faire cleare aire so with vs they cause great store of raines by a certain natural disposition of the heauens the climates ruled and gouerned by the high wisedom of God that hath diuided the heauens ordained the course of the sun and other planets in such maner that al parts of the earth by their light brightnes are filled with warmth and coldnes therein do continue with great proportion and equalitie so that for certain if the freshnesse and coldnes of those winds did not refresh the countreyes of Ethiopia Congo and other places bordering on the same it were impossible for the inhabitants to indure the heate The same windes likewise doo refresh and comfort the inhabitants of Grecia the Islands of Candia and Cipies the countries of Asia Mynor and those of Suria and Egypt which liue by the refreshing of those generall Northwest west winds which rightly by the Grecians are called Zoephero that is bringing life those also are the cause that in Ethiopia Congo and other countries bordering thereon it neuer Snoweth no not vpon the highest hilles vnlesse it bee further off towardes the Cape de Bona Speranza or in some certaine places by the Portingales called Snow hilles as in Congo they finde neither Ice nor snow which with them would bee more esteemed then gold therewith to coole their drink so that the Riuers do not increase by the melting of snow but only by means of the coÌ„tinual raine of fiue moneths as I said before But returning to our former matter you may trauel to Congo by two waies one by the main sea to S. Helena and so further ouer or along by the coast of Affrica to the Island of Saint Thomas and so to the Cape of Lopes Gonzales lying vnder one degree vppon the South side of the Equinoctiall line about 21. Duch miles from Saint Thomas Island and from thence they saile with the wind that commeth off the land along the coast euerie euening casting anker in some creeke or hauen vntill they arriue at the place where they desire to be The kingdome of Congo beginneth at the Cape de S. Catharina which lyeth on the South side of the Equinoctial line vnder two degrees and a halfe and passing along the coast you saile by certain hils and strands not woorth the noting till you come to two creekes in forme somewhat like a paire of spectacles where there is a good hauen called Baro D Aluaro Gonzales that is the creeke or hauen of Aluaro Gonzaleâ— not farre from it runneth a little riuer into the sea by reason of the rednesse thereof by the Portingales called Rio de â—as Boreras Râ—slas because the water runneth ouer a certaine redde sande that coloureth the water at that place beginneth a high hill called by the Portingales la Sierra Complida that is a long hill passing further there is another riuer called â—a â—e â—as Almadias which is as much to say as the creeke or hauen for shippes because in that place many bankes are made in the mouth of this riuer there lyeth three Islands wherof the greatest is the middle being inhabited wherein there is a hauen for little ships the other two are not inhabited Parting from thence you come to the great riuer of Congo called Zaâ—e taking his beginning or spring partly froÌ„ the same lake froÌ„ whence the riuer Nylus doth flow This riuer casteth forth so great aboundance of water that it is incredible for that before it runneth into the sea it is at the least 5. miles broad on y e vpper part it is fresh water for 8 10. 16 Duch miles vnto the red sea whereby the pilots sailing ouer it know what place they are in Vpwards into this riuer you may saile with great barks she length of fine miles but not higher by reason of the discending and fall thereof from a steep high ground as the riuers of Nilus Donow and Rhein do in some places which are called Cataraâ—tas that is shedings or fallings of waters making so great a noyse that it may bee heard a great way from it In this riuer at the entry into the sea are many Islands al inhabited and very populous that haue diuers gouernours al subiectes to the king of Congo In tunes past those Islands made warres one against the other in certaine scutes cut out of the bodie of a great tree in their language called Licondo whereof some are so great that sixe men cannot fadome them with height and length correspondent so that one of the greatest being cutte in proportion of a scute woulde holde two hundred men Those scutes they rowe with ores wherwith they make great speede euery man hauing an ore and a bowe and when they fight they lay downe the ore and vse their bowe and to steere and winde those scutes they vse no other ruther than one of those ores In this riuer there are many strange beastes specially Crocadiles that are very great in their language called Carman the sea horse and another that seemeth to haue handes and a taile like vnto a Flaske which they call Ambize Angulo that is a sea hogge because it is as fatte as a hogge it hath a good and sauoury flesh not like fish although it bée a fish which feedeth not of that which is in the riuer but eateth
the grasse that groweth on the riuers side and hath an head like an ore whereof there are some that weigh fiue hundred poundes the Fisher men that take them are bound vpon pain of death to bring them to the King There you finde an other hooke of land called Cabo di Padran and alittle from thence the riuer Lelunda which commeth out of a small lake lying within the land from whence more Riuers haue their off-spring specially one called Coanza wherof hereafter I will speake This riuer Lelunda when it rayneth not is very drie so that it may be passed ouer by foote it runneth vnder the hill whereon Congo the chiefe cittie doth stand and from thence to the riuer of Ambrizi which is a great riuer with a hauen and runneth not farre from the riuer of Congo into the sea a litle further you come to an other riuer called â—â—ze which hath no hauen and from thence to Onzo another riuer with a good hauen hauing her spring out of the same lake from whence the riuer Nylus doth issue and somwhat more to the south lieth the riuer Lemba but it hath no hauen nor yet saileable From thence you come to Damde a very great riuer wherin ships of two hundred tuns may saile out of this riuer there runneth an arme or braunche lying southward called Bengo which with Coanza another great riuer make the Island of Loanda both their streames meeting together driue foorth much filth and sand which make the Island greater Bengo is a great streame or riuer which may be sailed vppe at the least fiue and twenty Italian miles which are about fiue Dutch miles and betweene these two Islands as I saide before lieth the rich Island of Loanda with the hauen called by the name of the Island Loanda which is as much to lay euen or flat land without hilles This Island is about four miles long and somewhat lesse than a quarter of a mile broad and in some places not aboue a bowe shoote broad where there is a thing much to be wondered at that when it is ful sea if one dig but twoo or three handfuls deep into the grouÌ„d they shal find fresh water and digging in the same ground when it ebbeth the water is salt and brackish In this Island of Loanda are fished the Schulpekens which in the kingdome of Congo and other places borduring thereabouts are vsed for mony which fishing is done in this maner There are certayne women that being on the sea side goe alittle way into the water lading certayne baskets with sand which being filled they carry them on land wash the sand from the Schulpkens that are very small and in great numbers by them esteemed of twoo sortes some males other females which in shew and colour are the fairest and although many of them are found vpon the strand or shore of the riuer of Congo yet those of Loanda are the best fairest most esteemed of they are very shining and of an ash colour other colours are of no account for those Schulplikens you may buy any kinde of thing whether it be gold siluer or any kinde of victualles whereby you may perceiue that not onely in the kingdome of Congo and the countries about it but also in other places of Affrica and in the kingdome of Chyna and some part of India they haue vsed other kindes of things in steed of mony as we vse gold siluer copper and such like mixtures for in Ethiopia they vse pepper corns for mony In the kingdome of â—buâ—o about the riuer Niger Shuâ—penes and Porcelleten as also in China and Ben â—alen so that mettall is not so much esteemed of in most partes of the worlde as it is in Europa and other places circumtacent In this Island there are seauen or eight villages by them called Libatâ— whereof the principall is called the Holighost wherein the gouernour is resident being sent from Congo where he administreth Iustice and looketh sharpelye to the fishing of Schalpekens There are many beasts goates and wilde swine for that the tame become wilde and runne into the woods also therein groweth a great and strange tree called Enlanda being alwaies gréene of a strange form specially in the branches that grow very high and cast downe certaine small threedes which touching the earth do bring forth roots from whence other plants or trees do spring forth most aboundantly in great numbers vnder the first rhinde or barke of this tree groweth a certaine linnen which being beaten and made cleane and then stretched foorth in breadth and length it serueth to apparell the common people In this Island also they vse shipps made of palme or Indian nut trees the boordes being peeced together after the manner of the Portingale barkes wherein they vse both sailes and oâ—es and with them they fish in all the riuers thereabout which are very full of fish and with them likewise they row vnto the firme land On that side which reacheth towardes the firme land there are trees that growe in certaine deepe places on the shore vpon the rootes whereof the sea continually beateth where groweth oysters as broade as a mans hand verie good to be eaten and wel knowne to that countrey people which they call Ambiziamatare which is to say stone fish The Island at one ende is very neere vnto the firme land and the chanell is oftentimes swoome ouer by the countrey people and in the same chanel there are certaine smal Islandes which when it floweth are not seene but when it ebbeth they appeare aboue the water and being vncouered they finde the oysters lying at the rootes of the trees hare by the Island on the outwarde part swim many whales that are blacke and fight togither killing ech other wherof being fished taken vp by the Moores they make treane oile with the which and with pitch togither they dresse their ships the mouth of the â—auen lieth in the north in breadth aboue halfe an Italian mile being very deep and right ouer against it on the firme land lieth the village of S. Paul not very strongly fortified and inhabited by Portingales that are brought the thither with wife and children out of Portingale all the channell is very full of fish specially of Sardins and Enchâ—ones which in winter time are there in so great abundaunce that they leape vpon the shore also diuers other good fishes as soales sturgeons barbles and great creuiâ—hes which are very wholesome and are there found in great numbers whereby the common people doe liue Satling further from Loanda you come to the Riuer called Coanza which Riuer with Bengo and other Riuers aforesaide doe make the Island of Loanda so that Coanza also hath her off-spring from a little lake which maketh a Riuer that floweth out of the same greate lake from whence Nylus and other Riuers haue their issue which Lake in this Carde is called Zane or Zembre of the ancient fathers Tritoms Lanis because therein as it is saide
about with hils whereof those that lie eastward are called Caâ—ates with rockes of Saltpeeter and of siluer on the one side and on the other side hilles through the which Nylus descendeth about foure hundred miles right north and then runneth into an other lake that is greater which the inhabitantes doe call a Sea or Meere because it is greater than the other being in breadth about twoo hundred and twentie miles lying right vnder the equinoctiall line Of this second lake we are truely aduertised by the people of Arzichâ— the which bordure vppon Congo who traffiking in that country reporte that in that lake there are people that do saile in great shippes that can write vsing weights and measures which they haue not in the bordures of Congo which also build their houses of stone and chalke as it groweth in the earth much like the people of Portingale whereby it may be saide that Prestor Iohns land is not farre from thence Out of this second lake aforesaide the riuer Nylus runneth to the Island of Meroe being distant from the lake 240. Dutch miles whereunto other Riuers haue their course as the riuer of Colues c. lying on the bordures of Melinde and comming to the saide Island of Meroe it diuideth it selfe in two partes compassing about a high land called Meroe on the right side of Meroe towardes the east runneth an other riuer called Abagni springing out of the lake Bracina which riuer runneth through Prestor Iohns land to the saide Island and on the other side towardes the west runneth other riuers among the which is Saraboe This riuer entring into Nilus and running about the Island of Meroe runne together in a broder streame through Ethiopia which is called Ethiopia lying aboue Egypt and reacheth to the descending thereof where the riuer Nylus meeteth againe with both the streames together in a high valley and so with a great fall runs to the Island of Siene with so horrible a noyse that the people thereabouts by that means are most part deafe and thence running through Egypt it watereth al the countrey and maketh it fruitfull and from thence runneth into the Mediterranean sea right ouer against Cipres and that with two notable streames besides others whereof one at Rossetto a dayes iourny from Alexandria runneth into the sea the other at Pelusio now called Damiata so that hereby I conclude that the riuer Nylus in Egypt the riuer Zaire in Congo and the riuer Nigri in Eâ—â—iopia are the causes of the fruitfulnesse of those countries al at one time increasing and ouerflowing by meanes of the exceeding great raines that for the space of fiue moneths do continually fall in the countrie of Congo and the places borduring on the same Touching the coast of Aden the coast of Arabia Felix and the country running along by the gulfe of Persia vntil you come to Goa it is sufficiently already declared in this booke whereunto I refer you The description of America and the seuerall partes thereof as Noua Francia Florida the Islandes called Antillas Iucaya Cuba Iamaica c. with the situations degrees and length how farre they are distant one from the other likewise the fruitfulnes and abâ—undance of beasts birdes fishes and fruits of the same countreyes with the manners fashions apparrels and religions together with the principall actions of the people inhabiting therein When the authour of this booke as also the Printer had bestowed and vsed great labor and charges herein to set forth some perfect Cardes of America because that often times the Indian shippes in their sailing out or returning home do fall vpon those coasts specially Brasilia which herein is most discouered they thought it expedient therewith to place a briefe discription of the same countries thereby to shew the readers the principall places therein whereunto at this day most ships do traffike hoping they wil take it in good part THe fourth parte of the world which at this day we cal America or west India was because of the great distance vnknowne to the ancient Cosmographers til the yeare of our Lord 1492. that Christopherus Columbus a Geneuois discouered the same and fiue yeeres after that one Americus Vespacio by the King of Castilliaes commandement sailed thither and called al the countrey America after his owne name and for the greatnes therof is also called the new world reaching as Postillus is of opinion from the one pole to the other beeing diuided by the straigths of Magellana where it endeth vnder 52. degrees on the south side of the Equinoctial line This countrie by diuers men is diuersly parted some making it a parte of the whole worlde and cal it the fourth part by the name of America others make out of that countrey in generall two other parts of the world diuiding the world in sixe parts as Asia Affrica Europe Mexicana or the new Spaine Peruana and Magellanica as the sixt part which as yet is but litle discouered others diuide it into three parts in Peru newe Spain others Mexico new France They that first found it accounted it but for one part after that the Spaniardes discouering more land diuided it into two parts into Mexico or new Spaine and Peru after that the Frenchmen discouering more countreyes called that which they discouered Noua Frauncia which in time beeing by the Spanniardes woonne from the Frenchmen was accounted for a péece of newe Spaine at the last the straights of Magellana being founde out was by Petrus Plantius a minister of the worde of God added as a sixt parte but because our Card extendeth no further then to certaine limits of Noua Frauncia namely to the prouince or countrey of Florida we wil not speake much of the rest and proceede with the other partes with certaine Ilandes in our Carde called Antillas or foure landes because they lie before the firme lande defending and couering the same as a henne with her wings couereth her chickens The land then which stretcheth towards the pole Arcticum or northward is called new Fraunce for that in Anno 1524. Iohannes Verrazanus of Florence being sent by the King and Queene mother of France into the new world did almost discouer al that coast beginning from Propicus Cancri about 24. degrees til he came to 50. degrees and somewhat further into the north where he erected the French standard so that from thenceforth that countrey was called by the name of Noua Frauncia and Villagagno Frauncia Antarctica The breadth of this countrey is from 24. degrees to 54. degrees towardes the North. The length from 280. to 330. miles whereof the East part by the writers in these dayes is called Norumbega reaching to the gulfe Gamus where it is seperated from Canada About this land which is not lesse in compasse then Europa or whole Christendome lie diuers Islands among the rest Terra di Laborador stretching towards Groenland whether diuers ships both Spaniards French and English do often times resort seeking
some passage through the same to enter into the East Indies but al in vaine for the most part consuming and destroying themselues therein found much ice and snow The people of this Island are wel proportioned of bodie and limbes wel made and fitte to labour they paint their bodyes thereby to seeme faire and weare siluer and Copper rings in their eares their apparrel is speckled furres and marternes and such like in winter they weare the furs inward and in summer outward like the Lapelanders and Vinnen they gird themselues with cotteÌ„ girdles or with fish skins and such like things their cheefe foode is fish specially Salmon although they haue both birdes and fruit inough their houses are made of wâ—od whereof they haue great quantities and couered with the skinnes of beastes or fishes In this land are griffons white beares and birdes There is a countrey vnder 44. degrees and a halfe called Baccalao taking the name of some kind of fishes which thereabouts are so aboundant that they let the shippes from sailing This countrey of Baccalaos reacheth nine hundred miles that is from the Cape de Baccalaâ—â— to Fâ—orida which is accounted in this sort from the point of Baccalao to the bay of the riuer are 70. miles froÌ„ the bay of the Riuer to the bay de los Islos 70. miles from thence to Rio Fundo 70. miles from thence to Cabo Baxo 160. miles and again to the riuer of Saint Anthony 100. miles from thence to the furthest Cape 180. miles and againe to the Cape of saint Elena 110. miles and from Saint Elena to the poynt of Canauerall or the Reedlyooke 100. miles then to Florida 40. miles which is in all nine hundred miles which is the greatnes of this land whereof the least latitude from the Equinoctial line is 48. degrees and a halfe this country both on the sea coast and otherwise is verie populous and like the low countries because it lyeth in a corner This Land hath many Islandes lying about it as Curia Regia Baya Bica Stella the Cape of Hope and the Brittons Cape Before you come to Florida the prouince Cichora lyeth by the Riuer Iordan and another hard by it called Guada Lupa The west side of Noua Frauncia hath diuers prouinces now discouered as Quiui a â—euola Astaclan Tethchichimichi The south side of Florida is called by the Spaniards Floridum Pascha because Iohannes Pontio Legionensi founde it out on Easter day in Anno 1512. and not because of the greennesse and budding of the trees in the same land as Theueâ— writeth The north side of noua Frauncia is as yet not discouered and because our Carde discouereth no further then to Florida we wil begin therwith and describe some part of the situation thereof because it is worthie memorie as beeing a place wherein many Spaniards Frenchmen haue lost their liues as also because it is the first best knowne of al new France whereunto the Frenchmen haue vsed to saile and therein in the time of Charles the ninth had a certaine fort which was called by his name Charles burgâ— but was after taken by the Spaniards and al the Frenchmen slaine contrary to their fayth and promise specially such as yeelded themselues into their hands But because my meaning is not to recite histories I remit the reader to the bookes which make mention thereof Florida hath a Cape lying far into the sea stretching Southward in maner of a tong reaching an hundred miles the measure being taken from the lowest northerne corner to the south poynt This Cape or hooke as I sayde is long and narrow like Italy in length an hundred miles and in breadth twentie or fiftie miles where it is broadest On the East side it hath the Islands of Câ—ehora Banama and Lucaya on the west side towardes Spaine and the gulfe of Mexico it is diuided from new Spaine by the land of Anauaca On the north side it bordureth on the firme land it lieth right against the point towards the south 25. miles into the sea lieth the famous Island Cuba otherwise called Isabellâ— the sea that runneth between this poynt of Florida and Iucâ—tan is called Mare Catayum by other the gulfe of Ferdinando Cortosi or the gulfe of Florida or of Mexico It is a flat lande wherein are many riuers which moysture the land and make it fertile the sea side being sandie whereon there groweth diuers pine trees without nuts or shels also many acornes wild cherries mulberies chesnuts but ranker of taste then oures in these countreyes many Mastike Cedars Cipres Bayes Palme trees Nuls and wild vines which grow vppon the trees that are next them bringing forth grapes that are good to be eaten also a certain fruit of Medlars greater and better then ours there are also plums verie faire to behold but not good of taste there are also Framboisen or Hinnebesien and some verie small round berries of a pleasant taste not much vnlike our Clappe beries there groweth rootes which in their speech they cal Hatle whereof in time of dearth they make bread Fourefooted beasts are there likewise in great aboundance as Harts Hinds rain Deare Goats Beares Leopards Fores many kind of Wolues wild Dogs Hares Conies c. Their birds are Peacocks Partriges Parrats Pigeons ring Doues Turtledoues Meerelens Crowes Hauks FalcoÌ„s Marlens hearns Cranes Storkes wild Geese Ducks water Rauens white red blacke and ash coloured Reighures and many other water foules Crocadiles in so great aboundance that it is incredible which ofteÌ„ times do eat and deuoure men swimming in the water there are likewise many kindes of snakes and a certain kind of beast not much vnlike the lion in Affrica Golde and siluer wherewith they traffike they haue it as they say out of the ships which fal on ground vpon the Cape which is not vnlikely because most of the ships are cast away vpon that Cape so that there is more money thereabout then in the north parts They said likewise that in the hils Apalatcyaeris there is gold to bee found in this countrie also groweth the roote China which by meanes of the Emperour Charles hath gotten a great report and is much vsed by phisitions which some also vse to heale the French pocks Besides al these things aforesaid there are diuers sortes of seedes and hearbes whereof many kindes of collours are made very profitable for painters the inhabitants knowe well how to vse them therewith to die al kindes of leather The people are in a manner a black yellow and euil fauoured yet strong of good proportion of bodie They couer their members with verie faire drest hart skins most part of them paint their bodies and also their armes and thighes with many figures which colour wil not off vnlesse it bee washed it is so printed and sunke into the flesh they haue black haire downe to theyr hippes being long which they verie cunningly bind vp in their dealings they are wholly light and
the rest and Bahama which lie al north from Câ—ba and saint Doâ—inicâ— The common opinion is that these Islandes were all one land and ioyned to the great Island and by the force of the sea seperated one from the other as it is thought of Iâ—aly and Ciciâ—ia They lie vnder seuenteene and eighteene degrees the people of those Islands are whiter and better proportioned then those of Cuba and Spaignuola specially the women that are verie faire for the which cause many of the firme land went thither to dwel as from Florida Cachora and Iucatan because there they founde more pleasure among the people then in other Islands and great difference in their speech whereupon hath risen the common opinion that in those Islands the Amazons did dwell beeing women that burnt their right breasts the better to shoote in bowes when they went to fight against their enemies and that there was a fountaine that made olde women yong The men go naked onely when they go to wars and when they keepe any feastes or vse to dance then they put on a certaine cotten garment and other garments of diuers coloured feathers finely wrought with a great plume of feathers on their heades Touching the women they haue verie strange customes for the married women or such as haue had the company of a man they couer their priuie members from the Nauel downe to the knees with certaine mantils of cotten made in manner of nets wherein they sticke certaine leaues otherwise they go naked vntil such time as they first perceiue their flowers and then they inuite al their friendes and make a great feast or banket as if they were married with great signes of ioy and then they beginne to hang that kinde of mantle before them wearing the same as long as they are vnmarried They are in great subiection to their maisters in such maner as that if they should command them to throw themselues headlong from off a hil or to do any other thing whatsoeuer they wil not refuse to do it what danger soeuer consisteth therin not once asking wherefore they should doo it but only because the master commandeth it Here also you must note wherein their kings gouernment consisteth which reacheth no further then only concerning sowing or planting the ground hunting fishing for that whatsoeuer is sowed or planted hunted or fished in any respect is onelie in the kings power and done by his commandement which diuideth those kindes of labours among the people directing euerie man what he should do The fruit that is reaped and gathered is brought all into a place appointed and from thence it is yearely deliuered vnto euerie man according as his houshold and necessarie vse requireth so that their Lords are nothing else but kings of Bees stuards distributers of the common goods of the countrey thinke then I beseech you what a golden time those people had where neither this is mine or this is thine was euer heard among them The only wel spring of strife contentioÌ„ Those in the east parts vsing nothing els but playing at the ball fishing and hunting where neither law nor processe was vsed nor decided where onely the kings will was a lawe and in all things were content to obey it They found certaine red stones in shels of fishes much esteemed and accounted of among theÌ„ which they weare at their cares and others more esteemed of which they took out of snakes Hersenen or snailes whereof the flesh is very good to eate of a fire red colour cleare and so like rubies that they could hardly be discerned from them whereof the Snakes in their speech are called Cohoâ—o and the stones Cohibici They gather likewise in the sande vppon the sea side certaine cleare shining stones yellow blacke and other colours whereof they make necklaces and such like Iewels to weare about their necks armes and legs in many places of those Islands they haue no flesh nor eate it not their meate is fish breda of wheate rootes and some fruites The people of these Islands being carried to saint Dominico or Cuba died there with eating flesh it beeing giuen them by the Spaniards In some of those Islands there are so many pigeons other birues which build their nestes in the Trees that many out of the firme land and also from the other Islands come thither and load whole scutes ful and take them with them the trees wherein they breed are like Youngarnet trees the barke hauing a certaine taste like Cinamon and somwhat better and hot like ginger smelling like cloues yet are they not accounted for spices among other fruites they haue a certaine kind by them called Iaâ—â—ma both sauorie and holsome about a span and a halfe long like a fig when it is greene the leafe likewise not much differing from the fig leafe and of the bignesse of a willow tree not close like other trees nor hollow like reedes but fast like Elders the leaues beeing excellent good to heale wounds as the Spaniards haue wel tryed To speake more hereof is needelesse those Islandes of Lucaya are more desolate and not inhabited for because they haue no gold The Spaniards carried many thousandes of them into other places and in seeking for Golde spoyled and destroyed them Hereafter followeth other Islands lying about that coast and first Cuba being one of the principal Islands vnder the Antillas CVba another verie great Islande accounted among the Antillas was by Columbus first foundout and discouered in An. 1492. which he called Fernandinam and Iâ—hannam as also Alpha and Omega as Peter Martin saith and by others the Island is called saint Iacob after the name of the cheefest towne therein which by reason of the great hauen as also the situation therof hath a verie great traffike as hauing on the East side the Islande of Saint Domingo on the West Iucatan on the North the great Cape of Florida and on the South the Island Iamaica all set downe in this Carde It is in forme like vnto a willow leafe because it is longer theÌ„ broad being in length from east to west three hundred miles and from north to south seuenty miles in breadth in some places but fifteene and in some nineteene miles The middle of the Island lieth in longitude 19. degrees and in latitude or height twentie degrees It was long time accounted for firme land because of the greatnesse which is no maruaile for the inhabitants themselues knew no other but that it had no ende and also long after the Spaniards comming thither because the people are poore and naked contented with a little and with their own not seeking any further neither caring what their neighbours did and therefore knew not if there were any other lande vnder the heauens then that wherein they dwelt The ground is high rough and sharpe of hils the sea in many places being white and the riuers small and good water rich of golde and good copper the aire temperate
yet somewhat colde therein is found much Mather seruing to die wooll cloath and leather it is also ful of thicke woods fishponds and faire Riuers of fresh water also of ponds that naturally are salt water In the woods are many hogges and oxen the riuers do oftentimes cast foorth gold in this Island are sixe townes inhabited by Spaniards whereof the first principal is Saint Iacobs the residence and sea of the Bishop but Hauana is the cheefe towne of marchandize and where all their Shippes are made Twoo principal and notable things are by Gonsalo Onetano written of this Island the first that therein is a valley situate betweene two hils in length about two or three Spanish miles wherein nature of it selfe bringeth foorth certaine round balles such as by art cannot possibly bee made rounder and in so great aboundance that they may ballist or loade whole Shippes therewith and are vsed in the shippes in steede of Iron or Leaden bulltes The other is a certaine hil not farre from the sea from whence there floweth pitch in great aboundance and runneth unto the sea where it driueth vppon the shore from place to place as the winde and weather serueth This pitch is vsed by the inhabitants and Spaniards to pitch their shippes The people of the Island are like those of Hispaniola onely differing in speech both men and women go naked and kéepe their bridalles in verie strange manner for that he which is married lieth not the first night with his wife be if it be a Lord he biddeth all the Lordes and one of them doth it for him and if it be a Marchant then Marchants take the paines to helpe him but if it be a countreyman either one of the Lordes or the priest doth ease him of a labour They leaue their wiues for verie smal occasions but the women may not forsake their husbands for any cause whatsoeuer The men are very vnchaste and wicked liuers there are great wormes and snakes in the Island and not venimous but easie to be taken the flesh whereof they eate and are neuer hurt therwith which snakes do liue by eating certaine beastes called Guabiniquinazes whereof many times there are seauen or eight found within their mawes they are in greatnesse like Hares in form like fores onely that their feete are like Conies feete the head like a Wesell a Fores taile long haire like a Badger of colour somwhat red the flesh sauorie and holsome This Islande was verie populous but nowe hath verie few onely certain Spaniards the rest beeing almost cleane rooted out and dead for want of meate Iamaica RIght against Cuba lyeth another Island which stil holdeth the name it alwaies had and is called Iamaica and of the Spaniards saint Iacob it lieth betwéene seuentéene and eightéene degrées on this side the Equinoctiall line on the East side it hath Saint Dominico about fiue and twentie miles distant on the West side the Cape or corner of Iucatana on the north Cubam also fiue and twentie miles distant and somewhat more and on the South another smal Island called Lacerana of fiue and twentie miles distant as the rest This Islande was discouered by Christopherus Columbus in his seconde nauigation into those countreyes and was taken by his son Don Diego gouerning the Island Saint Dominico by one Iohan de Squibel a captaine The breadth of the Islande surpasseth the length for it is from East to West about fiftie miles and from north to south twentie miles it is most inhabited by Spaniards the inhabitants also being burnt and destroyed by them like those of Lucaya The middle of the Island hath the longitude of 191. degrees and latitude or height eighteene degrees and is distant from the line seuenteene degrees on the north side It hath a hill that raiseth it on al sides inward to the middle of the land and so proportionably and euen that it can hardly bee descerned it is verie fruitfull both on the sea side and within the land and in times past verie populous such as were very wittie and subtile more then other of the Islanders thereabouts both in wars and other labours There is likewise gold and verie fine cotten wooll and at this present it is ful of beasts brought thither by the Spaniards and there haue increased The swines flesh is better in that Island then in any other place The cheefe towne in this Island is called Hispalis of Siuilia because of the abby which therein is erected the first abbot being Peter Marti◠borne in Milan an excellent learned man and hee that wrote most concerning this Hystorie Hispaniola or Haiti THe seconde great Islande accounted among the Antillas was by the first inhabitants called Quisqueia or Quisquesia and after that Haiti and then Cipanga Haiti is as much to say as roughnesse or sharpnesse and Quisqueia great land Christopherus Columbus called it Hispaniola and now it is called Saint Dominico after the cheefe Towne in the same Island it was discouered in Anno 1493. on the east side thereof lyeth the Island of Saint Iohn and many others on the West Cuba and Iamaica on the north the Island of the Canibals and on the south the firme land which is the Cape of Vela by Venezuela or little Venice The cōpasse of this Island is 350. miles Benzo saith 400. French miles which is in a manner al one and it is broader then long for in length it is from East to west 150. miles and from north to south 40. miles the middle of the Island lyeth in the longitude of 300. degrees in latitude 19 in it there are verie many and great hauens as Hatibanico Iuua Ozoma Neyua Nizao Nigua Hayna and Iaques which do al runne into the sea There are others that are smaller as Macorix Ciba◠Cotui wherof Macorix is verie ful of fish the other two abounding in gold In this Island are two very strange lakes the one because of the goodnes and profitablenes therof the other by reason of the strangenesse the one comming out of the hilles from whence the Riuer Puizao hath her issue it profiteth no man onely it giueth a feare and a little sinder sulkes The other of Xaragua is salt although many sweete riuers runne into it and hath many fishes among the which are verie great Tortuxes and Tiburones or Hayen it is hard by the sea and is eleuen miles in compasse the riuer sides and shores were much inhabted except the Saline a verie faire hauen and the Riuer Iaques where there is a great salt hil There groweth in this Island great store of very fine blew colour and much brasill wood cotten wooll but they know not how to make any thing of it amber rich mines of gold and is also fished out of lakes and riuers and likewise siluer and other mettals great abundance of sugar it is verie fruitful ground Reddish Lettice and Coleworts beeing sowed therein are within sixteene dayes after ripe and to bee eaten Melons
Cucumbers and Gourdes within sixe and thirtie dayes are also ripe and verie sauory aboue al others whatsoeuer The forme of the Island is like a chesnut tree leafe in the middle of the Island there passeth a stony or rough hil in forme of a mans backe which is called Cibam or Cipangi where in times past much gold was founde out of this hil runneth foure great riuers diuiding the Island into foure partes wherof the one is in the East and is called Iunna the second in the west called Attibunicus the third in the north called Iachem and the fourth in the South called Naxban whereabouts there is much brasile wood and woods of diuers spices but not like our spices which they barter for other wares specially for stooles and dishes of blacke ebanny Vppon the hil of Cibano lyeth the Castle of Saint Thomas There are likewise many townes within this Islande the principall called Saint Dominico made by Bartholomeo Columbo and by him so named because they arriued in that Island vpon saint Dominicks day it lyeth on a plaine ground vpon the sea side and hath aboue fiue hundred houses built after the spanish maner on the West side therof runneth the riuer Ozama or Ozonca into the sea where there is a good hauen in the which manie shippes may anker about this Riuer lyeth verie great and thicke woodes the greatest traffike next their golde is sugar and hides for that al sorts of foure footed beasts being brought thither out of Spaine haue so much increased therein that there are some spaniards in the Isle that haue sixe thousand or eight thousand beastes Isabella and another towne lying on the other side of the same Islande in a valley concerning the situation the people their Religion and customes you may sufficiently reade in the spanish Histories thereof set forth yet will I note some that are verie strange in this Island are certain wormes verie common among them and by the inhabitants called Cuuero in greatnesse as bigge as a ioynt of a mans finger with foure wings two verie little the other two somewhat greater and harder and are as couers to the smaller these wormes shine by night as the sloe wormes here with vs which light doth not onely appeare like a starre casting forth streames and shining out of their eies but also in the whole body so that when they flie and spreade their wings they giue much more light out of their bodyes then when they sitte still in which wormes men may well beholde the great workes and blessings of God by his strange gifts bestowed vpon his creatures for by the light of this little worme the darkest chamber that is in the night time may be made cleare and bright whereby a man may reade write or do any thing not néeding any other light and likewise if a man beare that worme in his hand he shall haue as great a light as if he bore a torch or lanterne and many light others therewith and the more wormes there are the greater will be the light Not farre from Hyspaniola lyeth another small Islande called Mona betweene Hispaniola and Boriquena or Saint Iohns vnder seuenteene degrées on the North side of the line This Islande is small and flatte and euen lande in bignesse about three miles and inhabited by a fewe Indians and Christians it hath verie good water and is ful of fish specially of verie good creuishes Boriquen FRom this Island you come vnto Boriquen now named S. Iohn a rich hauen on the East side it hath the Island of Sancta Croce on the West other small Islandes Northwarde the Islande of Saint Dominico which is fiue and twentie miles distant and on the South the Cape of Paria distant aboue three hundreth thirtie and sixe miles The length of this Islande is more then the breadth for from East to West it is fiftie miles from north to South eighteene miles and is diuided into twoo partes that is the North and the South quarter the middle of the Island lyeth vnder 303. degrees longitude and 18. degrees latitude in forme almost square populous and wel housed hauing many good hauens and woods The inhabitants haue continual warres against the Canibals or such as eate mens flesh This Island was rich of gold on the north side and towardes the south fruitfull of bread fruit grasse and fish it is said these people vsed not to eate any flesh which is to be vnderstood of wilde flesh but they eate many birdes as Pigeons and such like in other things they are like those of Hispaniola onely that they are better souldiers and vse bowes and arrowes in this Islande there is a certaine gumme by them called Taâ—unuo vnholsome and fatty like tallow wherewith and with oyle they dresse their shippes and because it is bitter it preserueth the ships from wormes There is likewise much por wood which is vsed to heale the pore and other diseases This Island was discouered by Chrostopherus Coâ—umbuâ— in his second voyage into India There is a verie strange and notable Historie written of the inhabitants hereof which is that at the first arriual of the Spaniards in that Island they thought the Spaniards to be immortal and neuer died whereof to be assured vppon a time one of their Cariquen or Lords called Vraioa de Yaguara caused one of the Spaniards to be taken and to prooue if he were immortal caused him to be put into a Riuer vnder the water and there holden to see if hee would come foorth aliue but being dead and brought before the king he was thereby assured of their mortalitie whereupon he rose against them and slew 150. of them that were busie in seeking of gold Saint Crus Hay Hay FRom Borequien you come to the Island S. Câ—us in time past by the inhabitants called Hay Hay being inhabited by Canibals or eaters of men as also the next vnto it called Guadalupea by them called Quiâ—ra or Quera which Caribes or Canibales had in short time deuoured at the least 5000. men which they stole and tooke out of the Islandes rounde about them from thence you come to diuers other Islandes which lie like an Archipelago hauing the same name but many of them are likewise called after the forme or fashion that they beare as Anguilla which is an eele as being long and smal Redonda Maria because it is like a spheare verie round Monâ—ratuâ— that is a closed hil because the Island hath high hils round about it ful of people and victuals some of saints as S. Mi 〈…〉 S. Bartholmew S. Barbara Beata â—iâ—gâ— Antigua till you come to the olde Virgin Maryes which lie together in a rowe verie pleasant to beholde some greene others red blew yellow and violet most wonderful to such as saile by them wherof many colours are made Guadalupea BY Antigua lieth Guadalâ—peâ— the cheefe and greatest Islande of Canibals foure degrees distant from the Equinoctiall line it is round aboue 130. miles and diuided by
two streames like Englâ—nâ— and 〈…〉 so that it seemeth almost to be two Islands it hath many goodly hauens the naâ—◠〈◊〉 giuen it of our Lady of Guadalupe it is â—ul of villages each of twentie or thirtie houses all wood and rounde made of certaine great okes which they thrust into the earth and those serue for the doores of their houses then they place smaller which hold the rest from falling Their branches on the toppe being bound together like tents which they couer with Palme tree leaues to keep them from the raine within they fasten ropes made of cotten wool or of Bâ—esen wherupon they lay cotten mattresses and hanging beddes therein to sleepe This Island hath seuen faire riuers the inhabitants were called Caâ—ucâ—erum it hath verie great Parrots much differing from others being red both before and behind with long feathers the wings speckled with red some yellow some blew al mixed together whereof there are as great abundance as of Spree 〈…〉 er in our countryes there groweth in this Island a certaine gumme called A 〈…〉 m not much vnlike Amber the smoke or aire of this gumme being let vp into the head driueth out the colde the tree bringeth foorth a fruit like dates but of a spanne and a halfe long which beeing opened hath a certaine white and sweete meale This fruit they keepe for winter as we do chesnuts the trees are like figge trees they haue likewise in this Island al kind of orchard fruit and some are of opinion that al kindes of sweete fruites were first brought out of this Islande into the other Islandes round about it for they are hunters of men which hauing taken they eate them and for the same cause they trauaile abroade many hundreth miles both farre and neare and in their trauell whatsoeuer they finde they bring it home and plant it They are not friendly but fierce and cruell They indure no strangers among them both the men and the women are verie subtile and expert in shooting with their bowes and their arrowes being poysoned when the men are gone abroad the women keepe their places and countreyes most stoutly defending them from al inuasion to conclude al parts of that Islande both hils and dales are verie fruitfull and in the hollow trees and clifts of hilles and rocks they find home Desiada or Desiderataâ— ABout eighteene miles from Guadalupa towards the East lieth Desiada another Island being twentie miles great Desiada or Desiderata that is desire so called by reason of the fairenesse of the Island ten miles from Guadalupa towards the south lyeth Galanta being in compasse aboue thirtie miles it is an euen and faire country wherof the Island hath taken the name for Galanta in Spanish betokeneth faire Therein are diuers sweete smelling trees both in barks rootes leaues There are likewise many great Horsleaches Nine miles from Guadalupa towards the East there lieth six smal Ilands called Todos los Sanctos or al Saints and Barbara spokeÌ„ of before Those Islandes are verie full of cliffes stonie and vnfruitful which the Pilots are to looke vnto to auoyde the danger that may ensue A little further lyeth Dominica taking the name from the day because it was discouered vpon a sunday and also an Islande of Caniballes so ful and thicke of Trees that there is scant an elle of free land Thereabouts also is another Island called Madannina or the womens Islande where it is thought that women onely inhabited in maner of Amazons whither the Canibales often times resorted to lie with them and if they had daughters they kept them but boyes they sent vnto their fathers it lyeth fortie miles from Mons Serratu After that lyeth yet thrée Islands besides other little Islands and diuers cliffes called S. Vincent Granada and S. Lucia Comming further towards the coast of Florida where we left right against it there lyeth certaine smal cliffes called Martires and the little Ilands called Tortugas because they are like a Torteauxes From this poynt of Florida to Ancon Baxo are 100. miles and lyeth fiftie miles distant East and West from Rio Secco which is the breadth of Florida from Ancon Baxo 100. miles to Rio di Nieues from thence to the riuer Flores 20. miles and somewhat more from the riuer of Flores to the bay called Bahya del Spirito Sancto which is likewise called La Culata being in the entrance thereof thirtie miles broade from this Bahya which lyeth vnder 29. degrées are 70. miles to the riuer called Rio del Pescadores from Rio del Pescadores which lyeth vnder 28. degrees and halfe there is 100. miles to the Riuer called Rio de las Palmas from whence Tropicus Cancri beginnneth from Rio de las Palmas to the Riuer Panuco are 30. miles and from thence to Villa Rica or Vera Crus are seuentie miles in which space lyeth Almeria from Vera Crus that lyeth vnder 19. degrees to the riuer of Aluarado by the Island called Papa Doapan are thirtie miles from the riuer Aluarado to the riuer Coâ—zâ—coalco are fiftie miles from thence to the riuer Gritalâ—a are fortie miles The said two riuers lying about eighteene degrées from the riuer Gritalua to Cabo Redondo are eightie miles as the coast stretcheth along wherein are contained Champoton and Lazaro from Cabo Redondo to Cabo di Catoche or Iucatan are 90. miles and lyeth about 21. degrées so that there are in al nine hundred miles in the length of the coast of Florida to Iucatan which is another Cape or hooke which stretcheth from off the land northward and the further it reacheth into the sea the more it crooketh or windeth about and is sixtie miles from Cuba The Island whereof we haue alreadie spoken which doth almost inclose the sea that runneth betwéene Florida and Iucatan which sea by some men is called Golfo de Mexico of others Golfo de Florida and of some others Cortes the sea that runneth into this gulfe entreth betwéene Iucatan and Cuba with a mightie streame and runneth out againe betweene Florida and Cuba and hath no other course A breefe description of Noua Hispania or new Spaine THe second part of America is called Noua Spaigna or new Spaine it beginneth towards the North about the Riuer of Panuco vppon the borders of Florida on the South side it reacheth to the prouince Darienâ— where it is diuided from Peru on the East it hath the maine Sea and on the west the South sea called Mare Australe this whole Prouince was in times past by the Inhabitants called Cichemecan Cathuacan or Coâ—acan which peple came out of the land of Culhua which lieth aboue Xalisco made their habitation about the Moores of Tenuchtitlan where at this present lyeth the towne of Mexico which people hauing neither countrey nor dwelling place chose that for the best and most profitable therein building diuers houses and habitations and in that manner placed both their new and old villages vnder the commaundement of Culhuacan giuing the same name
and ninetéene entring vpon the one and twentie day of October and issuing againe in the moneth of December after when as then the dayes were there at the longest and the nights shortest Touching this strait you may reade at large in the histories of India and the nauigations of the EnglishmeÌ„ that also haue passed the same The K. of Spaine in the yeare of our Lorde one thousand fiue hundred eightie and two commaunded a Castle to be made vppon the point or first entry into those straits on the south side towards Peru from whence most part of his treasure commeth thereby to impeach other Nations to enter or passe the same about this strait dwelleth certayne great giantes of tenne or eleuen foote high and higher as some men write Magellanica the sixt part of the worlde MAgellanica is the sixt part of the world which as yet is least knowne but with out al doubt very great and stretcheth farre and wide the prouince in that countrey lying right against the strait of Magellana is called Terra de Fuego Beach another prouince lying in that part of the worlde is esteemed to be rich of golde the furthest Islands thereof are Iaua minor or little Iaua diuided into eight Kingdomes bringing foorth many kindes of spices as yet vnknowen to vs. Iaua maior Timor from whence is brought white and redde sanders wood Banda from whence nutmegges and mace are brought the Islands of Moluco wherin groweth cloues Los Romeros and the Islands Salomonis But hereof I wil leaue to speake vntil a more conuenient time and wil proceede with our description to Peru beginning from Panama right against Nombre de Dios and so containing our description in the briefest maner to Cabo Deleado or the desired Cape lying in the straites of Magellana but before I beginne I wil first make a briefe description of Peru in generall Peru is a common word and signifieth thrée things first a poore small countrey and hauen of the Spaniards discouered by Pizzarro and Almagio lying about Panama vnder two degrées on the north side of the line secondly by this worde is vnderstoode the whole countrey beginning at that hauen and following along the coast within the south seas til you come to Chile containing eight prouinces as Quito Cagnaresia Porto veio de S. Iacomo Cassamalca Cuscoa Cagnasia Calloa and Charcassia Thirdly this word Peru or Peruuia signifieth the sixt parte of the worlde namely that which is diuided southwarde from America which is also seperated from New Spaine by a straight or narrow péece of ground not aboue seuentéene miles in breadth making that Peru which otherwise is wholy coÌ„passed about with the sea is not an Island for that on the south side it hath the sea called the South Sea whereby men passe through the straits of Magelana on the west part lieth the strait it self which diuideth Peru from the land that lieth ouer against it as yet not fully discouered and by some called Terra di Fuegos that is the land of Fire This strait or narrowe passage was found out by Magellanus in the yeere of our lord one thousand fiue hundred and nineteene and as some say in the yeere of our Lord one thousand fiue hundred and twenty one and reacheth right east weast 110. miles and lieth vnder 52. degrees and thirty minutes being in the greatest part but two miles broad the shore on both sides being full of high stone rockes In this part of the worlde are fiue principall great prouinces as Castilia del Orâ— or the Golden Castle Popaiana Brasilia Chile and Peru and is diuided from new Spaine by the prouince of Dariene Beginning from thence and reaching to the straites of Magellana you must then vnderstand Peru to be a whole sixt part of the world which reacheth wide and broade to aboue sixty foure degrees and thirtie minutes namely on the south side of the line to fiftie two degrées and one halfe and on the north side twelue degrees to Saint Martha which is the furthest part of the country northward in the furthest length this part hath fiftie three degrees accounting from the meridian Passing the Cape Saint Augustine which lyeth vnder 8. degrees and thirtie minutes southward to the Meridian and the head of saint Francis lieth vpon the poynt of two parts southward The whole sixt parte of the world is in forme almost like a Hart or a Triangle standing three equall distances or lines being drawne from the three corners or points of the land The first from the Cape Saint Augustine to the straites of Magellana The second from Magellana to saint Martha and the third from saint Maâ—tha again vnto saint Augustine which in this sort may be described for that placing the one corner of the triangle being Cape saint Augustine vnder eight degrees and thirtie minutes southward and the length thrée hundred forty and one degrées the other corner of the triangle being the strait of Magellana vnder fifty two degrees and thirtie minutes southward and the length 303. degrées The line that is betweene these two heades must haue sixtie degrees as the Meridian three hundred sixtie hath so much then or somewhat more hath the line that runneth from Magellana to Saint Marcha which lieth vnder twelue degrees and in length two hundred ninetie foure degrees therefore this land hath almost the forme of a triangle others say it is formed like an egge which on both sides runneth sharpe downewards and is broad in the middle whereof the better to know it I will first beginne with Peru and the course the Portingales helde from Panama to Peru. In tune past by the name of Peru men vnderstoode all the prouinces that lie thereabouts from Pastoa vnto Chile and from the riuer Maulâ— north and south vnto the riuer Anchasmay Nowe the Spaniards by the word Peru mean the land that lieth between the riuer Argiropilis or Villa de la Pâ—atta the prouince Quito which is a fruitful sound populous and wel inhabited countrey being in length from north to south seuen hundred miles and in bredth from east to weast about a hundred miles so that the borders east and south are Argiropolis towards the west sea and towards the north the prouince Pastoa This land is diuided into three partes that is Planitiem Sierras and Andes that is an euen flat land lying on the Sea side with hilles or hilly countrey which passe through the middle of Peru lying eastward ouer the hilles This land is rich with gold and siluer more than any country in al the world which well appeareth by the yeerely quantitie of golde and siluer brought from thence respecting not the boastings brags vsed by the Perunians themselues that say The summes yéerely brought out of that countrey is nothing in respect of the quantitie therein for that it may be esteemed as much as if a man hauing a sack ful of corne should take a few graines out of it it may
miles and a halfe as they come néere vnto this cape they shall perceiue it to be a high hilly land lying vnder seuen degrees and a halfe from this poynt to the Rio de Pinas or Pine trée hauen the coast runneth south west and southwest and by south and is distaunt from the poynt aforesaide foure and twenty miles which are six Spanish miles or sixe degrees and a halfe it is a high land with great hilles and dales on the sea side there groweth very great pine trees and therefore it is called the Hauen of Pine trees from thence the coast lieth southward and south and bywest to Cape de las Correntas that is the cape of Streames which is very small and reacheth into the sea and because of the great and stiffe streame that runneth like a strong fall of waters running eastward like riuers many times the Portingale ships which saile that way are forced to anker in the night and in the morning setting saile it happeneth oftentimes that when they thinke to winde that they are stayed and driuen backe agayne so hang somtimes 15. or 20. dayes about that Cape before they can passe it but passing forward beyond that Cape you come to the Island lying before the Rio de Palmas so called because of the aboundaunce of palme or Indian nut trées that do growe thereon This riuer is in compas somwhat more than fiue miles which is one Dutch mile and a mile and â— Spanish which was once inhabited it is distant from Cabo de Correntes seuentie fiue miles or foure degrees â— Thereabouts are many riuers all very good water and not farre from thence lyeth the land and riuer of Peru where Pizaâ—us arriued and after his name almost all the country is called Peru from the Iland de las Pâ—linas folowing along the coast and the same course you come to the strand of Bonauentura which is distant from the Island aforesaide somewhat more than nine miles which are two Spannish miles ¼ Hard by this strand which is very great lieth a high cliffe or rocke of stone and the entry of the Bay is vnder three degrées 1 â— All this side is full of very great hilles and there runneth into the sea many and verie great riuers that haue their springs out of the hilles by one of those the shippes enter into the land or haâ—â—n of Bonauentura but the â—ilots that puâ—â—h there ought to haue good knowledge of the riuer for that if they be not wel acquainted with it they are like to induâ—e much danger as it happeneth vnto many shippes that had Pilots to whom the riuer is not knowne from this Bay the coast runneth east and east and by south to the Island Gorgona which is distant from the strande seauenty fiue miles which are ninetéene Spanish miles the coast al along this course is very lowe full of trees and other wilde places and hilles from whence there runneth many great riuers whereof the chiefe and greatest is the riuer of Saint Iohn which is inhabited by Barbarians hauing builded their houses vppon great postes and stoopes in manner of houelles where many dwell in one house and some alone by themselues because the houses are very long and broade These Indians are rich of gold and their country is very fruitfull the riuers by force of the streames abounding with much gold but it is so sleeke and moorish that it can hardely bee gotten but with the losse of many people and with great labour This Island of Gorgona is vnmeasurable high wherein for the space of eight moneths yéerely it neuer ceaseth raining and thundering whereby it seemeth the Elements fight and striue one against the other it is in circuite about two miles or sixe Italian miles all high hilles vpon the the trees whereof are seene many peacocks phesants speckled cats great serpents many sea crabbes and night foules seeming as if it were not inhabited it hath likewise much fresh water Summer there beginneth at the end of Maie cleane contrary to Panama whereas then winter beginneth In this Iland Franciscus Pizarius with 13 others that had discouered the countrey of Peru stayed certayne days induring great paine and hunger before they coulde ouercome the countrey This country of Gorgona lieth vnder three degrees and as touching the miles that in this discourse as also in the description of Brasilia and other places I haue obserued they are all Spanish miles whereof seuenteene 1 â— make a degrée from this Iland the coast runneth west southwest to the Iland del Galâ—o or of the Cocke all this coast being lowe and full of vallies from whence there runneth many riuers this Iland is small and in compas scarse a mile or about three Italian miles it hath certayne redde Downes The same coast from the firme land thither lyeth twoo degrees from the Equinoctiall from thence the coast tourneth southwestward till you passe the point called Manglaâ—es which are trees so called and in our Card Manglalos which lieth scarce vnder two degrées and from the Island to the poynt which is sixe Spanish miles little more or lesse or foure and twenty Italian miles the coast is low and ful of vallies and thereabouts runneth certaine riuers into the sea which inwards to the land are inhabited from thence the coast runneth southwest to the strand called S. Iacob or S. Iago and maketh a greate Creeke where there is an open hauen or roade named by the Sardinians and from thence runneth the great riuer of S. Iacob where the gouernement of Pizarro began and this strand is 9. miles ¼ from the point of Manglares and it happeneth many times that the ships haue there at the beake head fourescore fadomes water and at the sterne they touch the ground and also it is often found that sometimes they sayle in two fadomes water and presently they find ninetie fadomes which the strong course and fury of the riuer causeth and although there are such banks yet are they not dangerous neither do the shippes refuse to passe in and out when they will The strand of S. Mathew in our Carde Mathias lyeth full in one degree from thence the coast runneth west to the Cape saint Francis which lieth from the strand thirtie Italian miles that is seuen Spanish miles and one halfe this poynt lieth on high ground and hard by it are certayne red and white Downes that are of the same height This poynt of saint Francis lyeth vnder one degrée on the north side of the Equinoctiall line From thence the coast runneth southweast to the poynt Passao which is the first hauen of Peru ouer the which passeth the Equinoctiall line Betweene these two poynts there runneth foure great riuers into the Sea which are called Liquixinus in Latine Quisinuae and there about there is an indifferent good Hauen where the ships finde good water and wood to burne From the poynt Passao to the firme land are diuers high hilles that are called De Quaque
the poynt is a land which is not ouer lowe where you sée certayne Downes as aforesaide ¶ Here followeth the Nauigation from the Line to the Towne of the Kings called Lyma FRom hence forwarde wee haue declared the coast of Panama in the South sea til you come to the hauen of Quixinus which lieth in the Countrey of Peru now I will goe forward with the course that lieth betweene Quixinus and the towne of Kings so then departing from the poynt de Passos the coast stretcheth south and south and by weast to the hauen called Porto veio or the Old Hauen and before you come thither there lieth the strand called Charaqui wher the ships may put in without any daunger and it is so safe a strand that they may there lay their ships on shoare and mend them if they neede be they neuer so great for it is a good hauen of entraunce onely that in the midle of the entry there lieth certain stones or rugged Islands but the shippes may enter at which side they wil and passe by them without any danger for there is nothing to be shunned but onely that which you sée before your eyes the Olde Hauen lieth vnder one degrée on the south side of the Equinoctiall line and is one of the fiue Townes which the christians or Spaniardes haue built in the flat land of Peru so that Porto Veio signifieth the towne and countrey lying thereabouts which is much ouerrunne wasted because it is a poore vnwholesome country yet it hath certain mines of Sinaragdes which they held long time hidden and by no meanes would discouer them as to this day they yet do They had likewise in times past many golde and siluer vessels which are by the Spaniardes all taken and carried away but now by the kings letters patents being made frée they pay to theyr superiour lords but onely the tenth parte of all their fruits whereby many Spaniards withdrawe themselues from thence séeing their profite to decay The Countrey about Porto Veio was rich of golde where the people made their houses in the trées like birdes nests and because the coast is moorish there is no being for horses whereby it was not so soone subdued by the Spaniardes as also because that out of theyr nests they threw stones iauelines pottes with hot water and whatsoeuer came next to hand whereby they killed many Spaniards wherewith they were forced to couer themselues with boordes and so cut downe the trees before they could ouercome them as also because the Countrey is so rough sharpe and wilde that they could hardely finde prouision for their army there is yet much country thereabouts vnhabited By the Old Hauen two miles within the land is the towne of saint Iacob or Iago which for houses and inhabitants is not inferiour to Porto Veâ—o and thereabouts is the passage of Gainacaua by the Spaniards so called for this occasion that Gaâ—â—acaua the father of Attabalida vpon a certain time sent one of his Captainâ—â— â—â—th a great army to subdue that countrey who minding to passe his people ouer the riuer commanded them to make a bridge of péeces of wood that so they might passe Which being made when his people with their armor and weapons were vppon it the ennemy cutte the ropes wherewith the péeces of wood were fastned together whereby many of them that were vpon it by force of the streame were drowned in the riuer and the rest spoyled by the enemy Which Gainacapa vnderstanding assembled a great number of souldiers and with them departed from Quito and being in the plaine field in open battell he ouercame those people after the which victorie minding to make a passage ouer the riuer that men might passe ouer on foote to the same end he causâ— great numbers of stones and earth to be brought thither and threw them into the riuer being twentie foote broad but whatsoeuer he threw in al wold not preuaile by reason of the great deapth and swiftnesse of the riuer that carried it away by force of the streame which hee perceiuing left off his worke and so departed and therfore the Spaniards haue giuen this place the name of the passage of Gainacaua about the which passage lieth the towne of saint Iacob builded by them About a Spanish mile and a half distant from this town of saint Iacob towardes the south lyeth a round hil by them called Christs Hil. From Porto veâ—o further forward the same course almost foure miles distant in the south lieth the poynt of saint Laurence and two miles and a quarter from thence southwest lieth an Island of the same name which is full a mile in compasse wherein the Indians or Peruuians of the firme land in times past vsed to make their sacrifices and offerings killing many lambes shéepe and some children offering their blood vnto their idolles or diuelles whose figures were made and carued in stone to whome they doe vsually pray When Franciscus Pizarius with his thirteene companions trauelled to discouer Peru they entred likewise into this Island where they found certaine iewells of siluer and golde many cloakes and shertes of very faire and fine wooll so that from that time forwards and for the same cause this Island was called Siluer The poynt of saint Laurence lieth vnder one degrée on the south side of the line And as I sayde before Peru beginneth at the line and stretcheth southwarde vnto Chile The people that dwell vnder the line and thereabouts haue the customes and manners of the Iewes Whereby many men are of opinion that they are issued from the Iews or of the race of Cham they speake hoarsely and in the mouth like the Moores and are much giuen to vncleannesse especially that which is wholy against nature whereby they do not well agree with their wiues but rather despise them The women weare neither hayre nor apparell but onely a certaine aprone before their priuities They plant sowe reape and thrash the corne and wheate meale whereof they make breade which wheate in Peru is called Zara the men weare short shertes without sleeues downe to their nauelles their members being vncouered and some goe naked paint their bodies with a black colour their haire being shauen and cut almost like Friars but they leaue no haire neyther before nor behinde their heades but onely vppon the sides it is likewise a common custome with them to weare many Iewels of golde both in their eares and noses specially emerauldes such as are found in those Countries And although the inhabitants will not discouer the mines yet hath it beene perceiued by certaine rough stones on their arms and legs they weare many beades of gold siluer and small tourqueses also of white and red Teekens and Huyzkens but will not haue their wiues to weare anye such touching the situation of the Countrey it is very hote and vnwholesome and there they haue certayne sore biles that issue out vpon their faces and other partes of theyr
bodies as bigge as akornes hauing deepe rootes worse and more deformed than por and must be wroong off by binding a threed about them when they are ripe they paynt their mouthes and boare holes in theyr eares nose lippes and cheekes vpon their festiuall dayes wearing iewels and pearles therein the scutes by them vsed in those countries to fish as also to saile in are like drifts made of thrée fiue seuen nine and eleuen light quarters or rafters of wood laid or bound together as men binde mastes and let them driue vppon the water and their manner is to binde the longest in the middle and the rest on both sides shorter than other and as their driftes are long or short so are their sailes proportioned and when they haue brought their drift a good way forwarâ— they throwe bread fruit and such like things into the sea praying for a good winde as being weary and wholly without strength to rowe any more The doores of the Churches in that Countrey stand Eastward hanged with certaine cotton linnen and in euery church there standeth two grauen Images of forme like blacke Buckes and before them there is a fire made of swéete wood which groweth in that countrey which fire burneth continually out of the which wood the barke being taken away there issueth a certaine sweet gumme I thinke it to be Cedar from whence the gumme Elemi is taken which is accounted for the life of the dead and the death of the liuing because it preserueth the dead body from putrifaction There are also in those temples certain Images of great serpents which they pray vnto and besides these common idolles euery man hath his seuerall Idoll each man according to the trade he vseth as the Fishermen a greate fish and the Hunters a hart or the Image of some wilde beast by the Cape Passao in some churches vpon euery piller thereof were placed the bodies of men women and children crucified that were so well kept and dried that by no meanes they could rot or cast foorth any vnswéete sauour there were likewise the heads of Indians set vpon nailes which with some certaine substaunce they had so closed and knitte together that they were no bigger in compasse than a mans fist their houses are made of great thicke réedes which growe in that countrey but for fruite they haue very little Procéeding further to the description of the coast and folowing on south and southweast to Cape saint Elena before you come to that poynt there are two hauens one called Colao the other Calemgo where the shippes anker to take in fresh water and woodde to burne and from the poynt saint Laurence to Cape saint Elena are full nine miles and lieth vnder twoo degrees and from the point towardes the north it maketh a hooke of land which is a very good Hauen about a bowe shoote from thence there standeth a fountayne which by certaine veines runneth into the sea from whence there issueth a certayne Bitumen altogether like pitch and by the Spaniardes is vsed about their shippes insteede of tarre and the Peruuians say that about that point in times past there dwelt great men like Giants but they knew not from whence they came and fedde vppon such meate as their neighbours vsed specially fish Those Giauntes fished likewise vppon drifts and manye times came on foote to land through the water where they had at the least two fadome déepe and somewhat more They went naked and were most cruell killing many of the people thereabouts When the Spaniardes arriued at Porto Vero they found therein two Images of those Giantes a man and a woman and the Peruuians say likewise that the destruction of those Giauntes was done by a boy that came downe from heauen shining like the Sunne that fought against them with fiery flames in such manner that where the flames touched they tare and rent the stones the rents and holes whereof are at this day to be seene and by that meanes the Giauntes ranne into certayne holes to hide themselues where they were all destroyed This tale was not greatly beléeued by the Spaniardes vntill one Iohn de Helmos borne in Truxillio Gouernour of Porto Vero in the yeare of our Lorde God euerlasting one thousand fiue hundred fourtie and thrée caused certayne places to bee digged vppe where they found so great bones and ribbes that it was incredible to bee mens bones but that they found the heads lying by them the teeth thereof being three fingers broad and foure fingers long and fiue quarters square which were sent into diuers places of Peru and from that time the Peruuians tale thereof was beleeued to be true The Spaniards opinions are that because the Giantes were giuen to sinne against the lawes of nature that the most righteous God had destroyed them by his Angel with fire from heauen as he did the Citties of Sodome and Gomorrha Yet is this not certainely to be credited because the Americans haue no histories bookes nor other writings to record the same onely the memories and rehearsalles of menne from time to time and by some tokens and memorialles there made of all sortes of painted cotten ropes which they call Quippos signifying by the number of knottes made of diuers fashions that which they would remember beginning from the bottome and so telling vpwardes from one to tenne and so forth painting the ropes of the same colour that the things were of which they woulde thereby signifie or haue in memorie whereof the Spaniardes by their Barbarian crueltie and negligence haue spoyled great numbers in euery prouince there were menne appoynted for the purpose in that manner to register such things as had happened as you may reade more at large in the Historie of Mexico those that did it were caled Quippo camayos of which cordes there were whole houses full which by such as were acquainted with them could easily be tolde although the things had béene done many yeeres before but returning againe to the description of the coast from the point of saint Elena you saile to the riuer of Tumbez which lieth almost nineteene miles off and from thence about foure miles lieth the Islande Pâ—na otherwise called the Island of Saint Iacob which is more than seuen miles and one half in compasse very rich and inhabited with so many people that they warred continually with the men of Tumbez and the people of the firme land betweene them hauing had many battells in open field but by continuaunce of tune and power of the Spaniardes they were in the ende wholely subdued This Island is very fruitful and ful of al sorts of trees abounding both with wilde beastes and fish also of fresh water for their apparel they vsed shirts and other clothes they fish with drifts of light wood bound vpon two other peeces of woodde as their neighbors do of the which drifts some of them are so great that at the least fiftie men and three horses might sit vpon them
twelue Italian miles and from thence the coast runneth south wherewith you fall vppon the poynt de la Cora in the middle between the Island of Wolues and this point there is a great intercourse or creeke of water hauing very good harber for shippes to anker in it lyeth vnder six degrees on the south side of the line from thence you perceiue 2. Islands both called Islas de Lobos that is Islandes of Sea Wolues because of the great quantity that are thereabouts the first of these Islands lyeth north and south with the first poynt and is distant from the firme land three Spanish miles or 12. Italian miles the other Island lyeth 9. miles further forward and is not ful vnder seuen degrees southwest from the coast till you come to the hauen called Câ—sma and from this first Island you saile northeast southwest to Malabrigo which is the slender or bad defence where there is a hauen wherin their shippes may not enter but with faire weather and such specially as haue great occasion thereby to further their voyage Seuen miles and a halfe further you come to Tarrâ—eâ—sse that is the cliffe of Truxilio which is a verie bad hauen and hath no other harber or defence then onely good ankers and a mile and a halfe within the land lyeth the towne of Truxilio which is also one of the Spanish townes situate in the plaine countrie of Peru it is builded vppon the corner of a Riuer in the vallie of Chimo The countrey thereabouts is verie fruitfull abounding in wheat Mâ—lâ— cattell and water and the towne built in good proportion hauing about three hundred Spanish houses with broade streetes and a great market place rounde about the towne are many fayre gardens and euerie house is serued with water by channels comming out of the Riuer and runneth into all their gardens which are continually greene and full of blossomes wherfore it is saide this towne lyeth in a verie good place compassed about with faire and pleasant meddowes corne fieldes and Pastour groundes where the inhabitants feede their Cattell and likewise plant and sowe theyr Corne. There the Spaniards haue plaÌ„ted many kinds of spanish fruites as porâ—gaâ—nats oranges lemones citrons figs much of the countrie fruit in great aboundance and verie good besides this they haue many foules hens and capons whereby they are prouided of all things of flesh in great aboundance and fish out of the sea which is hard by them also in the riuer The Indians inhabiting about the towne are in subiection to the Spaniards and furnish the towne with all things that are necessarie at this Towne there are whole shippes laden with cotten linnen made by the Indians to sell in other places This towne was made and erected by Marquis Francisco Pizarto the first gouernour of Peru in the yeare 1533 From Truâ— by land vnto saint Michaeâ— another spanish towne and the first place where they inhabited in those countryes are about fiue and fortie spanish miles or an hundred and eightie Italian miles litle more or lesse for that comming from Saint Michaeâ—s to the vallie Motupâ— are fifteene miles and a halfe all sandie and bad way specially where men much cheefely trauell and being past those fifteene miles you enter into certaine vallies and though therabouts falleth certaine small riuers out of the hilles yet they reach not to the vallies but runne into the sands whereby they doo no good and to trauaile this way you must depart out of Saint Micaels in the enening and so go all night and earlie in the morning you come to certain places where you find water to drinke for by night the heate of the sunne doth not hurt some carrie bottles with water or wine and when you come vnto the vally Motupe you enter into the kings hieway very broad euen which I haue occasion to speake of the kings of Peru I will declare more at large This vallie is broade and fruitfull but the riuer that falleth from the mountaine stoppeth before it commeth vnto the sea but because the earth is verie moorish there groweth many trees the people draw their waterout of certaine pits which they dig within the earth their traffike is cotten wool and cloth made thereof three miles from Motupe lyeth the faire fresh vallie of Xaâ—anca which is also three miles great through the which there â—unneth a goodly riuer from whence they fetch water to moysten their grounds this vallie in time past was very populous and likewise the other in this vallie were many houses of great Lords that therein kept their stewards to commaund ouer the rest who were greatly honoured and feared by the common people from this vallie you goe to another called â—uqueme which likewise is great and full of bushes the ruines of the great houses that stood therin yet to bée séene do euidently shew that many people haue inhabited in that vallie a dayes iourney further there is yet another faire vallie called â—â—nto and between these two vallies there is nothing but sandy wayes and drie stony hils where you findâ— neither liuing creatures trees nor leaues but onely certaine birdes that flie ouer it and such as will passe that way must haue good guides lest they loose themselues in the sandie downes and by reason of the great heate of the sun and want of water should faint for thirst From Cinto you come to an other vallie called Coliche through the which there runneth a great riuer called by that name this vally likewise in times past was full of people but nowe for the most part by meanes of the warres they are almost consumed from whence you goe to Zana much like the â—ormer and somewhat further to Palcamayo of all the rest thereabouts the most fruitful and populous the people of this vallie before they were ouercome and subdued by the â—ings of Peru were verie mightie and much esteemed of by their neighbours they had great churches wherein they sacrificed but now al destroyed and ouerthrowne there were likewise many Indians graues Through this vallie there runneth a great riuer that watereth al their groundes and through it also passeth the kings high way and therein were many houses belonging to the king In this vallie they make much cotten work haue al kind of cattel as kine hogs goates and such like beasts and is verie temperate From this vallie you go to another called Cancama not inferiour for fruitfulnesse and pleasure to the other They haue likewise many sugar canes and very good fruit wherein there is a cloyster of Dominican Friers made by Dom di S. Themafe and three miles from thence in the vallie of Câ—â—â—o lieth Tâ—uxâ—lâ— as I said before which valâ—â—e keepeth the name of a Lorde called Câ—â—o who was a valiant Souldiour and liued long time 〈◊〉 warres The kings of Peru greatly esteemed that vallie wherein they builded many houses and gardens of pleasure and through it also passeth the kings high way
occasion of the droughts and of the other townes and places which lie in the further description of the sea coast BEfore I returne to procéeding with the description of the rest of the sea coasts from Lyma to Arequipa I thinke it not vnconuenient to declare why it raineth not in the plaine countrey of Peru lying on the sea side where neuertheles there is so great occasion giuen of raine because the Sea which commonly yeeldeth moysture lyeth vpon the one side and the hils whereon there is alwaies so great quantitie of water and snow vppon the other side you must vnderstand that vppon the hils summer beginneth in Aprill and continueth May Iune Iuly August and September and in October winter beginneth and continueth the other moneths til March not much differing from our Countries or froÌ„ Spain in that time they both plant build and gather in their fruites and seedes but day and night are al of a length onely that in Nouember they differ a little and in the plaine land it is contrary for when it is summer in the hils it is winter there so that in the plaine countrie summer beginneth in October and continueth til the moneth of Aprll where as then winter beginneth and surely it is a verie strange thing to thinke how so great difference should be in one countrey where a man may vppon one day in the morning trauaile from the hilles where it raineth and befoâ—e night bee in the plaine countrie where it neuer or verye seldome raineth for that from the beginning of October al the summer long it neuer raineth in that countrey onely there falleth certain dew which in many places hardly layeth the dust of the sandes wherefore the inhabitants of the plaine countrey must continually water their groundes and not till nor plant any more lande then they can bring the water vnto in other places by reason of the vnfruitfulnesse of the country there is no grasse as beeing all drie sandie and stonie grounds the trees growing theron are vnfruitfull with verie few leaues there likewise groweth diuers thistles and thornes and in some places nothing at all when it is winter in the plaine countrie there are certaine thicke and close cloudes onely as if the aire hung full of raine from whence there onely proceedeth a certaine small miseling that can hardly lay the dust of the sande which notwithstanding is a verie strange and wonderfull thing that the ayre being in that sort so thicke and close there falleth no other moysture and yet the sunne for many daies because of the clouds cannot be seene and as the hilles are verie high and the coast low it appeareth that the hilles draw the cloudes vnto them not suffering them to fal vpon the plaine lande so that when the waters do naturally keepe their course it raineth much in the hils and not in the plaine countrie but therein causeth a great heat and when the dew falleth then it is cleare weather vpon the hils and raines not there likewise it is very strange that for the most part of the yeere ther bloweth but one kind of wind in the plain countrie that is southwest windes which although in other countries they are commonly moyst and causes of raine there they are cleane contrarie I thinke because they are suppressed by the high hilles from whence they blow that they draw no moysture or dampenesse out of the sea into the aire wherby any great raine should folow by these windes also it happeneth that the water in the South sea runneth into the North and maketh a hard nauigation from Panama to Peru both against winde and streame in such sort that it cannot be done without lauering and striuing against the winde There is yet another thing to bee marked which is that vnder the line in some places it is moyst and in some places colde and moyst and in those plaine countries of Peru colde and drie and departing from thence to the other side it raineth continually Here followeth the description of the coast of the plaine countrey of Peru with the hauens and riuers lying therein between the towne of Lyma and the prouince of Dechia as also the degrees and the manner of the sayling on that coast THe Ships that saile from the towne of Lyma or of Kings take their course towards the south and so come to the hauen of Singalla which is verie great whereby at the first the Spaniards were in mind to haue built the town of kings in that place it lyeth distant from Lyma 2â— Spanish miles or 105. Italian miles whereof fiue make a Duch mile which is one and twentie Duch miles it lyeth not ful vnder fourteene degrees on the south side of the line Hard by the hauen of Sangalta lyeth an Island taking the name of the sea Wolues al the coast from thence forward is very low although in some places there are smal hils of plaine stone and some sandie downes wherein as yet neither before nor til this time it euer rained where also there falleth no other moysture then onely the smal dewe whereof I spake before about this Island of sea Wolues there are seuen or eight other Islandes which lie in Triangle wherof some are high some low and all vnhabited hauing neither water wood trees grasse nor any thing onely Sea Wolues and great store of sande The Peruuians of the firme land as they theÌ„selues say in times past vsed to goe into those Islands and there to offer sacrifices where it is thought much treasor lyeth hidden these Islands are distant from the firme land about three miles Further in the same course vnder 14. and 1 â— lyeth another Island of the same name and from thence sailing on and coasting along the shore southwest and southwest and by south and being 9. miles beyond the Island you come to a point called Nasca lying vnder fifteene degrees lesse ¼ vnder the which the shippes may anker but yet they cannot land with their boates neither throw foorth their Bocken following the same course vnder fifteene degrees 1 â— there is another head or poynt called S. Nicolas and from this cape the coast runneth southwest and when you haue sayled nine miles in that sort you come to a hauen called Hacan which lyeth vnder sixteene degrees from whence following on the coast you come to the riuer Diocouna on which side the coast is altogether wilde A little further there is another riuer called Camana and somewhat further the riuer Quilca and about halfe a mile beyonde it there is a verie good grounde where the ships may ride and anker which hauen is also called Quilca like the riuer and from thence as men put out they saile to the towne of Arequipa which lyeth 12. miles from this towne the hauen and the towne lying vnder seuenteene degrees ½ sayling along the coast of this hauen about three miles distant you see certaine Islands in the which certaine Indian fishermen of the firme lande doo
lie to catch fish about twoo miles further there is another Island hard by the firme lande where on the loofe side the ships may harber it is called Chulâ— from whence there are wares sent to Arequipa and is from Quilca nine miles it lyeth vnder seuenteene degrees and a halfe The way by lande from Lyma or Cidado de los Reâ—es to Arequipa DEparting from Lyma and following the coast about three spanish miles or twelue Italian miles you come to the vally of Pachacama in our card Pachamma a most pleasant place and wel known among the Peruuians because of the most statelie Temple that sometimes stood therein for riches exceeding al others in that countrey being placed vpon a litle hil made of square stones and earth in the which temple were many painted doores wals with formes of wilde beasts in the middle therof where the idoll stood were the priests that shewed themselues to be verie holie and when they offered sacrifice for all the people they turned their faces towardes the gates of the temple and their backs to the Image casting downe their eyes and ful of fearefull demonstrations made great stamping as some of the old Indians say like the maner of the sacrificators of the Idoll Apollo when the people staied to heare the prophesies Those old Indians likewise say that they vsed to offer many beastes and some men vnto this Idol at their cheefe feastes this Idol gaue them answere to their demaunds and what he sayd they beleeued in this temple there was great treasor of golde and siluer hidden and the priestes were greatly esteemed the Lords of the countrey being much subiect to their commaundements rounde about this temple were certaine houses made for Pilgrims and no man was esteemed worthie to be buried about that Church but onely their kings noblemen and the priests that came thither on pilgrimage bringing certaine offerings with them when they helde their greatest feast in al the yeare there assembled many people that according to their manner plaied on instruments when the kings of Casco subdued the vallie they hauing a custome throughout al their countries to erect temples in the honour of the sunne and beholding the greatnesse and auncientnes of that temple with the perswasion that the common people had of the holinesse of that place as also the great deuotion vsed therein they thought it not conuenient to destroy that church but appoynted another to be made by it in honour of the sunne which shuld be esteemed the greater which according to the kings commandement being finished be indowed it with great gifts sending thither certaine women wherwith the diuell of Pachacanâ—a was verie well pleased as it appeareth by the answere hée gaue vnto them being serued as well in the one temple as in the other and keeping the poore soules vnder his power and now although this temple is defaced yet hee ceaseth not secretly to speake with some of the Indians telling them that the same God which is preached by the Spaniards and hee are all one thereby to keepe them in obedience vnto him and not to become christians In steede of those Idols there are crosses erected as they think to please the diuel the name of the diuell was Creator of the world for Camac is creator and Pacha world but God permitting Francis Pizaâ—ius to take King Atabaliban prisoner he sent his brother Fernando Pizarrus to destroy the temple and to take away the treasure although the priestes before his comming had hidden part thereof which could neuer be founde yet a great part was carried away This vallie is verie fruitful rich and ful of trees abounding with kine and other cattel as also good horses From the vally Pachacama you come to Cilca where there is a notable thing to be noted for the strangenesse thereof for it neuer raineth there neither is there any riuer whereby they may conuay the water therwith to water their groundes yet the most part of this vallie is ful of Maiz and other rootes that are good to eate with fruitfull trees the meanes they haue to helpe themselues therein is thus that they make certaine deepe pits within the earth wherein they sow their Maiz and other rootes and other fruits and by reason of the cleare and pleasant aire as also the smal dew and moisture that falleth God sendeth them great aboundance of Maiz and other things but no other corne neither would that likewise grow therein if they did not throw one or two heades of the fish called Sardinia into the ground with euerie eare of corne which fish they take with nets in the sea and by that meanes it groweth in great aboundance whereby the people maintain themselues The water that they vse to drinke they take it out of great deepe pittes and for the better prouision of their corne they do euerie yeare fish for so many Sardines as they shal neede both to eate and sowe theyr corne There was likewise in that country many houses for prouision and munition belonging to the King of Peru therein to lodge and rest themselues when they trauaile through their countryes Two miles and a quarter from Ciâ—ca is the prouince of Mala where there runneth a faire riuer the coast whereof is ful of trees and not full foure miles further lyeth Goarco well knowne in that countrey being great and broade and ful of fruitful trees speciallie of Guuyas a certaine Indian fruit verie pleasant of smel and taste and also Guauas and Maiz in most great aboundance with al other things as wel Indian as Spanish fruites Besides this there are great numbers of Pigeons Turtle Doues and other kindes of foules in the woods and wilde countrey which make a good shadow in the vallie vnder the which there runneth certaine streames of fresh water The inhabitants of this country say that in times past that place was verie populous and that they ruled and hadde commandement ouer some of the hils and ouer plaine countries and when the Ingen or Kings of Peru or Cusco came to subdue them they held wars against him for foure yeares together minding not to loose the liberty which their predecessors before them had so long maintained During the which wars many strange things happened which are herein needlesse to rehearse because my meaning is not to make a History but onely to describe the coast and although the Kings of Peru in summer time because of the great heate withdrew themselues into Cusco yet they had their Captaines and Souldiours that helde continuall warres and because they might the better bring their affaires vnto effect the Ingen in this vally caused a newe Casco to be built whether he and his nobilitie repaired giuing the streetes and other places the names of the olde Cusco when he had subdued that people the saide residence of the King and the towne did both decay yet in steede thereof there remaineth a goodly Castle which he left in signe of victory situate
for that they left other mines as Pero and the riuer of Carabaâ—a wherein they founde golde to come thither because there they made more profite In those hilles and al the land thorow there are many vaines of all colours wherof men may make faire colours the siluer found in this myne and which belongeth to the king for his parte is carried by lande to Arequipa and from thence to Lyma Panama Nombre de Dios and Spaine A further description of the sea coast from Arequipa to Chile and from thence to the straights of Magellana CHulli a Hauen of Arequipa lieth vnder seuenteene degrees and a halfe and one mile and a halfe from thence the Riuer of Tambopalla and seuen miles and a halfe further there reacheth a poynt into the sea not ful a mile beyond or further out then the other lande vpon the which poynt there are three cliffes about this poynte not ful a mile from it there is a goodly hauen called Illo in our Carde Rio de Vlâ—e and there runneth a riuer into the sea that hath good water and is also called Illo lying vnder eighteene degrees and â…“ from thence the coast lyeth southeast and southeast and by east and fiue miles a halfe further there is a poynt which the Sea men call Moro del Diauolo that is a rounde house or houel of diuels This coast is al wild and desert and with great Baâ—zen not full foure miles further from this poynt there is another riuer not verie great but good water From this riuer Southeast and Southeast and by east sayling seuen miles and a halfe there reacheth another round houel which is verie high and maketh certaine downes beyond this poynt is an Island and therabouts lieth the hauen of Arica which lieth vnder 19. degrees and 1 â— from whence the coast reacheth Southwest not ful seauen miles further there runneth into the sea a riuer called Pizagua and in the same course sayling along the coast you come to the hauen Taracapa which is 19. miles ¼ harde by Taracapa lyeth a Island little more then a mile in compasse and is distant from theÌ„ about one mile and a halfe and there maketh a strand or bay of Sand by the hauen vnder 21. degrees from Taracapa you saile along the coast south by west about foure miles and then you come to the poynte of Decacanna and 12. miles beyond this point you come to the hauen Moxillioni which lyeth vnder 22. degrees and a halfe from this hauen sailing vpwardes south southwest about 67 miles and a halfe the coast lyeth in a manner straight and therein are some poyntes creekes and sandie baies at the ende whereof there is a great creeke where there is a good hauen called Copayo lying vnder 27 degrees aboue the which lieth a smal Islande about halfe a mile from the firme land from thence beginneth the country of Chile inhabited with people being past this hauen of Copaypao a little froÌ„ thence there lieth a point which makeh another creeke wheron standeth two cliffes at the end therof is a riuer of good water called Eâ— Glasco this point lieth vnder 28. degrees â— following the coast southwest on about eight miles and a half there is another poynte which maketh a great hauen for ships but therein is neither fresh water nor wood and hard by this hauen lieth the hauen of Coquinbo betweene this and the poynt passing by seuen Islands there is a hauen vnder 29. and a half seuen miles and a halfe further following the same course there is another poynt about the which there is a great creeke or bay called Antogayo in the Carde Bahio de Tage about foure mile further lieth the Riuer Limara in the Card Lemare from this riuer you keepe the same course to another creeke or bay about 7. miles distant which hath a cliffe but no fresh water lying vnder 31. degrees and is called Choapa in our card Cupa further in the same course about 15. miles there is a verie good hauen called de Qâ—iâ—nicâ—o in our Card Cutero at Quintero it lyeth vnder 32. degrees seuen miles and a halfe further is the hauen Val Paraize and from the town of S. Iacomo by vs called Chile after the name of the country Touching this country of Chile it is very great stretching along the sea coast reaching aboue Chaicas and Peru a cold countrey which is by reason of the scituation thereof as lying by the Pole Antartico wherefore it is called Chile that is the cold countrie partly because of the great cold which men indure trauailing ouer the Andes vnto this countrey and partly because of the coldnes of the countrey it selfe although it is much like Spaine touching the temperatenesse of the aire This countrey was first discouered by Petro de Valdiuia in the yeare of our Lorde 1539. and is all inhabited in some place it is hillie and in other places plaine fieldes poynted and running very crooked by reason of the inflection and crooking of the sea Touching the rest of the scituation as I sayde before it is verie temperate hauing winter and summer as it is in Spain yet at contrary times for their summer is winter in Spaine and the Spaniards winter theyr summer The south starre that should answere and be right distant to our starre being there on land cannot be seene but onely a small white cloude betweene day and night making a smal circuite or compasse about certaine places of the Pole Antarctike There likewise you see foure starres in forme like a crosse with three other stars following them which make seauen stars like ours without any difference that may be perceiued onely that the foure which in the south make the form of a crosse stand closer together then those of our Pole Antarctico Touching their day and night they are in Chile according to the scituatioÌ„ short and long as with vs yet contrarie to ours for that our shortest dayes are theyr longest daies Their apparell and meates are altogether like those of Peru both men and women are of good complection and behauiour vpon the coast of this countrey are many riuers which by day do runne with water and by night they are without water because the snow by day melteth by reason of the heate of the sunne and so runneth downe from the hils which by night by reason of the cold aire congealeth and so runneth not In Chile and Chaicas they haue many sheepe that are like camels but that they haue not a hill vppon their backes like the Cammel The Spaniards vse them to ride vppon as being able to beare a man foure or fiue miles a day but being wearie they lie downe and will not rise whatsoeuer they doe vnto them be they neuer so much beaten and whosoeuer rideth vppon them the sheepe being wearie shee will cast vp the head towardes him that sitteth vpon her and blowe a filthie stinke into his face thereby to bee eased
miles Punta Primiera is vnder 32. degrees and lyeth from the last land called Terra do Natal 50. miles which is vnder 30. degrées and a halfe and lyeth with the land called Terra dos Fumos Northeast and Southwest and somewhat of Northeast and by North and Southwest by South and the course is 75. miles the land of Terra dos Fumos is vnder 27. degrees and a halfe and lyeth with the Cape das Correntes Northeast and Southwest and somewhat Northeast and by East and Southwest and by West the course is 95. miles Cabo das Correntes is vnder 24. degrees and a halfe and lyeth with Insulas Primieras Northeast and Southwest and somwhat Northeast and by North Southwest and by West the course is 132 miles the Insulas Primieras are scarce vnder 17. degrees and a halfe and lye with Mosambique Northeast and Southwest the course is 52. miles Mosambique is vnder 15. degrees and putting forth from Mosambique towards India you must sayle Northeast vntill you come before the Iland of Comora the course is 80. miles till you come vnder 11. degrées and then you must yet take your course Northeast vnto the Iland As Ilhas do Almirante which are vnder thrée degrées and a halfe on the south side being past those Ilands you must take your course Northeast and Northeast and by East wherewith you shal come to the Ilands As Ilhas Queimadas which are vnder 16. degrées vppon the coast of Goa or India here you must remember that at this time the streames in that countrie doe alwaies runne Northwest that is towards the Straights of Mecca or to the red Sea therefore presently when you are vnder 16. degrées to kéepe your right course you shall stil hold your course aforesaid which is Northeast and by East or somewhat more as you finde occasion your Compasse will alwaies shew you what you may doe and thus must you sayle for y e space of 200 miles towards the coast of India being sure you goe no lower then 15 degrées to auoide the drougths called Os Baixos de Pandua which lie vnder 13. degrees Northward also when you thinke to bee vppon the coast of India you must still hold aboue 16. degrées for that the streame and water vpon that coast runneth Southward commonly the wind is there out of the North Northwest and to know when you are vppon the coast of India you shal find these tokens that is 300. miles from the coast you shall see Crabbes and 50. miles from the coast you find Snakes in the water as big as Eales or Lampernes which is alwayes most certain and within 20. miles from the land you haue ground at 80. fadome and 14. or 15. miles from the shore 70. fadome you néed not feare to fall on the coast for it is faire and without danger and hath good Ankeridge and all the Ilands and Cliffes vpon the coast lie close to the Firme land whereby there is no danger and all the coast called India lie North and South and somewhat North and by West and south and by East and you must vnderstand that al the coast of India Persia Arabia the Straights of Mecca or the red sea the coast of Choramandel Seylon Bengalen Pegu Sian Malacca Camboia Cauchinchina China Iapon c. lie on the north side of the Equinoctiall line The 2. Chapter The course or viage to East India made and set downe by the Kings Pilot called Diego Astonso a Portingall SAyling from Lisbone to the Iland of Madera you must set your corse Southwest and make towards the Iland Porto Santo from thence you must passe betwéene the Iland Deserta and Madera shunning the Ilands or Cliffes called Os Saluagiens lying two miles southwestward froÌ„ the Madera for thereabouts are great drougthes which by night are very dangerous you may passe by theÌ„ on the East side so keepe your course to the Iles of Canares and hauing passed those Ilands of Canares you must set your course Southward till you come vnder 14. degrées kéeping 50. miles downwards from Cabo Verde and from thence you must set your course southwest and Southwest and by West till you come vnder 6. degrées and from thence southwest and southwest and by South so y t you hold your course 70. miles from the drougth of the ryuer called Rio Grande 80. miles from Saint Anna alwaies doing your best to get vnder the Equinoctiall line letting your course stil be somwhat about the south and if the wind be South then rather chuse the East then the West side although you be vnder the line and as long as you haue no Southeast wind hold Eastward not once approching the land called I' erra do Mallagetta neerer theÌ„ 50. or 60. miles distant and when you haue the Longitude and Latitude whereby you may know you haue passed the Cape Das Palmas then when you Lauere make short turnings I meane vnder the line or on this side therof least the streame should driue you within the Cape aforesaid but rather stricke all your Sayles then driue in there for otherwise you cannot saue your selfe neither yet get into India I haue before shewed you what you shall do being an hundred fortie myles vnder the lyne then crosse right ouer so to passe before Brasilia for that following the way and course aforesayd you can not fayle but you must néedes passe by Brasilia on the aforesaid coast of Malagetta the streame with a new Moone runneth Southwest therefore as then you shall not set your course towards Brasilia being vnder the lyne but when you set your course South West hold you as long therein as the wynd continueth good and then vse all speed and diligence as I sayd before to passe the lyne ouer the syde of Brasilia thereby to get vnder eyght degrees vnder the which lyeth the poynt called Cabo de S. Augustin and then if vnder those eight degrees you desire to leaue the sight of the land then turne not vpon the other syde but rather cast anker vntill the wynd commeth good to keepe on your course and you must vnderstand that the streame on this syde of Brasilia Cape de S Augustin and that couÌ„trey runneth to the Antillas which are the Ilands of new Spayne wherefore I thinke it not your best way to Lauere for if you do without all doubt you will be forced to turne againe vnto Poâ—tingaleâ— from thence y t shall take an other way vnto the Iland of Martin Vaas hauing past the lyne the righter you keepe this way it is the better From the Iland of Martin Vaas or from the hight vnder which they lie to the Ilandes of Tristan de Cunha hauing a fore wind you shal hold your right course without any racking or abatement of your reckening for those Ilands lie with the others all vnder one longitude and latitude with the difference that the Compasse hath in those Countries that is by the Ilandes of Tristan de
Snakes like Eales bigger driuing in the sea you must likewise vnderstand that the streame of the water at the Cape de bona Speranza till the times aforesaid doe alwaies runne from the Cape del Gado or to the cape de bona Speranza southwestward notwithstanding y t some streams runne crosse through them that is along the Islandes as I 〈…〉 Pâ—â—iera runne Westward vpon the bankes of Cabo das correntes to the Riuer called Aguada de Boapaz the streames run likewise Westwardes towardes the creeke that lyeth by the Cape das Agulhas at Agundi de San Bras the streame runneth towardes the land and vpon these coastes you shall find y t the stiffer the wind bloweth out of the West the more the water and streames runne against the wind The 5. Chapter Of the nauigation and course from Lisbone to the East Indies written set down by the Kings Pilot called Rodriges de Lagos a Portingall WHen you put out of the riuer of Lisbone to saile to the Iland called Porto Santo you must run Southwest and setting out of Lisbone you must marke the sunne by the Compasse to proue it that is in the rising and setting of the Sunne and the middle betweene her rising and setting which is North and South and as much as you finde the needle of the compasse to lie northeastward so much you must run southwarde for 〈◊〉 lyeth northeast and southwest with y e riuer of Lisbon wherewith it meeteth full and euen when you perceiue or haue a sight of Porto Santo or the Iland Madeia sayling to the Iland La Palma then you shal giue all that which the Néedle of the Compasse lyeth Northeastward and somewhat more for that it lyeth more Eastwarde then it is set downe in the sea Carde and from thence to the Island de Ferro to the which Island you shall likewise winde a little more Westward then it lyeth in the Carde and hereof fayle not as being negligent to obserue it for although you abate ten miles from your course to the Islande La Palma as it is in the Carde yet you shall go right vpon it and hauing past the Island La Palma then your best way is to run southward 30. miles from the Islands of Capo Verde alwaies giuing all that which the Néedle of the Compasse lyeth Northeastward or that you shall runne betwéene two meale tydes that the one mealetide South and the other South and by East setting your course to the South or the better to vnderstand it all that which the Néedle of the Compasse yeeldeth which may be halfe a strike and rather lesse then more and sayling from vnder 22. to 18. degrées you shall sée gréene water which commeth from the point called Capo Branco and from the créeke where the fortresse of Aâ—guâ—â—n lyeth which gréene water if you see it more then two meale tides then it is a signe y t you are near the coast but if you see but a little gréen water that is lesse then for the space of two mealetides then you are nearer to the Islandes and comming vnder ten degrees as long as you are by the coast of Guinea you shall giue the Needle of the Compasse no abatement or cutting off because the water draweth towardes the land whereby the Northeasterne drawing of the Needle of the Compasse which may bee a thirde parte of a strike agréeth with the drawing of the water and so the shippe runneth southeast and the water and streame commeth alwaies out of the south whereby it is driuen vnto the shore Sayling from 5. to 3. degrées it is good to keepe off the coast from 70. to 100. miles and not more for being more it would not be good for your voyage the reason is for y t being 100 miles or more froÌ„ the coast theÌ„ you haue but few south windes to get the coast againe but rather haue all the thunders and lightnings from the East to the South and southeast which kéepe you from getting to the shore and because those thunders come vpon you on all sides therefore it is good to runne if it be possible from â—0 to 8â— miles that is to 2â— degrees and 1 â— where you shall finde a southeast wind continuing from the 2â— of Aprill to the 15. of May but if you stay till the end of Aprill it may happen that as then you shall not haue the southeast wind before you be vnder one degrée of the Equinoctiall line The signes you haue vppon this coast of Guinea are some of the birds Garagiaus and if the thunders come out of the East being 60. or 70. miles from the shore you shal sée certaine Swallows and Duckers when you haue the southeast wind and that you make towardes the point or bough of Brasilia although in the first day of your nauigation it diminisheth not so much in the height as it should you must not be abashed thereat for that which you find to be lesse diminished is not by reason that the water or streame hindreth you as many and the most parte of men are of opinion for that the degrees hard by the Equinoctiall are greater then others that are higher as you shall well perceyue sayling to India or comming from thence with a fore wind vnder the line then the degrées diminish but a little whereby it may be assured that the small diminution or running forwarde is not by reason of the water or streame that runne to the Antilhas or foure Ilandes of the Spanish Indies comming to the line or a degrée further then in any sorte turne not againe vnto Guinea for it woulde bee against your selfe and thereby you should spende your time in vaine for that some ships that departed out of Lisbone in my company that from vnder the line they would wind towardes Guinea which I did not but contrarily made ouer to Brasilia whereby those shippes came a month later then I did into India In this bough or crossing to Brasilia you shall set your course as the wind serueth and looke well to your Compasse for that as soone as you are past the line then the Néedle of the Compasse lyeth halfe a strike and more to the Northeast and sailing from the 8. of the 18. degrée then the more the Néedle of the Compasse lyeth Northeast the further you are from the coast of Brasilia and saie that you lay East and West with Cape S. Augusten and that the Néedle of the Compasse should yéelde two third partes of a strike Northeastwarde then you are 150. miles from it to seaward in which is thus to be vnderstoode that if the Compasse were made in Portingall there lay halfe a strike Northeastward if it bee good and true it will do the same vpon the coast of Brasilia being East and west with the Abrolhos and about 170 or 200. miles from it then the Néedle of the compasse shal lie a whole strike or somewhat more Northeastward for that the Meridian of
of the Earle Don Luis de Tayde I passed 20. miles and more from the droughts towardes the coast of Soffala and saw not one birde but the day before I had séene ten or twelue of the birdes called Alcatrases and as soone as you perceiue the signes aforesaid then run no further North or North and by East vntill you bee vnder 19. degrées and ¼ vnder the which heights y e Islands As Ylhas Prinneras doe lie and somewhat more to the West for that holding your course Northeast the streame runneth so fast that you should presently fall vppon the bankes of Soffala and if you chance to sée the Ylhas Prinneras trust not vnder that course for although you passe by them East Northeast yet it is false because the first and last of them lie East and West one against the other till you come to a drie sand called A Coroa de Sanguase that is the Crowne of Sangase then you runne by the Islandes of Angoxas East Northeast and West southwest from this Crowne of Sangase to Mosambique you runne along the coast Northeast and Southwest From thence to Mosambique are some rodes or ankering places from 18. to fiue and twentie fadome déepe but my opinion is if it be possible that it were better not to anker because that vppon that coast there are many cliffes and stormes which are oftentimes not séene if the water breake not vpon them The signes that are found within 14 miles from Mosambique is a great thicke land and a mile and a halfe from the coast lyeth a banke where you passe ouer with fifteene fadome water the land aforesaid is called Maginquale and vpon it along by the shore there are some trees like Pine-apple trees from thence to Mosambique are twelue miles and to Mocango 5. miles hauing all that way the aforesaid trees and sometimes the water breaketh about a mile from the shore Now to put into Mosambique you must take your course in the middle way betweene the Iland S. George and the droughtes of Canaciera where you shal find 7.8 and sometimes 9. fadome when it is high water and being as farre as the Iland so that in your sight the Iland of Saint George and that of Saint Iames are all one then you are right against the Islandes and from thence putting in you shall set your course right vpon the strand of S. Anthonio in the Iland of Mosambique vntil you be in a good depth which shal be a channel stretching North and South and comming with the same course to twelue fadome deepe then winde Northwarde alwaies keeping of the point called Noâ—â—a Senhora do Baluarte which is a Church that standeth vppon the highest part of the Iland vppon the water without the fortresse of Mosambique and also from the sandes called Cabaciera which lyeth on the other side right ouer against Mosambique This Bay of Mosambique lyeth scarce vnder 15. degrees in this hauen of Mosambique the Compasse windeth not a strike Northwestward and from thence to the a Ilha do Comoro you must run northeast which Iland lyeth vnder 11. degrees 1 â— that is in the end of Southwest the course from this Island or to the line is Northeast and northeast and by east from hence to the line certaine nightes you shall see shyning or white water till you come to three or foure degrées and shall haue the wind Southeast and from thence forwarde you shall beginne to haue it Southwest and south so you begin to come from India in the winter time from the Equinoctiall line or to the height of Coa that is vnder 15. degrées and 1 â— you must runne East Northeast and in this way the Compasse will lie a strike and a halfe Northwestwarde and as much as it lyeth Northwestwarde must be sayled north-Eastward vnto the afore said height of Goa the signes you alwaies find in this way are alwaies about ten degrées in the night time you haue white and shining water and from those ten degrees to the coast of India sometimes you see many birdes that come from the shore that is from the coast of Arabia as Quartelles and other such like smal birds and 180. or two hundred myles from the coast of India then the Compasse beginneth to lessen in the Northwest for that in the hauen of Goa it lyeth but one strike to the Northwest and 1 â— part and rather lesse then more The 6. Chapter To sayle from Goa to Cochin FRom Goa to Batecola you must saile two or three miles from the land from twentie to fiue and twentie sadom deep for it is deeper there then neerer to Cochin for about halfe a mile from the Islande of Batecola you finde sixe and twentie fadome deepe from thence it is good to runne Southeast and Southeast and by South to the fortresse of Barcelor and to know if you be by Barcelor or in the height thereof you must vnderstand that there are high hils which beginne at Batecola and continue to Barcelor and right aboue Barcelor there is a round houell like darke miste or clowde which standeth in the end of y e high hilles on the South side of Batecola to this hauen it is foure or fiue miles and halfe a mile from the shore it is all stonie By Barcelor you may anker at ten fadome deepe about a mile and a halfe from the shore and desiring to sayle vnto Cochin you must holde your course South southwest and somewhat more into the sea as the winde will permit you for there are other Islandes and cliffes being where you may passe by as I saide before at fourteen fadome water it is a good course to keep at sixteene fadome from those Ilands three or foure miles forwarde there are nothing but Ilandes and cliffes which hauing past you come to see the Fort of Mangalor as you passe by the shore at fifteene fadome deepe from thence you sayle to the Fortresse of Cananor from Cananor to the Islandes as Ilhas Cagidar which is â— miles let your course here be south southeast at 18. fadom deep from the Islands of Cagadas to Chale are 7. miles y e course is south southeast 18 fadome deepe from Chale to Panane are 9. miles in the same course and from Panane to Cochiin are 10. miles the course beeing south southeast and at twelue ten fadome deepe which is a good way The 17. Chapter The course or Nauigation from Cochin to Portingall written by the said Rodriâ— de Ligos THe towne of Cochiin lieth vnder nine degrees and â— â— rather lesse than more and departing out of Cochiin towards Portingall you must hold your course West and as much Frorth till you come â— miles from Cochiin and being there you shall so set your course that as you passe through the Islandes of Maldina and Maâ—ale you may come to the height of 8. or eight degrees and not to fall vppon anie Islands although the sea card in this course hath certaine Islandes yet
halfe it is a small ryuer beeing at high water within the Hauen but thrée Fadome déepe and for a marke hath a high trée standing on the South side and along the shore some Sandie dounes which in sight shew like Ilands without trées on the North side lie certaine shallowes you enter into the Hauen Northwest on that is on the side where the trées stand and there as you are within the point you may Anker at fiue and sixe fadome déepe Quiloan or Quiloane lyeth vnder 20. degrées and a halfe and on the South side hath a high Palme trée and the land on the same side is like a hooke and if you desire to put into Quiloane although it were with a shippe of foure hundred tunnes you may well doe it being high water but you must take heede of a drougth lying thrée myles from the Hauen This Hauen at high water is fiue Fadome déepe and when you are in hard by the point of the ryuer you find fiue or sixe Fadome water with muddie ground you enter therein West Southwest and Southwest and by West and the drougthes aforesaide lie East Southeast and West Southwest like Quiloane From Mataca or Mâ—nemone to Quiloane you shall see land at thirteene or fourteen fadome déepe and beeing vnder 21 degrees and 60 fadome deepe then you shall be fifteen myles from the land shall find Corall vpon the ground and from thence inward small sands sayling from Quiloane to Soffala you must runne North and north and by East without the poynt or hooke til you be at 12 or 13 fadome déepe and till you sée Soffala and if you desire to stay there then runne till you be vnder 6. or 7. fadome which is 6. or 7. miles from the land the Hauen of Soffala changeth euerie yeare therefore you can not put into it without one of the countrie Pilots and it hath for a marke a companie of palme trees standing together on the north side sailing froÌ„ thence to Mosambique you must runne East till you come to fourty fadome water and from thence East north east running fiftéene or sixtéene myles from the Ilandes Primeiras you shall alwaies in these countries all along the coast find smal thinne blacke sand mixed with the earth although you sayle close in sight of the land Soffala lieth vnder twentie degrees and the Hauen called Bango vnder nyntéene and ½ and the riuer of Cuama vnder eightéene and â— 4 and you runne along the Coast from Soffala to Cuama North East and South West beeing thirtie myles and if you haue occasion to enter into the Riuer of Cuama to take in fresh water you must enter with a small Boate for within it is all fresh water from Cuama to the Ilandes of Primeiras you runne along the coast east and West and somewhat East and by north and West and by South There are two sights of land and beeing vnder eighteene degrees you finde therne fyue fadome deepe in sight of land for the Bankes in those Countries are verie small the course is fiftie miles The Riuer called Dos Bonis Sinais or of good tokens lyeth vnder seuentéene degrees and ¾ and hath these markes that is vppon the North east syde at the mouth of the Hauen there standeth an heap of trées and on the south syde it hath a sandie strand and vppon the furthest poynt outwardes there is a sand Hill or Downes which farre off sheweth like an Iland the entrie is on the South West syde along by the sand the Hauen at the mouth with lowe water is two fadome and beeing within it you may ly at 6. or 7. fadome water you can not see the entrie as you are without but on the North West syde you see the begynning of the land that hath a heape of trees standing vppon it which a farre off showe like the Maste of a shippe and the neerer you drawe to the land the lesse you see thereof so that beeing in the Riuer you see nothing at all because it is hindered by the other branches The Channell of the Ilandes Primenas and of the Ilandes of Angoxas are all one and you sayle East North east and West south west and it is 30 myles with tenne or twelue fadome deepe and neerer to the Ilandes then to the firme land and if you will stay by one of these Ilandes with a West wind you may freelie inough goe close vnto it for it is deepe and passing good ground The first of y e Ilands of Primeiras lyeth vnder 17 degrees ½ if you desire to run betwéene them then runne Southwest from the Iland and you shall freelie enter the chanell without feare for it is déepe inough for the drougthes lye a myle and a half distant from the Iland and if you desire to put in there with a west wind then goe close to the Iland running to the middle therof towards the south syde where you may anker within the length of a great shot at 6 or 7 fadome déepe and desiring to passe either in or out betwéene the droughtes which lie Northeast you may very well doe it and though you beare all your sayles kéeping alwaies néerer the sand of the Iland then to the droughthes in the middle Iland for it is all one vpoÌ„ what syde of the Iland you sayle for there is no cause of feare but onlie where you sée the water breake and desiring to anker by the middle Iland you may fréely doe it and that close by it for it is 12 fadome déepe at low water with a West wind but not with an East wind in the middle way on that side which lyeth against the firme land there standeth a heape of trees by the which you shall find a lake of fresh water to serue you if necessitie requireth and lyeth a little inward from the strand and if you can not well goe farre inward to the lake doe but digge in the strand and you shall presentie find fresh water but it must be when it is an east wind for with a West wind the water striketh with so great a force vpon the shore that you are not able to stay there with your boate The middle Iland which lyeth North east hath no passage at all to the sea but from thence to the drouthes called Acoroa de S. Antonio are seuen miles and to the first Iland of Angoxa fyue miles and is all one course with the Ilandes you may fréelie passe by the land with what shippe so euer you will for it is déepe inough all the Ilandes of Angoxas haue thorow fares one running through the other al déep and good ground so that there is betwéene the Ilandes and the firme land at the least eight fadome déepe but you must alwaies sayle néerer the firme land then the Ilandes There lyeth a sandie drougth betwéene the Iland of Angoxa which likewise is to bee sayled on both sides These Ilandes of Angoxas are 4 and betwéen the two middle
Ilandes ly the aforesaid sand drougthes wherfore I wish you not to go too néere them for they are dangerous There lieth a sand drougth 4. miles from the first Iland of Angoxa towardes Mosambique which euerie springtide is couered with the sea hauing other sandes round about it that are alwaies couered with the sea therefore I wish you to take héed of them you may from thence runne along the shore where it is déepe water from these drougthes 14 or 15 miles towardes Mosambique there is a haueÌ„ called Os Coaraias that is the Corales from the which hauen about a mile and a half into the sea lieth a clif which is very dangerous and which a man can hardly shunne till he be almost vpon it and with a Springtide the water breaketh not ouer it wherefore you must take héed vnto it for many shippes haue striken vpon it and Don Ioan Periera fell vpon it when you passe it you must put 3 miles from it into y e séa North east northeast by East being by night but by day you may sayl w t more securitie and looke about you yet nothing going neerer to the shore then 25 fadome déepe in this course you shall passe by the drouthes of Musicatte and following your course North east you shall come right vpon the Ilands of Mosambique if you haue occasion to anker before you come to Musicatte then keepe off from the cliffe towards the land til you be at 15 fadome and there you may anker for it is good grouÌ„d yet but in few places only vnder the point of Musicatte at 20 fadome and more you shall haue faire ground the point of Musicatte lieth with the Ilands of Angoxas North east and South west being 18 miles distant from theÌ„ce to Mosambique you runne North east along the coast the East side of the Iland Premeira lyeth with the drongthes Northeast South west and some what North east and by East and South west and by West the land of the Ilandes Premeiras on the side of Mosambique lyeth vnder 16 degrees and and ¾ you runne along by those Ilands and sands East and West and East by North and West by south and if there you find your self to bee inwards at 12 or 13 foote and lesse within a length of a great shot of the Ilands yet bee not abashed but beware of the outside which is full of stones and other filth whereby no meanes you can anker as being nothing but wood stonâ— if you chance to be in the middle way betwéene the Ilands the drougths with an East wind then you must passe in out betweene the first Iland the drougth which Iland lyeth in middle way from the Ilands Premieras on the side of Soâ—â—ala as also from the third Iland towardes Mosambique running along the West side at 7.10 12 fadome déepe the other drougthes lie in the middle way vnder the stone cliffes therefore you néed not feare them but betwéene the Iland from the trees that are vpon the East side you can by no meanes passe for it is all ouer nothing but droughthes and shallowes From the South west side of these Ilands Premieras and Northeast and south west with the first Iland 7 miles from it there lyeth a sand drougth of foure fadome déepe hoth in leÌ„gth breadth the cariage of a great shotte in length tenne or twelue myles from the Ilands Premieras lieth the Riuer Quilimani where the Coast reacheth East and West and somewhat East by North and West and by south and you shall find 6 or 7 fadome déepe within three miles of the land where you find no other drougthes then that of Quilimani which you must take héed of for they reach 6. or 7. miles into the sea and if you find your self inwards from Cauo das Correntes you may at all times anker for it is good ground because you are vpon the banks and haue no cause to feare because the wind blowing from the land wil alwaies helpe you whereby you may put into the sea as you thinke good The 11. Chapter The course from India to Porto Piqueno de S. Iago that is the smal hauen of S. Iacob which is the mouth of the Riuer Ganges lying in the kingdome of Bengala HE that desireth to sayle from India to Poâ—to Piqueno or the small hauen lying in BeÌ„gala I mean outward about the Iland of Seylon he must set sayle out of the Hauen of Cochiin betweene the which and the 20. of Aprill holding his course along the shore to a place called Briniao which lieth vpon the Cape or poynt of Comoriin that is the furthest poynt or end of the Indian coast southwestward from thence holding his course south till he be vnder 6 degrées ¾ and from thence South east to 5 degrées and â…” and being ther he must runne East till hee seeth the Iland of Seylon for the point of Seylon called A Ponte de Gualla that is the poynt of the Galley is the farthest land from thence lying in the south vnder 6 degrees therefore if you hold your course East till you be vnder 5 degrees and â…” you can not fayle to see the land of the Iland Seylon this way and course you must alwaies hold setting out of Cochâ—â— from the 10. of Aprill to the 20. of the same as I sayd before for yf you depart later from thence you must stay longer because as then the wind beginneth to blow stifly out of the South at other tymes hauing the wind Southwest and Northwest blowing verie strong and blustering wheÌ„ you sée the Iland Seylon you shall sayle along the coast East and West and somewhat East by North and West and by south to the first drougth lying scarse vnder 6. degrees and the other drougths ly farther vnder 6 degr ½ 7 miles distant one from the other in the same course of East and West and East and by North and West and by south from the point A Punta de Gualla to the first drougth are almost 28 miles Beeing 10 or 15 myles beyond the drougthes you shall sayle Northeast till you bee vnder 16 degrees and ½ from thence running North whereby you shall come to the Coast of the firme land about tenne or twelue myles from the land called O pagode de Iorganatte that is the Idole or Idoles Temple of Iorganatte which is a verie good course for this voyage when you perceiue this land which hath certaine high Hilles you shall see some round Houels that are rounder and higher then the Hilles standing vppon them called Palur by the which you shall passe along Northeast and Southwest and somewhat northeast and by East and Southwest and by south vntill you come to the thinne and low land and passing by it you shall come to a Riuer which hath for a marke a flat high field of sand and an other plaine with a houell hauing on the one side somewhat
same course from India to Porto Piqueno or the small Hauen of Bengalen set downe by an other Pilot large and better described with the whole situation and course thereof SAyling from the coast of India to the hauen called Porto Piqueno in the kingdom of Bengalen outward about the Ilande of Zeylon you shall take your course along the coast of India till you come to sée Briniaon lying by the Cape de Comorin which is the furthest point of the land of India from thence taking your way crosse ouer for from thence forward it is a good countrie and make the shortest crosse you can thereby to goe sure and not to fall inwards or betwéene the Iland of Zeylon and when you sée Barreias which are the Dounes of Briniaon aforesaid then you shal sayle Southward running so at the least fiftéene or twentie myles and from thence forward you shall shorten your way as you thinke best to get vnder fiue degrées and being there you shall sayle Eastwarde as much as you thinke conuenient that you may be assured to passe the point of Gualle which is the furthest point of the Iland of Zeylon on the Southwest side lying vnder sixe degrees when you thinke you are at the point de Gualle to be assured thereof make towards the Iland to know it before you come to the drougths betwéene Tanadare which is fyue myles from Punta de Gualla and the first drouth where commonlie all the shippes know the land such I say as wee sayle to Bengalen or to any of the Hauens thereof as Porto Piqueno or Porto Grande that is the small or the great Hauen where the Portingalles doe traffique and hauing sight of the land of the sayd countrie goe as close vnto it as you will but not passing aboue twelue fadome déepe towards the land because there ly certaine cliffes along the shore whereof we know not certainely the danger besides the sandes betwéene the which and the land you may passe through as hereafter shal be shewed and sayling thus as I haue sayd along the shore you must vnderstand that the land of Tanadare is for the space of fyue myles to the Drougthes on the sea syde altogether lowe land and when you are further to landward in you begin to see certaine hilles that is thrée great hilles right against it and then you shall presently sée the first drougth betwéene the which and the lād you may well passe for that most of the ships that goe and come by the Iland run through that way in the middle way you shall finde betwéene it and the land 11. and 12. fadome déepe of faire in some places stony ground and you néed not feare any thing but onelie that you see before your eyes This first drougth or sand lieth full vnder 6 degrées and ½ and right against it vpon the land you see a houell standing alone and no more in all that country to be séene 6 miles further from that first great drougth there lieth an other small drougth which is distant Northeast Southwest and somewhat northeast and by East and southwest and by West this small drought lieth vnder 6 degrées and ¼ about 2 miles from the land and if you desire to runne betwéene it and the land you may well doe it for it is ◠or 6 fadome déepe at low water with sandie ground which I know by those that haue passed that way aboue 30. tymes as well going as comming backe again but if your ship be great then it is better to sayle about further into the sea Those drougths or sandes béeing past then runne along by the land and neuer put from it for it is your best course to goe close by it and passing by the Iland of the hilles and the high land you shall see a high sharpe Hill among others from whence there runneth a point that lieth out towardes the Southwest This hill is called O Capello de Frade that is the Fryers coule and lieth full vnder 8 degrées I set not downe the course you must commonlie vse to take along the Coast to the said Capello de Frade because you come vpon no direct line this fryers coule maketh a point of lād frō y e whence there runneth a Riffe about halfe a mile into the sea whereon in some places you may see the water breake from this point to Trinquanamale are 17. miles and you run by the coast north and south which is all low land with a bankie ground and from thence you shall see no land but the land that lieth inward fiue miles Before you come to Trinquanamale you finde a small riuer Trinquanamale is a great hauen beeing in the entrey more then 3. miles in bredth all low land but very déepe round about he that will anker therein may lie vnder certaine Ilands and inward it maketh a riuer that runneth to Seyta vaqua the other to it is all low land to know Trinquanamale a farre off at the mouth thereof on the north side lieth a yellow Sandie Downe and hath vpon one of the hookes or pointes two long hilles rising vp and reaching inwardes to the coūtrie and no other high land neither behinde them nor before thē in all that coast comming by Trinquanamale and hauing knowne it you must then presently crosse ouer for there it is best to follow your course and from thence you must runne North and North and by east alwaies reckning the declining or winding of the compasse and if it be in the monsons of the winds in the month of August then you shall sayle full north because as then the streame runneth very strōg into the sea and this course you shall hold till you come vnder 17. degrees which is the heigth of the point called a Punta de Guado variin lying on the coast of Choramandel which is the beginning of the kingdome of Orixa and being vnder 17. degrees from thence you shall put to the coast of the Firme land to make a good voiage alwaies taking care not to run aboue 19. degrées ½ without séeing land because that vnder 19. degrées there lieth a riuer called Puacota frō the mouth whereof 3. miles into the sea there lieth a rocke or stonie cliffe of the length of a ship which may easily be seene for it lieth aboue the water you may passe betwéene it and the land without danger of any thing but only that which you sée before your eyes all this coast from the point of Guadovariin is altogether great thicke land and hilles which may bee séene far off from the riuer of Puacota to another riuer called Paluor or Palura are 12. miles and you runne by the coast Northeast and Southwest aboue this riuer of Palura there lieth a verie high hill called a Seira de Palura that is the hill of Palura which is the highest hill in all that coast This riuer lieth full vnder 19. degrees and ½ from this riuer to the point called a Derradeira
to certaine high Beecken or downe falles of water you may haue wood to burne and from those Beeckens you must crosse ouer on the other side of Guijnette where you shall presentlie sée 5. or 6. trées higher then the rest vntill you be close to the other side Those trées stand at the mouth of the riuer Chandequā on the east side the depthes you shall finde vppon those bankes are 2. ½ and thrée fadome déepe till you be on the other side for there you finde manie depthes from this place forward you néede no other aduise for the Fisher men as then will bring you where you should bee you shall passe ouer the water with halfe flood but I aduise you once againe that if you saile in the morning by the aforesaid riuer of Cayegare then runne along the coast till you come to the point das Palmerias and from thence to 17. fadome deepe frō thence holding your course northwest and northwest and by north this way must be folowed with a Compasse that yeeldeth one strike till you come to 12. fadome deepe and then running the same course till you come to 4. and three fadome and ½ wherewith if it bee cleare weather you shall presentlie see the lād of Orixa but if it be darke and mistie weather then runne no more towards the land keeping still at 4. and 3. fadome and ½ runrunning East for the leade and the depthes will bring you well in and take héede you come not into many depthes kéeping still as I saide before at the small depthes and if it bee night being at seuentéene fadome then runne towards the 2. Ilands and see you anker not for it is badde ankering there and passing by the aforesaide Punta das Palmeiras running in by night you shal then not passe aboue 7. or 8. fadome vntill it be day wherewith as then you may go in if you chance to be there with a small shippe then keepe at 2. and 2. fadome and ½ till you be in the sight of the riffe of Orixa and when you begin to be right against it then runne within the length of a great shot neere vnto for it is deepe enough and from the side of Orixa it is all banks and shallow ground The riffe aforesaid shall bee on your right hande that is to seaward from you and from thence you must make right with the Island A Ylha dos Gallos or if you will to the point of the Riuer Angelijn where you may freely sayle for there you shall find two and a halfe and thrée fadome déepe but it must bee with a small ship as I said before The 13. Chapter The course from India to the hauen of Aracan which is the same way that you hold to Porto Grande or the great hauen lying in the countrie of Bengalen SAyling from India or Cochijn to the hauen of Aracan you must holde your course to the Islande of Seylon in manner aforesaid as in the description of the course to Porto Pequeno running so to the pointe or ende of the sandes or droughtes lying full vnder 6. degrées and vppon the point of the lande which runneth East and West comming by this point or hooke you shall from thence put off from the land running 7. or 8. miles Northeastward to come out vnder the Islande and then let your course be Northeast and Northeast by North till you be vnder 12. degrées and that Manacosta be southwest from you and from thence you shall runne Northeast till you be almost vnder 20. degrées which is the height of Aracan and if then you sée no land you shall runne East vnto Aracan vnder the same height of 20. degrées thrée or four miles from the land there lyeth a riffe whervpon the water breaketh and at low water is vncouered it is in greatnesse and length about the length of seuen ships both waies and when you sée it you must take heed of it and goe no nearer then the shotte of a great peece The hauen of Aracan lyeth vnder 20. degrees and being fiue or sixe miles to seawarde from it you shall there find twentie fadome deepe sandie grounde and being at 19. degrees and ½ toward the lande you shall find deepe muddie ground at the least 6 miles from the shore and being but three or four miles from the land thirtie fadome déepe muddy ground you must be careful at 19 degrees and ½ not to runne in with the lande but do as I said before The 14. Chapter The course from India to the hauen of Martauan lying in the kingdome of Pegu with the situation of the coastes SAyling from India to Martauan or to y e kingdome of Pegu you shall hold your course till you be past the Island of Seylon as they doe that saile to Bengalen and being about the Island you shal make to the Ilands called As Ylhas d' Andemaon whereof the first Iland lyeth south vnder 11. degrées and the furthest land in the North vnder 14. degrées you runne on the East side of them Northeast and Southwest from the Ilands d' Andemaon to the firme lande are aboue 60. miles and running to Andemaon you shall vse all the meanes you can to passe by them vpon the North side and being past you must as I said before make towardes Martauan which lyeth vnder 16. degrees and when you are at 14. degrées you shall make with the lande but better at 13. degrees because of the creeke or winding in of Martauan where you finde a very strong streame alwayes drawing Northwest and if you make with the lande being at 14. degrees you shall sée many Islands which you may freely passe close by for it is all ouer very deepe for there it is 12. and 13. déepe muddie ground close by the shore besides the Island Pulo Comudo which is about 6. or 7. miles from the hauen of Martauan betweene this Island and the firme lande there lyeth many riffes notwithstanding if you chance to fall betwéene those Islandes you shall make towardes the side of the Islande but not too close where you shall find a channell of thrée fadome deep and on the side of the firme land you haue many sands and shallowes passing from thence to the hauen of Martauan being past that Iland you shall passe along the shore where you shall see certaine cliffes lying towards the sea which shew like Almadias which are Indian Scutes by them vsed in y e riuers which cliffes lie about 2 miles from Pulo Comudo towardes Martauan and right ouer against these cliffes you haue on the firme lande a point or hooke of high land and on the North side of this point there lyeth a sandie strand vpon the low land this land belongeth to Xemiin Vegarum that is in Pegu spéech the Lord of Vegarum for Xemiin is Lord and Vegarum the name of the land from thence Northward the land is high in some places hauing créekes cliffes and Islandes before you come to the
hauen of Martauan there is a white houell or land that serueth for a marke hauing close by it two Palme trees and about two miles further you shall see a thicke top of lande vppon the end whereof towardes the sea lyeth an Iland which cannot be séen nor discerned from the land till you be right against it and that you haue discouered the Riuer within where the hauen of Martauan lyeth and being past this Iland you shall sée a white houel which lyeth likewise on the South side within the Iland there is a lake that hath good fish and before you come to the hauen comming from the Ilande of Comudo about a mile or a mile and a halfe to seawarde from the land you shall see a round Islande full of bushes called A Ilhas de Cebollas that is the Island of Onions by the which Island on the south side thereof there lyeth a cliffe whereon you sée the sea breake from this Island to the hauen of Martauan there are about two miles comming from Pulo Comudo you must put off from it towards the land holding your course as aforesaid as not hauing any cause of feare but onely of that which you sée before your eyes you must likewise vnderstande that from the Islande Das Cebollas forward towards the North there is no other Ilands nor cliffes which is a verie good marke of this creeke for that being on this side thereof you are no sooner past one Iland but you see another but from thence forward you see not any as I said before but you must bee sure not to passe beyond the hauen of Martauan for that being at twelue fadome not long after you should fal vpon the drought This hauen of Martauan is about a mile or a half and a half broad hauing on the North side a low flat land euen with the sea and is an Iland called Momua you may see it as you passe along the shore from Pulo Comuda towardes the hauen you must still keepe at twelue fadome and comming to 8. or 9. fadome then you shall anker for then you are in the hauen and put no neerer to the shore neither runne not further from the creeke to the banke for then you shall find lesse depth this riuer of Martauan runneth Northeast Southwest both out and in but you may not enter therein without a Pilot for that within the Riuer vpon the East side it hath a stone cliffe or rock which draweth the water vnto it therefore you cannot enter without a Pilot also in the entrie of this riuer and hauen on the right hand there lyeth a sandie banke where in the middle way there runneth a channell of sixe or seuen fadome deepe which you shal knowe by this that is in the deepest parte thereof it hath much fish which you may see and this hauen of Martauan lyeth vnder 16. degrees and ◠4 and the towne of Martauan vnder sixteene degrees vpon the furthest end of the Iland of Andeman on the North side there lyeth two Ilands betweene the which and the Iland of Andeman you may safelie passe also on the furthest point of the South side of the Ilande of Andeman lying vnder 11. degrees there lyeth some Ilandes and from thence to the Ilandes of As Ilhas de Nicobar southwarde there reacheth an Iland also as you put off from the Ilandes of Andeman towardes the coast meeting with some gatheringes of water you neede not feare them for it is nothing but the water it selfe without any sands although there lyeth some vpon the coast there lyeth onely in the middle way an Ilande which the inhabitantes call Viacondam which is a small Iland hauing faire ground round about it but very little fresh water and nothing els but Pine trees wherefore you neede not go into it The 15. Chapter The course from Cochiin in India to Malacca HE that will saile to Malacca in the great Monson which is the principall time when the windes serue to go thether in the Month of Aprill then to make a good voyage you must set saile from Cochiin vppon the sixe and twentith of Aprill and being out of the hauen you must hold your course southward till you be vnder 7. degrées and from thence south southeast to 6. degrees and being vnder that height then you shall runne Southeast almost to fiue degrées and from thence East vntill you are past the Ilande of Seylon and being there you shall keepe on your course till you be vnder 5. and ⅓ and 5. degrees and ◠from thence you shall make towardes the Ilands of Gomespola which lie vnder 6. degrées by the point of Achiin in the Ilande Sumatra and comming to the Iland of Gomespola if you feare not the Acherins which are subiects to the kingdom of Acheiin in the Ilande of Sumatra and deadly enemies to the Portingals then take your course along by the Iland of Sumatra to the Cape called Taniamburo lying on the same coast of the Iland almost 30. miles from the Ilandes of Gomespola and from thence you shall take your course towardes the coast of Malacca running as farre to loofewarde as possible you may to discouer Pulo Sambilao which is an Ilande lying close vpon the coast vnder 4. degrées and ⅔ and distant from Malacca 40. miles Northwest and by North for that such as discouer and come to this Iland maketh a quicke voyage to Malacca and those that fall to leeward towardes Pulo Pinan which is an other Iland vnder fiue degrées and ½ lying with Pulo Sambilao North and by West 12. miles neere Pulo Batun there is another Iland lying Northwest and by North from Pulo Pinaio ten miles vnder 6. deg might peraduenture find Southeast windes which blow much on that coast therefore he that goeth late to saile hath a long voyage wherefore it is best to depart earlie from Cochiin to make a better voyage The 16. Chapter An other larger descriptiō of the course to saile from Goa in India to Malacca with the description of the coasts SVch as desire to saile from Goa or out of India to Malacca must put 20. miles into the sea that he may saile without y e Ilande of Seylon vnto the Ilandes called As Ilhas de Nicobar through the middle of the channell which lyeth vnder 7. degrees and ½ and in that countrey you must looke to the streame because with a west wind they run towards the Gulfe of Bengalen and with an East wind into the sea about 20. or 30. miles frō the Ilandes there is such a concourse breaking of water and streames as if there were sands Whē you com to y e middle of y e Ilands of Nicobar ther you find a channel lying vnder 6. degrees and ½ the Ilands being distant one from the other about a mile and a halfe where you may passe through without feare as hauing nothing to fear but y t you sée before you the depth you find there is 12.
you shall haue Pulo Sambilao right against it so you fall not from the Islandes towards Samatra holding your course as aforesaide towardes Pulo Sambilao without feare because the monson or time of the windes do as then blow from the land into the Sea and if herein you chaunce to bee negligent you shall doe your selfe great hurt and procure great hinderance in your Voyage the depthes and ground that you finde from the Island of d'Aru to Pulo Sambilao and from 27. to 40. fadome muddie ground and in some places sand and passing by the Iland of d'Aru then you find from 40. to 50. fadome déepe from the Islandes of Pulo Sambilao to th Islands of Pulo Pinao you shall kéepe along by the shore not once putting from it shunning a banke lying right ouer against the land called Barus betwéene Pulo Sambilao and Pulo Pinao which is muddie ground and it is saide that there you haue thrée fadome water you shall still vse your lead and runne not nearer then fiftéene fadome to the land nor further then thirtie fadome to Sea ward because diuers times there commeth great blasts out of the hilles of Queda from Northeast and north northeast and sometimes sharper many times runne further from the coast as I said before and so you shall holde your course without danger from the coast of the Iland Samatra where in the monson you haue greatest cause to feare and therefore you shall hold your course without putting from the land till you come to the Island of Pulo Pinao and being by them or at the heigth and length of them and hauing the monson that is the winde which as then bloweth and is good for you you may then put from the land doing your best to kéepe too loofeward off Pulo Pera which is a good course but if the winde serue you to make towards Pulo Batum it is better for from this place you must take your course towards the channell vnder 7. degrées and ½ but hauing the monson as aforesaid although it be somewhat backeward you shall loose your time for the monson at the first is sometimes sharpe and after that beginneth to be larger as you turne or winde from the land or coast With this course you shall runne to the channell and passe it vnder seauen degrées and ◠2 and before you come vnder seauen degrées and 1 2 to seauen and 2 ◠or lesse hauing past the Ilands you shall alwaies kéepe vnder the aforesaide seauen degrees and ½ because in that gulfe or countrie many times the winde is north and north Northeast in your course towards the Island of Seylon you shall runne vnder seauen degrees and ½ and vnder seauen degrees with the which you shall come to the Island of Seylon to a place called Matecalou which lieth too loofeward off the sands there you haue no ground but within two miles of the land you must likewise vnderstand that from the middle of the Gulfe to the Island of Seylon the water and the streames in this time of monson runne outward into the sea likewise the compasse yéeldeth more to the Northwest whereunto you must haue great regard and béeing at the Island Seylon hauing it in sight you shall not loose it but kéep your ground from thirtie fadome looking well before you and taking heede of the droughtes that are very dangerous the foremost of them béeing of stone Cliffes the length of a Galley without any other then only those you sée to fourtéene and sixtéene fadome and in the halfe way or middle thereof and the land you shall finde the depth aforesaid and another Sand that lyeth behind you which is the first and cannot bee séene but that the Sea breaketh vppon it and they say you may passe with small Shippes betweene it and the land béeing foure fadome déepe but I thinke it is better to put from it to sea ward it is from thence to the land a mile and you may goe neare it at sixtéene eightéene fadome and if you fall vppon it by night you must saile onlie with your Foukesayle when you are in sight of vnknowne land kéeping at eightéene fadome neare the land and not aboue thirtie fadome to Seaward from this sand you shall runne along y e coast at fiftéene sixtéene twentie twentie fiue and thirtie fadome but in such manner that you loose not ground for you may haue a Calme and so by that loosing of ground the water and streames might driue you to the Islandes of Maldiua wherefore you must haue good regard vntill you come to Negumbo which is in the Island of Seylon and from thence it is good to crosse ouer to the Firme land and comming to Negumbo you shall not put off from the land vnlesse it bee from the fiftéene of Februarie for from that time forwardes then the streame and waters beginne againe to runne inwardes and being from the fiftéene of Februarie forwardes you may put from the shore that is from the Island of Verberyn which lyeth close vppon the Coast of Seylon to the Portingales Fort called Columbo as it falleth out best for you least it happen to you as it hath done to many other shippes that for want of care were driuen to the Ilands of Maldyua from this last sand to Tanadare and to the poynt called A Punta de Gualla along the Coast and sea side the Countrie is almost all of one higth and right ouer against the sandes aforesaid inwards to the land you see 3 high trees and from thēce to Tanadare you haue sandie strands and you may still runne along the shore without feare till you sée Tanadare which is verie well knowne and deceaue not your self for that outwardlie it sheweth like Punta de Gualla but the markes and right tokens thereof are that it hath a thyn point of land striking out in forme lyke a tongue with a stone riffe hanging from it towards the sea as farre as you may throw a stone this point of land or tongue striking out is full of Indian Palme trees which shew verie faire and a myle or two before you come at it this poynt or tongue of land appeareth beyond the Palme trees further into the sea but the Palme trees are thicke and shew verie faire and before you come to Tanadare you haue two or three sandie bayes not necessarie to be described and whē you come right against the wood or bushe of Palme trees in the middle thereof you shall see a white Pagode that is a Temple of the Indians Idoles from this Pagode towardes the North syde you shall see certaine downes of white and redde earth which are good markes and the right knowledge of that Countrey you must not goe too close vnto the shore for it hath a small sand stretching into the sea but not farre when you see the downes aforesayd then you must runne at eyghtéene twentie fadome déepe for that if the wind beginneth to calme and your ground to
stretching southward the other lieth in the South the shot of a gret péece from the issuing of the land of the straight reaching Eastward so y t they make a crosse one throgh the other and betwéen those two Riffes the chanel runneth and with the ebbe of a spring tide you may sée them the chanel y t runneth betwene thē both hath scarce 4. fadome deepe the ground within y e chanel is muddie without sand This I haue particularly noted vnto you for their instructions y t hereafter shal passe through that way for that the discriptions of the Nauigation or course thereof heretofore written set downe are very short and obscure for such as haue not past through that way wherby many ships haue run on grounde stricken passed many dangers some cast away but returning to our matter and folowing y e course aforesaid whē you are as far as the mouth of the entrie of the straight then you shall passe right throgh the middle of the way somwhat towards the North side because of the sands aforesaid that lie within y e straights alwaies with your Lead in your hand looking rounde about you for y t at the shalowest place in the middle of the chanel it is 4. fadom and ½ also because it is so narrow y t you can hardly cast out your Lead me thinketh it is your surest way vpon each Sand to set a Scute or other mark that may serue you for Beakens so to auoide them and going a little further by the Creeke which hath the opening that commeth out of y e other side of the Sea wher the Cliffe lieth two fadome vnder the water then kéepe presently towards the houel on y e right hand that maketh the point of the Creeke aforesaid wher also runing along by your Cōpasse as before by the land on the left hand somwhat neerer to it thē on the other side til you be out of y e straight alwaies taking héede of the land and creeke lying on the North side right against this Houel for it is ful of stones and Cliffs as I said before likewise you must shun the east side right against the issuing of the straight for that the shot of a great peece from thence it is altogether cliffes as aforesaid whē you are out of the straight desire to Anker then make towards the South side along by the land that you may get out of the streame you must Anker at 6. fadome for if you stay in the streame of the straight you may chance to lose an anker by the drawing and shaking of y e ship or that you shuld driue and runne vpon the sand at this road you are right ouer against a strand where you finde fresh water whē néed requireth being out of the straight in manner as aforesaid you shal take your course along by the land vpon the right hand alwaies casting out the lead and not putting lower thē scarce 4 fadom neither to the land nor towards the sea and whē you are past half way to the strand comming out of the straight you shal haue no more but ful 4. fadom déep and being past this first strand with a houell and cliffes that stand at the end thereof and a sandie bay lying against the houel being half way frō the other houel which standeth on the end of the aforesaid sandy bay behind the which that opening which is in y e straight commeth out again then hold your course eastward at 4. fadome not turning to the one nor the other side for you should presentlie find both drougthes sands the channel is muddy ground and you must still haue the Leade in your hand vntill you finde other depth which wil not continue long and for more securitie it is best to run before with a scute to try the channel for it will shew you both the channels whē you are at 12. or 15. fadome thē beware of the south side vntil you be aboue a mile beyond the straight for from 15. you shal come to 10. fadome frō thence to dry lād for it is al riffes sand this straight hath 6. Ilands lying at the end of the land of Iantana which is the North syde and you run along east west it is in distance about 8 miles but you must not passe betwéen it the land the sea by it about halfe a myle Southward is al faire good ground at 15. fadom sandy groūd in the middle of this way from the straight to the Ilands or litle more or lesse lieth the riuer of Iantana which hath a great mouth the entry thereof being along the land on the east side where great shippes haue many times entred on the West side where there standeth a houell of red earth it hath a Banke of hard sand ouer the mouth of the riuer reaching about half a mile into the sea vpon the which many ships haue fallen wherfore take héed of it from the point of the Iland abouesaid lying at the end of the land of Iantana there rūneth a riffe eastnortheast into the sea well 2. great miles and whē it is calme wether you cannot sée the water break vpon it only that it hath a certain white skin ouer it which is presently séen and discerned and when it is rough wether then the water breaketh all ouer betwéene this riffe and the Iland runneth a great Channell all stonie groūd and the shallowest place that I found therein was 5. fadome ½ and then to 7. fadome 1 ◠and then againe I found 6. or 8. fadome ½ and is in breadth about the shot of a great péece right ouer if you will passe this Channell you must runne half a myle of from the Iland come no néerer to it for if you should you would run on ground it were good that great ships shuld not passe through it vnlesse they were compelled thereunto as it happened to Francisco Dagmar that there ranne on ground and was in danger to haue cast away his shippe because he ranne to néer the Riffes and that the wind scanted two myles from these Ilandes Southsoutheast lyeth Pedra Branca that is White stone which is an Iland of white stone rockes and cliffes and hard by it there are other rockes and cliffes on the South side thereof on the which side likewise lyeth the Iland of Binton which is verie long in the middle whereof there is a high houel wherevpon there is déepe ground but not good to anker for such as come from China round about Pedra Branca and close by it there are 6. fadome déepe good ground but you must take heed of the cliffes and riffes lying by it I haue alreadie told you that in passing through the straight when you are ouer the sandes at 15 fadome in manner as aforesaid you must sayle Eastward towardes the Ilandes which you shall presentlie see as soone as you are past the Riuer of Iantana
not runne betwéen them for that without them and close by you finde good ground I haue layne there at anker with a calme about a mile from the Iland which lieth néerest the land there the streames run strong with the tyde Northeast and Southwest From this Iland Pulo CoÌ„dor to y e IlaÌ„d Pulo Secir the course is Northeast and Southwest northeast and by east and Southwest by West 45 miles This Iland is low and long land reaching North and south and on the North poynt it hath a stonie Iland lying halfe a myle from the land you may passe betwéene it and the Iland on the East syde it hath a Sandie Baye where once a Iunco that is to say an Indian or Chinish great ship was laid on the shore to bee new dressed belonging to a Rouer of Patane a countrey lying vpon the coast on the East side of Malacca towardes the kingdome of Syon I haue passed within halfe a mile to seaward by this sandie bay it is all good ground this Iland is distant from the coast of Camboia or Champa nine miles if you put to seaward from Pulo Condor without seeing it vnder 8. degrees you shall find 25. and 26. fadom deep with black muddy ground much of the skin or Sasbeene driuing vpon the water and being 12. miles past it at the height of eight degrées and ½ then you shall see certaine sea Snakes swimming in the water at 28. and thirtie fadome déepe and ten miles further much of the Herbe called Sargosso vnder the water at the same depth which depth you shall find to be 9. degrées â— to this place you shall holde your course Northeast for wee could run no higher because the West wind bloweth very stiffe but from thence runne southeast towardes Pulo Cain thinking to get the coast of Champa when you come within two miles of the Ilandes lying nine miles Southward from Pulo Secir you shal find muddie thick water comming by this Iland you shall find no grounde those two Ilandes aforesaid were by the Chinars called Tomsitom three miles distant from each other you runne along East Southeast and West Northwest the East Ilande is high and round on the sea side being calme in the vpper part therof it hath the fashioÌ„ of a Cap such as y e Mandorijus which are the Lords of China doe weare halfe a mile from it lyeth a Cliffe like an Ilande and hath on the West side reddish cliffes and on the north side an other Iland round about all these Ilandes and cliffes there is no grounde I set this down for that I haue sailed all this countrie and noted the way as also all whatsoeuer I haue declared in this discourse we took this course aforesaid for want of mastes for wee durst not beare our seales because of the stiffe West windes and if any man chaunce to fall in the like neede and troubles let him not hope to finde the coast on the borde side from those Ilands you shall holde your course northerly to discouer Pulo Secir and from thence to the coast of Champa for you must know that the streames from Pulo Condor and from the coast of Champa to Pulo Secir and those Ilandes runne Eastward by which meanes you runne presently to the coast as hereafter I will shew and as you passe by these Ilandes of Pulo Secir Northwestwarde thâ—n the streame runneth to the coast of Champa which wil driue you ouerthwart from the aforesaid Ilandes of Pulo Secir there are no sands nor shallows as many men suppose the worst you find is that there is no ground these Ilands lye 18 miles distant from the coast from Pulo Condor you shall presently run to the coast of Champa and if you passe by it on the south side then hold your course halfe a strike North northeast till you be in sight of the coast and halfe way in this course you shall find eight and twentie fadome deepe and if you passe by it on the North side you must runne Northeast and Northeast and by North and not higher to loofewarde to shun the drougthes whereon Mathias de Brito was cast away and if in the night time you passe by any land then cast out your lead and finding fifteene fadome water then put no neerer to the land but presently runne East Northeast as the coast lyeth for the sands in those countries lieth at 13. fadome along the coast 4. mile from it The coast of Champa along the sea side is low land and great sandy strandes you run along by them East north east and West Southwest to a point lying vnder 10. degrees and â— and before you come within two or three miles thereof the sandie strand and high way endeth for this point is a verie high land reaching Southwarde in so that it maketh a Cape from thence forward it is altogether verie high land to Varella with great hils within this point towards the West Southwest lyeth a creeke and two miles on this side before you come at it There lyeth close by the land a smal long and low Iland all of harde stony cliffes and rockes which a farre off shew like a towne from this Iland to Pulo Secir there runneth a banke of 10. and 12. fadome deepe vpon the aforesaid coast of sandie strands 15. miles before you come to the point aforesaid there is a riuer called Sidraon where you may enter with shippes of 6â—â— Barhes on this riuer lyeth the fairest and best towne in all the kingdome of Champa it hath for a marke a long houell w t 2. tops I haue passed within the shotte of a great peece neere to the stony Iland aforesaid and found 8. fadome deep altogether euen stonie ground with much of the hearbe Sargaslo whereby I could hardly make the lead to sinke downe and along by the aforesaid high point or hooke there is 20. fadome déepe When you are by the coast of Champa then you shal runne East Northeast within two or thrée miles at the furthest it is altogether faire and good anker ground to the point or hooke aforesaid you shal leaue the Island of stones on the land side not passing betweene it and the land from this point to another point are 12. miles you runne Northeast and from this second point yet 12 miles further there is another point this course is runne halfe a strike to the North Northeast betweene this second and thirde point there lyeth two creekes the first wherof is the hauen where you lade blacke woode which is called Deâ—raon from this thirde point to the Varella the coast runneth North and seuen miles before you come to y e Varella there is a creeke where there lyeth a town and two miles further there is an Iland of stonie cliffes close to the land which a farre off sheweth like a man that fisheth or angleth whereby the Portingalles call it Opescador or the fisher and if you desire to runne to
the Varella being past the Iland you shall presently be neere the land where you haue a great strande with faire grounde This Varella is a high hill reaching into the sea and aboue on the toppe it hath a verie high stonie rock like a tower or piller which may be seen far off therfore it is by the Portingalles called Varella that is a Cape Backe or marke at the foote of this hill on the South side it hath a verie great creeke reaching northward in all of muddy ground 15. fadome deepe you cannot sée it far off because the one lande runneth through the other but as you passe by the strand aforesaid and beginne to come neere the Varella then the creeke beginneth to open which hath a verie faire entrie and within hath two running streames of verie good fresh water hee that commeth thither with a ship by my aduise shall not put in there because hee shall haue much labour and trouble to bring the ship out again for there the wind is scant you may wel anker without at y e entry or mouth thereof as I haue done or you may seeke for the other places where fresh water is to bee had that stand on the other side of the hill towards the North at the foote thereof where the high lande that reacheth into the sea endeth where you begin to find a verie great strand to get this water you must goe verie neare to the point of this hill and as you run along towardes it when you compasse it about you shall see a small sandie bay with the aforesaid great strand and place of watering where you may anker when you will for it hath good anker grounde but it hath a great inconuenience and mischiefe which is that you lie compassed about by the country people that are great enemies to the Portingalles and sea Rouers therefore you must keep good watch with great care when you fetch fresh water as well within as without because the country people vse to ouer runne and spoile men on the sodaine this Varella lyeth vnder 13. degrées this land of Varella is a hooke and from thence to Pulo Cutuo the course is North and north and by West for the space of 48. miles from thence the land beginneth to be a great deale lower then that you haue past hauing in many places sandie strandes where men may anker ten miles from Varella forward a mile from the land there lyeth a long flat Iland called Pulo Cambir and betweene this Iland and the land are 12. fadome deepe sandie ground in the middle of the Iland on the lande side there is a smal sandie bay that hath fresh water where if need be you may anker for it is good ground and in the middle of the channel betweene the Iland and the land it is altogether faire being a small mile in length from this Island about twelue miles Northward the land maketh a point and from thence to the Island there is a great creeke and inward to the Northwest where the high land endeth which from this point inwarde runneth to the West it is an open or broken low lande where you find a riuer of thrée fadome deepe within the hauen hauing sandie ground with a great mouth or entrie and within it hath a Wel of 13. fadome deepe this riuer runneth further into the land 4. or 5. miles inward from the entrie or mouth there lyeth a great village where you may haue great store of victualles and other necessaries in the mouth of this riuer on the east side there standeth a high houell and on the West side a low sandie strande you must enter right forth in the middle and although it is verie wide yet being within you must make your self sure w c ankers cables specially from the west side for y t if it were earlie in the yeare you shall there finde stiffe West winds which woulde driue you on the other side of the Riuer in this Riuer is much fish also in the land there is much wild flesh with Swine Tigers Rhinoceros and such like beastes the countrey people were of good nature but we haue giuen them cause of suspition by our bad dealing with them fiue miles further forward from this Riuer along the coast there are two Ilands with certaine cliffes about halfe a mile from the land and you may passe betweene them and the lande twelue miles from these Ilandes there lyeth other Ilandes by the lande where there are some places of rounde sande with a sandie strande and there is a small Riuer where you haue much Catte that is Ryce vnstamped in the huskes as it growgroweth and is twelue miles from Pulo Caton wherewith many haue deceiued thēselues that runne crosse ouer when they saw it and tanne on ground Pulo Caton is a long Island with two high hilles at the ende thereof and in the middle low so that farre of it séemeth to be two Islandes it hath a flatte and euen ground of bushes stretching northwest and southeast on the southeast side it hath a Riffe where the water breaketh forth running the shot of a great péece further into the Sea on the land side it hath fresh water and lieth distant from the coast 2. miles and ◠2 the channell betwéene both hath thirtie and thirtie fiue fadome déepe with good ground right ouer against this Island lieth a riuer with a great mouth or entrey being within the Hauen 5. or 6. fadome déepe it is verie well inhabited and built with houses in this Hauen Gomes Barretto entered with his ship this Island lieth vnder 15. degrées and ⅔ and North Northwest a mile and a halfe from it there lieth another small low Island and you may passe betwéene them both North Northwest 14. miles along the coast lieth the Iland of Champello full vnder 16. degrées and ⅔ this Iland Champello is great and high hauing vpon it certaine toppes or heades sticking out it lieth north northwest and south southeast it hath two high hilles with a valley in the middle that in the southeast being much higher then the other it hath likewise many trées on the Northwest side it hath a very high Island with two small Ilandes lying close at the foot thereof on the West side it hath much and verie good fresh water and is distant from the Coast about two miles it is a very low land along the sea strand and West Northwest from thence is the Riuer of Coaynon lying two fadome déepe in the Hauen it is sandie ground where much traffique is vsed but the people are not much to bee trusted from this Iland of Champello Northwest for two or three miles it is full of trées two miles further the Coast maketh a great thicke point full of trees and thrée miles beyond this point lieth a great créeke which in the entrey hath an Iland for a defence or closure and is all cleare ground where you haue much victuals
and Marchandises that come out of the countrie by the Riuer of Sinoha this créeke was called the Enseada or créeke of Saint Don Iorgie it hath much wood verie good to make ships of fiue miles from it along the Ceast lieth the riuer of Sinoha which hath in the Hauen 14. spanne of water all sandie ground in this Hauen is the whole handling and traffique of the goods that come from Cauchinchina and thether and to Champello you runne Northwest This Iland of Champello hath a good road and safe harbour but onely when it bloweth out of the west and southwest and although the wind commeth from the land notwithstanding it troubleth you much by reason of the lownes of the land you must vnderstand that ten miles before you come to Varrella 13. miles within the sea there beginneth certaine Sandes that are verie dangerous which reach as the land doth till you bee vnder 17. degrees and run nearer to the northeast at the end whereof in the way to China there lieth 8. Islandes three great fiue small all full of trées and sandie strandes but without fresh water betwéene them round about it is altogether flat and foule way so that as soone as you let fall the anker the cable is presently fretted in péeces betwéene these Islands there is 4. fadome deepe This information was giuen me by certaine people of Sian that lost their Iunco or shippe in that place by reason of a calme because they ankered and all their cables brake from the ground they saued themselues in the boate run through all those Islandes to find fresh water and could sée none you run from the hooke or point of those sandes to Pulo Caton Northeast and Southwest and Northeast and by east and southwest and by west for they lie like a bow therefore trust not the old description of this Nauigation that saith they haue channels from thence to Pulo Caton running ouerthwart it is thirtie miles but returning againe to the course from Varella to Pulo Caton when you are as farre as where the coast stretcheth Northward then your course shall be two miles off from the land till you come to Pulo Caton for that if you come thether early in the yeare you haue the west windes so strong that if you should be far from the coast they would carrie you by force vpon the sands without any remedie as it happened to the ship called the Santa Crus you shall not passe aboue two or thrée miles at the furthest to seaward from Pulo Caton and if you chance to be on the side of the land you may likewise passe through by the Channell that runneth betwéene the Firme land and the Iland which is two mile and a halfe broad all faire and good ground as I said before Pulo Caton lieth with the south point of the Iland Aynon North and South and North by east and South and by West somewhat more then 50. mile This south point of Aynon lieth scarse vnder 18. degrées and ½ reacheth from the point aforesaid southwestward 12. or 13. miles and from the East side lyeth the way from China which you run Northeast and north east and by north to 19. degrees and ½ and on the side of the Firme land the Island compasseth about to the point or end of 19. degrees and ½ from the Northeast side in such manner that the Iland is in forme foure square the channell betwéene it and the Firme land is in the narrowest part 6. miles where there lieth a hauen called Anchio hauing certaine sandes betwéene thē yet with a channell wherein great ships may passe seuen miles eastward From Anchion lieth a créeke with good harbour and a mile further about thrée miles distant from the land there lieth a great Riffe and sandes but returning againe to the aforesaid South point of the Island which is right before a very high land that surpasseth all the rest of the land in the said Iland at the foote thereof on the north side there is a good Hauen called Taalhio at the mouth whereof lyeth a small round Iland and from this high land aforesaid it runneth 12. miles northwestward and from thence it is altogether low land on the sea side and inward hilles and houels from the end of the land Aynon on the north side vnder 19. degrées and ⅓ to the Iland Pulo Gom in the same course of northeast and northeast and by north are 8. miles and lieth 5. mile from the Firme land it is a high land in forme like a Bell and on the side of the land it hath a road with a good harbour wherein the ship Santa Crus lay from thence you goe to the seauen Ilandes called Pulo Tio in the same course of northeast and northeast and by north being fiue miles Pulo Tio are 7. Ilands great and small seperated one from the other without any Trees from thence the Coast reacheth Northeast and Northeast and by North to the Enseada dos Ladroins that is the Creeke of Rouers from Pulo Tio seauen miles lieth a Riffe which reacheth 5. or 6. miles from the land into the sea and vpon the east side therof about halfe a mile from it there is foure fadome water flat sandie ground and a mile further from thence there lieth a great riuer whether many ships doe saile and put in a little further from this Iland lieth another Riuer wherein I haue béene which hath a good harbour against the monsons of China and with a southwest winde is discouered and threre also runneth strong streames the entrie thereof is close on the east side along by a point of land it is faire and good ground and being about this point of land you shall run till you come to a sand bay where you shall anker for within it is shallow and sandie on the coast betwéene these 2. riuers lieth 2. or 3. Ilands close by the land and from these 2. riuers 6 miles forward lieth the Enseada dos Ladroins which is very great it hath on the west southwest side of the mouth certaine stonie cliffes from the which there stretcheth a Riffe towards the sea wherupon one of the Portingall ships did fall from the aforesaide second riuer to this créeke about halfe a mile from the coast there is 7. or 8. fadome déepe faire ground The land of this creeke on the north northeast side hath a verie high hooke or point of land passing about this hooke for the space of halfe a mile it is shallow but muddie ground you goe to the Hauen of Comhay whereupon the coast is called the coast of Comhay thether the ships of Sion or Sian vsed to come it is like a créeke that is very great hauing another point or end of high land which reacheth North and South and right ouer against this hauen on y e south side lieth the Iland of Sauchoin about 5 or 6 miles from it and is distant from the aforesaid point
inward with that course you shall come to sée the two Ilandes aforesaid lying on the north point of the aforesaid créeke it is in crossing ouer twelue miles as you begin to see the coast on the other side lying before the créeke northwarde the Iland stretching in that sort as I said before being past the point of the créeke you shall run thether being by it you shall sayle without it about halfe a mile from the shore these Ilands end about 10. miles before you come to the hauen of Sian as aforesaid and the last of them are 4. or 5. small Ilands one running through the other along the coast these Ilands haue no trees are of red earth and comming to the end of these Ilands then put to the shore vntill the Ilandes bee right south from you then take your course right North wherewith you shall see the hauen of Sian which lyeth froÌ„ these Ilands 10. miles distant The hauen of Sian lyeth in a low land ful of trees without any sandy strands but altogether of soft muddie ground dirte hath likewise a banke of muddie ground reaching two miles and a halfe southward wheÌ„ you enter first vpon this bank it is hard muddie ground you cannot enter into this hauen with any great ships but with a spring tide and although you shold fall vpon this muddie ground ther is no danger for you must come vpon drie land to put out or in with the tides comming from the Ilandes aforesaid to the hauen of Sian in manner as I said before sailing northward as they ly southward from you being in the night time you may boldly anker vpon the muddie grounde for the next morning you shal find your selfe right ouer against the hauen so that you shall plainly sée it for it is the mouth or entry of a great riuer you shall sayle therein passing ouer muddy ground all with the tides and south winds which will bring you vpwards at pleasure The 23. Chapter Of the course from the hauen of Camboia to the Island of Pulo Tymon Pedra Branqâ—â— DEparting from the point of y e haueÌ„ of Camboia being about halfe a mile or thereabouts in the sea you shal hold your course Southwest whereby you shall see two Ilandes lying betweene Pulo Coâ—dor and Pulo Wy from the which you shal saile about halfe a mile stil running southwest not once putting Southward because of y e strong streams y t run to y e Iland of Bornon and if the wind begin to be calme and that you desire to Anker in the middle of the gulfe you may well doe it for it is at the least 38. or 40. fadome déepe therfore leaue not sayling Southwest ward for with that course you shall come right vppon Pulo Tymon the Iland of Pulo Tymon is great high and full of trées and hath verie good fresh water and if you néede there you may haue it right ouer against it in an Iland lying in a Créeke of the same Iland when you put to this Iland of Pulo Tymon on the Northeast point you shall sée a round Iland and desiring to runne betwéen it and the Iland or betwéen it and the Firme land you may wel do it for you may passe fréely round about in euerie place and comming to Pulo Tymon you shall hold your course South and somwhat South and by West towards Pulo Tynge which is a verie high rounde Iland much like a Doune or a sheafe of Corne it hath some small Ilands lying by it in the same course of South and South and by West you shall come to Pedra Branqua or the white stonie Cliffe from thence you begin the course to Sincapura running about thrée or foure miles Westward The 24. Chapter Of the course out of the Hauen of Macau in China to the Iland of Pulo Tymon the straight of Sincapura WHen you depart from Macau to y e other coast you must put out at the East chanel if the wind bee Northwest if not then you cannot passe that way but you must sayle thorough the south west chanel which is a good way to passe out running from the point of Varella right vnto the land on the other side of Macau to shunne the cliffe of Belchior Dalmeida and when you are about a Harquebush shot from the other side then you shall runne along to a point of land which is the end thereof where the Iland of Castro lyeth from this point the banke hangeth off for the which cause you shall runne neerer to the land of Castro then to the point of land that you runne not on ground for in those countries you haue most of the shallowes in the land that lyeth on the left hand and the depthes on the right hand with a spring tide at this banke you find 4. fadome and a halfe and being without the banke you shall sayle vnto the mouth or hole running as then to the point of the banke to shunne the Cliffes which will presently bee seen for that the water breaketh vpon them vntill they be on your right hand being out of the mouth of this entrie you shall sayle the course hereafter following and hauing also departed from Varella being a Harquebush shot from thence you must run to the Iland called Do Bugio that of the Meercatte and being ouer against it passe close by it for it is a good way for the north winds which you find there abouts and because the wind on the other side is verie scarce the aforesaide Cliffe lyeth in the middle way of the chanell and you must runne on that side from the north along the coast to the Iland of Castro and when you are out of the chanell you shal keepe Southwest along by the Ilands if it bee cleare weather till you see the Iland of Sanchon and when you are within eight miles of it being to Seaward from it then you haue good sayling for I doe alwaies hold this course and passe well with it being 8. miles to Seaward from Sanchon you shall runne Southwest for the space of two miles or that you bee 12. miles as you gesse from the furthest hooke of the Iland of the Sands and being there you shal then runne Southwest so long as that you thinke that you are inward from the furthest point of the Sands towards Pulo Calon and then againe running South southwest and South South and by West by which course you shal come to see the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto which course I haue holden in this manner with a good and spéedie wind being in sight of the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto and sometimes without to Pulo Cambir and hauing a bad wind not being North then the time will shew you what you haue to doe when you see those Ilands you may goe neere them if you will for it is faire cleare sandie ground at fifteene Fadome from thence to Pulo Cambir the coast runneth
North South and somewhat North and by West South and by East this Iland Pulo Cambir is long and flat and on the sea side it hath some red spots or veines the bushes thereof being euen and alike right ouer against the points thereof Northward vppon the Firme land there lyeth a ryuer which is the ryuer of Pulo Cambir if you come thether in the Monson of South winds you may haue therein fresh water for it is verie good You shal likewise vnderstand that being eight miles to Seaward from the Iland Sanchoan you wil take your course from thence South Southwest and then you shall likewise sée the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto but it must bee w t a Compasse y t is fix I aduertise you once more that when you are in sight of Pulo Cambir about thrée or foure miles from it there lyeth certaine Ilands and halfe a mile to Seaward from the South point there lyeth certaine stonie Cliffes aboue the water that show like Bucks hornes you may fréely passe betwéene all the Ilands and that Iland for it is faire and good ground From thence to the Varella you runne along the coast North and South somewhat North and by West and South and by East it is twelue miles distant this Varella is a verie high tower standing vppon a point of land that commeth out from the land and reacheth into the Sea by this Varella there is a Hauen which you cannot sée as you come outward towardes it because the one land runneth through the other also vppon this point sticking out on the south side there is a place of verie good fresh water in the sandie strand and on the North side of the same point is an other place of fresh water vpon an other sandie Strand the land there hath some Cliffes and smal Ilands and when you come thether to fetch water it must be with a good tide for there you haue no Anker ground but verie close to the shore the best way is to put into the Bay for it is a good Hauen I haue béene in it and it hath good Harber for North and South winds with 14.15 and 16. fadome déepe sandie ground and if you desire to goe any néerer to the land you shall finde eight and seuen fadome déepe good ground this hauen of Varella lyeth vnder 13. degrées in this way from Varella to Pulo Sesir there are some Ilands lying about 9. or 10. miles from Varella from the point of Varella to these Ilands the coast runneth North and south and from these Ilands to Pulo Sesir you begin to runne along by the land North Northeast and South Southwest this Iland Pulo Sesir taking the name of the land because it lyeth on the coast for there is an other of the same name lying to Seaward is a stonie Iland without bushes hauing in the middle a pointed hill like a Varella it is a flat Iland of yellow colour like the Sea water to know Pulo Sesir being a mile or two from it vpon the Firme land you shall sée an opening this countrie is good to passe along by it for the space of two miles where you shal haue ground at seuen fadome great sand but put not off into the Sea from Pulo Sesir for it is an euill way because you haue but 4 fadome déepe with stonie ground Pulo Sesir lieth from the land vnder 10. and 13 degrees and the course from Varella to Pulo Sesir is about 50 miles from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor you shall hold your course South south west and southwest by south at 18. and 20. fadome deepe whereby you shall see the Iland Pulo Condor but I aduise you when you come ouer this crosse way from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor to holde your course from the sandy point Southsouthwest at 18. or 20. fadome deepe and when you find 15. fadome thē you are right by the coast of Cambaia and shall not sée Pulo Condor but on the land side but for your better way you shall still hold at 18 and 20. fadome and by this course you shall goe full vpon Pulo Condor which is a great Iland hauing many Ilands roūd about it and in euery place much anker ground there likewise you haue fresh water on the west side it lieth vnder 8 degrees ⅔ from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor are 50. miles and from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon you shal hold your course southsouthwest to 30. and 35 fadome muddy ground in this course and depth you shal sée an Iland being right ouer against the 7. points of the coast it sheweth like 3. hilles which stand in the space of two openings which are in the middle of the land and on the Northwest side it hath a cliffe Iland From thence to Pulo Tymon you shall take your course south and south by west at 28. and 30. fadome being from the one to the other 115. miles and you shall alwaies runne as I said before to the Iland of the 7. points called Pulo Tingaron southsouthwest because of the the streames that runne to the Iland of Bornon leaue not that course at any hand til you see it for it is 20. miles distant from Pulo Tymon this is a good course and I aduertise you againe that when you are in the way from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon in the middle betweene them both you shall find 25. fadome deepe in the middle way to Pulo Tymon you shall haue 35. fadome Pulo Tymon lieth vnder two degr and ½ on the North side it is a great Iland hauing other Ilands lying by it on the North syde it hath fresh water in a sandy strand where the ships that come from Sunda to goe for China take in water being in sight of Pulo Tymon you shall passe on the out side therof till you passe by the south poynt along through the channell that runneth betwéen this point and an other Iland which Iland shall bee to sea ward from you and as soone as you are in the channell on the southwest syde you shall see an other high Iland called Pulo Tinge to the which you shall goe within a mile and a half or two miles thereof and being there you shall take your course southward to Pedra Branca or the white Cliffe at 18. or 20. fadome deepe alwaies with the lead in hand if in this course you come to lesse groūd thē put to sea ward till you be at 18 fadome about 4 miles distant from the coast to auoyd the riffe that commeth from the point or hook of Iantana where the Ilands lie which you shal presently sée hauing good regard that you passe not by Pedra Branca but when you sée you shall make towardes it which you must keepe on the lee side for y t being with a flood the streames runne very strongly to the Iland of Binton wherby you shuld not passe by Pedra Branca for there I was forced to cast out 2. ankers and
well on the Northeast as on the Southwest side in this Island you haue fresh water These Islands are called Chiocon it is all ouer very faire cléere ground only one stonie Cliffe whereupon you sée the water breake lying a shot of a great péece Westward from the rowe From these Islands of Chiocon thrée miles forward lyeth the Hauen of Chinchon and two myles from the land lyeth two Ilandes of white stonie Cliffes betweene the which and the land as also outward to Seaward it is all faire ground from these Islandes two myles forward and halfe a mile from the land there lyeth a high round island from whence there runneth a risse about halfe a myle into the Sea whereon you sée the water breake which you must shun Betweene the land and this island it is altogither shallowes and betwéene this island and the hooke of the mouth of Chinchon lyeth a small Créeke where the shippes in the monson of China do anker All this coast from Chabaquon to Chinchon is high land with deepe and faire ground onely the aforesaid riffe of the island The Hauen of Chinchon on the Southwest side hath lying aboue it a very high land with a stonie rocke vpon it like a pillar as the Varella in the coast of Champa hath This high land or hill descendeth downewardes to a hooke or point of land and comming to the Northeast side from the sea it hath a great opening with certaine islands in the mouth thereof from the aforesaide point the lande reacheth North about a myle and a halfe and from thence it runneth West Northwest hauing an arme of the sea that runneth a great way inwarde to the lande in the same course on this land that reacheth from the point of the sea where the land lyeth West Northwest there is a long high island without trées or bushes stretching like the same land and is a small halfe mile distant from the land and on the land side it hath a good Sandie bay in the middle way from the same island the shot of a great péece Westward lyeth a hidden Cliffe or stonie place of eightéene spannes water going a little way all the rest is faire and good ground to anker in In this island is good fresh water herein Diego Pereira wintered with his shippe you runne not on the South side of this island but about by the East side comming into the Hauen on the North side From this island a quarter of a mile further on there lyeth thrée islands stretching East and West one with the other from thence to the West part of the land there is a channell of about halfe a mile broad faire and deepe you may likewise if you will easily passe betwéene the first and the other two Islands The Island that lyeth Eastward is the longest and greatest of all the thrée these Islands are distant from the Northland about a great mile which land is very high ground The shot of a great péece from the East Island Northward lyeth a great and high Island reaching North and South which on the West side hath a sandy bay and vnder this sandy Bay close by the land there is a good Road to anker in with very good ground where oftentimes the Portingales ships haue laine to lade their wares and marchandises such as are there to bée had The shot of a great péece from this créeke Southwestward and the like shot of a great péece from the aforesaid Islands lyeth a flat sand of twelue Spannes of Water all the rest is faire and good ground by the Road and along by the Islands there runneth a great streame the best place to anker and to lie safest is close by the South point to lye out of the streame you must not passe by the point of the strand by the Créeke that lyeth Northward for it is shallowe Those that come from Liampo and Iapon put into this Hauen by the channell that is betweene this Island and the thrée Islands which is faire at fiue or sixe fadome water which you likewise find along by the Islands as well on the land side as the Sea side onely at the sandy place aforesaid This Island by the Câ—mais is called Tantaa Two miles to seaward from this Island lyeth a small clouen Island called Tantheaa from the Island Tantaa to the Northland it is about a mile which is altogither shallowe ground so that you can by no meanes passe nor a great way from thence to Sea ward From this Island Tantaa a myle Westward lyeth the Mouths or entery of the arme of the Sea which may bée halfe a myle broad on the South part it hath a point of land against the which on the other land Northward lyeth a Créeke or Bay with a great harbour thereabouts the King of Chinaes Shippes doe lye and a myle from the aforesayd point of land inwards of the Riuer there lyeth an Island by the South side with certaine redde downes In the middle way from this Island on the South side of the land there reacheth a point and somewhat beyond this point Westward there lyeth a Bay in the same Island wherein the Shippes anker and there you lye out of all the streames vnder the defence of the aforesayed point of land It happeneth oftentimes that the Shippes by negligence lye drie because they runne close to the land yet it hurteth them not for it is soft muddy ground From this point aforesayd to the East point of the same Island there is a very good place to lay the Shippes on land to newe rigge them where the Portingales haue often dressed their Shippes Likewise there you haue great store of victuals and other prouisions and the ships that lye by the Island Tantaa doe not stay there if it bée foule weather but as soone as they perceiue any hard weather comming they presently hoise vp anker and come to anker by this Island in the mouth of the aforesaid small Bay close by the South land all this way is fayre This Hauen of Chinchon lyeth vnder foure and twenty degrées and ¼ from the Island Tantaa and the Island of this hauen of Chinchon fiue miles East Northeast lyeth a point of land in the which there is a good Créeke against foule weather and the Monson of China called Lialoo The Road of this Créeke is close by the aforesaid point of land for all the land from this Créeke to the Island Tantaa is altogether there along of a bankey and shallow ground and so continueth to the Island for that betwéene the said Island and the land it is altogether drie and shallow as aforesaid From this Créeke of Lialoo forward the land beginneth to bée lower without any high hils as the aforesaid land and hath but few bushes in many places none at all It is a very faire coast so that you néed feare nothing there but that you sée before your eies From Chinchon to the Hauen of Foquyen are forty myles and you runne
the which and the land you haue a Roade against the Monsons of the South and Southwest windes This entry is of fiue fadome déepe but it is too narrow for a Shippe to wind in it therfore you must bind it fast or cast out ankers both before and behind From this Island two miles West Northwest lyeth another great Island with very high Trées and from the South Southwest side of the same Island there is a good hauen for the Monson of the North and Northeast winds on the which side it hath very good aire and fresh water and the other Island aforesaid for the Monson of Southwest winds is vnwholsome The channell betweene them both is 35 fadome déepe but in the Road you haue such depths as you would desire From this north Island to the land are about thrée miles hauing some small Islands in the way On the firme land West Northwestward there lieth a smal Créeke called Camocon from thence you run to the Hauen lying on the coast fiue miles beyond the Island which is a riuer called Tinay at the entrie it hath foure fadome déepe without any sands or shallowes These two Islands aforesaid of Synogicam where the Portingals vsed to traffike lie vnder 29 degrees and 2 â— and these islands of Liampo doe reach full vnder one and thirtie degrées Northward and are not as the Islands of Canton hauing their Channell faire and cleare without feare of any thing but that you sée before your eies But betwéene these Islands in some places you haue stonie cliffes and riffes lying vnder the water From the Islands of Sinogicam forwards there also the tides runne verie strong about a third part of the Water at an Ebbe and a third part at a flood wherefore you must haue good regard to the crosse streames that come from the many channels and droughts which runne verie strong and with so great force that oftentimes they driue a man vpon the point and Hookes of the Island when hée would passe by it Wherefore hée that will sayle by these Islands must haue a Pilote that knoweth the Countrey To Seaward from these Islands it is all faire and good ground Putting out of the Island where you may Winter for the South winde that is from the Road of the Islands or Cliffes to Sea-ward you must alwaies runne close by it and when the Island beginneth to lye East-ward then it maketh a point sticking out and before you come to this Point there is a small long Island which hath a small Créeke in the middle being inward of a clouen stonie Rocke at the foot whereof it is 20 fadome déepe it is distant from the great Island about the shot of a great péece The smal Island shall lye on the North side and you shall alwaies keepe towards the great Island as much as you can for this creeke aforesaid draweth the water to it so that if you were close by it it would draw you in as it happened vnto mee whereby I had great labor and danger before I could get out From this Island halfe a myle Northward there beginneth another great and high Island which from thence reacheth Eastward making a Channell betweene both that runneth in the Sea which Channell from the Sea to this small Island is all fair and cléere but from thence to the point of the other North Island and from both these Islands Westward which is a great space of the Sea it is altogether riffes and Stony Cliffes vnder Water that reach vnto the Channell that runneth from the Island where you may Winter for the North windes along by the Islands that lye on the land side Therefore when you come from the South Island to Sea-ward you must goe close by it to the point aforesaid lying on the same Island From the Island where you may Winter for the North winds there runneth a channell North Northeastward betwéene the Islands so that it deuideth the Islands leauing some on the land side and some to Sea-ward which channell oftentimes openeth and sheweth it self From this Island aforesaid where you may Winter for the North windes fiue myles further forward in the same course there beginneth another great and high Island of fiue myles long lying in the same course of North Northeast and South Southwest This Island is very populous of euill natured people from the South point of this great Island the length of a Cannon shot Eastward there is a hidden cliffe or Rocke of stone lying vnder the water wherevpon a Portingales Shippe was cast away laden with Pepper and other Spices which is a good marchandise to be brought out of India and all those countries The Riffes and Stones aforesayde reach vnto this Stony Rocke therefore if you will sayle through this Channell or depth aforesaide you must runne on the West side close by the Island From the point of this great Island thrée miles Northeast there is yet another great and high Island and is one of the Islands that lye to Seaward in a row wherein there standeth a Chinish Temple or Church most curiously built wherefore by the Portingales it is called A Ilha de Varella that is the Island of the marke or token and before you come at it you leaue two or thrée smal Islands on the land side and the great Island of fiue miles long reacheth behind these Islands to land ward and to Sea ward from these Islands lyeth another great Island reaching from the stony rock to the island of Varella Betweene these two Islands there runneth a small Channell the whole Channell from these thrée miles to the entery or passage of Varella is thrée fadome deepe at full Sea and that of Varella as also the month of the chanell which runneth Eastward through it towards the Sea is all deep In the entery of the Channell of this Island at the foote of Varella it hath a Créeke with a Sandy baye which is a good Road. From the South point of this Island of Varella or Chinish Temple to Sea ward there lyeth thrée Islands all on a row close by each other reaching East and West which Islands also are named after the name of Varella whereby the Channell is knowne This Island of Varella or Chinish Temple lyeth full vnder thirtie degrées and is distant from the Islands Sâ—ongâ—â—â—m aforesaid eight miles From the Islands Sâ—ongicam eleuen or twelue myles it is altogether great and high Islands lying close by each other but from thence to full one and thirtie degrées they begin to bée lesse and somewhat more separated At the end of these Islands there lyeth two Islands together whereof the Channell that runneth betwéene them hath a verye good harbour it is called Lepion they lye close by a great Riuer which is much inhabited and frequented by Marchaunts and other people In this Hauen of Lepion the Iapons doe often Trafficke from the end of this Island along by the Sea coast the land is low and bankey ground for that
after ranne very stiffe into it made vs get in and with the glimsing of the euening and the light Moone wée entred into a verie great goulfe wherein lay the aforesaide Créeke on the North side and within on the East side it hath a small Island full of trées lying about the shot of a base from the land Eastward from this Island the land hath a high houell and on the South side of the said houell there lyeth a great opening which on the other side hath a point of low land and white sand strands with trées There is the Hauen called Minatto which is a riuer better than that of Batecola lying in the coast of Malabar On the North side of this houell about a small myle there is another opening béeing in a land that is somewhat lower as the houell with some trées This opening right in the middle hath an Island wherein is the place of Xibuxij which is a great village full of people and is a riuer of fresh water but it is shallowe for you can not put into it without a spring tide From Xibuxij forward the Créeke runneth West all lowe land and sandie strandes for the space of two miles from thence it runneth Southward againe till it butteth vpon a high hill which is that which wée sawe comming from the Island Tanaxuma to the foote of the hill there lyeth a small riuer very shallow From this riuer the land runneth East againe to the mouth thereof which may bée about halfe a myle broad The ground of all this Créeke and entrie is sand and bad anker ground All this high land aforesaid is called Quimonsiquy From this Créeke of Xibuxij seuen myles East Northeast lyeth the Créeke of Tanora which is one of the best Hauens of Iapon you runne the coast East and East by North in the middle way from Xibuxij to Tanora there is a small Créeke or Bay which at the first shewe séemeth to haue a good harbor but when you are right against it then you may verie well perceiue it for it hath many stonie Cliffes and Rockes and runneth somewhat to landward I heare set downe the description of this Créeke that no man should deceiue himselfe therby that desireth to goe vnto Tanora as wée should haue done Béeing past this small Créeke you shall presently sée that the land maketh an end or point of high lande from the which point forward the coast windeth inward where you shall sée a sandie strand with two Ilandes full of trées lying along by it At the end of these Islands you shall sée other smaller Islands that lye off from the land inward to the Sea with other great stones and rockes Within these Ilands and Stones lyeth the Hauen of Tanora and to put into this Hauen you must run to the point and the end of these Islands and Stones that reach into the Sea and béeing past them then on the Northeast side to Seaward there will lie a stonie Cliffe with an Island without bushes or trées béeing stéepe land reaching North and South betwéene this Island and the land there is a great Créeke where you may anker for right ouer against it it is 25 fadome déepe but there is not the right Hauen but when you are about the point and the end of the aforesaid Islands and Stones that sticke outward to Sea then you shall presently passe along thereby inward towards the land which you may freely doe without danger for it is faire and cléere holding your course Westward and a point of land will be vpon your right hand and béeing past this point you shall passe close by shunning the land on the West side and being there you are within the Hauen which is a long Créeke or Bay reaching North till you be in you may ancre in the middle thereof at foure fadome déepe and then you are inclosed with a round bowe it is there altogither muddy ground Departing from Tanora to Fyunga the coast runneth North to a point of land lying about fiue myles from Tanora betwéene this point of land and Tanora there lyeth two Hauens the one called Gico not farre from Tanora the other further forward by some stonie Cliffes and Islands called Vmbra These two Hauens are good harbors for East winds that blowe much on this coast from the aforesaid point of land to Fyunga may be fiue miles more from whence the coast land doe turne in againe like a Créeke comming somewhat further Northward out this Créeke is a low land along by the Sea coast with sandy strands and a mile beyond y e aforesaid point of land the coast hath an opening and on the South side of this opening there standeth a great round trée close by the Sea side here is a good Hauen which is called Vndo and further forward there lyeth another Hauen called Toconosuchy this land is higher then the other hauen on the Southside it hath some high and great Trées and on the Northside a low land the which farre off outward sheweth like small Islands with trees This hauen is not good to put in A mile beyond this hauen there is another Hauen called Myme which is a good hauen for small shippes to enter and hath two enteries which you presently sée béeing without and may well discerne them in the middle hauing a flat Island full of Trees these Trees make two openings and you may see ouer the Island on the land which is higher a great gréene trée the land on the South side hath a high land with a valey From this Hauen about two myles and a halfe lieth another small Island called Tomxyma beyond this Riuer a myle and a halfe endeth the low land and then again it beginneth to be high from thence two myles further the land maketh a point or hooke of high land and a farre off seemeth to be the point called Cabo de Ramos lying on y e coast of India by Goa Sailing about this point hard by there is a Riuer Northward called Camyco which is two fadome deepe in the Hauen this is the furthest land of the kingdome of Fiunga From y e point of land aforesaid fiue miles distant from Tanora to this point of Camico the lande is like a Créeke or breech the water therein making a crosse streame for along by the land the Water runneth alwaies Southward you runne this point with the aforesaid point of land North and South and North and by east and South and by West and are about eight miles distant along by this Bréech you may anker at twelue and fiftéene fadome deepe faire sandy ground From this point called Cabo de Camico forward the coast runneth north northwest and when you are right against this point then you shall presently sée Northeastward and Northeast and by East the land of Toca which is an island and is about fortie myles long and reacheth East and West and East and by North and West and by South it hath
about halfe a myle forward you beginne to haue lowe land with sandie strands and Trées all along the Sea coast By all this coast and the low land it is all bankey grounds wherfore you must keepe from it about halfe a myle In the middle way of this lowe land there lyeth two mouths or entries of Riuers that are very shallow whereby you may not enter into them by any meanes and at the end of this low land you haue a riuer of fresh water of twelue Spannes in the Hauen at a Spring tide and within the Riuer at lowe Water the Shippes lie drie being sandy ground Close by the Roade or entry of this Riuer lyeth a Village called Aquina Fama Halfe a myle within the Land vpon the Riuer lyeth the greatest and mightiest Towne in all the Kingdome of Bungo where the Kings in time past held their Courts where now all the Marchaunts of the Countries round about it who are very rich and aboundant in wealth are resident From this Riuer vpon the other side of the Creeke lyeth a very good Hauen with harbour against all windes it is a small Bay for the points or heights therof doe runne through each other wherefore they make a good defence against the South windes The entry of this hauen is faire you need but run in through the middle of the Channell where you haue foure and a halfe and fiue fadome deepe and there you haue great furtherance for you runne in before the winde with the South Monson and you put out againe before the winde with the North Monson to vnderstand it well you must know that all this Countrey as also all China Malacca India and all the orientall places doe sayle with the coniunction of the windes which for certaine months together blowe out of one place as now in the North then in the South and that at certaine times and dayes in the yeare without fayling which coniunction is called as in other places I haue said the Monson as Monson of the South winde that is when the wind bloweth out of the South and monson of the North Windes in like sort wherewith through all India they make their accounts to passe from the one place to the other And because in this description there is oftentimes mention made of some Hauens Creekes Riuers Bayes and Islands where you haue good harbor for the Monson of the North and South Windes when they blowe which is to bée vnderstoode that if they bée against you in the way you should hold you should know which hauen is good to stay in for that time or to winter in for in the East Countries you must Winter when the winde is against you so that you cannot holde on your voyage and of force you must stay for the wind and weather that is the Monson which serueth you and where you haue a good harbour to stay for the Monson that you must haue and then to follow on your voyage Wherefore I thought it necessary to set this downe that you might the better vnderstand the meaning of the Portingall and Indian Pilotes that first set downe noted and obserued these courses and Nauigations vsing here the same manner and description of the countrey not chaunging the word of Monson although that in some places before I haue saied some thing thereof But to the matter you must knowe that the aforesaid Hauen or Bay is called Fingy but it is not free from Rouers and theeues From the aforesaid Riuer to this Hauen there is about three myles crosse-waies In the Roade of the Riuer it is twenty fadome deepe close by the land but it is bad ground and there it is not good to stay for the windes for there you could not saue any thing From this point you may see the East land and at the end where this great Creeke endeth it is low land which is called Mâ—ryee and is all along faire and cleare The aforesaid Riuer and Towne lye vnder 33 degrees and â— From this point or end of Mâ—ryee two myles further there is another point of land which lyeth with this point North and South it is a low land with sandie strands at the end whereof lyeth certaine stones and Rockes from thence forward you runne Northward along the coast and a myle beyond it there is a Village called Tamboca and another myle further lyeth another place called Tambico lying both on the Sea side but they haue no Hauens with harbours also the people of the same places are not to bee trusted Beeing right against this point of Land you shall along the coast see a long Island which a farre off sheweth like two Islands lying distant from the land about two myles it is called Fimexima betwéen this Island and the land it is all shallows from the point of the Créeke of Bungo to this Island aforesaid All this coast along for the space of a great myle is bankey ground Riffes Stones and other filth All this way from the beginning of the Kingdome of Bungo to this Island you must runne on the East side along by the land of Tocaa From this Island of Fimexima aforesaid nine myles Northward there is a very high Lande which reacheth East and West that is the land of Amanguchen a great mighty and rich country for therein is one of the mines of siluer of the countrey of Iapon In this coast are good Hauens as also the Island of Meagima which in times past before the Portingales trauelled to Iapon had great Trafficke for there was the staple of all the countrey of Iapon for all kindes of wares and Marchandises Along by this land of Amaguchen and the country of the Island Fimexima aforesaid beginneth the straight or passage to Facunda of the which as also the other places thereabouts I will speake in another place together with the Nauigation and scituation thereof To sayle from the point of Moryee in the Créeke of Bungo to the Hauen of Caminaxique lying in the country of Amanguchen which is very sure and good for all winds and of great Trafficke you shall holde your course Northeast and Northeast and by East being about sixtéene myles This Lande which you goe vnto is very great and high and you runne all the aforesaid coast along to a Hooke or point of Lande East and West and East and by North and West and by South and from the Hauen of Caminaxique to the aforesayed Point about fortie Portingale myles whereof seuentéene and ½ make a degrée as all the myles in this description likewise doe in the which coast lyeth the Hauens hereafter following that is from Caminaxique to Toraque are about two myles and â— from Toraque to the Island Meagima are sixe myles and a halfe The Roade of this Island is betwéene it and the Firme Lande from Meagima to Camangary are a myle and a halfe from thence to the Island of Anooxyma are fiue myles From Anooxyma to Toumoo are also fiue miles
From thence to Xynaco are fiue myles From Xynaco to the Hauen of Vxymando are fiue myles From Vxymando to the Hauen of Muroo are fiue myles And this Hauen is about fiue myles more from the Hauen aforesaid Beyond the aforesaid point thrée or foure myles Eastward lyeth the Hauen of Fyongo and from thence sixe or seuen myles further is the Hauen and Bay of Sacay All this coast aforesaid is faire and cleare hauing all ouer anker ground These are as I said before all Portingale myles and two Iapon myles make iust a Portingall myle which is found to bée true by the Portingall Pilotes that haue therein taken the height of the Sunne and made their account after the Iapon myles The 32. Chapter The Nauigation from Lampaecon which lyeth by Macon in the coast of China to the Island of Iapon and from thence to the Island Firando with the description thereof by another Pilote SAyling from Lampacon to the Island of Iapon you must passe through the first issue or Channell of the South Island which reacheth South-eastward hauing a Cliffe or Island in the middle thereof betwéene the which and the point of the Island you must passe because of the scant winde making as neare as possiblie you can to the end of the Island alwayes with your Leade in hande And comming to the middle way of the Channell of the Island lying vnto Sea-warde you shall finde a sandie banke that in the middle hath not thrée fadome deepe You shall vse all the meanes you can to passe aboue a great and high Island which lyeth East Southeast from you Being about this Island with the other that lyeth to Sea-ward in the same rowe you shall passe along by the Island that lyeth to Seaward Six miles further from this Island you shall sée a row of Islands small Islands Cliffes and are nine reaching further out to seaward then all the rest that you passe by and lye North Northeast and South Southwest you cannot passe on the outside of them neither is it necessary but you must runne betwéene them and a great high Island full of Trées that lyeth to landward from you which Island as you come néere it sheweth as if it were round because you goe right vpon the point Notwithstanding it is long reaching as the coast doth Hauing past somwhat beyond it there is a channell that passeth betwéene it and another Island lying close by it Behind this last Island East Northeast there is a Hauen where some Ships come to lade certain Chinish wares and is not farre from the mouth or entry of Canton This Island aforesaid is by the Chinars called Tonquion From thence you shal runne East Northeast to sée the country that lyeth betwéene Chinchon and Chabaquon which is faire and cleare ground running two myles from it to shunne a Riffe that lyeth close by Chinchon which hath a round high Island lying close by the land you must runne the coast of Chaboqueo to Chinchon Northeast and Southwest and northeast and by East and Southwest and by west and whē you are right against Chinchon then about two miles into the Sea you haue a high round Island and within the land a high hill with a stony rocke on the top thereof like Pulo Varella in the coast of Champa and the entry is through some Islands this round Island afore is by the Chinars called Toanthea When you are right against Chincheo as aforesaid then runne East Northeast vntill you are eight or ten myles from the coast to kéepe without all the Islands and being there then runne Northeast in which course you shall see the Island of Lequeo Pequeno that little Lequeo lying vnder fiue and twenty degrées it is a very high and long island about eightéen miles distant from the coast of China when you are past Lequeo Pequeno comming into fiue and twenty degrees and ½ If you desire to make to the land of Bungo then runne Northeast and Northeast and by East in which course you shall fall vpon the Islands lying on the South side of the Island Tanaxuma which Islands begin at 29 degrées and ½ and reach to thirtie degrées and ½ and are in all seuen high and small Islands which reach one with the other that is the thrée first Islands Northeast and southwest and Northeast and by North and Southwest and by South the other thrée East Northeast and West Southwest and one at the end of them North and South These seuen Ilands being past six miles further North northeast you shal sée two other ilands lying east and west with each other wherof the East island is the smallest the East end thereof hauing a high houell which descendeth eastward making a low point You may well passe betwéene these two islands for there is a good channell The greatest of these two islands which is high and long is called Icoo from the east point whereof foure or fiue miles Northward lyeth the island of Tanaxuma which is a long island reaching North and south of seuen or eight miles long In the middle way of the same island on the East side lieth the Hauen which is a small Créeke within certaine stony cliffes but it is not best to put into it West Northwestward from this Hauen about a mile and a halfe there lyeth a smal flat land that hath a houell in the middle seuen or eight myles Northward from Tanaxuma you shall sée a great high land which reacheth tenne miles east and West which is the land of Iapon and at the end or point of this coast on the West side lieth the Creeke of Cangoxuma and the hauen of Amango aboue it hauing a high pointed top and right against the island of Tanaxuma North and North and by East lyeth the Créeke of Xebuxy that is very great hauing within it the Hauens of Minato Eoxima and Xaboxy all thrée Riuers for small Ships And lying on the East side on the right hand as you come West-ward into the Créeke sixe or seuen myles further North Northeast along the coast lyeth the Hauen of Tanora which is the least Hauen of Iapon If you desire to put to the said hauen of Tanora then you shall holde close to the shoare sayling néere vnto it for it is faire ouer all but you haue no anker ground nor Roades because it is déepe and when you passe by it being beyond the Créeke of Xebury then you shall come to a small Créeke which at the first sight séemeth to haue good harbour but being right against it it sheweth what it hath that is many stones and rockes reaching somewhat inward to land I note it here because thereby no man should deceiue himselfe Being past this small Créeke you presently see a great thicke and high point of land From this point y e land windeth inward where you shall see a sandie strand and two Islands with Trées lying there along At the end of the which Islands there are other smaller
Islands and Cliffes and a great Créeke At the issue of the Straight of Arima sixe miles forward lyeth an Island close by the coast called Cambexima which is a great high land hauing on the Sea side close by it foure or fiue Islands or cliffes and betwéene this Island and the Firme land there is a good harbour and in the same Island there is a village with many people with a good small Créeke or Hauen where many Fisher boats Foists doe lie from thence begin the Islands of Firando From this Island Cambexima fiue or sixe miles forward there is a point of land sticking out with many Islands and cliffes that reach from the land into the sea you must run to the same point northwestward This way from Cambexima to the aforesaide point of land is all one créeke because the land windeth inward and because that on this coast of Iapon commonly at such time as you goe thither it is cloudie mistie weather therefore you can hardly discerne the scituation of the land but if it be cléere weather you shall presently see the point sticking out that hath the Island and Cliffes at the end thereof but if it be cloudie and mistie weather then you must not saile along the coast but hold your course half a strike from the Northwest as aforesaid when you are hard by it you shall presently discouer all the Islands and cliffes The furthest to seaward of these Islands cliffes are two Islands separated from each other betwéene high and lowe and longer then round wholly without Trées and that which lyeth furthest to seaward hath two riffes reaching out from it one lying Eastward the other West Northwest about halfe a myle by the East Iland of these aforesaid two Islands as I was tolde if is faire and good ground close to it as it séemeth to be And vpon the North side it hath the harbour for the Monson of the South windes and if you haue occasion you may anker there From these aforesaide two Islandes to the lande there lyeth two Islandes or Cliffes in forme like two Pillars betweene these Cliffes and another Channell which the Islands begin to open before you many Iuncos or Chinish shippes doe passe laden with merchandises to Fâ—rando and the Hauen of Vmbra notwithstanding you shall leaue all these Islands or Cliffes on the East side or your right hand running about halfe a mile to Seaward from them and béeing right ouer-against these Islands then three or foure miles further in the same course of North Northwest there is another point of an Island stretching right Westward from the Land being a high and flat land on the top and in the first appearance it séemeth like three Islands although it is but one for it hath two broken partes and by that meanes maketh a shewe of thrée Ilands From the point of this Island thrée miles Westward to seaward you shall see a round Island hauing close by it a long small Island and if it be cléere weather West Southwest or West you shall see the Island of Goto which is very high and great with many rentes and clouen peeces on the toppe being all euen and flat ground When you sée the Island aforesaid that sheweth like three Islandes then runne straight vpon the point thereof that sticketh outward and if the tide chance to be against you with slatâ—e winde then the water by this point sticking out of the aforesaid Iland maketh a great roaring and hath much scumme so that it séemeth to be shallows which the water breaketh vpon notwithstanding it is all ouer faire and deepe therefore you may fréely put towards it without feare keeping a little from the point and in this manner passing about the point then you must saile along where you haue a great and good creeke where you shall put in till you find ten or eleuen fadome deepe it is hard ground where you may anker at pleasure it hath a good harbour for the winds of the Monson and being there you shall presently haue Barkes and Foâ—stes enough aboord your shippe that will bring you to Firando In the same créeke inward Eastward there is a Rode to anker with good harbour for all winds Likewise the length of the shotte of a great péece Northeastwarde lieth another Hauen that hath a good harbour for all winds wherein there may lie more ships then in the East Rode aforesaid If you chance to come into this country at such time as that you feare any foule weather then you may fréely lie in any of these Hauens where you lie safe from rouers and théeues that may come thither This Iland that seemeth to be thrée is called Faquyn and from thence to the Iland Firando are fiue miles From this Iland Faquyn if it be cléere weather you may well sée the Iland of Firando Northward from it but because for the most part you there find cloudie and mistie weather there is no certaintie but from the hauen where you lie you shall presently see a high and round Iland with some stonie rockes about it about halfe a mile from the rode of the aforesaid coast where you lie which reacheth North Northeast and North by West about two miles and a halfe from you you shall sée another long high and flatte Iland clouen in the middle and so sheweth to be two Ilands stretching East and West About halfe a mile from this iland lieth a great round Cliffe betwéene this Cliffe and the round Ilande that lyeth halfe a mile from the Hauen of the aforesaid Iland there is a great créeke which maketh a chanell through the which you passe to the Hauen of Vmbra and when you sée the Island that sheweth like two Ilands runne right vpon it to the Hooke or end thereof lying in the East to the which you shall go within the shot of an arrow as also by the great Cliffe that lyeth Eastward from you running inward then you shall sée a verie long land which is the coast that maketh the strait or channell betwéene the land and the Iland of Firando you must shunne all the land that lieth on the East side for it is all ouer foule ground as you passe about by the aforesaid Iland which is called Caroxyma leauing it on the West side about the length of the shot of an arrowe from the ende thereof you shall sée two Islandes whereof that Westwarde is long the other lying right before you béeing rounde hauing a stonie Cliffe which you must shunne and then presently you shall sée two other Cliffes which shall all lie Westward from you and béeing there you shall sée the Island of Firando lying before you being about two small miles from you you may fréely make towardes it for it is all ouer faire and passe aboue the coast of the Firme lande that lieth Eastward When you are by the Islands and cliffes then there are certaine small Channels which you shall shunne kéeping close
or end Northeastward of the same Island lyeth full vnder 29. degrees ½ for there I tooke the height of the Sunne with calme weather being about fiue or sixe myles from it and from this Northeast point the coast of the Island runneth Southeast at the end thereoâ— hauing another great and high Island making a small Channell that runneth betweene them both and it seemeth that on the Norâ—heast side there is a good Rode for the Monson of South and Southwest windes and along by this coast of Lequeo for the space of three daies we had calme weather and after that wee had a good gale of winde of the Monson and I thinke wee had so great a calme because wee kept so close vnto the shoare About fiue and twentie degrées and â— from the point of Lequeo wee helde our course Northeast and Northeast and by East till wee came vnder nine and twentie degrees Ten miles from Lequeo forwarde wée sawe great store of Cuttle bones driuing on the water and many other shelles that were verie white shewing farre off much like vnto Cotton but it was not long that they draue any thing thicke for in short space after wee might perceiue them scattered abroad verie thinne and but verie few vntill wée came vnder 26. degrées Comming vnder 29. degrées wée held our course halfe a strike East Northeast for the space of eight or nine miles till the Sunne-setting and then wée perceiued right before vs a round and high Island being about sixe miles from it which was the first and furthest Island Westward of the seuen Islandes which at this present are called As Sete Irmaas that is the seuen sisters which lie vnder 29. degrées and ½ This first Island hath a sharpe point on the West side in the middle at the foot thereof hauing a stone in forme of a Pillar like the Varella in the straight of Singapura by Malacca and on the Northeast side about halfe a mile from thence there lieth a round blacke Cliffe Béeing in the sight of this Island wée presently ranne North and by East as before all that night and in the morning béeing right against it wee sawe all the rest of the seuen Islands and still held our course Northeast vntill we were before the last of the said seuen Islands From whence about sixe miles Northward lyeth two Islands stretching East West whereof that in the East is verie long and high full of blacke shining trées and that in the West much lesse and lower at the East end or point of the lesser Iland there is a high houell that descendeth Westward making a long and lowe point These islands are about a mile distant from each other Westward from this Island about two miles and a halfe there is another island as great and high as the other aforesaid the first great high Island aforesaid is called Icoo and the aforesaid seuen Islands shall all lie on the Southeast side from you and from the first to the last they may be about seuen or eight miles when wee were at the end of the seuen Islands we held our course Northeast towardes the channell that runneth betwéene the great high Island and the Iland that hath the long low point where we passed through comming out againe on the North side This channell is faire and deepe without any cliffes or stones Foure miles Northwestward from this Channell lyeth a verie high and round Island which on the West side seemeth to be full of Cliffes This Iland hath a Mine of Brimstone which lyeth in the middle thereof A mile Northward from this fiery Island lyeth another small and lowe Island and from the aforesaide fiery Islande about eight miles Eastward lyeth the Island of Tanaxuma aforesaid the great high Island of Icoo aforesaide lying on the East side of the Channell on the North side thereof hath a lowe Lande and all along by it is verie good harbour béeing faire and good ground reaching foure or fiue miles East and West Thrée miles Northward from the East end of this Island of Icoo lyeth the aforesaide Island of Tanaxuma as it is also declared in the Description of the Course and Nauigation to the Island of Ferando This Island of Tanaxuma stretcheth North and South béeing altogither low Land and full of Houels and Valleyes with Pine trées that stand farre distant one from the other and is about seuen or eight miles long and in the middle thereof on the West side lyeth a Hauen within certaine Cliffes and Rockes and a mile and a halfe West Northwestward from this Hauen lyeth a very small and lowe Island with a little Houell in the middle On the North end of this smal Iland there are some stones rocks sticking out about the length of the shotte of a great péece all the rest is faire Likewise betwéene this Island and Tanaxuma it is all ouer faire and cleere Seuen or eight miles Northward from the Island of Tanaxuma lyeth the great and high Land of Iapon which coast on the South side stretcheth East and West for the space of ten myles from the channell aforesaid that runneth betweene the Islandes you can not see Tanaxuma vnlesse it bée faire and cleere weather wee ranne East Northeast and were about three miles distant from the aforesaide Channell before wee discouered Tanaxuma as likewise the great land of Iapon which as I saide before is verie high stretching East and West about tenne miles and because Tanaxuma stretcheth North and South being lowe land and the land of Iapon high therefore in that place where wée were they seemed vnto vs like one Lande because they reach each through other Wherevpon the Chinish Pilote which wee had at that time aboord our shippe thought then to be all one land but when we put nearer to it then wée began to sée the Channell that runneth betwéene them beeing distant one from the other crosse ouer about seuen or eight miles and in that manner wée ranne halfe a strike East Northeast towardes the land of Iapon it being flood where the tide ranne Eastward towards the small Island that lyeth by Tanaxuma driuing vs thither whereby we had much labour and paine to get aboue it passing about the length of the shot of a great péece from it wherefore it is necessarie for a man to runne Noâ—theast vntill hée be past that small Iland aforesaid When we had passed about the Island of Tanaxuma wée ranne North Northeast towards the coast being three myles distant from it and right against the creeke of Xebuxij we had a calme beeing the last of Iune hauing departed from the Island called A Ilha das Outeas lying on the West side of the mouth or channell of Macau the nintéenth of the same moneth hauing Sailed toward Iapon about eleuen dayes whereof we had thrée daies calme so that our Sailes lay flat to the Mastes being vnder the Island of Lequeo as aforesaid The 34. Chapter Another description of the course from
the Hauen of Macau along by the Island of China to the Island of Fyrando and the Islands lying about it to the Hauen of Vmbra in the coast of Iapon with a description of other Hauens lying thereabout where they ordinarily vse to trafficke IF you desire to Saile out of Macau towardes Iapon in the Monsons of Iune and Iulie and if in setting out you can not kéep to loofeward from a cliffe which you may easily perceiue lying by Macau which sheweth like a saile you neede not feare it for that leauing the Island Lanton on the Lée side you may runne whither you will for it is all faire and you need not feare any thing when yea are without the Island you shall hold your course towardes the Island Branco that is the white Island or the white Stonie Cliffes running East Northeast towardes the Island of Lamon and if you haue a faire winde and that you depart about Euening from the said Island then on the Firme land you shall sée a great high Land on the East side descending somewhat flat and in the middest thereof hauing a round houell like a loofe of bread The depthes all along by that coast about two miles from it is thirtie and fiue and thirtie fadome deepe being muddie ground From Ilha Branco to Lamon there are diuers small Islandes lying by the coast of the Firme Land In this place for twelue miles or thereabouts on this side Lamon and seuen or eight miles from the Firme land there is small black sand with some shels at seuen and twentie and eight and twentie fadomes water and being there you shall stil runne East Northeast although you see no land for that hauing the aforesaid depth and ground you passe fréely and safely from the Riffe of the island Lamon and if it so fall out that you see no land yet by the depthes and ground you may well know where you are for from the island Lamon to Macau the depthes of the aforesaid ground is from 25. to 28. fadome déepe and by Lamon and thereabouts the ground is white small and thinne with some blacke sande and if you chance to passe by it in close and darke weather then you shall hold your course as aforesaide East Northeast for it is the best way and when you make towardes the island of Lamon and finding the depthes of fifteene or sixtéene fadome it is a signe that you are farre to seaward for in that country the streame runneth very strong East Southeastward there as then you must runne Northeastward so to holde your right course And running at the depthes of fiue and twentie or eight and twentie fadome sandie ground it is a good way holding your course East Northeast for in that sort you are in the right way in the middle way from the channell when you are past the Island of Lamon towardes Chinchon then the streame runneth with you and hauing the wind of the Monson the next day you shall sée land on both sides whereof that you find on the Stearebord side is the end or point of the Island Lequeo Pequeno or small Lequeo and the beginning of the Island called Ilha Fermosa that is the faire Island and on the lareboord side the Lande lyeth in forme like a hooke although it is none but it is the Island of A Ilha dos Cauallos of the Island of Horses which is very high lying vnder fiue and twenty degrées and a third part on the one side about foure or fiue miles to Sea-ward from it hauing the Island of Baboxyn and hauing séene this Lande you must holde your course Northeastward which is a good way so to runne outward of all the Islands for that from this Island of Horses forward to the Cape of Sumbor there are many Islands reaching into the Sea wherfore this is your best course to goe to the Cabo de Sembor and as you thinke you are right against y e Cape of Sumbor although you sée it not you need not feare it for that as then you are about eight or ten myles from it Being in this country you shall holde your course Northeast so to sée the Island of Puloma or Meaxuma or the Island Guoto for it is a good course for the winds of the Monson or if you haue any stormes or contrary winde whereby you cannot holde your right course then you must gouerne your selfe in such manner that you may fall againe into your right course and so to sée some of those Islands This aforesaid Island of Puloma lyeth North North-east and South Southwest with the Island Guoto about tenne or twelue miles distant from each other and is deuided into foure or fiue parts with many holes péeces of ground round about it yet you need not feare for close by it there are many other péeces of ground which I knowe as hauing seene them all From this Island aforesaid to the Hauen of Vmbra or the Island of Firando you must runne your course of Northeast wherewith you shall sée the land lying beneath Vmbra which is very high hauing along y e coast many small Islands among the which are two Cliffes that sticke out with very hard sharpe Points like Diamonds From thence to Vmbra are sixe or seuen miles and being there about a mile from the Lande you shall holde your course North and so runne along by the coast and being by it you shall kéepe close to it to know the Lande and markes thereof which are these that when you are close by the Land on the right hand there is a Point of Land from whence there lyeth two Islandes to Seaward which is hard by the entry of Vmbra for from this Point inward you runne Northeast towards it Vpon this Hooke or point are three Pine Trees and being right against this point to Sea-ward from it on the left hand you shall sée a smal Island with a round cliffe you must runne within this Cliffe whereby right before you shall see the land of Vmbra When you perceiue a great Island or Cliffe which is very plaine and descending downeward lying inward to Sea then on the Lande side you shall sée great store of wéedes driuing vpon the Water This Island you must leaue on the Lareboord or left hand running betweene it and the Land for it is about halfe a myle broad From this Island to the mouth or entry of the channell are two miles with a Northeast course whereby you shall presentlye sée the entry which is very broad From this Island or Cliffe there runneth a stony rocke reaching to the mouth of the Riuer some part of it lying aboue water and part couered yet you may plainely sée it so that you néed not feare any thing but that you sée before your eies Betweene this Rocke and the Lande on the right hand in the middle way there is fiftéene or 18 fadome déep muddy ground when you see the mouth of the Channell you must put right
towards it without feare for it is a very good way And being within this straight or channell whereby you discouer the Riuer then you must holde your course on the right hand whereby you shall presently sée a round Island hauing a Crosse on the toppe thereof and although you sée not the entry yet you must put towards that Island for when you are right against it then you shall preently see the Road wherein the shippes doe lye as also a Portingale Church standing vpon the Lande and béeing within you must runne South-warde about the length of the shot of a great Péece where you may anker at tenne fadome déepe being very good muddye ground and there you shall make your Shippe fast on the North Northeast and South South-west sides and euen as the Winde dooth blowe you shall winde the Béeke heade of the shippe making the ankers fast vnder the stones for there it is very narrowe Notwithstanding you néed not feare although the wind be great Take héed when you come from Cabo de Sumbor from y e coast of China towards the land of Iapon although you see not the Islands aforesaid leaue not your course of Northeast vntill you be vpon the coast of Iapon for although you fall by the Hauen of Arima which is twelue miles from Vmbra you néede not care for in those places you haue very good Hauens By the Hauen of Arima aforesaid there lyeth an Island somewhat néerer the North then the South called Cabexuma which on the inside hath a very good Hauen where you may lye and Trafficke freely And if from thence you desire to runne further inward then holde your course North Northeast and Northeast and by North wherewith you shall come to a Hauen called Cochinochy lying in the Kingdome of Arima and departing from Cabexuma you shall runne along by the Northpart of the land about seuen or eight myles whereby you shall come right against Cochinochy which is a better hauen then Vmbra because therein the Shippes may anker at pleasure and before you come néere this Hauen many Shippes and Barkes will come aboord you shippe which wil fréely bring you in and you néed not feare the creeke of Arima for the old Pilotes were in doubt thereof because they knew it not so well as I for that I haue sayled all within and about it with a Foist with trouble ynough Right against Cochinochy lyeth another very good Hauen called Oxy belonging to the King of Bungo where you may freely trafficke You need not feare the entry of Arima for that besides the hauens aforsaid wherin you may lye safely there will many Foystes and Barkes come and boord you Shippe that will bring you whether you will and helpe you to your desire You must likewise vnderstand that along by the coast of China you need not feare any thing for it is all faire and good ground keeping without all the Islands for if you goe betwéene them you should hardly get out againe to your desire therefore it is best for you to keepe without them running along by them and so there is no feare for it is all faire way as well to the Island Firando as to the Hauen of Vmbra onely that Firando lyeth seuen or eight myles North-ward from the Hooke or Point of Trées and being there you shall presently sée Firando and in putting forward to it you find a Varella that is a marke of a sharpe stony hill then you shall gouern your selfe as aforesaid for then you may presently perceaue it being a very high land which stretcheth East Northeast West Southwest in the middle way hauing many small Islands with channels betwéene them thereby to runne from the one side to the other but if you wil go from the Island of Cabexuma to Vmbra you must alwaies kéepe close to the land for in the Island of Diamonds or pointed Island there is another very good hauen where as soone as you are in sight thereof many Barkes and Foists will boord you and so bring in your Shippe The Hauens in those countries are these that follow as well in the Land of Iapon as the Islandes lying about it whereof in this description I haue alreadie made mention First in the Island of Cabexuma there is a very good Hauen also Cochinochy lying in the Kingdome of Arima is a better Hauen The Hauen of Oxy right against Cochinochy is also a better Hauen In the Island called O Ilha do Diamon that is the Island of the Diamond because of the sharpe pointed Rocke there is likewise a very good Hauen which is part of the Lande of Vmbra also the Hauen of Vmbra is a good Hauen The 35. Chapter A short description of the course from Macau in China to Iapon and the Island Cabexuma to the Hauen of Langasaque or Nangasache which at this day is most frequented of the Portingales with all the courses and scituations by an expert Pilote with a declaration of the winds called Tuffon AS soone as you are past y e Island of Ilha do Leme which lyeth as you come out from Macau then hold your course East northeast wherby you shal passe about the Island of Lamon and if it be in the night time you shall cast out your Lead and find two and twenty and thrée and twenty fadome déep with shels and blacke sand on the ground and then you are right against the Riffe and when you are past it you shall finde white and small sand Then holding your course Northeast and Northeast and by East alwaies kéeping from the coast of Chinchon as much as you may for the best way is to runne in the middle of the channell as far from the Island of fishers as from the coast of Chincheo And if you goe néerer the Island of Fishers called A Ilha dos pescadores you shall finde lesse depth and therefore you must look to your course and when you are past the Island Lamao cast out your Lead because of the Island of fishers And if in those countries you haue a storme with the winds called Tuffon and come from the Northeast parts then hold your course to Seaward as much as you may to shunne the coast for the wind without doubt will be southeast which is right vpon the coast whereby it lyeth right against you and if it driueth you not vpon the coast then it were best for you to strike all your sayles and take them in and so lye driuing vntil the wind come South and then to follow on your course againe I giue you this counsell because that for the space of two yeares one after the other I haue béen in those countries with storms of the winds called Tuffon so that one voiage we were almost cast away by séeking to put vnto the coast Nowe to vnderstand the meaning of this word Tuffon it is a Chinish word which the Portingales also doe holde without altering the same and signifieth a storme or Tempest
which you commonly finde in those voyages from China to Iapon If you faile of it at sometime it is not often it commeth and beginneth from one point and so runneth with a continuall storme almost about all the points in compasse blowing most stiffely whereby the poore Sailers haue worke ynough in hande and in such sort that not any stormes throughout all the orientall Indies is comparable vnto it wherefore it is necessary to looke well to it and to chuse your times that by calmes sodainely you bee not vnaduisedly ouertaken as euery man that hath sayled those wayes can sufficiently showe you and euery one or most part of them haue found it to be so When you are right against the Island A Ilha Fermosa then runne Northeast by the which course you shall goe right vpon the straight of Arima which is a good way and as soone as you finde ground on the loofe side and haue seuentie fiue fadome water then you shall goe right vpon the middle of the Island of Meaxuma and hauing lesse depth then your course is not good but of force you must séeke another course to sayle the better but being too loofeward it is good especially when you see the Island Sancta Clare which is a smal Island on the Northeast side thereof hauing two or thrée Cliffes and somewhat farther forward the Island Coâ—aquyn which is very great being deuided into thrée parts I haue passed by the land side thereof which is a very good way and there you néede not feare any thing but onely certaine stones that lye along by the Island which you may easily perceiue for the Sea breaketh vpon them You must holde your course along by it leauing the stones on the larboorâ— side about the length of the shot of a Base from you and when you are past them then kéepe aloofe as much as you may inward to Sea thereby to shunne thrée Islandes or Cliffes which lye on the other side right ouer against the thicke and great Lande for betwéene them and it it is all full of Riffes And therefore your best course is to runne to Seaward from the Island of Coiaquyn in the middle way from the aforesaid great thicke Lande that lyeth before the Islandes or Cliffes of the Riffes lyeth the Hauen of Amacusa which is very great where the Créeke of Arima beginneth From thence North North westward from you you shall presently sée the Island of Cabexuma When you are right against Cabexuma somewhat beyond it you shall sée sixe Islands or Cliffes which you shall passe on the Sea side and then East-warde and East and by North you shall sée the Island called Ilha dos Cauallos or of Horses which on the Sea side hath a great houell and on the other side towardes the Island of Firando two Cliffes lying along by the coast which shew like two Ships vnder sayle Also further forward towards Firando there is two flat Islands lying along the coast called the Islands of Resting as that is the Islands of Riffes If when you come out of the Sea you haue cause to anker before you put into the Hauen being by the Islands or Cliffes then put out newe Cables making them fast that you loose not your ankers for there it is very déepe and sharpe Being right against the aforesaid six or seuen Islands or Cliffes then runne right vpon the Island Dos Cauallos and when you are by it that is inward of the point You shall along by the Island sée a Sand aboue the water all the other Islandes and Cliffes that you shall sée shall lye on the lareboord side which is vpon the side of the Island Facunda and so you shall runne till you enter into the Hauen of Langasaque hauing nothing to feare then that you sée before your eyes for there you haue both Sea and ground as it is vpon the coast of Spaine The 36. Chapter A voyage made from Macau in China to the hauen of Langasaque or Nangasache in the Island of Iapon in the shippe called the S. crus the captaine being a Portingall called Francisco Pais and the Gunner Dericke Geritson of Enchuisen in the yeare of our Lord 1585 written by the Pilote of the same shippe THe fift of Iuly Anno 1585 vpon a Friday in the morning wée set sayle from the point that lyeth right against the Cloister of S. Frauncis minding to runne to Loofeward from a round Island or Cliffe lying East Southeast from thence but because the wind was so scant wee could not doe it so that we were forced to driue so to get through the Channell of Lanton as wee did The depth that wee found therein was from fiue to sixe fadome water and that was close by the round Island that lyeth to Seaward from the Island of Lanton and from thence forward it beginneth to bee déeper being eightéene twenty fadome and that depth wee found till wee were without the Island called A Ilha de Leme that is the Island of the Harquebush This Island of Lanton as you make towards it hath a point where the wind fell very scarce in such manner that wee could hardly kéepe of an Island lying on the left hand of the chanell if the streame had not beene so strong that it draue the shippe ouerthwart to Loofeward otherwise we had indured great labor and trouble to passe through the channell because that towards night we were about foure miles from the Island Ilha do Leme the course wee held that night was East and East and by South because wee had a sharpe wind hauing twenty and sixe and twenty fadome déep muddy ground about sunne rising wée sawe right before vs the Island of Branco or the white cliffe and because of the depths aforesaid wée gessed that we were about half a mile beyond it The sixt of Iuly being Saterday we could not take the height of the sunne because it was right ouer our heads hauing a Southeast and South Southeast wind with very hote weather by day but by night it was somewat colder we held our course East Northeast East and east and by North as the winde blewe and about noone we found fiue and twenty and seuen twenty fadome water with small black sandy ground being in sight of lande and at Sunne rising we sawe the Land of Lamon which is a long flat land like a Table or plaine field on the East Northeast side hauing a thin point of Land reaching inward to the Sea and on the West southwest side there runneth out another thinne point of sand into the sea and hard by against the thickest part thereof you sée the forme of a white place which is the Island of Lamon to Seaward whereof lyeth thrée Cliffes Lying at the end of the Riffe of the Island of Lamon there wée call forth our Leade and found 27 fadome water with small white and some blacke sand with small shels among it being about seuen or eight miles from the
night at the depths of ninetéene twenty and two and twenty fadome with so clear bright a sky that almost all the night we saw the coast and when day began to appear we were somwhat beyond the Islands called Ruy Lobo and presently thervpon we saw the Island of Lamon there we beganne to haue certain stormes as I gesse it is from Ilhas de Ruy Lobo to the Island of Lamon ten miles by the Island of Lamon we saw the water shynne and burne to Seaward in such sort that wee passed close by the Riffe those that come from Iapon must first passe by the Island and then by the Riffe this Riffe lieth Northeast southwest and is dangerous for those that saile from Macau to Iapon we ran about thrée miles from it with a strong northeast and East Northeast winde so that wee made good way whereby it séemed we made fifty miles in one meale tide but the strēgth of y e water and streames against vs were so stiffe that we sailed but fiue and twenty myles in a mealetide This strong streame and stiffe water commeth as we were informed out of the Riuer of Tancoan and continueth till you be past the Island Branco being past it the streame runneth presently towards the Island Ilha de Leme which lyeth close by Macau from Lamon we ran West southwest and in truth we found the way from Lamon to Ilha Branco very short for by night wee stroke all our sayles and so lay driuing without sailes winding Southwest alwaies at the depths of fiue and twentie and six and twenty fadome water and at the midnight watch we began to hoise vp our maine saile and our foukesaile in that manner running West to get to twenty fadome deepe which is the middle of the chanell where we must passe through and in the morning we saw the Island Do Leme that is the Island of the harquebush lying somwhat on y e lareboord of vs. This Island Do Leme if you go east and West vpon it séemeth very small and the déeper you are within the channell the bigger it sheweth in the entry wherof on the right hand it hath two Islands or Cliffes and from thence forward the Islands begin to lye on a rowe till you come to Macau as I said in another place The 42. chapter An instruction and large declaration of the course from the Island Firando in Iapon to the coast of China the hauen of Macau with all the courses situations and stretchings of the same done by a Portingale Pilote HE that desireth to saile from the Island Firando to Macau or Canton in China as soone as he is out of the hauen of Firando if he hath time inough to get to the Island Guoto he must presently saile forward if not hée must anker about a mile from Firando at 28 fadome déepe where hee may prepare himself and make fast his boat y t the next day in the morning he may set saile As soon as you are set out from Firando to follow on your course you must runne along by the land of Firando till you bee at the end thereof and as you run south west vntil you be by the land you shal hold somwhat néerer south-west and then on your West side there will bee 3. or 4. Islands and passing by the formost of them southward you shall presently sée the channell that runneth betwéen that Island and the Island Guoto and through it you must passe By this channel there lieth another Island betwéen the which and the Island Guoto you must likewise passe when you are through and out of this Channell and that the Islands westward from you then you must runne along by Guoto vntil you are past it to seaward so to kéepe on further your course and if in passing through the channel the wind chanceth to be still you may boldly anker therein close by the land of Guoto In this Island Guoto are very good Hauens which passe through and through againe therfore it is not one Island but deuided into foure parts Whē you are two myles from Guoto you must hold your course West Southwest vntill you are past the two Islands one called Xuma y e other Meaxuma which are eight myles distant from the Island of Guoto Being past those Islands you must run Southwest néerer south from the aforesaid Islands there is another Island called Meaxuma which you must likewise passe by by those Islands aforesaid it is all faire way without any trouble neither yet by the Island this Island lyeth vnder 31 degrées and 1 ◠You must run betwéene the Island and the smal Islands and whē you are past them the Island of Guoto then you must runne Southwest southwest and to south When you are past this and the other Islands running southwest as aforesaid you shal goe right vpon the point of Cabo de Sumbor which lieth on y e coast of China vnder 28 degrées ◠◠and if it be clear weather y t you there desire to know the land you may well doe it if not then put not too neer the coast because of the many Islands that lie all along by it for you must runne outward from it alwaies kéeping as far from it as you thinke néedefull that you may be frée from it and by night not to put in betwéene it for that all the coast from Cabo de Sumbor to Chinchon is nothing but Islands You must likewise sée that you put not too farre inward to Sea to kéepe close to the winds that blowe off the Land and to Sea-ward you haue the Islands of small Lequeo called Lequeo Pequeno and the Island of fishers which are distant from the Firme land about twenty miles if you haue a cléere night you may well passe along by the Islands yet with great foresight The most daungerous Island vpon that coast is the Island of Camaroyns which lyeth to Sea-ward out from all the rest I haue passed twice betwéene it and the Land it is an Island that is deuided in two partes by a rent or breach that is in it Foure myles forward beyond this Island lyeth a small Island which is flat and euen with the Sea hauing certain stones lying Northeastward from it but not many If you chaunce to passe by it in the night time you must bee carefull to auoid it for it is flat and little without any trées you must likewise shun the Island of Baboxyn which likewise lieth outward into the Sea in such sort that when you fall vpon it with good aduise and warely you may fréely passe by it for you néede feare nothing then what you see before you And when you are fiftéene myles from Cabo de Sumbor accounting from y e point of the firm land and not from the Islands lying by it thē you must hold your course Southwest and so run without all the Islands whereby you shall be out of danger of the Island
the Sunne and when the Sunne in the rising or setting is red and of a dead couler and so darke that you may sée it round about not casting forth any beames it signifieth calme weather The like doth the Moone In the time of the monson when the Northeast winds doe commonly blowe and that the clouds at the Sun-setting bée red then it signifieth North winds when in diuers places of the sea you sée skumme driuing vpon the water as white as Cotton being about a finger long then it signifieth tempests and foule weather This skum procéedeth of the small waues that breake wherof there are many in y e place In the moneth of Iuly there bloweth other winds in those places then the monson running from one place to the other till in the end they be northeast then it is certain it will be tempest foule weather If from the Island of Lamao to the Cape of Sumbor in the manson of the South and Southwest winds you find an East winde with great heate and same great droppes of water it signifieth foule weather The 48. Chapter In what dayes and moneths you find tempests and foule weather in the coast of China FRom the seuenth to the eleuenth of Iune often and commonly vpon the coast of China there are great tēpests From the beginning of Iuly to the 26. of the same moneth you are neuer frée nor out of danger of tempests and foule weather for that all that time you haue foule stormie weather the wind neuer staying in one place but running round about the compasse From the 12. of August forward in the whole Moone of September to the end of October all that time there is continually foule weather The 49. Chapter Of the times of faire weather vpon the coast of China THe whole moneth of Iune except it be from the seuenth to the eleuenth day there is very litle soule weather for that vnlesse it be vpon the daies aforesaid you haue the windes of the monson with faire and cléere weather without stormes to saile from the Island Pulo Cantao to the Islandes Cantao and Macau without stormes you must set saile on the 26. of Iuly and saile till the 12. of August and all that time you are without tempests In the middle way from the Island of Iapon to the coast and land of Liampo you haue alwaies West windes which blowe in Iapon in the moneths of Nouember and December The 50. Chapter A briefe description of the course from Macau in China to Noua Spaigna with the scituations of the countries PVtting out of the East channell of the Hauen of Macau then you must hold inward to sea as much as you may and hauing a contrarie winde runne as long as the wind giues you leaue to kéep that course but if the winde be scant whereby you may not holde your course Northeast or Northeast and by North then turne on the other side as long as the wind serueth that you may run Southeast for the space of thrée or foure daies for it is better to kéepe Southeast then to run Northward This course you shall holde as the winde serueth you vntill you think you are 300. miles from the land and being there you must run 200. or more miles beyond Iapon and although you holde your course North yet you néed not feare any thing kéeping good account of the wracking or winding of your compasse towardes the West for it might hinder you much running as often as you can Southeast or to Loofeward as also not leauing y e course of Northeast as often as you can vntill you be vnder the height In the gulfe you shal sée certaine great blacke birds which is a signe that you are farre to Seaward and if you sée them about euening that they stretch their legs out along by their tailes then looke to your selfe for it signifieth foule weather When you come within 200. miles or more of the other land then you shall loose the sight of those birdes and if the wind and weather driue you vnder many heights and that you sée many heapes of wéeds driuing vpon the water which are commonly séene when you are 100. and 120. myles inwarde to sea then you must runne on the outside of Iapon Southeastward till you be vnder 31. and 32. degrées and as then knowing the land which will lie hard by whē you see it first you must runne without it and beware you run not vpon the Island called Ilha de Sedros that is the Island of Cedar trées and make no account by the course of the Sea or compasse for the Island of Cedars lyeth by the Cape of S. Lucas béeing verie false in the course because the land if it lay by it doth come more and likelier out then it doth towardes the South The Cape of Saint Lucas is a high land and sheweth when you are hard by it as if it had stonie cliffes sticking out of it the end thereof béeing verie blacke shining and darke the Land thereof presently running inwards towards the North and if you néed fresh water within the cliffes of the said Cape of S. Lucas there is a great sandie strande where you haue a verie good Rode to anker where close by the sea you find great store of fresh water From thence you shall crosse ouer to the other side vpon the Southeast bough without the Marias which is a better course then inward all the coast is faire and good so that you may well runne along by it vntill you come to certaine cliffes lying by the Hauen called El Puerto de la Natiuidad where within the créeke you presently finde the Hauen of Saint Iago de Colima the marks wherof are those On the East side it hath a round houell that descendeth downward if you be forced to put into it you must vnderstand that it hath a great mouth or entrie aboue two or thrée miles wide wherin you haue no cause to feare any thing but that you sée before your eies you must runne into it till you be cleane within the point where you haue a riuer of fresh water that runneth into the Sea where you shall find Spanish Fishermen if you desire to saile further you must frō thence to the hauen of Acapulco run for the space of 80. miles along by the shore for it is verie faire and cleare till you be at the end of the high land that is to the Hauen called El Puerto del Marques which a farre off sheweth like an Island but when you goe so néere it that you may well discerne it to be firme land then on the vpper part thereof you shall sée some white stones which shewe like white Runderen that goe in the way you may fréely runne towardes it till you begin to sée the mouth therof and then put into it This in briefe in my opinion is the best course that you may bold in this voiage which I would likewise haue holden if I
had gone thorough with the voiage The 51. Chapter A true description of the course from the Islands of Los Lucones or to the Hauen of Acapulco in new Spaine and how you should saile thither from Macau in China with a note of the commodities and profits made by the wares and merchandises of China with the scituation course times and miles of the same countries all particularly set downe for such as desire to trauell into those countries YOu shall put out of the Hauen of Manilla lying in the Island of Lucones vnder 14. degrées ½ on the North side of the Equinoctial line the mouth being Southwest in the moneths of Iune and Iuly as wind weather serueth to put out running along the coast of the same Island and betwéene the Island of Mindoro or by the East point vntill you be out of the Channell where you enter when you come out of the sea lying 100. miles from Manilla vnder 13. degrées and 1 â— betwéene the last and the furthest point of the same Island of Lucones and the point of another Island called Tandaya betwéene the which the aforesaid channell doth runne and when you are out of the Channell you must runne Eastward as long as the winde serueth which course you shall alwaies hold vnlesse the wind let you because you depart vnder 13. degrées and â…“ sailing to the hauen of Acapulco lying vnder 17. degrées but because the winde in those countries in Summer which is the time that men set saile as aforesaid is very slacke although it be the monson in such manner that when it beginneth to rise you may not hold your course Eastward as long as the winde is not Southeast you must still runne Northeast as long as you can but when it is East Southeast and East then you must wind Southward till the wind serueth to runne Northeast in this manner you saile 1700. miles to the coast of the countrey of Noua Spaigna still kéeping to seaward from the Island of Iapon as much as possibly you can because that certaine shippes that went late to Saile passing close by Iapon had stormie weather and saw the Island called A Ilha do Fogo that is the fiery Island one of them putting into the Hauen of Xaxuma in the Island of Iapon there to sane it selfe as it did therefore such as kéepe 100. miles to Seaward from it holde a good course for that running farre to Loofeward from those Islandes you fall vpon the coast of new Spaine vnder small heights but wheÌ„ you fall on the coast vnder 35. degrées there you hold a good course but when you come to it vnder 38. and 40. degrées which is the furthest lande that is discouered or knowne called El Cabo de Mendosino you shall haue great labour and paine because that there you begin to haue high and hollowe waues by reason winter is at hand as also because the shippes comming from the Island of Lucones are but easily prouided of their necessaries When you sée the coast and lande of Noua Spaigna then you beginne to haue Northwest winds which from thence is a right fore winde because you runne almost all along that coast although in some places you kéepe somewhat further off because of the créekes that are therein you runne along by the coast which is all faire and cléere till you come to the Hauen of Acapulco which is sixe or seuen hundred miles And if you desire to saile thither from Macau in China you must be ready to set saile as soone as the winde is Southwest to put out with the coniunction of the Moone in the moneths of Iune and Iuly holding your course towards the furthest point or hooke of the Island of Lucones lying vnder 20. degrées called Cabo de Boâ—ador which is nintie miles from the Hauen of Macau From the Islands called Ilhas dos Baboranes lying by the coast of the same land and Cape de Boiadar to the Island of Caâ—agon that is the Island of the Kettle you runne East and West and when you are past those Islands running betwéene them then you must holde your course as you did from the Hauen of Manilla as aforesaide alwaies keeping it as much as wind and weather will permit which is the way the Spaniards doe now meane to saile running to the Islands of Maluco and from thence crosse ouer to Noua Spaigna which is the same course that Franciscus Gualle Captaine and Pilot of the shippe that came out of Noua Spaigna into the Hauen of Macau helde from whence hee departed againe the 25. of Iuly with a Southwest wind in the time and coniunction of a full moone with whome at the same time departed the shippe of Ayres Gonsaluâ—s de Miranda which captaine Gualle is said not to haue beene longer in his voiage then thrée moneths and a halfe to the coast and from thence a moneth and a halfe more to the Hauen of Acapulco and another shippe that the same yéere set saile from Manilla was betweene eight and nine moneths at sea and in the end arriued in the Hauen of Acapulco all then being almost dead aâ— the ships in manner spoiled and another shippe was but fiue moneths on the way but the ordinary voiage is about sixe moneths little more or lesse The reason why it is better sailing from Macau then from Manilla is because there you haue no hinderances nor lets but you may presently hold on your course as you are for the space of 10â— miles froÌ„ Manilla along through the chanell till you be out wherby some shippes haue consumed so much time that it was the cause that some of them were coÌ„strained to put back againe and could not performe their voiage but being in the mouth or issue of the channell aforesaid then it is a better voiage then from Macau because it lieth 150. miles further to Loofewarde if it had not the other hindrance of comming out as I said before When the ships saile from Noua Spaigna to Manilla or Macau then they set saile in Lent alwaies sailing with a forewind with the windes called Brisas which are East and East Northeast winds which doe blowe there with the monson of the time and it chanceth often times that many of them saile 50. or 6â— daies togither without striking any of the sailes still hauing a full wind neuer seeing any land nor till this day euer any ship was cast away in those countries The shippe wherewith you will make this voiage must be very good to saile in a wind as also very well prouided of all necessaries specially a Spanish Pilot and 12. Saylors because that through all the coasts of the Orientall Indies they vse Indian Saylors as Arabians and such like that are not vsed nor can not skill of other voiages and would be verie farre to saâ—â—â— if they should be led a new course among the which it were good to haue some Spaniards such as haue sailed that
them with any Pâ—ppe but with small Foists and Barks of the countrey This shalâ—ow Channell lieth vnder 12. degrees and running thorough the aforesaid channell between the Islands Tycao and Buâ—yas as I said before we sailed Southward about 2. miles from the Island of Masbate which stretcheth East and West eight miles long being in breadth foure miles and lieth vnder 12. degrees and 1 â— in the middle thereof and is somewhat high land From the said channell betwéene Tycao and Buryas we held our course West Northwest for thirteene miles leauing the Island Masbate on the South side and the Island Buryas on the North side at the end of thirteene miles we came by an Island called Banton which is in forme like a Hat vnder 12. degrees and â…” when we had sailed the aforesaid thirtéene miles and eight miles more on the South side we left the Island called Rebuian which stretcheth Northwest and Northwest and by North and Southeast and Southeast and by South for the space of eight miles béeing high and crooked Lande whereof the North point lieth vnder 12. degrees and â— and there you finde 35. fadome deepe with white sand From the aforesaide Island of Banton Southward nine miles there beginneth and followeth three Islandes one called Bantonsilla which is a small Island in forme of a Sugar loofe the second Crymara beeing somewhat great in length reaching East and West about 2. miles the third Iâ—aa or the Isle of Goates hauing certaine Houels By all these Islandes aforesaide you may passe with all sortes of Shippes whereof the foremost lyeth Southward vnder 12. degrees and 1 â— from the Island Bantonsilla or small Bantoâ— we helde our course Northwest for the space of foure miles to the Channell betweene the Islands called de Vereâ—eâ— and the Island Marinduque the Vereâ—es lying on the South side vnder 12. degrées and ¼ which are two small Islands like two Frigâ—â—teâ— and the Island Marinduque on the North side vnder 12. degrees and â— which is a great Island stretching West Northwest and East Southeast hauing in length twelue and in breadth seuen miles On the North side with the Islande Lucon it maketh a long and small channell running somewhat crooked which is altogither full of shallowes and sandes wheâ—y no ships can passe through it The â—urthâ—â—â— point Wesâ—ward of the same Island lyeth vnder 1â— degrees and ¼ it is high lande on the East side hauing the forme of a miâ—e of brimstone or fiery hill and on the west side the land runneth downeward at the point thereof being round like a loafe of bread in the Channell betweene it and the Vereâ—es there are eighteene fadome deepe with small blacke sand From the aforesaide Channell of Vereâ—es and Marinduque we held our course West Northwest twelue miles to the lande of Mindoro to the point or Hooke called Dumaryn lying full vnder thirteene degrees fiue miles forwarde from the said Channell on the South side wee left an Island called Ilha del Maestro del Campo that is the Island of the Coronell lying vnder twelue degrées and ¼ which is a small and flat Island In this course wee had 45. fadome déepe with white sand By this point or end of the Island Marinduque beginneth the Island of Myndoro which hath in length East and west fiue and twentie miles and in breadth twelue miles whether of the furthest point Southward lieth vnder thirtéen degrées and the furthest point Northwarde vnder thirtéene degrées and 1 â— and the furthest point Westwarde vnder thirtéene degrees This Island with the Island of Lucon maketh a Channell of fiue miles broad and ten or twelue fadome déepe with muddie ground of diuers coulers with white sande Fiue miles forward from Marinduque lieth the riuer of the towne of Anagacu which is so shallowe that no shippes may enter into it From thence 2. miles further lieth the Islands called Bacco which are thrée Islands lying in triangle two of them being distant from the land about thrée hundred cubits and betwéene them and the land you may passe with small shippes and from the lande to the other Island are about two hundred cubites where it is altogither shallowes and sandes so that where the shippes may passe outward about 150. cubits from the land you leaue both the Islands on the south side running betwéen the third Island and the riuer called Rio del Bacco somewhat more from the middle of the Channell towards the Island which is about a mile distant from the other the Channell is ten fadome déepe withâ—â—ood and shelles vpon the ground the riuer of Bacco is so shallowe that no shippes may enter into it From this Island with the same course two miles forward you passe by the point called El capo de Rescaseo where wee cast out our Lead and found that a man may passe close by the land and there you shall find great strong streames and halfe a mile forward with the same course lyeth the towne of Myndoro which hath a good hauen for shippes of three hundred tunnes Three miles Northward from the same Hauen lyeth the Island called Cafaa stretching East and West béeing Hill ground From the said towne of Myndoro wée helde our course West Northwest eight myles till wée came to the point or hooke of the Sandes called Tulen lying vpon the Island of Lucon which Sande or Banke reacheth into the sea halfe a mile from the coast you must kéepe about an hundred cubites from it where you finde eight fadome water muddie and shelly ground you runne along by those sands North and North and by West for the space of two myles till you come to the riuer called Rio de Anasebo all the rest of the coast called De los Limbones to the mouth or entrie of the Baye called Manilla which are foure miles is sayled with the same course The Limbones which are Islands so called are high in forme like a paire of Organs with good Hauens for small shippes running along by the Limbones and two miles beyond them on the South side wee leaue the Islands of Fortan and foure Islands more but the thrée Islandes of Lubao which are verie lowe lying vnder thirteene 13. degrées and 1 â— and the Limbones lie in the mouth or entrie of the Baye of Manilla vnder 14. degrées and ¼ From thence wée ranne Northwest for the space of sixe miles to the Hauen of Cabite kéeping along by the land lying on the West side where it is shallowe and is called Los Baixos del Rio de Cannas the shallowes of the riuer of Réedes all along this Baye in the same course there is from ten to foure fadome deepe Beeing by the point or Hooke of Cabite then wee kept but an hundred paces from it running Southwest South Southwest South vntill wee discouered the whole mouth or entrie of the bay where wée might anker at foure fadome about two hundred cubits from the â—and and then the towne of Manilla was two
miles Northward from vs. The 53. Chapter The course and voiage of the aforesaid Franciscus Gualle out of the Hauen or Roade of Manilla to the Hauen of Macau in China with all the courses and scituations of the places SAyling out of the Hauen of Cubite lying in the Bay of Manilla wée helde our course Westward for the space of eightéene myles to the point called El Cabo de Samballes and when wée were eight miles on our way wée left the two Islandes Maribillas on the South side and sailed about a mile from them the point of Samballes aforesaid lyeth vnder fourtéene degrées and â…” being low lande at the end of the same coast of Lucon on the West side FroÌ„ the hooke or point aforesaid we ran North and North and by West for the space of fiue and thirtie miles about a mile from the coast of Lucon to the point called Cabo de Bullinao all this coast and Cape is high and Hill ground which Cape lyeth vnder sixtéene degrées and â…” From this Cape de Bullinao wée helde our course North and North and by east for fiue and fortie miles to the point called El cabo de Boiador which is the furthest lande Northward from the Island Lucon lying vnder 19. degrées The Cape de Bullinao béeing past the land maketh a great Créeke or Bough and from this Créeke the coasts runneth North to the point of Boiador béeing a land full of Cliffes and Rockes that reach into the Sea and the land of the hooke or point is high and hilly ground From the point of Boiador we helde our course West Northwest an hundred and twentie miles vntill wée came to the Island called O Ilha Branco or the white Island which is a small Island lying in the beginning of the coast and Baye of the riuer of Canton vnder two and twentie degrees hauing foure and twentie fadome browne muddie ground From the same Island Ilha Branco wee helde the aforesaide course of West Northwest for the space of sixtéene miles to the Island of Macau lying in the mouth of the riuer of Canton and maketh the riuer two mouths or entries and is a small Island about three miles great The 54. Chapter The Nauigation or course of the aforesaid Francisco Gualle out of the Hauen of Macau to new Spaine with the scituation and stretchings of the same with other notable and memorable things concerning the same voiage WHen we had prepared our selues and taken our leaues of our friends in Macau we set saile vpon the foure and twentie of Iuly holding our course Southeast and Southeast and by East beeing in the wane of the Moone for when the moone increaseth it is hard holding the course betwéene the Islands because as then the water and streames runne verie strong to the Northwest wée sayled through many narrow Channels by night hauing the depth of eight and ten fadome with soft muddie ground vntill we were about the Island Ilha Branco yet we sawe it not but by the height we knew we were past it Being beyond it we ran East southeast an hundred and fiftie miles to get aboue the sands called Os Baixos dos Pescadores and the beginning of the Islands Lequeos on the East side which Islandes are called As Ilhas Fermosas that is the faire Islandes This I vnderstood by a Chinar called Santy of Chinchon and hée said that they lie vnder 21. degrées and ¾ there it is thirtie fadome déepe although we saw them not notwithstanding by the height and depth of the water we knewe we were past them Being past the faire Islands we held our course East and East and by North for two hundred and sixtie miles vntill we were past the length of the Islands Lequeos sayling about fiftie myles from them the said Chinar told me that those Islandes called Lequeos are very many and that they haue many and verie good Hauens and that the people and inhabitants thereof haue their faces and bodies painted like the Bysayas of the Islands of Lucon or Philippinas and are apparelled like the Bysayas and that there also are mines of gold He said likewise that they did often come with small shippes and Barkes ladeâ—â— with Buckes and Hartes bides and with gold in graines or verie small pieces to traffique with them of the coast of China which he assured me to be most true saying that he had béene nine times in the small Island bringing of the same wares with him to China which I beléeued to be true for that afterward I enquired thereof in Macau and vpon the coast of China and found that he said true The furthest or vttermost of these Islands both Northward and Eastward lie vnder 29. degrées Béeing past these Islands then you come to the Islandes of Iapon whereof the first lying West and South is the Island of Firando where the Portingales vse to trafficke they are in length altogether a hundred and thirty miles and the furthest Eastward lyeth vnder two and thirty degrées we ran still East and East and by North vntil we were past the said a hundred and thirty miles All this information I had of the aforesaid Chinar as also that there I should sée some mynes of Brimstone or fiery Hils being seuenty miles beyond them thirty miles further I should finde foure Islands lying together which I likewise found as hee had tolde mee For that being in Iapon hee said hee had there séene certaine men of a very small stature with great roules of Linnen cloth about their heads y t brought gold in small péeces and some white Cangas of Algodon which are péeces of Cotton Linnen so called by the Chinars as also salt fish the Spanish Atun or Haberdine which hee said came out of other Islandes Eastward from Iapon and by y e tokens and markes he shewed me I gessed whereabout those Islands should bee and found them not farre from whence hée said they lay hee said likewise that all the Islands of Iapon haue good hauens and Channels being a country full of Rice Corne Fish and Flesh and that they are an indifferent and reasonable people to Trafficke with and that there they haue much siluer Running thus East and East and by North about three hundred miles from Iapon we found a very hollow water with the streame running out of the North and Northwest with a ful and very broad sea without any hinderance or trouble in the way that we past and what winde soeuer blewe the Sea continued all in one sort with the same hollow water and streame vntill we had past y e seuen hundred miles about two hundred myles from the coast and land of newe Spaigne where wee began to lose the said hollow sea and stream whereby I most assuredly thinke and beleeue that there you shall find a Channell or straight passage betwéene the Firme land and new Spaigne and the Countries of Asia and Tartaria Likewise all this way from the aforesayed seuen hundred miles we found
behinde them and sailed but foure in companie that of Nuno da Silua béeing one till they came to the Baye called Baya de las Islas that is the Baye of the Islands lying vnder nine and fortie degrées where it is said that Magellanes lay and wintered there with his Shippe when hée first discouered the Straight which now holdeth his name In this Bay being the twentie of Iune they entred and there ankered so close to the land that they might send to it with a Harquebush shot and there they saw the land to be inhabited with Indians that were apparelled with skinnes with their legges from the knées downwarde and their armes from the elbows downward couered all the rest of their bodies béeing naked with bowes and arrowes in their handes being subtill great and well formed people and strong and high of stature where sixe of the English men went on land to fetch fresh water and before they leapt on land foure of the Indians came vnto their boate to whome the English men gaue bread and wine and when the Indians had well eaten and drunke they departed thence and going somwhat farre from them one of the Indians cryed to them and saide Magallanes Esta heminha Terra that is Magallanes this is my countrey and because the English men followed them it séemed the Indians fledde-vpward into the lande and béeing somewhat farre off they turned backe againe and with their arrowes slewe two of the English Shippers one being an English man the other a Netherlander the rest came backe againe and saued themselues in the boate wherewith they presently put off from the shoare and there they stayed till the seuentéenth of August vpon the which day they set saile running along by the coast about a mile and a halfe from the lande for there it is all faire and good ground at twentie and fiue and twentie fadome déepe and were about foure or fiue dayes before they came to the mouth or entrie of the Straightes but because the winde was contrarie they stayed till the foure and twentie of August before they entred The entrie or mouth of the Straight is about a myle broad on both sides béeing bare and flat land on the North side they sawe Indians making great fires but on the South side they saw no people stirring The foure and twentie day aforesaide they beganne to enter into the straights with an East Northeast wind This Straight may be about an hundred and ten miles long and in breadth a mile about the entry of the Straight and halfe way into it it runneth right forth without any windings or turnings and from thence about eight or ten miles towardes the end it hath some boughes and windings among the which there is one so great a hooke or running in that it séemeth to runne into the other land and there it is lesse then a mile broad from one lande to the other and from thence forwarde it runneth straight out againe And although you finde some crookings yet they are nothing to speake of The issue of the Straight lieth westward and about eight or ten miles before you come to the end then the Straight beginneth to be broader and it is all high lande to the end thereof after you are eight miles within the Straight for the first eight myles after you enter is low flat land as I saide before and in the entrie of the Straight you finde the streame to runne from the South sea to the North sea and after they began to saile in with the East Northeast winde being entred they passed along without any let or hinderance either of wind or weather and because the high land on both sides lay couered with snow and that all the Straight is faire and cleare they held their course a Harquebush shot in length from off the North side hauing nine and ten fadome déepe with good ground as I said before where if neede require a man may anker the hilles on both sides béeing full of trées some of the hilles and trées reaching downe to the sea side in some places hauing plaine and euen land and there they saw not any great riueâ—s but some small riuers that issued out of the Riffes and Breaches of the lande and in the country where the great Bough or crooking is on the South side they saw certaine Indian Fishermen in their Canoas or Scutes being such as they sawe first on the North side but more people they saw not on the South side Beeing out of the Straight on the other side béeing vpon the sixt of September of the aforesaide yeere they held their course Northwest for the space of thrée dayes and the third day they had a northeast winde that by force draue them West Southwest which course they helde for the space of ten or twelue dayes with fewe sailes vp and because the winde began to be verie great they tooke in all their sailes and lay driuing till the last of September The foure and twentie day of the same moneth hauing lost the sight of their pinnace which was about an hundred tunne then againe they hoised saile because they came better holding their course Northeast for the space of seuen dayes and at the end of the said seuen dayes they had the sight of certaine Islands which they made towards for to anker but the weather would not permit them and béeing there the winde fell Northwest whereby they sailed West Southwest The next day they lost the sight of another of their companie which ship was about three hundred and sixtie tunnes for it was very foule weather so that in the end the Admirals shippe was left alone for the Ship of Nuno da Silua was left in the Baye where they wintered before they entred into the Straights and with this foule weather they ranne till they were vnder seuen fiftie degrees where they entred into a Hauen of an Island and ankered about the length of the shot of a great peece from the land at twentie fadome deepe where they staied thrée or foure dayes and the winde comming Southward they hoysed anker holding their course Northward for the space of two dayes and then they espied a small vnhabited Island where béeing arriued they stroke sayles and hoised out their boat and there they tooke many birds and Sea wolues The next day they set saile againe holding their course North Northeast and North to â—nother Island lying fiue or six myles from the firme lande on the North side of the Straight where they ankered about a quarter of a mile from the lande at twelue fadome water This Island is small and lowe lande and full of Indians the Island being altogither built and inhabited by them where they hoysed out their boate wherein the Admirall and twelue English men were entred going to fetch fresh water and to séeke for victuals and beeing landed vpon the Island the Indians in exchange of other things brought two Spanish shéepe and a little Mais
or rootes whereof they make bread and because it was late they returned againe vnto their shippe without doing any other thing for that day The next day the said Captaine with the aforesaide twelue men being Harquebushers rowed to land again and set two of their companie on shore with their vessels to fetch fresh water and by the place where they should fill their water there lay certaine Indians secretly hidden that fell vpon the two English men and tooke them which they in the boat perceiuing went out to helpe them but they were so assailed with stones and arrowes that all or the most part of them were hurt the Captaine himselfe béeing wounded with an arrowe on the face and will another arrowe in the head whereby they were constrained to turne backe againe without once hurting any of the Indians and yet they came so neare the boate that they tooke foure of their oares from them This done they set saile againe running along the coast with a South winde sailing so for the space of sixe miles passing by the Hauen called Saint Iago or Saint Iames where they put into a Hauen and there they tooke an Indian that lay fishing in a Scute or Canoa giuing him linnen and Butchers chopping kniues with other trifles and not long after there came an other Indian aboord their shippe called Felippe and hée spake Spanish hee gaue the English Captaine notice of a certaine shippe that lay in the Hauen of Saint Iago which they had left sixe miles behinde them with that intelligence the Indian béeing their guide the next day they set Saile and put to the aforesaide Hauen of Saint Iago and entring therein they tooke the saide Shippe wherein they found a thousand seuen hundred and 70. Bortigas of Spanish pots full of wine other thinges which hauing done they leapt on land where they tooke certaine sackes with meale with all whatsoeuer they could find they tooke likewise the ornaments and other Relickes out of the Church wherewith they departed from thence taking the aforesaid shippe with two menne that they found in her with them and so departed from that Hauen which lyeth vnder 32 degrées and ½ running along by the coast till they came vnder one and thirtie and thirty degrées which was the place where they had appointed to méet and there to stay for each other if by tempest or foule weather they chanced to be seperated and so loose each others company And comming vnder thirty degrées they found a very good Hauen wherein they entred and ankered at sixe fadome deepe the shotte of a great Péece from the Lande which was right ouer against a Riuer where they tooke in sixe Pipes of fresh water and to defend them that fetched the water they set twelue men vpon the Land and being busied in filling of their water they espied a company of men comming towards them wherof halfe of them were Spaniards being about two hundred and fifty horsemē and as many footemen but they had no sooner espied them but they presently entered into the Boat and escaped away loosing but one man The same night they set saile againe with both their Shippes running along the coast about ten miles further where they tooke in some fresh water but because they perceiued certaine horsemen they departed without lading any more water Frō thence they folowed on their course along the coast for the space of 30. myles where they entred into a desert or vnhabited Hauen yet they went not on Land for euery day they sawe people vpon the shore and there they made out a small pinnace the péeces whereof they brought readye framed out of England and hauing prepared it they launched it into the Water wherein the Captaine with fiftéene men entred with the cheefe Boatesman called Ian de Greicke being Maister of the shippe which they had taken in the Hauen of S. Iago wherewith they went to sée if they could finde the two Shippes that they had lost by stormy weather as I saied before and likewise thinking to goe on Land to fill certaine vessels with fresh Water they durst not venture for they sawe people on all side of the shoare so that in the end they returned againe without hearing of the other Shippes being there they tooke all the Ordinaunce out of their Shippe and newe dressed and rigged her which done they put a small péece of Ordinaunce into the Pinnace wherewith they set saile againe following on their course Hauing sayled thirtéene daies they came to an Island lying about the shot of a Base from the Lande where they ankered and there they found foure Indian Fishermen in two Canaos who tolde them that on the Firme Lande they might haue fresh water but they vnderstanding that there was not much and that it was somewhat within the Lande they would not spend any time about it but set sayle againe leauing the Fishermen with their Canaos following on their course along by the shore The next day being somewhat further they espied certaine Indian Fishermen that were vpon the Lande in their houses which the English Captaine perceauing presently entered into the Pinnace and rowed on Land where hee tooke three of the said Fishermen taking with him halfe of the Fish that lay packed vpon the shoare ready to bee laden with the which Indians and booty they came on boord againe The next day following they sawe a Barke laden with Fish that belonged to the Spaniards with foure Indians in it This Barke with the Indians and the Fish they tooke and bound the Spanish Shippe to their sterne and so drewe it after them leauing the said Indians within it who by night vnbound the Barke and secretly made away with Barke and Fish and were no more seene The next day the Captaine went into the Pinnace and because hee sawe certaine houses vppon the shoare hee made thither and beeing on Lande hee found two menne in them whereof one hee tooke leauing the other behinde and there hee found thrée thousand Pesoes of siluer euery Peso being the value of a Ryall of eight and seuen Indian Sheepe Hennes and all whatsoeuer they found wherewith they departed from thence following on their course and two dayes after they came by the hauen called Azijcka where they found two shippes the one laden with goods and Spanish wares out of the which they tooke only two hundred Bottigas or Spanish Pots with Wine and out of the other seuē and thirty Bharas of siluer which are péeces of tenne or twelue pound each Bharre and thinking to leape on shore with two Barkes that they found in the said Hauen with about seuen and thirty Harquebushes bowes they perceiued on the land certaine horsemen comming towards them whervpon they left off their pretence and tooke with them a Moore that they found within the Barkes with whome they retourned aboord The next day in the morning they burnt the shippe that was laden with the Spanish wares and tooke the other with
much different and from the matter taken in hand Touching the orientall parts neuerthelesse because it is vnknowne to our countrimen as also commonly sailed by the Portingales and Spaniards whose voyages and trauels I haue herein onely set downe it will not bee out of the matter but rather very necessary to be ioyned therevnto and as I thinke will bee wel accepted and esteemed off insomuch as that at this time our countrey men doe vse to Trafficke and trauell into those countries hoping it will bee an occasion of further increasing and augmenting of their trauels to the honour praise and glory of the Gospell of Christ and all Christian Princes and to the entiching and welfare of the Low countries The 65. Chapter The Nauigation from the Point of Cabo Verde to Brasilia with the right course and knowledge of the Land and Hauens of Brasilia to the Riuer called Rio de la Plata with the situation thereof SAyling from Cabo Verde that is the greene point to Brasilia you must saile south southeast Southeast and Southeast by South and being vnder fiue or sixe degrées or wheresoeuer you bee you shall take your degrées on the Southside and lessen them as much as you can and you must remember that as soone as you haue the generall winde blowing from the South-east then you shall runne Southwest and West Southwest and if the winde bee South and Southwest you must runne South-east but not too farre for it helpeth you not for that the more you kéepe that course the more way you loose and you shall vse all the meanes you can not to runne vnder the coast of Guinea nearer then sixtie or seuentye fadome from the Sandes called Os Baixos de Sant Anna for the winde will helpe you in such manner that you may sayle towards the Point of Brasilia And if with this course you will sayle to Pernanbuco It being from the Moneth of October forward and that you fall to Loofeward of the Island of Fernan de Noronha being vnder eight eight degrées and ½ You must runne West towards the Lande and if you sée Lande vnder eight degrées they will bee white downes and then you are on the North-side from whence you shall put to the South that is from October forward for as then the Northeast and east Northeast winds doe blowe and if you bee vnder the degrées aforesaid you shall see the said downes and when you see the end of them on the South-side and from thence not séeing any more then you are by Capigâ—aramirini and from thence to Pernanbuco are fiue or sixe myles And so if you bee vnder eight degrées and a halfe then you shall sée a flat Lande till you bee at tenne and twelue fadome déepe and the Lande on the Sea side will bee euen bare which is called Capiragua when you are East and West with this Lande being the Countrey whereof I speake at twelue fadome déepe it beeing in the Moneths of October or after Februarye then you néede not feare any thing but take héed you put not southwards for you must take héede of the Cape of S. Augustine and Northward you shal sée another point called A Punta d Olynda where the Towne of Olynda lieth and the coast of the same North Point is sailed North and South If you be east and West with the cape S. Augustine then you shall sée a Hill inward to the land which sheweth like the backe of a Cammell on the Southside hauing thrée Houels along by the Sea side and the coast will stretch North-east and Southwest From this point of S. Augustine to the towne of Olynda Northward are twelue miles This point lyeth vnder 8 degrées and ½ and Olynda lyeth vnder 8. degrées and â…“ Pernanbuco vnder eight degrées this voyage is thus to bee sayled when you set sayle from Lisbon in the Moneths of October and Nouember But when you saile from Lisbon in February or March then you shall looke for land vnder nine degrées for from y e month of March forward then the Southeast and south Southeast winds do blow and if you chance to bee by the land vnder the height aforesaid you néede not feare any thing but shall hold your course at seuentéene and eightéene fadome for it is faire and cléere and you haue nothing daungerous but the riffes lying close by the land whereon you sée the water breake running Northward if you finde certaine downes along by the sea side then feare not to run northward for therby you shal sée the point of S. Augustine This point lieth on the sea side being euen stéepe land shewing like the muzzell of a Whale in the toppe hauing a round Hill compassed with Trées and being at the depth aforesaid close by the Land you shall sée a small Island called Ilha de S. Alexus From this Island to Cape S. Augustine are fiue or sixe miles and lyeth vnder 8 degrées ¾ The 57. chapter The course and Nauigation to the Hauen called A Bahia de todos os Santos or of all Saints in the coast of Brasilia IF you desire to sayle to the Bahia de todos os Santos that is the bay of all Saints then obserue the course aforesaied taking the times of the yeare From the Month of March forward and from October as I said before This Bay of all Saints lyeth vnder thirteene degrées and being from October forward then you shall looke for Land at 12 and 12 degrees and ½ and being in sight thereof which will bee white sandy strands which shew like linnen that lieth too white then you shall hold your course Southward along by the coast vntill you be at the end of the said strands where you shall sée an Island lying on the Northside within the mouth of the Bay or Hauen called Tapoon From thence you runne along the coast West and West and South And comming to this Bay from the Month of March forward then you must not passe aboue 13 degrées and 1 â— Southward and when you are in sight of Land if it be not the aforesaid white strand then you shall vse all the means you can to run Northward and when you sée the sandye strand at 12 degrées and ½ Then you shall sée a hill standing along by the seaside and if you chance to be so néere the lande that you can find no meanes to get off from it then you shall know the Land well for on the sea side you shall sée a round houel called O Morro de san Paulo from the which houell to the bay are twelue myles along by this houell on the northwest side there is a very great riuer called Tinhare which is very good to put into if néed be and is six and seuen fadome déep and when you are at the aforesaid Point vnder 13 degrées ½ then put not to the Lande for it hath a créeke that is very dangerous And if you desire to saile from the Bay of
all Saints to Pernanbuco or to Portingale then hold your course Eastward and if the wind serue you hold East and East and by North for the space of 30 or 40. miles into the sea and look not for the land of Pernanbuco from ten to nine degrées for if you be vnder 11 degrées you wil fall into the Créeke called A Enseada de vaza Barâ—ys that is the Créeke of emptying of vessels and likewise when you come from Portingall hauing sight of land at eleuen degrées then put not towards it to shorten your way but rather holde your course Southward from it From this Bay of all Saints to Pernanbuco is a hundred miles and you runne along the coast northeast and southwest From thence to the Riuer Rio dos Ilhas or the riuer of Islands the coast runneth Southwest and Northeast and Southwest and by West and Northeast and by East The 58. Chapter The course or Nauigation to the riuer Rio dos Ilhas that is the riuer of the Islands in the coast of Brasilia IF you desire to saile to the riuer of the Islands you must vnderstand that the Islands lie vnder 14. degrées and ¾ séeking to finde them from the moneth of March forward then you shall run to the height of 15. degrées and ½ and although you be vnder 15. degrées and 2 â— you néede not feare and séeing the land vnder these degrées then you shall see certaine high hilles called As Serras dos Aymores when you sée those hilles then you shall come along the coast Northwarde not fearing any thing for from thence Northward there are no shallows As soone as you sée the Ilands for there are no other then on the same coast you shall sée a rouÌ„d hill standing along by the Sea side on the North side whereof you put into the Riuer and if you chance to be there at such time as you can not put in then hold your course to Seaward from the Islands kéeping from them and there by the said Islandes you may anker and if you be in that country when the Northeast winds doe blow then looke for land vnder 14. degrées and if you see a flat land then it is the Island called Camamuâ— by the which you shall run southward and being at the end of the flatte land then you shall sée a high land along by the sea side like the other aforesaid all along by the sea side In the place where this lande beginneth to shew high there lieth a small riuer called Rio das Contas that is the riuer of Beads but it is not to be entered and hath a white harde stone for a marke From thence to the Islands are 9. miles Southward and comming where the aforesaid high land endeth then you shall finde a great Créeke and being West Southwest you shall see another high land at the foot whereof which is almost in the middle way to the créeke you shall see certaine white houses which are the Ingenies or Sugar houses where the Sugar is prepared and being there you shal presently see the Islands The 59. chapter How to saile to the Hauen of Porto Seguro that is the sure Hauen lying in the coast of Brasilia IF you desire to saile to the Hauen of Porto Seguro in the time of the Southeast windes which is in March and so forward you shall not put higher then to 16. degrées ½ for there it hath a Reddish sand called Os Baixos dos Abrolhos which are very dangerous and run very far into the sea and when you saile East West you must not be negligent to throw your Lead out often times being by the land that you sée a long high hill like a sharpe point which is called Monte Pasqual froÌ„ thence you shall run Northward west the same hill is westward from you then you must hold towards the land yet with good regard and foresight And when you sée the land and that you perceiue a round Houell then Southward from the saide Houell you shall see a Hill with a great strand on the North side whereof lyeth the Hauen of Porto Seguro and running along by the coast aboue in the lande you find the towne of Porto Seguro This height is a white stonie rocke and on the North side of this stonie rocke there is a great vally when you are East and west with this stonie rocke then Northward you shall sée the water breake which is vpon a sand reaching two miles into the Sea on the South side whereof you are right ouer against the towne of Porto Seguro If you begin this voyage when the winds are northeast come to 15. degrees and â…” not seeing any hills then leaue not running along the coast when you are vnder 15. degrées the first high land you shall sée will be with white sandy strands along the sea coast if vnder that height you see a riuer then make not towardes the land for there it hath certaine dangerous shallowes called Os Baixos de Sant Antonio from thence Southward lyeth Porto Seguro and passing along the coast and séeing the water breake vpon the other sand lying two miles further inward to sea then you shall passe by it kéeping to seaward from it and when you are at the end thereof then the towne will be Westward from you you may well put to it alwaies hauing a care how you goe and anker vnder the height aforesaid Departing from the Islands to Porto Seguro then you must run 10. or 12. miles to Seaward from them to shun the sands lying by the riuer called Rio Grande that is the great Riuer and when you are past Rio Grande then make towards the land againe to know it as aforesaid The 60. Chapter How to saile to the Hauen called Bahia dâ— Espirito Santo that is the Bay of the Holy Ghost lying in the coast of Brasilia SAiling to the hauen of Spirito Santo béeing past the Sandes called Os Baixos dos Abrolhos vnder 19. degrées and ½ then you shall sée lande at 20. degrées for in this coast you haue no monsons or courses of certaine winds If you chance to sée land at 19. degrées and ½ and that it bée on the Northwest side from you being flat land then you are on the North side of the Hauen of Spirito Santo which is the land lying aboue Criquare and aboue y e riuer called Rio Dolce that is the riuer of Swéet or fresh water you shall holde your course along by the land vntill the land beginneth to rise hauing some Hilles but trust not to the first that you shall sée but you shall sée a high round hill which lyeth along by the sea side and is called La Sierra de Mestre Aluaro And when you come to this Hill on the North side you shall sée a riuer called Rio dos Reis Magos that is the riuer of the thrée Kings of Cullen and on the South side then the mouth of the Baye will presently
open At the end of the said hill on the South side there is a point of stonie Cliffes called A punto do Tubaron that is the point of the Hedge And on the South side of the Baye there are two or thrée high hilles being there you shall put right ouer to the Bay and so run Westward If you should be in the same course vnder twentie degrées then you shall sée many hilles among the which standeth a high sharpe point called Serra de Guarapari that is the hill of Guarapari it hath likewise another on the North side called A Serra de Pero Can that is the Hill of Peterwood these hils stand on the South side of Spirito Santo From these Hilles southwarde you shall see a hill standing alone called Guape when you sée it then you shall likewise sée thrée small Islandes lying togither on the south side whereof lyeth another small round flat Island and the land lying right against this roūd flat Island hath a great Baye where if néed be you may put in and anker if you desire to goe into it then you shall runne East and west with the hill and so runne in and then the round Island will bée on the North side This Island is called Ilha de Repouso that is the Island of rest it lyeth very close by the land and betwéene it and the land you may well anker From these thrée Islands aforesaid to the bay of Spirito Santo are 12. miles and holding your course Northward to Spirito Santo you shall sée another Island lying alone which you passe running to Seaward by it and being by it you shall presently sée the mouth or Hauen of Spirito Santo this bay or hauen lyeth vnder 20. degrées The 61. Chapter To saile from the Bay or Hauen of Spirito Santo to the Bay of S. Vincent SAyling from Spirito Santo to y e Bay S. Vincent you must runne along the coast about 7. or 8. miles from it to the point called Cabo Frio that is the cold point vntill you come to it in the way you haue a great bay called A Bayho de Saluador the Baye of our Sauiour which is distant from Cabo Frio 12. miles Before you come to Cabo Frio there are two Islands from the which you run to seaward yet if néed be or if you desire it you may passe betwéene them and the land Cabo Frio hath an Island right ouer against it which hath a point where you may anker if néede be on the West side where it is faire and cléere This Cabo Frio lieth vnder 23. degrées from thence to the riuer called Rio de Ianero that is the riuer of Ianuarie are 18. miles this riuer of Ianero hath thrée or foure Islandes in the mouth thereof If you will enter into this riuer you may well goe in taking your way betwéene two of the Islandes that lie in the mouth thereof on the South side of this riuer there is a Hill that sheweth like a man with a Friars Coule or Cape vpon his head When you are vnder the height of this riuer you shall to Landward see certaine high Hilles which shewe like Organs which is a good marke to knowe that you are by the riuer and when you begin to goe néere the lande you shall see a round high and bare Island on the South side the mouth of this riuer lieth vnder 23. degrées and ½ From this riuer to the Rode or open Hauen by the Portingales called Angra are fiftéene miles and there are two riuers in the way but being in that country put not to the land vnlesse you be compelled thereunto From the mouth of this riuer West Southwest and Southwest by West you shall sée a great Island called A Ilha de Sant Sebastian which on the Southwest side hath another small high Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases that is the Islande of Seamewes before you come at it you must holde your course Westward to shunne certaine Sands that lie by it whereby you shall come to the mouth of the bay of Saint Vincent where you shall see an Island called Ilha da Muda that is the Island of the Dumbe woman and to put into the Bay of S. Vincent you shall leaue the Islandes on the East side The Bay of Saint Vincent lyeth vnder 24. degrées and if you be to leeward from it then you shall sée many Islands whereof some stretcheth outward which are the best markes for this Hauen and being there you are Northwest and Southeast with the mouth of the Bay The 62. Chapter How to saile from Cabo Frio or the cold point to the riuer of Rio de Plata or the riuer of siluer with all the course thereof FRom Cabo Frio to the riuer of Ianero or Ianuarie are eightéene miles and you saile East and West and lyeth vnder 23. degrées and hath these markes First inward to the land it hath certaine high Hilles called Organs but at this time most of them are falne down and on the West Southwest side towards the Sea side it hath the forme of the Mass of a shippe and in the mouth of the riuer lieth foure Islands whereof one is high and round which is a good marke as also the Sugar loafe being a houell that is called so lying in the Hauen although you can not sée it when you are at sea you may saile along this coast without daunger and you need feare nothing but that you sée before your eyes From thence to Saint Vincent the coast reacheth East Northeast and West Southwest and is in length two and fortie miles and all that way there is neither shallowes nor Sandes but there you finde good Hauens for all winds Twelue miles from the riuer lieth an Island called Ilha grande or the great Island which hath verie good Hauens as well on the Southwest as the East sides with very good fresh water and great fishing it is a high lande with many trees and inwarde to the lande it is verie high and sharpe pointed if you desire to put in there you néed not feare to do it for there is no danger From this great Island to the Island of S. Sebastian are eighteene miles and to the Island A Ilha dos Porcos that is the Island of Hogges are fourtéene miles the Isles of Hogges hath a very good Hauen but it is too farre inward Frō thence to the Island of Saint Sebastian are foure miles which is a great high Island full of trees it hath a verie good entrie as well on the one side as on the other it lyeth Northeast and Southwest From thence to the lande about halfe a mile distant lyeth the Rode Southwestwarde there lyeth another long Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases or the Island of Sea-mewes Close by this Island there lyeth three Cliffes on the South side whereof lyeth an Island which is a verie good marke for the land is sometimes couered with miste and thicke weather whereby you can
teates of a womans dugs and to put into it you must keepe your course along by the houell If you depart from the Point aforesaid with the winds called Brisas then you shall hold your course to the Cliffes called â—ortugas that is the Torteaux as winde serueth and you must see what depth you find for if there you finde fortie fadome water then you are on the South-side thereof and finding 30. fadome then you are East and West right against it and being at any of these depths you shal hold your course South South-west vntil you see the land which you shall discouer from the field or Hauen thereof and if you see a Land that is somewhat high hauing some Hils and Dales that shewe like the fingers of a mans hand then it is the land â—aâ—â—d Narugo from thence you shal runne to Hâ—eaâ—a holding your course along by the coast Sayling out of Hauana to the Martirs you shall hold your course Northeast by the which course you shall see the Point which is three small Islandes whereof that in the middle is the greatest the vttermost being the East coast and the inwardest the North-east and South-west coast From thence North-east-ward to the Cape De Canauerales that is y e point of Reedes the coast stretcheth North and South and North-east-ward you shall see no land and being vnder fiue and twentie degrees then you are in the mouth of the channel which to passe through you must hold your course Northeast and if you see not the Cape de Canauerales being vnder 28. degrees and â— 2. then you are without the channell Sayling out of the Hauana with the windes called Brisas to the channell you must runne outwards till it be noone and after noone you shall make to Landward that towards euening you may bee by it and to vse the Windes called Terreinhos which are Windes that blowe by night from off the land running in this manner along by the coast vntill you bee North and South with the Houell called El Pan de Matancas that is the loafe of Matancas being North and South with y e same loafe you must runne Northeast if the winde will permit if not you must put to the coast of Florida where the winde will driue you doing your best in that way to goe out of your course as little as you may for the streames runne with great force towards that Lande and when you thinke it time then you shall put to the other side as the winde will leade you till you see the Lande and when you sée it then winde in this sort running through and being vnder 28. degrées and ½ then you are out of the Channell hereof I aduise that the strikes you make in lauering towards the land of Florida must be short and those towardes the Coast of Minare long for the streames driue you to the Lande of Florida The Hils of Chupiona come out by the loafe of Matancas and are certaine not too high and euen Hils flat on the toppe with certaine white shining houels The loafe of Matancas is a high Houell flat aboue stretching northeast and South-west and on both sides as well North-eastward as southwestward it hath two low Points lower then y e said loafe which shew like the heads of Torteaux On the North-east side the Lande stretcheth lowe and from thence Northward it maketh a small Point Behinde this Point lyeth the Hauen of Matancas and to enter therein you must run Northeast and Southwest right against the said loafe and then the Hauen will bee South from you and you must runne southward to it it is a great Bay and there you haue no Road but close by the Land comming out you leaue the loafe on the South-side and you must hold your course north-east till you be out And being out of the Channell if it bée in Winter you shall run East wherwith you shall holde East and by North by the winding or declining of the compasse By the which course you shall passe on the South-side of the Islands and Cliffes of Bermuda and this course you shall holde till you bee vnder the heigth of the Island Fayael one of the Flemish Islands which is a great Island stretching North-west and Southeast on the Southeast side hauing a thicke Land and on the northeast side somewhat lower land To saile from thence to the Island of Tercera you shall hold your course outward of the Island of S. George east and east by North. The Island of S. George is a high Lande stretching East and West as also Tercera which on the Southside hath a clouen hill called O Brasil and a little eastward from thence there lieth thrée cliffes The Iland of S. Michael is a great high Island stretching East and West on the West side being lowe and on the East side high It hath likewise a clouen hil lying at the end on the East side This Island lyeth vnder 38. degrées The 64. Chapter The course and right markes from the Island La Desseada to the lande and coast of Carthagena Nombre de Dios new Spain and from the channell of Hauana IF you desire to sayle through the Channell that runneth betwéene the Island La Antigua La Desleada towards the coast you must holde your course West to the Island of Montecerratte running along by the Island of Guadalupe which is an Island clouen through the middle higher on the West then on the East side The Island La Antigua that is the old Island you shal find on the Northside of Guadalupe stretching in length East and West and hath Hils with outward shew like Ilands and lieth vnder 16. degrées and 1 â— The markes of the Island Montecerratte are these It is round and high like the Island La Gomera in the Canaries and hath some Hilles with certaine Water beakes Sailing from this Island Montecerratte you must runne West Northwest whereby you shall discouer the Island Sancta Crus but you must not runne too close by it for there it is foule and no cleare ground it stretcheth East and West and is Hilly but not verie high beeing higher on the West then on the East side in the middlest hath a rent or partition and on the East side there is a Roade where you may anker for there it is faire sandye ground To sayle from Sancta Crus to the Island of Puerto Riquo that is the Iland of the rich Hauen on the Southside you must runne West Northwest whereby you shall discouer the hill called Sierta de Loquillo and from thence to Cabo Roxo you shall sayle West and West and by North keeping along by the land vntill you be by the cape aforesaide which is the vttermost part of the same Island This point called Cabo Roxo that is the red point is a thin and lowe lande on the sea side hauing certaine redde shining downes and on the North-west side you sée the hils called I as Sierras de
20 or 30 miles wherewith you shall finde ground at 80 fadome being shels From thence you shal run west and west and by South till you be at 30 fadome and from 30 fadome west-ward to 30 fadome with the which course you should sayle along this Countrey And being a greater depth you shall run west and west and by south wherby you shall come again to the former depth By this course you shall passe through the Islāds of Ilha de Sconocida Ilha d'Arena that is the vnknowne Island and the sandy Island From the Iland la de Sconocida to the Islād d'Arena west west and by south you shall descry the Hils Las Sierras de San Martin which are two high Hils in the middle hauing a great opening or cliffe Sailing from these Hils you shall runne West by the which course you shal sée the stony rock which is a clouen hil you shall run Northwest and northwest by west wherewith you shall sée the Riuer of Medelyn which is a lowe land somewhat more to Loofeward lieth the Island called Ilha Blanca or the white Island as also y e Island Rio Riffias which a farre off sheweth like a ship vnder saile then presently you shal sée the Island of S. Iohn de Luz and from the riuer called Rio Varado to the Riuer of Vera Crus There is no high land but only one black shining hill lying aboue the aforesaid Hauen The 65. Chapter How to sayle from the Island La Desseada to the Island of Porto Riso through the channell called De Passagie SAyling from the Island La Desseada to the Island Puerto Riso y t is the rich Hauen Desiring to passe through y e channel of De Passagie that is the thorow faire you must vse all y e means you can to runne betwéene the Islands of Moncerrate Redonda or to Loofeward y t is betwéen y e Island of S. Christopher and the Islands d'Estacio and from thence you shal hold your course Northwest somewhat more to loofeward frō the Islands of Estacio which are 2. Islands one greater thē the other shewing almost like 2. loaues of bread when you are by them you shall find 10.12 and 25. fadome déepe at the depthes of 10. 12. fadome you haue white sandy ground and at 25. fadome black sand to sayle from this Banke to the Ilandes las Virgines that is the maydes you shal holde your course northwest for there the streams draw Southwestward to shunne S. Crus which stretcheth almost Northwest and Southeast and when you see las Virgines the first poynt is the greatest and therefore it is called la Virgin Gorga or the fatte mayde and presentlie after follow the rest which are long full of Houels they stretch East and West and runne one within the other hauing certaine Cliffes and Rockes hard by them running on the South syde in the middle way frō them you shall sée a great Cliffe two myles into the sea This Cliffe hath for a marke a grayish colour and besydes these there are manie other cliffes and to know whē you are in the passage running along by it to Porto Riso as aforesaid then you shal sée white cliffes that a farre off shew like a ship vnder sayle the whitenes of these cliffes procéedeth of birds filings when you sée them you must make towards them and desiring to run through the passage you shall hold your course betwéene these Ilands the Ilands las Virgines whē you are by them thē you must run northwest to a smal Iland which lieth two miles further forward called Ilha Verde that is the gréen Iland and being right against this Iland thē you are out of the passage or without the channel and being ther you shal presently sée the land of y e Iland Puerto Riso the first point wherof called la Punto de Loquillo lieth East west with the Iland Ilha Verde if you chance to be by the aforesaid cliffe and that the winde scanteth y t you can not passe to loofeward from it then you shall passe to léeward of it for it is also a good chānell of 18. 20. fadom deep with sand and shels vpon the ground about a mile to léeward from it to know whē you are out of the Channell with this course then this cliffe must lie Southeast from you and being at 30. fadome déep with white sandy ground you shall presently as I said passe by the Ilande of Ilha Verde running by the point of Loquillo along by the land of Puerto Riso Westnorthwest and if you desire to be in the hauen of Puerto Riso and that you cannot get thether then you shal lauere or ly driuing to léeward with the point of Loquillo Southeastward from you and from midnight forward you shall follow your course because the streames draw Southeastward the marks you haue there are these that is ouer the hauē of Puerto Riso standeth an hermitage vpon a high hil which is called Santa Barbara and sheweth like a white patch vpon a hill and passing along by it you shall see the Cloyster or Conuent of Dominican Fryers which is about a quarter of a myle from the hermitage and then you shall presently sée the hill that sheweth like a clouen Iland these are the right marks of this Hauen and to put into it you must goe néere the hill but not too néer to shunne a shallow place that lieth within the said hill after that you must loofe asmuch as you can vntil you comé wher you must anker which is right against the houses that stand on the East side of the hauen The 66. Chapter The groundes and depthes by the coast and countrie of New Spaigne BY the Ilāds called Alaclanes lying betwéen the Iland Cuba and the coast of New Spaigne right ouer against the poynt called Punta de S. Anton. the ground is shelly by the Iland called Ilha de Robos it is muddy slyme ground by the Riuer of S. Pedro S. Paulo from 40. fadom to the land it is shelly ground by the fields or playnes of Almeria called Los Islano◠de Almeria at 40. fadome it is sandy ground from thence outwards shelly ground by Vilila Rica or the rich stone at 16 fadome it is muddy ground East west with the cliffes sands de Tortugas of Torteaux it is white sand Northeast and southwest with the same Tortugas it is blacke sand and eastward frō it reddish sand by the riuer of Panuco from 40. fadom outwards it is white and red sand and towardes the land muddy ground by the riuer called Rio Hermoso or the faire riuer frō 30. fadome towardrs the land it is white sand ◠outward towards y e sea muddy groūd by the riuer called Rio de Palmase de Mōtanas that is the riuer of palm trees of hils frō 40. fadom towards y e land you haue sand but most white and outwards muddy groūd mixed with gray sand
of Spain and from the same flat land it is higher for it is 7. miles long now to put into this Iland you must hold your course on the northeast point being close by it within a stones cast you néed not fear for ther it is 15. fadom deepe and within it is all faire ground this is the road on the side of the Iland close by if from this Iland to the firme land there is no more but a quarter of a mile and you cannot see the entrie till you be hard by it and if there be any ships within the hauen you shall see them before you can discerne or know the Iland which sheweth as if it were trees y t stand vpon the land the farthest point outward on the northeast side of this Iland lieth vnder 9 deg therefore deceiue not your selfe by the card for some of them haue it vnder 9. deg and others vnder 9 deg and a halfe therfore beleeue none but such as haue it vnder 9. deg at the northeast end of the aforesaid IlaÌ„d Hereafter followeth the degrees and hightes of all the principal hauens riuers points Ilands places of the Nauigations of the Portingals Spaniards in the countries by them discouered and part inhabited each place with their right names and surnames as they are by them called and ordinarily named in their Seacardes First from the furthest point outward of Portingale called Cabo de Finisterra following along by the coast of Portingale Spain Barbary to the line of Tropicus Caueri and from thence along the Coast of Guinea to the Equinoctiall lyne The degrees on the north side of the line CAbo de Finisterra that is the point of the lands end lieth vnder degrees 43 The Ilandes of Bayona lie vnder 42. Porto de Portug y t is Porte port ly vn 41 As Berlengas y t is the Barles ly vnder 40. Lisboa or LisboÌ„ y t IlaÌ„d of tercera vn 29. Perseueira and the Iland of S. Michael lieth vnder 38. Cabo de san Vincente and the Iland santa Maria lie vnder 37. Trastalgar lying on the coast is vnder 36 Larache lyeth vnder 35 Soneia lyeth vnder 34. Cabo de Canty Porto santo y t is the holy haueÌ„ lying by the IlaÌ„d of Madera are vn 33 Rio dos saueis y t is y e riuer of faries is vn 32 The Iland of Madera or the Iland of wood is vnder the same heights of 32 Taffatama lieth vnder 31 Mecca and Ilha dos Saluaes that is the Iland of the wilde men lyeth vnder 30 Cabo de non and the Ilandes Palma and Lancarotte being of the Ilands of Canarie lyeth vnder 29 A Ilha or the Ilande de Forte Ventura lyeth vnder 28 Cabo de Boâ—ador and the Ilandes of great Canarie and also A Ilha de Hierro or Iland of Iron lyeth vnder 27 Angra dos Cauallos that is the Hauen of horses lieth vnder 25 Rio d'Ouro or y e riuer of Gold lieth vnd 24 The line or Tropicus Cancri Angra or the open hauen of Goncalo de Sintra lyeth vnder 23 Cabo das Barbas or the point of Baerden lyeth vnder 22 Cabo Branco or the white point lieth vn 21 Rio de Sao Ioâ—o or the riuer of S. Iohn lieth vnder 20 Furna de Santa Maria or the caue of S. Marie lyeth vnder 19 Sete monte or seuen hils vnder the Ilands of S. Anna S. Vincent S. Lucia and S. Nicolas lieth vnder 18 Ante Rotte and Ilha de Sal. or the Iland of Salt vnder 17 Rio or the Riuer of Canaga and the Iland Ilha de Maâ—a vnder 16 Cabo verde or the gréen point the IlaÌ„ds of S. Iago and Ilha do Fogo or of fyer vnder 15 Rio or the riuer of Gambia vnder 14 Rio das Ostras or the riuer of oisters vn 13 Cabo Roxo vnder 12 Buguba vnder 11 Rio do Pichel or the riuer of y e Can vnd 10 Rio or the riuer of Cachecache vnder 9 Rio de Serra Lioa or the riuer of the Lions hill vnder 8 Rio das Palmas or the riuer of Palms vn 7 Cabo de monte or the point of the hill vn 6 Cabo dos Baixos or the point of sands and the myne of S. George vnder 5 A Ilha or the IlaÌ„d of Fernando Poa Cauo dà s Palmas or point of Palmes vnder 4 Rio de Campo or the riuer of the field vn 3 Rio de Princepe or y e riuer of y e prince vnd 2 The Iland of S. Thomas vnder 1 From the Equinoctiall line to the south side following the coast of Congo Angola and Ethiopia to the cape de Bona Speranza The degrees of the south side of the Equinoctial lyne CAbo or the point of Lopo Gonsalues vnder deg 1 Cabo or the point of Catharina vnder 2. Angra da Iudia or the hauen of the Iewe vnder 5. Praya de San Domingos or the straÌ„d of S. Dominico vnder 6. Rio or the riuer of Congo vnder 7 A Ilha d' Ascention or the ascention vnd 8. Rio or the riuer of Angola and the Iland of Loanda vnder 9 Cabo Ledo vnder 10. Rio or the riuer of S. Lazaro vnder 11. Cabo de Loubos or y e riuer of wolues vn 12 Monte Negro or the black hill vnder 14 Serra Parda or the gray hill vnder 15 Angra das Aldeas or the open hauen of the villages the Iland of S. Helena vnd 16. Manga das Areas or the sandy sleue vn 17. Cabo Negro or the blacke point vnder 18. Os Mendoins vnder 19 A Serra de S. Lazaro or Hill S. of Lazaro vnder 20. Praya or the straight of Ruy Pires vnd 21. Cabo do Padrao or the point of Colosso or Colume vnder 22. Praia Fria or the cold strand vnder 23. The lyne or Tropicus Cancri Ponta da concepsao or the conceptioÌ„ vn 24 Praya das Ala-goas vnder 25. Feiaco da Boca or the maÌ„ner of the mouth vnder 26. Angra or the hauen of S. Anthony vnd 27 Angra or hauen of S. Thomas vnder 28. Angra or the haueÌ„ of S. Christopher vn 29 Rio do Infante or the Riuer of the Kinges sonne vnder 32. Angra or hauen of S. Helena vnder 33. As Ilhas or IlaÌ„d of Tristan de CuÌ„ha v. 34. Cabo de Bona Speranza or poynt of good hope vnder 34. ½ From the cape de Bona Speranza northwards along the coast to Soffala Mosambique and Melinde to the Equinoctial lyne all being on the south side of the same lyne CAbo das Agulhas or the poynt of the Compas full vnder 35. Cabo de Infante or point of the kings sonne vnder 34. ½ Cabo Talhado or the clouen point vnd 34. Cabo das Vaccas or point of cowes Baya Fermosa or the faire bay vnder 34. Cabo de Areciffe or the point of the Cliffe vnder 33. Rio de infante or point of y e kings son v. 32. Ponta Primeira or the first point vnder 32. Terra do Natal vnder 31.
vnder 16 â…” The vttermost South point of the Island Aynon vnder 18. ½ The Northeast end of the same Iland vnder 19. ½ The Ilands of Sanchoan vnder 21. â…“ The towne Iland of Macau vnder 22. â…“ The towne of Canton vnder 24. ½ Ilha Branco or white Iland vnder 22. ½ Ilha Fermosa or faire Iland vnder 21. ¼ Ilha de Lamon vnder 23. ¼ The hauen of Chabaquea vnder 23. ½ The hauen of Chincheo vnder 24. ½ Enseada dos Camaroins or Créeke of Granaet otherwise called Cayto vnder 25. ½ The Iland Lequeo Pequeno vnder 25. A Ilha dos Cauallos or Iland of horses vnder 25. â…“ Ponto or Cabo de Sumbor vnder 28. ¼ The Ilands as Sere Irmaas or seauen fifte as lying in the way to Iapan vnder 29. â…“ The Ilandes of Sionglean lying on the coast vnder 29. â…” The Ilandes called Liampo lying on the coast vnder 31. The middle of the Iland Meaxuma vnder 30. â— 2. The Iland of Tanaxuma vnder 31 â…” The riuer of Nanquiyn vnder 34. The Ilands of Iapan in all hauing in Longitude 130. miles and the furthest eastward lieth vnder 32. From the Ilandes of Phillippinas otherwise the Lusons or Manillas on the North side of the Equinoctial line THe entrie of the channell betweene the Iland Luson and the Iland Tandaia vnder 12. The Iland Capuly and the Iland Ticao vnder 12. ¼ The Iland Masbate vnder 12. ¼ The Iland of Banton vnder 12. â…” The Iland Rebuian on the north side vnder 12. ½ The Iland de Vireies vnder 12. ¾ The Iland Marinduque vnder 12. ¼ Cabo de Dumarijn in the Iland Mindoro and the Ilandes of Luban vnder 13. The mouth or entry of the bay of Manilla the chiefe towne of the Iland of Lucon vnder 14. ¼ The towne of Manilla vnder 14 ½ The cape of Samballes in the Iland Lucon vnder 14. â…” The Cape Bullinao in the same Iland vnder 16. â…” The Cape de Boiador which is the furthest point on the north-side of the Island Luson vnder 19. The furthest Iland east and north from the Iland Lequeos vnder 29. The Iland a Illas de las Velas otherwise de los Ladrones vnder 13. The countrie of new Spaine lying ouer against the Islands of Iapon THe Iland of Saint Agustine lying on the coast vnder degrées 30. ¼ The Iland de Sedros or of Ceaders vnder 28. ¼ Cabo de saint Lucas the beginning of the land of California vnder 22. Cabo de las Corrientes or point of streams vnder 19. â…” The hauen of Acapulco vnder 17. From the straightes of Magellanes along the coast of Brasilia to the Equinoctiall line on the south side The degrees of the south side of the Equinoctiall THe straight or passage of Magellanes vnder 15. â…› degrées Basyâ— de las Islas or the bay of the Ilandes vnder 49. Rio de la Plata or riuer of Siluer vnder 34. â…” Arreciffe or the Cliffe vnder 34. Bahia Aparcellada or the bankie bay vnder 33. Cabo da Ponta vnder 32. Rio dos Negros or the riuer of the Mores vnder 31. Angra Onde Seuio o Battel that is the hauen where the boate was séene vnder 30 Ilha da Bahya or Iland of the bay vnder 29. Ilha de Santa Caterina vnder 28. ½ Bahia do Repairo or bay of defence vnder 28. Rio do Estremo or riuer beyond measure vnder 27. Rio dos Dragos or riuer of Dragons vnder 26. Ilha de Cananea or Ilands of Réedes vnder 25. ½ Ilha Doropica vnder 25. Bay of Saint Vincent vnder 24. The riuer of Canane vnder 24 The Rio or riuer dâ— Ianero vnder 23. â…“ Cabo Frio or cold point vnder 23. Bahia do Saluador or bay of our Sauiour vnder 22. The sands called os Baixos dos Pargos vnder 21. A Bahia do Espirito Santo or the Bay of the holy Ghost vnder 120. The Iland of saint Barbara vnder the same height of 20. The riuer of S. Luciâ— vnder 19. The riuer of Saint George vnder 18. Porto Sâ—guro or the safe hauen vnder 17. Rio das Santos Cosmos the riuer of Saint Cosmos and Daâ—ian vnder 16. The Iland of S. Helena also vnder 16. Rio da Praia vnder 15. Rio dos Ilhas the riuer of small IlaÌ„ds vnder 14. ½ Porto Real or kingly hauen vnder 14. Bahya de Todos os Santos vnder 13. Rio Real or kingly riuer vnder 12. The riuer of Saint â—â—ancis vnder 11. The riuer of Saint Michael vnder 10. Santo Alexo vnder 9. Cabo or point of S. Augustine vnder 8. ¾ The towne of Olinda vnder 8. 3 â— Pernanbuco and the Iland of the Ascention vnder 8. Saint Domingo vnder 7. Artapica vnder 6. Santo Roque Santa Maria d' Arribada vnder 5. The bay of Saint Lucas vnder 4. The bay of das Tartarugas vnder 3. Rio de Arreciffe vnder 2. From the Antillas or sore Islands of the Spanish Indies some places lying in the Firme Land al vpon the north side of the Equinoctiall line Isla la deceada or desired Iland vnder 15. 1 â— The Iland Marigalante vnder 15 The Iland la Dominica vnder 15. ½ The Iland la Antigua or old Iland vnder 16. ¼ Cabo de Cantina vpon the Firme land vnder 9. ½ The Iland la Serrana vnder 14. ½ The Serranilla or little Serrana vnder 16. Cayman Grande or the great Crocodile vnder 19. Cabo de S. Anton in the Iland of Cuba vnder 22. The riuer of S. Peter S. Paul vnder 21. Los Cambos d'Almeria vnder 20. Villa Rica la vicia or olde rich towne vnder 19. â…” The hauens and places lying vppon the coast called India with the distance situation of the same beginning from the North side along the coast southwestward as the countrie stretcheth And first you must vnderstand that the coast called India hath his beginning from the creeke called a Enseada de Iaquetta at a place called Espero c. FRom Espero to Mangalor are 8. miles From Mangalor to Patana are 8 From Patana to the point called Punta de Diu are 12. FroÌ„ Diu to the Iland a Ilha do Bette are 9. From the Ilha do Bette to Goa a towne lying in the creeke of Cambaia are 20. From Ilha do Bette to the towne of Daman are 26. From Daman to Surratte a towne lying in the creeke of Cambaia are â— From Daman to Danu on the outward part of the coast are 7. From Danu to as Ilhas das Vacas are 7. From as Ilhas das Vacas to the towne of Baccain are 3. FroÌ„ Baccain to the towne of Chaul are 12 From Chaul to Danda are 5. From Danda to the creeke called a Enserda de Pero Soares are 3. From Enseada de Pero Soares to Siffardao are 3. From Siffardao to Dabul are 10. From Dabul to Sanguiserra are 6. FroÌ„ Sanguiserra to the riuer Beâ—cele are From the riuer of Bettele to Seyta Por are 3. From Seyta Por to Carapam are 11. From Carapam to the chiefe towne of Goa are 14. From Goa to Angediua are
12. From this place forward beginneth the coast of Malabar which is contained within the coast of India FRom Angediua to Batecala are miles 12. From Batecala to the fortresse of Barcelar are 5. From Barcelar to the Ilands called Primeiro are 6. From Primeiro Ilandes to the fortresse of Mangalor are 6. From Mangalor to Monte Fermoso are 4 From Monte Fermoso to Monte de Lin are 10. From Monte de Lin to the fortresse of Cananor are 6. From Cananor to Calecut are 8. From Calecut to Coulette are 2. From Coulette to Chale and Parangale are 7. From Parangale to Tanor are 3. From Tanor to Panane are 6. From Panane to Cochiin are 15. From Cochiin to a place called Arbore de Porca or the tree of the Sow or Hogge are 9. From Arbore de Porca to Caule Coulao are 9. From Caule Coulao to the fortresse Coulao are 6. From Coulao to the Barreiras are 4. From the Barreiras to Briniao are 8. From Briniao to the Ilandes called Ilha de Tarauancor are 6. From Tarauancor to the Cape de Comoryn are 6. There endeth the coast commonly called in the Orientall coast the Countrie of India wherein is contained the coast of Malabar as aforesaid all the rest of the Orientall coastes haue their particular names seuerall from India as I haue sufficiently declared and all the miles aforesaid as also all those in the description of the voiage to and from India are all Spanish myles whereof 17 and ½ are one degrée which are fiftéene Dutch miles Hereafter followeth an Instruction memorie of the yeelding or declining of the compasse in the Nauigations and courses of the Portingales into the East Indies both outward and homeward in what places and how much they yeeld northwest northeast that is how much the needle of the compasse windeth or turneth towards the east or west all perfectlie set downe and truly marked by the Portingale Pilots that saile ordinarilie SAyling from Lisbone almost to the point of Cabo Verde theÌ„ the néedles or lines of the compasse doe yéeld northeastward that is towards the east two 3. parts of a strike and more From thence about 4 or 5. degrées further on the north side of the Equinoctiall being 70. or 80. miles from the coast then the néedle of the comâ—â—sse windeth Eastward that is northeastward halfe a strike if you be 100. or 120. miles from the land then it windeth northeastward â…“ part of a strike Running along by the coast of Brasilia to 7.8 10. degrées on the south side of the Equinoctiall then the compasse will winde Northeastward or to the east â…“ part of a strike that is when you sayle close by the coast of Brasilia from 17. 18. degrées vnder which height lieth the sands called os Baixos dos Abrolhos then the compasse will winde Northeastward ¼ or â…” partes of a strike that is when you run not aboue 100. or 120. miles from the coast of Brasilia Running along by the Iland of Martin Vaaz theÌ„ the compasse windeth northeastward a strike or more From thence forward till you bee vnder 33. degrées the compasse windeth northeastward a strike and a halfe to seauentie or eightie miles beyond the Iland of Tristan da Cunha From thence to the Cabo de Bona Speranza then the compasse beginneth againe to winde lesse and if you marke the compasse well that it windeth halfe a strike to the northeast then you are hard by the Cape de bona Speranza not aboue 30. or 40. miles at the furthest froÌ„ it for when you are north south with the cape then the compasse wil winde northeastward â…“ part of a strike Sayling from thence forward if you mark the compasse find it euen then you are 80. miles eastward from the cape das Agulhas Sayling the Compasse if it windeth Northwestward â…” parts of a strike that is towards the west then you are North South with the point called Cabo das Correntes and being vnder 25. and 26. deg till you come vnder 20. degrées and that the Compasse yéeldeth ¼ of a strike and more Northwestward then look out for the Islande called S. Laurence for you shal presently sée it when you are right ouer against Mosambique then the Compasse yeeldeth a strike or somewhat lesse towards the northwest hath y e same differeÌ„ce til you come to the Equinoctial line towards India Being 200. miles East and West with the hauen of Goa or the coast of India to Cabo de Comorijn then the Compasse windeth Northwestward a strike and a half and vpon the coast of India a strike and â…“ Sayling from Cochiin to Portingal vntill you haue past the Ilands Maldiua south and southwestward then the Compasse will wind Northwestward a strike and a half till you be vnder 8. and 10. degrées on the south side of the Equinoctiall line and if you find it lesse then a strike a halfe then you are on y e west side of the sands called A Saya de Malha that is the dublet of Iron rings because they are like it And when you are vnder 27. or 30. degrées holding your course west then you shall find that the Compasse yéeldeth a strike and ¼ Northwestward and when you find it so theÌ„ you are North south with the point of S. Roman lying on the furthest end southeastward from the Iland of S. Laurence Being north and south with the sands called Os Baixos de Iudia making towardes the land called Terra do Natal til you bee vnder 30. and 31. deg then the Compasse wil yéeld Northwestward ¾ of a strike or somewhat lesse then you shall be North south with the point called Cabo das Correntes Comming vnder 32. 33. degr forward and finding the Compasse euen not winding Eastward nor westward then you are right vnder the Meridian you must vnderstande that to marke the Compasse well that it saileth not any thing at all you must alwaies haue your eye vpon if in the Peylen the better to looke vnto it for if you sayle therin you shal hardly gesse right nor make any good account Hauing past the Cape de bona Speranza sayling to the Ilande of S. Helena then the Compasse windeth Northeastward 1 â— part of a strike in the Islande of S. Helena halfe a strike and from the Iland of S. Helena to the Iland of Ascention then the Compasse windeth Northeastward â…” parts of a strike When you sayle from Portingall to Brasilia till you bee vnder the height of the point of Cabo de S. Augustin this Iland of Ascention then you must vnderstand that the more the Compasse windeth northeastward or eastward the further eastward you are from the said point therefore you must haue great regard thereunto for that if you bee comming in Peylen you shall find it there to be euen as I said before From the Islande of Ascention to the cliffe called Penedo de S. Pedro about 20. or
before the said king of Spaine had any right in the kingdome of Portingal for the which cause it is not here set downe but shall hereafter follow particularly by it selfe together with the pettigrée of the kings of Portingale brieflie and truly described by coppies receiued from the officers of those countries the whole summe of all the rents reuenewes c. afore specified and set downe doe amount vnto yearely the summe of 47 31 Q. 329. V. 880. Spanish monie which amounteth in English monie to the summe of three millions foure hundreth thréescore and nintéene thousand nine hundreth and seauentéene pounds fiue shillinges and nine pence which is the full summe of all his receites Portingale excepted which now is in the said kinges handes as hereafter followeth The kingdomes that are comprehended vnder the name of Spaine or Castillia are these Leon Arragon Castillia Nauarre Granado Tolledo Valencia Seuillia Cordoua Murcien Iaen Gallicia Gibraltar and Catalonia which are 14. in number and in times past were euerie one a Kingdome apart yet hold the name the Kingdomes Prouinces and Townes which are called to any counsell or assemblie in the Court of Spaine and therein doe giue their voices are the Kingdomes of Leon Seuillia Tolledo Granado Cordoma Murcien and Iaen The townes called chiefe townes or Cities which are Bishoprickes are Burgos Saâ—amanca Segouia Soria Auila Cuenca Toro Zamora Guadalaxara the townes that are no chiefe townes nor Bishoprickes and are called townes whether they lie walled or not of these but two of them haue any voices which are Valla Dolid and Madrid the other kingdomes as Arragon Nauarre Valencia and Catalonia c. haue their Viceroyes Gouernours apart holding Parlements or Courts by themselues alwaies referred to the King of Spaines order and direction as the kingdomes of Naples and Cicilia with the Dukedome of Millan c. The 3. Chapter A briefe discourse of the notablest and memorablest things situation gouernment and reuenewes of the kingdome of Portingale called Lusitanea THe kingdome of Portingale is in coÌ„passe 285. miles that is on the sea coast 135 miles and by land 150. miles There are 1â— Townes in Portingale that are called Citties which title no Towne may beare but such as are Bishoprickes vnles it be by speciall licence from the King himselfe all the rest are called Townes whether they haue walles or not whereof there are many of these townes and Castles There are in Portingale 4â—0 besides villages it hath 3. principall hauens or riuers which are Lisbone Porto and Seruual and other thrée in the land of Algarue which is also vnder the Crowne of Portingale which are Tauilla Lagâ—s and Villa Noua the key or defence of the riuer and towne of Lisbone is the Castle of Saint Iulian by the Neatherlanders called Saint Gilles which lieth on the first enterance of the riuer called Tegio in latine Tagus one of the most famous riuers of all Europe The 4. Chapter Of the Iustice and gouernement in Lisbone and throughout all Portingale FIrst there is the Tribunale called the ciuill Court or Law whereof the chiefe Iudge is the Regidoer that is the ruler in the kinges behalfe with two other Iudges then the Tribunale or Court for criminall causes with two Iudges an Auditor or receauer of the kinges customes called the Alfandega a Iudge of Equitie for euerie mans proprieties or own reuenewes eight Iudges of the Weesen a Iudge of the Hospitals a chiefe Iudge called Correcteur of the thinges and causes of India Guinea Capo verde Saint Thomas and Brasilia from all these Courtes they may appeale to the ciuill law the Tribunale or Court of requests whose Iudges are called Desembargadores which is as much to say as dischargers these are of great authority and credit as the chiefe States and Presidents are in the Low Countries To this Court are brought the appellations that are made vnto the ciuill law their chiefe Iudge is called Correcteur of the requests two Iudges that are called Desembargadores da Fazenda which is as much to say as Auditors and Iudges of the Kinges causes and reuenewes these are they that minister Iustice betwéene the King and particular men and from them there is no appeale the councell of orders Tribunale Supremo or highest Court which are called Desembargadores of the pallace Tribunale or Court of Consciences Tribunale or Court of Veedores da Fazenda that is visitors and ouerseers of the Kinges reuenewes Tribunale or Court of the Kinges Exchequer which is vnder the courts of Veedores da Fazenda the Kinges Councell two Dukes one Marques ten Earledomes The fortresses which the Portingales hold in Africa or Barbaria are these Tanger Zepta Arzilla the Iland of Madera the Flemmish Islandes called as Ilhas dos Acores in those are comprehended Tercera S. Michael Santa Maria Saint Iorgie Pico Fayael Gratiosa the Ilandes of Flores and Coruo the Ilands of Cabo verde are S. Iacob O fogo Mayo Boa Vista S. Antonio and Saint Nicolaes Arguyn a fortresse in the Countrie of Guinea the Myne of Saint Iorgie the Castle lying on the same side of Aethiopia also on the same coast the Iland del Principe Saint Thomas Atâ—bâ—n the Kingdome of Congo and Angola on the same Coast of Aethiopia lieth vnder tribute of the Portingale the Iland Santa Helena on the other side of the cape de Bona Speranza the fortresse of Soffala the Iland of Mosambique the Iland of Ormus lying betwéene Persia and Arabia the towne and fortresse of Diu the towne and fortresses of Daman Bacayn Chaul Goa where the Viceroy is resident all lying on the Coast of India the townes and fortresses of Honor Barcelor Mangalor Cananor Cranganor Cochin and Coulan all lying on the same Coast of India called Malabar a fortresse in the Iland of Seylon called Columbo the townes Negapatan and S. Thomas on the coast of Choramandel the towne and fortresse of Malacca the Iands of Maluco which are Tarnate Tydor Banda and Amboyna the land and coast of Brasilia stretching 500. miles in length and deuided into eight Captaineships or gouernements from whence euery yeare is brought into Portingale about 150. thousand Arroben of sugar each Arroben waighing 32. pound the Hauen called de Todos os Santos or of all Saints where the Gouernour of Brasilia is resident The ordinarie rentes of the Crowne of Portingale are yearely one million of gold 100000. duckets the rents reuenewes of the Mastership of the knights of the Crosse the king being alwaies Master to whom belong the Ilands of Acores or Flemmish Ilands Madera those of Cabo verde Saint Thomas and de Princepe are yearelie 200000. Duckets the rent of the Mine belonging to y e Knight of the Crosse of Christ is yerely worth 100000. duckets Brasilia yéeldeth yearely 150000. Duckets the customes of spices and other goods receiued out of the East Indies is yearely 600000. Duckets the other rents profits and reuenewes of the Indies and their townes are spent and disbursed in
esse consueuerunrit The trew description of all the Coasts of China Cauchinchina Camboyn Syao Malacia Arraacan and Pegu together with all the Islands there abowts both great and smale with the Cliffes Breathes Sands Droughts and Shalloweâ— all perfectly drawne and examined with the most expert Cardes of the Portingales Pilots The discription of the Islandes and Castle of Mozambique lyeinge vppon the borders of Melinde rich of Eban wood fine Goulde and Ambergrize froÌ„whence many Slaues are caried into India Defineatiò Orarum maritimarum Terâ—re â—vulgo indigitatae Terra do Natalâ—tem Sofalâ— Mozambica Melindae Insulaeque Sancti Laurentij Insularum Maldiuicarum Seylon Jnsulae Promontorij Comorini ad Jndiam siti una cum Jnsulie Scopulis Pulinnis Vadis veci s Ventorum tractibus Vgenuino singulorum loco rum situ ad exactissimas Jchno graphicas Jndicarum tabulas recognita atque emendata The description or Caerd of the Coastes of the Countreys following callâ— Terra do Natal all the Const of Sofalâ— Mozambique Melindâ— and the Jland of Saint Laurence wiâ—h all their Jslands Cliffes Drougthes and Shallowes allso the Jslandes of Maldiuuia to the Jslande Seylon and the Cape de Comori Lieinge on the Coast of Jndia with the trew scituation and couers of the same according to the â—ewest and last Caâ—â—des made for the same Coastes Diliniatur in hac tabula Orce maritimae Abexia freti Mecani al Maris Rubri Arabiae Ormi Persiae suprà Sindam usque Fluuinis Indj Cambaice Jndiâ— Malabariâ— Insulae Ceylon Choromandelice Orixae stinij Gangis Regni Bengale sinus item Sinum Insularum Scopulorum Puluinorum Vadorum profunditatumque dictis oris adiacentium cum genuimis singulorum sororum Nominibus prout ab expretiseimis nauium Gubernatoribus Lusitanicis iniligetatur magno studio ex optimis tabulis Indias recognita omnia atque emendata The description of the coast of Abex The straights of Meca otherwise called the Red Sea the coastes of Arabia Orinus and Persia to the Riuer of Sinde of the Riuer Indus of Cambain India and Malabar The Ilands of Ceilon Choraâ—andel and Orixa The Riuer Ganges and the kingdome of Bengala As allso the scituation of the Creekes Cliffes Banckes Shallowes and deptilies vpon or along by the said Coastes with the right name of euery place as they are called by the Portingale Pilots all truly described Typus orarum maritimarum Guinae Manicongo Angolae ultra promontorium Bonae spei usque cum omnibê° portubus Insulis Scopulis puluinis Vadis veraque latitudine Oceani Aethiopici ab ortu in occasuÌ„ ad Fermambucum promont S Augustini in ora Brasiliensi vergentis una cum eiusdem oceani Insulis praecipue vero S'Thomae S Helena Insula Ascensionis multisque aliis earumque genuino tractu accurate omnia ex optimis Indicis tabulis hydrographicis decerpta emend The description of the Coast of Guinea Manicongo and Angola and so proceeding forwards beyond the Cape de Bona Speranza with all the Hauens Ilands Cliffes Drougthes and Shallowes with y e whole bredth of the Ethiopian Ocean Seas which reacheth from East to west to Pernambuco and Cape S. Augustine lying on the Coast of Brasilia together with all the Islands namely S. Thomas S. Helena the Ilande of the Ascention and others with their true courses Imprinted at LondoÌ„ by Iohn Wolfe R.E. sculpsir Delinentio omnium oâ—arum totius Ausâ—â—â—tiâ— partis Americae dictae Peru â—ianae a Risola Plata Brasiliam Pariam Casâ—ellam auream una cum omnibus Insulis Anâ—ilus dictâ—â— Hispaniolam item Cubam comprehen â—seâ—â—s 〈◊〉 promonat floridae vulgo cabo de la flori 〈◊〉 sâ—â—n Istâ—◠〈◊〉 Panamam Nombre de dios 〈◊〉 Peru cur â—erae cum â—nâ— metrapoli Cusco Comâ—â—â—ssimo portu Lâ—nae Orarum etiam Chilae fâ—eti interi â—â—im Pataâ—onem cervam del fuego vulgo Este echo â—s Fernando Magallanes Et omniumâ— portuum Jasularum scopulorum pusianorum vadorum tractusque ventorum ex optimus Lusâ—tanitis cartis hydrographicia delineatio atque emendata The description of the whole coast lying in the South seas of Americae called Peru beginning at Rio de Plata along the coast of Brasilia Paria and the gosâ—eli Castell with all the Islands called Antilas Hispaniola and Cuba to the Cape of Florida together with the straights and landes betwene Panama and Nombre de Dios all the coasts and land of Golden Peru with the cheef towne of Cosiâ— and Hauen of Lyma also the coast from Chile and the chanell or narrow straight of Paragonen and terra del Fuego with all the Hauens Islandes Cliffes sandes depthes and shallowes with the trew scituation of them INSVLAE MOLVCCAE celeberrimae sunt ob Maximam aromatum copiam quam to tum terrarum orbem mittunt harum precipuè sunt Ternate Tidoris Motir Machion et Bachion his quidam adiungunt Gilolum Celebiam Borneonem Amboinum et Bandam Ex Insula Timore in Europam advehuntur Santala ruben albu Ex Banda Nuces myristicae cum Flore vulgo dicto Macis Et ex Moluccis Cariophilli quorum icones in pede hujus tabellce ad vivum expressas poni curauinrus The First Booke The Second Booke The Thiâ—â— Booke The Fourth Booke Anno 1576 the 6. of December we sailed from the Tassell Annotatio D. Paâ—l This was a twinne of my forenamed brother deceased 1581. 1582. 1583. 1582. 1585. 1584. Annotatio D. Pall. Annotatio D. Pall. Annotatio D. Pall. 1539. 1546. A fable of the people of Bengalen concerning the heade or spring of y e riuer Ganges The supersttious opinions of the Indians concerning the Riuer of Ganges The 〈…〉 Bengâ—ns The Bengâ—lians â—aw for adultery Victuailes good cheap in Bengala Strange customs of the Peguans The men of â—hina pray the Deuil Annoint D. Pall. 15â—2 158â— 158â— Annotat. D. Pall. A coâ—â—â—e kynde of chaine 〈◊〉 women 〈◊〉 weaâ—e An Apeâ— Tooth had in great estimation They are called Wâ—-lyce because the breede 〈◊〉 walâ— Bâ— in true Eâ—glish theâ— are called Mâ—dges in Latin Câ—miceâ— Annoâ— D. P. Annoâ—a D. Paâ—l Annota D. Pall. Annota D. P. Annota D. Pall. Annoâ— D. 〈◊〉 Annota D. Pall Annota â— Pall. â—nnota D. Pall. Annota D. Pall Annoâ— D. 〈◊〉 Annota D. Pal Anota D Pal Annotâ— D. P. Annota D. Pal. Annota D. Pal. â—nota â— Pal. Annota D. Pal. Annota D. Pal. Anâ—nota D. Pal. Annota D. Pall. Annotâ— D. Pâ— Annota D. Pall Annota D. Pall. Some 〈◊〉 this 〈…〉 the 〈◊〉 caâ—led 〈◊〉 Moâ— Annota D Pall. Annota D. Pal. Annota D. Pall. Annota D. Paâ— An. 1555 Annota D. Pal. â—ta â— Pal. Annota D. Palâ— Annota D. Pal. Annota D. Pal. Annota â— Paâ— Annoâ—a D 〈◊〉 Annota D. Pal 1535 Annota D. Pal. Aâ—oâ—a D. Pal. Annota â— Pal. Anota D. Pal. Annota D. Pal. Annota D. Pâ— Annota D. Pall. Annota D. Pall Annota D. Paâ— Anâ— D. 〈◊〉 Annâ— D. Pâ— Of this â— Newbery you may read more in M. Hackluyâ—es boke of Englâ—she voyages 1584 1â—86 â—4 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 1587. 158â— â—587 1588 158â— â—588 1580 15â—â— â—89 159â— â—591 1â—â—2 Congo translated by master Abraham Hartwel and Printed in London â—524 1518. 1492. 1493. 1513 151â— â—541 1502 1509 1524. 1498. 〈◊〉 1500. 1521 1519 1543 1â—31 1533 1535. 153â— 1544 1536. 1539. 1557 1539. 1585. 〈◊〉 Dom. 1585 15â—â— 1585. 1585. 1585. 1582. 1584. 1579. 1577 1578 Salinas Biscay Guipiscoa Foure â—ill townes Leon. Asturia Bilbau Burgos Oca Rioxa Hebro Hebrohooke Victoria Guipiscoa Mena. Logronno Iangas Sancta Domingo Diego Cande Munnon Serrato Monson Placentia Carion Sahagun Saldana Perina Campo Miranda Asturias Lugo Modonedo Orenso S. Ieames in Galitia Tuy Ponto Ferrara Leon. Astorga Salas. Samora Toro Vienna Guirena Barisal de la Coma. Salamanca Rodrigo Trigeros Olmillo Torde Sillas Valla Dolid Torde Humos Medina del Campo Olmeda Naua Madrigal Arenalo Auila Segouia Aranda de Duero Roa Gunnel de Yâ—an Sepulueda Soria Osina Agreda Tarasona Molina Siguenca Cuenca Huete Villa Rexo de Fuentes c. Belmonte Murcia Lorca Cartagena Alcaras Segura de la Sierra Villa Nueua de los inâ—antes Ocanna Castillia Guadalaxara Pios 〈◊〉 Vâ—â—da 〈…〉 Iepas Alcala de Henares Biriuega Madril Puno en Rostro Cubas Grennon Galapagar Ilescas Toledo Almagro Cuidad Real Taleuera de la Reyna Placentia Truxillo Caceres Badaios Alcantara Serna Merida Fuento el Maestro Guadalcana Xeres de Badaios Siuillia Palma and Guelues Teuar and Ardales Ilerena Cadiz Gibralter Xeres Catmona Lora and Sette Filla Egija Cordona Anduxar VVieda Baesa Quexada Carcola S. Esteuen Martos Iaen Granada Loxa Albama Baca Guadix Almena Almunecar Mutril Salabrena Malaga Veles Malaga Pulchena Ronda Canary Teneriffe La Palma â—â—9â— 2 Don Sancho 3 Don Afonzo 4 Don Sancho Capello 5 The Earle of Bologien 6 Don Deniis 7 Don Afonzo O Brauo 8 Don Pedro 9 Don Ferdinand 10 Don Ioan 11 Don Duarte or Eduart 12 Don Afonzo 1â— Don Ioan 14 Don Manoell 1â— Don Ioan 3. 16. Don Sebastian 17. Don Henricke 18. Don phillip king of Spaine
visited by many Turkes and Arabians This entery is also called the redde sea not that the water is redde but onely because there are certain redde hilles lying about the same that yéeld redde marble stones and because the sand in some places is redde it is the same sea which Moyses with the children of Israel passed through on dry land From the hooke or cape de Guardafum which lesseneth and is narrow inwardes towardes Sues in time past called Arsinoe which is the vttermost town where the narrownesse or straight endeth are 360. miles and from thence ouer land to the Mediterranean sea in Italie are 90. myles the straight or narrownes is in the entraÌ„ce also within the broadest place 40. miles and in some places narrower it hath also diuers Islands and on the one side inwarde by Sues Northward Arabia deserta on the other side south ward Aegipt where the riuer Nilus hath her course and somewhat lower towardes the Indian seas Arabia Felix and on the other side right against it the countrey of Abexynes or Prester Iohns land vpon the hooke or corner of Arabia Felix the Portingals in time past helde a fort called Aden but nowe they haue none whereby at this present the Turks come out of the straight or mouth of the redde sea with Gallies that are made in Sues and doe much hurt and iniurie vppon the coast of Abex or Melinde as when time serueth we shall declare Hauing againe passed the line we had the sight of the North Star whereof vpon the coast of Guinea from the Island of S. Thomas vntill this tyme wee had lost the fight The 4. of September wee espyed a shippe of our owne fléete and spake with him it was the S. Francisco which sayled with vs till the 7. day and then left vs. The 13. of September wee saw an other shippe which was the S. Iacob which sailed out of sight again and spake not to vs. The 20. of September we perceiued many Snakes swimming in the sea being as great as Eeles and other thinges like the scales of fish which the Portingals call Vintijns which are halfe Ryalles of siluer Portingall money because they are like vnto it these swimme and driue vpon the sea in great quantities which is a certain sign token of the Indian coast Not long after with great ioy we descried land and found ground at 47. fâ—dome déepe being the land of Bardes which is the vttermost ende and corner of the enterie of the Riuer Goa of being about thrée miles from the Citie it is a high land where the shippes of India do anker and vnlade and from thence by boates their wares are carryed to the towne That day we ankered without in the sea about thrée miles from the land because it was calme and the fludde was past yet it is not without danger and hath round about a faire and fast land to anker in for as then it beganne in those places to be summer The 21. being y e next day there came vnto vs diuers boats called Almadias which borded vs bringing w t theÌ„ all maner of fresh victuailes from the land as fresh bread fruit some of them were Indians that are christened there came likewise a Galley to fetch the Archbishoppe and brought him to a place called Pangijn which is in the middle way betwéene Goa and the roade of Bardes and lyeth vpon the same Riuer Here hee was welcommed and visited by the Vice Roy of India named Don Francisco Mascarenias and by all the Lordes and Gentlemen of the countrey as well spirituall as temporall The Magistrates of the towne desired him to stay there ten or twelue dayes while preparation might bee made to receiue him with triumph into the cittie as their manner is which hee granted them The same day in the afternoone we entred the Riuer into the roade vnder the lande of Bardes being the 21. of September Anno 1583. being fiue monthes and 13. dayes after our putting forth of the Riuer of Lisbone hauing stayed 15. daies at Mosambique which was one of the spéediest and shortest voyages that in many yeares before and since that time was euer performed There we founde the shippe named Saint Laurence which arriued there a day before vs The 22. day the S. Iacob came thither and the next day after arriued the S. Francis There dyed in our shippe 30. persons among the which some of them were slaues and one high Dutchman that had beene one of the King of Spaines garde euery man had beene sicke once or twice and let bloode This is commonly the number of men that ordinarily dyed in the ships sometimes more sometimes lesse About ten or twelue years since it chaunced that a Vice Roy for the King named Ruy Lorenso Detauora sayled for India that had in his shippe 1100. men and there happened a sicknes among them so that there dyed thereof to the number of 900. and all throwne ouer borde into the sea before they came to Mosambique the Vice Roy himselfe being one Which was an extraordinarie sicknesse and it is to be thought that the great number of men in the ship were the cause of bréeding the same therefore in these dayes the shippes take no more so many men into them for that with the number they carrie they haue stinking ayre and filth enough to clense within the shippe The 30. of September the Archbishoppe my maister with great triumph was brought into the towne of Goa and by the Gentlemen and Rulers of the countrey led vnto the cathedrall Church singing Te Deum laudamus and after many ceremonies and auncient customes they conuayed him to his pallace which is close by the Church The 20. of Nouember our Admirall S. Phillip arriued at Cochin without staying to land in any place hauing indured much miserie by the meanes before rehearsed hauing béene seuen monthes and twelue daies vnder saile The last of the same month of Nouember the shippes sayled from Goa to the coast of Malabar and Cochin there to receiue their lading of Pepper and other spices some take in their lading on the coast of Malabar as at Onor Mangator Cananor c. and some at Cochin which can alwayes lade two shippes with Pepper Cochin lyeth from Goa Southwarde about 90. miles The shippes vnlade all their Portingall commodities in Goa where the Marchantes and Factors are resident and from thence the ships do sayle along the coast to take in their lading in Pepper and to Cochin as it is said before Each shippe doeth commonly lade eyght thousande Quintales of Pepper little more or lesse Portingall waight euery Quintale is 128. pound Then they come to Cochin whither the Factors also do trauell and lade in them Cloues Sinamon and other Indian wares as in my voyage homewarde I will particularly declare together with the manner of the same In the monthes of Ianuary and Februarie Anno 1584. the shippes with their lading returned from Cochin some before
thether out of all parts of India and from thence are sent ouer land to Venice and also carried throughout all Turkie Armenia Arabia Persia and euery way There are likewise brought thether all manner of marchandises from those Countries that is from Persia out of the Countrie named Coracone and Dâ—aâ— and other places great store of rich Tapestrie Couerlets which are called Alcatiffâ—s out of Turkie all manner of Chamlets out of Arabia diuers sortes of Drugges for Poâ—icaries as Sanguis draconis Manna Mirre Frankinsence such like diuers goodly horses that are excellent for bréeding all manner of most excellent Orientall Pearles out of Mascatte a Hauen lying betwéene the Cape of Roselgate and Moncadon vppon the coast of Arabia diuers sorts of Dates and Marmelades which from Ormus is carried into India and all places are serued therewith likewise the money called Larynen which hath as it were two legges stretching out like a péece of siluer wide that is beaten flat printed about with certain small Characters which is coyned in Persia at a place called Lary being fine Siluer is brought thether in great quantities wherby there is as great dealing with them as with other marchandises because of the greate gaine that is gotten by them and in India they goe very high Now to know the cause of so great traffique and concourse of people in this Ilande of Ormus you must vnderstand that euery yeare twice there commeth a great companie of people ouer land which are called Caffiles or Carâ—anes which come from Aleppo out of the Countrie of Surie thrée daies iornie from Tripoli which lyeth vppon the coast of the Mediterranean Sea this companie of people or Caffila obserue this order that is euery yeare twice in the months of Aprill and September There is a Captaine and certain hundreths of â—annisaries which conuaye the said Caffila vntill they come to the Towne of Bassora from whence they trauaile by water vnto Ormus The marchants know the times when the Caruana or Caffila will come so that against that time they make and prepare their marchandises in a readinesse and then are brought thether diuers Cammels Dromedaries Moyles and horses euerye man his troope which are there likewise to bee solde so that there are assembled at the least fiue or sixe thousand persons all together and ryde all in order like a battell that marcheth in the fielde two and two vpon a Cammell or else ware hanging on both sides of the Cammel as you shal sée in the Picture that followeth With a good garde of â—anisaries because they are often times set vpon by the Arabians which are great théeues and come to robbe them for they must trauaile in the woods at the least fortie daies together wher in euery thrée or foure dayes they finde wels or pits from wheÌ„ce they prouide themselues of water which they carrie with them in beastes skins tanned whereof they make Flaskes and Botles The people nowe of late yeares haue left off their robbing and stealing in the hiph waies but long before the birth of Christ they vsed it as the Prophet Ieremie doth witnes saying in his third Chapter and second verse Lift vp your eyes and behold what fornicatioÌ„ you commit in euery place you sit in the streetes and stay for your companions like the Arabian in the woodes c. I remember that wee fell among many thousande of these people which in great pouertie dwell within the woodes and sandie downes that are altogether barren where they liue in the heate of the Sunnes lying with their Cammels getting their lyuing only by robbing and stealing their meate and best breade are Cakes which they bake vnder Cammels dung dried in the Sunne which the Sand maketh hotte and Cammels Milke and flesh with such like vnprofitable meate to conclude they liue like miserable men as in truth they are Likewise ther are certaine victualers that follow this companie which carrie all kinde of things with theÌ„ as Honie Dates Shéepe Goates Hens Egges c. and all other sorts of victuals and prouision so that for money they may haue what they will euery night they lie still and haue their Tents wherein they sléepe kéeping good watch in this manner they trauaile to the Towne of Bassora and passe through Babylon now called Bagedet and through other places Being at Bassora they stay their certaine daies wher againe they assemble themselues to returne home and trauaile in the like sorte backe againe vnto Aleppo whereby all manner of marchandises out of all places are brought thether in great aboundance by great numbers of traueling Marchants of al nations whatsoeuer except Spaniards Portingals and the King of Spaines subiects which are narrowly looked vnto although diuers times many of them passe among the rest vnder the names of French men English men or Venetians which nations haue their factors and seruants continually resident in Aleppo as also in Tripoli where their dayly traffique is from Venice Marsellis and London and in Tripoli they vnlade their wares and there the shippes take in their lading and from thence they send their marchandises by land to and from Aleppo where they vse great traffique and haue many priuiledges and freedomes graunted them by the great Turke And for that wee are nowe speaking of Turks I must not forget to shew you how and in what sort the great Turke hath euery day newes and letters from all his kingdomes Countries that are so great wild wast and spread so farre abroad one from the other You must vnderstand that throughout the whole Countrie of Turkie they vse Doues or Pigeons which are brought vp accustomed thereunto hauing rings aboute their legges These Doues or Pigions are borne from Bassora and Babylon vnto Aleppo and Constantinople and so from thence backe againe and when there is any great occasion of importance to bee aduertised or sent they make the letter fast vnto the ring that is about the Pigions féete and so let them flie whereby the letter with the Doue is brought vnto the place whither it should goe and they flie sometimes a thousand miles which men would thinke impossible but yet it is most true and affirmed by such as come from thence I haue séene of the Doues in India that a Venetian my good friend shewed me which for the strangenesse thereof had brought of them with him into India But let vs now returne vnto our matter of the I le of Ormus which lyeth vnder 27. degrées and in Sommer time is so vnreasonable and intollerable hotte that they are forced to lie and sléepe in wooden Cesterns made for the purpose full of water and all naked both men and women lying cleane vnder water sauing only their heads al their houses are flat aboue and in the toppes therof they make holes to let the ayre come in like those of Cayro and they vse certaine instruments like Waggins with bellowes to beare the people in and together winde to coole
Caetes so that â— Picos which is a Bhar are 200. Caetes as well great as small waight a Bhar of China is 300. Caetes which waigh as much as 200. Caetes at Malacca small waight for that three Caetes of China are in Malacca two Caetes small waight a Caete of China is 16. Taeys Chinish waight which are 14. Taeys in Malacca which is as much as 20. Ounces â— Portingall waight They vse likewise a waight which they cal a Hant euery Hant is twelue Caetes smal waight and euery Caete is 22. Taeyes and 16. Hantes and 8. Caetes are iust 200. Caetes which is a Bhar of small waight so likewise a Tael of Malacca is 16. Mases and 10. Mases and ¼ is an Ounce of Portingall waight and an Ounce and a halfe is iust 16. Mases and the eight part of a Mase by these Mases they sel the Bezars stones for euery Mase two or thrée Ducats according to their greatnesse and goodnesse In Malacca are two sortes of waights great and small which heereafter follow A Bhar great waight is 200. Cates and one Cates 26. Taeys and one Taey is one Ounce ½ hard waight of Portingall the small waight is a Bhar which is also 200. Caetes and one Caetes is 22. Taeys and a â—ael is a full Ounce and a halfe Portingal waight With their great waight they weigh Pâ—per Cloues Nutmegs Folio red white Sanders Indico Alum Sanguis draconis Palo Dauguila Siet and Sapon With the small waight they waigh Quicksiluer Vermilion Coper Blie Iuorie bones Silk Muske Amber Calamba or Lignum Aloes Tin Lead Lancua Oyle of Nutmegs and of flowers Verdette Rosamallia Besoun and Camphora c. The marchandises that the Portingals carrie to China whereof they make most profite is Ryals of eight which in China are worth aboue six testones not for that they had rather haue it then other Siluer but for that it is all Siluer for it is presently cut in péeces to pay it out after their manner as it is shewed before they carrie likewise some Wines both Portingal and Indian Wine and some Oyles of Oliues which are there desired Veluet Cloth of Scarlet whereof they haue none nor yet can make any although they haue both sheepe and wooll enough Looking glasses Iuorie bones and all kinde of Christall and Glasse are well solde there But this shall suffice for that which concerneth the land of China now I will procéede to the description of the Iland of Iapan which is the farthest Viage and last Orientall place by the Portingals discouered or at this day knowne The 26. Chapter Of the Iland of Iapan THe Iland or the land of Iapan is many Ilands one by the other and are seperated and deuided only by certaine small Créekes and riuers it is a great land although as yet the circuite thereof is not knowne because as yet it is not discouered nor by the Portingalles sought into it beginneth vnder 30. degrées and runneth till you come to 38 degrées it lyeth East from the firme land of China about 80. miles and from Maccau by the waye that the Portingalles trauaile Northeast warde is about 300. miles and the Hauen where commonly the Portingals vse to traffique is called Nangasache They haue likewise other places where they traffique and deale The countrie is cold procéeding of much rayne Snow and Ice that falleth therein it hath some Corne lande but their common Corne is Ryce In some places the land is verie hillie and vnfruitfull they eate no flesh but the flesh of wilde beasts and such as is hunted wherein they are verie expert although there are Oxen Cowes Sheepe and such like Cattell good store yet they vse them to other things about their labours and because it is tame flesh which they cannot brooke they refuse it as wee doe horse flesh they doe likewise refuse to eate Milke as wee doe bloud saying that Milke although it is white yet it is verie bloude They haue much Fish whereof they are verie desirous as also all kinds of fruites as in China Their houses are commonly couered with wood and with strawe they are 〈◊〉 and workmanlike builte specially the rich mens houses they haue their Chambers hanged and flowred with Mattes which is their best hangings The Iapens are not so curious nor so cleanly as the men of China but are contente with a meane yet for the most part they goe verie well apparelled in Silke almost like the Chinos The countrie hath some mines of siluer which from thence is by the Portingals yearely brought vnto China and there bartered for Silke and other Chinish wares which the Iapeans haue néede of The countriemen are verie skilfull to search for Siluer and to sell their wares They haue among them verie good handicrafts men and cunning workemen in all kind of handie workes they are sharpe witted and quickly learne any thing they sée as by experience it is found in those parts which the Portingales haue discouered The common people of the lande are much different froÌ„ other nations for that they haue among them as great curtesie and good policie as if they had liued continually in the Court they are verie expert in their weapons as néed requireth although they haue little cause to vse them for that if anye of them beginneth to brawle or to drawe his sworde hee is put to death they haue not any prisons for that who soeuer deserueth to be imprisoned is presently punished or banished the countrie When they meane to lay holde vpon a man they must doe it by stealth and by deceipt for otherwise he would resist and doe much mischiefe If it bee any Gentleman or man of great authoritie they beset his house about with men and whether hee chaunce to slay himselfe or not they enter the house by force and kill al they find therin Which to auoid he suffereth himself often times to be killed by his seruantes And it is often séene that they rip their own bellies open which often times is likewise done by their seruants for the loue of their Masters therein to shew their Masters the loue they beare vnto them so little estéeming their owne liues to pleasure and serue them The like doe young Boyes in presence of their parents onely for griefe or some small anger They are in all their actions very patient and humble for that in their youthes they learne to indure hunger colde and all manner of labour to goe bare headed with few cloathes as well in Winter as in Summer and not onely the common people but the principall Gentlemen and Nobles of the countrie They account it for great beautie to haue no haire which with great care they doe plucke out onely keepe a bunch of haire on the crowne of their heades which they tie together Touching their traffique manners speach and all their ceremonies concerning life and curtesie they are cleane contrarie vnto all other nations speciallie from those of China and till this day obserue
Iland but they may fréelie vse them vpon the firme land and secretly in their houses thereby to shunne and auoid all occasions of dislike that might be giuen to Christians which are but newlie baptised but touching the worldly policie or good gouernement of the countrie and executing of iustice as also for the ruling of the townes men in the citie it is common to them all and they are vnder the Portingales law and he that is once christened and is after found to vse any heathenish superstitions is subiect to the Inquisition what so euer he be or for any point of Religion what so euer The Iland hath nothing of it self to nourish it withall but onely some cattle hennes goates doues c. but very fewe because of the barrennesse and euil situation of the place which is a most hillie barren and wild countrie and full of wast ground all their necessaries as beastes hennes hogges egges milke c. come from Salsette and Bardes but most part out of the firme land Corne Rice and other grayne also Oyle and all other necessaries come from other countries and are brought in by the Riuer as frō Cambaia on the North side and from the coast of Malabar and other places as in the description of the coast we haue in part declared of wyne called wyne of palme trées they haue inough and so much that they haue to spare for other places They haue but little fresh water but only one Well called Banganiin which stādeth about a quarter of a mile with out the Cittie wherewith the whole towne is serued which the slaues fetch in pots sel it in the towne and is verie good to drinke for water to dresse meat wash and doe other thinges withall they commonly haue Wels within their houses the land of it self is verie stonie and drie hauing a kinde of red earth so that some Italian Alchymistes haue promised to get Copper Gold out of the same which neither y e king nor Vice-roy would euer cōsēt vnto fearing least the report of such treasure would be occasion of greater troble vnto them by their enemies that are round about them through the desire that they haue of riches and therefore they haue deferred to séeke for it by the mappe hereafter following you may sée the situation of the Iland and Towne of Goa with all the stréetes Churches and places liuely described The 29. Chapter Of the customes of the Portingales and such as are issued from them called Mesticos or half countrimen as wel of Goa as of all the Oriental countries THe Portingales in India are many of them marryed with the naturall borne women of the countrie and the children procéeding of them are called Mesticos that is half countrimen These Mesticos are commonlie of yelowish colour notwithstanding there are manie women among them that are faire and well formed The children of the Portingales both boyes and gyrls which are borne in India are called Castisos and are in all things like vnto the Portingales onely somewhat differing in colour for they draw towards a yealow colour the children of those Castisos are yealow and altogether like the Mesticos and the children of Mesticos are of colour and fashion like the naturall borne Countrimen or Decaniins of the countrie so that the posteritie of the Portingales both men and womē being in the third degrée doe séeme to be naturall Indians both in colour fashion Their liuings and daylie traffiques are to Bengala Pegu Malacca Cambaia China and euerie way both North and South also in Goa there is holden a daylie assemblie or méeting together as wel of the Citizens and Inhabitants as of all nations throughout India and of the countries bordering on the same which is like the méeting vpō the burse in Andwarpe yet differeth much from that for that hether in Goa there come as well Gentlemen as marchants and others and there are all kindes of Indian commodities to sell so that in a manner it is like a Faire This méeting is onely before Noone euerie day in the yeare except Sondayes and holie dayes it beginneth in y e morning at 7. of the clocke and continueth till 9. of the clocke but not in the heate of the day nor after Noone in the principal stréete of the Citie named the straight stréete and is called the Leylon which is as much to say as an outroop there are certain cryers appointed by the Citie for y e purpose which haue of al things to be cryed and sold these goe all the time of the Leylon or outroop all behangd about with all sorts of gold chaines all kindes of costly Iewels pearles rings and precious stones likewise they haue running about them many sorts of captiues and slaues both men and women young and old which are daylie sould there as beasts are sold with vs where euerie one may chuse which liketh him best euerie one at a certaine price There are also Arabian horses all kinde of spices and dryed drugges sweet gummes and such like things fine and costly couerlets and many curious things out of Cambaia Sinde Bēgala China c. and it is wonderfull to sée in what sort many of them get their liuinges which euery day come thether to buy wares and at an other time sel them again And when any man dieth all his goods are brought thether sold to the last pennie worth in the same outroop who soeuer they be yea although they were the Viceroyes goods and this is done to doe right and iustice vnto Orphanes widdows and that it may be sold with the first where euerie man may sée it so that euerie yeare there is great quantitie of ware sold within that Citie for that there die many men within the Towne by meanes of their disordered liuing together with the hotenes of the coūtry the like assemblie is holden in all places of India where the Portingales inhabite There are some married Portingales that get their liuings by their slaues both men and women wherof some haue 12 some 20 and some 30 for it costeth them but little to kéepe them These slaues for money doe labour for such as haue néede of their helpe some fetch fresh water and sell it for money about the stréetes the women slaues make all sorts of confectures and conserues of Indian fruites much fyne néedle worke both cut and wrought workes and thē their maister send the fairest and the youngest of them well drest vp with their wares about the stréetes to sell the same that by the neatnes bewtie of the said women slaues men might be moued to buy which happeneth more for the affection they haue to the slaues to fulfill their pleasure with them then for any desire to the conserues or néedle workes for these slaues doe neuer refuse them but make their daylie liuing thereby and with the gaines that they by that meanes bring home their maisters may well kéepe and maintaine them There are others that
passeth not one yeare ouer their heades but that in India there are at the least twentie or thirtie men poysoned and murthered by their wiues onely to accomplish their filthie desires Likewise there are yearely many women killed by their husbands being taken in adulterie but they care not a haire for it saying with great boldnes that there is no pleasanter death then to die in that manner for thereby they say they do shew that they die for pure loue And to shew that this honest woman was not of this badde inclination alone you shall vnderstande that a brother of hers being but fourtéene or fiftéene yeares of age was openly burnt in Goa for sodome or buggery which was done when Francis King and his father in lawe were liuing yet could not Frauncis thereby bee warned to take héede of his wife and that kindred for as it séemeth it was Gods will he should end his dayes in that manner The 16. of September 1588. there ariued in Goa a shippe of Portingall called the S. Thomas bringing newes of 4. shippes more that were in Mosambique all come from Portingall which not long after came likewise to Goa their names were Saint Christopher being Admirall S. Marie S. Anthony and our Lady of Conseprao By those shippes we receyued newes of the death of my Lord the Archbishoppe called Don Frey Vincente da Fonseca who died in his voyage to Portingall vpon the 4. day of August An. 1587. betwéene the Flemmish Islandes and Portingall eight daies before the ship came to land It was thought that he dyed of some poyson that he brought out of India or els of some impostume that sodainely brake within him for that an houre before his death he séemed to be as well as euer he was in all his life and sodainly he was taken so sick y t he had not the leasure to make his will but dyed presently and voyded at the least a quart of poyson out of his body To be short he was cloathed in his Bishops apparell with his Myter on his heade and rings vpon his fingers and put into a coffin and so throwne into the sea These newes made many sorrowfull hartes in India of such as were his welwillers and frindes and to the contrarie such as hated him were glad and reioyced because he had béene earnest to reprehend and correct them for their faultes but none lost more by it then wee that were his seruantes which looked for great preferment by him as without doubt hee ment to haue obtained it of the King as being one of the principallest occasions of his going into Portingal but death altred all And although at that time my meaning and intent was to stay the comming of my Lord Archbishop to continue longer there yea possible while I liued yet vpon those newes I was wholly altered in my purpose and a horrible feare came vpon me when I called to mind what I had passed touching the things I was desirous to bring to passe And although I had means enough there to get my liuing in good sort being as it were one of those countrimeÌ„ and so in all places well estéemed and accounted of yet those perswasions were not of force inough once to disswade mee froÌ„ the pretence and desire I had to sée my natiue countrey so that it séemed my God had opened mine eies and by my Lords death made me more cleare of sight to call my natiue soile vnto remeÌ„brance which before was so darkened that I had almost forgotten it and stood in hazarde neuer to see it more if my Lord had liued and returned home again But to auoide all occasions and inconueniences that might happen dayly offred themselues vnto me I resolutely determined to depart wherevnto I sought al the meanes necessary occasions I could find to bring it to passe that which perswaded me most thereunto was the losse of my brother William Tin that had béene with me in India who sailing from Seâ—ubal in Portingal towards Hamborough taking their course on the back side of England was cast away and neuer could be heard of neyther ship nor men Being in this resolution it chaunced that a shippe by authoritie of the Viceroy and at the request of the Farmers of Pepper was appointed to saile for Portingall because there was so great quantitie of Pepper to be laden that the Portingall ships at that time being there could not take it in and although the ships are purposely sent to lade Pepper with licence from the King that there may no more but fiue ships lade euerie yeare wherevnto the Factors do bind themselues yet if there bee any goods in India as Pepper other wares which the other ships can not take in then the Farmers of Pepper and the kinges officers may buy one or two ships and make them ready for the purpose to take it in so that there be ships found that bee sufficient which if the Factors refuse then the Viceroy and the kings officers may â—raight as many ships as they thinke good and as they find fit to take it in and lade theÌ„ with the Farmers pepper or any other goods that are there to be laden so it bee after the fiue shippes are laden by the farmers and all this for the profit of the King without let or hinderance of the said farmers In this sorte as I said before there was a shippe called the Santa Crus that was built in Cochijn by the King of the Malabares and called after the name of the towne of Cochiin that was likewise by y e Portingals called Santa Crus which the King of Malabares made in honor of the Portingalles because he hath brotherly allyance with them and is by the King of Portingall called our brother in armes The same ship he had sold vnto a Portingal that therwith had made a voiage into China and Iapan being of 1600. tunnes and because it was strong and good so fit to make a voiage into Portingall and because as I said before there was more pepper then the Portingall ships could take in the farmers of pepper were desirous to buy it besought the Viceroy to let them haue it according to the contentes of their composition and the Kings ordinance Wherevpon the Viceroy caused the farmers of the ships to be called together signified vnto theÌ„ what the request of the farmers of pepper was that is to say that the shippe should be bought according to the Kings ordinance for as much as necessity did so require it they had refused to vse it said that it was not fit for them so desired y e in respect of the Kings interest in the pepper the shippe might be bought accordingly Alwaies prouided y t the kings ordinance who granted theÌ„ their Priuiledge might be kept obserued viz. that their ships might first haue their lading and bee first dispatched And although they that had bought it of the owners for
the South vnder seuen de grées and from that time forwards we saw her no more but onely the tokens of y e casting of her away about the Cape de bona Speranza which after being at the Island of S. Helena was tolde vs more at large The same day we had a great storme of wind and raine so that the Ruther of our great maste by force of the Sea was broken And from the line we had a North and northwest wind with continuall raynes stormes and fowle weather neuer ceasing vntill wee came vnder 20. degrees which was vpon the 25. of Februarie and then wee had a Southeast wind with fayrer weather called by the Portingalles the generall wind which they commonly finde and looke for vnder 12. degrees but we had it not before we were vnder â—0 degrees the cause whereof wee thought to be for that we had put so farre into the sea out of the common way This wind commonly holdeth vnto 27. or 28. degrées little more or lesse and then they must looke for all kindes of windes and weathers vntill they come to the Cape de bona Speranza without any certainty of winds The 5. of March being vnder 25 degrées we had an East winde with a most great storme and exceeding raine so that our Ruther-staffe brake and two more that we had in the shippe one after the other being put vnto it broke likewise with the pinne and y e ioynt wherein the ende of the Ruther hung and we were forced to lie and driue without steering hauing stricken all our sayles and the shippe so toised by the waues on all sides that wee had not one drie place in all the ship In this sort wee lay driuing for the space of two dayes and two nights together with a continuall storme and fowle weather with rayne The same night we saw vppon the maine yarde and in many other places a certaine signe which the Portingalles call Corpo Santo or the holy body of brother Peter Gonsalueâ— but the Spaniards call it S. Elmo and the Greekes as ancient writers rehearse and Ouid among the rest vsed to call it Helle and Phryxus Whensoeuer that signe sheweth vpon the Maste or maine yarde or in any other place it is commonly thought that it is a signe of better weather when they first perceiue it the maister or the chiefe boteswaine whistleth and commaundeth euery man to salute it with a Salue corpo Santo and a misâ—ricordia with a very great cry and exclamation This constellation as Astronomers do write is ingendred of great moysture and vapors and sheweth like a candle that burneth dimly and skippeth from one place to another neuer lying still We saw fiue of them together all like the light of a candle which made mee wonder and I should haue hardly beleeued it but that I saw it and looked verie earnestly vpon it and although it was fowle weather whereby I had no great leasure to think vpon such curious thinges notwithstanding I came purposely from vnder the hatches to note it Those fiue lights the Portingals cal Coroa de nossa Seâ—liora that is deere Ladies Crowne and haue great hope therein when they see it And therewithall our men being all in great feare and heauines and almost out of hope began againe to reuiue and to be glad as if thereby they had beene fully assured of better comfort The seuenth of March wee had better weather and then we tooke counsell how to mend our Ruther some were of opinion we shoulde saile to Mosambique and rule the Ruther with a rope others were of contrary opinion and said we might mend it abord and so performe our voyage so that at the last we pulled certaine péeces out of the ships side for we had not brought one with vs as néede required but being pulled forth they were all too little and woulde not serue In the ende wee sound it conuenient to take one of the bosses in our shippe and thereof to make an Anuile and of two Oâ—e hydes a payre of bellowes wherewith wee went to worke and of a péece of an olde hooke or dragge wee tooke two or three ends whereof but one woulde serue and that halfe broken and the splinters wee bounde with an Iron hoope and so being fitter to the Ruther wee set forwards in the name of God This asked vs two dayes worke before wee could dispatch it theÌ„ we hoysed sayle again with great ioy gaue diuers almes to our Lady and the Saintes wâ—th many promises of better life as being in misery mâ—n commonly do The day after we tooke the height of the Sunne and found our selues to be vnder 28. degrees and two thirdes being in the height of the land called â—erra Dâ—natal although wee were at the least â—â—â— miles to seaward from the lande and there wee had good weather with a Southeast winde In this countrey called â—erra Doâ—â—â—aâ— which reacheth to 3â— degreesâ— and at the Cape de bona Spâ—â—anza and is the hardest passage that is in all the voyage and oftentimes they feare the land of Natal more thâ—n â—he â—ape for there commonly is stormy and fowle weather and many shippes haue â—eene spoyled and cast away as the Portingalles recordes can verie well shew In the same countrey also wee founde the signes of the casting away of the S. Thomas so that to to conclude commonly the shippes doe there pay tribute by casting some lading ouer bord or else leaue body and all behind and therefore it is called Terra Donatal that is to say the lande of Christmasse and for this cause they neuer passe it without great feare but with good watch and great foresight all their ropes being stiffe and well looked vnto the peeces drawne in and all chestes pottes fattes and other roomage that are not stowed vnder hatches being throwne ouer borde into the sea and euery thing setled and made ready in his place for that in this coast they haue one houre fayre weather and another houre stormie weather in such manner as if heauen and earth should waste and be consumed In that place likewise with a cleare and fayre weather there commeth a certayne cloude which in shew séemeth no bigger then a mans fist and therefore by the Portingals it is called Oâ—ho de Boy or Oxe eye and although as then it is cleare and calme weather and that the sailes for want of wind do beate against the mastes yet as soone as they perceyue that cloude they must presently strike all their sayles for that commonly it is vpon the ships before they perceyue it and with such a storme and noyse that without al doubt it would strike a shippe into the water if there be not great care had to looke vnto it as it chaunced to the second fléete after the Portingalles had discouered the Indieâ— there being ten or twelue shippes in company which in such a calme and fayre weather let all their sailes hang and regarded them not and
into the Iland as there doe and they may kill them with stones and staues by reason of the gret numbers of them Now for fruites as Portingall Figges Pomgranets Oranges Lemons Citrons and such like fruites there are so many that growe without planting or setting that all the valleyes are full of them which is a great pleasure to beholde so that it séemeth to bee an earthly Paradise It hath fruite all the yeare long because it raineth there by showers at the least fiue or six times euerie day and then againe the Sunne shineth so that whatsoeuer is planted there it groweth verie well but because the Portingales are not ouer curious of new things there groweth not of al sorts of fruites of Portingall and India in that Iland for assuredly without any doubt they would growe well in that land because of the good temperature of the ayre besides this they haue so great abundance of Fish round about the Iland that it séemeth a wonder wrought of God for with crooked nayles they may take as much Fish as they will so that all the shippes doe prouide themselues of Fish of all sorts in that place which is hanged vp and dried and is of as good a taste and sauor as any Fish that euer I eate and this euery man that hath beene there affirmeth to be true And the better to serue their turnes vpon the Rockes they find salt which serueth them for their necessarie prouisions so that to conclude it is an earthly Paradise for y e Portingall shippes and seemeth to haue been miraculously discouered for the refreshing and seruice of the same considering the smalnesse and highnesse of the land lying in the middle of the Ocean seas and so far from the firme land or any other Ilands that it séemeth to be a Boye placed in the midle of the Spanish Seas for if this Iland were not it were impossible for the shippes to make any good or prosperous Viage for it hath often fallen out that some shippes which haue missed thereof haue endured the greatest miserie in y e world and were forced to put into the coast of Guinea there to stay the falling of the raine and so to get fresh water and afterwardes came halfe dead and spoyled into Portingall It is the fashion that all the sicke persons that are in the shippes and can not wel sayle in them are left there in the Iland with some prouision of Rice Bisket Oyle and some Spices for Fish and flesh they may haue enough for when the ships are gone then all the beastes which by reason of the great number of people fly into the mountaines come downe againe into the valleyes where they may take them with their handes and kill them as they list those sicke men stay there till the next yeare till other ships come thether which take them with them they are commonly soone healed in that Iland as being a verie sound and pleasant countrie and it is verie seldome seene that any of them dyeth there because they haue alwaies a temperate ayre and coole winde and alwayes fruite throughout the whoâ—â— yeare The king will not suffer any man to dwell in it because they should not destroye spoyle the countrie and holde it as their owne but will haue it common for euerie man to take what he hath neede of In time past there dwelt an Hermet in the I le who continued there for certaine yeares vnder pretence of doing penance and to vphold the Church hee killed many of the Goates and Buckes so that euerie yeare hee sold at the least fiue or sixe hundred skinnes and made great profit therof which the King hearing caused him presently to bee brought from thence into Portingall Likewise vpon a certaine time two Caâ—â—ares or blacke people of Mosambique and one Iauer with two women slaues stoale out of the shippes and hid themselues in the Rockes of this Iland which are verie high and wilde whereby men can hardly passe them They liued there together and begot children so that in the ende they were at the least twentie persons who when the ships were gone ran throughout the Iland and did much hurt making their houses dweling places betweene some of the hilles where not any of the Portingales had beene nor yet could easily come at them and therein they hid themselues vntill the shippes were gone but in the end they were perceiued and the Portingales vsed all the meanes they could to take them but they knew so well how to hide and defend themselues that in many yeares they could not be taken in the end fearing that they might in time be hurtfull vnto them and hinder them much by expresse commaundement of the King after long and great labour they tooke them all and brought them prisoners into Portingall so that at this present no man dwelleth therein but onely the sicke men as I told you before When the ships come thether euerie man maketh his lodging vnder a trée setting a Tent about it for that the trees are there so thicke that it presently séemeth a little towne or an armie lying in the fielde Euerie man prouideth for himselfe both flesh fish fruite and woode for there is enough for them all and euerie one washeth Linnen There they hold a generall fasting and prayer with Masse euerie daye which is done with great deuotion with procession and thankesgiuing and other Himnes thanking God that hee hath preserued them from the danger of the Cape de Bona Speranza and brought them to that Iland in safetie There they vse oftentimes to Carus their names and markes in trees plants for a perpetuall memorie whereof many hundredth are there to be found which letters with the growing of the trées doe also grow bigger and bigger we found names that had been there since the yeare of the Lord 1510. 1515. and euerie yeare orderly following which names stoode vpon Figge trées euery letter being of the bignesse of a spanne by reason of the age and growing of the trées This shal suffice for the description of the Iland of Saint Helena The 21. of May being Saint Helenas day and Whitsunday after we had taken in all our fresh water and other necessaries we set sayle altogether in companie and directed Th◠〈…〉 Pâ—â—ntâ—d 〈◊〉 London by â—ohn Wolfe 〈◊〉 by William Rogers THE TRVE Description of the ISLAND of 〈◊〉 lyeiâ—g 〈◊〉 by â— degrees on y e Sâ—uth syde of y e Equinoctiall lyne Printed at London by Iohn Wolfe Gâ—â—uen by William Rogers our course towardes Portingall leauing about fiftéene sicke men in the Ilande some slaues that ranne out of the ships The 26. of May in the Euening wee spake with the Saint Mary and the next day with the Gallion of Malacca the same Morning and in the after noone with the Admirall who willed vs to follow him vnto the Iland of the Ascention The same day one of our slaues fell ouer bord although we vsed all the
meanes we could to saue him yet we could not doe it by reason wee sayled before the winde The same day at night wee saw the Iland of Ascention and lauered all that night because we would not passe the Iland In the Morning the 28. of May we sayled about the Iland to sée if there were any ground to Anker on because the Admirall was so leake that shee could no longer holde out and the men desired the Officers of the shippe that they would lay the goods on land in the Iland of Ascention and there leaue it with good watch and necessaries for them that keepe it and so sayle with the emptie ship to Portingall and there procure some other shippe to fetch the goods thinking it was sufficient to haue it well watched and kept there for that there commeth not a ship in twentie yeares into that Iland because there is nothing in it to be had We went close vnto it by a verie white and faire Sand where the Admirall and all the shippes cast out the Lead and found from eightie to fiftie and 4â— Fadomes water and although they might haue gone closer to the land yet the Officers excused themselues saying that they coulde not goe neerer and that it was too deepe and verie dangerous for them to Anker there Which they said to pacifie the men desiring that they might borow two Pumpes nore of the other shippes and so without doubt they woulde bring the shippe safe vnto Portingall and although it would bee great paine and labour for them to doe it yet they must of force content themselues for that the Admirall and all the Gentlemen that were in the shippe pumped both day and night as their turnes came about as well as the meanest in the shippe onely to encourage the people They borowed one Pumpe of the Saint Mary and sent to desire vs to lend them another and although our ship was none of the best among the Fleet we were of opinion not to lend him any as not knowing what neede wee should haue our selues hauing so long a way to sayle yet in the end seeing the great necessitie they were in we lent them one the rather because they sayd that the Admirals meaning was if it were calme wether to discharge some of their wares into other shippes thereby to lighten themselues but it fell not out as they thought so that with great miserie and labor they ouercame their iournie The 95. Chapter Of the Iland called the Ascention THis Iland was discouered vpon Ascention daye and in shew séemeth as great as the Iland of Saint Hellena but not so high It is ful of hilles and dales lying vnder eight degrées and a halfe on the South-side of the Equinoctiall line and lyeth Northwest distant from Saint Helena 19â— Spanish miles and from the Equiâ—octiall line 140. miles There is not any fresh water in the Iland nor one greene leafe or branch It hath many hilles of a reddish colour which shew like a certaine Earth in Spaine called Almagro and is full of stonie hilles and dryed land it is like Saint Helena There hath beene some shippes there that missed Saint Helena and sought for fresh water in that Iland but could find none It hath certaine faire and white Sandes about it and great store of Fish wherein it surpasseth S. Helena but in it there are no beastes at all onely by reason of the great quantitie of Fishes Ther are so many Birds in it y t it is strange and they are of the bignesse of young Geese came by thousands flying about our ships crying and making great noyse and ranne vp and downe in the shippe some leaping and sitting on our shoulders and armes not once fearing vs so that wee tooke many of them and wrung of their neckes but they are not good to eate because they taste morish I thinke the cause they are so tame is because they see but few men and some desire to goe to them About that Iland and the Iland of Saint Helena vnto the Equinoctiall line there are flying Fishes as great as Herings which flie by great flockes together two or thrée Fadome aboue the water and flie in that manner at the least a quarter of a mile vntill their wings or finnes be drie and then they can flie no longer but fall into the water and there wet themselues and then flie againe aboue the water The cause why they flie in that sort is because they are chased by the great fishes that eate them and to escape from them they flie aboue the water and some times into the shippes for many of them fell into our ship which flew too high for wheÌ„ their wings are drie they must needes fall From that Island of Ascention the shippes held their course Northwest and by West til they be a degree past the Equinoctiall line on the North side where there lyeth a cliffe called Penedo de Sam Pedro which many times they sée and to it from the Islande of Ascention are 300. miles The 5. of Iune we passed againe the Equinoctiall line and then again began we to see the North starre which we had lost vnder ten degrées on this side Cochijn and now began to lose the sight of the South starre and there we had the sun in the South at twelue of the clocke at noone in which on the other side of the line at the same time is in the North. The 8. of Iune being 4. degrées in the North we lost our generall South east winde that had serued vs from the Cape de bona Speranza thether then began the raines and calmes for as then we began to come neare the coast of Guinea which continueth to 9. degrees These calmes and raines helde vs till 11. degrées being the 20 of Iune whereby the ships seperated themselues by reason of the calmes which made them not able to stéerre and in the 11. degrees they met againe and there we had a North east wind which is called the generall winde because it floweth continually in those Countries and holdeth to 30. and â—2 degrées beginning many times at 6. and 7. degrees but wee had it not till wee were vnder 1â— degrées This wind is somewhat scant for wee must of force saile in the wind because our chiefe course is Northwest and by North. The 23. of Iune we passed the point of Capo Verde which is vnder 15. degrées and the 26. of the same month we passed the Islands of Capo Verde which are ten in number They beginne vnder 15. degrées and end in 19. degrées and are distant from the firme land of Capo Verde from 70. to 1â—0 miles inwards to the sea Then wee entred into the sea called Sergasso which is all couered with hearbes so that it séemeth to be like a gréene fielde so thicke that a man can not see the water neyther can the ships passe through them but with great labour vnlesse they haue a strong wind The
hearbe is like Samper but yellow of colour hath berries like Goose berries but nothing in them The Portingalles call it Sargasso because it is like the herbes that groweth in their welles in Portingall called Sargasso wherevpon that sea is called Sargasso It is not knowne from whence it commeth for there is no land nor Island that is knowne to bee neare that sea but the coast of Africa which is at the least more then 400. miles from thence It is thought it commeth from from the ground and yet there is no ground in that place to bee founde and in sayling to India the shippes come not into that sea for then they kéepe closer to the shore so that it is not once séene and it is not found in any place but there beginning at 20. degrées continuing to 34. degrées so thicke and so full as if they were whole Islandes most strange to beholde In that countrey it is as cold in winter as it is here with vs when it fréezeth not which the Portingalles estéeme a great cold and cloath themselues against it as we doe in a mightie great frost The last of Iune wee were vnder 23. degrees being right vnder the Sunne for y t the Sun was then in the same height and we also vnder y e Tropike of Cancer which is the furthest part that the Sunne goeth Northwarde and then it turneth againe vnto the Equinoctial line and from thence into the South Wee passed y e line of Tropicus Capricorni twice once on the South side by the ende of the Island of S. Laurence and then againe vnder 23. degrées after we had passed the Cape de bona Speranza The 2. of Iuly wee were vnder the height of the Islands of Canarie which lie vnder 28. and 29. degrées and are distant from the coast of Barbarie and Africa from 30. to 80. miles which Islandes lay on our right hande and because in those Islandes there are many things that are worthie the noting therefore I thought it conuenient to make a briefe description of them The 96. Chapter A briefe description of the Islands of Canaria THe Islandes of Canaria are seuen which in times past were called the Fortunadas and at this day by the Spaniards are called the Canaries by reason of the great numbers of dogges which they founde in them when they were first discouered The names of the Islands are great Canarie Teneriffe La Palma La Gomera El'Hierro Lansarotte and Fuerte Ventura In the Island of Teneriffe there is a hil called Pico de Terraira which is thought to bee the highest hill that euer was found for it may easily bee séene at the least threescore miles into the sea before they come at it It cannot be climed but in the monthes of Iuly and August for all the other monthes it lyeth full of snowe although below in the Island and in other Islands thereabouts they sée no snow It is thrée dayes iourney to clime vp into it and on the toppe therof it is flat and when it is clear and faire weather a man may from thence sée all the Islandes round about it although some of them are at the least 50. miles distant and as much in compasse The two monthes in which they vse to clime vp vpon the hill they bring downe certaine peeces of brimstone from whence it is much caried into Spaine and at my being in the Island of Tercera a shipper one of my acquaintance that came from Teneriffe gaue me a péece thereof for a remembrance of him In one of those Islandes called Hierro or of Iron there is a wonderfull and strange thing to be séene and I verely thinke it is one of y e strangest things in the world This Island is on of the greatest of all the seuen but it is an vnfruitful and barren land and so drie that in all the Island there is not one droppe of fresh water to bee found but onely in some places vppon the sea side which is farre from hand so that it profiteth the inhabitants but very little But God of his mercie hath prouided for the want of water both for men and beastes in this maner for there is a great trée which no man knoweth for the like is not found in any other place the leaues whereof are small and long and alwaies gréene without chaunging colour this trée is couered and compassed about with a small cloud which alwaies continueth in one forme and neuer altereth nor diminisheth and this cloud casteth dew vpon the leaues of the trée which hang down and drop continually without ceasing a most cleare thinne and fine water which falleth into certaine Cesternes that by the inhabitants of the Island are made round about vnder the trée therein to kéepe and preserue the water The Island of Ascention so called because it was discouered vppon the day of Christs ascention into heauen is not inhabited because of the vnfruitfulnes therof because it wanteth fresh water which is also the cause that it is not visited by the ships for that they hope for no refreshing in the same The hilles of this Iland are redde like Bolus About this Iland are many birds because of the great numbers of fishes that are about it specially small flying fishes which in Portingall are called Pisce Bolodor Reade more hereof in the booke in Folio 175. And this water is in so great abundance that it serueth all the Island for their necessarie vses not onely for the people but also for their cattle throughout all the Isle and no man can remember when that wonder first began On the right side of this Island about an hundred miles distant there is yet an other wonder to be noted which is that oftentimes there is an Islande séene thereaboutes called San Borondon where diuers men haue been on lande being onely such as fell vppon it on the sodaine and not looking for it who affirme it to bee a very fayre pleasant and gréene Countrey full of trées and all kinds of victuaile and that it is inhabited by people that are Christians but no man knowes of what nation they are neyther what language they speake The Spaniards of the Islandes of Canaria haue many times sayled towardes it to view it but they could neuer find it whereupon there goeth diuers opinions of it for some think it to be inchanted and that it may not bee seene but vppon certaine dayes some thinke it to bee very small and alwaies couered with cloudes and that therefore it can not bee séene nor founde out and also the great stormes and strength of the water driueth the shippes from it but to conclude it is holden for a truth that the Ilande lyeth thereaboutes as all those that come from thence doe certainly affirme The Ilandes of Canaria are very fruitfull and plentifull of all thinges both victuailes and other necessaries They haue of all kinds of corne specially excellent good Wine which from thence is caried into
all places There is likewise great store of Sugar which is much esteemed and also caryed into all countries of Christendome which causeth great trafficke vnto those Ilands as well by Spaniardes and Portingalles as other nations and is the common staple for the shippes that sayle out of Spayne into the West Indies and refreshe themselues there and also take in such Wyne as they commonly vse to carry with them to the West Indies They haue also great abundance of Cattle and Cammelles and are now inhabited by Spanyardes hauing yet therein many of the naturall borne inhabitantes which they doe call Guanchas who by reason of their long conuersation with the Spaniardes doe wholly vse their customes and manner of apparell The chiefe of these Islands is great Canaria where there is a Bishop and the inquisition with the tribunal Royall and it hath the gouernment ouer all the other Islandes that are called the Canaries The 6. of Iulie wee were vnder 32. degrees where wee lost the generall North-East wind and had a calme and saw much of the hearbe called Sargasso which couered all the sea The 〈◊〉 of the same month we got againe before the wind being vnder 34. degrees and then we saw no more of the hearbe Sargasso but a faire cleare sea The eighteenth of Iulie wee were vnder 39. degrees vnder which height lieth the Iland called de Coruo and the Island of Tercera and also the riuer of Lisbone all these dayes we had many calmes The next day wee had a West winde being a right fore-wind and saw many flying fishes almost as great as Haddockes that flew thrée or foure fadomes high aboue the water The 22. of Iuly the winde continuing about noone we saw the Ilands called Flores and de Coruo which lie one close to the other from thence to the Island of Tercera Eastward are 70. miles At that time wee began to haue many sick men that is to say some sicke in their eyes and some in their breaste and bellies by reason of the long voiage and because their victuals began to loose the taste sauour and many wanted meat whereby diuers of them through want were compelled to seeth rice with salt water so that some of them died which many times were found vnder the fore deck that had laine â—ead two or three dayes no man knowing it which was a pittifull sight to behold considering the miserie they indured aboard those ships There died in our ship from India vnto that place of slaues and others to the number of 24. persons The same day about Euening being hy the Islandes of Flores and Coruo wee perceiued thrée shippes that made towards vs which came from vnder the land which put vs in great feare for they came close by our Admiral shot diuers times at him at another ship of our companie whereby wee perceiued them to be English men for they bare an English flagge vpon their maine tops but none of them shewed to be aboue 60. tunnes in greatnes About Euening they followed after vs and all night bore lanternes with Candles buâ—ning in them at their sternes although the Moone shined The same night passing hard by the Island of Fayarl the next day being betwéene the Island of S. George that lay on our right hand and the small Island called Câ—oâ—o on our left hand we esspied the thrée English ships still following vs that tooke counsell together whereof one sayled backwards thinking that some other ship had come after vs without company for a small time was out of sight but it was not long before it came againe to the other two wherewith they tooke counsell came all thrée together against our shippe because we lay in the lée of all our ships and had the Island of S. George on the one side in steede of a sconce thinking to deale so with vs that in the end we should be constrained to runne vppon the shore whereof wee wanted not much and in that manner with their flagges openly displayed came lustily towardes vs sounding their Trumpets and sayled at the least three times about vs beating vs with Musket and Caliuer and some great péeces and did vs hurt in the body of our shippe but spoyled all our sayles and ropes and to conclude we were so plagued by them that no man durst put forth his head and when wee shot off a peece we had at the least an houres worke to lade it againe whereby wee had so great a noise and crie in the ship as if we had all bin cast away whereat the English men themselues beganne to mocke vs and with a thousand iesting words called vnto vs. In the meane time the other shippes hoised all their sailes did the best they could to saile to the Island of Tercera not looking once behinde them to help vs doubting they should come too late thether not caring for vs but thinking themselues to haue done sufficiently so they saued their own stakes whereby it may easily be séene what company they kéepe one with the other what order is among them In the end the English men perceiuing small aduantage against vs little knowing in what case and feare we were as also because we were not far froÌ„ Tercera left vs which made vs not a litle to reioyce as thinking our selues to be risen from death to life although we were not well assured neither yet voide of feare till we lay in the road before Tercera vnder the safetie of the Portingales fort that we might get thether in good time we made all the sailes we could on the other side we were in great doubt because wee knew not what they did in the Island nor whether they were our friendes or enemies and wee doubted so much the more because wee found no men of war nor any Caruels of aduise froÌ„ Portingal as we made our accounts to doe that might conuay vs from thence or giue vs aduise as in that countrie ordinarilie they vse to do because the English men had bin so victorious in those parts it made vs suspect that it went not well with Spaine they of the Iland of Tercera were in no lesse feare then we for that séeing our deer they thought vs to be Englishmen that we came to ouer run the Iland because the 3. English meÌ„ had bouÌ„d vp their flags came in company with vs for the which cause the Iland sent out 2. Caruels that lay there with aduise from the King for the Indian ships that should come thither Those Caruels came to view vs and perceiuing what wee were made after vs wherevppon the English ships left vs made towardes them because the Caruels thought them to be friends and shunned them not as supposing them to be of our company but we shot foure or fiue times and made signes vnto them that they should make towards the Island which they presently did The English men perceiuing that did put forwards into
the officers are so pleased and vse no more delaies The eight of August the officers of the ships tooke counsell together with the Gouernour of the Island what they were best to doe thinking it not good to follow the kinges aduise considering their long staying and fearing some other hard fortune if they should stay and because a great Gallion being a maÌ„ of warre and very strong lay as then before the Island wherein was the Gouernour of Brasilâ—a who by foule weather had put in there they concluded that this Gallion being well appointed should sayle with them to Lisbone and although they did it without the aduise and commandement of the king yet bad they rather so to aduenture their liues vpon the seas then againe to stay the danger of the Hauen for that the winter did daylie more and more increase so that they were not to looke for any better weather and in that sort appointing themselues as well as they could and taking in all necessarie prouisions the same day they all set saile with no small feare to fall into some misfortune by the way but because many that were of the ship of Malacca stayed at Tercera to saue such goods as by any meanes might be saued and by that meanes to help themselues among the which was the Factor of the pepper béeing one of my acquaintance at whose request as also because the Pepper of that ship and of all the other ships belonged all to one Farmer by whom I was appointed Factor and séeing the necessitie he bad and that he alone could hardly dispatch so great a matter I tooke order for mine owne affaires and hauing dispatched it by other shippes I stayed there to help him till wee had further aduise and order from the Farmers of the Pepper and other spices and wares of the which goods we saued a great quantitie by meanes of Duckers and other Instruments that we vsed hauing aduise from the Farmers the King that it shuld not be long before they sent for vs willing vs to stay there and to looke vnto the goods This staying and fetching vs away continued as I said before for the space of two yeares and a halfe whereby you may consider the good order and pollicie of the Admiraltie of Portingall and with what diligence and care they séeke for the common profit of the land and the poore Marchantes of the Countrie whome they ought to fauor and help as much as possiblie they may but they do cleane contrarie as those which deale in Portingall doe well finde The 13. of August the ships came back againe vnto the Island of Tercera because they had a contrarie wind as also for want of fresh water but they ankered not The day before the Earle of Cumberland with â— or 7. ships of warre sayled by the Iland of Tercera to their great good fortune passed out of sight so that they dispatched themselues in all haste for the more securitie tooke with them 4. hundred Spaniards of those that lay in Garrison in the Island with theÌ„ they sayled towards Lisbon hauing a good wind so that within a 11. dayes after they arriued in the riuer of Lâ—sbone with great gladnes triumph for if they had stayed but one day longer before they had entred the riuer they had all béene taken by Captaine Drake who with 40. ships came before Cascalis at the same time that the Indian ships cast anker in the riuer of Lisbone being garded thither by diuers Gallies Now by the discourse of this long and perilous voiage you may sufficiently perceiue how that onely by the grace and speciall fauour of God the Indian ships doe performe their voiages yet with great miserie paine labour losse and hinderance wherby men may likewise consider the manner of their NauigatioÌ„ ordinances customes and gouernments of their ships so that in coÌ„parison of many other Voyages this present Voyage may be estéemed a happy prosperous voyage for oftentimes it chanceth that but one or two ships of the fiue that yearely saile to India come safe home as of late it hath bin séene some being taken and some lost altogether by their owne follies bad order as herin at large you may perceiue c. The 97. Chapter Of the description of the Islands of Acores of the Flemmish Islands THe Isles of Acores or the Flemmish Islands are â— that is Terceâ—a Saint Michael S. Mary S. George Gratiosa Pico Fayâ—el There are yet two Islands called Flores and Coraâ— which are not contained vnder the name of Acores but yet at this day are vnder the gouernment of the same Islands so that they are in all accounted â— Islands They are called Acores that is to say Sparhaukes or Haukes because that in their first discouerte they found many Sparhaukes in them whereof they hold the name although at this day there is not any there to be found They are also called the Flemmish Islands that is of the Neatherlanders because the first that inhabited the same were Neatherlanders whereof till this time there is a great number and ofspring remaining that in manner and behauiour are altogether like Neatherlanders and there is yet in the same Island a running water that issueth out of a hill so runneth into the sea where as yet those issues or ofspringes of NeatherlaÌ„ders inhabite is called Ariberâ—dos â—ramengos that is the Flemmish riuer The principall Iland of them al is that of Tercera called Iusuâ— de Iesus Câ—stus of Tercera It is betwéene 1â— or â—6 miles in compasse and is altogether a great Cliffe of land whereby in it there is little roome for it is as it were walled round about with Cliffes but where any strand or land is there standeth a sort It hath no Hauens nor entrance of waters for the securitie and safetie of the ships but only before the chiefe towne called Angra where it hath an open Hauen which in forme is like a halfe Moone by the Portingales called Angra whereof the towne hath her name It hath on the one side in manner of an elbow sticking forth two high hilles called Bresyl which stretch into the sea so y t a far off they séeme to bee deuided from the Iland Those hils are very high so that being vpon them a man may see at the least 10 12 and sometimes 15. miles into the sea being cleare weather Vpon these hils there stand two small stone pillers where there is a CeÌ„tinell placed that continually watcheth to 〈◊〉 what ships are at sea and so to aduertise those of the Island for that as many ships as hee séeth coÌ„ming out of the west that is from the Spanish Indies or Brasâ— Câ—bo vâ— Guinea and the Portingal Indies and all other waies lying south or west for euerie ship he setteth a flagge vppon the piller in the west and when the ships which he deserieth are more then 5. then hee setteth vp a great auncient betokening a whole fleet
of our nation doe sayle thether so that euerie Marchant knoweth them This briefe description therfore is by me set town for the instruction of such as deale not in the trade of Marchandise and know them not whereby they may sée what manner of Countries they are c. The 99. Chapter Of cerâ—aine notable and memorable accidents that happened during my continuance in Tercera THe second of October An. 15â—9 at the towne of Villa dan Praya in the Iland of Tercera two men being in a field hard without the towne were killed with lightning The ninth of the same month there arriued in Tercera fourteene shippes that came from the Spanish Indies laden with Cochenile Hides Golde Siluer Pearles and other riche wares They were fiftie in companie when they departed out of the Iland of Hanana whereof in their comming out of the Channell eleauen sunke in the same Channell by soule weather the rest by a storme were scattered and seperated one from the other The next day there came an other ship of the same companie that sayled close vnder the Iland so to get into the Roade where she met with an English shippe that had not aboue three cast peeces and the Spaniyard twelue They fought a long time together which we being in the Iland might stand and behold whereupon the Gouernour of Tercera sent two Boates of Musketiers to help the shippe but before they could come at her the English shippe had shot her vnder water and wee saw her sinke into the Sea with all her sayles vp and not any thing seen of her aboue the water The Englishmen with their Boate saued the Captaine and about thirtie others with him but not one penie worth of the goods and yet in the shippe there was at the least to the value of two hundred thousand Ducats in Golde Siluer and Pearles the rest of the men were drowned which might bee about fiftie persons among the which were some Fryers and women which the Englishmen would not saue Those that they had saued they set on land and then they sayled away The twentie seauenth of the same month the saide fourteene ships hauing refreshed themselues in the Iland departed from Tercera towards Saul â—nd comming vpon the coast of Spaine they were taken by the English ships that laye there to watch for them two onely excepted which escaped away the rest were wholly carried into England About the same time the Earle of Cumberland with one of the Queenes shippes and fiue or sixe more kept about those Ilands and came often times so close vnder the Iland and to the Road of Angra that the people on land might easily tell all his men that hee had a bord and knew such as walked on the Hatches they of the Ilande not once shooting at them although they might easily haue done it for they were within Musket shotte both of the towne and Fort. In these places he continued for the space of two Moneths and sayled round about the Ilands and landed in Gratiosa and Fayael as in the description of those Ilands I haue alreadie declared Here he tooke diuers shippes and Caruels which he sent into England so that those of the Iland durst not once put foorth their heads at the same time about three or foure daies after the Earle of Cumberland had beene in the Iland of Fayael and was departed from thence there arriued in the saide Iland of Fayael â—iâ—e Indian ships whole Generall was one Iuan Doryneâ— there they discharged in the Iland 40. myllions of Gold and Siluer And hauing with all speed refreshed their shippes fearing the comming of the Englishmen they set sayle and arriued safely in Saint Lucas not meeting with the enemie to the great good lucke of the Spaniards and hard fortune of the Englishmen for that within lesse then two daies after the Golde and Siluer was laden againe into the Spanish shippes the Earle of Cumberland sayled againe by that Iland so that it appeared that God would not let them haue it for it they had once had sight thereof without doubt it had beene theirs as the Spaniardes themselues confessed In the Moneth of Nouember there arriued in Tercera two great ships which were the Admirall and Viceadmirall of the Fleete laden with Siluer who with stormie weather were seperated from the Fleete and had beene in great torment and distresse and readie to sinke for they were forced to vse all their Pumps so that they wished a thousand times to haue met with the Englishmen to whom they would willingly haue giuen their Siluer and all that euer they brought with them onely to saue their liues And although the Earle of Cumberland lay still aboute those Ilands yet they met not with him so that after much paine and labour they got into the Road before Angra where with all speed they vnladed and discharged aboue fiue myllions of Siluer all in peeces of 8. and 1â— pound great so that the whole Raye lay couered with plates and Chests of Siluer full of Ryales of eight most wonderful to behold each myllion being 10. hundred thousand Ducats besides Pearles Gold and other stones which were not registred The Admiral and chiefe commaunder of those shippes Fléete called Aluaro Flores de Quiniones was sicke of the Neapolitan disease was broght to land whereof not long after he dyed in Syuilia He brought with him the Kings broad Seale and full authoritie to be Generall and chiefe commaunder vppon the Seas and of all Fléetes or ships and of all places and Ilands or lands wheresoeuer he came wherevpon the gouernor of Tercera did him great honour and betwéen them it was concluded perceiuing the weaknesse of their ships and the daunger of the Englishmen that they would send the ships emptie with Souldiers to conueye them either to Syuil or Lisbone where they could first arriue with aduise vnto his Maiestie of all that had past and that he would giue order to fetch the Siluer with good and safe conuoy Whereupon the saide Aluaro Flores stayed there vnder colour of keeping the Siluer but specially because of his disease and for that they were affraide of the Englishmen This Aluaro Flores had alone for his owne part aboue 50. thousand Ducats in Pearles which hee shewed vnto vs and sought to sell them or barter them with vs for Spices or bils of exchange The said two shippes set sayle with thrée or foure hundred men as well Souldiers as others that came with them out of India and being at Sea had a storme wherewith the Admirall burst and sunke in the Sea and not one man saued The Vice Admirall cut downe her Mast and ranne the ship on ground hard by Sentuual where it burst in péeces some of the men sauing themselues by swimming that brought the newes but the rest were drowned In the same month there came two great ships out of the Spanish Indies and being within halfe a mile of the Road of Tercera they
rich Gentleman in England and had great yearely reuenewes of his owne inheritance but he was a man very vnquiet in his minde and greatly affected to warre in so much as of his owne priuate motion hee offered his seruice to the Queene he had performed many valiant actes and was greatlie feared in these Islands and knowne of euery man but of nature very seuere so that his owne people hated him for his fiercenes and spake verie hardly of him for when they first entred into the Fleete or Armado they had their great sayle in a readinesse and might possiblie enough haue sayled away for it was one of the best ships for sayle in England and the Master perceiuing that the other shippes had left them and followed not after commaÌ„ded the great sayle to be cut that they might make away but Sir Richard Greenefield threatned both him and all the rest that were in the ship that if any man laid hand vppon it he would cause him to be hanged and so by that occasion they were compelled to fight and in the end were taken He was of so hard a complection that as he continued among the Spanish Captaines while they were at dinner or supper with him he would carouse three or foure glasses of wine and in a brauerie take the glasses betweene his teeth and crash them in peeces and swallow them downe so that often times the blood ran out of his mouth without any harme at all vnto him and this was told me by diuers credible persons that many times stoode and behelde him The English men that were left in the ship as the captaine of the souldiers the Master and others were dispersed into diuers of the Spanish ships that had taken the where there had almost a new fight arisen betweene the Biscaines and the Portingales while ech of them would haue the honour to haue first borded her so that there grew a great noise and quarrell among them one taking the chiefe ancient the other the flagge and the Captaine and euerie one held his owne The ships that had borded her were altogether out of order and broken and many of their men hurt whereby they were compelled to come into the Island of Tercera there to repaire themselues where being ariued I my chaÌ„ber fellow to heare some newes went abord on of the ships being a great at Biscaine and one of the twelue Apostles whose Captaine was called Bertandono that had bin Generall of the Biscaynes in the fleete that went for England Hee séeing vs called vs vp into the gallerie where with great curtesie hee receiued vs beeing as then set at dinner with the English Captaine that sate by him and had on a sute of blacke veluet but he could not tell vs any thing for that he could speake no other language but English and Latine which Baâ—tandano also could a little speake The English Captaine got licence of the gouernour that hee might come on land with his weapon by his side and was in our lodging with the Englishman that was kept prisoner in the Iland being of that ship wherof the saylers got away as I said before The Gouernour of Tercera bad him to dinner shewed him great curtesâ—e The Master likewise with licence of Bartandano came on land and was in our lodging and had at the least ten or twelue woundes as well in his head as on his body whereof after that being at sea betwéene Lisbone the Ilands he died The Captaine wrote a letter wherein he declared all the manner of the fight and left it with the English Marchant that lay in our lodging to send it to the Lord Admiral of England This English Captaine comming vnto Lisbone was there well receiued and not any hurt done vnto him but with good conuoy sent to Sentinial from thence sayled into England with all the rest of the Englishmen that were taken prisoners The Spanish armie stated at the Island of 〈◊〉 til the last of September to assemble the rest of the fleet together which in the end were to the number of 14â— saile of ships partly comming from India and partly of the Army being altogether ready vnto saile to 〈◊〉 in good company there sodainely rose so hard and cruell a storme that those of the Island did affirme that in mans memorie there was neuer any such seen or heard of before for it seemed the sea would haue swallowed vp the Islands the water mounting higher than the Cliffes which are so high that it amaseth a man to beholde them but the sea reached aboue them and liuing fishes were throwne vppon the land This storme continued not only a day or two with one wind but seauen or eight dayes continually the wind turning round about in all places of the compasse at the least twice or thrice during that time and all alike with a continuall storme and tempest most terrible to behold euen to vs that were on shore much more then to such as were at sea so that only on the coastes and Cliffes of the Iland of Tercera there were aboue twelue ships cast away and not only vppon the one side but round about it in euery corner wherby nothing els was heard but complayning crying lamenting and telling here is a shippe broken in peeces against the Cliffes there another and all the men drowned so that for the space of 20. dayes after the storme they did nothing els but fish for dead men that continually came driuing on the shore Among the rest was the English ship called the Reuenge that was cast away vpon a Cliffe nere to the Iland of Tercera where it brake in a hundred péeces and sunke to the ground hauing in her â—â— men Gallegos Biscaines and others with some of the captiue Englishmen whereof but one was saued that got vp vpon the Cliffes aliue and had his body and head all wounded and hee being on shore brought vs the newes desiring to be shriuen thervpon presently died The Reuenge had in her diuers faire brasse péeces that were all sunke in the sea which they of the Island were in good hope to waigh vp againe The next summer after among these shippes that were cast away about Tercera was likewise a Flie boat one of those that had bin arested in Portugall to serue the king called the white Doue The Master of her was one Cornelius Martenson of Schiedam in Holland and there were in her one hundred souldiers as in euerie one of the rest there was He being ouer ruled by the Captaine that he could not be Master of his owne sayling here and there at the mercie of God as the storme droue him in the end came within the sight of the Island of Tercera which the Spaniards perceiuing thought al their safety only to consist in putting into the road compelling the Master and the Pilot to make towards the Island although the Master refused to doe it saying that they were most sure
inward partes of the same landes Likewise a further Description of the Carde of Madagascar otherwise called the Iland of S. Laurence with a discouery of all the shallows cliffes and numbers of Ilands in the Indian seas and the situation of the Countrey of the Cape de Bona Speranza passing along to Monomotapa Soffala and Mosambique and from thence to Quiloa Gorga Melinde Amara Barâ— Magadoxo Doara c. to the red sea and what further wanteth for the description thereof you shal find at large in Iohn Hughen of Linschotens book also the voâ—ages that the Portingall Pilots have made into â—ll pâ— of the Indies Extracted out of their sea Cardes bookes and notes of great experience And translated into Dutch by I. Hughen van Linschoten And now translated out of Dutch into English by W. â— THE KINGDOM OF CONGO LONDON Imprinted by John Wolfe 1598. THE SECOND BOOKE ¶ The true and perfect description of the whole coast of Guinea Manâ—congo Angola Monomotapa and right ouer against them the Kape of Saint Augustine in Briâ—n with the compas of the whole Ocean Seas together with the Islands 〈…〉 S. Helena and the Aâ—enâ—iâ—n with all their Hauens 〈…〉 partes 〈…〉 Likewise a further description of the Card of Madaâ—ar â—herwise called the Island of S. Laurence with the discouery of all the 〈…〉 Chriâ—â— and numbers of Islands in the Indian Seas and the situation of the Countrie of the Cape de Bona Speranza passing along to Monâ—motapa Aeâ—ala Mosambâ—â—â—e and from thence to Quioloâ— Gorga Melinâ—e Amara â—aru Magadoâ—o Doara c. to the red Sea and what further wanteth for the description thereof you shall finde at large in Iohn Hughen of Linsâ—hotens booke Also the voyages that the Portingall pilots haue made into all places of the Indies extracted out of their Sea Cardes and bookes and translated into our mother tongue BEcause such as saile into India doo compasse the most part of Affrica therefore there are certaine Cardes placed in this booke which shewe those partes of that coast whereby the ships do saile and not speaking of the rich Islands of Canarâ—a and Cabo verde to al men well knewne and right ouer against them in Affrica the kingdomes of Gualata Tombuto and Meili whereof Gualata is very small and poore both of victuals and fruit hauing little else but Milie Tombuto great and populous abounding in corne beastes milke and butter but wanting salt Melli rich of corne flesh and cotten We will come lower towards Guineâ— a greater richer kingdome then the rest lying in Ethiopia or the Moores countrey which the better to vnderstand you must first knowe that the ancient Cosmographers haue diuided Affrica into foure partes as Barbaria Numidia Libia and Aethiopia or the Moores countrey not comprehending Egypt nor Abexin now called the land of Pâ—ester Iohn which are likewise Moores and the rightest as the scriptures wel declare and ought to be counted and numbred amongst the chiefe prouinces of Affrica which al Cosmographers and describers of the world may reade Touching the kingdome of Guinea wherein the Portingales and Frenchmen haue traffiked many yeares and whither our Countrymen in these dayes doe likewise trauel it bordureth on the kingdome of Meilâ— and vpon the riuer Niger in length fiue hundred Italian miles which are about one hundred Dutch miles in this country the Portingales hold a fort being the castle of the Mine vpon the golden coast There is also the coast of Melegete our countrey men that sailed thither this yeare did first put in to the land between the Cape de las Pâ—nas and the Cape de tres Puntas and found anker ground at twenty fadomes water and with their boat rowing on land they came to a place wherein stoode manâ— houses and a little fort placed vpon a rocke and many Moores about it and t◠〈…〉 so played vpon with shor 〈…〉 vnite off This village 〈…〉 and the lande 〈…〉 This sort is holden 〈…〉 bâ—â— is not strong before 〈…〉 about the lâ—ngth of twoo â—es 〈◊〉 â—nto the sea there lieâ—h â—1 cliffes so that you must passe right between them 〈…〉 vnto the â—ort lying in a boothe 〈…〉 This castle lieth about three or foure miles from the Cape de tres 〈…〉 not â—arre from it being a hilly and 〈◊〉 countrey with many trees some of 〈…〉 fadomes in compas 〈…〉 vilage called 〈◊〉 〈…〉 and 〈…〉 〈…〉 with the 〈…〉 〈…〉 cloth or mo◠〈…〉 and tempe◠〈…〉 by south towards 〈…〉 in two dayes could make â—t two degrees so that they sailed ech day one degree although it was indifferent cold by reason of the stormes that sel east northeast and ease and by north towardes the coast Also such as wil satie from the Colde hauens to the cape de Lopâ— G◠〈◊〉 to 〈◊〉 Island must keepe 〈…〉 southward as possibly they may 〈…〉 any wind but hold as neere aâ— they can and yet al litle enough or else fal beneath the cape de Rio â— Gabain that is the riuer of Gabain or elsewhere vnles then the winde be ful weâ—st or that they haue any 〈◊〉 out of the north and so compassed into the south otherwise it is not weâ— to be done for that there are some that haue bin 5. or 6. weekes sayling thither Here ye must note that the neerer ye 〈◊〉 to the Equinoctial line there you find 〈◊〉 southerne windes and when you 〈◊〉 the liâ—â—â—ou finde the winde south 〈…〉 and somewhat higher 〈…〉 â—wise vnderstand that when 〈…〉 â—ng fishes that then yee 〈…〉 of S. Thomas 〈…〉 with the people of 〈…〉 with such as are not ouer 〈…〉 the Portingales which 〈…〉 them slaues for 〈…〉 the countrey is 〈…〉 either knowing God 〈…〉 heathens and idolaters without gouernement or any order abundant in golde elephants teeth corne Ethiopian pepper rice barly cotten wool and many kindes of fruits whereof aboue a hundred sortes both vnknowne neuer written of were brought from thence vnto me besides this there groweth all sorts of great beanes some on trees in coddes as big as a mans elbow a handful broad others red and blacke like to the Turkiâ—h beanes but greater some white round euery one in a place by it self like 〈◊〉 others round and small as red as currall with blacke strikes like those that growe in Egypt where I haue â—â—ne of them and were called 〈◊〉 they are descrâ—bed by the learned doctor Pâ—er A in 〈◊〉 booke of Egyptian herbes There at â—â—wise others that are hard 〈…〉 â—ted like marble 〈…〉 and birds are there abound◠〈…〉 peacockes wilde hennes grâ—y 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 smal 〈…〉 very cunningly hang their nests vpon the braunches of the trees whereof some were brought me thereby to preserue their egs from wormes and snakes They haue â—o selfe abundance of fish so that to conclude there wanteth nothing in those countries but onely the knowledge of the Gospell thereby to bring them to the vnderstanding of the word of God and the pathway
mattes laid vpon the ground Their meat is made of great white rootes taken out of the earth called Iniamos very pleasant of taste like the spanish Baâ—at 〈…〉 or chesnuts They are both rosted and sodden with other rootes and sugar canes and Bananas which are a fruite of a tree like the Indian figges mentioned in this booke long like cucumbers with a tart sweetish but a pleasant taste sometimes likewise they eate both fish flesh which they lay al in one vessell togither and so sit round about it like a company of beastes and neuer drinke but after they haue done eating The gouernours eate alone out of a tin vessel the rest out of a filthie earthen vessel and sit vpon a mat spread vpon the ground The most worke that the women do is to fetch water and fruite and to dresse the meate they will by no meanes ease themselues vppon the ground esteeming that a great offence but haue great vessels made for the same purpose which are sette in the earth They vse no other weapons against their enemies but onely fistes and traues they that dwell by the mine are better appointed with bowes arrowes pikes and targets as long as a man made of barkes of trees and such like things Their Drums are broade aboue and narrow below they haue likewise Cornets of Elophants teeth of all these kindes of instruments and weapons I had some brought from thence Our men being in the Riuer of Gaban came vnto an Iland where they were carried on shore by a Moore that had a great tooth sticking in his vpper lip with a broade knife in his hand and all his body rased and pinked as I saide before where he brought them into a house among the Moores wherein were certaine couerlets made of the rinds or barkes of trees laide vppon the earth where they sate downe not making anie choyse and being sette he clapt them on the shoulders pointing vpwards with his fingers saying in his language Maâ—â—bam they not knowing what hee meant looked vp where they perceiued a blacke man sate vppon the top of a certaine paire of Staires like an image with many chaines of bones and rings hanging about him fearefull to beholde at his feete lay certaine blacke women with Elephants tailes in their handes to beare away the flies and to make winde whereby they vnderstood him to be the Lorde of the Island Wherupon they kneeled vpon one of their knees honouring him according to the custome of the lande clapping their hands vntill the Maâ—â— or Lord made signes vnto them clapping his handes which done they rose vp the Maâ—â— giuing them some of those mars made of barks as a princely present of the which with their linnen I can shew you others of the same ship taking their pinnace entred into another creeke in the same Riuer about two miles higher and there founde a great village lying on the same riuer so neere that they might throw a stone ouer the houses and being within two ships length or the shore they cast anker on the shore there stood at least 1000. Moores men women and children whereof some had pikes kniues and other wepons in thâ—ir hands crying with loude voyces 〈◊〉 and other wordes clapping their handes together which to them was strange both to heare and see Not long after a Moore that by them about foure or fiue miles froÌ„ thence had beene taken into their pinnace stepped into the water and went on shore where being on land the Moores specially the women hong about him in such numbers that he could hardly passe singing and throwing grasse vppon him that our men could neither heare nor see the man neuer ceasing to sing and make a noyse but still continuing dancing leaping and with their kniues cutting off al the grasse meane time there came one out of the village hauing a long staffe in his hand as â—f he were some officer willing them to leaue off theyr noyse driuing thâ—m from the shore but to no end 〈◊〉 reason of the great number of people that were there assembled at the last the Moore that went out of the pinace from our men with one of their Canuyten for so they called their boates came aboord bringing two men and an old woman that was one of the gouernors wiues hauing her breast painted greene and in each hande a branch of a tree shaking both her handes and the two men clapping with their hands giuing to vnderstand as our men conceiued according to their manner that they were welcome with them two of our men went on land whereat the Moores made great ioy with singing dancing leaping and such like pastimes and going vnto the gouernor diuers of them followed specially the women running both before and behinde them leaping and dancing like mad men most of them hauing of the great broade kniues in their handes striking them together in most feareful maner but it was no wonder to see them make so great ioy and shew so much pastime for that it was strange for them to see white men which they neuer had seene for that neuer any had beene or traffiked among them true it is that the Portingales had beene in the same Riuer but not so high for our men were at the least tenne or twelue miles from their shippe within the Riuer and the Riuer before that village called Crementun was about a mile broade hauing another village on the other side and 〈◊〉 with their pinnace before that village they shot off a peece whereat all the people â—ne backe being afraid but came presently againe and as our men went vnto the â—ouernour they led them by the armes singing and shewing great signes of ioy for the comming of these white men into their countrie and being at the Gouernours house which was made of reeds they stayed about halfe an howre before he came out meane time the people that followed theÌ„ neuer left singing making anoyseâ— and when hee came there were three mattes and two stools a great and a little brought with him by certain Moores that followed him All his body and his face was painted white either with chalk or some other painting a sacke of whiting bring likewise brought after him On his head he wore a cappe made of a skin stuck ful of feathers with chains made of bones aboue 100. times about his necke armes and legs being set vpon his stoole there came an old woman that gaue him some of the whiting wherewith hee made as if he had washt his hands the rest he threw vpon his face with that he held vp both his hands meane time his wise had whiting giuen her which done shee began to come forth of the house singing and dauncing al the other women following her doing the like with that the gouernour called the Moore that brought our meÌ„ with him from the place aforesaid saying vnto him that our men were welcome clapping his handes together and saying Fuio Fuio
along the coast by the riuer of Cuama you come to a small kingdome liing vppon the sea side called Angoscia taking the name from certaine Islandes that beare the same name lying right against it inhabited by Mahometanes and Heathens which in small shippes doe traffike and deale in such wares as those of Sofala vse And sayling further you discouer the kingdome of Mosambique lying vnder fouretéene degrees and a halfe whereof I haue sufficient spoken heretofore as also of the Island lying behinde it called Quiloa and the great Island of S. Laurence making the chanell which in the entrance towards the west is three hundred and forty Italian miles broad and in the middle towardes Mosambique where it is narrowest a hundred and seauentie miles kéeping that breadth all along the coasts towards India containing many Islandes The shippes that saile from Spaine into India and from India into Spaine do commonly keepe their course through this channell vnlesse they be otherwise compelled by the winde and surely this Island deserueth to haue better people than it hath inhabiting therein because of the situation hauing many good and safe hauens togither with fayre riuers sweet fresh waters which cause the land to bring forth diuers kinds of fruits and spices as beans pease rice and corn oranges lemons and citrons and all sortes of flesh tame and wilde hennes swine and harts of very good and sweete flesh by reason of the fertilitie and excellent good fish The inhabitants are heathens and some of Mahomets sect of a fayre colour much giuen to war and to their weapons specially bowes and woodden holberts This Island is diuided into foure gouernments ech fighting against other Therein are many mines of gold siluer copper yron and other metals but the wilde people vse not to traffike out of their owne countrey but onely sayle in small scutes cut out of trées from one place of the Island to the other for the most parte not suffering any traffike in their Island with strangers yet the Portingales at this time traffike in some of their hauens but go not on land and from thence bring ambergreece ware siluer copper rice and diuers other wares In this chanel betwéen the firme land of Affrica and this Island there lieth many both great and small Islands al inhabited by Mahometanes among the which the chiefe is S. Christofer then the Holyghost another called Magliaglie as also Comoro Anzoame Maiotto and such like Returning againe vnto the coast and hauing passed Quiloa you sée the kingdome of Mombaza lying vnder thrée degrées and a halfe on the south side taking the name from a certaine Island so called wherein lieth a faire towne with many goodly buildings beautiffied with diuers Images and figures the king being a Mahometane who withstanding the Portingales spéede like those of Quiloa taking it by force where they found much golde siluer pearles cotten linnen silkes and cloth of golde with other sortes of merchandises This Island bordureth on Quiloa and Melinde inhabited by heathens and Mahometanes and subiect to the king of Monemugi Sayling further you come to the kingdome of Melinde which is likewise verie small stretching along the sea coast till you come to the riuer Chimamchi lying vnder two degrees and a halfe and vpwardes by the riuer it runneth to a lake called Calice about a hundred Italian miles or twentie Dutch miles In this countrey about the sea side there is a very great towne most inhabited by white people al heathens and Mahometanes their houses are built almost like the houses in Portingale theyr sheepe are almost as bigge againe as those in Portingale with tailes which are accounted for a quarter of mutton weighing at the lest fiue and twenty or thirtie pound The women are white and dresse themselues after the manner of Arabia very prowdly and in great pompe al in silkes wearing about their neckes armes and legges iewels rings and bracelets of gold going with their faces couered like the Egyptian women not being seene or known but when it pleaseth them in this towne there is a good hauen for ships to lie in and for the most parte the people are friendly vpright in worde and déede holding good friendshippe with strangers specially with the Portingales giuing them much credit and neuer hurting them Betweene the ii heads of Mombaza and Melinde there lieth three Islands the first called Momsie the second Zanzibar and the third Pâ—mba all inhabited by Mahometanes white of colour very rich and abundant in wealth but not vsed to the warres only to til th earth In those Islands is much sugar which is by them brought in boates vnto the firme land with other fruites of those Islandes within the firme land Beyond those three kingdomes of Quiloa Melinde and Mumbaza lieth the great and large kingdome of Monemugi which on the south lieth vppon the kingdome of Molambique by the riuer of Coâ—uo and on the west vpon the riuer Nylus between the two lakes on the north vppon the Land of Pâ—esâ—eâ— lolin it liueth peaceably with the 3. kingdomes aforesaid traffiking with them for cotten linnen which is brought thither out of Cambaia w t such like wares brought out of India which they barter for gold siluer copper and iuory but on the other side towards Monomotapa it hath continuall warres and that so cruel and bloody that it can hardly be knowne who hath the victory because in that place there méeteth two mighty people and those that are most expert in armes throughout all Affrica for those of Monomotapa the women called Amazon whereof I spake before and for Monemugi the people by those of Mencongi called Giachi but in their owne spéech Agagi which in time past vsed much to inuade the kingdome of Congo nothing incomparable for strength and agillitie to the Amazons This people haue a custome with hote yrons to burne their faces especially their vpper lippes and so make strikes and lines in them also they turne their eye lids vpwards and round about They are blacke with shining skinnes The white of their eies being of so swart a colour that by their faces they seeme to be stange and cruel moÌ„sters they are il fauored great bodies liuing in the fields like beasts eate mans flesh In war they are most couragious setting most fiercely vpon their enemie their arms are darts wherin they are most cunning Comming again vnto the Coast hauing past the kingdome of Melinde to the Cape de Guarda fuy there are many other places inhabited by white Mahometanes where there are some good hauens whither diuers strange shippes and Marchants with their wares doe ordinarily resort wherof the chéefe is Pate the second Braua the third Magadoxo the fourth Amffion and behinde that reacheth the broade and wide head or Cape of Guarda Fuy which because of the greatnes issueth farre into the sea is knowne by many ships comming out of India Arabia Ormus other places And about this Cape the
to all that countrey This land is great and hath many people and countries vnder it but the principall and chiefe prouince which the Spanyardes holde therein is Mexicana also â—enustiran or Culhuacan as I saide before the other prouinces are Guatimala Xaliscus Hondura Cha'cos Taicâ— Chamoâ—la Claortomaca Huâ—cacholla and the kingdomes of Michuacan Tescuco Utazcalia Tenuacan Maxcalcinco and Mixâ—eâ—apan Mexico or Culhuacan was brought vnder the subiection of the kings of Spaine by Fernando Cortes Merches deila Valo in the yeere of our Lorde one thousand fiue hundred and eighteene which countrey is very rich of golde and siluer for that many riuers haue golde in the sand The Sea shore in those Countries yeeldeth manye pearles mustles or oysters wherein they finde the pearles whereof there is a great fishing and much traffike for them There are likewise in this countrey many lakes or meeres that are stil and haue no issue which by the heate of the Sunne tourne into salt There is likewise no lesse aboundance of Cassia Fistulâ— then in Egypt growing on trees with leaues like walnuts and yellow blossoms from whence the pipes or cases of Cassia do issue forth which are vsed to purge in hote feuers to coole and cleanse the gall and heart blood as also very good against the stone in the bladder and kidneys and other diseases There is likewise in that countrie a kinde of fruit that groweth in great abundance called Cacao altogether like an almond which is taken out of the huske and couered with a thinne skinne whereof the kernel is diuided into three or foure partes of a darke yellow with blacke veines being harsh in the mouth and of an euill taste but with them is much esteemed whereof being beaten with some of their countrey pepper they make a certaine drinke which they esteeme of great price giuing it vnto great Lordes and such as are their especiall friends as we esteeme of muscadel or maluesie The sea bordering vpon this countrey as also the riuers running through it are ful of fish wherein also they finde diuers Crocodiles as in Egypt the flesh whereof is so much esteemed before al other meates that they account it for a princely dish whereof some are aboue 20. foote long The country is full of hilles and stony rockes and great difference in their speeche so that they hardly vnderstand each other without Interpreters The places wherein the Spaniardes first placed their men were Compostella where the Bishop and the Kings counsell are resident and Colima which they call the Purification in new Galicia is the chiefe Guadalahara and the head or principall part of the kingdome Mecheocan also a Bishops sea Cacatula the towne of Angels a chiefe towne and bishopricke Mâ—xâ— a kingly citie and Queene of al cities in the new world lyeth vpon the border or side of a lake the market place of the Towne lying ful vpon the lake whereby they can not come at it but they must passe ouer bridges This lake is lâ—â—t and is in length sixe lucas or twelue miles and is in breadth tenne miles without fish onely a smal kind that may rather be called wormes than fishes from the which lake in summer time there ariseth such a stiâ—ke and infecteth the ayre in such manner that it is vnwholesome to dwel there notwithstanding it is inhabited by as many marchants as any towne in Europe the cittie is great at the least three miles in compasse wherein are so many temples that it is incredible the particularitte whereof before it be long shal be translated out of Spanish into our mother tongue by the author therof whereunto I referre you Not farre from this cittie lieth an other fresh lake very ful of fish whereon as also vpon the shore lie many townes When this towne was first taken by the Spaniards there raigned a king called Mâ—ntezâ—mâ— being the ninth in degree and as then the towne was but 140. yeares old which is to bee wondered at howe it is possible that so great a citie in so few yeers should be so famous The marchandises that are most carried out of this countrey are golde siluer pearle balsam cochenilia the white roote Macheocan which is good to purge Salla Pariglia and an other roote which maketh men sweate brimstone beasts skinnes and fish And thus much for new Spaine in generall and of Mexico in particular Not minding at this present time to make any longer discourse because that our Carde sheweth little thereof and now returning to our owne Carde you must vnderstand that the lower ende of Cuba hath an out Hooke called P. de Santa Anthonio which is very fitte for to take in fresh water and to calke and mend the shippes Sailing from this hooke sixtie fiue miles to the firme land you come to the hooke of Iucatan which runneth into the sea like a halfe Island Iectetan is in Indian speech I vnderstand you not for that vpon a time when certaine Spaniards put out of the hauen of Saint Anthony to discouer newe countries and arriued in that Island they made signes vnto the people to knowe the name of the country whereuppon the Indians answered them and saide O Tectetan Tectetan that is We vnderstand ye not and so the Spaniards corrupting the name Tectetan call that land Iucatan yet the furthest point therof in their spéech was called â—ecampi This point of Iucatan lyeth vnder 21. degrees vnder the which name a great countrey is comprehended by some called Peinsula that is a place almost compassed about with water for that the further this point reacheth into the sea the broader it is being in the narrowest part 80. or 90. Spanish miles broad for so farre it is from Xicalanco Therefore the sea Cardes that place this land nearer or smaller do erre much for that it is in length from East to West twoo hundred miles being discouered by Francisco Hernandez of Cordua in the yeare of our Lord 1517. but not al of it for that sailing from out of Cuba from Saint Iacobs to discouer new countries or as some say to fetch labourers to trauell in his mines he came about the Island Guanaxos herein called Caguan xâ— to the cape di Honduras where good honest ciuill and simple people dwelt being fishermen hauing no weapons nor vsed to the warres and proceeding further sayled to an vnknowne point of land where hee found certaine salt pannes whereunto he gaue the name of Donne that is women for that there were certaine stone towers with staires chappels couered with wood and straw wherein were placed diuerse Idols that shewed like women whereat the Spaniardes maruelled to finde stone houses which till then they had not seene and that the inhabitants were rich and well apparelled with shirtes and mantles of cotten white and coloured with plumes of feathers and iewels of precious stones sette in golde and siluer their women likewise appareled from the middle downewardes as also on the head and breast which
sun in their wars insteed of Ancients they tie the bones of certaine men who in their liues were valiaunt in armes vppon long staues and so carry them before them to incorage others to be the like and make them the readier to fight Their weapons are arrowes pikes made of palme tree wood and stone swordes They bury their kings with golden neckelaces sette with emerauldes and with bread and wine wherof the Spaniards haue foūd many such graues which they haue opened The people that dwell vpon the aforesaid great riuer are all Caniballs or Caribes as also those that dwell about saint Martha and in time past were Caribes The inhabitants of the Islandes of Boriquen Dominico Matitini Cibuchine now called saint Croce and Guadalupe as it is already declared which rowe on the water with scutes made of a certayn wood called Canois and that fought against those of Hispaniola and the people of the firme land whome they spoyled and eate The common opinion is that they came first out of the firme land of Caribana by Vraba and from Nombre de Dios in Indian speech called Caribes and all strong and valiaunt menne are nowe by them called Caribes which are very expert in bowes and arrowes The Brasilians name them Prophets or Soothsayers and Caribes Priests The people inhabiting in the valley of Tunia poison their arrowes and before the Spaniards ouercame them they hadde continuall warres against the people of Bagota or Bogota they are good souldiers cruel and very reuengeatiue when they goe to warres they carry their Idoll Chiappen with them as a iudge of the victorie vnto whome before they enter into the field they offer many sacrifices and offerings of certaine liuing men béeing the children of slaues or of their ennemies painting all the Image with bloud which doone they doe eate the flesh when they retourned victorious they helde great feasts with dauncings leapings and singings some drinking themselues druncke and agayne besmeering their Image with blood and being ouercome they were sorrowfull and heauy seeking by new sacrifices to intreats theyr Chiappen that hée woulde helpe and assist them and send them victory against theyr enemies S. Martha SAint Martha is also a Towne and Hauen of the Spaniardes lying on the firme land vnder eleuen degrees on the north side of the Equinoctial line about fiftie Spanish miles from Carthagena it lieth at the foote of certayne hills so monstrous high that it is incredible howe in so great extreame heate so great quantitie of snowe should lie vpon the toppes of those hills which is seene a great way off and whereby the hauen is knowne This country was discouered and taken by Roderigo de Bastidas in 1524. where it cost him his life not by the enemy but by his owne men that when he was asleepe killed him and gaue him fiue woundes in his body The people of this country are so cruell and fierce that they haue oftentimes driuen the Spaniards from their countrey not caring for the shippes but running into the sea till the water mounted as high as their breasts shooting with thousandes of poysoned arrowes and neuer would giue ouer were it not by meanes of the great shot together with the cries of such as were afraid and ran away thinking them to be thunder claps which oft times happen in those countries by reason of the euennesse of the countrey with the height of the hills The compasse of this hauen is three Spannish miles and so cleere that they may see stones lying on the ground within the water although it is at the least twentie elles deepe into this hauen there floweth twoo running waters but not fit for great ships but onely for little boates cut out of peeces of wood it is a great pleasure to heare what they report of the great numbers and goodnes of the fishes that are taken thereabouts both in fresh and salt water for the which cause they found many Fishermen thereabouts with many nettes made of packethreede hanging on cotten ropes which was their greatest liuing for that for fish they had whatsoeuer they desired of their neighbours In this country they found saphires emerauldes calcedonies iaspers amber brasil wood golde and pearles that is in the two prouinces Caramaira and Sacurma wherein the two hauens Carthagena and S. Martha do lie Caramaira is a very fruitfull and pleasant countrey wherein there falleth neither hard winter nor ouer hote summer day and night being there almost of a length The Spaniardes hauing taken in this country found gardeins ready planted moystned with strange waters like the gardeins in Italie their common meate is Ages luca Maiz Batatas and some fruites of trees such as other Indians therabouts do vse they eate fish also and mans flesh but not often Ages are rootes of the greatnesse of long turnopes in Italie pleasant of taste not much vnlike chesnuttes which they vse in banquets insteede of fruit Iuca is also a kinde of roote whereof they do make bread the Iuca that groweth in Cuba Hayti other Ilands is very hurtful being eaten raw and to the contrary that of S. Martha is very wholsome being otherwise eaten it is very good of taste these roots are planted not sowne which being ripe are as great as a mans arme or the smal of his leg ripeneth in halfe a yere but if it stand two yéeres in the ground it maketh better bread being ripe they are prest betweene 2 stones wherby the sap runneth forth which is very hurtful in the Islands vnlesse it be sodden as we doe milke otherwise being drunke of men or beasts it kills them as being a strong poison but sod till it consumeth to the half so let stand til it be cold it may be vsed insteede of vineger being sod til it be thick it becoms sweet like hony so they vse it in the firm land being raw for drink and sodden for vineger hony I said in the firme land for that in the Islands it is very dangerous venomous of the material substance of the roote being prest which is like almonds that are stampt they make round cakes as big as dollars which they bake is their Cacaui or bread wherewith they so long haue norished themselues this bread is somwhat harsh in the throat if it be not tempered with water or mixed with other meate Yet I had rather eate bread made of Maiz that is Brasilia wheate for that it giueth no lesse sustenance than our wheate is very wholsome agreeing with y e stomak wherof they make bread as we do of wheat Batatas are also common in great aboundance in this country which are roots of the thicknesse of a mans arme some smaller pleasant of taste and procuring good norishment yet they cause wind vnlesse you rost thē then they loose that effect specialy when they are eaten with any good wine of these rootes they also make conserues not much vnlike that which
houskeeper they presently change thou singing into weeping and mourning with such a noyse that all the whole night they neuer cease specially the women that crie out not like men but like wolues and dogs with stammering voyces vtter these or such like complaints saying Alax the strong maâ— is dead that vsed to bring vs so many men to eate others crying O what a lustie hunter and how cunning a fisher man was hee O what a strong and valiant man was hée in destroying our ennemies the Margaâ—aters and Portingales and in that sort lamenting and crying they imbrace each other neuer ceasing till the body be carried to the graue adding many times he is now gone whom we bewaile the man Eheu is dead whome we shall see no more before we goe behinde the hilles there to daunce with him as our prophets the Caribes teach vs with many other wordes which continue for the space of sixe hoâ—â—â—es for they kéepe not their dead bodies any longer vnburied and then they set the dead body in a round pit or graue in forme like a winde pipe wherein he standeth vpright but if the dead man be a house keeper he is lapped in his cotten bed and so buried in the middle of his house with fethers such like things put into his graue as if he were liuing in the same maner that the Perunians bury their kings with their iewelles about them as it shall be shewed The next night after the dead body is buried they set certaine dishes of meale flesh fish and other victualles by the graue because they are of opinion that the Aâ—gnan or the Diuell would come and digge the body out of the graue if hee founde not other meate to eate and withall they set some of their Coaâ—in which they do as long as they thinke the body is not corrupted from the which opinion they can by no meanes bee perswaded although in the mornings they finde the meate whole and in the same sort it was when they set it there This toy or foolish deuise seemes to spring out of the false gloses of certaine Rabines but he that desireth to see more hereof let him reade Lerius and because the Americans do often change their dwelling places by whole villages together therefore when they remooue they couer their graues with a great herb called Pindo whereby such as trauell may easily know where men are buried by the which places whensoeuer they passe they make a most fearefull noyse Thus much touching the generall custome of all the Brasilians and now we wil procéede with the description of the rest of the coast from Cabo Frio to the straites of Magellanes Heere followeth the description of the sea coasts FROM Cabo Frio to Punta de Buen Abrigo in our Carde called Abitrioga are a hundred miles Beyond this point reacheth Tropicus Capricornus and the line of repartition which beareth the name aforesaide from Buen Abrigo to the Bay of S. Michael are 50. miles and fro thence to the riuer of S. Francis which lieth vnder sixe and twenty degrees are seuentie miles from S. Francis to the riuer of Tibiqâ—â—â—e are a hundred miles wherein lieth Puerto de Patos which is vnder eight and twenty degrées and right against it an Island called S. Catherina Puerto de Faraâ—oâ— and others and from Tibiquire to Rio de la Plata are more than fiftie miles so that from Cabo de S. Augustin to Rio de la Plata that is the siluer riuer are sixe hundred and threescore miles which lieth vnder thirty fiue degrees on the South side of the Equinoctiall line This riuer by the Barbarians is called the riuer of Parana or Paranagnaâ—â— that is to say great riuer or a riuer like the sea hauing certayne entries that are very broade many Islands it is rich of siluer pearles precious stones and fish it is in breadth xx miles and many Islands between both the hookes of S. Mâ—â—iaâ— and Cabo Bâ—anco This riuer increaseth and flowesh ouer like the riuer Nilus making the country fruitful at certaine times of the yeere and as some are of opinion it springeth out of the hilles in the kingdome of Peru into this riuer there runneth many other great riuers as Auanca Vicas Purina and Xâ—â—xa which spring out of the high land called Bombon many of the Spaniardes that dwell vppon this riuer haue come vp as high as to Peru and the mines of Potosi The whole coast from Cabo Frio to the Rio de Plata or rio Solis is inhabited by goodly men and well proportioned but all eaters of mens flesh The country is ful of brasil wood and of white Anime From Rio de Plata to Puerto de S. Elena are thréescore miles from S. Elena to Arenas Gordas are thirtie miles from thence to Baros Anagedos forty miles from thence to Terra Baixa fiftie miles from terra Baixa to Bahya Sâ—n Fâ—ndo thréescore and fiue miles and from this Bay which is vnder one and fortie degrees to the Arrecifes de Lobos are fortie miles Vpon this bordereth the country of y e Patagones where the inhabitaunts paint theyr faces with certaine herbs froÌ„ Lobos which is vnder fortie foure degrees to Cabo dâ— S. Dominico are fiue and fortie miles from this cape to another called cabo Blanco are twenty miles to the riuer of Iohn Serrano which lieth vnder nine and fortie degrées and by others called Rio de Trabaâ—os are threescore miles betwéene them lieth Baâ—a de S. Iulian wherein is a good hauen The people being wilde and without weapons couered with skins and without any lawe but of a great stature from thence to the Promontorium or cape de las 11000. Virgins are fourescore miles from Cabo de las 11000. Virgins which lieth vnder one and fiftie degrees and a halfe to the entry of the straits of Magellanas which vnder the same degrees from east to west are accounted 110 miles some say 130. miles and the south and north part from Venezula twelue hundred miles it is two miles broad in some places more and very deepe and rather increaseth than diminisheth and runneth southward In this strait are many Islands and hauens The coast on both sides verye high and full of great rockes the countrie vnfruitful it hath no greene land but is very colde as hauing snowe the most part of the yeare about it groweth many trees whereof are diuers cedars and other trées bearing fruit like Bisnole or Creken There they find Estriges and other greater birds with many strange beasts also in that strait are many sardines flying fishes they eate of all kindes of meates there are likewise many seawolues wherewith they line or furre their clothes and whale fishes the bones whereof they vse to make shippes as also of the barkes of trees This strait was discouered by Fernando Magellanus a Portingale in the yéere of our Lorde one thousand fiue hundred twenty and one and as some saye one thousand fiue hundred
likewise be iudged by the history of Francisco Xeresio who writeth that in Cusco there were houses hauing the gates walls and roofe couered with plates of golde Besides this Giraua writeth that the inhabitantes of Anzerma hadde their weapons breastplates necke peeces and peeces for their shinnes all of massy gold he likewise writeth that about Quito there were gold hilles that yeeld more gold then earth the like do all Historiographers witnesse that write of king Atabalidas ransome which was so great that the like was neuer heard of for that he caused the chamber wherein he was kept prisoner beeing of twoo and twentie foot long and seuenteene foot broad to be filled so full of gold that hee standing vpright therein and stretching his armes and fingers aboue his head as high as hee could reach the gold couered them offering that if they would haue siluer and leaue the gold he would fill the Chamber twice full but the Spaniards tooke the gold whereof the kings duty being a fift part amounted to sixe hundred and seuenteene thousand six hundred fortie seuen Carolus gyldernes 30000. marks of siluer euery horseman had 12000. castilians euerie Castillian of fourteene rialles besides siluer and euerie footeman 1450. castillians besides siluer being 180. markes so that to conclude the golde onely ammounted vnto in Flemish money the summe of three millions eighty eight thousand two hundred fiue carolus gylderns besides the siluer wherby may be knowne the great aboundance of gold and siluer that is in those countries and although Atabalida payed so great a treasour for his ransome yet was it not comparable vnto y e which his elder brother promised to pay so that he might saue his life for that he had all the treasor of his predecessors and also his fathers which were not knowne to Atabalida when he first entered into the kingdome from whence by force he hadde driuen his brother and placed him selfe therein We reade likewise that when the Spaniards first entred that country they shooed their horses with shooes of golde and what it yeeldeth yeerly at this present doth sufficiently appeare by the Armada that came from thence into Spaine the last yeere whiche needeth not heerein to bee declared But now proceeding to the description of the coast of Panama to Peru you must first vnderstand that Panama and Nombre de Dios are two townes lying one right ouer against the other the one on the north sea or north side of Peru the other on the south sea seuenteene miles distant one from the other Panama lying in a little valley so neere vnto the sea that when the moone is in the full the sea entereth into the houses lying neerest to the shore the houses thereof are part of reeds and partly made of other substances mixed together most couered with tiles but there are not many houses in the towne There is in this towne a very fitte and safe hauen but very small where with the streame or floud the shippes doe enter and with an ebbe they go out but not heauy laden for that such as are deepe laden would be in danger to fall vpon the flattes in this hauen there runneth both a great floud and ebbe so that where the water is very deepe within an houre after it will bee drie sand whereby the shippes must keepe somewhat from the land discharging and lading their shippes by little scutes as well such as come out of Spaine thither as that goe from thence into Spaine This Towne hath from Peru maiz meale hennes and hony it hath of it selfe kine and hogges oranges lemons coleworts onions lettuce melons and such like things in great abundance This prouince of Panama in time past was much inhabited and haunted by the Indians and al the riuers yeelded gold but now by the Spaniards are most fished drie When men will trauel by land from Panama to Nombre de Dios the first dayes iorney is faire and good way the next day you enter into woods which continue till you come to Nombre de Dios. In the middle of this way you come vnto a water which in three houres can hardly be passed ouer because of the many crookings windings thereof and many are cast away therein the streame specially in winter when there falleth much raine running most swiftly Such as compare this towne to Venice are much deceiued for that both of them put together with many other townes erected by the Spaniardes in those countries wil not make the compasse or greatnesse of the Cittie of Venice although euery man may iudge as pleaseth him As touching the maner of sayling from Panama to Peru as also at what times of the yeare you must vnderstand that the best and fittest times of the yeere are in the three first moneths that is Ianuary February and March vntill the moneth of Aprill for as then the Sea is open summer comming on and many of the Brisen which are east and northweast windes doe blowe no weast or southerly windes as then stirring whereby the ships do easily performe their voyages and commonly ariue at their desired hauens before any other winde specially south winde which for the most part of the yeare vpon the coast of Peru doe blowe They may likewise put out in the moneths of August and September but make not so good ariuage as in the moneths aforesaide and if any ships do put out of Panama at other times than in the moneths aforesaide they are sure to haue a long and tedious voyage and commonly som one of them is forced to turne backe againe not being able to gette the coast and are by reason of the southern winds which for the most part of the whole yeere blow vpon the coast as I said before as likewise because of the great contrarie streame many of them are brought into great danger It is very good with the wind blowing from Peru to sayle to Panama Nicaragua and other quarters thereabouts but to sayle to Peru from Panama it is very dangerous and vncertayne The ships that are laden with Spanish wares and depart from Panama first come to â—aboga and the Ilands bordering on the same which haue receiued their names from the Pearles where they take in fresh water in those Islands that are at the least fiue and twentie or thirtie together The Spaniardes in times past founde many Pearles whereof they helde the name of Islas de Paâ—las They lie hardly vnder eight degrées northward The greatest of them in times past was woont to be inhabited but not now because the fishing for pearles beginneth to decay and such as are owners of those Islandes there in keepe slaues of Nicaragua and Cubagâ—a that looke to their beastes and sowe the ground as being very fruitfull from thence they put into the sea westward then see y e poynt called Carrachine which lieth northwest and southest from the great Island of pearles called Taboga distant about thirty Italian miles which are seuen Spanish
Speranza or das Agulhas and marke it well for you shall finde it to be true and when you set your course to saile within the Island of saint Laurence you shall find some small white birdes in companies together they flie about twentie miles from the land towardes the droughtes of India and comming vnder twenty degrees you shall most certainely find the birdes called Garagiaus and Alcatrases that are like Sea-mewes then you hold a good course and if you sée not any of those tokens looke well to your selfe for thē you are hard by the Island of S. Laurence or vpon the banks of the coast of Soffala and séeing many birdes you are but 10 miles from the droughtes of India then take your course North East and North East by North and so hold on till you come vnder 19. degrees and ¼ and from thence Sayle North East till you bee in eightéene degrées from thence you shall runne North and North and by East till you come to sixteene degrées and ¾ beeing vnder those degrees and séeing many birdes called Alcatrases in companies of 6.7.8 or 10. then you are but ten or fifteene miles from the Island of Ioan de Noua therefore vse all diligence both by day and night not to come néere it specially when it is with a new moone and saile North westward and then you will come by the Islandes named dos Angoxes and the more northward you run you shall keepe the better course towardes Mosambique being carefull not to come neerer the land then twentie fiue fadomes déepe for the coast is altogether droughtes shallowes where on Don Iohn Periera was cast away and yet is thirteene fadome déepe round about The 3. Chapter The Nauigation from Cauo das Correntes to the droughts called os Baixos de India from thence to Mosambique AND if you chance to sée the cape das Correntes being 6. or 7. miles from you and minding to saile to Mosambique then saile East Northeast hauing a sharpe wind and comming vnder 22. degrées vnder the which height the droughtes of India lie You shall sée many of the birdes called Garagiaus flying in companies and if you haue a full wind then saile Northeast to the height aforesaide to know if you be néere vnto the droughts you shall sée many of the birdes called Garagiaus and Alcatrases flying together and if you sée many Alcatrases then you are néere the droughts but séeing the Garagiaus alone without Alcatrases then you are twentie fiue miles from thence Frō thence you must saile Northeast and Northeast by North to 19. degrées and 1 ◠and then saile Northeast to 18. degrees and from thence north north and by East to 16. degrées and 1 ◠and beeing vnder this height you shall sée many of the birdes called Alcatrases and so assure your selfe to be hard by the Island of Ioan de Noua and if you see Alcatrases by 6. or 7. together then you are but 10. or 15. miles from thence because there they vse to fetch their foode therefore vse all diligence to get your selues out of that height of the Island which is 16 degrées and 1 ◠and to bee out of danger sayle Northwest whereby you come to the Islands of Angoxas which are close by the coasts towards Mosambique and the more Northerly you kéepe the nearer you come to Mosambique but as you sayle from the Islands of Angoxas to Mosambique beware you come not nearer then 25. fadome to y e Corals where Don Ioan Perreira was cast away and yet round about it is thirtéene fadomes water beeing past the Islandes of Angoxas Northeast then saile Northeast by East which is a good course alwaies kéeping at twenty fiue fadome as I said before The courses aforesaid from Cabo das Correntes forwards may bee done nearer and shorter if you haue the wind Southeast for then you may sayle along by the Islands lying vpon the bankes of Solfala the sooner to Mosambique and with an east wind vnder the degrées and with the signes aforesaide you must likewise shun the drought of India and the bankes of the Island of S. Laurence that lye towardes the drougths of India betwéen those two droughts it is 95. fadome deepe and if you desire to enter into the road of Mosambique in the entrance you must passe by the two Islands of S. George S. Iames and leaue them on the southwest side keepe aloofe from S. George about six or seuen fadome déepe and so running forward til you be in hauing care to keepe off from the bankes where you sée the water breake till you come close before the Island and fortresse of Mosambique The 4. Chapter The Nauigation from Mosambique to India WHEN you depart from Mosambique towardes India then saile Northeast whereby you shall discouer the Islande Alha da Comoro which is distant from Mosambique 94. miles or 11 degrées and ½ whereof the furthest point Northward is a verie high land 15. miles from thence you shall sée certaine birdes called Rabo◠de Iuncos that is tayles of stalkes of berries for that they haue a long narrow taile stretching out like the stalke of a berrie and by night you shall heare the birdes called Garagiaus sing or make a noyse following your course from this Iland or towards India you must vnderstand as soone as you discouer the vttermost point of the Iland of Saint Laurence towardes the North that the water and streames run North and Northwest toward the Cape of Guardafu and to the mouth or entrie of the straightes of Mecco or the redde sea and you must marke that if it chance that you sayle with a halfe winde and shoot full or sayle before the winde yet therefore you must not recken according to the course you hold but alwaies take a strike for abatement or cutting off and being by the winde two strikes because the water and streame driue you continually to the Northwest and looke wel before you that if you find many heights it is by reason y e water driues you as I said before to be assured to fal vpon the coast of India you must take héede to the needle of your compasse that yéeldeth a strike and more to the Northeast and if you recken your course according to the way the shippe maketh then you lose all that which the néedle or compasse yéeldeth towards the Northeast and that which the water driueth you towards the Northwest whereby you come too short and cannot get the coast of India The streame or drawing of the water towards the redde sea is from 4. to 7. degrées wherefore you must alwaies haue great care to be forward and not to come to short In those countries you shall alwayes sée many of the birds called Rabos de Iuncos and when you are néere vnto the coast and droughtes of Pandua then you see them no more but onely about 5◠miles in the sea you shal perceiue diuers
the Compasse that in Portingall lyeth halfe a strike Northeast maketh the same Meridian 100. and so many myles within the countrey of Brasilia which also likewise doth so agrée with the sea In this course aforesaide you see many birdes called Rabos Forcados that is hanging tailes and by all the Islandes of Martin Vaas you shal sée white Garagiaus or sea Mewes Now when you come vnder the height aforesaide hauing a large winde and that you might saile East Southeast let the Compasse wind a strike or a strike and a halfe which will wind so much comming vnder 30. degrées and although the Compasse windeth a strike and a halfe yet you shall not therefore reckon any abatement in your course more then halfe a strike for this way is a strike shorter then it is placed in the sea Carde and vse all the meanes that you runne not higher then two and thirtie or 33. degrées towards the Island of Tristan da Cunha for you shal haue a better and surer course from very foule weather and lesse stormes for commonly for the most part you haue the winde there at North Northeast which to auoid take this counsel giueÌ„ by me because I haue well tried it to be true and comming by the aforesaide Islandes of Tristan de Cunha you shall sée some of the weed called Sargosso driuing vppon the water with diuers Trombas which are thicke peeces of reedes which when you see then you are beside the Islandes you shall there likewise see great sea Rauens and some small Rauens with white billes which flie close by the Islands and when you are right south and north with the Islandes then the winding of the compasse Northeastward beginneth to diminish and lieth but a strike and â— part for that 70. or 80. miles from this Iland you are in the middle or halfe way of the Meridian betweene Brasilia and the Cape das Agulhas also herewith you must vnderstaÌ„d that vnder the height of 35. degrees little more or lesse you must account 330. miles for each strike of the compasse from the Northeast and when you see the tokens aforesaid you must runne to 35. degrees and â— which is a good height holding your course east and east and by north till you be within 100. miles of the cape de Bona Speranza then the compasse will winde no more but â— part of a strike likewise the water wil there draw you northwest or north now if by negligence you chance to faile or by the windes are driuen vnder 35 degrees then when you are 30 or fortie miles from the cape de Bona Speranza you shall see many thicke peeces of reedes and sea wolues which being vnder 36. degrees you shall not see bee it full or scarse and comming within 40. miles of the Cape de Bona Speranza be it vnder 36. or 35. degrées you shall see a gathering or running together of the water that is in the day time for by night if you cannot see it because that when you are once in it then you cannot perceiue it there you find many birdes sitting vpon it by the Portingalles called Cauoitoijns and from thence to the Cape there are some sea Rauens with white billes which is a great signe for it may be you may find ground and neuer sée the birdes called Alcatrases and when you come North and South with the Cape de bona Speranza from fiue and thirtie to thirtie degrées then you shall find muddie grounde to the Cape das Agulhas and when you are past that muddie ground you shall finde a kinde of yellowish ground and somewhat more inwarde by the Cape das Vacquas which is towards the Agua de de San Bras you haue shelly and stone ground The Compasse as I said that is fire at the Cape das Agulhas must in Lisbone be marked or striked and must there lie a halfe strike Northeastward which they must very well know howe to marke although some of our Pilots thinke it not necessary to knowe how much the Compasse turneth or lyeth Northeast or Northwest saying that our predecessors vnderstoode not the Compasse and so marked the coast whereunto I answere that in some nauigations it may be excused but in most part of the voiage or nauigation it is very necessarie specially from the Northeast and Northwest as you must saile from the Cape de bona Speranza to Mosambique as wel in the course as to saile in the middle betwéen the Ilande of Saint Laurence Soffala it must haue a strike from the Northwest to saile in the middle of the channell and this is necessarie to be known by al pylots that saile to India because oftentimes they find themselues sometimes vpon the Islandes some-that by meanes of the streames and wa-times vppon the bankes of Soffala and ters as you take your course from Capo das Agulhas to Mosambique it is good to saile an hundred miles Eastward thereby to shun the coast because of the water and streames that runne southwestwarde and comming north and south with the Bay called Balâ—a Del Goa then the Needle of the Compasse will be 1 â— part of a strike and no lesse Northwestwarde from whence notwithstanding you must not goe néerer then 60. miles vnto the coast continuing your course as I sayde before to kéepe your selfe off from it from this place the Rauens with white billes will follow you vntill the Cape das Correntes be Northwest from you and so when the said Cape lyeth right vppon that strike then the Rauens will leaue you for that they are not found but from the Cape das Correntes to the Cape de bona Speranza being North and south with the point aforesaid then the Compasse will bee 1\â— of a strike rather more then lesse Northwestwarde and in the middle of the channell a whole strike Comming by the droughts of Os Baixos de Iudia being Westward from them or not séeing theÌ„ then you shall sée many of the birdes called Alcatrases that being 10. or 15. miles from them but being 20. miles off on the same side you shall likewise sée some but the compasse will not winde a full strike but if you were on the side of the Iland of S. Laurence within 10.12 or 15. miles then peraduenture you may not sée them and when in the height of those droughtes which lie full vnder 28. degrées you sée the birdes called Alcatrases then passe not by the side of the Iland of S. Laurence for that on that side towards the Iland you shall not see them but hard by and on Soffala side you shal perceiue them 20. miles from the land this is to bee vnderstood at the time of the Monsons which is at the time that the Portingall shippes that depart from thence in the month of March do passe by for they that come in the Monson or winter time may possiblie not find them for that it happened vnto me that comming in the Monson of winter in companie
to say truth there are none Those Islandes being past it is good to take your course Southwest till you come to foure degrees and from thence south southwest to three degrées on the south side of the Equinoctiall from Cochin all the way aforesaid to this place The compasse lieth northwest a strike and a halfe beeing vnder three degrees on the south side of the line then you begin to haue the thunder out of the west and northwest with a stiffe winde and from thence you shall hold south and south by west to ten or twelue degrees in which you shal haue the wind southeast vnder these twelue degrees the compasse holdeth northwestward a strike and â— parts but shall not therfore be made any abatement in your reckoning for it is often found that the water or streame doth there run to the west which would then be two faults for that as I vnderstand it in this course you must account all that is said the ship hath gone because you shall likewise find streames that draw to the southeast being at 12 degrees as I said before til you be vnder 15. degrees theÌ„ you haue the winde sometime south southeast then you must not lie westward for it is not good but rather runne east and east southeast alwaies keeping good watch to the eightéenth degrée vnder the which lieth the droughtes called 〈◊〉 Baxios dos Garagiaus and hauing a south-East wind then it is good to hold your course southwest vntill you discouer the Island of Diego Rodâ—ges and if it lieth right before you then you shall sée some of the birdes called Alcatrases and some hearbes called Saâ— driuing in the water and there the compasse goeth no higher but beginneth from thence againe to diminish or lessen when you are past this Island or the point thereof then runne southwest and southwest and by west to 26. degrees vnder the which height lieth the first point of the Island of S. Laurence as soone as you are vnder this height then you shall hold your course west southwest to 29. degrees and from thence west and west and by south and to know when you are north and by south with the Island of Saint Laurence that is with the middle of the vttermost land on the south side then marke the compasse well and if you bee by the countrey aforesaid then your compasse will bee a strike and 1 â— one from the other northwestward from thence you shall hold your course as winde and weather serueth for being from about the 15. of Aprill till the last of May it is necessary to haue the Firme land on boarde for that there at those times you haue the winde North and northwest and being in the monthes of Februarie and March then the winde is east and south where you must rule your course as the wind serueth and being right with the land north south then the compasse shall leaue a strike rather more than lesse to the Northwest which is a certaine signe to bee right against it but if it be more then assure your selfe you are not by the land then beeing 30. or 40. miles from thence and though you be but 30 miles from the land you shall see gréene water but you finde no ground The compasse that I speake of shall be sixe and euen at the Cape das Agulhas with those that make them leane northeastward in Portingall a halfe strike rather lesse then more and when you come to the Cape das Agulhas and hetherwards as long as you haue not muddie ground you are not at the Cape das Agulhas wherefore spare not often to cast your lead for it will be for your owne good Passing the Cape das Agulhas to the cape de Bona Speranza it is not good to saile northwest as long as you haue ground for that therewith you should not passe the Cape de Bona Speranza but being past it then runne northwest til you come to 16. degrees vnder the which height the Island of Saint Helena doth lie or to 16. degrees and 1 â— and when you come to that height then run west and somewhat southerlie or the first meale tide west and by south because of the compasse of the sea in some streames for I thinke you shall finde no more heights although you should sayle west and by south and sayling on that course you shall continue it 50. miles further but no more and when you perceiue the Island and cannot reach it by day then strike all your small sayles holding about 5. miles from thence in such manner that in the night time you hold west and west and by north there the compasse beareth full northeast halfe a strike and as you make your reckinng well in your course from the cape de Bona Speranza to this Island with the aduantage of the compasse as it ought to be you shall find that it lieth aboue seauentie miles more westward then it standeth in the Sea Card departing from this Iland to saile to Portingall and to sée the Iland called Ascention you shall run northwest and northwest and by west for 70. miles then you shal goe somewhat Easternly as some doe then it wil be needful to saile 100. miles northwest and by west and from thence northwest vntill you come by the generall wind but come no nearer vnto the land for then you should not make a good voiage and although the south winde doth continue longer in this course which bringeth you to twelue fourtéene degrées on the north side yet leaue it not for that neyther put close vnder the coast of Guinea when you haue the general wind although you might more westernly neyther leaue off therefore to follow your course for it will be large enough althougl sometimes it scanteth because you are close by the land It is good to kéepe 150. or 200. miles from the coast for although that by the sea cardes you finde your selfe to bee two hundred miles from the land notwithstanding you are a good way nearer the reason whereof is that you sayle from the point of the Island of S. Helena which lieth in the sea carde and not from the Island that lieth 70. miles westward as aforesaid and although the pointes doe assuredly lie towards the Island Flores it therfore maketh no reason that it is not so as I say for that in the course through the sea where you finde the hearbe Sargosso the winde being there alwaies northeast the sea or streame runneth to the Antilhas or fore Iland of the Spanish Ilandes whereby the ships doe so little multiplie in the course of Sargosso if these waters and streames doe chance to meete the ships when they are in the course of Sargosso it happeneth often times that the ships beare too loofeward but very seldome and it happeneth oftentimes that by Guinea the streame runneth northward and being somewhat neere the land then the water draweth you presently to the land also the
not suddainely vppon you for it by vnaduisednes it should fall forwards vpon you it were not possible for you to find any meanes to keepe your selfe from being ouerwhelmed in the sea without the speciall fauour of God for that they come with most great furie and outragiously but if you chance in the beginning of Februarie to bee by the furthest point of S. Laurence 70. or 80. miles inward to the Sea then take your course to the Cape Das Agulhas for then you shall find the windes alwaies Southeast so you passe not further into the Sea then 36. degrees which Nauigation you shall make departing out of India in the ninth of December you haue ground by the Cape Das Agulhas at twentie and twentie fiue miles from the land at a hundred and a hundred and thirtie Fadome déepe vnder thirtie sixe degrees and a halfe The 9. Chapter The Nauigation or course from Monte Deâ—â—n to Portingal which is the chiefe hill in India and lyeth in the countrie of Malabar sixe miles Northwarde from Cananor and from Goa sixtie one miles Southward DEparting from the hill or Monte Delijn towards Portingall by the way without the Iland of Saint Laurence so set you Northeast southwest with the hill Monte Delijn taking your course East and East and by South and then you shall come by an Iland lying vnder 10. degrées and a halfe fiftie miles from Monte Delijn and then you must take your course Southwest and Southwest and by West and then you shal come 25. miles beyond this Iland vnder the hight of 9. degrées and frac34 taking care not to goe more southward towardes the Iland of Maldiua from whence halfe a mile it is déep and faire and as soone as you are past this Iland whether it be early or late in the yeare then runne southwest and southwest and by South vntill you haue past the line and if there you finde the wind West then runne South and South and by West if you can if not southward which is a good way and in this course you hold fréely without feare if in this course from 13. degrées vpwards you find diuers Birdes called Garagiaus flying in companies together feare not therefore to follow your course being late in the yeare then alwaies keepe on the South side thereby to auoide the drougthes called Oâ— Baixos de Lopo Soares and Garagiaus lying vnder 16. degrées holding this course you may boldly sayle both by day and night for you shall find no let as I my selfe haue well tryed The 16. degrées not being past you must also passe betweene the drougthes aforesaid and the Iland of Brandaon and comming to the hight there loose a nights sayle to bee the surer and make your account that when you find many Birdes called Garagiaus with other speckled Birdes among them flying in companies together then you are 40. miles beyond the Ilande from whence you shall saile southwest and southwest and by South for certaine meale tides and it being early in the yeare when you set sayle from India then auoide all those Ilands and drougthes and take your course to Sea wards towards the Cape Das Agulhas and if it chance that about the seuenth of Februarie you find your selfe 100. miles little more or lesse from the furthest point of the Iland of S. Laurence that is vnder his hight as I haue béene then runne West southwest vntill you bee vnder the hight of the Cape de Bona Speranza take héede to the streame that might deceiue you because there in Februarie they runne verie swift by reason of the East windes which as then blow verie swiftly so runne your course to the Cape de Bona Speranza till you be vnder 36. degrées and a halfe and when you are by the Cape Das Agulhas then looke when it is noone by the Astrolabe and if as then it is likewise noone by the sunne Diall or not wanting aboue the thicknesse of a thréede then it is a good signe as well outward as comming backe to Portingall for ther the néedles of the Compasse are right and a like and being vpon the one side or the other they will lie either Northeast ward or Northwest ward as you are past the Meridionall line and so much it differeth from equalitie with the Sunne Diall also when you come to the Cape Das Agulhas or further forward then looke vpon the water and if it be gréene then turne backe againe vnder 36. degrées and a halfe and cast foorth your Lead and you shall find 30. fadome deepe and being vnder 36. degrées 2 â— degrées you shall find 90. fadome and then you shall not sée many blacke Rauens with white billes nor Alcatrases but on both sides of the Cape Das Agulhas you shall sée many both on the coast and 20. miles to Sea ward but not further and you shall find the water so that you be not vpon the depthes aforesaid light and gréenish as also some of the Sas-been driuing in the water and as soone as you haue found grounds without séeing the land of Cape de Bona Speranza then runne still along by this ground till you loose it and then bee assured that you are past the Cape Das Agulhaas then holde your course West Northwest and so you shall find 12. miles from the Cape and when you begin to leaue it then you shall begin to sée thicke Reedes swimming vppon the water for the space of ten or fiftéene miles from thence In the course aforesaid and when you sée them it is a good tooken and you may be assured to haue past the Cape de Bona Speranza when you are by the Cape Das Agulhas then marke the Sunne Diall and the water of the ground and they will shew you when you are there for by this Cape the néedles of the Compasses are fix and euen and within or without that Cape they lie either Northeastward or Northwest ward as I said before the Nauigation from the Cape de Bona Speranza to Portingal is without danger to the Equinoctiall for that you alwaies find a Southeast wind and from the line to Portingall it is dayly sayled whereby it is commonly knowne to euerie simple Pilot yet such as are desirous to know it may sée it in this Booke where it is set downe as also in mine owne Viage from India to Portingall where it is particularly declared till you come to the towne of Lisbone The 10. Chapter Of the right tokens and knowledge of the Cape Das Correntes and the Ilands as Ilhas Premeiras and of all the Hauens and coasts of Mosambique THe bankes of Soffala begin at the Cape de S. Bastian and reach to the Ilands Primeras all along the coast and the coast lyeth North and South to Soffala and hath somwhat of North and West South and East herein are some ryuers but onely fit for small shippes the ryuer called Mataca or Monemone lyeth vnder 21. degrées and a
terra alta that is the last high land you keep the same course along the shore and is in length seauen miles and lieth full vnder ninetéene degrees and ⅔ I set downe this description of the last high land because such as sayle along by the coast may vnderstand that there all the hilles and high landes doe end and from thence forward it is altogether low land and sandie strandes till you come to the place called as Palmerias or Palme trées from the last high land or Derradeira terra alta to the riuer called Rio de Manicapatan the coast runneth northeast and southwest and reacheth 5. miles and to know when you are right against the Riuer of Manicapatan you shall sée a high trée standing alone vpon the sea side and is a very flat land on the sea side hauing a bankie and shallow ground the trée standeth on the left hand of the entrey into the riuer from Manicapatan you runne along the coast East Northeast and west southwest to the Pagode de Iorganate that is the Idoll or temple of Iorganate and reacheth thrée miles This Pagode of Iorganate lieth vnder 20. degrées and ¼ from this Pagode of Iorganate to another great blacke Pagode or Idoll the coast runneth east and west somewhat east and by north and west by south and reacheth 7. miles This blacke Pagode lieth not full vnder 20. degrees and ½ from this blacke Pagode to the riuer of Cayegare the coast runneth northeast and southwest and somwhat northeast and by east and south west and by west and reacheth 10 miles the riuer of Cayegare lieth not full vnder 21 degrees and about 4. miles before you come to it there lieth 5. houels which shew like a Hauen of the Sea built with Cottages in the mouth of the riuer aforesaid there lieth two sandes running a good mile southwestward and at the entrey therof lieth a Riffe running along by the coast for halfe a mile into the sea the entrie of the riuer is 4. fadome déep and you goe in and come forth northwest and southeast the sandes aforesaid as you enter lie on your left hand and there the depth runneth along To know Cayegare a farre off you must vnderstand that when you haue passed the houels aforesaid then Cayegare sheweth like an Iland hauing three or foure trées higher then the rest and a little beyond it standeth a small Pagode and somewhat beyond this Pagode there is a little wood verie thicke with trées which séemeth to bée part of Cayegare and other wood there is none beyond it by the saide Pagode there standeth some Sandie Downes of red colour with some water Beecken from the Riuer of Cayegare to the point called a punta das Palmeiras the Coast runneth northeast and southwest and somewhat northeast and by east and southwest by west and reacheth eleauen miles 2. miles before you come to the point of Palmerias you shall sée certaine blacke houels standing vppon a land that is higher then all the land there abouts and from thence to the point it beginneth againe to be low ground and right ouer against the houels you shall sée some small but not ouer white sandie Downes the markes and tokens which you shall finde being right against the point de Palmerias are that vpon the point there is neyther trée nor bush and although it hath the name of the point of Palmtrees it hath notwithstanding right forth but one Palme trée If you fall vppon it by day being by Caijagate and desire to follow your way then saile at the depth of twelue fadomes northeast northeast and by east alwaies with your lead ready in the hand with good care and diligence and being at 16. fadome you shall presentlie winde northeast vntill againe you finde 12. fadome alwaies keeping at that depth till you finde but 7. fadome and lie thereon by night where you shall anker till it be day and then hoise vp anker running the same course of Northeast and northeast and by north till you come to foure fadome and comming thether you shall send a man into the top to know the land This coast reacheth East northeast till you come to a houell which sheweth like a Champana without a mast with a boat following it those Champanas are Caruels of India wherewith they sayle in the sea and along the coast this is the best marke you finde vpon the coast of Orixa and alwaies take good héed to your depthes and if they begin to increase that is aboue fiue fadome then you shal presently turne againe to 3. and 3. fadome and ½ scarse and this is the right course for that if you saile still at 5. and 6. fadome you should in the end come on ground when you see the houell called Chāpana as I said before you shal runne along by it till you sée thrée trées standing together yet somewhat distant each from other which trées are called as Aruores da Conhecensa that is the trées of Markes Right against those trées lieth the riffe of Orixa and being to seaward you shall sée the water breake vppon it on Bengalen side and you cannot sée the markes aforesaid but in cleare weather and if it be mistie darke or cloudy weather then haue the lead readie without neglecting it for you must runne at 3. and ½ and 4. fadome déepe and you must vnderstand that on the side of Bengalen you finde hard sandie ground and on the side of Orixa muddie and small blacke sand I set this downe because I my selfe haue passed ouer it with great ships being past the riffe of Orixa and Bengalen you shall sée the Iland called a Ilha dos Gallos that is the Ilands of Cocks you must runne right vpon it without feare for it is deepe inough and on the other side of Orixa it is all banks therfore I counsell you to goe neere to the Iland of Cocks sayling along by it whereby you shall presently come to a riuer called Rio de Chamdequan which hauing past you shall from thence crosse ouer to the side of Orixa where you shall see a hooke or point of the riuer Angellijn this point of land will lie northward and comming thether you shal alwaies haue your lead in hand and the depth that you shall finde in those places are 3.3 ½ and 4. fadome but beeing full sea it is deeper which wil continue till you be right against the riuer of Angelijn for from thence forward you haue many depthes and being right against the riuer of Angelijn you shall runne along the shore till you come to a riuer called Gilingoa being right against that riuer I wish you not put too farre from the shore towards the right hand for there you finde a sand drougth whereon Bartholomeus Rodriges de Moraiis was cast away with a ship full laden as hee put out therefore I aduise you to keepe on the left hand for there it is deepe enough from this riuer
a great number of whale fishes and other fish by the Spaniards Atun whereof many are found in the coast of Gibraltar in Spaigne as also Albacoras and Bonitos which are all Fishes which commonly kéepe in Channels straights and running waters there to disperse their séed when they bréed which maketh me more assuredly beléeue that thereabouts is a Channell or Straight to passe through Being by the same course vpon y e coast of new Spaigne vnder seuen and thirty degrées and ½ wee passed by a very high and faire land with many Trées wholy without Snow and foure miles from the land you find thereabouts many drifts of roots leaues of Trées Réedes and other leaues like Figge leaues the like whereof wee found in great abundance in the countrey of Iapon which they eat and some of those that wée found I caused to be sodden with flesh and being sodden they eat like Colewortes there likewise wee found great store of Sea wolues which wee call Sea dogges whereby it is to bée presumed and certainly to bee beléeued that there are manye Riuers Bayes and Hauens along by those coasts to the Hauen of Acapulco From thence wee ranne South-east Southeast and by South and South-east and by East as we found the wind to the point called El Cabo de Saint Lucas which is the beginning of the land of Califfornia on the Northwest side lying vnder two and twenty degrées being fiue hundred myles distant from the Cape De mendosino In this way of the aforesaied fiue hundred myles along by the coast are manye Islands and although they bee but small yet without doubt there are in them some good Hauens as also in the Firme Land where you haue these Hauens following nowe lately found out as that of the Island of Saint Augustine lying vnder thirtye degrées and ¾ and the Island called Ilha de Sedros scarce vnder eight and twentie degrées and ¼ and the Island lying beneath the Saint Martyn vnder thrée and twentie degrées and ½ all this coast and Country as I thinke is inhabited and sheweth to bee a verye good Countrey for there by night wee sawe fire and by day smoake which is a most sure token that they are inhabited From the Point or hooke of Saint Lucas to the South-east side of Calliffornia wee helde our course East Southeast for the space of eightye myles to the point called El cabo de las corrientes that is the point of the streames lying vnder ninteene degrées â…” and running this course Northward about a mile from vs we sawe thrée Islands called las tres Marias that is the thrée Maries running the same course About foure miles from the other Islandes there are other Islands reaching about 2. or thrée miles All this way from the mouth or Créeke of California aforesaid for the space of the said 80. miles there are great streames that runne Westward From the point or Cape de las Corrientes wée ranne Southeast and sometimes Southeast and by East for the space of an hundred and thirtie miles to the hauen of Acapulco In this way of an hundred and thirty miles being 20. miles on the way we had the Hauen of the Naâ—iuidade that is the birth of the Virgine Mary and other eight miles further the Hauen of Saint Iago or Saint Iames and sixe miles further the sea Strand called la Playa de Culyma that is the Strand of Culyma All this coast from California to the Hauen of Acapulco is inhabited by people that haue peace and traffique with the Spaniards and are of condition and qualities like the people of the other places of new Spaine The Conclusion of the Author of this last Voyage ALl this Description and Nauigation haue I my selfe séene prooued and well noted in my Voiage made and ended in the yéere of our Lord 1584. from great China out of the Hauen and riuer of Canton as I will more at large set it downe vnto your honour with the Paralell and Meridian thereof as God shall permit me time and leysour whome I beséech to send you long and happy daies and the same haue I truly translated out of Spanish into low Dutch verbatim out of the Originall coppie that was sent vnto the Viceroy of the Portingall Indies The 55. Chapter The Description of a Voyage made by a Pilot called Nuno da Silua for the Viceroy of new Spaine the 20. of May in the yeere of our Lorde 1579. to the towne of Mexico from whence it was sent to the Viceroy of the Portingall Indies wherein is set downe the course and actions passed in the Voyage of Sir Francis Drake that tooke the aforesaid Nuno da Silua by the Islands of Cabo Verde and carried him along with him thorough the Straightes of Magellanes to the Hauen of Guatulco in newe Spaine where he let him goe againe NVno da Silua borne in Porto a Citizen and inhabitant of Guaia saith that hée departed out of his house in the beginning of Nouember in the yéere of our Lorde 1577. taking his course to Cabo Verde or the gréene point where hée ankered with his shippe close by the Hauen of the Island of Saint Iames one of the Islands of Cabo Verde aforesaid béeing the nintéenth of Ianuarie in the yéere of our Lorde 1578. and lying there there came sixe shippes which seemed to be English men whereof the Admirall boorded his shippe and by force with his men hée tooke him out of his shippe bringing him in the boat aboord the Admirals shippe leauing some of his best men aboord his shippe and although the fortresse of the Island shot foure or fiue times at them yet they hurt not the English men who hauing done seâ— saile from thence to the Island of Braua that is the wild Island taking with them the shippe of the saide Nuno da Silua béeing there they filled certaine vessels with fresh water from thence holding their course inwarde to Sea hauing first with a boat set the men of Nuno da Siluas shippe on lande onley kéeping Nuno da Silua in his shippe as also his shippe with the wines that were therein and Nuno da Silua saith the cause why they kept him on boorde was because they knewe him to be a Pilot for the coast of Brasilia that hée might bring them to such places in those countries as had fresh water Béeing put off from the Island of Braua they helde their course to the lande of Brasilia which they descried vpon the first of Aprill vnder the height of 30. degrées and without landing or taking in fresh water they held on their course to the riuer Rio de la Plata that is the riuer of Siluer lying vnder fiue and thirtie degrées little more or lesse where they went on lande and prouided themselues of fresh water From thence they helde on their course till they came vnder nine and thirtie degrées where they ankered and béeing there they left two of their sixe shippes
hee shot her mast ouer boord and hauing wounded the maister with an arrowe the shippe presently yéelded which they tooke and sayled with her further into the Sea all that night and the next day and night making all the way they could The third day being out of sight of lande they began to search the shippes and to lade the goods out of her into their Shippe which was a thousand thrée hundred Bharres or peeces of siluer and foureteene chests with Ryals of eight and with golde but what quantity it was I knowe not onely that the passengers said that there was great store and that thrée hundred Bharres of the siluer belonged to the King the rest belonging to certaine Marchaunts that done they let the Shippe with the men sayle on their course putting the thrée Pilotes in her that they brought with them so that as then they had none but their owne men aboord being the sixt of March and from thence they helde their course towards the Lande of Nicaraga The thirtéenth of March either the day before or after in the morning they descried Land not being very high beeing a small Island two miles from the Firme land and there they found a small Baye wherein they ankered at fiue fadome déep close by the Lande and there they stayed till the second day Vpon the which day there passed a Frigate close by the Island which with their Pinnace they followed and taking her brought her to the English Shippe which Frigate was laden with Salsaperilla or Pocke-root and Bottigas or Pots with Butter and Honny and with other things The English Captaine went on boord and cast the Salsaperilla on the Lande leauing all the rest of the wares in the Frigate and then hee put all his Péeces into the Frigate that so he might lay his shippe on shore to new calke and trim her which continued till the thrée and twenty or foure and twenty of March which done and hauing made prouision of wood fresh water they helde on their course along by the coast sayling Westward taking the said Frigate and her menne with them and hauing sayled two daies they tooke their men out of her and set them in the Pinnace among the which were two Saylers that meant to sayle to Panama and from thence to China whereof one they tooke with the Letters and Sea-cardes that hee had about him among the which were the Letters of the King of Spaine sent to the Gouernour of China as also the Sea-cardes wherewith they should make their voyage and direct themselues in their course And so sailing on till the sixt of Aprill about euening they discouered a ship that held two miles to seaward from the land and before the next day in the morning they were hard by her and sodainely fell vpon her while her men slept presentlie made the mē enter into their ship among the which was one Don Francisco Caratte which done they followed on their course with the said ship out of the which they tooke certaine packes and other wares but I know not what it was They likewise tooke a Moore out of it and thrée dayes after they both let the Shippe and menne goe whether they would setting therein the two Saylers that should goe for China which they had taken in the Frigate kéeping onely one saylor to shew them where they should find fresh water to the which end they tooke the empty vessels with them to fill with water and so kept on their course to the hauen of Guatulco where they put in being vpon munday the thirtéenth of Aprill and hauing ankered they stayed there till the sixe and twenty of Aprill and being about thrée or foure houres in the night they set saile holding their course Westward and an houre or two before they let Nuno da Silua goe putting him into another shippe that lay in the Hauen of Guatulco From thence forward the Englishmen passed on their voyage to the Islands of Malucos and from thence they passed by the Cape De Bona Esperanza and so to England as it is well knowne so that this is only the description of the voyage that they made while the said Pilote Nuna da Silua was with them Hereafter followeth the Coppy of a Letter written by Sir Francis Drake beeing in the South Sea of newe Spaigne in his shippe called the golden Hart with the shippe of S. Iohn de Anton which hee had taken to his companions in the other shippes that were of his company and by foule weather seperated from him as I saied before The Contents whereof were these Maister Wouter if it pleaseth Godthat you should chance to méete with this shippe of S. Iohn de Anton I pray you vse him well according to my word and promise giuen vnto them and if you want any thing that is in this Shippe of S. Iohn de Anton I pray you pay them double the value for it which I wil satisfie again and command your men not to doe her any hurt and what composition or agréement wée haue made at my returne into England I will by Gods helpe performe although I am in doubt that this Letter will neuer come to your hands notwithstanding I am the man I haue promised to bee Beséeching God the Sauiour of all the world to haue vs in his kéeping to whome onely I giue all honour praise and glory This I haue written is not onely to you Maister Wouter but also to Maister Thomas Maister Charles Maister Caube and Maister Anthonie with all our other good friendes whome I commit to the tuition of him that with his bloud redéemed vs and am in good hope that wee shall bee in no more trouble but that hee will helpe vs in aduersitie desiring you for the Passion of Christ that if you fall into any danger that you will not despaire of Gods mercy for hee will defend you and preserue you from all daunger and bring vs to our desired Hauen to whom bee all honor glory and praise for euer and euer Amen Your sorrowfull captain whose heart is heauy for you Francis Drake An aduertisement to the Reader ALthough at the first it was my only intent to set downe the voyages and courses of the oriental coasts Islands and countries of the East parts with some other Nauigations of the places therabouts with the situations thereof as I haue already declared notwithstanding for that among other my Record I haue found the Nauigations of all the Hauens Riuers and Points of the coast of Brasilia and the voiages of the Portingales vnto the same together with the courses stretchings and situations of the Antillas or fore Islands of new Spaigne together with all the channels that runne betweene them and the Hauens as well of the aforesaid Islands as of the Firme Land of new Spaigne and likewise of the other side of the coast of Angola or Aethiopia I thought it not vnconuenient to set them downe in this place although it bee
in the middle it hath thrée houels whereof that in y e middle is the greatest From this Island De Pinos to Cabo de Corrientes you must runne West Northwest by the which course you shall sée it This point on the sea side is a Lande running downeward vpon it hauing some palme Trées and on the West side a sandy strand where there is a Roade where you may lye Vpon this Point of Cabo de Correntes standeth a picked Hill which stretcheth further out theÌ„ all other points when from thence you put in you shall sée on the Lande righter ouer you a Lake of fresh water where if néede bee you may supply your want To saile from thence to the Point of S. Anton. Beeing two or thrée miles to Sea-ward you must runne West Northwest From the Island De Pinos to Cabo de S. Anton there are two great créekes one lying from the Island De pinos to the cape De Corrientes and the other from the Cape De Corrientes to Cape de S. Anton and before you come to the Point of Cape de Corrientes there is a point called La Punta de Guaniguanico behind the Land inward you shall sée certaine Hils called Las Sierras Guaniguanico Cape de S. Anton is a long Point full of trées with some bushes with sandye strandes and from it there runneth a bank or sand for the space of 4. miles northwestward Sayling from the Point of S. Anton to new Spaigne in winter time y t is from August to March then you must hold your course without y e Islands and Cliffes called Las Alactanes west northwestward with y t which course hauing sailed 60. or 70. miles you shall find ground which shal be of shels or great saÌ„d This you shal find til you be vnder 24. degrées if you find ground at lesse then 40. fadome sailing with the same course then hold your course north northwest northwest by west when therewith you begin to increase in depth then turn againe to your first course of northwest and wheÌ„ you begin to lose land then for the space of 20. miles you must saile West wherwith you shall be north south with the Island Bermeia FroÌ„ thence you must saile southwest till you be vnder 20. degrées if you sée not land you shall run west for at that time it is not good to goe beneath y e heigth Vnder this height course you shal sée La torre Blanca y t is the white tower if you chance to discouer y e Riuer of S. Petro S. Paulo then beyond y e riuer you shal sée certaine gréene hils but not very high If you finde 35. fadome déepe with muddie ground with shelles in some places then from thence you shall hold your course South and South and by East vntill you bée right against the fieldes of Almeria if you come out of the Sea you shall séeke ground lower and finding 30. or 40. fadome with some muddy ground then you are East and West with the riuer of Almeria about seuen miles from the land and if in the Southwest you sée the hilles called las Sierras del Papalo and that they run one within the other then you are Northeast and Southwest from them From thence you shall bolde your course South and South and by West whereby the hilles of Papalo will begin to shew themselues which wil make two round hilles you shall likewise see Las Sierras de Calaquote which are certaine reddish hilles This rowe of Hilles commeth out to the sea side If you desire to take the ground by the point of Villa Risa that is the rich towne thrée miles from the land you shall finde 80. and 90. fadome deepe muddy ground The riuer of S. Peter and S. Paul lyeth vnder 21. degrées and los Campos d'Almeria that is the fields of Almeria vnder 20. degrées Villa Risa la Vieya that is olde Villa Risa lyeth vnder 19. degrees and 2 â— Villa Risa la Vieya is certaine hils whereof the one end reach vnto the Sea side they are not very high but make many openings or rents like the hilles of Abano called Organs stretching North and South if you chaunce to come out of the Sea and should see the Hilles of Villa Risa then you shoulde see that they stretch North and South and the hils of S. Martyn stretch East and West you may know them another way which is that if you make Westward towards them comming close to them they will shew to be lower then the Hils of S. Martyn which are greater and higher as you passe along the Sea coast by them and béeing thrée myles to Sea-ward from Villa Risa you shall find ground which by S. Martins you shall not find although you were but halfe a myle from them Lastly although you should haue no knowledge of Lande yet you might knowe it by the markes aforesaid To Léeward from Villa Risa lieth a Cliffe called N. Bernards which is in forme like a suger loafe From Villa Risa la Vieya or out of Villa Risa to S. Iohn de Luz you shall hold your course South and South and by East and you shal find ground of shels muddy ground at thirty fadome towards the Land By the Riuer of Vera Crus you shall find sandye ground and in some places muddye ground If you were without then you must knowe that from S. Christopher to S. Iohn de Luz it is all sandye strandes and being East and west with the point called Punta Gordâ— then you are North and South with the Island of S. Iohn de Luz and being North-east and South-west with the Island at lesse then forty fadome déepe towards the Land then you shall haue reddish ground and in some places shels and from forty fadomes forward white muddy ground If you come out of the sea and desire to know if you bee East and West with the Island then you must marke a high houell that runneth out from the hils of Vera Crus And when you are East and west with this Houell so are you likewise East and West with the Island you must likewise vnderstande that when the Hill of Sierra Neuada y t is the snowy hill lieth West west and by south from you then are you likewise east and west with the Island aforesaid then you shall presently sée the point called AntoÌ„ Niquardo as also Mendano Montuoso or the high Houell aforesaid and you shal likewise sée the sea-coast Medelâ—n and on the North-west side the Point of Punta Gorda if you desire with a North wind to be in the hauen then run at 18 20 fadome déepe whereby you shal passe to loofeward through the chanell going close to the bulwark yet shunning it you shall anker on the loofe side for to Léeward it hath no great depth If you depart from the Point of S. Anton in summer time towards new Spain then you must hold your course westward for
Ponta or the point of S. Lucia vnder 28. Terra dos fumos or the laÌ„d of smok v. 27. ½ Rio d' Alagoa or riuer of the lake and the Iland of Ioan de Lisboa vttermost south point of the Iland of S. Laurence vnd 26. Agoa de Boa Pas or y e riuer of peace vnd 25 Cabo das correntes or point of the streame vnder 24. ½ Rio or riuer of Mataca or monument the Iland A Ilha do Mascharenhas vn 21. ½ Os Baixos da Iudia or y e Iewes sands vn 22 Cabo or the point of S. Sebastian vnd 21. Rio or the Riuer of Quiloan or Quiloane vnder 20. ½ Soffala and the Iland of Diego Rodrigues vnder 20. Porto or the hauen of Bango vnder 19. ½ Rio or the riuer of Cuama vnder 18. ¼ Os Baixas dos Garaâ—aus or sands of Sea-mewes vnder 18. Rio dos bons sinais or of good tokens v. 17 ¼ A Ilha or Iland of Brandao vnder 17. The Iland A Ilha Primeira or the first Iland vnder 17. ½ A Ilha or Iland of Iohn de Noua vnd 16. ½ Rio or riuer of Angoxa vnder 16. Mosambique vnder 15. Rio de S. Antonio vnder 14. Rio dereito or the straight line vnder 12. Ilha do Comoro vnder 11. Cabo del Gado or thinne point vnder 10. The towne of Quiloa vnder 9. A Ilha de Monfia vnder 7. Ilha de Sansibar vnder 6. Ilha de Pemba vnder 5. A Ilha dos tres Irmaos or Iland of three brethren vnder 4. A Ilha do Almirante or the Iland of the Admirall vnder 3. ½ Mombassa or riuer of Tacharigo vnder 3. The howne and hauen of Melinde vnder 2. The towne and hauen of Pate vnder 1. The Equinoctial lyne The heigth and degrees of the Hauens points and riuers of the Equinoctiall lyne to the straights of Mecca otherwise called the red sea on the North side of the Equinoctiall The degrees on the north side Barra Boa or the good hauen vnder 1. The town and hauen of Braba vnder 2 The town haueÌ„ of Magadoxa vnder 2. ½ Zarzella vnder 6. Cabo or poynt of Guardafu and the Iland a Ilha de Sacotora vnder 12. From the point of Guardafu inwardes to the red sea on the south coast MIte or Barbora vnder 11. Zeila vnder 12. Ilha Dalaca vnder 15. Ilha Soaquen vnder 18. From the North side of the red sea or the straight of Mecca TOor vnder 27. Gida and the hauen of Mecca where Mahomet lieth buried whereof the straight taketh the name vnder 20. A Ilha de Zeyban vnder 15. A Ilha Camaram vnder 15. Adem a fortresse of the Portingales which in times past they held but not at this time vnder 13. The coast of Arabia to the straightes or Sinus Persicus and the Iland of Ormus FArtaque lieth vnder 15. degrees Diufar vnder 16. The Iland of Curia Muria vnder 17. The Iland a Ilha de Maeira vnder 22. Cabo de Rosalgate vnder 22. Curiata and Masquata vnder 23. Hoor vnder 24. Cabo Mocandao vnder 27. The Iland and towne of Ormus vnder 27. From Ormus or Persia along the coast to to the cape de Comoriin CAbo de Iasque vnder 25 ½ Rio do Sinde or Indo vnder 24. The towne and Iland of Diu vnder 21. Goga and the Towne within the Créeke of Cambaia vnder 33. The towne and hauen of Chaul vnder 19. The towne and hauen of Dabul vnder 18. The Iland and towne of Goa the Ilandes of os Ilhas Queimados vnder 16. The fortresse of Honor and the Ilandes of Angediua vnder 14. Baricala and the sandes of Baixios de Pandua vnder 13. The fortresse of Mangalor and Monte de Ly vnder 12. Cananor and Calecut vnder 11. Cranganor and Çochiin vnder 10. The fortresse of Cay Coulao vnder 9. Cauo de Comoriin being the vttermost point of the coast called India vnder 7. From the Iland Seylon on the East and south side about to the West TRincanamalle vnder 9 O. Capello de Frade or the Monkes coule vnder 8. Rio de Matacalou vnder 7 â— 3. Ponta de Gualle vnder 6. Cloumbo a fortresse of the Portingales vnder 7. From the Cape de Gomerin along the coast of Coramandel Orixa Bengala Pegu Malacca to the point of Singapura CAbo Negapatan vnder 11. degrées Pouoacao de Saint Thomas or towne of Saint Thomas vnder 13. 1 â— The towne and hauen of Muselepatao vnder 16. 1 â— The point of Guadouariin vnder 17. O Pagode de Iorganate or Idoll of Iurganate vnder 20. ¼ Rio de Puacota vnder 19. Rio Palura or Calauor vnder 19. â…“ A Derradiera terra alta or the last high land vnder 19. â…” Rio Cayegare vnder 21. Rio de Ganges otherwise Porto Pequeno or the small hauen vnder 22 The hauen and towne of Aracan vnder 20. The hauen and towne of Martaban vnder 16. ¼ The vttermost end on the north side of the Iland Andeman vnder 16. The vttermost end on the south side of the same Iland vnder 11. The hauen and Towne of Tanasseriin vnder 11 The hauen and towne of Gonsalan vnder 8. ½ The Iland Pulo Cuto vnder 6 â…” The towne and hauen of Queda vnder 6 ½ The Iland of Gomespola and the Iland Pulo Batum vnder 6. The Iland Pulo Pera vnder 5 â…” The Pulo Pinon vnder 5 2 4. The hauen and towne of Pera vnder 4. ½ Pulo Sambillao vnder 4. Pulo Parcelar the Iland as Ilhas d'Aru vnder 3. Cabo Rachado or clouen point vnder 2. ½ The towne and fortresse of Malacca vnder 2. ½ Cabo de Singapura vnder 1. From the Iland of Samatra on the North side of the Equinoctiall line THe hauen of Achein vnder 4. ½ The hauen of â—eder vnder 4. The point of Taniamburo vnder 5. The place on the south side of the Equinoctiall in the same Iland els where Terra d'Arruen or land of Arruen vnder 2. Ilha d'Ouro de Manancabo or the gold land of Manancabo 3 The hauen of Campar vnder 4. The straight betwéene the Iland Sumatra and Iana Maior vnder 5. ½ A Ilha Iaua Maior in y e midle way vnd 6 A Ilha do Iogo or Fire Iland vnder 7. A Ilha Solitaria or the solitarie Iland vnder 7 A Ilha Banda vnder 5 The Ilandes of Cloues of Maluco are vnder the Equinoctiall lyne From Cabo de Singapura following the coast to Sion Camboia Champa and China to the riuer of Liampo Nanquyn with some Ilandes all vppon the North side of the Equinoctial line THe Iland Pulo Timao vnder 2. ½ The hauen and towne of Pan. vnder 3. 1 â— The hauen and towne of Patana vnder 7. â…” The Hauen and towne of Sion vnder 14 ½ The point of Cuy vnder 12. â…” Enseada de Lion or Creeke of Lyon vnder 12 ½ The hauen of Varella vnder 13 The Iland Pulo Condor vnder 8 â…” The towne and Hauen of Camboia vnder 10. The Iland Pulo Seciâ— from the land vnder 10. â…“ The Iland Pulo Caton vnder 15. â…” The Iland Pulo Champello
30. myles eastward from it then the compasse is scarce halfe a strike Northeastward From thence 17. or 18. degrées further you shall find the Compasse euen and alike by North and South with the Ilande of S. Marie From thence forward if you haue a large wind so that you see the Ilande of Flores northwestward from you theÌ„ the Compasse will yéelde ½ strike And when you are 70. or 80. miles beyond the Iland of Flores theÌ„ the Compasse is euen In the Island of Fayael and from thence to the Island of Tercera one of the Flemmish Ilands the Compasse will yéeld â…“ part of a strike Northeastward and from Tercera to Lisbone from â…” to ¾ parts of a strike Now to know the wreaking winding or declining of the Compasse you must vnderstand that when you are vnder the MeridiaÌ„ that is vnder the line or strike which is placed in the compasse of the firmameÌ„t from the one Pole to the other y t is right in y e middle crosse wise ouer the Equinoctial line then euery Compasse that is true and good will be euen without declining either East or west and being vpon the one or the other side therof then the néedle of the Compasse declineth on the one or the other side that is when you are on the East side then the néedle windeth Westward which we call Northwestward when you are on the West side of the Meridian then the Compasse declineth Eastwarde which wee name Northeastwarde which shal suffice to let you knowe what it meaneth how to gouerne your self therein Certain questions answeres very profitable necessarie to be knowne by all Saylers IF a man should aske you how many degrées are in the Compasse of the whole world you may answer there are 360. degrees each degrée being 15. Dutch miles and 17. Spanish miles and a halfe Question What are the Poles of the world Answer Two points that are imagined or thought y t the world is born or hangeth vpon Q. What is the Equinoctiall line A. A strike or line placed from East to west about the compasse or roundnes of the worlde which is the seperation or middle between both the Poles and when the Sunne is vpon it which is the 21. of March and the 23. of September stilo nouo then the day night are of a length and therefore it is called the Equinoctiall line Q. What is the Meridian A. A strike or line placed in the Compasse of the world from the one Pole to the other and when the shadow is in the middle of this line then it is your Meridian Q. What is the Parallel A. All things or places that lie right east and West from you are Parallel Q. What is Tropicus A. A strike or line imagined or placed in the compasse of the firmament which is the fixed place how neare the Sun goeth to the line turneth back againe which is the 21. of Iune stilo nouo it coÌ„meth vpoÌ„ the north side of the Equinoctiall to 23. degrées and ½ which place is called Tropicus Cancâ—i and the 21. of Decemb. it commeth on the south side of the Equinoctiall to the like height of degrees which place is called Tropicus Capricorni Q. How farre is it betwéene the Equinoctiall line and any of the two Poles A. 90. degrées which is the fourth part of the compas of y e whole world or firmameÌ„t Q. What is the Horizon A. It is the compasse you can see round about you as farre as till that you think the earth and sky meeteth together which is 90. degrees from you and that is the Horizon Q. What is the Zenith A. All that part of the sky that standeth right ouer your head is the Zenith Q. What is the longitude the latitude A. Longitude is the length and Latitude the breadth of the way you make Q. If you be vnder the Pole Articus or the North star whether as then your Compasse can shew you guide you right in the course you are to hold A. No for being in that countrey the néedle of the Compasse where it is lined will be drawne vpwards towards the glasse wherby it cannot worke or shew his nature but being somewhat from it in such manner that the Pole hath no more place or power ouer it to draw it vpwardes then the Compasse will presently worke and shewe her effect whereby you hold on your course Q. If vpon the 2â— of Iune stilo nouo you be by the hauen of Hauana in the coast of Florida new Spaine how much height shall you find in the Astrolabe in taking of the Sunne A. That vpon that day you shall haue the Sunne for your Zenith that is right ouer your head and then you shal find no shadow on eyther side then you must looke vppon the declination of the day and all that you finde from the declination so much you are distant from the Equinoctiall line towardes the sun and that is your height Q. If you be in the same place vpon the 23. of December stilo nouo what heght of the Sunne shal you then haue in the Astrolabe A. At that day the Sun is distant from the Equinoctiall line 23. degrées and ½ whervnto adding other 23. degrées and ½ they make 47. degrées and then there wanteth 43. deg to make vp 90. degr these 43. degrées shall you take in the Astrolabe for the height of the Sunne Q. What is a degrée A. Of 360. degrees or parts wherewith the world is deuided measured a degrée is one parte so that one degrée is 360. parts of the world Q. If two men were distà nt North and South from each other in equall proportion whether as then should they haue equall declination of the sunne A. I but they must be one vppon the North side the other vpon the South side of the Equinoctial line which is to be vnderstood vpon the 22. of March and the 23. of September stilo nouo when the Sunne is in the same line Q. If you were vnder the height of 10. degrees hauing 5. degrées of declination the Sunne and shadowe being gone how much shall you take in the Astrolabe A. 75. degrees and fiue for of declination are 80. degrées then there wanteth 10. degrées to make the 90. degr that is the Equinoctial line betwéene you and the Sun Q. If you haue the Sunne and shadow vpon one side being vnder 20. degrées and haue 10. degr for declination what shal you then take by the Astrolabe A. 80. then there wanteth 10 to make vp 90. and 10. for declination are 20. which is the height that you are vnder Q. If you chance to take the height of the sunne for 4.5 daies or more together at 90. degrées how many miles shall you haue sailed all that time A. All that the sunne hath gon forward so that all the degrées minutes that you find your selfe vpon the same dayes to bee distant from
that is a fist on y e face yearely 1 Q 262 V 000 The townes of Cubas and Grennon which belong to Don Aluaro de Mendoça who receyueth the Alcauala payeth one-onely in Tertias 117 V 000 The towne of Galapagar belonging to the Duke of Infantadgo payeth yearely 16â— V 000 The towne of Ilescas and her iurisdiction payeth yearely 2 Q 297 V 000 The towne of Toledo and her iurisdiction payeth yearely â—3 Q 000 V 000 The rent of the hilles which is paid for pasturing of cattell which goeth to the country of 〈◊〉 emadura to be fed amouÌ„teth yearly to the king 19 Q 503 V 000 The villages of the Pryorie of S. Iohn pay yearelie 7 Q â—55 V 000 The towne of Almagro and her prouince which is called de Campo de Cala traua and is of the maistershippe of Calatraua payeth yearely 7 Q 120 V 000 The Alcauala of the Herbage and Pasturage in the said maistershippe is yearely to the king 3 Q 4â—8 V 000 The towne Cuidad Real payeth yearelie 4 Q 150 V 000 The villages lying in the countrey called the Archdeaconship of Talauera de la Reyna pay yearely 14 Q 326 V 000 The town of Placentia her iurisdiction y e villages y t are accounted of the Archdeaconshippe pay yearely 18 Q 475 V 000 The towne of Truxillo and her iurisdiction payeth yearely 12 Q 224 V 000 The towne of Caceres and her iurisdiction payeth yearelie 7 Q 850 V 000 The towne of Badaios and her prouince and iurisdiction pay yearlie 9 Q 972 V 000 The towne of Alcantara her iurisdiction prouince and is of the maistership of Alcantara paieth yearelie 9 Q 403 V 000 The Herbage of the same countrie whereon beastes doe pasture are yearely to the King 3 Q 481 V 000 The prouince of Serna of the maistership of Alcantara paieth yearly â— Q 570 V 000 The towne of Merida and her iurisdiction which is in the prouince of Leon being of the maistership of S. Iacob paieth yearelie 21 Q 234. V 000 The town of Fuente el Maestro her iurisdiction being in y e prouince of Leon and of the maistershippe of S. Iacob payeth yearely 6 Q 973 V 000 The towne of Guadalcana and her iurisdiction of the maistershippe of S. Iacob paieth yearelie 3 Q 305 V 000 The towne of Xeres de Badaios of the maistership of S. Iacob payeth yearelie 7 Q 100 V 000 The town of Siuillia her iurisdiction partition paieth yearely 182 Q 38â— V 000 The rentes of the Lordshippe of the same towne payeth yearely 2 Q 000 V 000 The townes of Palma and Guelues belonging to the Earles of Palma and Guelues pay yearely 235 V 000 The townes of Teuar and Ardales belonging to the Marquesse of Ardales pay yearelie 235 V 000 The towne of Ilerena and her iurisdiction which is in the Prouince of Leon and of the maistershippe of Saint Iacob paieth yearely 3 Q 125 V 000 The Towne of Cadiz payeth yearely 8 Q 452 V 000 The rent of Cadiz called the Almadrauas which is the fishing called Atun are worth yearely 3 Q 035 V 000 The towne of Gibraltar payeth onely the thirde pennie for they are free of Alcaualen by the Kinges licence payeth yearely 1 Q 500 V 000 The towne of Xeres de la Frontera and her iurisdiction yearely 21 Q 050 V 000 The towne of Catmona and her iurisdiction yearely 9 Q 450 V 000 The townes of Lora and Sete Filla paye yearely 680 V 000 The towne of Egija with the suburbes payeth 15 Q 500 V 000 The towne of Cordona and her iurisdiction payeth yearelie 48 V 995 V 000 The countrey called Rea lengos of Cordoua pay yearelie 17 Q 316 V 000 The towne of Anduxar and iurisdiction pay yearely 4 Q 800 V 000 The towne of Wieda and iurisdiction payeth yearelie 11 Q 640 V 000 The towne of Baesa and iurisdiction payeth yearlie 17 Q 316 V 000 The towne of Quexada payeth yearlie 1 Q 415 V 000 The gentilitie of Carcola payeth yearlie 6 Q 885 V 000 The Erledome of S. Esteuen payeth yearly 1 Q 340 V 000 The towne of Martos and her iurisdiction being of the maistershippe of Calatraua parte of Andolosia payeth yearely 11 Q 436 V 000 The towne of Iaen and her iurisdiction payeth yearely 15 Q 909 V 000 The towne of Granada and her iurisdiction paieth yearely 42 Q 910 V 000 The silke of the kingdome of Granada was wont to be worth before y e Moores were driuen out of the countrey 42 Quentos it is now but 22 Q 000 V 000 The rent which is called Aguella Auilles of Granada paieth yearly â— Q â—50 V 000 The townes of Loxa and Alhama in the kingdome of Granada paie yearelie 3 Q 650 V 000 The town of Baca in Granado her iurisdiction paieth yearlie 10 Q 626 V 000 The towne of Guadix in Granado and her iurisdiction payeth yearlie 6 Q 395 V 000 The towne of Almena in Granado and her iurisdiction paieth yearly 3 Q 080 V 000 The townes of Almunecar Mutril and Salabrena in Granado pay yearelie 2 Q 643 V 000 The towne of Malaga in Granado pay yearely 16 Q 269 V 000 The towne of Veles Malaga in Granada pay yearelie 5 Q 519 V 000 The towne of Pulchena payeth yearlie 410 V 000 The towne of Ronda and her iurisdiction pay yearly 5 Q 334 V 000 The Ilande of Carnaria payeth yearely 4 Q 850 V 000 The Island of Teneriffe payeth yearely 3 Q â—00 V 000 The Island of La Palma payeth yearely 2 Q 400 V 000 The dayly contribution that the kingdomes or countries of Spaine doe pay yearly vnto the King are worth 104. Quentos 305 V 000 Marauedies which contribution is gathered throughout all his Prouinces landes and townes of Spaine among the common sort of people or subiects that are euery man taxed to pay according to their habilities and giue yearely a certayne summe as their goodes doe amount vnto in value which doth rise vnto as I saide before yearely 104 Q 305 V 000 The custome of the tenth pennie for drie hauens which are passages within the lande of the kingdomes of Valencia Artagon and Nauarre which men pay vpon all goods that are carried out of Spaine into the saide countries and for such as are brought into the same countries out of Spaine paide one with the other the tenth pennie which tolle amounteth to in the yeare the summe of 49 Q 035 V 000 The drie hauens or passages within the land comming in or going out which border on the kingdome of Portingale and lie in part of Spaine called Caâ—hlia pay yearelie for the tenth
pennie of all such goods passing to and fro 34 Q 155 V 000. The wolles that are yearely carried out of Spaine into other countries pay for euery sacke waighing about ten Aroben each Arobe bein 25. pound two duckats for such as are naturall all borne subiects of the land but a stranger payeth 4. duckets which amount vnto the yeare with the other 53 Q 586. V 000 The chiefe Almoxariffchay of Câ—la is larmed of the king for 10â— Q. 00 V 000. Marauedies yearely and is for the tenth pennie of all wares Marchandises of the Neatherlandes France England Portingale Italie c comming into Spaine and there to be discharged which one yeare with the other amount vnto 154 Q 309 V 000. The Almoxarifâ—hap of the Spanish Indies by the towne of Ciuillia hath farmed of the King which ariseth of all the wares that are laden in Ciuillia and sent into the Indies and are rated to pay the twentieth pennie arriuing in India the same wares doe pay yet a twentieth penny more and it is farmed out of the twentieth pennie due in Ciuillia yerely for the summe of 67 Q 000 V 000. The rent which the King receaueth by the mint in Spaine which is of euery marke of Siluer that is coyned in the said Mint each marke accounted sixe duckets in siluer one Riall of plate This rent is called El SeÌ„no reaxo de la moneda and the mint of Ciuill only riseth to as much as all the others this is yearely to the king 22 Q 000 V 000 The King hath farmed out the Master ships of Saint Iacob Calatraua Alcantara to the suckers of Ausburge and is the customes of corne wine oyle other things that are rated at a tenth pennie which in times past the said Masters vsed to haue In these customes are not comprehended nether Tercias nor Alcaualas but are receaued apart as I said before These Masterships are the cheiefe knights of the Crosse belonging to those thrée orders which vsed to haue chiefe rulers ouer them which were called Masters like the knights of Rhodes Malta or as in Cloysters and religious houses which were sworne to be true and obedient subiects and to obserue certaine orders prescribed as it is yet at this day which Masterships were in times past beeing offices of great estimation and account onely giuen vnto the blood Royall or els to some of the Kinges own children hauing certaine lands apointed to them and absolute commandement ouer them but of late yeares the kings of Spaine haue taken the same offices into their hands seruing or at the least presenting their places as Masters and commaunders ouer all knights of the Crosse of what order soeuer the farme whereof amounteth yearely vnto the sum of 98 Q 000 V 000. The king hath likewise rented out the pasturage of the lands of the said mastershippes yerely for the sum of 37 Q 000 V 000. He hath likewise found out the Quicksiluer of Almalen in the hil of Sierra Morena in the fieldes of Calatraua for yerely rent of 73 Q 000 V 000. The Bulles of the Popes of Rome which are called the Santa Crusada yeeld yearely to the king 200 Q 000 V 000. Which being reduced into English monie amounteth vnto the summe of one hundreth fortie seauen thousand fiftie and eight poundes and fiftéene shillings The rent called Subsedie which is thus all Priestes and spirituall persons that haue any benefices or spiritual rents of Churches Cloysters Chappels and such like must euerie man pay a certaine summe for a confirmation of his place or an enterance into his Stipendio Sallarus benefices and qualities which is like our first fruites This is giuen to maintaine warres against Infidels Heretickes for the which most Churches Cloysters haue agréed for a certaine summe yearely which cleare of al charges they must pay vnto the king this Subsedie is worth yearely 65 Q 000 V 000. Also all Bishops Churches of Spaine giue yearely vnto the king a certaine summe of monie towards his warres against Heritickes and Infidels which amounteth yearely 110 Q 000 V 000. These rentes are called El Excusado whereunto the Pope hath consented by his letters or Pattent Apostolica Romana so that the king may chuse a receauer out of euerie Chappell and Church to receaue the tenthes oâ— the spiritualty as of Corne Barley Wine Oyle c. and of all other thinges that are gathered of the ground and doe amount vnto as before The mine of Guadalcana lying in the countrie of Estremadura in the hilles of Sierra Morena were wont to be worth in siluer yerely gotteÌ„ out of the same 187 Q. 000 V 000 but what it now amounteth vnto it is not knowne as being of late yeares much diminished All the countries of Spaine giue vnto the king yearely a certaine rent called Excercitio towardes the keeping of Slaues maintenance and making of new Galleys the summe of 7 Q 750 V 000. The rent called de la Moneda Forera which is a reÌ„t raysing of euerie Heertsteede that payeth 7. Meruedies yearely of what quality or condition soeuer it be doth amount yearely to 6 Q 656 V 000. The rent or profit that commeth yearely out of the Indies to the kinges owne coffers is the summe of 300 Q 000 V 000 The kingdomes of Valencia Arragon and Catalonia giue yearely vnto the King besides other paymentes the summe of 75 Q 000 V 000. The Ilandes of Sardinia Maiorca and Minorca yéeld the king no profit for that the rents and reuenewes of the same are alwaies imployed to the defence and maintenance of the same Ilands against the enemy and sometimes more than is receaued The kingdome of Cicilia payeth yearely vnto the king 375 Q 000 V 000. The kingdome of Naples with the couÌ„tries of Pullia and Calabria doe yéeld yearely to the king 450 Q 000 V 000. The Dukedome of Millan payeth yerely 300 Q 000 V 000. The Prouinces of the Neatherlanders or Low countries with Burgondie vsed yerely to pay vnto the King the summe of 700 Q 000 V 000. But now in these wars and troublesome times there is no account therof to be made The farme of Cardes in Spaine is yerely worth vnto the king 20 Q 000 V 000. for that euery payre of cardes sold there payeth vnto the king halfe a riall and amounteth to as it is farmed 20 Q 000 V 000. The Rashes and clothes of Florence that are brought into Spaine are worth yearely 10 Q 000 V 000. for that euerie péece of Rash payeth sixe duckats custome to the king 10 Q 000 V 000. ALl these accounts tolles customes Alcaualas tenths and third pennies impostes contributions rents demaynes and reuenewes of the King of Spaine are gathered truely collected out of his exchequers of account in his said kingdomes and without any augmentation or diminishing set downe and recorded herein as they were farmed receaued and payde in the yeare of our Lord 1578.
vpon Acornes flesh of Darts fish and oysters peacocks and other foules All their meate is broyled vpon coales making it somewhat hard by reason of the smoke and extreame heate among other meate they are verie desirous of Crocodiles flesh which sheweth very white and faire like veale but tasteth like rotten Moschus if any man be sicke in stéed of letting bloud their priests do suck the place where their paine lyeth vntil the bloud doth issue forth The women in Florida are great and verie wise and coloured like men and pinked on their bodies legges and armes putting such colour into the places that will not easily come forth but the women kind when they come first into the world are not so blacke but verie white the blacke yellowish colour is made vpon them by a certaine oyntment as the Tartarians and other heathens vse to do which oyntment they vse to make of a certaine ceremoniall oyle by them vsed Their colour likewise changeth because they go naked and with the burning heate of the sunne The women likewise are verie quicke and subtile like the women of Egypt and can swim ouer great riuers holding their children fast vnder one of their armes and will likewise climbe vppe the highest trees that are in all those countries The chiefe prouinces in Florida which the Spaniards both in the beginning and since at other times haue founde out are these first Panuca lying on the borders of Noua Spaigna discouered by Franco de Gray in An. 1518. who left many spaniards bohind him being slaine eaten and deuoured by the wild people whose skinnes being dryed they hung for a memorie and euerlasting triumph in their Iools Temples Those people are verie vnchaste and helde open stewes where by night they meete and lie together They bore holes in their noses and also in their eares to hang rings at theÌ„ they scrape their teeth to make them cleane and marrie not before they be fortie yeares of age although their daughters are deflowred at the age of ten or twelue yeeres There are in Florida other prouinces as Anauares Albardaosia Iaguasia Apalachia Autia Samouia and diuers others al obseruing one kinde of religion customes wholly without any feare of God pollicie manlinesse or reason The best and fruitfullest part of Florida bordereth on Noua Spaigna to the riuer and prouince of Panuca which riuer runneth with so great a streame into the sea that it is a verie good hauen for ships Here followeth the description of the coast of Florida forasmuch as is contained in the Carde hereunto annexed THe length of the furthest poynt of Terra di Laborador vnto the Cape of Saint Elena lying in Florida is before declared nowe shall follow that which is furder sette downe in the Carde beginning from Saint Elena which lyeth vnder 32. degrees This is a verie faire and broade riuer surpassing al others whatsoeuer in the north coastes wherefore by the Frenchmen it is called Porto Real or kingly hauen hauing found it to be tenne seadom water about this riuer there are many woods of Dakes and Ceder trées wherein are many Harts and other wilde beastes and Peacocks The mouth of the riuer is three miles broade and hath two Capes or hookes of land one stretching West the other North vppon this riuer the Frenchmen haue built a fort called Charles for t some say this riuer runneth vnto the riuer Iordan and so into the other sea Betwéene both these hookes of lande in the mouth of the Riuer there lieth a fayre Island full of trees from Saint Elena to Rio Secco is fortie Spanish miles whereof seuentéene and a halfe make a degree and this Riuer lieth vnder 31. degrees from Rio Secco to Santa Cioce and from thence to the point of Cannaueral which lyeth vnder 20. degrées are forty miles Here I must pause a while follow the Frenchmens rule because this countrey was likewise discouered and also described by them So then the Frenchmen recon from Saint Elena sayling southward along the coast foure French miles where you come to the Riuer Magnus or Grandis that is the great Riuer then Guade or as it is in our Carde Guate and further Bellum or Bellus from thence to Gironda then to Garumna and so to Charenta from Charenta to Ligetim or the Loire sixe miles from Loire to Axona in the mouth whereof lyeth an Island in our Carde called Rio di S. Pero from Axona to Sequana or Seine because it was like the riuer that runneth throgh Paris vnto Roan lieth sixe miles and all these nine riuers lie within the space of sixtie French miles leauing the Seine and sailing southward by the shore you passe certaine small Riuers as Ay Serrauahi then you come to the great Riuer Maius so called by the Frenchmen that is the Riuer of May because it was found by one Landometo vpon the first day of May and is distant from Sequana or Seine 14. miles thereabout grew certaine redde and white mulberie trées vppon the highest branches whereof hung great numbers of silke wormes from this riuer you come to a gulfe that reacheth somewhat inward into the land beeing the place where Landonerius first arriued when hee sayled out of France into those countreyes and there hee saw in the mouth of a certaine riuer many sea Swine or Dolphins wherevpon he called the same Riuer by the name of those Dolphins on the South side of the gulfe lyeth the French Cape about thirtie degrees from the line so called because the Frenchmen did first land there This Cape is not high but a flatte strand al ful of high trees and thick woods From the French Cape you come to Cannaueral another Cape fiue thirtie miles distant taking the name form the reeds that grow thereon The Spaniards and also our Carde doo not set downe many of these Riuers and the greatest parte of them that are described are altered in their names for the Riuer of May by them is called Maranca the Seine Saint Augustin the Gaâ—â—mna S. Matheo the great riuer S. Pero From Cannauerâ—l to the cape of Florida are fortie miles and betweene these two Capes lie many flats The cape of Florida lyeth vnder fiue and twentie degrees and before it lie many cliffes which they name Martires or Maâ—tiâ—s and on the other sides litle Islands called Testudines that is Torteaux because they are in forme like those kindes of beasts The Cape of Florida is in breadth twentie miles and from thence to Ancon Bâ—xo are 100. miles and lieth fifty miles east and west from Rio Secco which is the breadth of Florida The description of some Islands that lie ouer against the coast of Florida FIrst you most note that the whole coast of Florida is ful of Islands cliffes banks flattes and such like dangerous places and as touching the Islandes they are at the least foure hundreth in number besides the great Island called Lucaâ—ae that giueth the name to al